THE LIBRARY 
 
 OF 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY 
 OF CALIFORNIA 
 
 LOS ANGELES
 
 THE 
 
 * 
 
 HOLOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 BY 
 
 IOU OF "A SYSTEM OF PHOXOSCRIPT AND PHOXOTYPY," ETC. 
 
 CHICAGO: 
 THE MORRELL VE. 
 
 1901.
 
 Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1901, by 
 
 CHARLES MORRELL, 
 In the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington, D. C. 
 
 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 PREFACE 5 
 
 I NTRODUCTION 11 
 
 PROLOGUE 23 
 
 THE ELEMENTARY STYLE. 
 
 CHAPTER 
 
 I. The Consonants and Breathings 29 
 
 II. The Vowels, Semivowels, Etc 39 
 
 III. Circles and Loops. Initials of Proper Names. Punctuation 
 
 and Other Murks 60 
 
 IV. Hooks, Etc 79 
 
 V. Downward and Upward R, L and Sh 98 
 
 VI. The Halving and Lengthening Principles 102 
 
 VII. Prefixes, Affixes, Etc 116 
 
 Elementary Style Reading Lessons and Exercises 133 
 
 Elementary Style Writing Lessons and Exercises 171 
 
 THE REPORTING STYLE. 
 
 VIII. Omission of Vowels and Diphthongs. The Vowel Scale and 
 
 Position. Logographs and Seinigraphs 207 
 
 IX. Words Other than Logographs and Semigraphs. Homographs, 
 
 Variagraphs. Voeagraphs, Brevigraphs and Vocabulary 230 
 
 X. Phraseography 344 
 
 XI. Various Expedients 419 
 
 XII. Significant Marks, Etc. Reporting Trials, Hearings, Etc 434 
 
 Reporting Exercises 441 
 
 Reporting Style Reading Exercises 443 
 
 Reporting Style Writing Exercises 463 
 
 Directions for Attaining Speed 484 
 
 Stenotypic Connected Matter 485 
 
 Index 487 
 
 3
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 The new work on phonography here presented is the 
 result of recent discoveries in phonetics. When the 
 author first began the study of Greek, he was im- 
 pressed with the peculiarity of the representation of 
 the spiritus or breathings. He also observed that 
 while the aspirate or rough breathing (spiritus asper, 
 Trvevfjia Saa-v) was stated to be equivalent in pronunci- 
 ation to the English II, either no explanation of the 
 other, the lene or smooth breathing (spiritus lenis, 
 Trveu/j-a i/rtXoV) was given or a very indefinite one. In 
 the early part of the year 1884 he began the prepara- 
 tion of a system of connective vowel phonography 
 which was in due course published in the year 1890 
 under the title of "A System of Phonic Writing. " 
 
 ' O 
 
 While engaged on this work and in the study of phonet- 
 ics in its application to the practice of phonography 
 he made the discovery of the nature of the lene and 
 aspirate and their relation to each other. At once the 
 beauty and philosophy of the Greek representation of 
 the breathings became apparent and the mystery per- 
 taining to them which had hitherto baffled modern 
 scholarship was solved and a means obtained by which 
 all the ancient alphabets might be interpreted. The 
 author believes he is the first to make this discovery, 
 w T hich is explained hereafter and was first published in 
 the "System of Phonic Writing" above mentioned. 
 
 In this work also was published the pairing of the 
 vowel sounds as short and long according to the Eng- 
 lish instead of the continental method which up to that 
 time had been followed by all works on phonetics.
 
 (3 PREFACE. 
 
 The author has since adhered to this method although 
 for a long time he had no authority for so doing except 
 his disbelief in the scientific correctness of the other. 
 Eventually, however, while perfecting the "System of 
 Phonoscript and Phonotypy" mentioned in the Intro- 
 duction following, he made the discovery, explained 
 in that treatise, of the positions of vowel approx- 
 imation and thus was enabled to demonstrate the cor- 
 rectness of his pairing of the vowel sounds by the 
 physiological method. The English method is accord- 
 ingly considered as phonetically established and is 
 therefore also followed in the present volume and will 
 be found to lend additional legibility to phonography 
 besides rendering it more acceptable and easy of ac- 
 quisition by English writers and readers. 
 
 In the present work the vowels are represented by 
 small semicircles and dashes instead of dots and dashes 
 as in other works on phonography which method was 
 inaugurated to a certain extent in the "System of 
 Phonic Writing" above mentioned. In consequence 
 each vowel has a different form and therefore does not 
 depend upon its position either to the line of writing 
 or to the stem letter to distinguish it, but may be 
 written anywhere in respect to either. Vowel repre- 
 sentation and vocalization are thus rendered simple 
 instead of complex. Again, the discovery of the 
 nature of the breathings led also to the discovery of 
 that of the consonants and vowels as smooth and rough 
 while the method of representing the vowels by small 
 semicircles and dashes made it possible to dispense 
 altogether with stem letters for the lene and aspirate- 
 analogously to the (latter) Greek representation and 
 to indicate them respectively by leaving unshaded or 
 by shading the initial parts of vowels when the latter 
 occur alone and in other cases by light and heavy dots 
 and dashes, as explained hereafter in the text, thus
 
 PREFACE. 7 
 
 solving the aspirate problem of phonography and at 
 the same time increasing its speed. Another feature 
 of the present work which adds to the legibility of 
 phonography is that downward li and L are never em- 
 ployed initially or when they would be the first stems 
 in words, but if used at all are written only medially 
 or finally. They thus never conflict with the same 
 forms for W and Y when the latter are the first stems 
 in words. Furthermore, the small semicircles for AY 
 and Y are abolished, being employed for vowels as 
 explained above. In lieu of them are substituted the 
 small angular characters hitherto mostly used for diph- 
 thongs, thus practically adding four new letters to 
 phonography and thereby still further increasing its 
 power and legibility. 
 
 There are many other improvements of phonography 
 in the following pages besides the above which are 
 original with the author but which need not be here 
 specified. The system of stenotypy also is an improve- 
 ment and believed to be the best thus far published. 
 By the use of this art much engraving of phono- 
 graphic characters for illustrative purposes in the body 
 of text books can be dispensed with. It is also much 
 more preferable for dictionaries than the engraved 
 forms since the latter sometimes become blurred or 
 are otherwise faulty. Finally, the arrangement of the 
 various subjects of the book, each complete in a 
 separate chapter, presents advantages for easily and 
 thoroughly mastering phonography not previously 
 attained. 
 
 Much has been said, pro and con, on the phono- 
 graphic vowel scales known as the ' ' old " and the 
 "new.'* When phonography was first published by 
 Isnno Pitman, in 1837, he took the scale of vowel 
 sounds from Walker's "Principles of Pronunciation" 
 prefixed to his dictionary. This scale, called the old, 
 was used in phonography up till 1858. In March of
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 that year the order of the first and third place vowels 
 r- and ;i was inverted thus bringing into existence the 
 new vowel scale, which was then adopted by Mr. Pit- 
 man and has since been used in his works. Most 
 phonographers and phonographic authors, however, 
 refused, and still refuse, to adopt the new scale. The 
 following groupings represent the scales in contrast 
 with each other. It will be observed that the new 
 differs from the old only in the transposition of the 
 first and third place vowels e and ii. 
 
 OLD SCALE. NEW SCALE.' 
 
 
 
 u 
 
 The old is preferred in this work for the reason 
 that in it more words are written in the first position 
 than in either the second or third and consequently a 
 higher degree of speed can be attained than in the new 
 scale where many more words are written in the third 
 position than in either of the other two. Another 
 reason for preferring the old scale is that in the new 
 or inverted one, too many words of allied sound are 
 written in the same position. This requires them to 
 be so frequently distinguished by vocalization as to 
 seriously retard the speed of the writing. On the 
 other hand in the old scale a greater number of unlike, 
 that is, unallied, sounds are placed in the same position 
 and thus vocalization is generally rendered unnecessary. 
 
 In preparing this work the author has examined all 
 the English and American books and periodicals access- 
 ible, both stenographic and phonographic, many of 
 which are out of print. A few of these, as "The 
 Phonographic Class Book," by Andrews and Boyle, and 
 "The Phonographic Instructor, " by James C. Booth, 
 have, in some respects, never been surpassed Among 
 other works and treatises on phonetics, consulted or
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 read in full, the following are worthy of special men- 
 tion: "A Hand Book of the English Language" and 
 "A Defense of Phonetic Spelling," by Dr. K. G. 
 Latham. Also the General Introduction to Storrs and 
 Smaliey's "American Phonetic Dictionary," by Dr. A. 
 J. Ellis, and numerous tracts and pamphlets published 
 by Mr. Isaac Pitman.
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 THE SPIR1TI, OR BREATHINGS. 
 
 The sounds, whether whispered or vocal, of every 
 language are produced by the breath passing through 
 the sounding, vowel and articulating organisms, situ- 
 ated in the throat and mouth. A sound can not be 
 made without breath. The breath is of two degrees, 
 either light or heavy, and is called smooth or rough. 
 These are also called Spiriti,* or Breathings. The 
 Romans called the one Spiritus Lenis, which means 
 soft or smooth breath, and the other Spiritus Asper, 
 which means rough breath. The light or smooth 
 breath, spiritus lenis, is the breath we breathe every 
 instant of our lives, sleeping or waking, and which is 
 necessary for our existence. The heavy or rough breath, 
 spiritus asper, is the smooth breath, spiritus lenis, 
 made heavy or rough. Sounds are also of two 
 degrees or kinds, either smooth or rough. A smooth 
 sound is produced by the smooth and a rough sound by 
 the rough breath passing through the sounding 
 organism. 
 
 The Greeks, in their latest alphabet, had no letter 
 to represent either of these breathings, but indicated 
 them by two different marks, one of which was placed 
 over every vowel letter that began a word. The 
 
 *The term "spiriti'' is used to indicate the plural in prefer- 
 ence to the classical one "spiritus. '
 
 . ., INTRODUCTION'. 
 
 Romans had no marks for these breathings, hut rep- 
 resented one of them, the spiritus asper, or rough 
 breath, b,' the letter h. The other the spiritus lenis, 
 they left" out of their alphabet altogether. In the 
 Latin lanrua:ro it had no mark or letter of any 
 kind to indicate its existence, the vowel letter itself 
 without a mark standing for the sound produced 
 by the smooth breathing. The Moderns adopted 
 the alphabet of the Romans, and, accordingly, we 
 have only one breath letter, that of the spiritus 
 r, or rough breath, which is the letter h, and 
 nothing to indicate the existence of the other, it.-: 
 corresponding smooth breath. This has been the 
 cause of great confusion, for the letter h has thus 
 been . considered a consonant, which it is not. 
 Neither is it a vowel or sonant; it simply stands 
 for the rough breath. The Greeks, therefore, 
 considered the vowel letters as representing the differ- 
 ent sounds, and the smooth and the rough marks a-; 
 representing the breath, both smooth and rough which 
 created those sounds. The Romans considered the 
 vowel letters as representing the different sounds, and 
 the letter h not as creating, but as simply making the 
 sound rough. The Greek alphabet was, perhaps, the 
 more philosophic of the two, though the Roman was 
 the more practicable and legible. 
 
 This rough or smooth ?jreathtng is the connecting 
 link, or power, between the consonants and sonants, 
 for the consonants could not accompany the sonants if 
 there was no breath. Again, no language can bo 
 properly represented that does not have a sign for 
 each of these spiriti, or breathings. Also, botlrshould 
 bo 1-3 presented or both not. The smooth breathing is 
 a* much of an existence as thorough. To represent 
 one and not the other is liable to lead to errors in 
 language and in the interpretation of alphabets, or 
 else prevent them from being understood,; for wo can
 
 IXTUOD17CTIOM. };; 
 
 not understand any alphabet unless we can perceive 
 the reason of its formation. 
 
 Were the alphabet to be represented in a manner 
 similar to that of the Greeks (which should not 
 be done), tho spiritin lenis, or smooth breathing 
 before the first letter "a" in the word "aha", 
 would have a sign or letter to represent it as the 
 spiritus asper or rough breathing before the third 
 letter "a" has a sign to represent it, which is the 
 letter "h". The Greeks held, and they were 
 correct from their standpoint and also as far as 
 they went, that the breathing, either smooth or 
 rough, and not the vowel commenced the word 
 and accordingly should be represented. That no 
 word, strictly speaking, commenced with a vowel and 
 could not, but that every word began with either a 
 breathing smooth or rough or a consonant. Hence 
 the mirks for the smooth and rough breathings over 
 the first vowels of all words that did not commence 
 with a consonant. 
 
 Although the smooth breathing exists, it is not 
 ordinarily noticeable to the ear in vocal speech any 
 more than is the wind which makes the voice through 
 a trumpet. We know that the wind or breath makes 
 the voice, but we hear the voice, not the breath. The 
 same reasoning applies to a steam whistle. This wind, 
 breath or steam that we do not hear in the voice of 
 this class of instruments corresponds to the 'spiritus 
 lenis or smooth breath that makes the smooth voice 
 through the human sonant organism and the latter 
 corresponds to the trumpet, whistle or other instru- 
 ment. 
 
 In the system of phonography in this book the 
 breathing and vowel sounding organism are practically 
 considered together and unseparated, because one can 
 not exist in speech without the other. The smooth or 
 light sounds produced, therefore, are represented by
 
 14 IN'THOin-OTlON. 
 
 smooth or light characters, and the rough or heavy 
 sounds by rough or heavy characters. 
 
 The name of the smooth breath letter -f- is Aitch 
 (that is to say -f- aitch); that of the rough breath letter 
 H is Haitch. The sound of the former is a smooth 
 breath .sound only,* that of the latter is a rough breath 
 sound only, neither of which is sonant. 
 
 PHONOGRAPHY. 
 
 Phonography is a system of shorthand based strictly 
 on the sounds of language and intended to attain the 
 swiftness of rapid speech. Accordingly, the letters of 
 its alphabet are written with the simplest characters 
 possible. These are obtained from geometry and con- 
 sist fundamentally of a straight and a curved line and 
 a dot, each of which is formed with only a single motion 
 of the pen. The manner in which they are used is 
 explained in the following. 
 
 There are only two primary courses by which we can 
 go from a first point to a second one ; namely, by a 
 straight line and a curve. The straight line we can not 
 vary, but we can the curve, by starting from the first 
 point and proceeding on either side of the straight line 
 to the second point. This gives us three ways only of 
 going from a first to a second point ; namely, by 
 a straight line and two curves. The same is the case 
 in writing. Now each of these lines can be made only 
 in five different directions to or from the same point, 
 practicable for the hand in writing. We thus have 
 fifteen directions in all, and as each form and direction 
 can be readily distinguished apart and accordingly used 
 
 *The smooth breathing is not silent. It can be heard by 
 lengthening it out before it strikes the whispering or vocal 
 sonant organism, the same as in pronouncing the syllable 
 "ha", the "h" can be lengthened out before it strikes the 
 whispered or vocal "a". Both breathings may also be distinctly 
 heard by pronouncing the syllables "+ a" and "ha" and drawing 
 the breath inwardlj'.
 
 INTRODUCTION* J5 
 
 for a letter we thus have fifteen letters, which are 
 known as the light stem letters of phonography. 
 
 The different directions in which the three strokes 
 above described are written are obtained from the 
 angles at which they stand in the following diagrams. 
 It will be seen that the straight strokes are radii and 
 the curved ones portions of circumferences of the 
 circle. 
 
 In the first diagram the circumference of the circle 
 is divided by two diameters into four equal parts. Each 
 of the latter is, therefore, called a quadrant or quarter 
 circumference, or, loosely, a quarter circle. Every 
 pair of semi-diameters encloses an angle of ninety de- 
 grees from the horizontal, consequently the quadrants 
 slope at an angle of forty-five degrees from it. In the 
 second diagram the diameters are made at a different 
 angle from those of the first, namely, forty-five degrees 
 from the horizontal, consequently the quadrants are 
 either horizontal or perpendicular. In the third dia- 
 gram only the halves of the diameters for convenience 
 the first halves are used. The second halves are not 
 needed since they are simply continuations of the first 
 ones. In practical writing the quadrants are reduced 
 in length till they become arcs of the chords repre- 
 sented by the similarly inclined radii or halved diam- 
 eters. 
 
 in the fourth diagram only one diameter is used, but 
 at an angle different from any of the others ; namely, 
 thirty degrees from the horizontal. By measuring 
 up or down from the horizontal fifteen degrees (or 
 from the diameter forty-five degrees) and drawing 
 through these points two lines parallel with the dia- 
 meter, two more quadrants of the circumference are
 
 n; 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 obtained which, when reduced in practical writing, be- 
 come arcs of the chord represented by one-half the 
 diameter. These with the radius, or one-half the 
 diameter for convenience the last half slope, of 
 course, the same as the whole diameter ; namely, at 
 thirty degrees from the horizontal. 
 
 The first three diagrams contain twelve and the last 
 diagram three stems, or fifteen altogether, which are 
 all the light ones that are used in phonography. Each 
 of these may be shaded, making thirty. In the present 
 system, however, two of the upward stems are left 
 unshaded ; namely, the upper curve and the straight 
 stroke in the last diagram. 
 
 It will be observed that tne strokes in the third dia- 
 gram all end at the same point. If the circumference 
 were to be divided into more than four equal parts 
 for instance by using four diameters, thus creating eight 
 radii and their corresponding arcs the letters would 
 be at so nearly the same angle as not to be readily 
 distinguishable from one another, as will be evident if 
 an additional stroke is put between the horizontal and 
 perpendicular ones, all four strokes being placed at 
 equal distances apart. It has been found, however, 
 from experience that the stems inclined downward to 
 the left and upward to the right may be thus arranged 
 and still be legible. This happens because the former 
 are usually written at an angle of sixty and the latter 
 frequently at one of thirty degrees, thus presenting a 
 strong contrast to each other and also because they are 
 traced in different directions, so that when joined to 
 other stems their identity is apparent without regard 
 to their inclination. 
 
 The breathings are represented by dots, while the 
 vowels are indicated by dashes and small semicircles on 
 the same principle as the stem letters. All are ex- 
 hibited in the phonographic alphabet, or peebeta, 
 following.
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 17 
 
 From the precc.Ung the learner will percoivo that 
 the difference between shorthand and script or print 
 arises from the fact that script or printed letters can 
 all he made at the same angle because they are differ- 
 ent in form; whereas shorthand letters must be made 
 at different angles because they are similar in form. 
 
 T 
 
 I) 
 K 
 
 G 
 
 S 
 
 z 
 
 It 
 
 L 
 
 w 
 
 Y 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC ALPHABET. 
 
 CONSONANTS. 
 
 SMOOTH. 
 
 ROUGH. 
 
 \ as in peep 
 
 F V. 
 
 as in fief 
 
 " babe / 
 
 V ^ 
 
 ' ' valve 
 
 1 " taught 
 
 Th ( 
 
 " thirtieth 
 
 ' deed 
 
 Dh ( 
 
 " thither 
 
 " kick 
 
 Ch / 
 
 . " church 
 
 " idff 
 
 o O 
 
 J / 
 
 " judge 
 
 ) ' ' sauce 
 
 sh y 
 
 . " she 
 
 ) " /ones 
 
 Zh J 
 
 " vision 
 
 ^-- " mum 
 
 
 
 - " nun 
 
 
 
 ^s " rinjr 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 up " roar 
 
 
 
 UP " lull 
 
 
 
 A " we 
 
 
 
 f C . v /i 
 

 
 18 IXTHOULCnoX. 
 
 BREATHINGS. 
 
 as in 4-0 j H . as in he 
 
 VOWELS. 
 
 mon. 
 
 is c ell u Uz 
 
 eyes c eel u ooze 
 
 LOW. 
 
 \ ask _ at i odd 
 v art ate I ode 
 
 DIPHTHONGS. 
 
 h out / oil y Cruickshank 
 
 REMARKS OX THE ALPHABET. 
 
 The learner should first endeavor to understand the 
 alphabet (or peebeta) before he v proceeds to learn it by 
 heart or write it. Most of the sounds of human speech 
 are very much alike; thus, P is like B, T is like D, etc., 
 except that B is a heavier sound than P, and D heavier 
 than T. Now,, these and all other sounds in language 
 which are alike, are paired and represented by signs 
 which are alike and paired, as will be seen in the pre- 
 ceding alphabet. There are eight pairs of consonants, 
 four smooth and four rough, commencing with P B 
 and ending w r ith Sh Zh. These consonant pairs are so 
 similar in sound that frequently one sound can be used 
 for the other in speaking, without mistaking which 
 was intended. Therefore, in the phonographic alpha- 
 bet a similar sign has been chosen for each, the light 
 stroke representing the light and the heavy stroke the 
 heavy sound, either of which strokes, like their 
 sounds, as said above, can frequently be used for the 
 other and in swift writing it often happens that the 
 light stroke alone is used, for the reason that the hand 
 does not always take time to shade the heavy letters; 
 but no mistake thereby arises, because the letters rep-
 
 INTRODUCTION. 19 
 
 resent sounds that are almost identical. This is the 
 case also with the breathings. Consequently, all the 
 writing could be made with light strokes and yet be 
 almost as legible as when both light and shaded ones 
 are used. It would also remain legible if shaded let- 
 ters were used throughout. The learner is instructed, 
 however, to use both the light and the shaded strokes, 
 but if he makes either exclusively, he should employ 
 the light rather than the shaded ones, because the 
 former are much more swiftly made than the latter. 
 Again, sounds which are allied are mostly made in the 
 same direction; thus F takes the direction of P, Th 
 that of T, N of M, etc. Also each letter of each group 
 is placed in the order of its utterance from the lips to 
 the throat in what is termed the phonetic order. This 
 can be very plainly seen in the case of the rough let- 
 ters beginning with F and ending with Zh. The learner 
 is also informed that each letter of the above alphabet 
 stands for one sound and no more. 
 
 As to the vowels it will be observed that they are 
 divided into two groups of High and Low, the upper 
 line of each representing what are usually known as 
 the short, and the lower one the long vowels. The 
 upper and lower lines of each group are also arranged 
 in phonetic order. Furthermore, the short vowels are 
 represented by light characters and the long vowels by 
 similar ones shaded at the end. Also the high vowels 
 are represented by semicircles and the low ones by 
 dashes. The diphthongs are simply combinations of 
 the vowels of which they are composed as will be here- 
 after more fully explained. 
 
 ORGANIC CLASSIFICATION OF THE SOUNDS 
 OF THE ALPHABET. 
 
 The sounds of the alphabet arc classified according 
 to the organs which form them, as follows:
 
 I'll INTKODrCTIOX. 
 
 1. Explodente. P, 13, T, D, K, G, Ch, J are called 
 explodents because they are produced by exploding 
 the breath through the organs of speech previously ia 
 total contact; and being quicker, more direct and 
 abrupt than the other sounds of the alphabet, are best 
 represented by straight lines whoso formation is of the 
 same nature. All the other sounds being more flow- 
 ing in their utterance are best represented by curved 
 or flowing lines, except R which has assigned to it the 
 remaining straight upward letter. 
 
 2. Continuants. F, V, Th, Dh, S, Z, Sh, Zh are 
 called continuants since their sounds may be continued 
 any length of time. They are produced by bringing 
 one organ of speech close to another but not in con- 
 tact with it and then emitting the breath between 
 them. 
 
 3. Nasals. M, X and Ng are called nasals since they 
 are produced by sending the breath through the nose, 
 the organs of speech previously being in total contact. 
 
 4. Liquids. R and L are called liquids from the 
 fact that they flow into or unite with the other sounds. 
 R, like the continuants, is produced by b ringing one 
 organ of speech close to another, but not in contact 
 with it and then omitting the breath between them. L 
 is produced by a partial contact of the organs of 
 speech and then, while this contact is maintained, 
 expelling the breath 
 
 a. The above are what are called the articulated 
 sounds of the alphabet, or consonants. Four more 
 sounds remain, two of w r hich, W and Y, are only par- 
 tially or semi articulated and hence are known as semi- 
 consonants. They are also known as semi vowels. The 
 other two sounds, -f- and its rough mate H, are not 
 articulated. Therefore these are called the unarticu- 
 lated or free breathings, or simply the breathings. 
 
 5. Coalescents. W and Y are used only before 
 vowels as in "we, ye." They are called coalescents
 
 INTRODUCTIOX. 
 
 bec;!viS3 they closely coalesce with them. \V and Y 
 have a medial character between the consonants and 
 vo \vels; W consisting partly of a sound resembling 
 tho short vowel u and Y partly of one resembling the 
 short vowel i. Thus "way, you" are, as it were, 
 'u( w )ay, i(y)ou."' For this reason they are also called 
 semivowels. W and Y are thus always preceded by 
 either the smooth or the rough breathing, as in "way, 
 yon, whey, hue (hwey, hyue)," the theoretical spelling 
 of which is '<+ way [+u(w)ay], + you [ + i(y)ou], hwey 
 [hufwjeyj, hyue [hi(y)ue]." In practical spelling in 
 script and print the + or smooth breathing is omitted 
 the same as it is in words commencing with a vowel. 
 
 (3. Breathings. The smooth and rough breathings, 
 called the lene and aspirate, are not articulated and 
 have already been explained. (See page 11.) 
 
 7. Vowels. The vowels are produced by approx- 
 imations of the organs of speech and, like the breath- 
 ings, are not articulated. 
 
 The following arrangement exhibits the classifica- 
 tion of the sounds of the alphabet both according to 
 their nature or quality and mode of formation. It 
 will be observed that the latter consists of three di- 
 visions termed Labials, Linguals and Gutterals. F 
 V and Th Dh are also sometimes called Dentals, or if 
 great precision is desired, Labio-Dentals and Linguo- 
 Dentals. Furthermore, the linguals (except Th and 
 Dh i are often designated Palatals, the front and middle 
 ones being produced by the hard and the back ones by 
 the soft palate. Again, Ch and J are theoretically 
 considered as compound sounds composed respectively 
 of TSh and DZh, though practically they are deemed 
 single sounds and therefore represented with single 
 characters. For the theory of the vowel arrangement 
 the learner is referred to the author's "System of 
 Phonoscript and Phonotypy" mentioned on page 28 
 hereafter.
 
 INTRODUCTION*. 
 
 
 Labi- 
 als. 
 
 Linguals. 
 
 Gut- 
 terals 
 
 Front 
 
 Middle 
 
 Buck 
 
 1. Explodents -i 
 ', Heavy 
 
 P 
 B 
 
 T 
 D 
 
 Ch 
 
 J 
 
 K 
 Q 
 
 
 2. Continuants \ * e 
 ; Heavy 
 
 F 
 V 
 
 Th S 
 Dh Z 
 
 Sh 
 Zh 
 
 
 
 3. Nasals 
 
 M 
 
 N 
 
 
 Kg 
 
 
 4. Liquids 
 
 
 L 
 
 R 
 
 
 
 5. Coalescents 
 
 W 
 
 Y 
 
 
 
 
 6. Breathings f^ en . e 
 j Aspirate 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 7. Vowels |? igh 
 
 i Low 
 
 
 i I 
 
 ii a 
 
 e e 
 a a 
 
 u u 
 
 

 
 PROLOGUE. 
 
 LESSONS AND EXERCISES. 
 
 The engraved lessons and exercises illustrating the 
 text of the Elementary Style begin after the latter on 
 page 133 and are followed by a printed key commenc- 
 ing on page 171. The former are called Reading 
 Lessons and Exercises and are intended to be read and 
 copied, while the latter are designated Writing Les- 
 sons and Exercises and are intended to be written from 
 memory. By having the engravings thus grouped 
 together they can be mastered and referred to, as a 
 whole, much better than if they were scattered 
 throughout the book. The figures and letters in heavy 
 face type at the beginning of the paragraphs of the 
 text refer to the corresponding characters of the 
 engravings. After the exercises of the Elementary 
 Style, the Reporting Style commences followed by 
 reading exercises and a key in the same manner as 
 those of the Elementary Style. 
 
 STENOSCRIPT AND STENOTYPY. 
 
 Stenoscript and Stenotypy are methods of repre- 
 senting phonography by ordinary script or printed 
 letters, one or more being employed for each phono- 
 graph. When thus used the names of the script or 
 printed character or combination and that of its cor- 
 responding phonograph are the same. All the conso- 
 nant stems and the two breath dots are represented by 
 large capitals or by these and body letters combined. 
 All other phonographic characters, as will hereafter 
 
 28
 
 PRO:.; 
 
 appear, are usually represented by regular or italic 
 body letters and, occasionally by small capitals. The 
 following are the stenotypes or stenotypic combina- 
 tions for the phonographic stems. It will be seen that 
 with the exception of the fifth in the second line they 
 are the same as the characters already given in the 
 alphabet on page 17 
 
 P, B, T, D, K, G, S, Z, M, N, Ng, R, L, W, Y. 
 F,V,Th,Dh,C,J,Sh,Zh. 
 
 In stenoscript and stenotypy Ch is represented by C. 
 
 In this -system a phonograph is usually represented 
 by its stenoscript or stenotypic character or combina- 
 tion and not by its name; thus, T or Th and not Tee 
 or Thee. 
 
 As the name of each script or printed combination 
 is the same as its phonograph (see the first paragraph 
 above) the former when it occurs in stenoscript or 
 stenotypy, is read by its name and not by its compo- 
 nent parts. Thus Th or Dh is read Thee or Dhee and 
 not Tee Haitch or Dee Haitch. 
 
 In the following pages the phonographs and their 
 stenotypic representation are usually given together. 
 Also whatever remarks apply to stenotypy generally 
 apply to stenoscript. 
 
 MATERIALS FOR WRITING. 
 
 Shorthand, like longhand, should ordinarily be 
 written on ruled paper, though paper that is unruled 
 may be employed if the other is not at hand. The 
 paper, whether ruled or unruled, should generally 
 have a "margin on the left of about one-half to three- 
 fourths of an inch. If no marginal line exists the 
 learner may draw one either with a ruler or off-hand 
 or confine his writing to these limits, or legal cap, 
 cic., may be used. Notes or corrections in regard to 
 anything in the text may then be made or indicated in
 
 PROLOGUE. 
 
 the margin opposite a short vertical line, if no mar- 
 ginal one exists, being drawn between the two. The 
 same course may be pursued if a note-book is em- 
 ployed. 
 
 The learner may use either a pen or pencil prefer- 
 ably a pen if convenient. If a pencil is employed the 
 lead should be of medium hardness and rather small 
 diameter so as to form the outlines clearly without too 
 much sharpening. In the case of a pen any one which 
 makes a fine mark without scratching is suitable. For 
 ordinary every day writing, however, a gold pen is 
 preferable to a steel one since it is more durable and 
 does not corrode, but for very fine writing a fine 
 pointed steel pen is the best. The ink used, if it can be 
 obtained conveniently, should be jet black when put 
 on the paper and flow freely. A purple or violet ink 
 may also be employed if preferred. 
 
 METHOD OF HOLDING THE PEN OR PENCIL. 
 
 > 
 
 The learner can hold the pen or pencil in whatever 
 way is most convenient consistent with accuracy, speed 
 and ease and change from one way to another if the 
 hand or wrist becomes fatigued, but he should always 
 hold it lightly so that (in the case of the pen) the nib 
 may be readily turned to strike the characters in any 
 direction that may be necessary. Finally neither the 
 pen nor pencil should be lifted up too high between 
 words, but only enough for convenience or to clear 
 the paper, otherwise much time will be unnecessarily 
 lost. 
 
 DIRECTIONS FOR LEARNING THE LESSONS 
 AND EXERCISES. 
 
 After the learner has read arid comprehended tho 
 first lesson as given in the text and engraving, he should 
 read tho latter and then proceed to copy it, making tho
 
 2C PnOLOGL'E. 
 
 stems as nearly as possible of the same length ::> tho 
 engraved ones which throughout this book, is one- 
 eighth of an inch between the ends of simple perpendi- 
 cular stems. This size is the standard one for this 
 system. Some phonographers, however, employ a 
 larger size making the stems as above about five thirty- 
 seconds or three-sixteenths of an inch and a few much 
 larger. The shaded letters should not be made too heavy, 
 but simply heavy enough to distinguish them from the 
 light ones. The learner must not write very fast :il 
 first. Speed will come of itself when least expected. 
 
 The stems sloping downward to the right when 
 occurring alone or initially are written at an angle of 
 forty -five degrees from the horizontal and those down- 
 ward to the left at one of sixty degrees. Sometimes, 
 however, when they occur medially or finally the 
 former are written at thirty and the latter at forty-five 
 degrees. Of the stems sloping upward to the right 
 R and L when they occur alone are written at thirty 
 and in other cases usually at forty-five degrees, except 
 that R before M and after N, or L before R joined 
 to M is made at thirty degrees. Upward Sh, which 
 never occurs alone, as will be hereafter explained, is 
 usually written at forty-five degrees, except when it 
 occurs before R followed by M, when it is written at 
 thirty degrees. All the remaining letters are made 
 either perpendicularly or horizontally. 
 
 The above is the general rule for the angles of the 
 stems. Frequently, however, in rapid or careless writ- 
 ing they vary more or less from the true angles, but 
 not enough to affect their legibility. 
 
 If preferred the downward letters to the left may 
 always be written at sixty and the up ward ones at thirty 
 degrees, making the single length upward stems a little 
 longer than usual before single length downward ones 
 so that the latter may be made their full length and at 
 the same time rest on the line.
 
 PROLOGUE. 27 
 
 When the learner has mastered the letters of the first 
 engraved lesson as directed above he may write them 
 from memory, using the printed lesson or key of the 
 Writing Exercises. He should first write and re-write 
 the latter until the phonographic characters can be 
 formed with accuracy and ease. He should then read 
 the shorthand thus made and carefully compare it with 
 the corresponding matter of the engraving. 
 
 After having mastered the first engraved and printed 
 lessons as above directed the learner should next master 
 in the same way the first engraved and printed exer- 
 cises which follow them. The same process should be 
 gone through with for every subsequent lesson and 
 exercise in the book; the lessons always being learned 
 first. 
 
 Finally the learner should be careful to note the 
 forms of the words in each lesson and exercise and fix 
 them thoroughly in his memory, since with but very 
 few exceptions (which will give him no trouble) they 
 are all employed in reporting. 
 
 IS^T" If he desires the learner may make a copy of 
 the engraved lessons with their marginal figures and 
 letters for speedy reference in review. For which 
 purpose either separate sheets of paper or a note-book 
 may be employed. 
 
 PHONETIC SPELLING. 
 
 In phonography most words are spelled phonetically, 
 that is according to sound. Thus each letter has one 
 sound and no more the same as the notes in music 
 and is never silent. Accordingly no more letters are 
 employed in a word than there are sounds. Words, 
 therefore, are spelled exactly as they are pronounced; 
 as, for example, "can" and "cent" which are spelled 
 "kan" and "sent." 
 
 The learner is recommended to procure the author's
 
 PROLOGUE. 
 
 "System of Phonoscript and Phonotypy" containing 
 the phonoscript and phonotypic alphabets ^ which, as 
 they very closely resemble the ordinary ones (from the 
 fact that they contain nearly all of the old letters) will 
 enable him in a few hours to write and read phonetic- 
 ally with the same facility as in the ordinary script and 
 print. This accomplishment will greatly assist him in 
 mastering phonography, since the spelling in the latter 
 and in 'phonoscript and phonotypy is mostly the same. 
 
 THE LEGIBILITY OF PRINT, SCRIPT AND 
 PHONOGRAPHY. 
 
 When uncial, cursive and single line writing in 
 other words print, script and phonography are equally 
 well executed their legibility is in the order given; the 
 reason for which is that their speed is in the reverse 
 order While, therefore, phonography, considered as 
 a system of shorthand is very legible, it is not so much 
 so as script, and, consequently, as print.
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL 
 
 THE ELEMENTARY STYLE. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 THE CONSONANTS AND BREATHINGS. 
 
 LESSON 1. 
 THE CONSONANTS. 
 
 THE SMOOTH CONSONANTS. 
 
 1. There are fifteen articulated smooth breathings 
 or smooth consonants in the English language repre- 
 sented in roman print as follows ; namely, P, B, T, D, 
 K, G, S, Z, M, N, Ng, R, L, W, Y. They are repre- 
 sented in phonography by straight and curved lines 
 the latter being quarter circles- as in the engraving, 
 page 133, line 1 and in the alphabet, or peebeta, page 
 17. The names of the phonographs or stems are 
 respectively Pee, Bee, Tee, Dee, Kee, Gee (or Kay, 
 Gay), See (or Ess), Zee, Mee, Nee, Eeng (or Em, En, 
 Eng), Ilee, Lee, Wee, Yee. The characters for the 
 heavy sounds are shaded those for B, D and G through- 
 out and that for Z in the middle, tapering at each end." 
 The phonograph for the palatal nazal Ng is also shaded 
 in the middle the same as that for Z. The phono- 
 graphs for li and L are made upward.
 
 .'JO THE PHONOGRAPH If MAXL'AT.. 
 
 THK HOUGH CONSONANTS. 
 
 2. Each of the articulated smooth breathings, or con- 
 sonants, P, B, T, D, K, G, 8, Z, eight in number, has 
 its corresponding articulated rough breathing or con- 
 sonant ; namely, F, V, Th, Dh, Ch, J, Sh, Zh, repre- 
 sented as in the engraving, line 2, and in the alphabet, 
 or peebeta. The names of the phonographs or stems 
 are respectively, Fee (or Ef), Vee, Thee, Dhee, Chee, 
 Jee (or Chay, Jay), Shee, Zhee. The character for the 
 heavy sound J is shaded throughout, but the characters 
 for V, Dh and Zh are shaded in the middle, tapering 
 at each end the same as that for Z. The two semi- 
 articulated smooth consonants W and Y have also their 
 corresponding semi-articulated rough breathings or 
 consonants HWand HY. The phonographs for the latter 
 are shaded from the beginning in order to represent 
 the aspirate sound and are named respectively Hwee 
 and Hyee. (See the last two phonographs in line 2). 
 
 3. In a stenoscript and stenotypy small cap H indi- 
 cates an initial shading of the phonograph of the letter 
 before which it is placed and is named Hotch, while 
 its sound is usually pronounced in the same syllable, 
 as in Hwee and Hvee (see sec. 2) which are stenotyped 
 nW and nY. 
 
 LESSOX 2. 
 
 STEMS STANDING ALONE OR JOINED. 
 
 4. When phonographic stems are written alone they 
 rest on the line, except K and G which are placed 
 slightly above so as not to be confused with it. (See 
 also lines 1 and 2). 
 
 5. In joining two or more stems the learner must 
 make one after the other without lifting the pen, 
 each following stem beginning where the preceding one 
 ends, no matter how far above or below the line the 
 writing may extend.
 
 Till-: PHONOGRAPHIC M \\IA1. 3] 
 
 P>. Iii stenoscript and slenotvpy the letters usually 
 follow one another the same as in script and print with- 
 out anything between them. Sometimes, as will 
 eventually be explained, a hyphen is placed between 
 two letters to indicate some peculiarity of the phono- 
 graphic writing usually a joining of characters that 
 are ordinarily written disjoined. 
 
 7. When a straight letter follows another in the 
 same direction the two are joined together forming a 
 double length letter. When one of them is heavy the 
 double length is shaded at the end or beginning accord- 
 ing as the heavy letter follows or precedes the light 
 one. Downward double length letters are written with 
 the first half on the line and the second half below it. 
 Upward and horizontal double length letters are made 
 on the line. (See sec. 4). 
 
 8. A horizontal letter is written on the line when 
 it is followed by an upward one and (a) above the line 
 when followed by a downward one so that the latter 
 may rest on the line. 
 
 1. The learner will perceive in the course of his 
 progress that the stems sometimes vary in length or 
 curvature, or both, in order to keep them on the line 
 or to facilitate joining. 
 
 9. When one horizontal letter is followed by 
 another both rest on the line (except KX or NK where 
 only the N can be so written) unless (a) the second is 
 followed by a downward one, in which case both the 
 first and second are made above the line. The same 
 principle is followed when three or more horizontal 
 letters precede a downward stem. 
 
 1 0. When a downward letter commences a word or 
 combination of letters it rests upon the line, except 
 Avhen N is the second letter, in which case the latter 
 rests on the line. (a). When a heavy curved letter is 
 joined to a heavy straight one without an angle it is
 
 ;;_' THE PiioxoGUAPiiir MANTAL. 
 
 made heavy at the point of junction as well as in the 
 middle. (See the joinings BZ and VG). 
 
 LESSON 3. 
 
 W AND Y USED FOli K AND L. 
 
 11. W and Y being semivowels can never follow a 
 vowel in the same syllable; and being semiconsonants 
 can never follow another consonant at the end of a 
 syllable, they having no final utterance of their own. 
 Consequently, they can never end a syllable or word, 
 being in this respect different from both vowels and 
 consonants. 
 
 1 2. The above being true, their phonographic forms 
 can be used at the end of syllables and words for those 
 full consonants which are nearest to them in utterance, 
 namely R and L. When so employed they are named 
 either Downward Ar or El or simply Air and Ail, 
 their stenotypes being 7? and L. They are never writ- 
 ten alone or initially or as the first stems in words so 
 as not to conflict with W and Y. 
 
 13. The regular phonographic letters are indicated 
 in 'stenoscript and stenotypy by regular script and 
 print letters (see Prologue, page 23), but when they 
 have alternate forms the latter are usually indicated in 
 italics as in the last section. 
 
 14. If desired the strokes W and Y when they 
 occur in the final syllable of a word of two or more 
 syllables may be distinguished from the downward R 
 and L strokes by shading them in the middle tapering 
 at each end, but this will seldom be necessary. When 
 thus used, however, they are named "Way and Yay, 
 their stenotypes being W and Y. 
 
 Y AND UPWARD L. 
 
 16. Y and upward L thus have similar forms. 
 When alone the stems are known by their ditlc-rcncc of
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. ;>;> 
 
 inclination, the down stroke verging more toward the 
 perpendicular and the up one toward the horizontal, 
 the former being at an angle of sixty and the latter at 
 one of thirty degrees. When joined to other letters 
 they are distinguished by the direction they take to or 
 from the point of junction. (See Prologue, page 26.) 
 a. If preferred upward L may be written at thirty 
 degrees after N. 
 
 UPWARD AND DOWNWARD L. 
 
 16. L also thus has two similar forms made up or 
 down. When L is written alone the upward form is 
 always used. When joined to other letters either form 
 is distinguished by the direction it takes to or from 
 the point of junction. (See Prologue, page 26.) 
 
 CH AND UPWARD R. 
 
 17. Ch and upward R must not be mistaken for 
 each other. These two letters have a resemblance in 
 the same manner as do Y and upward L (see sec. 15); 
 Ch when alone being at an angle of sixty and R at one 
 of thirty degrees from the horizontal. When joined 
 to other letters, the distinction between them is appar- 
 ent from their course to or from thepointof junction. 
 (See Prologue, page 26.) 
 
 UPWARD AND DOWNWARD SH. 
 
 1 8. Sh also has two similar forms made up or down; 
 the downward form when alone or initial being written at 
 sixty degrees, which is also usually the case when it 
 occurs medially or finally. The upward character is 
 usually written at forty-five degrees and never occurs 
 alone. (See Prologue, page 26.) Upward Zh is sel- 
 dom employed. The upward stems are named Shay 
 and Zhay and are indicated in stenotypy by 8h and Zh. 
 
 a. If preferred upward Sh may be made at thirty
 
 M THE PHONOGRAPHIC MAXr.U.. 
 
 degrees before M and after N, the same as upward R. 
 t^See page 20 and also sec. 15, a.) 
 
 b. If upward Sh were to be written alone it would 
 be made at thirty degrees the same as upward li and L. 
 
 19. Whatever observations apply to a light letter 
 in the pages of this book usually apply also to the cor- 
 responding heavy one. Thus, for example, the rules 
 in the first two sentences of the last section apply also 
 to the heavy letter Zh or Zh. 
 
 LESSON 4. 
 
 STRAIGHT AND CURVED STEMS JOINED AT RIGHT ANGLES. 
 
 20. When a straight and a curved stem are joined 
 at right angles to each other, if the angle is on the 
 inside of the curve, it should be distinctly defined. 
 There are twelve such junctions in phonography as in 
 the engraving. 
 
 a. It will be observed, in accordance with the 
 remarks in the Prologue, page 26, that Sh and Ch 
 after P and W are written at forty-five, while F and P 
 after Ch and Y are made at thirty degrees. (See also 
 Sh after Wj and F after Y in engraving 21, line 2. 
 
 STEMS JOINED WITHOUT ANGLES. 
 
 21. The three lines of engraving 21 contain all the 
 junctions without angles in phonography. They are 
 thirty in number. A straight line running into a 
 curve has no angle with that curve. When a straight 
 line will run into or form a curve or a curve will make 
 a half circle with another curve, or run into an opposite 
 one it is joined without an angle. Every other junction 
 of a straight line and a curve is made with an angle 
 greater or less. 
 
 a. Some of the junctions above, such as Y with 
 T and S with Ch would not be without angles if the 
 curves were strictly quarter circles, since Y andCh are
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. '],") 
 
 made at sixty instead of forty-five degrees. In such 
 cases the curves are slightly flattened so as to eliminate 
 the angle. Again the junction of N with M or the 
 reverse both being written on the line is effected by 
 slightly flattening both stems at or near the point of 
 junction. (See also sec. 8, 1.) 
 
 b. If the upward letters are always made at thirty 
 degrees (see page 26, last paragraph), upward L and 
 W and F and upward Sh would also be slightly flat- 
 tened at or near the point of junction in order to elim- 
 inate the angle. 
 
 22. As upward R is made before M and after N 
 at thirty degrees (See Prologue, page 20) it must 
 always be joined to them with an angle. Furthermore 
 it is also necessarily joined with an angle to every other 
 curved letter. The remarks above, therefore, in ref- 
 erence to straight lines running into or from curves do 
 not apply to upward li for the reason that in phono- 
 graphy the latter does not run into or from any curved 
 letter. (See also the last diagram on page 15 of the 
 Introduction. ) 
 
 M SHADED FOR MP OR MB. 
 
 23. The letter M shaded in the middle stands for 
 Mp or Mb. If at any time there would be danger of 
 conflict between the two the latter may be written in 
 full with the stems M and B. 
 
 2-i. The name for M shaded as above, whether rep- 
 resenting Mp or Mb, is Meep (or Eemp) and its steno- 
 types are Mp. 
 
 a. If the learner prefers he may employ the 
 shaded M stem to represent Mp only and write Mb 
 with the two stems M and B. 
 
 FOREIGN CONSONANTS. 
 
 25. Any consonant peculiar to a foreign language 
 may be indicated by striking through the nearest cor-
 
 36 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 responding English one at right angles to it a small 
 character like the Roman S. Such are the light and 
 heavy gutterals Kh, Ch and Ge or Gh heard in the 
 Russian, German and other languages; also the Welsh 
 LI, French N and Italian R, as in the following words: 
 Russian, Kharkov; German, ich, einige; Scotch, loch; 
 Irish, lough; Welsh, Llan; French, bonmot; Italian, 
 amor. They may be designated either by their for- 
 eign names or by their English ones as just given. 
 Their stenotypes are the nearest corresponding English 
 letters enclosed in quotation points; thus, "K," "G," 
 "L," "N," "R" or "7?." The foreign consonant 
 mark is not always employed. 
 
 THE BREATHING. 
 
 26. As the learner has read in the Introduction 
 the sounds of speech are made by the breathings, 
 smooth or rough. The smooth breath or lene is 
 represented by a light dot and the rough breath or 
 aspirate by a heavy one. When used alone the dots 
 are written on the line The names of the dots are 
 Eetch and Heetch (or Aitch and Haitch) respectively, 
 and their stenotypes are -{- and H. 
 
 27. The rough breathing may also be represented 
 by two ticks one shaded throughout and made down- 
 ward in the direction of J and the other light and made 
 upward in that of R and named respectively Hetch and 
 Hutch; their stenotypes being h and k. They are used 
 only initially in connection with consonant stems and 
 never stand alone, the dot then being employed instead 
 as stated in section 26. The downward tick joins best 
 with M, Mp, W, S, downward Sh and upward L; the 
 upward one with the opposite curves N, Ng, F, Th, Y 
 and upward Sh. The latter, however, is seldom used, 
 and then never when upward Sh stands alone. On 
 straight stems the downward tick joins best with K 
 and upward R and the upward one with the downward
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 37 
 
 forms P, T and Ch. Both ticks are always pro- 
 nounced separately from the stems to which they are 
 attached; thus hM and AN and uttered Hetch Mee 
 and Hutch Nee. 
 
 a. The smooth breathing may also be represented, 
 if desired, by two light characters, the one a down- 
 ward tick in the direction of Ch and the other an up- 
 ward short quarter circle curve, called a curvet, in the 
 direction of Sh and of the same length between the 
 ends as the tick; but these are not usually necessary in 
 ordinary writing. Their names and stenotypes are 
 Etch, Utch ( +etch, +utch) and -f, -j-. 
 
 1. If preferred -j- may be represented by two light 
 ticks made downward and upward in the direction of 
 Ch and R, and H by two heavy ones in that of J and 
 K (See, however, par. b). 
 
 b. Upward + and II as in paragraph a are repres- 
 ented by light strokes and distinguished by" different 
 forms for stenographic convenience since it is usually 
 somewhat difficult to shade an upward letter. In all 
 other cases -f- and II have tho same forms, but are 
 distinguished by shading. Upward + and H are thus 
 distinguished according to the same principle as the 
 script and printed forms. 
 
 c. When the downward ticks occur before R. and 
 L standing alone the latter are written at an angle of 
 thirty degrees. 
 
 28. The H ticK on W and Y is never employed in 
 the same syllable with the latter. If extra distinction 
 is desired on nW or nY (see sec. 3), the aspirate dot 
 may be placed before the center in addition to the 
 initial shading of the stem. This, howerer, will not 
 often be necessary. The H tick is also never em- 
 ployed on downward R and L (See sec. 12). 
 
 29. The learner will understand in regard to "W 
 and Y as was explained in the Introduction, page 20, 
 paragraphs 4, a and 5, that the letter W stands for 
 
 452204
 
 38 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 the sounds +W and the letter Y for the sounds -r Y; 
 that is ~\V and Y are semi-consonants uttered with the 
 smooth breathing. Consequently they can take the 
 rough breathing H. In other words the smooth 
 breathing can be changed into the rough; as in the 
 rough breath semi-consonant sounds HW and HY in 
 section 2 and line 2.
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 39 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 THE VOWELS, SEMIVOWELS, ETC. 
 
 LESSON 5. 
 THE VOWELS. 
 
 THE SMOOTH VOWELS. 
 
 SO. The English language contains six short, 
 smooth breath vowels as heard in the words "is, ell, 
 Uz, ask, at, odd." They are named by uttering them 
 alone, as follows: i, e, u, a, a, o; or if this is at first 
 found difficult, by attaching to them the letter t, as in 
 the following; namely, "it, et, ut, at, at, ot." It is 
 preferable, however, to sound them alone without any 
 consonant. Sounding them thus is naming them. The 
 sound should not be cut off, as it were, or stopped 
 suddenly, when uttered alone, but should be prolonged 
 to its full utterance the same as in the case of the long 
 vowels, which will presently be considered. 
 
 3 1 . From the engraving and alphabet, or peebeta, 
 (pages 133 and ITi, it will be seen that they are rep- 
 resented by small light half circles and ticks or dashes 
 (the former standing for the high and the latter for 
 the low vowels) each of which is always made in its 
 own proper direction; namely, that of the full sized 
 stem which corresponds or most nearly corresponds 
 to it in form. All the characters are usually made of
 
 40 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 the same length and may be written alone or joined to 
 one another or to other letters, as will hereafter appear. 
 Their stenotypes are the small body letters above given, 
 a. If preferred the dashes may be made a little 
 longer than the semicircles when separated from the 
 latter by other letters. 
 
 32. Each of the vowel phonographs except e has 
 an alternative form which is employed >vhen the regular 
 one will not join conveniently, the stenotypes being in 
 italics as in the following. Thus i is made in the di- 
 rection of downward Sh, u in that of M, a downward 
 at an angle of thirty instead of forty- five degrees, a 
 upward in the direction of R and o downward in that 
 of Ch. 
 
 33. Each of the six short smooth vowels explained 
 in section 30 has its corresponding long smooth vowel. 
 These are represented like the others, except that the 
 characters are shaded at the end to indicate their long 
 sound, as heard in the words "eyes, eel, ooze, art, ate, 
 ode." They are named by uttering them alone, as 
 follows : I, e, u, a, a, 6. In the third vowel the 
 sound is given as in the word "ooze" and not as in the 
 verb "use," or the noun "union;" that is to say the 
 Y sound is omitted. They are represented in stenotypy 
 as above, the alternates being in italics. 
 
 a. The learner is informed that the terms Short 
 and Long as applied to the vowels above are merely 
 conventional ones and do not strictly express the rela- 
 tion between them, since they have no reference to 
 the duration of the sound. For example the vowel 
 e as in " ell " may be shortened or prolonged to the 
 same extent as that of e as in "eel." (See sec. 30). 
 Consequently all the vowels are of the same nature as 
 the notes on a piano, or other musical instrument, 
 which may be abbreviated or lengthened at will. In 
 the author's l ' System of Phonoscript and Phonotypy" 
 (see Prologue, page 28) the vowels are distinguished
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 41 
 
 according to the positions of their utterance (see Pre- 
 face, page 6), the short vowels being termed Fore and 
 the long ones Aft. And as they are also distinguished 
 as High and Low (see Introduction, table, page 22), 
 each one can be definitely located. Thus o as in "ell" 
 is the high-mid-fore and e as in "eel" the high-mid-aft 
 vowel, while o as in ' ' odd " is the low-back-fore and o 
 as in "ode," the low-back-aft vowel, and so on for the 
 others. It will thus be seen that while the short and 
 long (fore and aft) vowels of each locality have a 
 certain resemblance to each other it does not consist 
 in their being the short and long sounds of the same 
 vowel. 
 
 b. The long vowel u, as in paragraph 33, is first 
 drawn with the light form and then without lifting the 
 pen or pencil is shaded downward at the end. If, 
 preferred, however, it may be shaded in the middle. 
 
 34. There are three smooth diphthongs in the English 
 language as heard in the words "out, oil, Cruick shank" 
 or "good." A diphthong is the "union of two vowel 
 sounds in one syllable" and is produced by sounding 
 one vowel quickly after another. They are each repre- 
 sented by two letters, namely, ou, oi, ui, and are 
 named from their sounds alone. They are made in 
 phonography the same as in script and print by joining 
 the two letters of which they are composed. In the 
 case of ou the phonograph for u is reversed in the 
 direction of M. In that of oi the o is inclined in the 
 direction of Ch and the i made in the direction of up- 
 ward Sh, while in that of ui the i is written in the 
 direction of downward Sh. (See sec. 32). The steno- 
 types for the phonographs are on, oi, ui. 
 
 35. The learner is instructed that the proper repre- 
 sentation of on is with the long u as in ou ; but it is 
 represented in the present script and print for conven- 
 ience by the short u.
 
 42 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 THE ROUGH VOWELS. 
 
 36. Each of the twelve smooth vowels and the three 
 smooth diphthongs above explained has its corresponding 
 rough vowel or diphthong. The latter are represented 
 like the former except that they are shaded at the be- 
 ginning to indicate their rough sound. In consequence 
 of this the rough long vowels are shaded their full 
 length. 
 
 37. The short rough vowels are hi, he, hu, ha, ha, 
 ho, and are heard in the words "his, head, hu/zy, 
 hasp, hat, hod. " The long rough vowels are hi, he, 
 hu, ha, ha, ho, as heard in the words "hies, heed, 
 whose, hart, hate, hoed. v The rough diphthongs are 
 hou, hoi, hui, as heard in the words "how, hoy, 
 hook." They are shaded only at the beginning of the 
 first letter. The stenotypes for the rough vowels and 
 diphthongs are the same as the smooth ones except 
 that the small capital H (see sec. 3) is placed before 
 them to represent the shading for the aspirate; thus, 
 HOW, noij urn. 
 
 38. In practical writing the rough vowels and 
 diphthongs, as well as the smooth long vowels, are 
 frequently left unshaded. In such cases the sense of 
 the writing usually distinguishes them apart. (See 
 also Prologue, page 26 and sec. 27, a and Remarks on 
 the Alphabet in the Introduction, page 18.) 
 
 THE ASPIRATE AND LONG VOWEL DOTS. 
 
 39. If at any time the initial or final shading for 
 the aspirate or long vowel should not be considered 
 sufficiently distinct either may bo additionally dis- 
 tinguished by writing before or above a vo\yel the 
 heavy dot for the aspirate and after or under it a heavy 
 dot for the long sound. This, however, will not often bo 
 necessary. The learner will observe that the dots are 
 made before or after perpendicular or inclined vowels
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC .MANUAL. 43 
 
 and above or under horizontal ones, whether straight or 
 curved. They may be placed opposite either the be- 
 ginning, center or end of the characters. Usually, 
 however, when the vowels stand alone, they are writ- 
 ten opposite the center. The lene and the short vowel 
 may also be indicated by light dots in the same man- 
 ner, if desired, but these, the same as the -f- tick and 
 curvet (see sec. 27, a) are never necessary in ordinary 
 writing, except that the lene dot is sometimes used to 
 represent the substitution of the smooth for the rough 
 breath as in the dialecticisms "-t-e" and "+a" (indi- 
 cated in the present script and print by "V and 
 "'ay 1 ') for "he" and "hay." Usually, however, when 
 no error would be liable to occur, the smooth vowel 
 without the lene dot is then employed. (See the last 
 four examples in line 39.) 
 
 40. The stenotype for the long vowel dot is an 
 inverted period placed after the stenotype or stenotpyes 
 for the vowel, all enclosed in brackets; thus [a-], [Ha-]. 
 
 a. The lene and aspirate dots are always pro- 
 nounced separately from the letters before which they 
 are placed; thus, -fe and He are uttered Eeetch Eee 
 and Heetch Eee. 
 
 JOINED VOWELS. 
 
 41. Two or more vowels may be joined together 
 the same as are the diphthongs 6r consonant stems, 
 (a). The dots for the aspirate and the long sound 
 the lene and short vowel dots never being necessary 
 in ordinary writing except as explained in section 39 
 may then be placed, when they occur outside the 
 angles, opposite the beginning, center or end of each 
 vowel. Usually, however, they are written opposite 
 the center. When they occur inside the angles they 
 are written opposite the beginning or end of each 
 vowel except in the case of the middle vowels when 
 they are placed opposite the center. In other
 
 44 THE PHONOGRAP'S'lC MANUAL. 
 
 words the interior dots are always kept away 
 from the angles for if written within or near 
 them it is not always certain to which vowel 
 they belong. The learner will also observe that 
 the long vowel dot is always placed after the vowel. 
 Jt is thus distinguished from the aspirate dot which is 
 placed before it. 
 
 b. When the vowels ft or hi or the corresponding 
 long ones follow each other they are usually disjoined 
 and written close together. In the similar case of the 
 other tick vowels the alternative forms are usually 
 employed. 
 
 c. Any two or more vowels composing a word, or 
 the two vowels of a diphthong, may be disjoined and 
 written close together. In every case the aspirate and 
 long vowel dots may be inserted as usual. 
 
 d. Any two vowels whatever may be joined by 
 using the alternative forms. (See third line of 
 Reading Exercise, 30 to 48, and also paragraph e 
 below. 
 
 e. If two vowels would be liable to make an indis- 
 tinct joining in rapid writing as ft or ha and the alter- 
 nate for either (see par. b) or e and the upward alter- 
 native form for ' 'a, " it is usually better to write them 
 separately. 
 
 42. To indicate in stenotypy that two phonographs 
 are disjoined and written close together an inverted 
 semicolon is placed between them; thus, ftift 
 
 43. The learner will not have much occasion to join 
 the vowels, smooth or rough, together alone, since 
 there are not more than five or six words in English, 
 consisting of more than one syllable, that are composed 
 wholly of smooth vowels and they are of such rare 
 occurrence as to be used, even by the busiest speakers 
 and writers, on an average, perhaps hot more than 
 twice or thrice in a lifetime, if that of ten. There are 
 also very few words of more than one syllable coin-
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL 45 
 
 posed wholly of rough vowels or of smooth and rough 
 ones combined. 
 
 44-. All the vowels and diphthongs above mentioned 
 both smooth and rough when written alone are invar- 
 iably placed upon or near the line of writing in the 
 same manner as are the stem letters. (See sec. 4.) 
 This is also the case with all words composed wholly 
 of vowels. 
 
 VOCALIZATION. 
 
 45. When the vowels or diphthongs occur in con- 
 nection with consonants they are written disjoined 
 beside the stems which process is termed Vocaliza- 
 tion and may be placed opposite the beginning, center 
 or end according to convenience. When so written 
 they are said to be in the first, second and third posi- 
 tions respectively. Usually, however, they are writ- 
 ten in the second position, that is opposite the centers 
 of the stems. 
 
 46. In stenotypy the position of a phonographic 
 vowel or diphthong as above is indicated by a small 
 superior figure 1 or 3 placed after its stenotype accord- 
 ing as it is in the first or third position. When no 
 figure appears it is understood to be in the second posi- 
 tion. Thus, Po 1 , Po 3 , Po. 
 
 47. When a vowel is placed on the left or upper 
 side of a stem it is read before it, when on the right or 
 under side it is read after it. Two or more vowels, 
 smooth or rough, coming together in a word are joined 
 or disjoined the same as when alone. When "a" fol- 
 lows e they may be joined without an angle if preferred. 
 This, however, should not be done when e and "a" 1 
 stand alone. When e and "a" are thus joined with- 
 out the angle it is seldom necessary to shade the e for 
 the long sound. The aspirate and long sound may in 
 all cases also be distinguished by the heavy dots if 
 necessary.
 
 40 THE PHONOGRAPHIC .MANl'AI. 
 
 :i. . The letters T and K in engraving 47 are em- 
 ployed merely to show the manner of writing the vow- 
 els to the stems, whether the syllables thus formed 
 constitute regular words or not. 
 
 48. In words of two stems the second place or 
 position (see sec. 45) of the second stem will ordinar- 
 ily be more readily used than the second place 
 of the first one, because the pen will not have to go 
 back so far. In words of three or more stems the sec- 
 ond place of each should generally be employed. 
 When, however, there would not be sufficient room 
 between the stems for the vowels to be placed in the 
 second position, or when for any other reason it would 
 be inconvenient to do so, it is preferable to write some 
 or all of them in the third or even in the first position. 
 
 49. The leiie dot may be used when vocalizing to 
 represent the substitution of the smooth breath for the 
 rough one, or for any consonant, as in the dialecticisms 
 u +im <1 ' and "-hem"' for "him" and "them" in the 
 same manner as when the vowels stand alone. Usually, 
 however, only the smooth vowel is employed. (See 
 sec. 39.) 
 
 50. Occasionally when convenient a vowel may be 
 joined to a stem. In such cases in stenotypy, the junc- 
 tion is indicated by a hyphen between the letters; thus, 
 i-dea. (See sec. 6.) If a vowel occurs between the 
 joined one and the stem it is enclosed in brackets; thus, 
 I-[o]N. (See also sec. 40. ) 
 
 5 1 . An intermediate vowel may be indicated between 
 M and P or M and B of the stem Mp or Mb by strik- 
 ing it through the latter. In the case of two or more 
 vowels they should be joined or all struck through the 
 stem and may then if necessary to secure legibility be 
 made somewhat larger than usual. The dash vowel 
 "a," which is made in the same direction as Mp, is 
 written with the alternative form. A vowel may be 
 written after the stem.
 
 THE PTIOXOtiKAl'llir MANUAL. .J~ 
 
 52. In stenotypy the striking of a phonographic 
 character through a preceding one is indicated by 
 placing a dagger between the stenotypes; thus, Mf#p, 
 Mfoap, Mfot^p, Mfopi. 
 
 53. The consonant Ng never commences a word 
 in English. Consequently when it stands alone or is 
 the first stem in a word it is known to be preceded by 
 a vowel smooth or rough. A vowel may be written 
 after the stem, in which case the sound of G is us- 
 ually included, as in "lingo." 
 
 54. Any observations that apply to the vowels in 
 this book, as for example, sections 47 to 51, usually 
 apply also to the diphthongs. 
 
 a. The sound of o in "odd" and that of "a" in "all" 
 are considered the same in this system of phonography. 
 Accordingly they are both written with the same 
 character; namely, the light perpendicular dash, or its 
 alternate. 
 
 55. The learner is informed that in speech a vowel 
 is always preceded by a breath in the same syllable 
 and a consonant followed by one; and that a breath 
 can then never follow a vowel or precede a consonant. 
 Also that a vowel is always smooth or rough according 
 as it is preceded by a smooth or rough consonant in 
 the same syllable. Thus the vowel in "pa" or "ba" 
 is a smooth one. In "fa" or "va" it is a rough one. 
 This comes from the fact that a vowel in the same 
 syllable as a preceding consonant is always uttered by 
 the same kind of a breath as the latter. Consequently 
 an aspirate dot is never placed before a vowel when 
 the latter is in the same syllable as a preceding con- 
 sonant, since the consonant itself in speech invariably 
 determines whether the vowel is smooth or rough. 
 
 FOREIGN VOWELS. 
 
 53. Any vowel peculiar to a foreign language may 
 be indicated by striking through the nearest cor re-
 
 48 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL 
 
 spending English one at right angles to it the small 
 character like the Roman S in the same manner as in 
 the case of the foreign consonants. (See sec. '2~>. i 
 Thus the German oe and ue are written as above with 
 long a and e and the French eu and u with short u and 
 long u respectively. Their stenotypes are the letters 
 for the long and short sounds just given, enclosed in 
 quotation points the same as are the stenotypes for the 
 foreign consonants; thus, "a," "e," "u," "a." 
 
 LESSON 6. 
 THE SEMIVOWELS OR SEMICONSONANTS W AND Y 
 
 57. W and Y being semivowels or semiconsonants 
 can be represented as either. They are the only con- 
 sonants that in phonographic writing can be omitted 
 when they begin a word and the only vowels that can 
 be inserted between a consonant and a following vowel 
 in the same syllable, as in "twit" or "beauty," and 
 the only vowels or consonants that can not end a syl- 
 lable. (See also sec. 11). 
 
 58. In speech AY consists partly of a sound resemb- 
 ling the short vowel u and Y partly of one resembling 
 the short vowel i, and the approximate construction 
 of each may be said to be as in the examples "u(w)arm, 
 i(y)ore," and "u(w)eed, i(y)ou." Thus the consonant 
 parts of W and Y are medial and are made between 
 say u or i and a following vowel or diphthong; W 
 being formed by the lips and Y by the tongue. By 
 beginning with say a brief short u or i and gliding 
 from either sound to that of any vowel or diphthong 
 and putting the accent on the latter the full sound of 
 W or Y will be produced as just explained. Any 
 vowel or diphthong, accordingly, can follow either u 
 or i in the same syllable. When a vowel in speech, 
 therefore, follows either of these vowels in the same
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 49 
 
 syllable in the manner mentioned it also of course fol- 
 lows W or Y. 
 
 59. The learner should remember that u and i are 
 the vowel sounds of W and Y and are always uttered 
 in the same syllable with them. The consonant sounds 
 are medial as just stated and are made between the u 
 or i and a following vowel or diphthong In uttering 
 W, u is first heard, then the lips take the position to 
 articulate (or semiarticulate) W, and the following 
 vowel is uttered after the W is articulated, as in the 
 examples above. The same occurs with Y. I is first 
 heard, then the tongue takes the position to articulate 
 (or semiarticulate) Y and the following vowel is 
 uttered after the Y is articulated. If this did not hap- 
 pen, that is, if the vowels u and i were not first briefly 
 uttered the articulations or semiarticulations of W 
 and Y could not exist and consequently be heard. This 
 is the reason the sounds and characters W and Y are 
 termed semivowels or semiconsonants and is also the 
 reason they can take the breathings smooth or rough 
 which are prefixed to the vowels u and i and not to 
 the consonants W and Y. W and Y thus have the 
 breathings both before and after them before as 
 
 O 
 
 vowels and after as consonants and are the only 
 sounds in language of this nature, which is the reason 
 they cannot be uttered at the end of syllables. (See 
 also see's. 29, 55 and 11, and the Introduction, page 
 20, par.'s 4, a and 5.) 
 
 THE SMALL ALTERNATIVE FORMS FOR W AND Y, ETC. 
 
 60. It is sometimes convenient to represent W and Y 
 at the beginning or in the body of stem words by small 
 acute-angle characters joined or disjoined as in the en- 
 graving instead of by their stems when the latter will 
 not make a good or sufficiently speedy junction; which in 
 the case of W isbeforeT, Ch, Th, S, Sh, and in that of 
 Y before P, T, F, Th, S; those opening to the right and
 
 50 THE PHOXOGRAPHH MAVTAL. 
 
 left representing W and those upward and downward 
 standing for Y. When these characters are joined to 
 a following stem the vocalization of the latter is the 
 same as usual. When they are disjoined from the 
 stems they are joined to the vowel or diphthong im- 
 mediately following. The small W and Y may be 
 shaded initially for the aspirate. The aspirate dot 
 may also be employed if the initial shading is not 
 deemed sufficiently distinct. The H tick is seldom or 
 never prefixed. (See sec. 28.) 
 
 1 . The letter T in the first four lines of the engrav- 
 ing is employed merely to illustrate the manner of 
 joining the small AY and Y to the vowels both being 
 usually written in the second position to the stems. 
 (See also sec. and eng. 47, a. ) 
 
 a. When small AY and Y are joined, whether to 
 stems or vowels, that form is chosen which in each 
 case makes the best junction. They are usually em- 
 ployed before Tand S only when the latter are followed 
 by a vowel, but are used before the other stems men- 
 tioned in paragraph 60 whether a vowel follows or 
 not. 
 
 b. In short words of very frequent occurrence, 
 such as "was, youth," etc., small W and Y are dis- 
 joined initially. These words are thus written in order 
 that they may be used with the greatest rapidity in 
 the Reporting Style (the method employed when writ- 
 ing connectedly) where also all the vowels both smooth 
 and rough are generally omitted. 
 
 c. W and Y may each be properly represented by 
 two ticks or characters because they are each com- 
 posed of two sounds as explained in sections 57 to 59 
 preceding. In other words, being compound sounds, 
 they may be represented by compound signs. On the 
 other- hand it is also proper to represent them by sim- 
 ple characters as in the case of the stems and as would 
 be the case if the alternates were represented by sin-
 
 TUP] PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 51 
 
 gle ticks or half circles. The same principle is thus fol- 
 lowed with W and Y as with the vowels each of which 
 represents a breathing and the sonant organism, and 
 with Ch and J which consist respectively of TSh, 
 and DZh. (See Introduction, pages 13 and 21, 
 last paragraphs.) The reason, however, the small alter- 
 native forms are not presented with single signs is be 
 cause the stenographic material is so limited that it is 
 inconvenient to do so. 
 
 d. The proper size for the small W and Y charac- 
 ters is a little larger than that for the semicircles, the 
 angles being made sharp so as to additionally distin- 
 guish them from the latter. 
 
 e. If desired the W and Y angles opening to the 
 left and downward may be abolished and small W and 
 Y stems (quarter circles) a little longer than the ticks 
 or half circles; namely, about one-third the length of 
 a full sized curved stem, may be employed instead, 
 but joined only to vowels. 
 
 61. As Y and the long vowel n occur very fre- 
 quently together the sign for the former opening 
 downward is generally written alone for both, as in 
 the word "beauty." If at any time the a is desired 
 to be added (which is seldom or never necessary) the 
 reversed alternative half circle for the latter may be 
 employed; or the opposite characters written. Again, 
 the angular sign opening downward is sometimes 
 joined finally when thus representing both sounds, in 
 which case it is attached only to the four stems P, F, 
 M, K, and their heavy forms. (See par. 63 follow- 
 ing-) 
 
 a. If small Y, opening downward is abolished the 
 
 small Y stem, as explained in section 60, e, would be 
 employed instead in the same manner as in the last 
 paragraph except that it would not be joined finally to 
 F, K, etc. 
 
 62. The stenotypes for the small alternative W and
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MAXUAL. 
 
 Y forma are small cap roman and italic w, Y, and w t 
 r; the first two representing the characters opening 
 to the right and upward and the second two those 
 opening to the left and downward, their names being 
 respectively Wo, Yo and Woo, Yoo. Their stenotypy 
 is the same as for the vowels. (See see's. 47 and 50.) 
 a. If small Wand Y opening to the right and down- 
 ward are abolished, as explained in section 60, e, the 
 stenotypes remain unchanged. 
 
 Y BEFORE U EMPLOYED ONLY AFTER LABIALS AND BACK 
 LINGUALS. 
 
 63. In this system of phonography the sound of Y 
 before the long vowel u as in section 61 is indicated 
 only after P, B, F, V, M, K and G labials and back- 
 linguals as in the words "puny, repute, beauty, 
 few, view, mew, cube, skew" and " gubernatorial." 
 After all other consonants ; namely, front and middle 
 linguals (see Introduction, page 21, last paragraph and 
 table following) it is omitted, and the long vowel a 
 alone written as in the words "Tuesday, endue, sue, 
 resume." (See sees. 64 to 75 following). 
 
 64. The reasons for the above pronunciation are 
 given in the Introduction to the author's ' ' System of 
 Phonoscript and Phonotypy," page 9, et seq., and are, 
 briefly, that T, D, S, Z, etc., followed by Y and long 
 ft are liable to be changed into Ch, J, Sh, Zh, thus 
 causing words like "Tuesday, literature, duel, endue, 
 education, sue, ensue, zumic, resume," to be pro- 
 nounced "Chuesday, literachure, juel, enjue, edjuca- 
 tion, shue, enshue, zhumic, rezhume ;" with the result 
 that original words are entirely changed while derivative 
 ones lose their primitive forms. Consequently the Y 
 sound should be abolished. 
 
 65. Attention is also directed to the following ob- 
 servations by Dr. Latham in his ' ' Defence of Phonetic
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC' MAXUAL. 53 
 
 Spelling."' section XXIV on the subject of T and D 
 followed by Y becoming Ch and J. 
 
 " tsh and dzh [Ch and J] can be developed out of t and 
 d as independent, roots. For instance; 
 
 "1. 1 'a, tya, tsha. 
 
 " 2. Da, dyn, dzha. 
 
 "Now we have tsh's and dzh's of both kinds in English, but 
 they are treated very differently iu our orthography. The 
 sound given to u. yoo and ew after t and d as in nature, verdure, 
 dew when pronounced natshur, verdzhur and dzfiew [nachur, 
 verjur, juj has already been noticed. That this is condemned 
 as a vulgarism I admit. I may also add that, according- to the 
 information of Mr. [Isaac] Pitman, who, from having exhibited 
 the so-called vulgarism phonetically, and subseqnentJy recog- 
 nized the ordinary pronunciation, is a good authority on the 
 matter, the practice of so sounding' the combination is on the 
 decrease perhaps passing away altogether. It may be so. It 
 is possible that with so many of us reading and writing and 
 cultivating our pronunciation, the influence of the orthoepisis 
 may succeed in checking- the tendency to change; and if they 
 do this they will, to some small extent, have succeeded in what 
 is called the fixation of some part of the language. I do not 
 care to prophecy upon this point. I only know that ta and da 
 at the beginning of the [above] series, and that tshd and dzha 
 [cha and ja] at the end, are, comparatively speaking, stable 
 combinations; and that ty and dy in the middle, are, compara- 
 tively speaking, remarkably ?t?istable ones. If then, I were to 
 prophecy at all, it would be in favor of the vulgar pronunciation 
 eventually winning." 
 
 a. The ordinary pronunciation of Ty and Dy as 
 recognized by Mr. Pitman is preferable to that of Ch 
 and J because it is more etymological ; butit isclear from 
 the remarks of Dr. Latham that it can not be retained. 
 We should, therefore, abolish the Y sound for the sake 
 of proper etymology. Accordingly in this system 
 words like the above are written and pronounced "Tus- 
 day, literatur, duel," etc., "natur, verdur, du," and 
 not according to the present standard ; namely, ' ' Tyues- 
 day, literatyure, dyuel," etc., "natyure, verdyure, 
 dyew." (Tyiisday, literatyur, dyfiel, etc., natynr, 
 verdyur, dyn). Nevertheless the learner may if he 
 prefers follow the latter. 
 
 66. The pronunciation recognized and adopted by
 
 -,4 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL 
 
 Mr. Pitman is that of Y followed by the long vowel n 
 and not by the short one, u. That is "nature" and 
 "verdure" are written by Mr. Pitman "natynr" and 
 "verdyor" and not "natyur" and "verdyur." Also 
 "thew, new, annual, annuity, penury" and "pen- 
 urious" are written "thn, nyn, anynal, anynity, 
 penyury" and "penyurious.'"' This is practically the 
 same pronunciation as that in Webster's "International 
 Dictionary" (copyright 1890) in which also "shew" 
 (obsolete) is written (practically) "shya." Mr. Pit- 
 man, however, writes "Jew, Jn" as also does the 
 dictionary just mentioned but with the alternative 
 "Jyn" They disagree, however, on "lieu," the 
 former writing it "la" and the latter (practically) 
 "lya." On the remaining letters of the phonetic 
 alphabet; namely, Ch, Sh, R as in "chew, sure, rue," 
 they practically agree and write them, the former act- 
 ually and the latter substantially, "chn, shnr, rfi." 
 
 a. From the above it is evident that the past and 
 present pronunciation is practically the long vowel a. 
 It is therefore adopted in this system and the additional 
 words just given expressed "thu, nii, anaal, anility, 
 penury, penurious, shu, Ju, lu, chu, shiir, ru." 
 
 67. In addition to the preceding observations by Dr. 
 Latham the following on the same subject, except the 
 first paragraph, are made by Dr. A. J. Ellis in his 
 work "On Early English Pronunciation," Part I, 
 page 203. 
 
 " The pronunciation of P, B does not seem to have varied 
 in any respect. 
 
 " T, D have now a tendency, ignored by most orthoepists, 
 under particular circumstance to pass into ch, j ; thus lutture, 
 verdure are, perhaps most frequently, pronounced nachur, ver- 
 jur, the last word. being in that case identified with verger. 
 This alteration takes place generally through the action of a 
 palatal sound, originally ii then eu, yu so that the transition 
 was tiir, teur, tyur, tyur, chur. I have not found traces of the 
 change, however, but the pronunciation nfrtur or its equivalent 
 given by Jones seems to show an effort to avoid it by omitting
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC 31AXUAL. "),", 
 
 the palatal element y. In the XVIIIth century Sheridan carried 
 this still further and allowed for such pronunciations as chu'tur 
 for tutor. The palatals e, y have always had a great effect 
 upon preceding- consonants of the dental and guttural class, as 
 they tend to materially alter the position of the tongue in order 
 to facilitate the transition to a following vowel. The languages 
 derived from the Latin are full of instances. It is a fashion in 
 modern English to resist, or to believe that we resist, this tend- 
 ency iu the especial case of ture and dure, but we have given 
 into it completely in tirm, where the t, hesitating in classical 
 times between c and t, underwent a change which gave seox in 
 French, whence English, first seun and then shun never, ex- 
 cept in orthoepical fancies, shon and in Italian produced 
 tseu'ne. A similar change is recognized in clous, cial. And it 
 is in vain to protest against ture, dure becomming chur, jur at a 
 time when even tyo5r, dyoor though far less pedantic than teur, 
 deur, have a singularly orthoepistic effect." 
 
 a. Xow if P, B have not varied in any respect there 
 is no reason why other sounds should do so (say T, D) 
 except from faulty pronunciation. Accordingly the 
 interpolated Y sound should be abolished. 
 
 68. Dr. Ellis states, it will be observed, that 
 "nature, verdure are, perhaps most frequently, pro- 
 nounced nfichur, verjur," that is with the short vowel 
 u in the termination; thus, "chur, jur." But it is 
 shown above (sec. 60) that the ordinary pronunciation 
 was and is with the long vowel; namely u. His obser- 
 vations, however, are fully as applicable to the one as 
 to the other.- He also states, in effect, that "natyu.r" 
 and " verdyur " are far less pedantic than "nateiir" 
 and "verdeur" (nate-ar and verde-nr.) This is true, 
 yet the latter are far more etymological being only 
 one degree removed from the (supposed) originals 
 "tur" and "diir." But then they are not so quickly 
 pronounced, since they are composed of two syllables, 
 which is the reason the Y was next adopted and now, 
 inchoately, the Ch and J. ''Tur " and "dtir, " how- 
 ever, (natur and verdur) are fully as quick as "chur" 
 and "jar" (nachur and verjnr) and are also strictly 
 etymological, which the latter are not, inasmuch as 
 they destroy the T and D. Consequently " nfitnr "
 
 5(5 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANTAL. 
 
 and " verdiir " are preferable pronunciations to either 
 "natynr "and " verdynr "or " nfichnr "and "verjar" 
 and much nearer, if not actually, the original sounds, 
 since it is by no means certain that these were "tlir" 
 and " difr," though the latter were no doubt very close 
 approximations to the originals; particularly when 
 quickly pronounced. The dictionary above mentioned 
 has the following on this point, Guide to Pronuncia- 
 tion, page Ixiv, section 135, Note: 
 
 "The original sound of the letter u, as in the Latin and as 
 still retained in the Italian, Spanish and German was the 
 simple sound of oo (food) and o7> (foot) [u, ui]. In the time of 
 Chaucer, the pronunciation of this letter in the English which 
 was then substantially, if not absolutely, the same as in the 
 French may even then have fluctuated between the perfectly 
 simple sound now heard in the French and a sound more or less 
 decidedly diphthongal; as it appears to have done in England, 
 for the leading sound of the letter, down through the seven- 
 teenth and far into the eighteenth century. The y sound 
 made its way into the diphthong and gained prominence in it 
 by degrees, while the diphthong itself gradually gained a more 
 full development, with greater weight and a tongue position 
 farther back given to the terminal element. 
 
 a. All of which plainly means that the sound was 
 originally fl or ui and eventually became more or less 
 of a diphthong with a Y sound (either consonantal or 
 vowel, since Y is a semiconsonant or semivowel) pre- 
 ceding the latter. Now as ui (oo) in "foot" is a diph- 
 thong (see the author's "System of Phonoscript and 
 Phonotypy, " page 13) and not a simple sound, and as 
 the present pronunciation of u as shown in sections 65 
 and 66 is long Q it follows that the original sound was 
 also long 0, or practically so. 
 
 69. One, if not the principal reason, for the exist- 
 ence of the Y sound as above is that it came in mostly 
 from the French, which is a nasal language and there- 
 fore can easily employ the Y sound in such connec- 
 tions; which the English can not do, as it is not a nasal 
 tongue. Accordingly the tendency of English is either
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. .',7 
 
 to eliminate nasals altogether or to strictly limit them. 
 As a result any pronunciations by which they are 
 encouraged will eventually be abolished one way or 
 another. They consequently should be abolished 
 according to proper etymology, which is effected when 
 we say " natnr, verdar, " etc., as above, instead of 
 "nachnr, verjnr," etc. 
 
 70. The Y sound should also be abolished from 
 before other vowels than long n. (See the dictionary 
 above mentioned, Guide to Pronunciation, page Ixiii, 
 section 106). In other words, it should be abolished 
 whenever the resulting combination would be liable to 
 conflict with Ch, J, Sh, Zh, etc. As examples of this, 
 when te (ty), ti (ty) become Ch before "ous (us), on 
 (un)" and "an" as in "righteous, question, Christian," 
 (richus, queschun, chrischan), the e (y), i (y) is omitted 
 in this system; thus, "rltus, questun, christan." The 
 learner, however, as in the case of long n (see last 
 sentence of sec. 65, a) may, if he prefers, insert the 
 Y sound; thus, "rltyus, questyun, christyan. " 
 
 71. Finally the Y sound in such connections, 
 namely after the front and middle linguals (see sec. 
 63) does not enrich the language, since it conveys no 
 additional meaning. Therefore it is a useless burden 
 on the tongue. 
 
 72. Again, Dr. Ellis in the quotation above (see 
 sec. 67) speaking of the tendency of the palatals e, y 
 to alter the position of the tongue says that "we have 
 given into it completely in tlon " which finally became 
 "shun never, except in orthoepical fancies, shon" 
 and that "A similar change is recognized in dous, 
 cial." 
 
 73. This is probably true as to "tion" (shun) and 
 is mostly so as to ''cious, cial" (shus, shal). The same 
 may be said as to "sion, cian, sian, cean," etc., 
 and "tious, teous, ceous, seous, tial, zier," etc. (See 
 the dictionary above mentioned, pages Ixii and Ixiii,
 
 58 THE PHOXOCRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 sections 97 and 106). Nevertheless these terminations 
 will perhaps eventually he pronounced without the o 
 or i (that is the Y) sound, thus abolishing the indirect 
 or corrupt derivative Sh (or Zh.) Accordingly such 
 words as "motion, notion, edition, mission, vision, 
 Milesian, musician, crustacean, facetious, gracious, 
 micaceous, nauseous, partial, facial, glazier" will then 
 be uttered ''motun, notun, editun, misun, vizun, Mllf- 
 zan, myazikan, krustasan, fasetus, grasus, mikasus, 
 nausue, partal, fasal, glfizer. " 
 
 74. From the above it will be perceived that 
 phonetic spelling is essentially etymological spelling 
 and that when it comes into general use there will be 
 many radical changes from our present pronunciation. 
 These, however, will be for the better, since they will 
 be strictly logical, while in addition the way will be 
 opened for enriching the language by the employment 
 of the displaced words with a different meaning. 
 
 75. At present, however, the only changes adopted 
 in this system are those mentioned in sections 65, a, 
 66, a and 70. 
 
 LESSON 7. 
 THE + TICK AND CURVET AND II TICKS. 
 
 THE + TICK AND CURVET. 
 
 76. The -f tick and curvet, as stated in section 27, 
 a, are not usually necessary in ordinary writing. If 
 desired, however, they may be inserted according to 
 the same principle as the lene dot in section 49. 
 
 THE H TICKS. 
 
 77- A vowel occurring before either H tick is 
 written disjoined before it, while one between it and 
 the stem is written before the latter.
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MAXUAL. 59 
 
 78. The ticks should generally be inserted initially 
 in monosyllables and dissyllables. 
 
 79. In short words which occur very frequently, 
 however, they may be omitted and the initial rough 
 vowels, or the aspirate dot and rough vowels, used in- 
 stead after the manner of small W and Y explained in 
 section 60, b. The ticks may also occasionally be 
 omitted initially from long words whose forms are 
 sufficiently legible without them. 
 
 80. The ticks may frequently be omitted medially 
 from words of three syllables and over and also some- 
 times from compound words of two syllables. The 
 rough breathing or aspirate can then, if additional dis- 
 tinction is ever desired, be represented before the 
 rough vowels by the heavy dot. 
 
 OMISSION OF THE II TICKS. 
 
 81. If desired the H ticks may be omitted alto- 
 gether in ordinary writing the same as the -f- tick and 
 curvet and the rough vowels or the latter and the aspir- 
 ate dot inserted instead where necessary. It is usually 
 preferable, however, to insert them as above directed.
 
 60 THE riioxoriRApHic MANUAL. 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 CIRCLES AND LOOPS- INITIALS OP PROPER 
 NAMES. PUNCTUATION AND OTHER MARKS. 
 
 LESSON 8. 
 CIRCLES. 
 
 82. As Sand Z are very frequent sounds each is pro- 
 vided, in addition to the sign already given, with a 
 small circle; the one made light for S and the other 
 heavy on the most convenient side for Z. Both char- 
 acters are written initially, medially and finally. It is 
 not often necessary to shade the circle for Z when 
 medial or final, because the context will usually indi- 
 cate which sound is meant. When it occurs initially, 
 however, which is but seldom in writing English, and 
 then, as will hereafter be explained, only on double 
 consonants; as in "Zwolle," it is shaded, but usually 
 only slightly, or it may be written unshaded if pre- 
 ferred. (See sec. 38, etc.) These characters are 
 adopted for the sake of speed, the stems S and Z being 
 too large and cumbersome to be always made with suf- 
 ficient quickness. 
 
 83. The names of the small circles are Is and Iz 
 and their stenotypes are s and z. 
 
 THE INITIAL S CIRCLE. 
 
 84. The circle S (see sec. 19) is made initially on 
 the right or upper side of straight stems and on the 
 inner side of curved ones and is always read before
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANTAL. Gl 
 
 the stem. It is not used initially on downward R or 
 L. (See sec. 12). 
 
 THE FINAL S CIRCLE. 
 
 85. The circle S is made finally on the right or 
 upper side of straight stems and on the inner side of 
 curved ones. Initial and final S are thus made on the 
 same side of stems which stand alone. 
 
 THE MEDIAL S CIRCLE. 
 
 86. The circle S when written between two straight 
 stems struck in the same direction is made on the same 
 side as when final. When written between two 
 straight stems that form an argle it is made on the 
 outside of the angle and does not form a perfect circle. 
 
 87. When it occurs between a curve and a straight 
 stem it follows the direction of the curve, (a). Be- 
 tween too similar curves it is turned in the direction 
 of both. Between two opposite curves that do not form 
 an angle it is turned in the direction of the first. Be- 
 tween two opposite curves that form an angle, it is 
 turned in the direction of the second and does not 
 form a perfect circle, as in the last three examples in 
 the engraving. In such cases it is named Us or Uz 
 and stenotyped .v or z. 
 
 88. A circle is always equally divided between 
 two stems half on one and half on the other. 
 
 89. The circle S may be attached initially to small 
 W, but not usually to small Y to represent the con- 
 sonant S or Z, as will hereafter appear. 
 
 a. It may also be attached finally to a vowel or 
 diphthong standing alone or to a word composed 
 wholly of vowels to indicate the plural number or 
 possessive case. It is never attached initially as a 
 consonant to either as will hereafter appear. 
 
 b. The circle S when attached to the vowels and
 
 G2 TIIK PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 diphthongs should be proportioned to the size of these 
 characters. 
 
 THE S DOUBLE CONSONANTS. 
 
 90. The consonant S when initial in addition to its 
 ordinary use as in the word "seek," frequently pre- 
 cedes and apparently unites with other consonants in 
 the same syllable as in Spe, Ste, Sle, Swe, Sye. 
 These consonants when so united are called the S 
 Double Consonants and never have a vowel between 
 them as such. 
 
 a.- The remarks above apply also to the Z double 
 consonants. The latter, however, seldom occur in- 
 itially in English. (See sec. 82). 
 
 91. When the S and Z double consonants happen 
 in connection with the cognates P, B, etc., and F, V, 
 etc., the initial S circle usually belongs on light stems 
 and the initial Z circle on heavy ones. Consequently 
 if a circle on such stems should happen to be unshaded 
 it is usually known to be S or Z according as the stem 
 is light or heavy. (See sec. 82). 
 
 92. The initial S circle may be employed to form 
 an S double consonant on any stem except S and Ng or 
 downward R and L. (See sec. 84). Usually, how- 
 ever, in English the S double consonants occur only 
 on the stems P, T, K, F, M, N, L, and W. 
 
 93. The circle S is always employed when the con- 
 sonant S begins a word except in cases mentioned 
 hereafter. When the consonant Z begins a word the 
 stem Z is always employed except occasionally in the 
 case of a double consonant as explained in see's. 82 
 and 90). 
 
 NOMENCLATURE AND STENOTYPY OF THE STEMS AND 
 CIRCLES WHEN JOINED TOGETHER. 
 
 94. A single stem and S or Z circle joined together 
 and standing alone are usually pronounced in one syl-
 
 THE PHOXOCiUAPIlIC MANTAL. 63 
 
 lable the stems receiving the same names as when with- 
 out the circles; thus sP, Ps, sPs, Ps, sB, sV, zV, sSh, 
 sR, sN, sNg are named Spee, Spees, Pees, Sbee, Svee, 
 Zvee, Sshee, Sree, Snee, Seeng. 
 
 95. When a circle occurs between two stems it is 
 usually pronounced in the same syllable with the first, 
 thus, PsP, TsK, RsN, MsN, are uttered PeesPee, 
 Tees Kee, Rees Nee, Mees Nee. 
 
 96. When, however, it occurs between two oppo- 
 site curves and is made in the direction of the second 
 (see sec. and eng. 87, a) half on the back of the first 
 (see sec. 88) it is pronounced separately, thus, F.sLT 
 are spoken Fee Us Lee Tee. 
 
 97. In the stenotypic examples above, as well as in 
 those which follow, the spelling is phonetic. Conse- 
 quently they should be pronounced as written. Thus 
 Pees is uttered with the S and not with the Z sound. 
 
 VOCALIZATION OF STEMS HAVING THE 8 CIRCLE. 
 
 98. In the case of double consonants the vowels 
 are written after the stern. 
 
 99. In other cases a vowel between the circle and 
 sterm is written before the latter while one following 
 the stem is written after it. (See also sec. 100). 
 
 100. If the vowel or diphthong is a medial one, 
 that is one between two stems joined by a circle it is 
 written after the first stem or before the second ac- 
 cording as it precedes or follows the circle. In the 
 case of two or more vowels or diphthongs before or 
 after the circle the same rule is followed. 
 
 101. When a stem has a final circle it is vocalized 
 the same as when without it. 
 
 102. The circle S is never followed by a final 
 vowel. When a final vowel occurs after S the stem 
 form of the latter is always used.
 
 (34 THE PHONOGRAPHH 1 MANUAL. 
 
 LESSON '.. 
 
 THE INITIALS SIS OR SIZ, ETC., AND SI, ETC., SYLLABLES. 
 
 103. In words other than monosyllables when initial 
 S is followed by a vowel and S or Z, whether the sec- 
 ond S or Z belongs to the initial syllable or not, the 
 first S and the second S or Z are written either with a 
 large circle double the diameter of the small S circle 
 and in the same manner or with the small circle and S 
 stem, or vice versa, with the S stem and small circle, 
 as follows : 
 
 a. When the second S or Z is followed immediately 
 by a consonant, the large circle is used. It may be 
 shaded to represent the Z, but this is seldom necessary. 
 If desired the intervening vowel may be placed in the 
 circle as in the engraving. 
 
 1. The name of the initial large circle is Ses or Sez 
 and its stenotypic representation is ss, sz. It is always 
 pronounced as a separate word ; thus the combination 
 ssP is uttered Ses Pee. 
 
 2. The large circle by reason of its diameter being 
 twice the length of the diameter of the small one, is 
 often called the Double Size Circle although its area is 
 really four times that of the latter. If preferred it 
 may also be called the Double Diameter or Double 
 Width Circle. 
 
 b. When the second S or Z is followed immediately 
 by a vowel which is the end of the second syllable 
 whether this vowel is a syllable of itself or belongs to 
 the second S or Z the circle S and the stem S or Z 
 are employed. 
 
 C. When the second S or Z is followed immediately 
 by a vowel which is not the end of the second syllable, 
 the stem S and the circle are written. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 104. The above rules do not apply to derivative
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. (J-, 
 
 words whose primitive forms should be maintained ; 
 as in "schismatize" or "Sicilian," etc. (See eng. 199, 
 line 6.) 
 
 105. They also do not apply to compound words, 
 or to their plural or verbal forms; as in "sauce-box, 
 so-so, so-sos." 
 
 106. Rule b, however, applies to derivative words 
 having S or Z sounds only that have a different appli- 
 cation from their primitives; as "saucy, sizy," etc., 
 or if not of different application, yet where much 
 greater speed is obtained by writing them thus than by 
 preserving their primitive forms as in "sauce, size," 
 etc. (See sec. 116). 
 
 1 07. The learner is instructed that in phonography 
 it is a general rule that all derivative words should 
 maintain the form of their primitives. Sometimes, 
 however, this is not practicable when speed is neces- 
 sary. In such cases the rule is infringed, as in the 
 word "saucy," noticed above. It is also infringed for 
 the sake of speed in the case of the word "society" 
 which is written according to rule c as in the last form 
 but one in engraving 106. The learner may, however, 
 write it according to rule b if he chooses (see last ex- 
 ample in engraving 106) thus maintaining its primitive 
 form as in the Latin word "socius," the last example 
 in engraving 103, b. 
 
 108. The learner is furthermore instructed that it 
 is a general rule for writing all words in phonography 
 that those outlines should be chosen which are most 
 easily written. Sometimes, however, this rule also is 
 infringed either for stenographic reasons or for the 
 sake of extra legibility or uniformity as will appear in 
 the course of the exercises. 
 
 THE FINAL OR MEDIAL SIS OR SIZ, ETC., ZIS OR ZIZ, ETC., 
 AND IS OR IZ, ETC., SYLLABLES. 
 
 1 09. Final or medial Ss or Sz and Zs or Zz with a
 
 Gf THE PHOXOORAPHfC MAN I 'AT.. 
 
 vowel between, whether the lirst 8 or Z belongs to this 
 vowel or not, are represented the sumo as initial Ss or Sz 
 by the large circle which if desired, may be shaded on 
 one side to indicate Z or shaded throughout to indicate 
 Zz. The shading, however, is not usually necessary. 
 The final or medial large circle may be vocalized by 
 placing the intervening vowel within it the same as 
 in the case of the initial one and is attached to stems 
 in the same manner as is the final or medial small circle. 
 
 110. It will thus be observed that in addition to 
 its use in the medial and final syllables Sis or Siz, etc., 
 the large circle is employed to represent the final S or 
 Z of a primitive word together with the addition to it 
 of a complete syllable, usually Es or Ez, as in "pieces" 
 and "phazes "the derivatives of "piece" and "phaze. " 
 
 111. Final S or Z may be added to the final large 
 circle by a small imperfect circle light or shaded and 
 turned on the other side of the stem the latter 
 forming part of the circle. Its name and stenotype 
 are the same as for the other small circle. 
 
 112. The large circle may be written between two 
 opposite curves that form an angle. In which case it 
 is named by prefixing the short vowel U to the name 
 of the large circle ; thus, Uses, Usez, Uzes, Uzez and 
 stenotyped ss, sz, zs, zz in like manner with the similar 
 small circle. 
 
 113. The largo circle is never followed by a final 
 vowel. When a final vowel occurs after Ss, Sz, etc., 
 one of the stem forms of S or Z is always used. 
 
 114. The large circle is never attached to small "VV 
 or Y. It is, however, sometimes attached to a vowel 
 or diphthong but never initially to represent the con- 
 sonants Ss or Sz, as will hereafter appear. (See also 
 par's. 89 and a). 
 
 a. The large circle when attached to the vowels and 
 diphthongs, should, like the circle S, be proportioned 
 to the size of these characters. (See sec. 89, b).
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MAXL'AL. 07 
 
 1 15. The final or me<lial large circle is pronounced 
 the same as when initial but as a syllable instead of a 
 word ; thus, Pss, Psss are uttered Peeses, Peeses Is. 
 
 WORDS HAVING S OR S AND Z CONSONANT SOUNDS ONLY. 
 
 116. Monosyllables containing only S or S and Z 
 consonant sounds that begin with S and end with S or 
 Z and similar dissyllables that are not compounds 
 are always written with the initial S stem and the 
 small or large final circle; as in "sauce, size, sauces, 
 sizes." (See sec. 106). 
 
 117. Likewise dissyllables and trissyllables that 
 begin with a voAvel and contain only S or S and Z 
 consonants are written with the S stem and small or 
 large circle; as in "asses, assize, assesses, assizes." 
 
 a. Words other than monosyllables and having 
 only S or S and Z consonants and which begin with S 
 and whose second vowel is the end of the second 
 syllable or are compounds are written as in engravings 
 103, b and 105. 
 
 LESSON 10. 
 WHEN TO USE THE S AND Z STEMS. 
 
 THE STEM S. 
 
 118. S is written with the stem: 
 
 a. After an initial vowel and before a final one. 
 
 b. Initially or finally before or after two vowels 
 or a diphthong and a vowel and also medially if con- 
 venient, but if not the circle is employed. (See 
 'miasma" and "museum," sec. and eng. 100 and 
 "siesta," Reading Exercise 84 to 132, line 9). 
 
 119. In all cases above derivative words usually 
 maintain the forms of their primitives. (See also 
 sec. 105.)
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL 
 
 120. 8 is also written with the stem as explained 
 in sections 103, b, c and 110 and 117. 
 
 a. It is also written with the stem in the words 
 "cession" and "session." (See eng. 214, line 4.) 
 
 THE STEM '/.. 
 
 121. The above rules apply also to Z except that 
 initially the stem is always used unless a / double 
 consonant occurs, in which case the circle is written. 
 (See sees. 82 and 90, a and 93). 
 
 LESSON 11. 
 LOOPS. 
 
 THE INITIAL ST LOOP. 
 
 122. The double consonant St (see sec. !) is 
 represented initially by a loop on the right or upper 
 side of straight stems and on the inner side of curved 
 ones. The loop is made half as long as the stem to 
 which it is attached. It is not used initially on down- 
 ward R or L. (See sec. 12.) Its name is Stay and 
 its stenotypes are st. When it occurs initially it is 
 always pronounced as a separate word ; thus, stP, stR 
 are spoken, Stay Pee, Stay Ree. 
 
 123. A vowel between the loop and stem is writ- 
 ten before the latter while one following the stem is 
 written after it, as in the similar case of the initial S 
 circle. Stems with the initial St loop never take an 
 initial vowel. 
 
 124. The St loop is used in all cases when the 
 double consonant St occurs initially except when it is 
 followed only by a vowel as in "stow" or as in the 
 derivatives "stower, stowage," in which cases the circle 
 S and stem T are employed. The latter are also always
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 69 
 
 employed when a vowel occurs between intitial S and a 
 following T, as in "site," (See eng. 99). 
 
 a. When the St loop is written initially, particu- 
 larly on the left curves F and N, it should be made of 
 the full length and proper form so as not to conflict 
 w r ith an initial S or Ss circle. 
 
 THE FINAL OR MEDIAL ST LOOP. 
 
 125. The St loop is made finally and sometimes 
 medially on the same side of the stems as described in 
 section 122 and may indicate either St or Zd. Stems 
 with the final or medial St loop are vocalized the same 
 as stems with the final circle; namely as if no loop 
 were attached. 
 
 a. If at any time extra distinction is desired in the 
 case of words of one stroke, the loop may be shaded to 
 represent Zd; or the S circle and stem D may be 
 employed. 
 
 126. The loop 11 St is not employed before a final 
 vowel. When the sounds St occur thus the circle S 
 and the stem T are alwa} r s written., The loop St is 
 also never attached to a vowel. 
 
 127- Final S or Z may be added to the final St 
 loop by the small imperfect circle light or shaded. 
 
 128. When the St loop is shaded to represent Zd 
 it is named Zday and stenotyped zd. 
 
 129. When the St or Zd loop occurs finally on a 
 stem it is usually pronounced in the same syllable with 
 the latter; thus, Pst, Fst, Psts, Fsts, Kzd are uttered 
 Peest, Feest (or Efst), Peests, Feests (or Efsts), 
 Eeezd. 
 
 THE FTNAL OR MEDIAL STR LOOP. 
 
 130. The three sounds Str, with a vowel, usually 
 short c, between the T and K the first two sounds 
 being the double consonant St are represented finally 
 and .sometimes medially by a loop two-thirds as long
 
 70 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 as the stem to which it is attached and somewhat fuller 
 than the St loop and on the same side of the stems as 
 the latter. It is vocalized in the same manner. The 
 intermediate vowel may be indicated by striking it 
 through the loop just after the swell. This, however, 
 is seldom necessary. 
 
 131. The Str loop, the same as the St loop, is not 
 used before a final vowel. The manner of represent- 
 ing the sounds Str in such connection Avill appear 
 hereafter. 
 
 132. Final S or Z may be added to the final Sty 
 loop by the small imperfect circle light or shaded. 
 
 a. The Str loop is never written initially, or 
 attached to a vowel. 
 
 133. The name of the Str loop is Ster and its steii- 
 otypic representation is str. A stem Avith this attach- 
 ment is usually pronounced the same as without it, 
 simply the syllable for the loop being added; thus, 
 Pstr, Pstrs are named Peester, Peesters. 
 
 INITIALS OF PROPER NAMES. 
 
 134. The initials of proper names are written with 
 the phonographic characters on the line X with the 
 letter K and the final S circle except C and Q, which 
 are written, the first with the S circle on the line and 
 the second with K below and touching an imaginary 
 line half the length of a T stem below the ordinary one. 
 When thus employed as initials the consonant stems, 
 are not vocalized. 
 
 135. The initials of such names as Phillip, George, 
 Gerrit and Artemus are written with the shorthand 
 stems P, G and the tick "a" as in "at" and not with 
 the phonographs F, J and "a" as in "art;" while the 
 initials of Cecilia, Camilla and Uriah, are expressed 
 with the character C as in the last paragraph and the 
 short vowel u and not with S, K and Y. The initials 
 of Theodore, Sherwin and Charles are represented by
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANVAL. 71 
 
 Th, Sh and Ch or if preferred, by T, S and C, as 
 above. Likewise the heavy sounds of Th and Sh, if 
 used, would be expressed by the heavy letters Dh arid 
 Zh (or D and Z) just as the heavy sound of Ch is indi- 
 cated by J. The initials of Whistler and Hugh are 
 written with W and H and not with nW and HY. 
 
 a. By following the directions in the above para- 
 graphs the initial of every name will either receive the 
 same representation as in the ordinary spelling or be 
 thus unmistakably indicated. When phonetic spelling 
 is adopted in script and print, as well as in phono- 
 graphy, the initials of all proper names will of course 
 be represented invariably with the proper letters of 
 the phonographic, phonoscript and phonotypic alpha- 
 bets. (1). When the pronunciation of a proper name 
 is uncertain it should be written in the common long- 
 hand or in phonoscript preferably the latter if the 
 pronunciation is exceptional. (See Prologue, page 28). 
 
 b. If preferred, and time is had, all initials of 
 proper names may be written in script. 
 
 PUNCTUATION AND OTHER MARKS. 
 
 136. In reporting in this system of phonography it 
 is not customary to punctuate except to indicate the 
 period or the end of a sentence by a blank space about 
 as long as a triple length K which size Avill of course 
 vary according as the writer's phonographic charac- 
 ters are of the standard dimensions or larger. (See 
 Prologue, page 26.) If a sentence should finish near 
 the end of a line the next one should commence on the 
 following line with an indentation the length of the 
 period from the margin; the space left on the line 
 above not being considered. A paragraph should 
 commence on a new line with an indentation about 
 twice as long as that for the period. An indentation 
 thus always indicates a period, the end of a sentence or 
 a paragraph. Sometimes, however, evon in reporting
 
 72 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 but particularly when writing for one's own private 
 use, or when the matter is to be read by others it is 
 necessary or convenient to employ both punctuation 
 and other marks and then they are written as in the 
 following table, some of which are modified from their 
 ordinary script or print forms so that they may not 
 be mistaken for shorthand characters. As a general 
 rule even when the punctuation marks are used the first 
 three; viz., the comma, semicolon and colon are omit- 
 ted, while the period, dash and parentheses are much 
 more frequently inserted than any of the remaining 
 forms and in the order named. Any other typo- 
 graphical marks employed in short hand than those in 
 the table are the same as usual. 
 
 a. The periods and paragraphs instead of being in- 
 dicated when reporting, by spacing and indentation as 
 explained above, may, if preferred, be written with 
 the strokes for the period and break given in the table. 
 
 b. As the length of a simple T stem is one-eighth of 
 an inch (see Prologue, page 26) that of a simple K 
 stem will average about five thirty-seconds of an inch. 
 Consequently the spacing and indentation for the per- 
 iod and paragraph in the engraved exercises of this 
 book are fifteen thirty-seconds and fifteen sixteenths of 
 an inch, respectively. The learner, however, need not 
 confine himself strictly to these sizes unless he prefers 
 to do so but may adopt longer ones as explained in 
 paragraph 136 above. 
 
 c. The spacing between words in the engravings 
 of this book average about three thirty-seconds of 
 an inch and is the standard for this system. But the 
 learner may adopt a longer one if he prefers as in the 
 case of the spaces mentioned in the last paragraph.
 
 THE PHOXOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 137. TABLE. 
 
 PUNCTUATION MARKS. 
 
 73 
 
 Comma 
 
 Semicolon 
 
 Colon 
 
 Period 
 
 Interrogation (UP) 
 
 Dash 
 
 Doubt (up) 
 
 Exclamation or Wonder 
 Ironical Exclamation 
 Parentheses 
 Brackets 
 
 / 
 (/) 
 ( ) 
 
 ORTHOGRAPHICAL MARKS. 
 
 Quotations ** lf 
 
 Hyphen (up) // 
 
 Accent / 
 
 Apostrophe ' 
 
 Roman ^ 
 
 " Small Capitals = 
 " Large " = 
 Heavy Face Roman s / 
 
 Heavy Face Roman, ) 
 Small Capitals \ 
 
 Heavy Face Roman, 
 Large Capitals 
 
 Italic 
 
 * 
 
 " Small Capitals =z 
 ' ' Large ' ' 
 Heavy Face Italic /_ 
 
 Heavy Face Italic, 
 Small Capitals 
 
 Heavy Face Italic, 
 Large Capitals 
 
 DIVISION MARKS. 
 
 Section 
 Paragraph 
 
 Caret 
 
 1 
 
 Break 
 
 INSERTION MARK. 
 
 /I
 
 74 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MAKUAL. 
 
 REFERENCE MARKS. 
 
 Asterisk 
 
 Dagger f 
 
 MATHEMATICAL MARKS. 
 
 Double Dagger 
 
 Equals 
 
 Minus 
 Into 
 
 Plus 4; 
 
 Times x 
 
 THE PUNCTUATION MARKS. 
 
 138. The punctuation marks are also called Gram- 
 matical Marks. The fir.st three; namely, the comma 
 semicolon and colon are the same as in script and print. 
 The period is formed like a double length Ch except 
 that it is somewhat longer and is termed the Stroke 
 Period in contradistinction to the space one. The in- 
 terrogation mark is made upward like a double length 
 R but somewhat longer and is struck through the lino 
 with about its first quarter below it. The horizontal 
 stroke for the dash is made about the length of the 
 stem K, the downward tick in the direction of Ch be- 
 ing struck through it near the end. 
 
 139. The parentheses are the same as in script and 
 print except that they are made longer than a double 
 length Th or S in order to distinguish them from tho 
 latter. The brackets are for distinction also made of 
 the same length as the parentheses. The punctuation 
 or grammatical marks are eleven in number. 
 
 THE ORTHOGRAPHICAL MARKS. 
 
 140. In short quotations the quotation marks are 
 written as in the engraving. In long ones, however, 
 they may, if desired, be enclosed in circles about twice 
 the size of the Ss circle so as to be more readily found. 
 The marks may also for extra distinction be written in
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 the margin. (See Prologue, page 24.") The joined 
 marks should always be written first and the disjoined 
 ones second, as in the table, so as to distinguish the 
 beginning and end of the quotation. Single quota- 
 tion marks are made the same as in script but are sel- 
 dom employed, 
 
 a. In this book quotation marks are usually em- 
 ployed only for quotations or distinction. ( See also 
 sec. 144, a and b.) 
 
 141. The hyphen is mostly employed in com- 
 pound words, but only when the component parts 
 will not join readily, as in "chain-gang." In other 
 cases, as in "day-book," it is omitted, the component 
 parts being joined. 
 
 142. - The accent mark is always made downward 
 in the direction of Ch, as in the list. It is used only 
 in connection with vowels or diphthongs and is placed 
 according to legibility either directly above or under- 
 neath them or partly higher or lower and a little to 
 one side after if higher and before if lower; but always 
 in such a manner that the end next the vowel points 
 directly toward it. It is never placed between a vowel 
 and stem. In the case of a vowel before a perpendicu- 
 lar stem it is written under, or under and before the 
 vowel so that it may not interfere with the aspirate 
 dot should it be necessary to write the latter. 
 
 143. The apostrophe is used to denote the omis- 
 sion of letters in a word and to indicate the possessive 
 case after the manner employed in script and print. 
 To denote omission it is placed in the first position to 
 the stem. To indicate the possessive case it is 
 placed in the third position above the stem on 
 horizontal and upward strokes and to the right of it 
 on downward ones. The apostrophe is not often 
 employed. 
 
 144. The remaining orthographical marks are em- 
 ployed to indicate roman and italic letters. The
 
 7G THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 intersecting mark, which is called the Heavy Face Mark, 
 is written in the direction of Ch and is struck through 
 the horizontal one at or near the center, if the latter 
 is short, but if long, near the beginning. All the 
 characters are placed under or near one or more letters 
 according to convenience. The orthographical marks 
 are sixteen in number.' 
 
 a. In this book heavy face type is usually em- 
 ployed to represent letters, words and figures that are 
 to be distinguished from the rest of the text, but 
 which are not emphatic. When thus used they are 
 said to be for distinction. (See also par. b.) 
 
 b. Again, in this book italic is usually employed 
 (outside of its stenotyp'ic representation) only for em- 
 phasis. (See.also sec. 140, a.) 
 
 THE DIVISION MARKS. 
 
 145. In this system a section consists of one or 
 more paragraphs a paragraph, as usual, consisting of 
 a break in the writing or printing. The mark for the 
 section in the list should usually be made without lift- 
 ing the pen. The mark for the paragraph is the same 
 as in script and also like the one in print except that 
 the black or shaded part is left white or unshaded. 
 Both the marks for the section and paragraph may be 
 employed in connected writing if desired. Usually, 
 however, the mark for the break is used indiscrimin- 
 ately for either, since it is more swiftly written. The 
 sections and paragraphs are then arranged when tran- 
 scribing. 
 
 146. Sometimes an explanatory paragraph occurs 
 within a section. In such a case it is termed a Remark 
 and is distinguished differently from the other sul>- 
 paragraphs, namely, by a number. No division sign 
 is necessary for the remark. Again, unindented por- 
 tions of a section when lettered or numbered are 
 called Parts the letters or numbers usually being in
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 77 
 
 parentheses. Finally a subparagraph and a remark 
 together are termed a Subsection. The division signs 
 are three in number. 
 
 147. In this book the specific marks or names are 
 not employed at the beginning of the paragraphs, but 
 instead numbers or letters are used; the sections and 
 remarks being numbered and the other breaks which 
 are usually for convenience specified as paragraphs, 
 lettered. Thus "103, a, 1" or "118 b," is read "Sec- 
 tion 103, paragraph a, remark 1," or "Section 118, 
 paragraph b." Also "8, (a)" or "135, a (1)" is read 
 "Section 8, part a" or "Section 135, paragraph, a, 
 part 1." In each instance when the above notation is 
 employed the last member "1, b, (a)" or "(1)" is 
 specially referred to, the same as in book, chapter 
 and verse in scriptural references; or the method may 
 be reversed; thus "1, a. 103; b, 118; (a), 8," or "(1), 
 a, 135" when the first member is meant. When the 
 term ' 'subsection" is employed, it includes the remark 
 or remarks; thus "Section 103, subsection a," indi- 
 cates both paragraph a and the remark under it. 
 
 THE INSERTION MARK. 
 
 148. The caret is employed to show where inter- 
 lined words are introduced and is used mostly in 
 private composition. It should be made quite acute 
 and of sufficient length to be easily distinguished from 
 the short hand characters. It is written with its point 
 in the direction of the interlined matter which is 
 usually above the lino through which the caret points. 
 Sometimes, however, the interlineation is bel'ow the 
 line in which case the caret is made with its point 
 downward. 
 
 THE REFERENCE MARKS. 
 
 149. There are three reference marks; namely, the 
 asterisk, dagger and double dagger, to indicate foot or
 
 78 THE PUo\or;i.'APHIC MANTAL. 
 
 marginal notes. They are mostly employed in private 
 composition. . If any more are required they may be 
 doubled or trebled. The better way, however, is to 
 use numbers or letters enclosed by circles after the 
 manner of the small figures or letters technically 
 called "superiors," employed in script and print. (See 
 also sec. 46). 
 
 THE MATHEMATICAL, MARKS. 
 
 150. The five fundamental mathematical marks, 
 being often useful in shorthand, are included in the 
 table. They should be made of the ordinary size.
 
 THE PilONooKAPHIC JIAXITAL. 79 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 HOOKS, ETC. 
 
 LESSOX 12. 
 INITIAL HOOKS. 
 
 THE U AND L HOOKS. 
 
 151. If the circumference of a circle were to re- 
 volve around us it could do so only in two ways 
 either to the right or left. Therefore all arcs are por- 
 tions of circumferences traced either to the right or 
 left and called right or left arcs or curves. 
 
 152. When a letter, except upward R or L, is 
 made with a small initial right hook it indicates that R 
 is added to it; when, except N, Ng and upward R, 
 with a small left one, that L is added. A curved 
 stem written alone or initially can not receive a hook 
 on its convex side and be written quickly as it turns 
 more or less into an opposite curve with a hook on the 
 concave side. Accordingly as the double consonant 
 Sr or Zr with a vowel following it in the same syl- 
 lable does not exist initially in English and the phon- 
 ograph for it is thus not needed in writing, and as S or 
 Z with a vowel and R following is represented as ex- 
 yjlained in Chapter III, the stem S or Z with an initial 
 hook is used to represent Thr or Dhr; and as similar 
 rules govern \V, the latter, when it receives an initial 
 hook, becomes Fr and may be shaded for Vr. In the 
 case of M and N, however, which can not be so treated 
 for lack of stenographic material, the small hook on
 
 SO THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 these letters represents R and a large one, twice its 
 size, L. The same is true of Mp or Mb and Ng, 
 which will presently be further considered, (a.) 
 Again, a double sized L hook is used on downward Sh 
 in addition to the small R hook, the same as on M and 
 N. Upward Shi, the same as upward Sh (see sec. 
 18,) is never written alone. Downward and upward 
 Shi are usually written initially before the same stems 
 as downward and upward Sh, as will be explained in 
 the next chapter. 
 
 153. A double sized left hook on upward R adds 
 L and a similar right one on upward L adds R. The 
 small hooks on these letters will be considered 
 presently. 
 
 154. The large hooks on upward Sh and on Y and 
 the large right one on upward R are not used. 
 
 155. Downward R and L do not receive initial 
 hooks in order that they may not conflict with Fr 
 and Yl. 
 
 a. An initial hook is never attached to a vowel. 
 
 156. From the preceding it will be seen that simi- 
 lar hooks, circles and loops are always placed on sim- 
 ilar curves. Also that the more frequently occur- 
 ring R sounds are represented with right hooks, which 
 are more easily written than the left ones because the 
 hand proceeds from left to right. Thus these hooks 
 are mostly made in the direction of the writing. If 
 we wrote from right to left the R sounds would be 
 represented with left hooks because then the latter 
 would be more easily written. 
 
 THE R AND L HOOKS ON MP OR MB AND NG. 
 
 157. When Mp or Mb (see sec. 24) receives an 
 initial hook R or L is added the same as to the other 
 letters, the combination becoming Mpr, Mbr, Mpl or 
 Mbl. (See sec. 152.) 
 
 158. When Ng receives an initial hook, however,
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MAXUAL. 
 
 not only is R or L added the same as to other letters 
 and to Mp or Mb, but also G is frequently repre- 
 sented, the combination becoming in the case of R 
 either Ngr or Nggr and in that of L either Ngl or 
 Nggl. (See see's. 152 and 53.) 
 
 a. If extra distinction is ev.^r desired in the case 
 of words containing the consonants in paragraphs 157 
 and 158 those ending in Br, Bl, Gr or Gl may be writ- 
 ten in full with the B or G 'hooked stems. This, how- 
 ever, will seldom be necessary. 
 
 b. From paragraph 158 it will be seen that K is 
 not represented in the combination of Ng with an in- 
 itial hook. Accordingly the combinations Nkr and 
 Nkl are written with the two stems NgKr and NgKl; 
 as in "inker, inkle, ranker" and "rankle." (See eng. 
 165.) 
 
 THE R AND L AND THE W AND Y DOUBLE CONSONANTS. 
 
 159. The consonants R, L, W and Y often follow 
 and apparently unite with other consonants at the be- 
 ginning of syllables and form a syllable with the fol- 
 lowing vowel as in Pre, Pie, Twe and Tye. These 
 consonants when so united are called the R and L and 
 the W and Y double consonants and never have a vowel 
 between them as such. 
 
 THE R AND L, DOUBLE CONSONANTS, ETC. 
 
 160. The R and L double consonants are formed 
 with the R and L hooks as above described mostly on 
 the stems P, T, K, F, Thand Sh (see sec. 19.) The L 
 hook on T is not usually employed in English words. 
 It is employed in foreign ones, however, as in 
 "Tlascala." (See eng. 164, line 6.) 
 
 161. The double consonant stems are, when more 
 convenient, also employed to represent the single con- 
 sonants; namely, the same sounds with a vowel be- 
 tween as in Per or Pel. This is usually the course 
 pursued with the stems Sh and Th standing alone.
 
 82 THE PHOXOORAPIUC MANUAL. 
 
 a. Upward R with the largo L hook (see sec. 153) 
 is usually employed only as a single consonant stem ; 
 that is when a word occurs between the R and L as in 
 "oral, rule'' or "carol.'* (See eng's. 165, line 2 and 
 166, line 2). 
 
 b. When R or L without a following vowel occurs 
 after M and before Ch or Sh a's in "march, marcher, 
 merge, marsh,- milch " it is generally written with the 
 hook on the M stem. 
 
 102. The names of the R and L hooks are Ir and 
 11 and their stenotypes are r and 1. 
 
 NOMENCLATURE AND STENOTYPY OF THE R AND L 
 HOOKED STEMS. 
 
 163. The R and L hooked stems and their steno- 
 types, whether representing double or single consonants, 
 are named by uttering the vjowel after the hook, except 
 in the cases of C, J, M, X, R, L, Y, Mp and Ng, when 
 it is uttered before it ; thus Pr, PI, Tr, Tl, Cr, Cl, 
 Jr, Jl, Mr, Ml, Nr, Nl, Rl, Lr, Yl, Y\, Mpr, Mpl, 
 Xgr, Ngl, are named Pree, Plee, Tree, Tlee, Ceer, 
 Ceel, Jeer, Jeel, Meer, Meel, Neer, .Neel, Reel, 
 Leer, Yeel, Yayl, Meeper, Meepel, Eenger, Eengel (not 
 Eengger, Eenggel). 
 
 VOCALIZATION OF THE R AND L HOOKED STEMS. 
 
 164. Double consonant stems are vocalized the 
 same as if no hooks were attached ; namely, by writing 
 the vowels before or after them. 
 
 165. Single consonant stems are vocalized in the 
 same manner, except that the intermediate vowel, that 
 is the one between the stem and hook, is struck through 
 the former, as in the case of the Mp or Mb stem. (See 
 sec. .M).
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. JSlJ 
 
 a. If the intermediate vowel is a dash made in 
 the same direction as the stem it is written with its 
 alternative form as explained in section 32. In any 
 case if necessary for legibility the intermediate vowel 
 may be made somewhat larger than usual. (See also 
 sec. 51). 
 
 1. For the stenotypic vocalization of the single 
 consonant stems see section 52. 
 
 166. When the R and L hooked stems occur in un- 
 accented syllables they frequently denote Pr, PI, etc., 
 with what is called the Protean Vowel between them. 
 This closely resembles short u, or a sound between it 
 and short e or i ; but, as its name indicates, it is not an 
 accurate or fixed, that is a regular, vowel, for it may 
 be slightly different in the same word at different times, 
 byt not to extent of being very noticeable in ordinary 
 speech. When inserted it is usually represented by 
 short e. (See the words ' ' upper, apple, temper, temple, 
 inker, inkle," etc., in eng. ) 
 
 167. It is not always necessary .to write the inter- 
 mediate vowel, whether regular or protean (see last 
 paragraph) particularly the latter between the stem 
 and the R or L. When, therefore, it is omitted in the 
 course of the exercises, the learner will understand that 
 it is done intentionally. 
 
 METHOD OF WRITING WORDS CONTAINING THE MEDIAL 
 OR FINAL SOUNDS MR OR ML. 
 
 168. When the sounds MR or ML occur medially 
 or finally they are usually written with the Mr or 
 Ml hooked stem in the case of Sh after the upward 
 form. 
 
 a. If preferred the hooked stem may be employed 
 after downward Sh instead -of after the upward form, 
 or the M and R or L stems may be written if the hooked 
 stem is not thought to make a sufficiently convenient or 
 distinct joining. (See also sec. 169, 1).
 
 rtl THI-: PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 METHOD OF WRITING WORDS CONTAINING THK SOfNlXS 
 MI' OR MB. 
 
 WHEN MP OR MB IS FOLLOWED BT K OR L. 
 
 169. The Mpr or Mpl hooked stem (see sec. 157) 
 is generally used when the accent is on the vowel pre- 
 ceding the MP or MB and a vowel and It. or L follows 
 the P or B ; as in "umpire, simper, temper, amber, 
 somber, lumber, ample " or "amble, assemble, sample '' 
 or "cymbal, rumple" or "rumble, jumper " Mpr, 
 sMpr, TMpr, Mpr, sMpr, LMpr, Mpl, SMpl, sAIpl, 
 RMpl, JMpr. (See paragraphs 1 and d). 
 
 1. The Mpr or Mpl .hooked stem, the same as the 
 Mr or Ml one (see sec. 168) is usually written after 
 upward Sh instead of after the downward form. If 
 preferred, however, it may be written after the lattdr 
 or the Mplt or MpL stems may be employed if the 
 hooked stem is not thought to make a sufficiently con- 
 venient and distinct joining. 
 
 a. The Mpr or'Mpl hooked stem is never used when 
 M is the initial sound in a word. 
 
 b. The Pr, PI or Br, Bl hooked stems are generally 
 used after M .when PR, PL, etc., occur as double con- 
 sonants and also as single consonants (the intervening 
 vowel being unaccented) after initial M, or when M is 
 followed by two vowels before PR, PL, etc., as in 
 "empress, ambrosia, employ, emblem, lamprey, 
 Bimbley, Mabley, May per, maple, mobile" or "ami- 
 able" MPrs, MBrZh, MP1, MB1M, LMPr, BMB1, 
 MB1, MPr, MP1, MB1. 
 
 1. The last paragraph, of course, does not apply 
 to derivative words, which are usually written with 
 the forms of their primitives ; thus, MpR, mobber. 
 
 c. In all other cases, that is when MPR, MPL, 
 etc., occur after an initial vowel the accent (except in 
 derivative words) being after MP or MB and before 
 R or L, the Mp and R or L stems are generally em-
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC 5IAXUAL. 85 
 
 ployed, as in "impair, embark, embarras, impale, 
 embellish " MpR, MpRK, MpRs, MpL, MpLSh. 
 d. The Mp and R or L stems are also employed for 
 alternative forms for words having the same or similar 
 consonants in which the accented vowel precedes MP 
 or MB as in paragraph 169 above. Thus "symbol" 
 is written sMpL so as to distinguish it from sMpl ijpr 
 "cymbal," when the vowels are omitted in the Report- 
 ing Style. (See also sec. 60, b). 
 
 170. From the preceding it will be observed that 
 except after an initial vowel and when M is the initial 
 sound (see paragraphs 169 and a) the same rules 
 mostly govern the writing of Mpr and Mpl as Mr and 
 Ml. (See sec. 168). 
 
 WHEN MP OR MB IS NOT FOLLOWED BY R OR L. 
 
 171. The Mp stem (and not the stems M and P or 
 M and B) is generally used when R or L does not 
 follow MP or MB; as in "map, mob" or "imbue, 
 impeach, humbug, campana" Mp, MpC, hMpG, 
 KMpX. 
 
 a. From the last paragraph it will be perceived 
 that the P or B simple stem is seldom employed 
 after M. 
 
 THE W AND Y DOUBLE CONSONANTS. 
 
 THE LARGE W HOOK. 
 
 172. The W double consonants (see sec. 159) are 
 formed with a large initial left hook, twice the size of 
 a small one, on the straight stems P, T, Ch and K and 
 on the left curves F and Th and are vocalized the 
 same as the L double consonant stems. (See sec. 
 104). 
 
 a. The large initial W hook is not formed on 
 upward R or on the left curves N, Y and upward Sh, 
 since the two former already have a large L hook and the
 
 8G THE PHOXOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 two latter do not take a large hook. (See sees. 152 
 to 154). 
 
 173. The W double consonant stems are not 
 employed to represent the single consonants; such 
 words as ' 'Kewaunee" being written with the stems K 
 and W. 
 
 .174. The W hook is not used in the middle of 
 words if inconvenient to join. In such cases it should 
 be omitted and the small W consonant stem and vowel 
 as in section 60 inserted, disjoined after the stem let- 
 ter instead. (See the word "esquire," the last in 
 eng. 174; and the word "frequency," the third from 
 the end of the first line of eng. 200). 
 
 175. The Y double consonants, which mostly occur 
 before the long vowel u, are written as in sections 00 
 and 62, the double sized initial right hook not being 
 employed. 
 
 176. The name of the large "W hook is Wi. (See 
 sec. 97). 
 
 177. The large W hooked stems and their steno- 
 types are named with the long vowel e after them in 
 the same syllable; thus, Pw, Bw, Tw, Dw are pro- 
 nounced Pwee, Bwee, Twee, Dwee. 
 
 THE SMALL W AND Y HOOKS. 
 
 178 A small initial left hook on upward R pre- 
 fixes W and a right one prefixes Y. Either hook may 
 be shaded initially for the aspirate sound. The stem 
 is vocalized the same as stems with the breath ticks or 
 initial S circle. In the case of such words as "aware" 
 and "oyer" the initial vowel is placed before the AV 
 hook or under the Y hook, but not before the begin- 
 ning of the stem. 
 
 179. A small initial right hook on upward L pre- 
 fixes W. It may be shaded to represent the aspirate. 
 The stem is vocalized the same as R with the initial Y 
 hook in the last paragraph.
 
 THE PHOXOGRAPIirr MANUAL. S7 
 
 180. The small W or Y hook on R or the small W 
 hook on L is always employed except where two 
 vowels intervene between the W or Y and the R or L, 
 in which case the stems W and Y are used with the R 
 or L stem. 
 
 181. The names of the small W and Y hooks are 
 Weh and Yeh pronounced without the h; viz, We 
 and Ye and their stenotypes are w and y. 
 
 182. The small W and Y hooked steins and their 
 stenotypes are named with the long vowel e between 
 the hook and stem, thus, ??R, ?/R, ?/?L are uttered 
 Weer, Yeer, Weel. 
 
 IMPERFECT INITIAL HOOKS, ETC. 
 
 183. Sometimes when an initial hook is joined to 
 a preceding letter it can not be perfectly formed. In 
 such cases the hook is made w r ith a slight offset of the 
 pen, usually on the preceding stem; as in "taper, 
 trigger, trimmer, trammel, chimer, assnmer, color, 
 ripple, camel, chamber, jumble, assemble," in engrav- 
 ing 167 and "Rockwell" in engraving 179. 
 
 a. L with initial hooks or R with the initial right 
 hook is not usually written after T, S, Ch and clown- 
 ward Sh. In such cases the words are written with 
 the initial L hook stems, the R and L stems or with 
 one of the latter and the small disjoined W and Y 
 characters as explained in Section 60; or in the case of 
 Sh, with the upward form before the W hook on L 
 and the Y one on R. (See also sees. 168 and 169). 
 
 LESSON 13. 
 
 S PREFIXED TO INITIAL HOOKS. 
 
 184. A .small initial right circle on straight 
 stems (thus changing the It hook into a circle) 
 and on the hooks of right curves, prefixes S to the R 
 scries of hooked stems, to the Y hook on R, to the W
 
 88 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 hook on. L and to the large 'L hooks on M, Mp 
 and Sh. 
 
 a. S is used on the Y hook only in the Reporting 
 Style. 
 
 185. A small initial left circle on the hooks of 
 straight stems and left curves prefixes S to the L and 
 W series of hooked stems, to the W hook on R and to 
 the small R hook on N and IS'g. 
 
 a. When the circle is written within the hook as 
 above, it is made smaller and more oval than usual. 
 
 186 The circle S as above is used to represent 
 initial S whether the latter is followed immediately 1 >y 
 a vowel or forms part of an S double consonant or 
 occurs as in section 188 hereafter. ' 
 
 187. The double consonant Sw is written before R 
 or L according to the principle in section 163; that is it 
 is written with the circle and hook when one vowel 
 intervenes between the W and the R or L and with the 
 circle and stem when two vowels intervene. Sw is 
 also written with the circle antl stem when a vowel 
 intervenes between the S and W, as in "suwarrow" or 
 "Sewell. v The last observation applies also to Sy. 
 
 THE S TREBLE CONSONANTS, ETC. 
 
 188. The consonant S apparently unites with the 
 R, L and W and sometimes the Y double consonants, 
 as in the syllables Spre, Sple, Skwe, Spye. These are 
 called the S Treble consonants and never have a vowel 
 among them as such. They are usually formed in 
 English only on the straight stems P, T and K. 
 
 189. When occurring in the middle of a word the 
 R and L hooks should, if possible, be formed after the 
 circle S. Sometimes, however, they may be indicated 
 by making a loop on the previous stem, as in the 
 words "dispraise" and "explicit." Where it is not 
 convenient to plainly indicate the hook with the loop,
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 89 
 
 it should be omitted, as in the word "sensible." (a). 
 Again, the R hook on K, F and their heavy cognate 
 letters, when they occur after T or D maybe indicated 
 by making a left circle on the T or D. The R hook on 
 P or B likewise may be indicated by the left circle on 
 Ch or J, as in "jasper." 
 
 NOMENCLATURE AND STENOTYPY OF THE INITIAL HOOK 
 STEMS WITH S PREFIXED. 
 
 190. When the S circle is prefixed to an initial 
 hook stem standing alone the phonograph is usually 
 pronounced simply by prefixing the S sound to that of 
 the hooked stem; thus, sPr, sPl, sBr, sShr, sNr, sNl, 
 s'R, s.yR, sKw, -sMpr, sMpl, sNgr, sNgl are named 
 Spree, Splee,Sbree, Sshree, Sneer, Sneel, Sweer,Skwee, 
 Smeeper, Smeepel, Seenger, Seengel. (See eng. 184 
 to 186.) 
 
 191. When the S circle is made regularly within 
 an initial hook on a final or medial stem it is pro- 
 nounced in the same syllable with the stem which pre- 
 cedes; thus KsTr, DsPr, PrsKr, DsPl, KsPl are 
 spoken Kees Tree, Dees Pree, Prees Kree, Dees Plee, 
 Kees Plee, (see the words "extra, dispraise, prescribe, 
 display" and "explore" eng. 1S9.) 
 
 192. If, however, it is not made regularly within 
 the hook but half on the back of a preceding opposite 
 curve to that of the hook it is named and represented 
 in stenotypy the same as in section 96; thus VsPr, 
 V*Tr are pronounced Vee Us Pree, Vee Us Tree. (See 
 the words "vesper" and "vestry" in eng. 189 line 2.) 
 
 193. The same method is followed when the circle 
 is not made within the hook; thus D-s-Kr, D.s-Fr, JsPr 
 are uttered Dee Us Kree, Dee Us Free, Jee Us Pree. 
 (See the words "descry, decipher" and "jasper," eng. 
 l<s:->, a.)
 
 90 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 SS AND ST PREFIXED TO THE R HOOK ON STRAIGHT 
 STEMS. 
 
 194. A large right Ss circle or a right St loop 
 may be prefixed to the R series of straight stems. 
 Neither character is ever made within the hook. 
 
 a. In the reporting style the right Ss circle is also 
 prefixed to the Y hook on R. The right St loop 4 , how- 
 ever, is not used. (See also see's. 154 and 175.) 
 
 SS PREFIXED TO THE L HOOK ON FINAL UPWARD R. 
 
 195. Ss may be prefixed by the large left circle to 
 the L hook on final upward R, half of the circle being 
 made on the hook and half on the preceding stem; as 
 NssRl, necessarily. (See also sec. 88.) 
 
 THE H TICKS JOINED TO ALL INITIAL HOOK STEMS. 
 
 196. The H ticks may be joined to all initial hook 
 stems, either the downward or upward form being em- 
 ployed according to convenience. The downward 
 form is used on all hooks except those on K, R, up- 
 ward Sh, M, L and the R hook on F, in which cases 
 the upward one is written. (See, also, paragraphs 27 
 and a and 76 to 81.) 
 
 a. These ticks are seldom joined to the hooked 
 stems when the latter occur medially or finally. 
 
 THE H TICKS AND THE SMALL W AND Y HOOKS. 
 
 197. The H ticks are never joined to the small W 
 and Y hooks in the same syllable with the latter on 
 upward R and L; these hooks being then usually 
 shaded initially instead. If extra distinction is de- 
 sired, however, the aspirate dot may be written before 
 the hook in addition. But this will seldom be neces- 
 sary. (See also sec. 28.)
 
 THE PHONOGRAPAIC MANUAL. 91 
 
 OMISSION OF THE H TICKS. 
 
 198. The H ticks may be omitted altogether be- 
 fore the hooked stems if desired. (See also sec. 81.) 
 
 LESSON U. 
 FINAL HOOKS. 
 
 THE N HOOK. 
 
 199. A small final right hook on straight stems 
 adds N. On curved ones N is added by a small hook 
 on the concave side. The stems, like those with the 
 final S circle, are vocalized the same as if no hook 
 were attached. 
 
 200. The N hook is often used medially as well as 
 finally in a. word. 
 
 a. When two Ns with a vowel between occur 
 medially, the first is usually written with the hook and 
 the second with the stem if the accent precedes both 
 Ns, but if it precedes the second N the method is re- 
 versed. The latter method is also usually followed in 
 compound words. In all cases derivatives usually re- 
 tain the forms of their primitives. (See see's. 107 
 and 108.) 
 
 b. When N without a following vowel occurs be- 
 fore Ch after straight stems and right curves the 
 hook is used. When it occurs thus after left curves 
 the stem is employed. The hook is never used before 
 a final vowel; the stem then being written instead as 
 in the word "penny." 
 
 c. If the learner prefers he may write the stem 
 N in all cases when N occurs medially before Ch, ex- 
 cept after K and W. 
 
 d. When the word "stone," or one of similar 
 formation, occurs finally in a word it is usually writ- 
 ten with the S circle, the T stem and N hook; thus, 
 ShNsTn, Shcnstone, LMsTn, limestone. When it
 
 ;>_ THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 occurs alone or initially it is written with the initial 
 St loop and X stem as explained in section 124, thus, 
 stN, stone; stXPL, stone-pile; stXMsX, stone-mason. 
 
 201. The X hook on straight stems formed into a 
 circle represents Xs. The large circle so formed 
 represents Xss. The Xs and Xss circles are easily 
 distinguishable from the S and Ss circles since the 
 former are right circles and the latter left ones, and 
 are also on opposite sides of the stems. 
 
 202. The S circle may be added to the X' hook on 
 curves, but the Ss circle cannot be so added; the stem 
 X and the Ss circle always then being used. The S 
 circle may sometimes be added medially to the X' 
 hook, as in "ransom." An,S treble consonant may 
 also be written within the X hook, if there is room, to 
 indicate the K hook by lengthening the circle into a 
 loop, as in "minstrel." 
 
 203. Xst and Xstr may be added to straight stems 
 by making the N hook into a right St and Str loop. 
 When Xst and Xstr occur after curved letters they are 
 usually written with the N stem and St and Str loops. 
 
 204. The names of the X" hook, Xs and Xss circles, 
 Xst and Xstr loops are In, Ins, Insess, Inst and Instr 
 and their stenotypes are n, ns, nss, nst and nstr. 
 
 205. A stem with any of the above attachments is 
 usually pronounced the same as without it, simply the 
 syllable for the attachment being added; thus, Pn, 
 Prn, Pin, X'n, Xns, Nr, Ngn, Pns, Pnss, Pnst, Pnstr, 
 Pnsts, Pnstrs are spoken Peen, Preen, Pleen, Neen, 
 Xeens, Xeern, Eengeen, Peens, Peenses, Peenst, 
 Peenster, Peensts, Peensters. 
 
 a. When the S circle is made within the X hook 
 on a straight stem they are pronounced separately; 
 thus RnsM are uttered Keo In Iss Mee. 
 
 THI: F HOOK. 
 
 206. A small final left hook on straight sU-msadds
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 93 
 
 F or V. The stems are vocalized like those with the 
 N hook. (a). This hook is used medially as well as 
 finally (b), bat never before .a final vowel; the F or V 
 stem then being employed, (c). The circle S may be 
 written within the hook; but not the Ss circle. In 
 such cases the stem F or V is employed, (d). If de- 
 sired the hook may be shaded to indicate V; but this 
 is seldom necessary. 
 
 207. The name for the F hook is If or Iv and its 
 stenotype is f or v. 
 
 208. A stem with the hook, or hook and circle, is 
 pronounced as usual, simply, the sound for these being 
 added; thus, Pf, Prf, Prfs are uttered Peef, Preef, 
 Preefs. 
 
 a. When Fr occurs finally after a straight stem it 
 is usually written with the F hook and upward R stem 
 as in "coffer, puffer, tougher, devour, chaffer, river." 
 (KfR, PfR, TfR, DfR, CfR, RfR). 
 
 b. But when Fl thus occurs it is usually written 
 with the. Fl stem as in "cavil, bevel, trifle, jovial, 
 ruffle, revel," (KV1, BV1, TrFl, JV1, RF1, RV1). 
 
 LESSON 15. 
 
 THE TEE HOOK. 
 
 209. A large final right hook on all straight stems 
 adds Tr, Dr, Thr or Dhr (the context indicating which) 
 with a vowel between the T, D, Th or Dh and the R. 
 The stems are vocalized like those with the N and F 
 hooks. The hook, which is called the Ter hook, is 
 vocalized by striking the intermediate vowel or char- 
 acter through it just after the curve after the manner 
 of vocalizing the Str loop. This, however, is seldom 
 necessary. Stems with the Ter hook may be used in 
 connection with other stems as well as alo'ne. 
 
 a. If extra distinction is ever desired b'etween or 
 among words ending with the above syllables those in
 
 (| (. THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 Dr, Thr or Dh.r may be written in full with the I>r, 
 Thr or Dhr hooked stems. But these distinctions will 
 seldom l>e needed. 
 
 b. The terminal sounds Thr with a vowel between 
 the Th and R as in "Arthur 1 ' seldom occur. Those 
 of Dhr, however, their heavy sounds as in "gather," 
 happen very frequently. 
 
 210. S or Z is added to this hook by the small 
 circle. 
 
 211. When the Ter hook which is a right hook- 
 occurs on a stem that follows a right curved one with- 
 out an angle it is somewhat difficult to preserve the 
 straightness of the stem, since both the curve and hook 
 are on the same side of the latter. In such cases. a> 
 in the words "elector, selector" and "escheator" the 
 termination may be written with the R hooked stem 
 Tr instead of the Ter hook, if preferred, as in the last 
 three examples in the engraving. 
 
 a. It is not usually necessary to shade the hook to 
 indicate the heavy sound Dr or Dhr. 
 
 b. The Ter hook is never used before a final 
 vowel. 
 
 212. The stenotypes for the Ter hook are tr or dr, 
 the latter being employed if the hook is shaded. 
 
 213. A. stem with the Ter hook is usually named 
 by adding the syllable for the hook to that of the stem ; 
 thus, Dtr, sTter, Rtr, sRtr stRtr are pronounced 
 Deeter, Steeter, Reeter, Sreeter, Stay Reeter. The 
 same course is pursued if the hook is shaded for Dr 
 or Dhr. 
 
 LESSOX 16. 
 
 THE SHUN HOOK. 
 
 214. A large final left hook on straight stems and 
 a large final- one on curves adds Shn or Zhn with a 
 vowel between the Sh or /h and X. The hook, which 
 is called the Shun hook, may be used medially when
 
 THE PHOXOfiRAPHrC MAXCAK <J5 
 
 convenient. The stems are vocalized like those with the 
 N, FandTer hooks. The Shun hook may be vocalized 
 the same as the Ter hook. This, however, is seldom 
 necessary as the intermediate vowel is usually short u. 
 S or Z is added to this hook by the small circle. 
 
 a. It is not usually necessary to shade the hook to 
 indicate the heavy sound Zh. 
 
 b. The Shun hook is never used before a final 
 vowel. 
 
 215. The stenotypes for the Shun hook are shn or 
 zhn, the latter being employed if the hook is shaded 
 
 216. A stem with the Shun hook is usually pro- 
 nounced the same as when without it, simply the syllable 
 for the hook being added ; thus Dshn is spoken 
 Deeshun. The same course is pursued if the Zhun 
 hook is added. 
 
 a. When upward R or L follows the Shun hook on 
 a perpendicular stem the junction is rendered some- 
 what easier by curving the end of the hook slightly 
 inward. (See engraving 214, line 6). 
 
 THE SHUN CURL Oil QUADRANT. 
 
 217. Shn or Zhn, with a vowel between the Sh or 
 Zh and the X, is added to a final S or Ns circle by con- 
 tinuing the latter through to the other side of the stem 
 and there forming a small curl or quarter circle. It 
 may also be occasionally added to a circle on a final 
 hook. The curl, which is called the Shun curl or Shun 
 quadrant, may be used medially as well as finally. The 
 vowel immediately following the circle is written before 
 or above the curl, whichever is most convenient. The 
 Shun curl may be vocalized after the manner of the 
 Shun hook by striking the intermediate vowel through 
 it. This, however, is seldom necessary as the vowel 
 is usually short u. S or Z is added to this curl by the 
 small circle.
 
 <j(j TlfE PHONOGRAPHIC MANTAL. 
 
 218. The curl is written with its end at right 
 angles to that of its stem except on horizontal curves 
 when the end is brought around somewhat more than 
 at right angles. Sometimes, again, when the curl oc- 
 curs medially it is turned in whatever direction may l>e 
 convenient to form an angle with the following letter ; 
 as in "processionary." 
 
 a. It is not usually necessary to shade the curl to 
 indicate Zhun. 
 
 b. The Shun curl is never used before a final vowel. 
 
 219. The stenotypes for the Shun curl are tskn or 
 zJu'i. the latter being used if the curl is shaded. 
 
 220. A stem and circle with the Shun curl are 
 usually pronounced the same as when without it, simply 
 the name for the curl being added; thus Ps.s7//? are spoken 
 Peesshun. The same course is pursued if the Zhun 
 curl is added. 
 
 DOWNWARD K AND L AND FINAL HOOKS, ETC. 
 
 221. As downward R and L never stand alone 
 they can take a final hook or -curl only when occurring 
 after other stems. 
 
 222. The St or Str loop is never written within a 
 final hook. 
 
 223. A final hook or curl is never attached to a 
 vowel. 
 
 224. An attachment to a-stem is a circle, loop, hook 
 or curl. 
 
 225. In this book a stem is said to be simple when 
 it is without attachments and compound when it is 
 with them. 
 
 226. A prependage is an initial attachment and an 
 appendage is a final one. 
 
 227. Whatever applies to a simple stem usually 
 applies also to a compound one.
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANt'AL 97 
 
 HOOKS <;I:NERALLY WRITTEN MEDIALLY WHEN 
 POSSIBLE. 
 
 228. In this system for the sake of uniformity a 
 hook is generally written medially when possible un- 
 less greater speed and legibility can be obtained by 
 using the stem or stems.
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANTAT.. 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 DOWNWARD AND UPWARD R, L AND SH. 
 
 LESSON 17. 
 
 229. In the first chapter, sections 12 to 18, rules 
 were given for distinguishing downward and upward 
 R and L from W, Y and Ch and downward and 
 upward Sh from each other. In the present chapter, 
 rules will be given for writing either form of R, L 
 and Sh in connection with other letters. 
 
 DOWNWARD AND UPWARD R. 
 
 230. Downward R (as explained in Chapter I) 
 never stands alone in order that it may not conflict 
 with AV. For the same reason it is never used 
 initially or as the first stem in a word, but only medi- 
 ally or finally. 
 
 231. Downward R is generally employed after the 
 left curve F without appendages when R is the last 
 stem in a syllable or word and not followed by a vowel. 
 (See sec. 19). 
 
 232. In all other cases upward R is generally used. 
 It is also generally written medially after F to avoid 
 an awkward junction. 
 
 a. If the learner prefers he may, in addition to 
 writing downward R after F, write it also after the 
 four straight stems, P, T, Ch and K (see sec. 19) with- 
 out appendages the three first, with or without pre- 
 pendages and the last with or without left ones.
 
 .o. **.** 
 
 . 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. Of) 
 
 :XA5 
 
 UPWARD R AFTER FINAL HOOKS. 
 
 233. Upward R is usually written after final left 
 hooks. (See par. c below and also sec. 208, a). 
 
 a. After final right ones it is usually written only 
 in derivative words. In other cases the initial hook 
 stems are generally employed. In derivative words 
 after final right hooks on perpendicular stems and 
 those made downward to the left, it is either written 
 disjoined or the initial hook stems are employed usu- 
 ally the latter. (See par. c below). 
 
 b. If preferred, downward R joined may usually 
 be written in the case of derivative words mentioned 
 in the last sentence above. 
 
 c. Paragraphs 233 and a do not usually apply when 
 it is necessary to preserve a primitive form, as in 
 "diverse 15 or "renerve." In such cases the initial 
 hook stems are generally written; thus, DVrs, RNrV. 
 
 234. If preferred, upward R may be written after 
 final hooks only in derivative words and the initial 
 hook stems written in primitives or compounds.. 
 
 DOWNWARD AND UPWARD L. 
 
 235. Downward L (as explained in Chapter I) never 
 stands alone in order that it may not conflict with Y. 
 For the same reason it is never used initially or as the 
 first stem in a word, but only medially or finally. 
 
 236. Downward L is generally used: 
 
 a. After the left curve F without appendages when 
 L is the final stem in a syllable or word and not fol- 
 lowed by a vowel. 
 
 b. After N without appendages. 
 
 C. After a final circle on a left curve. 
 
 d. After a left Shun curl. 
 
 237. In all other cases upward L is generally 
 employed. It is also generally employed medially to 
 avoid an awkward junction, or it may be written finally 
 to vary a form.
 
 100 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MAXt'AI.. 
 
 UPWARD L, AFTER FINAL HOOKS. 
 
 238. Upward L is not usually written after the 
 F hook. Instead the initial hook stem Fl is generally 
 employed. (See also sec. 208, b). 
 
 a. It is usually written after large final hooks 
 except after right ones on perpendicular stems and 
 those made downward to the left, when it is either 
 written disjoined or the initial hook stems are emplo} r ed 
 usually the latter. 
 
 1. After the N hook it is usually written only in 
 derivative words. In other cases the initial hook stem 
 M is generally employed. In derivative words after 
 the right N hooks where the exception in paragraph a 
 governs, it is written according to the same principle; 
 namely, either disjoined or with the initial Nl stem. 
 
 b. If preferred, downward L joined may usually 
 be written in the case of the right hooks in the excep- 
 tion/in paragraph a and the derivative words in the last 
 sentence of paragraph 1. 
 
 c. Paragraph 1 does not usually apply when it is 
 necessary to preserve a primitive form as in "re-enlist." 
 When this is the case the initial hook stem is gener- 
 ally written; thus, RNlst. 
 
 239. If preferred, upward L may be written only 
 in derivative words and the initial hook stems in 
 primitives or compounds. 
 
 LESSON 18. 
 i 
 
 DOWNWARD AND UPWARD SH. 
 
 240. Upward Sh (as explained in Chapter I) ia 
 never written alone. It is generally used : 
 
 a. Before M with initial hooks, L with the AY and 
 R with the Y hook. 
 
 b. After the left curve F without appendages. 
 
 c. After a final circle on a left curve.
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 101 
 
 d. After final hooka on F, N and upward Sh and 
 final left ones on P, K and K. 
 
 241. The same rules govern upward Shi initially 
 as upward Sh. (See par. 240). It is also generally 
 used finally after P and the left curves F and N. 
 
 242. In all other cases than in the last two 
 sections downward Sh is generally employed. The 
 same is true of downward Shi. Downward Sh and 
 Shi are also generally employed medially to avoid an 
 awkward junction. Sometimes, however, upward Sh 
 may bo written, if preferred, as in ' 'Schiller, associa- 
 tion" or "rhetorician." (See also sees. 152, a and 
 183, a). 
 
 243. From the above it will be seen that downward 
 Shi, except after P and the left curves F -and N is 
 written according to the same rules as Shr, to which 
 the above rules, of course, do not apply, since it is 
 always made downward.
 
 102 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 THE HALVING AND LENGTHENING PRINCIPLES. 
 
 LESSON 19.- 
 THE HALVING PRINCIPLE. 
 
 244. T or D is added indiscriminately the context 
 determining which to any single length stem, with or 
 without a tinal hook, whether alone or joined (except 
 W or Y which will presently be considered) by making 
 it half its ordinary length. This stem is vocalized the 
 same as a single length. A vowel character is never 
 halved. 
 
 a. It will be observed from the engraving that in 
 monosyllables, when the vowel precedes the halved 
 stem, T or D is added according as the stem is light or 
 shaded. 
 
 245. When a letter is halved the added T or D is 
 read after the vowel or consonant and in the same syl- 
 lable. The T or D is thus always the last sound in a 
 monosyllable or final syllable except only when the 
 circle S is appended in which case the latter is the 
 last sound as in the word "pits" in engraving 244. 
 
 246. A halved stem may have a final curl. In 
 which case it is vocalized like the similar single length 
 stem, the T or D always being the last sound except 
 when the circle S is added. 
 
 247. If at any time uncertainty might result from 
 halving for both T and D as above, it is avoided in the 
 case of stems without final hooks, by .halving for T 
 only and writing D with the stem and in that of stems
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 103 
 
 with final hooks or a curl by shading the latter. This 
 distinction, however, js only occasionally necessary in 
 the first case and seldom or never in the second. 
 
 a. From the above paragraph it will be seen that 
 T and D, when added indiscriminately, are added ac- 
 cording to the same principle as the circles S and Z. 
 (See sec. 82). 
 
 248- When two Ns with T or D and a vowel be- 
 tween occur medially the first N is usually written with 
 the hook, the stem of the latter being halved and the 
 second with the stem, if the accent precedes both Ns, 
 but if it precedes the second N the first one is also 
 written with the hook but on its full sized stem and 
 the second N with the hook on the full-sized T or D 
 stem. The latter method is also usually followed in 
 compound words. In all cases derivatives usually 
 retain the forms of their primitives. (See also sec. 
 200, a). 
 
 249. When two vowels occur between a consonant 
 and a following T or D the stem for the former is uot 
 usually halved, but instead its full outline and the 
 stem T or D is employed. 
 
 250. A halved letter is never used before a final 
 vowel. When a final vowel follows T or D the stem 
 for the latter is always employed. 
 
 MP HALVED. 
 
 251. When 'L' follows Mp as in ' 'stamped' ' (stampt) 
 or "tempt" the combination Mpt is written with the 
 Mp halved stem. 
 
 a. In this book the sound of P is not considered 
 as omitted between M and T as in "tempt" for the 
 reason that all three consonants M, P and T are uttered 
 one after the other the same as are Ng, K and T in 
 "ranked" and analogously, P and T in "tapped." 
 See also Webster's "International Dictionary" 215 
 which (although in the Vocabulary it pronounces term-
 
 1(14 THE PHOXOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 inal Erapt as Emt) fully sustains this position when it 
 states among other observations of the same or greater 
 trend, that "In a word like exempt we have the first 
 part of a p * * and the last part 'of a t ; thus the 
 total combination empt will not be simply m followed 
 by#." 
 
 b. It will be observed that the rule in paragraph a 
 applies to derivative words whose primitive.-; end in'P. . 
 In derivatives like "dreamt" however, whose primi- 
 tives do not end in P, T only is added. 
 
 NG HALVED 
 
 252. When Ng is halved it does not include the 
 sound of K as in "inked" but only that of Ng or G 
 as in "hanged" or "angered." (See also sec. 158). 
 Words like" "inked" and "ranked," therefore, are 
 written with the full-sized stem Ng and halved K. (See 
 eng. 252). 
 
 a. The above does not preclude the employment of 
 Ng halved to indicate Ngt as in ' ' Wrington. ". (See also 
 the word "sanctioned" in sec. and engraving 348, b). 
 
 1. When the final syllables Ington are written as 
 in "Irvington, Lexington," etc., they are represented 
 by Ng halved and N full-sized as in "Wington" above, 
 except after Th, where the junction is not distinct, as 
 in ' ' Worthington, " when Ng and Tn are employed. 
 
 W AND Y HALVED. 
 
 253. The light halved strokes of W and Y without 
 hooks indicate the addition of T When shaded in the 
 middle they indicate that of D. Both the light and 
 the heavy strokes may be shaded initially for the 
 aspirate, or the aspirate dot may be employed if the 
 shading is not deemed sufficiently distinct. 
 
 1. Halved AV and Y are shaded as above for steno- 
 graphic convenience since in the cases mentioned in
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 105 
 
 section 236 the stem D is somewhat awkward to write 
 without an angle after the full W and Y forms. There- 
 fore an exception is made as to them so that the halved 
 light strokes always represent the addition of T and 
 the heavy ones that of D. 
 
 a. W and Y with hooks are halved without shading 
 to add T or D indiscriminately. 
 
 S HALVED AND WRITTEN UPWARD. 
 
 254. It is sometimes convenient to write St after 
 the Shun hook with S halved and made upward. The 
 vowel preceding the St is always short i unless some 
 peculiarity of pronunciation occurs. It is therefore 
 not necessary to vocalize the halved S except in such 
 cases. The circle. S may be added to it. Its name is 
 Aist (or Sayt). 
 
 STENOTYPY AND NOMENCLATURE OF THE HALVED STEMS. 
 
 255. A halved stem without an appendage is indi- 
 cated in stenotypy by the character or characters for 
 the full sized one with a body t after it or them for T 
 or D indiscriminately. When a hook is appended it 
 is stenotyped the same as after the full sized stem with 
 the body t or d added according as the appendage is 
 light or shaded. The same course is pursued if two 
 attachments are added, as a hook and circle or a circle 
 and curl. A halved stem is usually named by adding 
 the T sound (or the D one if the appendage is shaded) 
 to the name of the full sized stem. When the circle is 
 added finally it is pronounced after the halved stem, 
 Thus Pt, Bt, Mt, Ngt,~Wt, IFt, Prt, Nrt, sPrt, Prnt, 
 Pft, Pvd, Ptrt, Pshnt, P&shnt, Pts, Pfts, Ps*/m&, Ptss 
 are spoken Peet, Beet, Meet, Eengt, Weet, Wayt, 
 Preet, Neert, Spreet, Preent, Peeft, Peevd, Peetert, 
 Peeshunt, Peesshunt, Peets, Peefts, Peesshunts, 
 Peetses.
 
 106 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 256. The name of the T or D indicated by halving 
 is It, except in the case of a shaded appendage when 
 the added D is named Id. 
 
 LESSON 20. 
 
 LONE OR INITIAL K AND L HALVED. 
 
 257. Upward, R and L without hooks or a final circle 
 or loop, when standing alone, are halved to represent 
 monosyllables. In which case if distinction is ever de- 
 sired between words ending in T and D, the rule in sec- 
 tion 247 should be followed, (a.) Dissyllables and 
 over which consist of the letters represented by the 
 forms just mentioned w r hether derivatives of the mon- 
 osyllables or not are usually written with the two 
 stems R or L and T or D. . 
 
 b. If preferred T may always be indicated in the 
 above words by halving and D by writing the stem D. 
 
 258. Upward R and L with hooks when standing 
 alone are halved to add T* or D indiscriminately the 
 same as the other letters except W and Y preceding. 
 
 259. The same rules for halving usually govern 
 R and L initially as when standing alone. Also deriva- 
 tive words in both cases generally retain the form of 
 their primitives, except those ending in Er, etc. , which 
 are written according, to sections 209 and 282. 
 
 FINAL OR MEDIAL R AND L HALVED. 
 
 260. Final or medial R and L, simple or compound, 
 are usually halved to add T or D in the same manner 
 as when alone or initial. Ther halved stems are then 
 generally written up or down according to the rules in 
 Chapter V, for the full sized ones. Derivative words 
 thus ordinarily retain the forms of their primatives. 
 
 261. The downward forms never stand alone l>eing 
 like their full sized stems always used to end syllables 
 and words except usually L halved after N and a circle
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 107 
 
 on a left curve. They are never shaded to add D. 
 
 a. Downward R and L halved never have a vowel 
 between the R or L and the T or D, except only L 
 halved after N or the circle on a left curve. (See the 
 last paragraph). This is because the vowel always oc- 
 c'urs before and never after the full sized stems in the 
 same syllable except only after L as stated in section 
 234. Consequently when a vowel is inserted after 
 either of these forms, whether single or half length, 
 it always, except sometimes in the case of L after N and 
 the circle as just remarked indicates that it is W or Y 
 (see also sec. 14) and in that case if the light halved Y 
 stem and downward L halved should conflict the former 
 may be distinguished from the latter by striking the 
 vowel through it. This, however, will seldom occur. 
 (See sec. 52.) 
 
 STENOTYPY AND NOMENCLATURE OF R AND L HALVED. 
 
 262. The Rand L halved stems, with or without ap- 
 pendages, are stenotyped and named in the manner ex- 
 plained in section 255; thus Rt, Rts, sRt, stRt, %'Rt, 
 swRt, Rft, Rnt, Lt, sLt, stLt, ^Lt, Lrt, Lnt, are 
 spoken Reet, Reets, Sreet, Stay Reet, Weert, Sweert, 
 Reeft, Reent, Leet, Sleet, Stay Leet, Weelt, Leert, 
 Leent. 
 
 LESSON 21. 
 
 DOWNWARD AND UPWARD SH HALVED. 
 
 263. Sh halved whether standing alone or joined 
 to other stems, is usually written up or down ac- 
 cording to the rules in Chapter V. After F, W and 
 Fr without appendages, hovrever, it is usually written 
 downward after the first and upward after the others. 
 
 a. Halved Sh is written downward after F and up- 
 ward after W and Fr because the opposite forms do not 
 make an angle with these stems, since the latter and full 
 sized downward and upward Sh form half circles.
 
 108 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 b. Care should be taken to form a distinct angle 
 between M or upward Land downward Sh halved (see 
 eng. line 8) so that the outline may not be mistaken 
 for either of these forms with a Shun hook; to do 
 which all that is necessary is to write the halved stem 
 at its proper slope of sixty degrees as explained in page 
 26 and section 18 in' the case of the full sized one. 
 The halved stem should also not be made too short or 
 curved. 
 
 264. If preferred the upward halved form may be 
 written after T, M and upward L instead of the down- 
 ward one. Also after T and M, the two full sized stems, 
 downward Sh and T, and after upward L the same or up- 
 ward Sh and T may be used instead of either of the 
 halved Sh strokes; thus, TS/it, MSht, LSAt, TShT, 
 MShT, LShT or L#AT. -(See, however, sec. 266 
 following). 
 
 THE JUNCTION OF HALVED CURVED LETTERS WITHOUT 
 AMJLES, ETC. 
 
 265. Ordinarily a joined halved curved letter to be 
 recognized must make an angle. Sometimes, however, 
 it is necessary to join halved curves to other stems 
 without angles. When this happens they are gener- 
 ally written only in the case of opposite curves and 
 after straight stems as in the following section. 
 
 266. Any half length curve may run into or follow 
 an opposite half or full length or follow any straight 
 stem except upward R. 
 
 a. If upward R were written at forty-five degrees, 
 half length M could follow it without an angle, but as 
 it is made at thirty degrees, the angle must be formed 
 between them. The same remarks apply to upward 
 R and halved upward S. The latter however, is not 
 employed after upward R. Again, halved upward Sh 
 is not generally written after K. As to the right curve 
 after Ch it is not used since it is a backward N stem.
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 109 
 
 b. It will be observed that only two curves can be 
 joined without angles that is at a, tangent to the 
 same straight stem and that they are always at right 
 angles to each other, except after upward R as above 
 explained. 
 
 c. If preferred such words as "defeat, devote," etc., 
 may be written with the F hook and T or D stem as 
 in Exercise 199 to 206, line 17. 
 
 HALF LENGTHS NOT WRITTEN OR JOINED IN CERTAIN 
 CASES. 
 
 267. A half length curve is not usually employed 
 when it would run into or form a curve made in the 
 same circular direction, as in "Medusa" and "thanet; v 
 or into a straight stem, as in "viaduct;" nor is a 
 halved straight stem when it would run into or from a 
 curve, as in "Betsey" and "locked." In all such 
 cases, or in any case where the junction would not; be 
 quickly recognized, the full size stem T or D should 
 be written with the preceding or following full sized 
 stem, except where an alternative form is used when 
 
 .the latter may be halved as in "fished." (See see's, and 
 eng's. 263 and 264). 
 
 268. Two halved straight stems made in the same 
 direction cannot be joined but must be written sepa- 
 rately. Such stems usually occur in compound words, 
 as "chitchat, kitcat," etc. 
 
 269. A halved straight stem can not be joined to a 
 full sized one made in the same direction. Accord- 
 ingly when T or D follows two similar or cognate 
 sounds represented by straight stems all three charac- 
 ters are written in full; as in "popped, peebeta, cogged, 
 gagged." (See Reading Exercise, 5 to 10, line 5). 
 
 THE FINAL SYLLABLE ED. 
 
 270. The past tense and past participle of verbs 
 whoso present tense ends in T or^l) is formed by halv-
 
 110 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 ing the stroke T or D for Ted or Dec! attached to a 
 preceding full sized stem It is not necessary to 
 vocalize the halved T or D. Participal adjectives are 
 formed in the same manner. 
 
 271. When the present tense contains only the 
 stem T or D with a breathing or initial circle or loop 
 the past tense is written by halving the stem. 
 
 272. When the present tense ends with an St loop 
 the past tense is indicated with the S circle and a half 
 length T. 
 
 273. When the halved T or D occurs after the 
 downward stems W, Fr, T or Y, where no angle can 
 be made, it may be written detached with its center 
 opposite the end of the main stem. It will thus be 
 distinguished from the vowel o should the latter 
 happen to be written near the end of the stem. (For 
 the indication of the disjunction in stenotypy, see 
 sec. 42). 
 
 a. The final syllable Ed of course never occurs in 
 monosyllables. Consequently when a word ends with 
 or contains a halved T or D stem, it is known not to be 
 a monosyllable except halved T or D standing alone 
 with or without attachments. 
 
 274. In connected writing the past tense of those 
 verbs ending in Ed whose present ends in a halved 
 stem without an appendage or with an N or F hook 
 that is in T, Nt or Ft or their heavy sounds is 
 usually written with the same form as the present, 
 except when extra distinction is desired in which case 
 the rule in section 270 is followed. 
 
 a. The reason the above method is pursued in con- 
 nected writing is because the form for the past tense 
 of such verbs is longer than that for the present. 
 
 THE FINAL ST AND NST LOOPS AND HALVED STEMS, ETC. 
 
 . 275. The loop St is added to halved stems with or 
 without prependages whether ending in T or D. If a
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL 111 
 
 vowel occurs between the loop and the T or D repre- 
 sented by the halved stem' it may be indicated by 
 striking it through the part of the stem inclosed by 
 the loop. This, however is seldom necessary since the 
 vowel is usually short e. 
 
 276. The loop Nst may also be added to a halved 
 straight stem with or without prependages. It may 
 be vocalized in the same manner as the St loop above, 
 if desired. 
 
 277. When St occurs after a hook on a halved 
 curve the halved stem St is employed. It is seldom 
 necessary to vocalize the latter, since the vowel is usu- 
 ally short e. 
 
 a, When the positive degree ends in an S circle or 
 F or N hook on a full stem the superlative is written 
 with the large S circle and the stemT or with the stem 
 F or N and the St loop. (See the words "nicest, 
 wisest, choicest" and "basest," eng. 109, line 4, and 
 "finest, thinnest, keenest" and "toughest," eng. 125. 
 See also sees. 107 and 108). 
 
 2T8. The Str loop is never added to a halved stem. 
 . 279. The halved stems and St and Nst loops are 
 stenotyped and named as in the following; thus, Rtst, 
 Rntst, Ltst are spoken Reetest, Reentest, Leetest. 
 
 WORDS ENDING IN TIVE OR TIVELY. 
 
 280. When a word ends in Tive it is usually writ- 
 ten with a halved stem followed by the full length V 
 one when convenient, but if not, with the stem T and 
 F hook. The termination Tively is formed in the same 
 manner except that the VI stem is added when con- 
 venient and when not, the upward stem L is added to 
 the V stem. 
 
 WORDS ENDING IN TL OR DL. 
 
 281. Words ending in Tl or Dl preceded by a 
 vowel as in "petal, pedal, metal, medal" are written
 
 112 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 with the halved stem and L, in which case the latter is 
 written according to the rules in Chapter V. 
 
 a. If extra distinction is ever desired between or 
 among words ending as above those in Dl may be writ- 
 ten in full w r ith the Dl hooked stem. This distinction, 
 however, will seldom be needed. 
 
 1. It will be observed that words ending in Tl and 
 Dl as above are of the same nature as those in Tr or 
 Dr in section 209. Consequently they are represented 
 according to the same principle, namely by one termina- 
 tion. If sufficient stenographic material existed Tl 
 and Dl could be represented by a hook the same as Tr 
 and Dr; but as this is not the case they are uniformly 
 indicated with the halved stem and L. (See also sec. 
 282 following). 
 
 LESSON 22. 
 THE LENGTHENING PRINCIPLE. 
 
 282. Tr, Dr, Thr or Dhr with a vowel between 
 the T, D, Th or Dh and the R are added to any curved 
 letter without appendages by making the stem twice 
 its ordinary length. The stems are vocalized the same 
 as the single and half length ones. A vowel character 
 is never lengthened or a double length curve halved. 
 
 a. If extra distinction is ever desired between or 
 among words ending with the above s} r llables those in 
 Dr, Thr or Dhr may be written in full with the Dr, 
 Thr or Dhr hooked stems. These distinctions, how- 
 ever, will seldom be needed. (See also sees. 209 a, 
 and 281, a and 1). 
 
 b. The terminal sounds Thr with a vowel between 
 the Th and R as in "ether" or "zither" seldom occur. 
 Those of Dhr, however, their heavy sounds as in 
 "either" or "neither" happen very frequently. (See 
 also sec. 209, b). 
 
 283. The sound of P is not considered as omitted
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 113 
 
 between M and T as in -"tempter" and "sumpter," 
 though it is in "Sumter." (See sec. 251, a and b). 
 a. The sound of K is usually included in length- 
 ened Ng, as in "puncture." If, however, extra dis- 
 tinction is at any time desired for the termination con- 
 taining K it may be written with the Ng single length 
 stem and K with the Ter hook; thus, NgKtr. (See 
 also sees. 158 and 252). 
 
 284. A downward double length curved letter is 
 written through the line of writing, half above and 
 half below it. (See also sec. 7.) 
 
 285. The light forms of double length W and Y 
 indicate the addition of Tr or Thr. When shaded in 
 the middle they indicate that of Dr or Dhr. Double 
 length downward R and L are seldom used and then 
 only finally and are never shaded. If a vowel is 
 inserted after a light final or medial form it is usually 
 known to be W or Y. (See also pars. 261 and a). 
 
 286. Words ending in Ntr or Ndr are usually 
 written with the double length N after all stems, simple 
 or compound. 
 
 a. If the learner prefers, he may write words end- 
 ing in Ntr or Ndr after P, as "painter, ponder," etc., 
 w r ith the halved stems, the N hook and upward R. In 
 which cases it is seldom necessary to insert the vowel 
 before the latter, since it is usually short e. 
 
 287. The past tense of words written with double 
 length curved strokes is usually made by adding to the 
 lengthened stems the letter D joined or disjoined. In 
 connected writing the form for the present tense gen- 
 erally stands for both. If, however, extra distinction 
 is desired the past tense may be written in full without 
 the lengthened forms; namely, with the halved Dr, 
 Thr or Dhr hooked stems. (See also sec. 282, a and 
 sec. 274). 
 
 288. The vowel may be indicated before the R in 
 any of the above terminations by striking it through
 
 114 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL 
 
 the stem near the end, according to the principle for 
 vocalizing explained in section 51. It is not usually 
 necessary to vocalize for the short vowel e, a.s most of 
 the terminations contain this letter. 
 
 289. When an appendage is added tq any of the 
 double length curves it is read after the Tr, Dr, etc., 
 as in the words "northern, eastern, maternity, 
 moderation. " 
 
 290. Such words as "moderation" are vocalixed 
 by placing the vowel which occurs before the final hook 
 under or above it. 
 
 STENOTYPY AND NOMENCLATURE OF THE LENGTHENED 
 
 STEMS. 
 
 291. Lengthened stems with or without append- 
 ages are stenotyped and named after the manner ex- 
 plained in section 255 for halved ones, the body letters 
 tr standing for Tr, Dr, Thr, or Dhr indiscriminately, 
 thus Ftr, Vtr, Mtr, Mrtr, Mptr, Mprtr, Ngtr, Ltr, 
 Ztr, toLtr, Wtr, TFtr, Nrtrn, Ltrn, Mprtrn, Ltrshn 
 are uttered Feeter, Veeter, Meeter, Meerter, Empter, 
 Emperter, Eengter, Leeter, Layter, Weelter, Weeter, 
 Wayter, Neertern, Leetern, Empertern, Leetershun. 
 
 LONG AND SHORT OUTLINES. 
 
 292. In concluding this chapter on the halving and 
 lengthening principles the learner is informed that he 
 will soon ascertain by practice which a>re the best out- 
 lines to use. It is sometimes speedier to write a long 
 outline for a word than a short and cramped one. 
 When he meets with such forms, therefore, he will 
 know that they are given in preference to the shorter 
 ones. The learner should always be very careful to 
 preserve in his writing a marked distinction between 
 the full, half and double length letters so that they can
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 11 T) 
 
 l>e readily distinguished from one another. This 
 should be done as much as possible whether writing at 
 his swiftest or slowest speed, since it is upon this dis- 
 tinction and the average proper slope of the letters 
 that most of the legibility of his writing will depend.
 
 THE PHOXOGRAPUIC MANUAL 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 PREFIXES, AFFIXES, ETC. 
 
 LESSON 23. 
 PREFIXES. 
 
 293. Cm, On, Km or Kn the context determ- 
 ining the m or n with any' vowel or dipthong be- 
 tween, are represented initially by a light dot, called 
 the Con dot, written before the beginning of the re- 
 mainder of the word. When the syllable immediately 
 following Cm or Km begins with M the latter is writ- 
 ten. The same is true when Cn or Kn is followed by 
 N. When a Cm, etc., syllable occurs medially it is 
 indicated by writing the part of the word following it 
 so that the end of the part before it shall stand in the 
 place of the Con dot. When a syllable occurs thus 
 medially it is not often necessary to vocalize the pre- 
 ceding one. When the latter is In, Un or Cir it may 
 be joined in the case of a few familiar words, as in ' 'in- 
 complete, unconcern" or "circumnavigate." 
 
 a. When Cm, etc. , are followed immediately by a 
 vowel the word is written in full except when the 
 vowel occurs before the stem S, as in "comestible'' 
 (see eng., last word in line 2) when the dot is 
 employed. 
 
 b. From the preceding it will be perceived that the 
 dot or medial space is always written or left before a 
 consonant but not before a vowel, except when the 
 latter occurs before the S stem. 
 
 C. Cm, etc,, may at any time be vocalized, if de-
 
 THE PHOXCKiKAPHIC MANUAL. 117 
 
 sired, by inserting the vowel or diphthong imme- 
 diately after the dot or medial space, as in the engrav- 
 ing. This, however, will seldom be necessary. 
 
 d. In connected writing the Con dot may /be omit- 
 ted from frequent words when the remaining outlines 
 are sufficiently suggestive; as for example, from 
 "compliment, concern, confidence, contrary, conven- 
 
 'lent, conversation, canvas" or "canvass." 
 
 e. The Con dot should usually be made first, but 
 care should be taken to place it high enough above 
 downward stems to permit the latter to be of the proper 
 length when resting on the line of writing. 
 
 f. Cm or Km with an initial vowel are indicated 
 the same as when without it. In which case the vowel 
 may at any time, if desired, be inserted before the 
 dot or medially after the preceding stem as in the en- 
 graving. But this will seldom be necessary. 
 
 g. The Con dot and juxtaposition are usually em- 
 ployed in all cases except monosyllables and their 
 plurals, or derivatives ending in Ng. 
 
 1. The course in the above paragraph is followed 
 for the sake of speed and uniformity in writing al- 
 though by so doing derivatives are occasionally varied 
 from the forms of their primitives. (See see's. 107 
 and 108). 
 
 294. Concom. "Concomitant" and its derivatives 
 are written with two Con dots side by side before the 
 remainder of the word after the manner of the 
 Con dot. 
 
 295. Contra, Contro, Counter, or Canter. The 
 prefix Contra, Contro, Counter or Canter is repre- 
 sented by the stem K halved for Kt with the first 
 stem of the remainder of the word written dis- 
 joined underneath or above it (the latter in the case of 
 upward stems) in such a manner that its beginning 
 shall bo at or near the middle of the prefix. It may 
 be omitted in "controversy" and its derivatives.
 
 118 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 a. When Con or Com follows Counter as in ' 'coun- 
 terconnect" or "countercompony" the two prefixes are 
 written with the halved stem Kt and the Con dot 
 underneath; the latter before the beginning of the 
 remainder of the word. 
 
 b. In or Un is prefixed to the sign Contra or 
 Contro by the N stem joined. 
 
 296. " Contri. The word "contribute" and its 
 derivatives, with the exception of ' 'contribution'', 
 should be written with the Con dot. In the case of 
 "contribution" the accent being on the third instead 
 of the second syllable; that is to say after the contri, 
 changes the latter two syllables into a prefix of the 
 same nature as Contra, Contro, Counter and Canter, 
 which occur as prefixes only when the accent is on the 
 first or after the second syllable. "Contribution" 
 may, therefore, be written with Kt as a prefix for 
 Contri. If, however, uniformity in writing is desired 
 it should be written with the Con dot, the same as 
 are the other words of the series. It is here, how- 
 ever, written with Kt. 
 
 297. When Cog occurs initially it is written with 
 the stems K and G; but when it occurs medially it is 
 indicated by juxtaposition the same as Cm, etc., in 
 section 293. 
 
 a. If desired Cog, when it occurs medially, may 
 be indicated by striking the first part of the stem of 
 the remainder of the word through the first stem of 
 the word near the end. 
 
 298. En, In or Un is prefixed to the S circle on R 
 initial hooks, and on the L hook on downward Sh, and 
 on right curves by a small right curl. 
 
 a. Each syllable is also prefixed to the S circle on 
 left initial hooks by a small left curl. 
 
 b. The above curl, whether right or left, is called 
 the N curl. Its stenotype is n and its specific name 
 Jn; thus, nsTrMnt or nsPlt is spoken In Stree Meent
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 119 
 
 jr In sPleet. Either form may also be particularly 
 designated, if desired, as the right or left X curl. 
 
 c. If preferred the stem N may be employed on 
 the left hooks on K and upward R instead of the curl; 
 thus, NsKlt, XsKwrt, NswRft. 
 
 d. If desired the curl may be vocalized by placing 
 the vowel before or above it. But this will seldom be 
 necessary. (See also sec. 217). 
 
 e. When the circle occurs on left curves and 
 straight stems without initial hooks the stem N is 
 used; as in "unseen" and "insurgent." 
 
 299. Incon or Uncon is sometimes prefixed to the 
 S circle by the N curl; as in the word "inconsiderable" 
 or ' 'unconsidered. " 
 
 300. Enter, Inter, Intra or Intro is indicated by 
 Xt disjoined with its center above the beginning of 
 horizontal stems and its end before the center of all 
 others. In most words, however, the Nt may be 
 joined. 
 
 301. Trans is represented by Trs or Tr joined 
 when no error would be liable to occur, as in "trans- 
 act, transfigure'' and "transcript". When error 
 would be liable as in "transept" it is written in full 
 with the stem N; thus, TrNs. It is not necessary to 
 vocalize the prefix. Its stenotypes are Trs whether 
 Trs or Tr is written. 
 
 a. The above is used only when Trans occurs as a 
 prefix. When this is not the case, as in "transom", 
 the word is written in full with the stem X; thus,Tr- 
 XsM. Furthermore when Trans occurs before the 
 Shun curl as in "transition" the prefix is not employed 
 but instead the word is written in full with the Xs 
 circle; thus Trass///*- as in engraving 217. 
 
 302. Magna or Magni (from the Latin meaning 
 great) is indicated by M written with its center above 
 the beginning of all stems except half length hori-
 
 120 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 zontal and upward ones when it is written with its end 
 above or before the center of the latter. It is used 
 only in words of three syllables and over. 
 
 303- MK (Me or Mac) may be indicated the same 
 as Magna or Magni above except when it is followed 
 by a vowel, C (with the K sound) or K or G (as in 
 gay) when the word is written with the stem K or G; 
 in which case it is not usually necessary to vocalize 
 the first syllable. 
 
 a. From the last paragraph it will be perceived 
 that the prefix MK is written only before consonants 
 except when another K or a G (as in gay) follows. 
 
 304. Self is made a prefix and represented by the 
 8 circle, as follows: 
 
 a- In its derivatives; namely, "selfish, selfishly, 
 selfishness", the circle being joined to the remainder 
 of the word, Un in ' 'unselfish", etc. , is then written 
 with the N curl. (See sec. 298). 
 
 b- In compounds composed of self and some other 
 word which does not contain initial Cm or Cn; in 
 which case the circle is usually written disjoined oppo- 
 site or near the middle of the first stem of the 
 remainder of the word. In a few frequent words, 
 however, it may be joined. 
 
 305. Self-con or Self-corn is represented by the S 
 circle written before the beginning of the first stem of 
 the remainder of the word after the manner of the 
 Con dot. 
 
 a- Self -con or Self-corn may also be written w r ith 
 the circle placed alongside the middle of the first stem 
 as in section 304, b; the Con dot being inserted in its 
 proper place before the beginning of the stem. In 
 frequent words the dot may usually be omitted. (See 
 sec. 293, d). The method in paragraph 305, however, 
 is the one usually followed in this system. 
 
 306. Self-contra, or Self-contro. Self, in Self- 
 contra or Self-contro, is represented by the S circle
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 121 
 
 disjoined above the prefix Kt for Contra or Contro 
 (See sec. 295). 
 
 307. A prefix never occurs in a word consisting 
 wholly of vowels. 
 
 STENOTYPY. 
 
 308. An inverted period before a stenotype indi- 
 cates the Con dot ; thus, ' Tnt. It is vocalized by 
 placing the vowel or diphthong after or before it ; 
 thus, 'aFr, 'owsL, a-MDt, a-iB, camphor, council or 
 counsel, accommodate, akimbo. (See sec. 293). 
 
 309. Two inverted periods before a stenotype indi- 
 cate the prefix Concom; thus, "Tnt. (See sec. 295). 
 
 310. An apostrophe between a preceding and a 
 following stenotype indicates juxtaposition by placing 
 the phonographs end to end or before one another, as 
 in medial Con, etc., and in Self -con ; thus, Ds'Tnt, 
 s'Trl. (See sections 293 and 305 and also sec. 40, a). 
 
 311. An inverted semicolon between two steno types 
 indicates any other kind of juxtaposition than the 
 above; thus, KttVn, Kt'.RTnt, Nt'.Mt, MtTt, 
 MtNt, siLf. (See sections 295, 300, 302, 303 and 
 304, b and also sections 42 and 273). 
 
 312. If an inverted period is placed after the semi- 
 colon it indicates that the Con dot is to be inserted before 
 the beginning of the second stem ; thus, Kt'. 'Kt, si 'Trl. 
 See see's. 295, a and 305, a). 
 
 313. For the stenotypic indication of intersection 
 as in paragraph 297, a, see section 52. 
 
 LESSON 24. 
 AFFIXES. 
 
 THE FINAL SYL.LAIJLE INC.. 
 
 314. The final syllable Ing is represented by a
 
 122 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 light dot, called the Ing dot, written after the end of 
 the preceding part of the word, or by the stroke Ng 
 joined to the preceding stem. For the plural Ings the 
 circle S in the place of the dot or the stroke Ng with 
 the circle S is used. It is not usually necessary in the 
 case of the stroke to insert the vowel i. 
 
 a. The Ing dot is represented in stenotypy with an 
 inverted period and the Ings circle with a similar circle 
 or degree mark placed after the character for the pre- 
 ceding stem ; thus, K', D. 
 
 315. This termination being a syllable of itself in 
 speech and not a word never occurs in monosyllabic 
 words. In writing, therefore, it can never be attached 
 to a vowel or consonant in the same syllable with itself. 
 Consequently, it should be so written that it may always 
 be known, Avhen the vowels are omitted (see sec. 60, b) 
 and thus the words in which it ends not be taken for 
 monosyllables ending with consonant Ng. 
 
 316. Monosyllables ending in Ng always consist of 
 one or two single length stems , namely : 
 
 a. Ng or Ngs with an initial breathing, circle or 
 loop. 
 
 b. Ng or Ngs preceded by any other stem without 
 appendages except one with an initial loop and upward 
 R and L with initial hooks. 
 
 317. Accordingly the stroke Ng for the termination 
 Ing is always omitted and the dot inserted at the 
 end of a vowel word and when the resulting word 
 would otherwise consist of two single length stems as 
 above. Consequently monosyllables ending in Ng and 
 words ending with the syllable Ing can not conflict. 
 
 318. In all other cases the stem is inserted for this 
 termination whenever convenient, namely : 
 
 a. After all stems without appendages (except 
 halved P, T, Th and Y) and after all stems with linal 
 hooks.
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 123 
 
 b. After final circles except Xs circles and a circle 
 on a hook. 
 
 c. After final loops on Th, Y and upward L, left 
 ones on T and Ch and right ones on upward R. 
 
 d. When it is not convenient to write the stem, 
 that is in the exceptions in paragraphs a and b and after 
 the unspecified loops in paragraph c, the dot is inserted. 
 (See engraving a, b, c). 
 
 319. The learner will understand that Ing could be 
 written with the dot in all cases in section 318. But 
 the stem is the quicker of the two. Consequently the 
 dot is employed only when it is inconvenient to use the 
 stem. 
 
 320. In connected writing the stem and dot may 
 usually be omitted at the end of verbs (participles) 
 the context determining the meaning. Sometimes, 
 however, when a noun or adjective and a verb have 
 the same form, as "being" or "writing" (BNg, KtNg) 
 the outline for the former is used for both. 
 
 321. The stem and dot need not be written in com- 
 pound words, but instead the syllable Ing may be 
 indicated by juxtaposition after the manner of Con and 
 Com (see section 293) by writing the beginning of 
 the first stem of the following word in the place of 
 the Ing dot. 
 
 322. Ingly is represented by the hooked stem Ngl 
 after all stems without appendages and after the S circle 
 on P, T or Ch and on those left curves which are in- 
 clined in the same direction as the latter ; namely, F, 
 Th or Y. . In all other cases it is represented by the 
 stem NG and downward L joined or disjoined. 
 
 323. Ington may be represented by Ngt disjoined 
 with its center under the end of the preceding stem, 
 or it may be joined, if convenient, and no error would 
 be liable to occur. (See also sec. 252, a, 1).
 
 Ili4 THE PHONCXJUAPIIIC MANUAL 
 
 LESSON 25. 
 
 AFFIXES, CONTINUED. 
 
 324. Ble or Ely is indicated by the stem B joined 
 when the hooked stern Bl can not be written except 
 in the latter case after downward and upward Sh 
 without appendages. Usually the vowel preceding the 
 termination may be omitted. 
 
 a. When this termination occurs after downward 
 Sh standing alone either simple or with an initial hook 
 it should be written with the Bl stem if error would be 
 liable to occur, which will usually be only in proper 
 names ; thus, ShrBl, Shruble. 
 
 325. Bleness is represented by Bns or Bins joined 
 to the preceding part of the word in the same manner 
 as Ble and Bly above. 
 
 326. Full or Fully is indicated by joining the 
 stem F when the hooked stem Fl can not be made. 
 
 327. Fulness is indicated by Fs struck beneath a 
 preceding stem in such a manner that its beginning 
 shall be under the middle of a horizontal or upward 
 stem and before the two-third's point' of a downward 
 one. Its beginning is thus after the former and before 
 the latter. When there is no preceding stem, as in 
 * 'awf ulness, " the word is written in full. 
 
 1. Fs as above is not always employed after a single 
 length straight stem without an appendage. 
 
 328. Iveness is indicated by Vs in the same man- 
 ner as Fulness in paragraph 327 and usually follows 
 the sounds T and S. 
 
 1. Vs as above is not usually employed after a 
 straight stem with a final loop. 
 
 239. Lessness is indicated by Ls struck through 
 the preceding stem.
 
 THE PHON-OGUAPniC MANUAL. 125 
 
 LESSON 26. 
 
 AFFIXES, CONCLUDED. 
 
 330. Graph-y, and, usually, also graphic-al-ly, 
 may be indicated by the stem G joined to the preced- 
 ing part of the word. The loop St may be added to 
 the termination, as in "telegraphist." 
 
 1. If at any time words of two simple stems, as 
 the first three in the engraving, would be liable to 
 cause conflict, the F hook may be added; thus, BGf, 
 JGf, hlGf, or the words may be written in full. 
 Again, Graphy may at any time be distinguished from 
 Graph by placing the short vowel i after the stem 
 G, the same as if the latter were the stem F. 
 Finally the stem K or Kl, may be added whenever 
 desired to the G stem for graphic or graphical-ly. 
 But none of these cases will often happen. 
 
 a. Grapher may be represented by the hooked 
 stem Gr joine'd. 
 
 b. Gram may be designated by G struck through 
 the preceding stem, or, in the case of a preceding G, 
 above it, with its center opposite the end of the 
 latter. 
 
 C. In each instance above when only one vowel 
 precedes the termination it may usually be omitted. 
 
 331. Ncy. Any termination beginning with a qon- 
 sonant, with the accent before or after it, and ending 
 in Ncy, as in the words "potency, vacancy, vagrancy, 
 Montmorency, " etc., in the engraving may be indi- 
 cated by writing its first consonant stem simple or 
 with prependages fall length and placed close to the 
 preceding part of the word The termination is not 
 usually vocalized. When there is no preceding stem, 
 as in"sequency" or when the termination begins with 
 a vowel as is "truancy, buoyancy, fluency" the word 
 is written in full. 
 
 a. When writing this termination disjoined as
 
 126 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 above, it should be placed with its center under or to 
 the right of the end of a preceding horizontal or down- 
 ward stem and its beginning under or to the right of 
 the center of an upward one. A downward termina- 
 tion, however, should never be Avritten with its begin- 
 ning under a horizontal stem or before a downward 
 one. (See the word "discrepancy" and the forms TiP 
 and JiV in the engraving, line 1, and also sees, and 
 engs. 327 and 328, where this method is followed.) 
 
 b. If preferred, this termination may usually be 
 represented as above with a final N hook, and joined to 
 the preceding part of the word. In which case if con- 
 flict should ever occur it may be disjoined according 
 to the rules in the last paragraph. This, however, 
 will seldom be necessary and then usually only in 
 words of two stems whose terminations are without 
 prependages. 
 
 332. Ity, Idity. Any halved stem, except one 
 ending in a circle or loop, ma3 r , if compound, be 
 attached to any previous stem, or if simple, placed 
 close to it and allowed to stand for any termination 
 beginning with the first of the consonants represented 
 by such halved stem and ending in Ity or Idity and 
 consisting of three or four syllables with the accent of 
 the word on the first or second syllable of the termina- 
 tion, as in the words "barbarity" to "validity" in the 
 engraving. The termination is not usually vocalized. 
 When an initial hook can not be conveniently formed, 
 as in "accountability, sensibility, accessibility" it -is 
 omitted. It is also omitted in the termination Bility 
 after downward or upward Sh, as in "sociability, 
 finishability." (See also sec. 324). This principle is 
 not applied to words having a Shun hook when the 
 remainder of the word after Shun contains only the con- 
 sonants E, or L and T, as in cautionarity, motionarity, 
 nationality, rationality." It is also not applied to 
 words ending in Tivity, whose primitives ending in
 
 THE PI10NS-XIUAPIUC MANUAL. 127 
 
 * 
 
 Tive are written with a halved stem followed bv the 
 stem V, as explained in section 280 as in "activity, 
 receptivity." In all such cases the words are written 
 in full. 
 
 a. If at any time there would be danger of con- 
 flict between or among words ending as above, those 
 ending in Idity may be written in full or the termina- 
 tion vocalized with the accented vowel. Either, how- 
 ever, will seldom be necessary. 
 
 b. Again, if at any time, error should be liable to 
 occur in the case of the joined terminations they may 
 be disjoined. This again, however, will seldom be 
 necessary. 
 
 333. 'Sometimes a termination of similar nature to 
 those in sec. 332 may be written according to the sam3 
 principle; as "asafetida." 
 
 334. When writing the above terminations dis- 
 joined, the rules in sec. 331, a, forNcy should be fol- 
 lowed. 
 
 335. It will be observed that the above termina- 
 tions are always indicated by a simple or compound 
 halved stem and that the accent follows the first of the 
 consonants represented by the latter. When these 
 conditions cannot be fulfilled as in "integrity, ubi- 
 quity," the terminations are written in full. 
 
 336. The principle in section 332 is not usually 
 applied when the resulting word would consist of one 
 stem, which is the case when there is no stem preced- 
 ing the termination, the preceding part then consisting 
 only of a vowel, circle, loop, or curl and circle; as in 
 "agility, hilarity, solidity, civility, stability, stupid- 
 ity, insularity;" in all which cases the words are 
 written in full. 
 
 337. Section 332, as therein indicated does not 
 apply to terminations of three or four syllables begin- 
 ning with a vowel, as Ality; or containing only the 
 final syllable Ity. Words like "duality, mutuality,
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 materiality, reality" or "parity /'therefore, are written 
 in full. (See also "activity" and "receptivity," thu 
 l.-i-t two examples in eng. 332, line 2). 
 
 338. The principle in sec. 332 is not applied when 
 it would change a primitive form. It may, however, 
 be so applied if desired. Thus for example, "maturity, 
 paternity, mutuality, fatality, vitality, instrumental- 
 ity, activity, receptivity," may be written Mtrt, PTrnt, 
 MTlt, FTlt, VTlt, nsTrMTlt, KTft, RsPTft. 
 
 339. Words like "penalty," which end in Ty 
 without a vowel before the final T, should not be con- 
 founded with those in section 332 but be written in 
 full. (See "penality," and "penalty" in eng. 332 to 
 339.) 
 
 340. City, Sity or Xity. Any termination begin- 
 ning w r ith any consonant except S and ending in City, 
 Sity or Xity with the number of syllables and the 
 accent the same as in paragraph 332 as in the words 
 "sphericity, verbosity, duplicity, laxity," etc., in the 
 engraving may be indicated by writing its first conson- 
 ant stem simple or with prependages full length with a 
 final St loop and joined to the preceding part of the 
 word. Occasionally, in order to avoid an awkward 
 junction, the loop may be added to a lengthened stem, 
 as in "eccentricity." The termination is not usually 
 vocalized. When there is no preceding stem as in 
 "sagacity," or when the termination begins with a 
 vowel, as in "curiosity," or commences with S as in 
 "necessity," the word is written in full. 
 
 a. If at any time words written as above would be 
 liable to conflict with those ending in St they may be 
 written in full or the terminations disjoined, in which 
 case the rule in section 331, a, for Ncy should be fol- 
 lowed. Conflict, however, will seldom occur and then 
 usually only in words of two stems whose terminations 
 are without prependages. (See also sec. 331, b.) 
 
 341. Self or Selves is added, the former by a
 
 TIIK PHONOGRAPH 1C MANUAL. 129 
 
 small and the latter by a large circle placed under or 
 after the middle of the preceding stem or it may be 
 joined. 
 
 342. Ship is added by the stroke Sh joined or dis- 
 joined in cases where ShP is not preferred. 
 
 343. In general, where a final or medial syllable 
 cannot be joined conveniently it may be disjoined as 
 in the words "friendly" and "winsomeness. " In such 
 cases it is not often necessary to vocalize it. 
 
 LESSON 27. 
 DERIVATIVES AND NEGATIVES. 
 
 344. Derivative words, as previously stated (see 
 sec. 107), should contain their primitive forms, except 
 where speed or legibility would suffer, in which case 
 the most facile outline should always be written with- 
 out regard to the exact primitive one. 
 
 a. Derivative words ending in Y, whose primitives 
 end in L as, "shrilly, facilely, are in this system of 
 phonography written with one L. 
 
 345. Negative words whose first consonants are 
 M, N, R, or L and whose positives begin with these 
 letters are written by prefixing the negative vowel to 
 the positive form, except those beginning with Un 
 which are written by doubling the first consonant; 
 namely, the letter N. (a) The same rules apply to words 
 of similar formation that are not negative in their 
 nature. (See also par. 293). 
 
 346. Although in pronunciation apparently but 
 one consonant is heard in words like those in the last 
 section the first gliding so readily into the second as 
 to give an impression of their being only one in 
 reality there are two consonants. The first part of 
 such negatives is thus composed of two syllables, the 
 final and initial consonants of which, for the sake 
 of euphony being the same, give the impression of
 
 130 THE PHOXOfillAIMIK' MANl-AT- 
 
 there being but one consonant. This will immediately 
 be evident by considering the words "can" and "not" 
 which often appear in script and print joined together 
 in one phrase, "cannot.*' Here although only one 
 consonant is apparently heard yet we know there are 
 two and that it would be incorrect to write and print 
 them with one, as in "canot." Accordingly a correct 
 phonetic representation requires that all such words 
 should in script and print be represented with two con- 
 sonants. In shorthand, -however, where speed is neces- 
 sary, the first one is omitted as just explained. The 
 same observations apply to the words described in 
 paragraph 293, except that the second consonant, 
 namely the letter M or N is always written. (See also 
 sec 344, a). 
 
 a. If the learner prefers he may always write the 
 first consonant of negatives the same as when the 
 letter N (or Un) precedes, or as in section 293. The 
 method in section 345, however, is usually more 
 speedy. 
 
 347. Negative words whose first consonant is X 
 and whose positives begin with L are usually written 
 with the initial hooked stem Nl. Those whose positives 
 begin with R are usually written with the stems N and 
 R, thus avoiding conflict with the Nl series and also 
 preserving the positive form. The same rules apply 
 to similarly formed words that are not negative. 
 
 OMISSION OF MEDIAL T, K OR G, N AND W. 
 
 348. It is sometimes inconvenient on account of 
 the lengthy forms which would ensue to write the 
 above full sized stems medially. When this is the 
 case they may be omitted as follows: 
 
 a. After the circle S on a full sized stem a medial 
 T can usually be omitted before another consonant. 
 
 b. K. G. In some words K can be omitted after 
 Ng and before T, Sh and Shn; and G before Sh.
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 1'.',] 
 
 e. N. The N stem or hook may be omitted medially 
 when it is inconvenient to write it and no error would 
 l>e liable to occur. 
 
 d. The W stem may, if desired, be omitted from 
 the word "swift" and its derivatives and the series 
 written with the small W instead. (See sec. 60). The 
 usual method, however, in this system, is to write it 
 with the light stem; thus sWFt, sWFtL, sWFtst, 
 sWFtr. 
 
 CONCLUSION OF THE ELEMENTARY STYLE. 
 
 349. Phonography has now been presented to the 
 learner complete, considered simply as a system of 
 writing. If he has carefully studied the preceding 
 pages he can represent in it any word in the English 
 language. There would, however, be but little advan- 
 tage in employing it thus in its elementary form since 
 it would be too slow to be practicable as a system of 
 shorthand. The remaining chapters, therefore, will 
 be devoted to the Reporting Style by means of which 
 phonography may be written with the swiftness of 
 rapid speech.
 
 ELEMENTARY STYLE 
 
 READING LESSONS AND EXERCISES. 
 
 LKSSON 1. CONSONANTS. 
 
 1 \\ 1 I __ ) )~~ ~/ ^ ^ 
 
 ft vv ( c . / / v.'ji A ir 
 
 EXERCISE, 1-2. 
 1 \\ \\ \\ \\ \\ '\\ \\ 
 
 2 \\ ; i ; i 1 1 ii M it 
 
 *..)') ) ) M ) ) J ) ) ) ) > 
 
 5 v^ ^ v^ vv a v^ ^^ 
 
 6 ( ( ( ( i ( ( ( i ( ( ( ( ( 
 
 7 
 
 12 ,' / / / / 
 
 133
 
 THE PHOXOCKAPHIC MAXT'AL. 
 
 13 r 
 
 r 
 
 
 15 
 
 4 
 
 7 
 8 
 
 ( c ( ( f y / r c c 
 
 LESSON 2. CONSOXAXTS, CONTINUED. 
 
 \ I / 
 
 r 
 
 // \\ 
 
 10 
 
 EXERCISE, 1-10. 
 
 \\ \\ I I I I // // 
 
 (( ( ( JJ JJ ) ) )) 
 
 r r
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 1 3.") 
 
 V 
 
 J I 
 
 <_-/ V - i 
 
 \ I 
 
 EXERCISE, CONTINUED, 5-10. 
 
 u 
 
 8 
 9 
 
 10 
 11 
 12 
 
 in 
 
 cy 
 
 L. 
 
 > 
 
 n_ ^ ^ n . ^ 
 
 v. i 
 
 X \-^ i_
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 14 
 
 15 L. 
 
 IB r~ 
 
 r 
 
 -T\ 
 
 18 
 
 
 LESSON 3. W AND Y AND DOWNWARD R AND L, ETC 
 
 .14 ^ ^v^^r ^ Y v 
 
 15 ( r C^. ^ (L ( 
 
 16 
 
 V 
 
 j j 
 
 n 
 
 EXERCISE, 12-18. 
 
 "r r w r /- v
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL 
 
 137 
 
 V n 
 
 ) 
 
 V 
 
 9 ^ r r 
 
 10 S~ / \ ' 
 
 / / 
 
 ) ) 
 
 EXERCISE, CONTINUED, 12-18. 
 
 . 
 
 /t 
 
 /r
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANTAL 
 
 20 
 21 
 
 26-7 . . 
 
 LESSON 4. RKiHT ANCJLES. ETC. 
 
 r 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 1 /. -\ 
 
 EXEHCISK. -.MI -j;.
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 139 
 
 >.M-V.* 
 
 LESSON 5. VOWELS AND VOCALIZATION. 
 30-5 3CV>_lcv- h ix^ 
 36-7 5CI/V-13CUN-I V, * V 
 
 39 . -.c .\ .1. -t s> v v -r * ! > r- 
 
 A^ c'-ui^^^-N"^"!!. L. 
 
 41 3 c 1 v 
 
 - V ^V V: -\ -Tl- 
 
 I- -I 
 
 -iu- Sy ^j. tv *> 
 
 b \\ 
 
 \\ \\ \\
 
 140 
 
 T11K PHoNoGUAPiiK' MANUAL. 
 
 C 33 _ II lu ID v D 131 -CO A.\ I- -|- ^- -, iS. 
 
 47 
 
 J i. U '\ 
 
 .S 
 
 50-6 r 
 
 EXERCISE, 30-48. 
 
 * > f; ^ V V V S \ 7 * 
 
 5 \ \ h l . K )\ At 
 
 6 /- 
 
 ^ X
 
 THE PHONOGRAPH K 1 MANUAL. 
 
 7 \ 'i I- ^ ^ ) (- 
 
 EXERCISE, CONTINUED, 48-53. 
 
 ^ ' r \r -^
 
 H2 
 
 THE iMi;>\<>. :KAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 5 -= 
 
 -^ vri- i 
 -- 
 
 18 ^K 
 
 LESSON 6. THE SMALL ALTERNATIVE FORMS FOR W AND Y, ETC. 
 60-r.l 3J *| e| <| I i| -J i| ?| 
 
 l <l 
 
 '-si
 
 THK PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 143 
 
 " li It l 
 
 a-b > '7 '/ -/ 
 
 - 
 
 fil 
 
 \ 
 
 *> 
 
 / /r 
 
 EXERCISE, 60-63. 
 
 ,> 3 ^ .-j, ,> / jf V 
 
 x "/ 7 
 
 ^ 1- 4 r* "^1 
 
 e ^* 
 
 U-ii 
 
 LESSON 7. THE H TICKS. 
 "1 -1 LL -1 I*
 
 144 
 
 THE PHONOORAPHU- MANUAL. 
 
 1 
 
 79 -\ \ ^ *& *r\ 
 
 80 ^ -NT _!T 
 
 EXERCISE, 77-80. 
 
 4 ' V 4 : / 
 
 j / 
 
 t / > 
 ~\ 
 
 7 \y 
 
 9 
 10 
 
 -v ^y 4, ^xf. 
 
 . _ )> ^ ^ > 
 
 X 

 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 145 
 
 84 
 
 LESSON 8. SMALL CIRCLES. 
 
 \ r , i / / > 
 
 I. r c r r 
 ^ ) 1 ? ) r 
 
 >\o It S 
 
 o Vo X) (a o b 
 
 NO C 6 
 
 b fa 
 
 \o [, / 
 
 89-a I s acj 
 
 91-2 \ra_v<r 
 
 " \ f ^ ^.r 
 
 y 
 
 y i 
 
 L
 
 1 Jt! 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 100-2 
 
 103, a 
 
 -^ o_o y <^> A I \ 
 
 LESSON 9. LARGE CIRCLES, ETC. 
 
 PP /> / cx_ 0- O/ 
 
 
 c ^d : )X <Li 
 
 f\ V v^ 
 Y f 
 
 106-7 > <^ ^ 
 109-13 -r> \> 1 
 
 >y^ eVr ^ ^ 
 / 4 
 
 ^ ^ n 
 ! / \* ^ \ l 
 
 / C\^ X-J-0 )l 
 
 V V ^ 
 
 ^ A . 
 
 0^ 
 
 9 
 
 ], ]: J: 
 
 aV.
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANTA1.. 14 
 
 ** V 
 
 116 J' > > > & <}> ^ ^ 
 
 117 
 
 LESSON 10. THE S AND Z STEMS. 
 
 -) 5 
 
 ^ \ . ' S), ^ ^ << ^ /. n ' 
 
 x L 
 
 ~^V^ I I L>1\( \ / 
 -) -) N "1 <) >] -) 
 
 119 ~^ j c ^' i /^' i^, lip \^_ / 
 \* yf Y 
 
 121 fc ) J ) ^ ^ ^ \ I ~^ D ^ 3 
 
 LESSON 11. LOOPS. 
 
 122-4 <\ -P ^ y P y cf, ^ ^ \ 
 
 /l / 
 
 125 \ \f _^* /" S? \* -^ ? 
 
 ^^k ^
 
 14S 
 
 , 
 
 127 
 
 130 
 132 
 
 |r (,; 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 xf, "% ^ 
 
 /< X ^ 
 
 EXERCISE, 84-132. 
 
 rv 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 7 \> - 
 
 9 
 10 
 
 12 
 
 " A 
 
 t' 
 
 JL 
 
 f 
 
 V 
 
 I - 

 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 149 
 
 15 - 
 
 Y 
 
 LESSON 12. INITIAL HOOKS, ETC. 
 
 152-3 NX 1 1 
 
 \\ rr 
 
 164 \- \ 
 
 -V 
 
 
 v; 
 
 165-6 X'X -X f ? $ ? 
 
 1 v-- *^7 C^ v_< ^rx^ 
 
 /
 
 150 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.. 
 
 y // ^^' x/^^^ r j /**^^ ~ 
 
 167 
 
 % (T~ 
 
 4=, 
 
 172-4 
 " 
 
 178 
 
 179-80 
 
 v rr CL 
 
 v 
 
 EXERCISE, 152-180. 
 
 <V< N V^ V 
 
 > 
 
 ^ ,/ * *
 
 THE PHOXOGKAPIIIO MANUAL. 
 
 151 
 
 \ % > 
 
 9 
 
 10 
 11 
 12 
 13 
 
 r r 
 
 14 c f / Ci P> 
 
 15 ^ ^ ^ 
 
 - 
 
 - rr 
 
 16 
 
 is A. rv_^ rT^r ^v r r 
 
 LESSON 13. S PREFIXED TO INITIAL HOOKS, ETC. 
 
 184 \ 1 ; a- s ^ Iv?^ <- <r- /
 
 152 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 8 
 
 f -/ 
 
 IBS N ^SS N V 
 
 1 
 
 \ (= 
 
 189 
 
 194-5 
 
 V -1 -/ J- K -1 -/ ^- 
 
 s, 1 / r p^ ^ x*' 1 ^x ^ r 
 
 LESSON 14. FINAL HOOKS. THE N AND F HOOKS. 
 
 199 
 
 \\ J J </ S 
 ^^ (, (, 6 C
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 J ) J J r 
 
 153 
 
 v 
 
 200-a 
 
 201 
 
 V V 
 
 ^ V 
 
 202^ 
 203 \ h 
 206- 
 
 / 
 
 \> 
 
 r\ 
 
 V J- 
 
 V 
 
 \x 
 
 V V V 
 l c ^ / x 
 
 ^ I
 
 17)4 
 
 THE PHOXOiiUAPHIC MANIAI-. 
 
 EXERCISE, 199-306. 
 
 1 V J" /? 
 
 2 u\- -j. ^ 
 
 )* 
 
 ^ /T 
 
 <C< -/r 
 
 - 3 1 
 
 V V ^ 
 
 \ \ I 
 
 X s \ "J 1 
 4 V? l>, / -** - 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 8 
 
 9 
 
 10 
 11 
 12 
 
 13 
 
 14 
 
 15 
 
 16 
 
 * fr 
 
 V 
 
 3- 
 
 N: 1'
 
 TIIK PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 155 
 
 18 
 
 w\^ 
 LESSON 15. FINAL HOOKS, CONTINUED. THE TER HOOK. 
 
 209 -=3 V ^J J- </- ^= -=-s V V V V J c cA 
 
 210-11 
 
 LESSON 16. THE SHUN FINAL HOOK AND THE SHUN CURL. 
 
 214 
 
 ^ Ur> -Lp -I cV^A 
 
 > / '/ 
 
 k U M -lj aN o
 
 156 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 X 
 
 -ir 
 
 217 ^ ^ 4' ^ ^e X<' K f=, i- W 
 
 4- 
 
 LESSON 17. DOWNWARD AND UPWARD R AND L. 
 
 231 
 
 " \X 
 
 IX ^C
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL 
 
 157 
 
 236-d 
 
 237 /T 
 
 V" V' ^ f^ 
 
 K / 
 
 LESSON 18. DOWNWARD AND UPWARD SH.
 
 158 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANTAL. 
 
 y 
 
 241 "v v 
 
 4 
 
 
 1 1? - 
 
 LESSON i;. THE HALVING PRINCIPLE. 
 244-6 \- <' <\> N- <i- V N < \- \- V 
 
 * 
 -\ a. C / 6) O *. V c\ i C/ 
 
 . \- 
 
 V \" 
 
 V V
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MAM Al, 
 
 159 
 
 V "* -J -* 3= J- $9 p V 
 
 <? ff^ <J ^fj Li \f> -^ ^y , 
 
 < ic i. c. is? v cy 
 
 ; 
 
 " G, X- -+\.\- /{ 
 
 "246-8 /** /^ %. \ 1 -; 
 V 3 v 
 
 249-50 
 251 -a ~ 
 
 252-a , c 
 
 -\ 
 
 1 \ \ ^1 \ 
 H J <> k 
 
 T 
 
 25M-a V V "s 3 ^<- >- 
 
 /*> <r N^ 
 
 LESSOX -Jd. THKHALVINC PRTNCIPLE, CONT'D. R AND L HALVED. 
 
 257 /i /- >" ^ f -r t^ i^ &- A \f> ?
 
 100 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC 1 MANUAL. 
 
 258 
 
 -A-AAAAA A A A A 
 i -/I YJJ n rt -ft fa fa n 
 
 259 A 
 
 c /? 
 
 260-1 ft fc, _i/c VX V^, -
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 1G1 
 
 LESSON 21. THE HALVING PRINCIPLE, CONCLUDED. 
 
 263 * Jo A y{ /J ^ A A ./- 
 
 !(> 
 
 266-8 
 
 V. ~\ "> ^v > J ( 
 S V v v^ V ( ) 
 
 270 
 
 i>^ v V" 1 
 
 271 -i - ,1 ^ ,1 
 
 272 ^ |f -/ "V
 
 IG2 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANT.U.. 
 
 273 
 
 275-7 
 280 
 
 281 ^ 
 
 v 
 
 LESSOX 2-2. THE LENGTHEXIXO PRIXCIPLE.
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 1C.3 
 
 285 
 
 287 
 
 288 
 
 289-90 
 
 LESSON 23. PREFIXES. 
 
 293 J- J* 1- y .k- V" L 
 
 " J' L 3 > r ^ r jc j^ 4 'V -^ c J 
 
 \- \ \ r \ N^- u x
 
 104 
 
 THE PliOXcKiKAPHK' MANUAL. 
 .-P. .-IT? .rti, 
 
 --3^ '^ -? ^ -V- 
 
 y .^-^ -^ 
 
 ' X 
 
 _ \ \ 
 
 ; -a N^ v "--^ /ii X X' 
 
 Xj^- Vr Vo ^ 
 
 f,294 '^ \ X^ -m- \ ""^ "* 
 
 /. r \ -. 
 
 7 
 
 ^ o^ v (
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 105 
 
 95-6 
 
 297 
 
 I 
 
 a.e,299 
 
 -A 
 
 300 
 
 3- 
 
 302 -^_>h 
 
 303
 
 166 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 304-b > 
 
 305-6 
 
 316-b >i 
 
 317 
 
 318-a 
 
 f ^ J- .o U 
 
 LESSON" ,'4. AFFIXES. 
 
 =^ V2*- Ni/ 
 
 \l 1* (
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 L67 
 
 V *\ 
 
 ^ X- 
 
 322-3 
 
 ^L 4^ -V -^ 4 
 
 LESSON ^'5. AFFIXES, COXT1NUEU. 
 
 324-5 
 
 326 
 
 327 
 
 328 
 329 
 
 ,
 
 168 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 LESSON 26. AFFIXES, CONCLUDED. 
 330 \-- Zl JT L. ^ 
 
 a-b 
 
 /I. 
 
 >U. 
 
 -f 
 
 331-a \i >C_ 
 
 /^- V 
 
 
 i i 
 
 7 '\ 
 
 332-4 
 
 A 
 
 H A, 
 
 335-9 ^ 
 
 340 
 
 r fa ^ -vq 
 
 J 
 
 ^
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 160 
 
 341 
 342 
 343 
 
 344-a 
 345 
 
 LESSON 27. DERIVATIVES, NEGATIVES, ETC. 
 JTr -2s? T\* ~^ * & & &*-* * 
 
 "a, 347 -^ V '^X V -^ 
 
 348-a '^TT = - y^ TP /o x> 
 
 v* -^.y Q^Z> Ih-' v*-?) (^ 
 
 - r^ ) t P ^ "7 tv
 
 ELEMENTARY STYLE 
 
 AVRITING LESSONS AND EXERCISES. 
 
 (KEY TO HEADING EXEKCISES.) 
 
 LESSON 1. 
 
 CONSONANTS. 
 
 1. P,B,T,D,K,G,S,Z,M,N,Ng,R,L,W,Y. 
 
 2. F,V,Th,Dh,C,J,Sh,Zh,HW,HY. 
 
 EXERCISE, 1-2. 
 
 1. P,B, P,B, P,B, P,B, P,B, P,B, P,B. 
 
 2. T,D, T,D, T,D, T,D, T,D, T,D, T,D. 
 
 3. K,G, K,G, K,G, K,G, K,G. 
 
 5. F,V, F,V, F,V, F,V, F,V, F,V, F,V. 
 
 6. Th,Dh, Th,Dh, Th,Dh, Th.Dh, Th,Dh, Th,Dh, 
 Th,Dh. 
 
 7 C T C J (^ J C J C J C J C J 
 
 8. Sh,Zh, 'sh,Zh, 'sh,Zh, Sh,'zh,' Sh,Zh, Sh,Zh, 
 Sh,Zh. 
 
 9. M,M,M,M,M,M,M,M,M,M. 
 
 10. N,N,N,N,N,N,N,N,N,N, 
 
 11. Ng,Ng,Ng,Ng,Ng,Ng,Ng,Ng,Ng,Ng. 
 
 12. R,R,R,R,R,R,R,R,R,R. 
 
 13. L, Lj Lj L, L, L, L, L, L, J_/. 
 
 1 4. W, \V, W, W, W, nW, nW, H W, nW, 
 
 15. Y,Y,Y,Y,Y,nY,nY,nY,nY,iiY. 
 
 171
 
 172 THE PHOXOCJKAPH1C MANUAL. 
 
 LESSON 2. 
 
 CONSONANTS, CONTINUED. 
 
 4. K,N,M,P,T,C,Y,Sh,R,L. 
 
 7. PP, BB, TT, DD, KK, GG, CC, JJ, KR, PB, 
 BP. 
 
 8. KR, KL, MR, ML, NR, NL. 
 
 a. KP, KF, KSh, NB, NV, NSh, MP, MF, MSh. 
 
 9. KN, KM, NK, MK, NN, NM, MN, MM. 
 
 a. KNP, KMF, NKT, MKTH, NNS, NMC. MMC. 
 10. PK, WM, ThK, PN, FN, WN, TN, ThX, SN. 
 ChN, YN, ShN. 
 
 a. PT, BTh, BZ, VG, VD, FTh, VS, WT, DR, WL. 
 
 EXERCISE, 1-10. 
 
 1. P,B, P,B, T,D, T,D, C,J, C,J, K,G, K,G. 
 
 2. F,V, FV, Th.Dh, Th.Dh, Sh,Zh, Sh,Zh, S,Z, 
 S Z 
 
 3. M,M,M, N,N,Ng, R,R,R, L,L,L. 
 
 4. W,W,W, Y,Y,Y, HW.nW.nW, HY,HY,nY. 
 
 5. PB, TD, CJ, RR, KG, BP, DT, JC, GK. 
 
 > PK, PC, CK, TTh, BT, KF, BTh, PM, TN. 
 
 7. YT, MN, DNM, TXD, FTG, MThNg, NVGT. 
 
 8. KTK, TMNg, BKM, GTL, ShNTh, TMNT, 
 NMTK. 
 
 9. ThP, ThPK, ThNK, JMK, JKB, JLT, NVT. 
 
 EXERCISE, CONTINUED, 5-10. 
 
 1. ThM, ThC, YNff, PJ, CN, DhT, FP, MD, XF. 
 
 2. GD, DG, NT, ND, CP, JN, VN, SK, DhD. 
 
 3. BT, PD, WNg, JV, JSh, SN, GN, BM. JM. 
 
 4. SNg, JB, NG, NB, NJ, FJ, CM, FM, SM. 
 
 5. PPt, PBT, BBD, JJD, KKT, KGD, GGD, 
 RRD, KKX. 
 
 6. XBB, PTT, RJJ, XKG, MGG, KRR, TRR. 
 
 7. DKT. XVD, WMNg, YT, TNS, LBM, LZN, 
 RZX, YVP.
 
 TIIK i'iio.\;x;i;Ai'Hir MANUAL. 173 
 
 8. LBX, FND, BFL, ThK, LMR, YTK, WG, TG. 
 
 9. LTN, RDNg, FT, JNT, LGN, ShNgG. , 
 LKMNir. 
 
 10. ShKG, GLN, KNgKK, PR, KR, ShL, DPJ. 
 
 11. PMR, ZN, LDL, MRT. MDN, LM, TLD, 
 MM, RVX. 
 
 12. KKM, WBSh, NGL, W, TPKN, PDK, 
 LKNg. 
 
 13. RNK, ShNND, RNDLF, YNS, BNgKM, MRN, 
 RL. 
 
 14. PXgKX, SL, TLL, TNJP, GLD, WK, LPS. 
 
 15. DBK, KKK, MKN, LLN, KNSh, WKSh, 
 DLF. 
 
 16. ZRK, TPK, PGS, YM, MRPZ, WPT, TKM. 
 
 17. CRK, CKT, KKP, MRKP, CKS, SJ, PC, 
 ShShX, CXK. 
 
 18. NTR, MNTB, SNB, WPL, LThM, VKTR, 
 KND. 
 
 LESSON 3. 
 
 W AND Y AND DOWNWARD R AND L, ETC. 
 
 12-14. W, WF, FW or F^, VF, Y, YK, NY or 
 NZ, NF. 
 
 15. Y, L, YM, LM, YK, LK, YN, LN, YNgK. 
 
 16. L, LP, PL, BL, LT, KL, GL, FL, FZ. 
 
 17. C, R, CP, RP, PC, PR, MR, CM, FR. 
 
 18. Sh, ShP, ShPL, PSh, PSA, TSh, Zh, ZhR, 
 RZh. 
 
 " T?Sh, VM, ShF, ShTh, ShDh, LSh, ShSh, 
 RSh, ShL. 
 
 " ShS, SSh, ZSh, MSh, MZh, YS/i, ShY, ZhY, 
 YSh. 
 
 EXERCISE, 12-18. 
 
 1. WG, WN, WM, NTF, LTT, PW, TW, 
 M. 
 
 2, YK, YN, YNg, YM, PL, TL, CL, NZ, FZ.
 
 174 THE PHONOGRAPHIC 1 MANTAL. 
 
 3. LV, LTh, LW, LVL, LKL, MNZ, MNDL. 
 
 4. PL, LL, KL, NgZ, SL, ML, DL, JL, FL. 
 
 5. OK, RK, MC, NC, LC, LR, DC, DR, BR. 
 
 6. FRTh, MRTh, MRL, MKN, LThNg, LM, 
 MLC, NLD. 
 
 7. SK, ShK, SN, ShN, ShD, ShW, ZhW, ShM, 
 STh, SDh. 
 
 s. WK, w^, WTT; H WM, YK, YTh, YZ, 
 
 nYM, YL, YLSh. 
 
 9. W,W, Y,Y, L,L, C,C, R,R, S,Z, Sh,Zh. 
 10. L, R, TZh, MpSh, NSh, ShC, ShLNg, ZhF, 
 ZhSh, RZhM. 
 
 EXERCISE, CONTINUED, 12-18. 
 
 1. WR, nWK, lAVF, nWN, H\VP, iiWK, nWG. 
 nWM, WGSh. 
 
 2. CW, JW, K\V. GW, CPW, RJW, F If, KR, 
 TR. 
 
 3. YD, YZ, YS, YMS, YG, YKR, YNgSh, 
 YKFL, YKLM. 
 
 4. F72L, BRL, NZL, KML, PKDL, MNPL. 
 
 5. VLM, KLK, KLP, MLK, FL72, FLS, 
 KJLR. 
 
 6. LFT, LFJ, LMNg, LNgK, LNGSh, LDXM, 
 LGT. 
 
 7. LFTL, LKT, LGJ, LLB, LNC, LSM, LRK. 
 
 8. BNZ, DNZ, VNZ, RNZ, LRL, BRL, SRL, 
 NTRL, FZNg. 
 
 9. CNT, CNB, CKR, CKD, CRP, CSG, CNS, 
 CKML, FNC. 
 
 10. RM, RDM, RNC, RFJ, RCL, RP7?, RMND. 
 
 11. RDL, RDT, RDS, RKSh, RTN, RTR, RTT, 
 RMD, -RNgK. 
 
 12. NTR, NTRT, PRS, PRK, KRT, JRX, KRND. 
 
 13. KMR, MMR, FLR, LMNTR, LFTR, FRR, 
 BRR.
 
 THE PIIOXOr.UAPHIC MAXCAL. 175 
 
 14. ShR, ShKR, ShND, ShMNir, ShLL, ShLR, 
 ShLl), ShKSh, ZhRR. 
 
 15. FMSh, RDSh, RGSh, FLSh, LV/<, NVA, 
 IvShMR, LMZh. 
 
 1(>. J, M, K, S, TL, NV, RP, VN, MN. (Jehu, 
 Omaha, Kehoe, Soho, tallvho, Navajo, Arapahoe, 
 I vanhoe, Minnehaha. ) 
 
 IT. P, T. K, S, F, Th, C, Sh. 
 
 18. M, N, Ng, R, L, W, Y, nW, nY. 
 
 LESSON 4. 
 
 RIGHT ANGLES, ETC. 
 
 20. PSh, PM, TX, KS, CF, RW, FR, ThK, YP, 
 ALT, WC, LP. 
 
 21. PS, PN,TSh,TF.KW,KM, CTh, FK, ThP, YT. 
 " SC, MP, LK, WT, MS, LW, AVSh, F*S'A, 
 
 ThN, YF. 
 
 ' MX, WF, STh, ShY, LSh, NM, F7Z, ThS, YSh, 
 SKL. 
 
 22. RS, RSh, RW, RM, RL, FR, ThR, YR, NR. 
 23-5. Mp, LMp, KMp, TMp, DMp, MpG, MMp, 
 
 YMp, "N." 
 
 26-7. +, H, hM, hMp, hW, hS, hShhL, NhM, NhL. 
 " 7/X, 7>Xg, AF, ATh, AY, hK, hR, AP, AT, AC, +B. 
 
 EXERCISE, 20-27. 
 
 1. BSh, TNg, KZ, JV, VR, ThG, MD, WJ, LB. 
 
 2. GW, BNg, BN, PNff, BZ, DF, DSh. 
 
 3. MZ, MXg, MB, WV, SDh, SJ, ZJ. 
 
 4. V^A, F W, VG, YN, DhS, Dhp, ThB, YD. 
 
 5. RML, RS, RZ, RF, RV, RTh, RDh, RN, RL. 
 
 6. DML, TML, LML, FML, PML, NML, MML. 
 
 7. FMLR, FMLRL, MBL, YMS, LMXT, GMp. 
 
 8. H, AV, AB, AD, AJ, hG, hZL, hML, hLK. 
 
 U. //Th, AND, //XJ, AVN, AFSh ABB, AJPJ, 
 hLD, liSliSh, hSLR.
 
 170 TIMO PHONOQRA-PfilC MANUAL. 
 
 'LESSON 5. 
 
 VOWELS AND VOCALIZATION. 
 
 30-5. i, e, n, a, a, o. 1, e, u, a, a, o, o*7, oi^ ui. 
 36-7. ni, He, HU, Ha, Ha, HO, HI, ne, im; Ha, Ha, 
 HO, HoiZ, Hoi, HIM. 
 
 39. Hni, Hne, HHU, Hna, Hna, HHO, [!], [6-], [a-], 
 [a-], [a-], [6-], Hno'iZ, Hfm-], H[na-], -f-e, +aore, a. 
 41. ii, ee, uu, iu, en, ue, aa, ao, aa, ao, oa, oa. 
 " ia, ia, ea, eo, ua, uo, eeu, mi, iue, iau, eoa, uao. 
 ' ' au, ai, ia, oau, oio, otZa, oia, ui, anw, aoa, aao, 
 oao. 
 
 a. Hni[u-], Hne[u-], [1-jHnu, [e-jHnu, H[m-]- 
 H[HU-], H[Hu-]H[ne-], Hnafa-], [a-][o-], Hna[a-], 
 [a-]Hna, HaHo, H[Ha-]H[H5-]. 
 
 " Hmwa, Hiioi'a, Hnuz'a, Ha[a-]Ha, Hna[a-][a-], 
 HHa[o-][a-], HHaH[Ho-]Ha, HHaHHaHno, H[Ha-]- 
 H[Ha-]H[HO-], [o-JHaHnu, [o-]H[m-][6-], aHnai. 
 
 b. aia, at a, aina, Haia, aina, Haina, aa, 
 
 H, O6>, OHO. 
 
 c. iii, a'.a, oto, o'.u, o'.i, uii, o'.i'.o, 
 
 47. iT, eT, uT, aT, aT, oT, IK, eK, nK, aK, aK, 
 oK. 
 
 " Ti, Te, Tu, Ta, Ta, To, Kl, Ke, Ka, Ka, Ka, 
 Ko. 
 
 " eTa, aTu, aTo, ouT, wT, u^T, eKa, aKu, aKo, 
 Ko?7, Koi, Ku^. 
 
 " iaT, Tia, eHuoT, TeHno, eaT, Tea, iaK, Kia, 
 eHnoK, KeHno, eaK, Kea. 
 
 ' HiT, HniT, H[m-]T, [e-]T, HnaT, H[na-]T, 
 HiK, HmK, H[m-]K, [e-]K, HnaK, H[na-]K. 
 
 - Ti, T[i-], Te, T[e-], Ta, T[a-], Ki, K[I-], Ke, 
 K[e-], Ka, K[a-]. 
 
 48-9 TeM, LaK, RaR, PeP, DiaNa, MiNenatna, 
 PinaHiRoTh (Pihahiroth), DlNaMo, aNDaLuSfia
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MAXUAL. 177 
 
 (Andalusia), Rw'aL, RiC, ShlLi, -+-1M, +eM or iM, 
 eM (Mm, 'em). 
 
 50-6. 1-Dea, I-[o]N, K-eno, Mfop, Mfap, Mfoap, 
 MfO'ap, Mfopi, TeMpO, BaMpu, HoNg, iNgaM, 
 LiNgo, G " a " Te. (Idea, Ion, Kehoe, mop or mob, 
 map or Mab, Moab, moppi or mobby, tempo, bamboo, 
 hong, Ingham, lingo, Goethe. 
 
 EXERCISE, 30-48. 
 
 1. i, I, e, e, u, u, a, a, a, a, o, 6, ow, oi, ui. 
 
 2. Hi, m, He, He, HU, HO, Ha, Ha, Ha, Ha, HO, HO, 
 
 3. aia, aa; a'. a, a; oio, oo\ aii, a*; eia, ea. 
 
 4. 10, la, ea, eea, ue, ai, Hai, anOa, ama, 
 
 , OHIO, HOIHO, 6aHii. (lo, la, Aea or Oea, Aeaea, 
 Ooi, ai, hai, Ahoah, Ahia, ahoy, Hai, Ohio, Hoaiho, 
 Oahu.) 
 
 5. Pee, Bee, Tee, Dee, Kee, Gee, See, Zee, Fee, 
 Vee, Thee, Dhee. 
 
 6. Chee, Jee, Shee, Zhee, Mee, Nee, Eeng, Ree, 
 Lee, Wee, Yee, Hwee, Hyee, Way, Yay. 
 
 7. Up, it, too, am, no, go, so, they, are. 
 
 8. Ashy, easy, Esau, any, essay, ally, away, 
 echo, obey, ivy. 
 
 9. Happy, hope, had, her, him, half, hath, have. 
 
 10. Iota, Iowa, Idaho, Isaiah, lago, bayou, via, 
 payee. 
 
 11. Dim, deem, limb or limn, lime, rim, rime or 
 rhyme, whim, deep, peal or peel. 
 
 12. Top, chop, rock or rok, lock, knock, mock, 
 walk, talk, shock. 
 
 13. Bake, beck, rake, wreck, tame, check, make, 
 neck, lake. 
 
 14. Dome, dumb, roam or Rome, rum, cope, cup, 
 sheaf, sheave, goal.
 
 17>! TIIK PIIONOCJKAl'Hir MAM'AL. 
 
 15. Aerate, parry, cap, far, tap, balm, move, arid, 
 aright. 
 
 16. Back, tack, rack, knack, whack, yak, jack, 
 lack, lag. 
 
 17. Pious, dowel, Lowell, vowel, chaos, voyage, 
 rowel, vial, piety. 
 
 18. Kinnikinic, monogamy, cachexy, cacochymy, 
 cacochymic. 
 
 EXERCISE, CONTINUED, 48-53. 
 
 1. Loom, room, Fido, tarry, tool, pool, moor, 
 loop, tomb. 
 
 2. Pick, check, take, keg, pitch, peach, tip, talk, 
 tuck. 
 
 3. Type, teach, cheap, page, rage, rope, catch, 
 cage, rug. 
 
 4. Palm, path, both, tooth, faith, fang, lath, 
 laugh, leek or leak. 
 
 5. Among, shady, penny, ferry, many, shadow, 
 tallow, tabby, copy. 
 
 6. Tower, power, rowdy, vouch, couch, lower, 
 month, shower, cower. 
 
 7. Boil, toil, foil, coil, moil, boyish, decoy, 
 envoy, noisy. 
 
 8. Book, cook, rook, look, nook, took, pull, 
 push, shook. 
 
 9. Ruin, opium, ammonia, fiat, riot, idiot, being, 
 deity, deify. 
 
 10. Cheyenne, diet, Taos, laity, gaiety, rawish, 
 poet, poesy, poem. 
 
 11. Locate, timothy, tamely, luckily, luggage, 
 leakage, form, kodak, barilla. 
 
 12. Retire, verify, lively, admire, terrify, beneath, 
 thickish, gamely, parity. 
 
 13. Apothem, verity, bodily, boiler, gallop, de- 
 camp, pelf, baggage, chimney.
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 179 
 
 14. Bonnet, readily, fairly, affinity, faulty, pigmy, 
 legatee, Ridge way, Laredo. 
 
 15. Emanate, elfish, Elmira, Allegheny, fathom, 
 Anthony, vanity, academic, emphatic. 
 
 16. Ferrying, marrying, rallying, copying, pity- 
 ing, palliate., caviat, period, orthoepy. 
 
 17. Variety, lineage, foliage, alleviate, fealty, 
 tapioca, egoism, bayonet, Antioch. 
 
 18. Mope, mopish, moper, Moabite, embellish, 
 embank, Eeng, ink, inky. V~ 
 
 LESSON 6. 
 
 THE SMALL ALTERNATIVE FORMS FOR W AND Y, ETC. 
 
 60-r.l. wiT, weT, TpiiT, waT, w&T, woT, wowT, 
 wo-T, iFu/T. 
 
 " YiT, YeT, YuT, YaT, YaT, YoT, YoilT, 
 YoiT, YU-/T. 
 
 " HiFiT, HweT, mpuT, HnFFaT, HniFaT, 
 HnwoT, HYiT, HYeT, HYuT, HnYaT, HnYaT, HHYOT. 
 " TPFI, Twe, TPFU, Twa, T^a, Two, TYi, 
 TYO, TYU, TYa, TYa, TYO. 
 
 a-b. Witty, (w-[i]Ti), watch, wedge, wage, withe, 
 wheezy, wash, what, which, with, was, wish. 
 
 " Yap (Y-[a]P), Uba, Enbcea, Yattaw, Youatt, 
 Hewitt, uva, yeth, Euethe, Yassy, Yesso, Yazoo. 
 
 " YQTh, YfiS, YuZ, PYuNi, ByuTi, KYUB, PYU, 
 KYQ, aG-Yn, FYU, VYQ, MYH. 
 
 61. rTh, yS, rZ, PrNi, BrTi, KrB, P-r, 
 F-F, V-F, M-F, K-F, aG-F. 
 
 63. Tue, do, due or dew, duenna, duel, endue, 
 sue or Sioux, suet, ensue, zumic. 
 
 " Thew, Jew, lieu, luna, nubia or Nubia, avenue, 
 tuet, tufa, tucum.
 
 180 THK PIION'OURAPHIC MANTAf.. 
 
 EXERCISE, 00-63. 
 
 1. Wyatt, whitey, whitish, widow, weedy, woody, 
 witch, Washoe, bewitch. 
 
 2. Yap, Ubii, Yeddo, Utah, Youatt, lawyer, 
 month, manual, minuet, ingenuous. 
 
 3. Ubiety, Eudora, euphony, unique, unify, 
 unite, unity, immunity, mutiny. 
 
 4. Review, nephew, fewer, viewer, musa, Cuba, 
 pure, bureau, usurp. 
 
 5. Mule, puma, fury, fume, feud, curio, annual, 
 fuel, purity. 
 
 6. Utica, Utopia, usury, cubic, Dubuque, rebuke, 
 reviewer, cumuli. 
 
 7. Tube, tuba, dupe, duke, tissue, duty, duet, 
 duad, assume. 
 
 LESSON 7. 
 
 THE H TICK. 
 
 77. Ahem, Ahab, ahead, hut, hawk, hitch, Harry, 
 here, hero. 
 
 " Hire, harrow, hill, hall or haul, hul! 3 holy, 
 hulk, helm, unholy. 
 
 78. Hop, hod, heave, heavy, hush, hum, hump, 
 Hun, Hindoo. 
 
 " Harp, herb, hearth, hurl, harsh, Harvey, 
 hackney, Hallam, hank. 
 
 " Havana, hammock, humbug, hark, harm, 
 Harney, hearer, hurley. 
 
 79. Happy, hope, him, happily, help, handy, 
 hinge, Helvetia, homeopathic. 
 
 80. Unhappy, uphill, keyhole, unhitch, tom- 
 ahawk, Mohammed, unhealthy, unhandy, unhinge. 
 
 EXERCISE, 77-80. 
 
 1. Heap, hub, hat, heed, huff, hove, heath, hatch, 
 hodge.
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 181 
 
 2. Hussy, hush, Hoang-Ho, honey, hong, hurry, 
 hail or hale, heave, Hiera. 
 
 3. Hodgely, hunch, hotly, Henley, hurried, 
 huffish, heavier, heavily, hoodlum. 
 
 4. Helve, Helena, hurrying, hailing, headache, 
 hatchway, hedgehog, hedgerow, hegira. 
 
 5. Homage, hiccough, harm, hominy, hectic, humi- 
 lity, herbage, Nehemiah, hallelujah, Himalaya. 
 
 <>. Hubbub, hearty, hardy, Herod, hallowed, 
 holliday, hecatamb, heritage, homogeneity. 
 
 7. Happier, homely, homily, health, healthier, 
 healthily, homelike, homelier, handier. 
 
 s . Jehovah, behemoth, Yokohama, inhale, upheave, 
 behoof, behoove, behave, behavior. 
 
 0. Sahara, re-hash, adhere, abhor, shanghai, Ne- 
 maha, Navajo, Howell, Hawaii. 
 
 1<>. Jehu, Omaha, Kehoe, Soho, Yahoo, Fohi, 
 Sheehy, Elihu, Mahew. 
 
 11. Tallyho, Arapahoe, Mohave, Tahiti, Thahash. 
 Sihor, Mohawk, sahib, Ivanhoe. 
 
 LESSON 8. 
 
 SMALL CIRCLES. 
 
 *4. sK, sG, sP, sB, sT, sD, sC, sJ, sK. 
 
 " sX, sNg, sF, sV, sTh, sDh, sY, sl r . 
 
 " sM, sMp, sW, s W, sS, sZ, sSh, sZh, sL. 
 
 85. Ks, Gs, Ps, Bs, Ts, Ds, Cs, Js, Rs. 
 
 " Ns, Ngs, Fs, Vs, Ths, Dhs, Ys, Ya. 
 
 " Ms, Mps, Ws, TTs, Ss, Zs. Shs, Zhs, Ls. 
 
 ' ' sKs, sPs, sTs, sCs, sKs, sNs, sFs, sThs, sYs. 
 
 " sMs, sMps, sWs, sTJs, sSs, sZs, sShs, sZhs, 
 sLs. 
 
 M;. PsP. TsT, CsC, KsK, KsR GsP, BsT, TsK, 
 JsP, Rsk 
 
 ^7. MsP, BsM, VsJ, MsJ KsM, MsK, NsT, RsN, 
 
 WsP, LsK.
 
 182 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANVAL. 
 
 a. MsM, nWsL, SsW, NsN, FsZ, ThsZ, MsX, 
 NsM, FsLT, NsLT, L.sTh. 
 
 89-a. swT, swSh, is es, us, as, as, os, cms, 0zs, 
 u/s, ais. 
 
 91-2. sP, sT, sK, sF, sM, sMP, sN, sL, sW, 
 sTh, sC, sSh, sR, sY, sPR, sF^. 
 
 " zB, zD, zG, zV, zM, zMp, zN, zL, zAV, zDh, 
 zJ, zZH, zR, zY, zBR, zW?. 
 
 98. Spy, stay, sky, sphere, small, snow, slow, 
 sway, swoop, swamp, Sveer, Znaim. 
 
 99. Seep, site or cite, said, sage, seek, safe, saith 
 or Seth, such, sash, some or sum, simile, sun, sing, 
 sir, sell, sweaty, (sw-[e]Ti), swish(sw-[i]Sh.) 
 
 " Sag, sabbath, sodium, savage, sachem, sorry, 
 city, subdue, Saginaw, safety, Savannah, Seneca. 
 
 100-2 Task, phthisic, miasma, museum, rice or 
 rise, Kehoes, skies, snows, seeks, righteous (see sec. 
 70), Tasso, posy. 
 
 LESSON 9. 
 
 LARGE CIRCLES ETC. 
 
 103-a ssP, ssB, ssT, ^sD, ssC, ssJ, ssK, ssG, ssR. 
 
 " ssN, ssF, ssTh, ssY, ssM, ssMp, ssW, ssSh, 
 ssL. 
 
 " Sisbee, suspicious, suspiciously, systole, 
 sostenuto. 
 
 " Sisco, Susquehanna, suslik, seismic. 
 
 b. Saucy, Sousa, sisera, Cicero, caesura. 
 
 " Susurrus, Sesame, Sicily, Cecilia, syzygy, 
 Sisyphus, soeius. 
 
 c. Sausage, schism, season, Susan, Sassenach. 
 " Saucer, Caeser, caesarism, Cecil, sacerdos, 
 
 10i-5 Schismatize, secede, seceder, seceding, sauce- 
 box, so-so, seesaw, so-sos, seesaws. 
 
 106-7 Sauce, saucing, saucer, saucy, saucier, 
 saucilv, sauciness.
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 183 
 
 " Size, sizy, Suzy, sis, sissy, society. 
 109-13 Kss, Pss, Tss, Css, Rss, Nss, Fss, Thss, Yss. 
 Mss, VVss, Sss, Shss, Lss, NssT, NssR, 
 MssP, KsRss. 
 
 " Insist, decisive, dissuasive, excessive, em- 
 phasis, desist, possessed, exist, resist, risest, possessive, 
 exhaust. 
 
 " Apotheosis, Texas, dispossess, discuses or 
 discusses, capsize, colossus, Anchises, successive, sur- 
 mises, enthusiast, nicest, wisest, choicest, closest. 
 
 " Exercise, exorcise, peace or piece, pieces, 
 phase, phases, rouses, poses or possess, Pss, KsRsss, 
 enthusiasm, abscissa. 
 
 116. Sauce, size, cease, souse, sauces, sizes, ceases, 
 souses. 
 
 117. Assess, assize, oasis, Isis, Isoeus, assesses, 
 assizes. 
 
 LESSON 10. 
 
 THE S AND / STEMS. 
 
 118-a. Ace, ice, asp, ask, assume, Assyria, aspire, 
 escape, asleep. 
 
 " Asa, icy, essay, sigh, see or sea, sue, 
 Sioux or Sue, say, saw so. 
 
 " Lucy, Bessie, Casy, fussy, lasso, basso, Jesse 
 or Jessie, massy, chasse, also. 
 
 b. Siam, Sahara, science, seance, scion or Sion, 
 sciatica, sower or sewer, sawer, lyceum. 
 
 " Chaos, bias, alias, dais, Taos, tortuous, theos, 
 pius, joyous. 
 
 119. Aces, ices, saws or sauce, asps, lassos, Siam- 
 ese, sciences, piously, joyously. 
 
 121. Ease, use, easy, Zoe, rosy, busy, dizzy, cozy, 
 noisy. 
 
 " Piazza, Boa/, zero, busily, dizzily, cozily, 
 noisily, easily, rosiness.
 
 184 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 LESSON 11. 
 
 LOOPS. 
 
 122-4. Step, state, stake, stage, stout, stitch, 
 steady, store, story, stP. 
 
 " Still, stilly, stem, stone, staff, starch, 
 
 stork, stear, stearic, stow, stower, stowage. 
 
 125. Past, test, cast, chest, rest, fast, assist, zest, 
 finest, thinnest, keenest, toughest, testify, justify, 
 Fst. 
 
 " Post or posed, opposed, supposed, based, 
 abased, teased, dust, just, rust, roused, aroused, 
 gazed. 
 
 " Whizzed or whist, ceased or seized, least or 
 leased, amassed, amazed, faced or phazed, honest, 
 noized, reposed, revised, deposed, deputized. 
 
 126. Testy, tasty, dusty, rusty, vasty, misty, 
 Shasta, bestow, Tuesday. 
 
 127. Pests, tests, guests, chests, jests, rests, fasts, 
 mists, nests, Psts, Fsts. 
 
 130. Caster, master, Nestor, wester, faster, jester, 
 pastor, duster, disturb, Pstr. 
 
 132. Casters, masters, Nestors, westers, f asters, 
 jesters, pastors, dusters, rosters, Pstrs. 
 
 EXERCISE, 84-132. 
 
 1. Space, spare, scheme, sphericity, smoke, snare, 
 snail, slim, sweep, Sviaga, Zvornik, Zlatoosk. 
 
 2. Self, selves, salute, salad, sailor, salary, sal- 
 aried, select, saltish. 
 
 3. Simoom, Samuel, seemly, seeming, semi-annual, 
 sensate, censor, sanitary, sanitarium. 
 
 4. Safely, safer, savagery, severe, satiety, satire, 
 satiate, Saratoga, Sardinia. 
 
 5. Saxon, sagacity, Saracen, Samson, sophism, 
 sedulons, sageness, sagacious, saleratus.
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 185 
 
 6. Seismal, sassaby, ciselure, schism, schisms, scis- 
 sors, sizzle, sizzles, sizzling. 
 
 7. Pauses or possess, adduces, incisive, announces, 
 peruses, dieresis or diereses, revises, advices or ad- 
 vises, coalesces. 
 
 8. Assuage, eschew, escheat, espouse, espousal, 
 Eskimo, Iscariot, Escurial, asphyxia. 
 
 9. Assassin, Essex, assegai, ossify, assignee, as- 
 aumpsit, esophagus, sienna, siesta. 
 
 10. Efficacy, legacy, policy, Nancy, lunacy, inti- 
 macy, galaxy. 
 
 11. Islam, Aztec, Israel, Ezra, Ezekiel, Ozark, 
 lazy, mazy, hazy. 
 
 12. Zouave, zeal, Zeno, zinc, Zachary, zodiac, Xer- 
 xes, zigzag, hazily. 
 
 13. Step, steam, Stacey, stager, steadiness, steal th- 
 iest, stammer, stammerer, stanch, stanza, stirrup. 
 
 14. Best, sauced, assist, assessed, sauciest, text, 
 saltest, reduced, thickest, meekest, weakest, zoologist. 
 
 15. Mistify, majestic, majestical, tasteful, artist, 
 artistic, theistic, elastic, statistics. 
 
 16. Dazed, devised, memorized, majesty, assists, 
 sophists, suggests, invests, texts. 
 
 17. Songster, sinister, roister, yougster, Munster, 
 dexter, Rochester, Lancaster, Chesterville. 
 
 18. Imposters, disasters, choristers, barristers, an- 
 cestors, ministers, monsters, gamesters, forresters. 
 
 LESSON 12. 
 
 INITIAL HOOKS, ETC. 
 
 152-3. Pr, Br, Tr, Dr, Kr, Gr, Cr, Jr, Fr, Vr, 
 Thr, Dhr, Shr, Zhr, Mr, Ml, Mpr, Mpl, Shi, Zhl. 
 
 PI, Bl, Tl, Dl, Kl, Gl, Cl, Jl, Fl, VI, Thl, Dhl, 
 Yl, PI, Nr, Nl, Ngr, Ngl, Rl, Lr. 
 
 164. Pray, brow., try, draw, ecru, gray, free, 
 through, shrew.
 
 18C) THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 " Preach, drake, drum, frame, fresh, froth, 
 frank, thrive, thrush. 
 
 " Apprehend, Graham, droop, shrill, shriller, 
 shrillest, shroff, shrove, sassafras. 
 
 " Play, plow, blow, clay, claw, clew, flay, 
 flaw, Schley. 
 
 " Pluck, plash, bleach, flour, flitch, flash, flame, 
 fling, flange. 
 
 " Plead, pledge, globe, Vlissmaki, thlipsis, Tlas- 
 cala, Tlemcen, Tlumacz, Schleswig. 
 
 165-6. Per, upper, apple, till, chair, dear or deer, 
 Shelbyville, persevere, umpire, amber, ample or am- 
 ble, anger, angle. 
 
 ' Turk, largess, soldier, recourse, engineer, 
 full, oral, rule, temper, temple, lumper or lumber, 
 rumple or rumble. 
 
 " Curious, Cornell, normal, north, moral, gur- 
 gle, gorgeous, Georgia, quality, ringer or wringer, 
 wrangle, inker, inkle, ranker, rankle. 
 
 " Sure, shawl, fisher, official, visual, visualize, 
 initial, shelf, sheriff. 
 
 167. Perceive, larghetto, paper, taper, or tapir, 
 teacher, meager, trigger, trimmer, trammel, chimer, 
 assumer, enamor, tanner, banner, Bangor, collar or 
 choler. 
 
 " Persist, bourgeois, ripple, tunnel, tingle, 
 carol, enamel, camel, chamber, jumble, assemble, 
 bushel, woeful, shovel, sacerdotal. 
 
 172-4. Pueblo, dwell, quell, guib, Cw, Jw, voya- 
 geur, thwack, Banquo, Kewaunee. 
 
 " Bois, etui, twice, twist, twig, Quay, quiz, 
 quizzical, queer, queery, untwist, esquire. 
 
 178. Wear or ware, weary, aware, where, warm, 
 beware, year, yarrow, oyer, yearly. 
 
 179-80. Wall, willow, while, awhile, Welsh, Wil- 
 bur, willful, welcome, William, Rockwell, "weigher, 
 Wyal, ewer, Ewell,
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 187 
 
 EXERCISE, 152-lM.I. 
 
 1. Prop, pretty, preach, prior, priory, brush, 
 broom, brawl, breath. 
 
 2. Trip, triad, dredge, dreary, trash, dream, 
 drill, brawny, bring. 
 
 3. Crop, grotto, grudge, creek or crick, grassy, 
 crush, grim, crawl, growth. 
 
 4. Frap, Friday, friary, frog, freer, frowzy, 
 frith, frump, freely. 
 
 5. Threap, throb, thrum, thrash, throng, thrill, 
 thrall, thrifty, threnody. 
 
 6. Shrap, shrub, shrike, shriek, shrug, shrive, 
 shrewish, shrimp, shrink. 
 
 7. Blab, Plato, blotch, bleary, bleak, blower, 
 blowzy, plush, plum. 
 
 8. Bluffy, blithe, blithely, blank, plank, blazon, 
 plaisance, Pleyel, Pliny. 
 
 9. Club, cloudy, clutch, clique, Clara, glassy, 
 clash, glum, cloth. 
 
 10. Flap, flighty, fledge, flurry, flourish, flake, 
 flare, flume, flail. 
 
 11. Fluff, fluffy, flesh, fleshy, flanch, flinch, flung, 
 flank. 
 
 12. Yale, yell, yelling, yawl, yule, yowl^ yowling, 
 yelk, yolk. 
 
 13. Vapor, maker, buckle, tackle, peril, rural, 
 family, cooler, nailer, lovingly. 
 
 14. Tweed, twitch, twixt, twirl, twang, twankay, 
 twill, dwale, dwang. 
 
 15. Quip, quiet, queachy, quick, choir or quire, 
 quarry, quassia, Quassy, qualm. 
 
 16. Quoth, quail, quota, guacho, guaco, guaiac, 
 guanaco, guava, guelph. 
 
 17. Worth, worthy, wearily, wordy, wearier, war- 
 ble, yerba, Europe, Yarmouth. 
 
 1 8. AValrus, wolf, welfare, wheeler, wheeling, 
 wheelbarrow, wooer, hewer, Yawa!, Whcewhel.
 
 188 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 LESSON 13. 
 
 S PREFIX TO INITIAL HOOKS, ETC. 
 
 L s Pr, sTr, sCr, sKr, syR, sFr, sThr, sShr, 
 sShl, sMr, sMl, swL. 
 
 '< sBr, sDr, sJr, sGr, sVr, sDhr, sZhr, sZhl, 
 sMpr, sMpl. 
 
 185. sPl, sTl, sCl, ski, swR, sFl, sThl, sYl, sXr, 
 sNl, sKw. 
 
 " sBl, sDl, sJl, sGl, sVl, sDhl, sNgr, sXgl, sGw. 
 
 186. Supper, saber, setter, cider, seeker, suffer, 
 sever, simmer, simper, sample, seizure, social, supreme, 
 spiritous, spiritously, swell. 
 
 " Supple, sable, settle, satchel, sickle, Sigel, 
 civil, sooner, singer, single, skill, school, sequoia, Sa- 
 gua, swarthy, swarm. 
 
 187. Swear, soiree, swale, swallow, Zwolle, sway- 
 er, suwarrow, Sewell, Suyarrow, Seyell. 
 
 188. Spry, spruce, spray, stray, straw, spring, 
 sprawl, strap, streak. 
 
 " Stream, string, stroll, scribe, scrub, screech, 
 scream, scrawl, scroll. 
 
 " Splice, spliced, splash, squaw, squeak, square, 
 squelch, pasquil, spume. 
 
 189. Extra, Uxbridge, prosper, destroy, dispraise, 
 prescribe, display, explicit, sensible. 
 
 " Vesper, vestry, mastery, massacre, atmos- 
 phere, rostrum, pastry, disciple, disable. 
 
 a. Descry, discursive, disagree, disagreeable, de- 
 cipher, deciphers, decipherable, dissever, jasper. 
 
 104-5. Suspire, sister, sisters, sesterces, sastra, 
 sisterly, sisterhood, sistrum. 
 
 " Stopper, stutter, stitcher, stoker, stabber, 
 staider, stager, stagger, staggers, necessarily. 
 
 190. hPr, hTr, hCr, hTl, hTw, hCl, hCw, hKl, 
 hThr, hShr, hFl, hFw, hThl, hThw, hYl, hNr, hM.
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 180 
 
 AKr, AK1. AKw, APl,APw, Aw>R, AR1, 
 A Mr, AMI, AwL, ALr, AFr. 
 
 Hopper, Hebrew, hatter, hydra, Hagar, hag- 
 gle, hatcher, heifer, heathen, hummer, hobble, huddle, 
 hovel, Henry. 
 
 LESSON 14. 
 
 FINAL HOOKS. THE N AND F HOOKS. 
 
 199. Kn, Gn, Pn, Bn, Tn, Dn, Cn, Jn, Rn, 
 " Nn, Ngn, Fn, Vn, Thn, Dhn, Yn, Yu, 
 " Mn, Mpn, Wn, TFn, Sn, Zn, Shn, Zhn, Ln, 
 " Pawn, boom, ten, down, ken, gain, chain, 
 
 John, rain, rein or reign. 
 
 " Wan, won or one, assign, ozone, men, im- 
 
 pugn, shown, lean, fine, vine, thin, thine, noun, yon 
 
 or yawn. 
 
 " Happen, siskin, sustain, cistern, cistercian, 
 
 Sicilian, sassolin, cisalpine, socinian, secern, station. 
 200-a. Candy, mundane, Fuente, learner, learn- 
 
 ing, sustenance, suspension, terrapin, fancy, pans}", 
 
 tansy, Chauncey, frequency, tenon, pronoun. 
 
 " b. Canch, bench, trench, chinch, wrench, munch, 
 
 winch, lynch, finch, penny, guinea, finny. 
 
 201. Coins, guns, pounce, bounce, tense or tens, 
 dance, chance, jounce, rinse, prince. 
 
 " Kansas, ganzas, pounces, bounces, tenses, 
 dances, chances, jounces, rinses princes, or princess. 
 
 " Assistance, cadence, cadences, expense, ex- 
 penses, sequence, suspense, existence, resemblance. 
 
 " Resistance, distance, reluctance, turns, barns, 
 elegance, allegiance, variance, eloquence. 
 
 202. Nouns, once or ones, mens, fence or fens, 
 fences, lens, lenses, ransom, minstrel. 
 
 203. Pounced, danced, chanced, fenced, punster, 
 punsters, spinster, spinsters, minister. 
 
 206. Cuff, gaff, puff, biff, tiff, deaf, chaff, Jove, 
 reef, wharf, swerve.
 
 190 T11K I'lloN-ocKAT'IIir MANTAI.. 
 
 a. Refer or reefer, ' rover, river, cover, paving 1 , 
 drover, driver, driveway, briefer, approvingly. 
 
 I). Puffy, buft'et, covey, coffee, cafe, chaffy, Java, 
 defy, review. 
 
 c. Cuffs, puffs, tiffs, chaffs, roofs, refuse, refuses, 
 devise or device, devises or devices. 
 
 EXERCISES 199-206. 
 
 1. Pen, tun, wren, win, zone, shone, mine, then, 
 lawn. 
 
 2. Upon, atone, again, Animon, Essen, anon, 
 even, heathen, alone. 
 
 3. Pippin, bobbin, Teuton, jejune, cocoon, Gog- 
 gin, rereign. 
 
 4. Balloon, demon, Japan, cabin, rattan, ma- 
 chine, marine, barn, turn. 
 
 5. Flinch, French, Manchuria, lyncher, granger, 
 pincher, trencher, ginger, ranger. 
 
 6. Prune, brain, brown, train, drawn, drown, 
 churn, adjourn, yarn. 
 
 7. Crane, crown, grain, frown, throne, shrine, 
 frowning, frownings, frowningly. 
 
 8. Plain, plan, blown, clean, cleaner, glean, 
 gleaner, Klondike, flown. 
 
 9. Doubloon, chaplin, chagrin, shagreen, en- 
 shrine, decline, incline, recline, membrane. 
 
 10. Twain, twine, Dwen, queen, twenty, twinge, 
 dwindle, Quincy, quinsy. 
 
 11. Satan, sedan, spin, skein, sprain, strain, screen, 
 civilian, swollen. 
 
 12. Dunce, prance, trance, glance, quince, offense, 
 announce, denounce, renounce. 
 
 13. Dunces, prances, trances, glances, quinces, 
 dispenses, reponses, distances, instances. 
 
 14. Mince, minces, lance, lances, wince, winces, 
 monstrous, remonstrance, minstrelsy.
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. ]!! 
 
 15. Canst, against, rinsed, pranced, cleansed, 
 glanced, announced, denounced, renounced. 
 
 10. Proof, brief or breve, brave, trough, groove, 
 bluff, cliff, quaff, strive. 
 
 17. Divide, devoid, devote, David, davit, referee, 
 reference, references, referable, roughness, rebuff, 
 reproof or reprove, defense, provoke, telegraph, tele- 
 phone, dwarf, groovy, bluffy. 
 
 LESSON 15. 
 
 FINAL HOOKS CONTINUED. THE TER HOOK. 
 
 209. Actor, patter, pouter or powder, tatter, 
 chatter, gather, gaiter, batter, bitter, biter, butter, 
 debter, j utter, Jtr. 
 
 ' ' Writer, orator, Arthur, redder, raider, rather, 
 order, sector, scatter, spider, sorter, surder, starter, 
 Ktr. 
 
 " Crater, prater, traitor, relater or relator, 
 warder, greeter, braider, brighter, brother, blotter, 
 character, collector. 
 
 " Scudder, scepter, cruder, creature, platter, 
 pleater or pleader, plotter or plodder, clatter, gladder, 
 glitter, equator, splutter. 
 
 " Barter, border, tartar, darter, curator, 
 Jupiter, debater, captor or capture, repeater, rebutter, 
 surrebutter. 
 
 " Nectar, educator, agitator, liberator, lubrica- 
 tor, rejecter, reporter, recorder, regulator, circulator. 
 
 ' Proctor, proprietor, preceptor, prosecutor, 
 director, inspector, desecrater, dissipater, deserter, 
 disorder, demonstrator. 
 
 " Detractor, protractor, prospector, projector, 
 investigator, replicator, reflector, structure, structural, 
 subterfuge, Catherine. 
 
 210-11. Factors, vectors, evictors, navigators, elec- 
 tor, selector, escheator, elector, selector, escheator
 
 192 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 LESSON 16. 
 THE SHUN FINAL HOOK AND THE SHUN CURL. 
 
 214. Action, caution, option, passion, addition, 
 ration, mission, ambition, nation, Rshn, Mshn. 
 
 " Reaction, rogation, caption, diction, educa- 
 tion, adoption, ebullition, eviction, affection, volition, 
 
 ' ' Rotation, petition, dentition, agitation, Egyp- 
 tian, mutation, notation, magician, logician, quotation. 
 
 " Nation, fashion, vision, lesion, lotion, session, 
 secession, donation, revision, remission. 
 
 " Creation, suppression, secretion, location, 
 election, repletion, section, saltation, vocation, avoca- 
 tion. 
 
 " Citationer, dictionary, educational, sectional, 
 sectionalism, rational, national, additional, legations, 
 allegations, terminations. 
 
 217. Position, possession, decision, excission, ac- 
 cession, recision, transition, acquisition, cessation, 
 musician, sensation, dispensation, Psshn, Truss/in, 
 annunciation. 
 
 " Positional, oppositional, possessional, proces- 
 sional prepositional, transitional, musicianal, musician- 
 ally, sensational, sensationally, decisions, excisions, 
 accessions, recisions, physicians. 
 
 LESSON 17. 
 
 DOWNWARD AND UPWARD R AND L. 
 
 231. Fear, sphere, flare, veer, heavier, surveyor, 
 fierce or fears, veers, flares, fearful, fearless, fearlessly. 
 
 232. Pair or pare, tear, chore, core, prayer, 
 player, spare, drear, clear, queer, fear, fearful, Greer, 
 grower, grayer, crier. 
 
 " Row, are, rare, rarer, carrier, arc or ark, 
 arm, roam or Rome, mar, weigher, sower, shower, 
 lower, tailor, newer, sneer, Thor, ewer.
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 193 
 
 " Parry, tarry, cherry, carry, prairie, blurry, 
 dreary, Clara, queery, merry Assyria, showery, Lyra, 
 ferry, narrow, theory. 
 
 " Seer or sere, sorry, serio, serious, seriously, 
 surge, sermon, star, - starry, stereo, starch, storm, 
 kaiser, poser, Towser, Chaucer, racer, tracer. 
 
 " Wire, worry, warrior, where, wherry, rule, 
 sworn, yore, Uri, yarn, Tortatto, Shakespeare, 
 Borneo, barge, retiring, pureness, fortuitous, forth. 
 236-d. Fail, fuel, veils or vales, failing, Nile, 
 Nellie, nasal, nasally, nicely, facile, facilely, thistle, 
 thistly, Yosel, Yosely, sensational, sensationally, sen- 
 sationalist. 
 
 237. Lo or low, lake, loom, el or ell, elk, elm, 
 help, thill, yellow, meal, assail, shallow, Ashley, 
 lisle. 
 
 " Poll, pall or Paul, pull, Powell, Buell, tall, 
 towel, duel, chill, jill, jewel, keel, gale, goel, rill, 
 rowel, earl, musicianal, musicianally. 
 
 " Spill, sprawl, brawl, Pleyel, troll, droll, 
 Stowell, dwell, Charles, crawl, cruel, scrawl, sickle, 
 scull or skull, stickle, Cloel, quell, squeal. 
 
 " Felly, valley, polly, tally, duello, chilly, 
 gayly, goelin, rally, early, trolley, scrawly, sickly, 
 Scully, cruelly, Cluley, quickly, squally. 
 
 " Seal, silly, slow, Sloan, still, stilly, stolen, 
 wall, willow, woolen, wheel, whilst, alarm, learning, 
 swell, sNsZL, fealty anility, facility, nazality, V$As- 
 LT, F#AsL, FsAsL. 
 
 LESSON 18. 
 
 DOWNWARD AND UPWARD SH. 
 
 240-a. AMr, #AM1, ^Mpr, ShM.pl, ShwL, ShyR. 
 
 b. Fish, flash, huffish, lavish, slavish, fishy, flashy, 
 fishes, flashes, vicious, Fashoon, vitiation, fishiest, 
 flushes t.
 
 104 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 " Officiously, vitiosity, officiousness, lavishness, 
 Vashti, Fashoda, fish-glue. 
 
 c-d. FsSfi, FnSJ, NnSA, SknM, PfSh, Kf.v//, 
 Rfx/,. 
 
 211. Partial, bushel, F.S7/1, NX/d, FtfAls, FSAlshn, 
 FSAlst, Ntf/tlshn, Ntf/dst. 
 
 242. Sh, ShK, ShR, ShMp, ShS, ShL, ShX, ShF, 
 ShTh, ShsR, ShsX, ShssN. 
 
 " ShKr, ShPr, ShTr, ShCr, ShFr, ShThr, 
 ShShr, ShShl, ShKl, ShPl, ShTl, ShCl, ShwR, ShRl, 
 ShNr, ShNl, ShFl, ShThl, ShYl, SbtfAl. 
 
 Shape, shady, sham, shewel, shewelly, shal- 
 low, shyly, Ashley, shallower, ashler, cash, rush, 
 mush, lash, gnash or Nash, bishop, dishevel. 
 
 " Bush, bushy, dash, Joshua, Prussia, plush, 
 crash, clash, trash, trashy. 
 
 " Shrill, shroel, shroelly, Schlem, fisher, fish- 
 woman, fish-trowel, fish-monger, bushelman, FShlMn, 
 NShlMn, Schiller, association, rhetorician. 
 
 LESSON 19. 
 
 THE HALVING PRINCIPLE 
 
 244-5. Pat or pad, spot, sprite, prate or prayed, 
 plait, plate, plaid or played, bit or bid, brought, braid 
 or brayed, blade, pits, bits or bids, braids. 
 
 ' ' Apt, act, etched, east, eased, aft, ashed, ebbed, 
 egged, edged, Crete or creed, greet or greed. 
 
 44 Fright or fried, throat, flight, hacked, hedged, 
 heft, haft, Hittite, hated, hooded, audit, aided. 
 
 ' ' Coat or code, pot or pod, tote or toad, chit 
 or chid, gate, bait or bayed, dot or Dodd, jot or jawed, 
 speed, prate or prayed, plot or plod, glut. 
 
 4 ' Cute or cued, could, got or God, good, pout, 
 bout or bowed, taught, tot or Todd, doubt or Dowd, 
 chat, sprout, spread. 
 
 44 Pride, proud, pleat or plead, plight or plied,
 
 TITK PHOyoORAPIIIC MAN 7 r.VL. 105 
 
 bright or bride, bread, trait or trade, trite or tried, 
 trout, skate, street, strode. 
 
 " Abrade, applied, occurred, augured, uttered, 
 ottered, avert or averred, overt, afloat, seated, suited, 
 sated. 
 
 Pent, pend or penned, attend, tent or tend, 
 tents or tends, bent or bend, font or fond, coughed, 
 caved, scant or scanned, tattered, glittered, motioned, 
 fends, gifts. 
 
 Mit or mid, aimed, seamed or seemed, 
 stemmed, hammered, simmered, meant or mend, mottle 
 or model, dimmed, net or Ned, end, nooned, sent or 
 send, honored, endeavored, fanatic. 
 
 Battery, pottage, detach, dotage, detect, 
 dedicate, beautiful, foundry, phantom, freedom, 
 grander, greatly. 
 
 Gladly, cultivate, dreadful, tact or tacked, 
 tagged, checked, joked, capped, left, lapped, shaved, 
 sheaved. 
 
 " Thickened, rescued, insect, basket, basked, 
 regret, halberd, tabled, shackled, shepherd, engraft, 
 engraved. 
 
 " 246-8. Replied, liquid, present, provide, 
 tribute, clubbed, climate, alphabet, frequent, fre- 
 quently, phonetic, rapidly, positioned, fountain, main- 
 tain, mundane. 
 
 240-5U. Duad, Druid, triad, poet, pleiad, Naiad, 
 petty, Tahiti, dado, grotto, cloudy, Fido. 
 
 251-a. Impute or imbued, impend, mopped or, 
 mobbed, stamped, hampered, ambled, impassioned 
 impatiant, simpered, sampled, tempt, sham pood, lam- 
 pooned, lumbered, rumpled, promptly. 
 
 252-a. Hanged, angered, angled, singled, wronged, 
 fingered, tingled, shingled, inked, ranked, inkled, 
 rankled, anchored, tinkered, Langdon, Wington. 
 
 253-a Wit, whit, white, sweet, wade or weighed,
 
 196 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 swayed, Haywood, yacht, yawed, hewed or hued, went 
 or wend, wind, yawned, yield. 
 
 254. Separationist, fusionist, visionist, excursion- 
 ist, Salvationist, liberationist, elocutionist, prohibition- 
 ist, revisionist, inflationists. 
 
 LESSON 20. 
 
 THE HALVING PRINCIPLE, -CONTINUED. R AND L HALVED. 
 
 257. Right, Wright, rite or write, rate or raid, 
 art, ord, erred, aired, hart, heart or hard, herd or 
 heard, hired, rites or writes, arts, herds. 
 
 4 ' Light, lot or laud, load, alt, ailed, old, oiled, 
 hailed, halt or hauled, holt or hold, lights, Leeds. 
 
 4 ' Sort, surd, start or starred, stored, slate, salt, 
 sled, sailed, stilt, stilled, sorts, stilts. 
 
 a. Erret, aerate, aright, arid, arrayed, Herod, har- 
 rowed, harried, hurried, horrid, riot, ruddy. 
 
 " Elite, alight, allot, allied, aloud, helot, hal- 
 lowed, salute, solid, stolid, Elliott, lady. 
 
 258. "Wert, word, ruled, yard, raft, raved, rift, 
 rent or rend, rafts, rents or rends, ordered, ruddered. 
 
 " Rationed, warned, whirred, relieved, yarned, 
 yearned, served, surround, surrounds, starved, swerved, 
 Hay ward. 
 
 44 Wilt or willed, wild, welt, weld or welled, 
 lard, lord, lent or lend, eland, slant, silent, swelled 
 highland, Holland. 
 
 259. Rightly, rattle, writing, written or ridden, 
 redden, reddening, rooting, rating or raiding, routing. 
 
 4 4 Hartley or hardley, hurtle or hurdle, Hart- 
 man, Harton, harden, hardening, Harding, sorting, 
 starting. 
 
 44 Lightly, lighten, lightening, lighting, Alton, 
 laden, loaden, leading, olden. 
 
 '' Halting, Holden, Holding, slightly, slighting, 
 sledding, stilting, warden, wildly.
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 197 
 
 " Article, ratify, ratified, certify, certified, or- 
 dinary, ordinal, ordinally, ratable, Hartford, Rudyard, 
 rudely. 
 
 260-1. Turret, tarried, garret, ferret, ferried, 
 afford, merit, smart, smeared, desert^ resort, thwart, 
 report, retort. 
 
 Parrot, part, tart or tarred, towered, Stuart, 
 Stewart or steward, dart, charred, jarred, mart or 
 marred, showered, feared, veered, reward, inwardly. 
 
 " Kilt or killed, belt or belled, dolt or doled, 
 jolt, broiled, melt, molt or mold, assault, assailed, 
 result, rustled, desultory. 
 
 " Hamlet, runlet, bustled, tusseled, exult, 
 exalt, excellent, upheld, uphold, beheld, behold, mildly. 
 
 " Felt, failed, knelt, nailed, quilt, quelled, 
 squealed, dowelled, jewelled, Newland, lowland, Ash- 
 land. 
 
 LESSON 21. 
 
 THE HALVING PRINCIPLE, CONCLUDED. 
 
 263. Sheet, shut, shout, shot or shod, shoat or 
 showed, shoot or shoed, shed, shad, shade. 
 
 " Sheets, shuts, shouts, hushed, hashed, sheet- 
 ing, shedding, shading, shadings. 
 
 " Pushed, abashed, cashed, gashed, gushed, 
 rushed, gnashed, splashed, brushed. 
 
 " Crushed, crashed, clashed, thrashed, cherished, 
 nourished, relished, flourished, perished. 
 
 " Sashed, swished, shirt or shirred, short, 
 shred, shrewd, shroud, shreds, shrouds. 
 
 " Shelled, shield, Schultz, shields, shan't, 
 shunt or shunned, shinned, shined, shunts. 
 
 " Shorten, shortening, shortened, shorthand, 
 shortly, shortness, enshroud, enshrouds, shielding, 
 shunting, enshrined.
 
 198 THE PHOXOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 " Dished, dashed, mashed, smashed, lashed, 
 slashed, abolished, polished, fished, flashed, vitiate, 
 WSht, freshet, refreshed. 
 
 266. Midnight, intimate, sentiment, Hampton, 
 nempt, maiden, madness, moneyed, Medusa, thanet, 
 viaduct, Betsy, locked, chitchat, kitkat. 
 
 " Needham, nomad, named, feared, veered, 
 WFt, int, WVt, TFYt, esthete, ThSt, YSht, ShZt, 
 ZhZt, latish, leashed, flashlight. 
 
 " PNt, TFt, CFt, KWt, PSt, TSht, pennate, 
 bonnet, tiffet, defeat, devote, Jouthet, key-weight, 
 busied, dashed. 
 
 270. Fate, fated, mate, mated, dart, darted, belt, 
 belted, create, created, plant, planted, mend, mended. 
 
 " Rate, rated, light, lighted, alight, alighted, 
 load, loaded, allude, alluded, fade, faded, found, 
 founded. 
 
 " Excite, excited, exceed, exceeded, decide, 
 decided, recite, recited, reside, resided, solicit, solic- 
 ited, resist, resisted. 
 
 271. Add, added, hate, hated, heed, heeded, cite, 
 cited, side, sided, state, stated. 
 
 272. Test, tested, adjust, adjusted, waste, wasted, 
 fast, fasted, enlist, enlisted, request, requested. 
 
 273. Wait, waited, wade, waded, freight, freighted, 
 treat, treated, doubt, doubted, yield, yielded. 
 
 275-7. Contest, writest, rudest, hardest, lightest, 
 loudest, oldest, slightest, fleetest, shortest, proudest, 
 brightest, greatest, roundest, grandest, fondest. 
 
 280. Active, motive, native, sanative, relative, in- 
 dicative, provocative, dative, elective, sensitive, act- 
 ively, indicatively, electively, sensitively. 
 
 281. Petal, pedal or peddle, beetle or beadle, title, 
 tidal, cattle, kettle, rattle, fatal, victual, metal, medal 
 or meddle, nettle, needle.
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 199 
 
 LESSON 22. 
 
 THE LENGTHENING PRINCIPLE. 
 
 282. Mutter or mother, matter, madder or Mather, 
 motor, meter, Easter, oyster, zither. 
 
 " Shedder, sheather, shutter or shudder, father, 
 fetter, feature, future, voter, thither. 
 
 " Neater or neither, nadir, entire, enter or ender, 
 another, smatter, smother, Sumpter, cimeter. 
 
 u Center or sender, saunter, softer, mortar, mur- 
 der, norther, threader. 
 
 " Fritter, flatter, flutter, filter or philter, falter, 
 shrewder, shorter, shelter, shoulder, diameter, promo- 
 ter, pander or panther. 
 
 " Letter or leather, leader, lighter or lither, 
 looter or Luther, lather, latter or ladder, older, elder, 
 halter, holder, solder, slighter. 
 
 " Stilter, stalder, alderman, palter, beholder, 
 Walter, welter or welder, wielder, wilder, wilderness, 
 swelter, larder. 
 
 283. Sumpter, embitter, importer, imperator, 
 tempter, prompter, trumpeter, temperature. 
 
 a. Cincture, puncture, tincture, juncture, perfunc- 
 tor, sphincter. 
 
 285. Wetter, waiter, water, sweeter, whiter, 
 weather, weeder, wither, wider, wader, whether 
 whither, yachter, Yoder, yielder. 
 
 286. Tenter or tender, chanter, janitor, renter or 
 render, winter or winder, asunder, O'Shanter, absen- 
 ter, Lysander. 
 
 " Monitor, fainter, fender, thunder, yonder, inno- 
 vator, originator, provender, progenitor. 
 
 " Canter or candor, lender, slanter or slander, 
 painter, ponder, binder, printer, planter, sprinter, 
 splinter. 
 
 287. Watered, weathered, withered, fettered, flat- 
 tered, sheltered, shouldered, slaughtered, paltered.
 
 200 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL 
 
 ' ' Smothered, centered, rendered, tendered, foun- 
 dered, embittered, tinctured. 
 
 288. Entire, adventure, feature, material, tincto- 
 rial, loiter, imputer, imparter, ambulator. 
 
 289-90. Northern, eastern, zittern, lantern, leath- 
 ern, luthern, northener, maternity, Walderon. 
 
 " Moderation, immoderation, federation, allitera- 
 tion, alteration, litheration, puncturation. 
 
 LESSON 23. 
 
 PREFIXES. 
 
 293. Contain, condense, construe, contrive, con- 
 demn, control, contract, contribute, conquer, congress, 
 conquest, congregation. 
 
 " Condone, condition, concise, consult, convert, 
 conceited, content or contend, contained, conjecture, 
 constable, comfort, comestible. 
 
 " Candy, cambist, campaign, camber, comber or 
 cumber, Kemble or Kim ball, council, counsel or can- 
 cel, Campeachy, Cambridge, cambric, Kendrick, 
 kimbo, 
 
 " Commit, commute, commode, commodity, 
 common, commune, comment or commend, commenta- 
 tor, commentatory, command, commandment, com- 
 mence. 
 
 " Commemorate, commix, commingle, commis- 
 sure, commissary, commission, commerce, commercial, 
 Conner or cunner, connate, connive, cognizant. 
 
 " Cammock, kummel, cummin, cumminic, Gum- 
 ming, cannon, cannoneer, cannonade, cannular, canny or 
 Kinney, cannel or kennel, Kennedy. 
 
 " Discontent, decompose, nonconductor, noncom- 
 missioned, recompense, recommit, reccommend, re- 
 commence, recognizance, inconstant, unconsciously, 
 incongruous. 
 
 " Discomfit, disconcert, encumber, unenciim-
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 201 
 
 bered, incandescent, incantation, uncommon, uncanny, 
 unkennel, kinnikinic. 
 
 " Incomplete, incompletely, inconvenient, incom- 
 petent, inconsistent, inconceivable, unconditional, un- 
 concern, unconcerned. 
 
 " Circumflex, circumvent, circumambient, cir- 
 cumnavigate, circumference, circumspect, circumscribe 
 circumjacent, circumlocution. 
 
 c. Congo, camphor, canter, counter, cantata, Kem- 
 ble, Kimball, condor, conjure, Conrad or comrade, 
 counsel, Cambridge, Connellsville, disconnect, discom- 
 mode, kinnikinic. 
 
 " -d. Preconcert, incumbent, unconversion, re- 
 condite, reconvey, reconcile, complement, concern, 
 confidence, contrary, convenient, conversation, canvas 
 or canvass, canvassed. 
 
 f , 294. Accomplice, accomplish, accompany, accom- 
 modate, akimbo, O'Connor, O'Connel, unaccomplished, 
 accommodation, akimbo, unaccompanied, anaconda, 
 concomitant, concomitants, concomitantly, concomi- 
 tance, concomitancy. 
 
 295-96. Contravene, contradict, contradance, con- 
 trovert, counterfit, countermand, countersign, counter- 
 irritant, Canter bury, controversy, controversial, contro- 
 versialist, counterconnect, counter-compony, incontro- 
 vertible, uncontradicted, contribution. 
 
 29T. Cognition, cognomen, cognate, cognizance, 
 recognize, recognition, recognizance, incognito, unrec- 
 ognized. 
 
 298. Inspire, inspiration, inseparable, instrument, 
 unstrung, insufferable, unsocial, insolence, insulation, 
 insular, unsalable, enslave, unseemly, unswept, un- 
 swayed. 
 
 a, e, 299. Unskilled, unsupplied, unsettled, unsad- 
 dled, unsatcheled, unswerved, unsquared, uncivil, 
 unseen , insurgent, insurrection, unsurpassed, unservice-
 
 "2(}'2 THE PHOXOHRAPHIC MAXTAL. 
 
 able, inconsiderable, inconsiderate or unconsidered, 
 inconsiderately. 
 
 300. Intermit, intermittent, intermission, inter- 
 marry, intermural, intermeddle, intermingle, interme- 
 diate, intramundane, interspersed, interjacent, inter- 
 view, intervene, interfusion, international. 
 
 " 301-a. Enterprise, entertain, introduce, inter- 
 }x>se, interval, interpolate, interrogate, interpret, inter- 
 cede, interstice, transact, transfigure, transcript, tran- 
 sept, transom. 
 
 302. Magnanimous, magnanimously, magnanimity, 
 magnify, magnifier, magnificient, magnficiently, mag- 
 nificence, magniloquence, magniloquent, magniloquent- 
 ly, magnitude. 
 
 303. McBride, McBurney, McDonald, McDowell, 
 McFarland, McKnight, McLeary, McLeod, McLellan, 
 McMaster, McMullen, McNamara, McPherson, Mc- 
 Tiernan, McVicker. 
 
 " McAdam, McElroy, McHenry, Mclntosh, 
 McCleary, McClellan, McCoy, McCook, McCul lough, 
 McKenna, McKenzie or Mackenzie, McKinley, 
 McGee, McGlynn, McGregor. 
 
 304-b. Selfish, selfishly, selfishness, unselfish, un- 
 selfishly, unselfishness, self-love, self-denial, self-made, 
 self-reliant, self-evident, self-esteem, self-assertion, 
 self-possessed, self-sufficient'. 
 
 305-6. Self-control, self-conquer, self-conscious, 
 self-conceit, self-conceited, self-contained, self-com- 
 mand, self-condemned, self-confidence, self-composed, 
 self-complacent, self-control, self-conquer, self-contra- 
 dict, self-controvert. 
 
 LESSON 24. 
 
 AFFIXES. 
 
 316-b. Ing, ings, hong, hongs, song, songs, sting, 
 stings, pang, bring, spring, tongs, string, wrong, 
 sling, Sring.
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 203 
 
 317. Owing, owings or Owings, hoeing, hoeings, 
 aiming, knowing, clewing, glowing, paying, brewing, 
 doing, doings, strewing, rowing, selling, soaring, 
 
 " Staking, stepping, stating, stitching, staying, 
 storing, steaming, stilling, stunning, wearing, weary- 
 ing, ruling, yarring, welling. 
 
 318-a. Mocking, looking, shipping, leaping, fetch- 
 ing, lodging, marrying, belting, melting. 
 
 " Keeping, paling, mailing, raking, coaching, 
 barring, rushing, matching, moving, copying, mellow- 
 ing, pirating. 
 
 " Roaring, sparing, scheming, framing, loath- 
 ing, soothing, feeling, fearing, veering, rallying, retir- 
 ing, retorting. 
 
 " Meeting, impeding, promoting, prompting, 
 cutting, chatting, waiting, lighting, flitting, knitting, 
 deserting, pouting, treating, Tht-, yielding. 
 
 " Tinning, winning, nooning, accounting, chant- 
 ing, shunting, lending, coughing, pottering, motion- 
 ing, fashioning, FA^AnXg, roughing, rationing, posi- 
 tioning. 
 
 b. Musing, whizzing, leasing, facing, causing, 
 tossing, choosing, racing or razing, spacing, tracing, 
 closing, freezing. 
 
 " Cleansing, glancing, pouncing, bouncing, 
 prancing, dancing, trouncing, chancing, rinsing. 
 
 " Jouncing, condensing, entrancing, wincing, 
 fencing, convincing, lancing, mincing, announcing. 
 
 c, 321. ThstNg, yeasting, lasting, testing, jesting, 
 RnstNg, costing, resting, feasting, blustering, muster- 
 ing, frying-pan, looking-glass, dancing-master. 
 
 322-3. Knowingly, lovingly, surpassingly, entic- 
 ingly, rejoicingly, sufficingly, ThsXgli, youzeingly, 
 jestingly, approvingly, cunningly, amazingly, entranc- 
 ingly, mincingly, convincingly, Worthington, Elling- 
 ton, Kensington.
 
 204 THE PHOXOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 LESSON 25. 
 
 AFFIXES, CONTINUED. 
 
 324-5. Fashionable, actionable, attainable, account- 
 able, unaccountable, provable, sensible, insensible, 
 accessible, sociable, finishable, accountableness, prov- 
 ubleness, sensibleness, sociableness, reasonableness. 
 
 326. Painful, binful, spoonful, tuneful, manful, 
 mindful, graceful, binfuls, spoonfuls. 
 
 327. Manfulness, mindfuiness, lawfulness, doleful- 
 ness, restf ulness, artfulness, boastf ulness, wastefulness, 
 painfulness, tunefulness. 
 
 " Fruitf ulness, doubtfulness, thoughtf ulness, 
 dreadfulness, ruefulness, faithfulness, ruthfulness, 
 healthfulness, bashfulness, awfulness. 
 
 328. Attractiveness, secretiveness, alimentiveness, 
 combativeness, inhabitiveness, attentiveness, passive- 
 ness, evasiveness, decisiveness, pensiveness. 
 
 329. Hopelessness, carelessness, recklessness, 
 boundlessness, thoughtlessness, endlessness, joyless- 
 ness, restlessness, artlessness, listnessness, souless- 
 ness, Yslessness. 
 
 LESSON 26. 
 
 AFFIXES, CONCLUDED. 
 
 330. Biograph-y-ic-al-ly, geography-ic-al-ly, helio- 
 graph-y-ic-al-ly, telegraph-y-ic-al-ly, stenograph-y-ic- 
 al-ly, orthography-ic-al-ly, lithograph-y-ic-al-ly, phono- 
 graph-y-ic-al-ly, photograph-y-ic-al-ly, telegraphist, 
 stenographist, phonographist. 
 
 a-b. Biographer, geographer, heliographer, tele- 
 grapher, orthographer, lithographer, photographer, 
 telegram, programme, phonogram, mimeogram, logo- 
 gram. 
 
 331-a. Potency, vacancy, vagrancy, regency, ten- 
 ancy, leniency, infancy, relevancy, necromancy, dis- 
 crepancy, corpulency, vicegerency, T: P, J;V.
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. U 
 
 " Elegancy, efficiency, sufficiency, currency, 
 Montmorency, emergency, tangency, benignancy, 
 sequency, truancy, buoyancy, fluency. 
 
 332-4. Barbarity, propriety, temerity, triviality, 
 formality, popularity, speciality, affability, possi- 
 bility, accountability, accessibility,sensibility, expansi- 
 bility, responsibility. 
 
 " Vicinity, docility, sincerity, finality, penality, 
 geniality, plurality, urbanity, humanity, proclivity, 
 declivity, concavity, divinity, nationality, rationality. 
 
 " Putridity, placidity, lucidity, fatuity, gratu- 
 ity, variety, notariety, tenuity, torpidity, rapidity, 
 insipidity, turgidity, torridity, timidity, validity, 
 asafetida. 
 
 335-9. Integrity, ubiquity, agility, hilarity, solid- 
 ity, civility, stability, stupidity, insularity, duality, 
 materiality, reality, parity, penalty. 
 
 340. Sphericity, veracity, felicity, vitiosity, 
 precocity, verbosity, duplicity, reciprocity, electricity, 
 elasticity, perspicacity, pugnacity, eccentricity, lax- 
 ity, convexity, sagacity, curiosity, necessity. 
 
 341. Myself, thyself, itself, oneself, ourself, your- 
 selves, myself, thyself, itself, oneself, ourself, your- 
 selves. 
 
 342. Lordship, hardship, leadership, partnership, 
 seamanship, friendship, statesmanship, ownership, 
 fellowship. 
 
 343. Friendly, friendliness, friendless, confidently, 
 winsome, w r insomeness, aptness, remittance, appro- 
 priateness, achievement. 
 
 LESSON 27.. 
 
 DEKIVATIVES, NEGATIVES, ETC. 
 
 
 344-a. Keen, keener, keenest, keenly, keenness, 
 slant, slants, slanting, slantly, slanted, shrilly, 
 facilely.
 
 206 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL 
 
 345. Immortal, immigration, emigration, innoxi- 
 ous, irresolute, relevant, irreconcilable, illegal, illib- 
 eral, unknown, unnecessary, unnerve. 
 
 " a, 347. Immask, immerge, immure, immesh, im- 
 mingle, ennoble, innate, innocence, innerve, unlace, 
 unlike, unroof, enlighten, inroad. 
 
 348, a. Mistake, postmaster, postoffice, postage, 
 postpaid, postpone, lastly, testament, toastmaster. 
 
 b-d. Sanctity, anxious, unction, sanction, sane, 
 tioned, distinction, distinguish, extinguish, languish, 
 attainment, assignment, appointment, stationary, 
 stationery. . 
 
 " Testamentary, stranger, transmit, transla- 
 tion, passenger, messenger, swift, swiftly, swiftest, 
 swifter.
 
 THE REPORTING STYLE. 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 OMISSION OF VOWELS AND DIPHTHONGS. THE 
 VOWEL SCALE AND POSITION. LOGO- 
 GRAPHS AND SEMIGEAPHS. 
 
 LESSON 28. 
 OMISSION OF VOWELS AND DIPHTHONGS. 
 
 350. In the Reporting Style the vowels and diph- 
 thongs, with but comparatively few exceptions (which 
 will be mentioned in the next chapter), are, for the 
 sake of speed, omitted from all words of consonant 
 outline. This, it is true, decreases the legibility of the 
 writing, but only to the extent of the omissions stated, 
 the skeleton outlines of the words still being amply 
 legible for all the purposes to which shorthand is ap- 
 plied and by those who have had experience with them 
 are preferred to the vocalized forms, since the loss of 
 time required to write the latter more than counter- 
 balances whatever gain might be obtained from their 
 greater legibility. 
 
 THE VOWEL SCALE AND POSITION. 
 
 351. As many words are of similar outline, par- 
 ticularly when they consist of one stem simple or com- 
 pound or of two simple stems, it becomes necessary 
 when such words are left un vocalized to distinguish 
 
 207
 
 208 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 them apart, otherwise they would often conflict in 
 meaning. Therefore, if the accented vowel or diph- 
 thong can in some way be indicated the word may I >e 
 easily read. Accordingly, what is called the Vowel 
 Scale has been adopted by shorthand writers embracing 
 all the regular vowels and diphthongs and is formed 
 by alloting certain of the former to one of three posi- 
 tions, above, on and through, or below the line of 
 writing and certain of the latter to one of two posi- 
 tions, above and through or just below it. These are 
 known as the first, second and third positions. (See 
 also sec. 45. ) By writing a word in one of these, either 
 its accented vowel or diphthong is usually indicated. 
 This scale or arrangement is in the order found by ex- 
 perience to be the best for stenographic purposes and 
 is as follows: 
 
 SHORT VOWELS. LONG VOWELS. DIPHTHONGS. 
 
 First position i o I e oi 
 
 Second " e u a o 
 
 Third " a a a u ou ui 
 
 352. A single or half length sloping or perpen- 
 dicular letter when in the first position is placed with 
 the lower end half the length of a T stem above the 
 line. When in the second it is placed on the line as 
 heretofore and when in the third it is struck through 
 it, half above and half below. Horizontal, full and 
 half sized stems in the first position are placed below 
 and touching an imaginary upper line the height of a T 
 stem above the ordinary one, except in the case of 
 simple straight stems which are written just below the 
 line so as not to be confused with it. In the second 
 position horizontal full and half sized stems are written 
 on the line (see sec. 4), and in the third below and 
 touching an imaginary one half the length of a T stem 
 underneath it in the same manner as when in the first 
 position.
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL 209 
 
 353. When a double length letter is written in po- 
 sition it begins at the same point as its corresponding 
 single length. 
 
 a. A downward double length letter in the first 
 position thus has three-fourths, in the second one-half 
 and in the third one-fourth of its length above the 
 line. An upward double length letter in the first and 
 second positions is written in the same manner as its 
 single length; namely above and on the line. When 
 in the third position, however, its first fourth is 
 placed below the line while the remaining three fourths 
 extend above it. Horizontal double length letters are 
 of course written in position in the same manner as 
 are the corresponding single and half lengths. 
 
 354. When a word consists of two or more stems 
 it is written, if all are horizontal, in the position of 
 the first stem. In other cases it is written with the 
 first downward or upward stem, whether this is initial 
 or not, in the required position. An initial horizontal 
 stem in such words is thus raised or lowered in each 
 position in order to accommodate itself to that of the 
 following stem except before an upward stem in the 
 second or a downward half length one in the first in 
 which cases it is written on or above the line the same 
 as when alone. The same is truo of two or more 
 initial horizontal stems. 
 
 355. All the vowels and diphthongs as such, when 
 alone or words of two syllables and over composed 
 wholly of both or either are written, in the second po- 
 sition, that is on the line, the same as in the Element- 
 ary Style. Sometimes, however, the vowels when 
 alone, and also the breath dots and circles, are em- 
 ployed as words, and are then written either in the first 
 or second position according to stenographic conveni- 
 ence, as will presently be explained. When written 
 in the first position these characters are placed just 
 below and touching the imaginary upper line. (See
 
 210 TI1K PIl'ONOflKAI'II.r MANTAL. 
 
 sec. 352.) If they should ho written in the third po- 
 sition they would be made just below and touching the 
 imaginary lower line. They are, however, seldom 
 placed in the third position. 
 
 a. Sometimes the loops are employed to represent 
 phrases, as will be explained in Chapter X. In which 
 case they are written in position the same as down- 
 ward stems but not often in the third position. 
 
 356. Derivative words generally retain the position 
 of their primitives. 
 
 357. The position of a consonant is indicated in 
 stenotypy by small superiors in the same manner as is 
 a vowel or diphthong. (See sec. 46.) 
 
 358. Besides the first, second and third positions 
 there are two others, namely the fourth and zero, in 
 which words are written. These will be considered in 
 Chapter X. 
 
 CAUTION IN REGARD -TO WRITING IN THE FIRST 
 POSITION. 
 
 359. When writing in the first position the words 
 should not be placed too far above the line. In the 
 case of perpendicular or slanting strokes an elevation 
 of half a T length is a sufficient indication of position 
 while horizontals and small characters should never be 
 written any higher than the length of a T stem. 
 
 SMALL W AND Y INSERTED ALONE. 
 
 360. In the Reporting Style when a word occurs 
 which in the Elementary Style is written with the 
 small disjoined W or Y or HW or HY as explained in 
 section 60, both the semiconsonant and vowel are 
 usually omitted. Sometimes, however, only the vowel 
 is omitted. In which case the outline of the word is 
 written in its proper position and the small W or Y or
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 211 
 
 H"W or HY opening to the right or upward (w or Y, 
 H w or HV) placed opposite the center of the stem as 
 usual. 
 
 THE BREATHINGS. 
 
 361. In the Reporting Style the same rules gov- 
 ern the breath letters as in the Elementary Style. 
 Accordingly usually only the H ticks are employed. 
 
 a. If preferred in the case of those words in 
 which, when vocalized, the aspirate is indicated by the 
 dot,- the latter only may occasionally be inserted and 
 the vowel omitted according to the principle govern- 
 ing small W and Y, explained above in section 360. 
 
 b. If the ticks are omitted altogether (see sec. 81), 
 the dot may be employed instead and the vowels usu- 
 ally omitted in accordance with the principle men- 
 tioned in the last paragraph in regard to small W 
 and Y. 
 
 LOGOGRAPHS AND SEMIGRAPHS. 
 
 LOGOGRAPHS. 
 
 362. More than one half of spoken English is made 
 up of the same words repeated over and over again, 
 many of them being monosyllables, which, when 
 written in full, contain only one consonant stem, 
 simple or compound. Quite a number, however, are 
 dissyllables of one stem, while the remainder are prin- 
 cipally monosyllables or dissyllables, etc., of two or 
 more stems. In the Reporting Style all alike are, for 
 the sake of speed, represented by one stem simple or 
 compound, or occasionally by their accented vowel 
 only. All these characters when thus used are called 
 Logographs, and each, as far as is possible, stands for 
 one word, or for such words as will not conflict in 
 meaning. 
 
 363. The term Logograph, properly speaking, is 
 applied only to the characters which represent those
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 words that occur most frequently in language. Two 
 words, accordingly, may have similar forms and only 
 one of the latter be a logograph; the other not being 
 made one because of the infrequency of the word it 
 represents. From the foregoing, therefore, it will l>e 
 perceived that as a logograph never has more than 
 one stem, simple or compound, a phonographic Avon I 
 of two or more stems can never be a logograph, an<J 
 also that a phonographic word may have a complete 
 outline of one stem and yet not be a logograph. The 
 same observations apply to the vowels. 
 
 364. As they consist of one stem or character 
 logographs are generally written in the position of 
 their accented vowel or diphthong. (See sec. 351.) 
 Sometimes, however, when words of the same outline 
 belong to the same position and would also conflict, 
 one of them, usually the least frequently occurring 
 word is written out of position; as in the case of the 
 words number and remember in the following list. 
 (See sec. 381.) Also a few words are written in the 
 second position, the most convenient for the writer, 
 although they do not properly belong there, when 
 they will not conflict with any other word in that posi- 
 tion; as "dear." 
 
 365. A logograph of partial or double length out- 
 line that represents a verb in the present tense may 
 generally be used to represent it in the past tense. 
 Where doubt might occur, as for instance, sometimes 
 after the plural nominative, the letter T or D may be 
 added disjoined; as in "punished, remembered, mat- 
 tered," Pn 3 tT, Br'.D, Mtr'.D. The form for the pres- 
 ent tense is also used for the past in half length 
 logographs without appendages or with an N or F hook 
 which represents those words whose present ends in 
 T, Nt, or Ft, or their heavy sounds, and past in Ed, 
 mentioned in section 274. (See also see's L^7, and 
 270 to 273.)
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 213 
 
 366. When all the outline letters of a verb are 
 contained in a single length logograph, the latter may 
 he halved to represent the past tense, as in "believed, 
 added, called, followed, valued, cheered, issued, 
 ushered, assured." 
 
 367. Adverbs ending in Ly or Y may usually be 
 written with the same forms as the primitive adjec- 
 tives terminating in L. Thus "hopefully, principally, 
 specially, inexpressibly, ably, idly, equally, fully," 
 etc., may be written with the forms for "hopeful, 
 principal, special, inexpressible, able, idle, equal, 
 full," etc. 
 
 368. The circle S may be added to logographs to 
 denote the plural number or possessive case of nouns, 
 etc., or the third person singular of verbs, as in "ad- 
 vantages, does, others, ifs. " It may also be added to 
 represent the word "self ;" as in "himself" and the 
 large circle may represent "selves;" as in "them- 
 selves," as explained in section 341. 
 
 369. Derivative words like those in the last sen- 
 tence of section 365, and those in sections 366 and 
 368, can always be easily written, when their primi- 
 tives are known, from the directions there given. 
 Consequently they are usually omitted from the fol- 
 lowing list. 
 
 370. In the case of the indefinite articles "a" and 
 "an" if special distinction is at anytime desired be- 
 tween them, the latter can be written in full. Like- 
 wise when any word represented by a logograph is to 
 be specially distinguished from every other word it is 
 written in full or vocalized or both. 
 
 371. The upward alternative tick for "a" (see 
 sec. 32), is never written alone or initially. Accord- 
 ingly it may, if preferred, be employed to represent 
 the word "and," instead of the logograph given in 
 the list. 
 
 372. For stenotypic convenience a tick or curvet
 
 214 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 (see sec. 27, a) when it is employed as a word in un- 
 connected writing, is usually represented in stenotypy 
 by the characters for the half length which it re- 
 sembles, with the syllable Oid (signifying "like") 
 added, the combination being pronounced as usual. 
 Thus Ptoid and Ftoid represent the words "of" and 
 "all" and are named Peetoid and Feetoid. If the end 
 of the tick is shaded, the long sound of the vowel 
 which it represents is added; thus Ttoido, pronounced 
 Teetoido, represents O, oh or owe. 
 
 a. If preferred "all "may be represented with the 
 upward stem L in the first position instead of with 
 Ftoid. 
 
 373. The shading for the long sound is usually 
 omitted for stenographic convenience from the right 
 half circle for the pronoun I, and the left ones for the 
 pronouns "who-m" and "whose." 
 
 a. The semicircles, except those for "who-m" 
 and "whose," are written in the first position for 
 stenographic convenience. 
 
 374. The definite article "the" is represented 
 with the light or -f dot (see section 26), written above 
 the line. 
 
 375. If at any time it is desired to specially dis- 
 tinguish a long vowel word from a short one, as the 
 verbs "owe" and "awe" for instance, the long vowel 
 dot may be inserted after the former according to the 
 rule in section 39. This, however, will seldom be 
 necessary. 
 
 376. When a printed word is connected with its 
 derivatives by one or more hyphens it signifies that the 
 logograph stands for all. 
 
 377. When a logograph consists of a stem, simple 
 or compound, it is called a Stem Logograph. When it 
 does not contain a stem, that is when it consists of 
 only a circle, tick, etc., it is termed a Small Logo- 
 graph.
 
 THE PIIOXOORAPIIIC MANUAL. 215 
 
 378. Some of the small logographs, as will here- 
 after appear, have alternative forms, which are em- 
 ployed for stenographic convenience. 
 
 379. The logographs in the following list are 
 known as General Logographs, since they are em- 
 ployed in general writing. There are others, known 
 as Special Logographs, or Technigraphs, used in 
 special, that is technical, writing, which will be con- 
 sidered in a succeeding chapter. 
 
 380. The list is arranged in phonetic order so as to 
 be consulted by the learner when reading his own or 
 others' phonography should an outline at any time be 
 met with whose meaning has been forgotten. It is 
 divided into two parts, the first part beginning at P 
 and the second at F, at Lesson 29. It should be com- 
 mitted to memory before proceeding to the next sub- 
 ject. As the characters are generally very suggestive 
 of the word they represent, they are quite easily 
 learned. After studying the first part of the list, the 
 learner should cover a column of the stenotypy and 
 write the printed words from memory. When this 
 has been accomplished he should repeat from memory 
 .the words just written in shorthand. Only a few 
 repetitions of the process will be necessary. After he 
 has memorized a page of the logographs he may take 
 up the next one in the same manner and so on until 
 the first part of the list is mastered. He should then 
 pursue the same course with the second part; namely, 
 Lesson 29.
 
 216 
 381. 
 
 P 
 
 1 
 
 Pst 
 
 3 
 
 Pn 
 
 91 
 
 Pf 
 
 ?, 
 
 Psshn 
 Pr 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 Prns. 
 
 1 
 
 Prf 
 
 1 
 
 PI 
 
 1 
 
 Pins 
 Plf 
 
 3 
 
 9, 
 
 Plshn .... 
 sP 
 
 3 
 1 
 
 sPn. . . 
 
 ?, 
 
 ssPn 
 sPrs 
 sPrst 
 sPrns .... 
 sPrnst . . . 
 sPrshn . . . 
 sPl 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 1 
 2 
 2 
 1 
 1 
 
 sPln 
 sPlshn, .. 
 nsPrs .... 
 nsPrst . . . 
 nsPrns . . . 
 nsPrnst . . 
 Pt 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 2 
 1 
 2 
 2 
 1 
 
 Prt 
 
 1 
 
 Prf t . 
 Pit. 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 LIST OF LOGOGRAPHS. 
 
 STEM LOGOGRAPHS. 
 
 P 
 
 occupy 2 up 3 hope, party, happy 
 happiest 
 
 upon 3 punish-ment, happen 
 poverty 3 hopeful, 
 opposition 2 position 3 possession 
 appear 2 principle-al, per 
 appearance 
 
 perfect-ly-tion 2 proof-ve 3 approve-al 
 plea 2 people-d, play 3 apply 
 appliance 
 playful 
 application 
 
 speak, speech 2 spoke, special 
 spoken 
 suspension 
 
 suppress 2 express 3 surprise 
 suppressed 2 expressed 3 surprised 
 experience 
 experienced 
 
 suppression 2 expression 3 separation 
 supply 
 explain 
 explosion 
 inexpressible 
 
 unsuppressed 2 unexpressed 
 inexperience 
 inexperienced 
 occupied 2 put 
 
 particular-ly-ity, pride 2 part 3 op- 
 portunity, proud 
 profit 
 plead
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 217 
 
 Pint 
 
 a 
 
 stPnt .... 
 sPrt 
 
 i 
 1 
 
 sPlt 
 
 9, 
 
 sPlnt 
 B 
 
 2 
 1 
 
 Bss 
 
 1 
 
 Bsss 
 
 1 
 
 Bn ...... 
 
 1 
 
 Bf. 
 
 2 
 
 Btr 
 
 2 
 
 Bshn 
 Br 
 
 2 
 1 
 
 Brn 
 
 8 
 
 Brns 
 Brtr 
 Bl 
 
 2 
 2 
 1 
 
 Bins 
 
 9, 
 
 Blf 
 
 2 
 
 sB. 
 
 1 
 
 sBf 
 
 2 
 
 sBshn .... 
 Bt 
 
 1 
 3 
 
 Bnt 
 
 1 
 
 Brt 
 
 1 
 
 Brnt 
 Bit 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 T 
 
 1 
 
 Ts 
 
 2 
 
 Tst 
 
 3 
 
 Tn. 
 
 3 
 
 Tf 
 
 1 
 
 Tr. . 
 
 1 
 
 2 plaintiff 
 
 1 stipend 2 stupendous-ly-ness 
 
 1 spirit 2 spread 3 separate 
 
 2 explode 
 
 2 explained 
 
 B 
 
 be, by, buy 2 but, object 
 business 
 businesses 
 combine 2 been 
 above, objective 3 behalf 
 better 
 objection 
 
 liberty 2 member, remember 3 number 
 brethren 
 remembrance 
 brother 
 belong 2 able 
 balance 
 belief -ve 
 
 subordinate 2 subject 
 subjective 
 
 subordination 2 subjection 
 about 
 behind 
 
 brought 2 bird, board, aboard 3 brute 
 brand 
 built, build-ing 2 bold 
 
 T 
 
 ought, aught, what, time 2 to, too, it 
 
 3 at, out 
 its 3 itself 
 attest 
 atone 
 whatever 
 1 internal, try 2 truth 3 true
 
 218 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 Trn. 
 
 91 
 
 Trf 
 
 9, 
 
 Trtr 
 
 1 
 
 Trshn 
 Tl 
 
 2 
 
 9 
 
 Tlf 
 Twn 
 
 2 
 1 
 
 Twf 
 sT 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 sTn 
 
 9, 
 
 sTns 
 sTnst .... 
 sTsshn . . . 
 ssT 
 
 2 
 2 
 3 
 2 
 
 stT 
 
 >, 
 
 stTn 
 
 1 
 
 stTshn . . . 
 sTr. 
 
 3 
 
 9 
 
 sTrn 
 sTrf .... 
 sTrnst 
 sTrtr 
 sTrshn . . . 
 ssTrn .... 
 nsTr . . 
 
 2 
 
 i 
 
 2 
 2 
 2 
 I 
 
 9 
 
 nsTrf 
 nsTrtr 
 nsTrshn . . 
 Trt 
 
 2 
 2 
 2 
 9 
 
 Tit 
 Tlf t 
 
 2 
 
 9 
 
 stTt 
 
 1 
 
 stTnt. . . . 
 
 1 
 
 D 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 eternal, eternity 
 
 truthful, turf 
 
 contractor 
 
 contraction 3 attraction 
 
 till, tell 3 until 
 
 telephone-y-ic-al 
 
 between 
 
 twelve-fth 
 
 satisfy 
 
 circumstantial 
 
 circumstance 
 
 circumstanced 
 
 satisfaction 
 
 system 
 
 state 
 
 constituency 
 
 constitution-al 
 
 external, externality 
 
 strange-ness 
 
 strife-ve 2 constructive 
 
 strangest 
 
 constructor 
 
 construction 
 
 cistern 
 
 instruct 
 
 instructive 
 
 instructor 
 
 instruction 
 
 trade, toward 
 
 told 
 
 telephoned 
 
 constitute 
 
 constituent 
 
 D 
 
 dollar 2 do, defendant 3 add, had, 
 advertise-ment
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 219 
 
 Ds. 
 
 1 
 
 Dst 
 
 1 
 
 Dn 
 
 1 
 
 Dns 
 
 1 
 
 Df 
 
 1 
 
 Dtr. . . 
 
 9| 
 
 Dshn 
 Dr 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 Drn 
 Drns .... 
 Drf .. 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 1 
 
 Drtr 
 Drshn 
 1)1 
 
 2 
 1 
 1 
 
 Dins 
 Dltr 
 Dw 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 a 
 
 sD 
 
 2 
 
 sDr 
 
 2 
 
 s Drshn. . . 
 nsDr .... 
 Dt 
 
 2 
 '2 
 
 1 
 
 Dnt 
 
 1 
 
 Dtrt 
 Drt 
 
 2 
 1 
 
 Dwt 
 sDrt 
 nsDrt .... 
 
 K 
 
 2 
 2 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 Ks 
 
 1 
 
 Kst 
 Kn 
 
 1 
 9, 
 
 Knst .... 
 Kr . 
 
 2 
 1 
 
 educe 3 adduce 
 
 distinct-ly-ion 
 
 denominate-ion 2 done 3 providential, 
 
 down 
 
 audience 3 providence 
 divine 2 differ-ence-ent-ly 3 advance 
 debtor, determine-ing 
 edition 2 condition 3 addition 
 doctor 2 dear 3 during, dark 
 doctrine 3 darken 
 darkens-ness 
 derive 
 director 
 
 derision 3 duration 
 idle, idol, idyl 2 deliver-y 
 idleness 2 deliverance 
 idolater 
 dwell-ing 
 said 
 
 consider-able 
 consideration 
 inconsiderable 
 did, deed 3 doubt 
 audient 3 provident 
 determined-ly 
 deride 2 dread 
 dwelt 
 
 considered-ate 
 inconsidered-ate 
 
 K 
 
 kingdom 2 come, country 
 
 because, cause 2 case 
 
 cost 2 cased 3 cast 
 
 can, countrymen 
 
 canst 
 
 christian-ity 2 care 3 cure
 
 220 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 Krs 
 
 9, 
 
 Krf 
 
 9, 
 
 Krtr 
 
 1 
 
 Krshn. . . . 
 Kl 
 
 2 
 1 
 
 Kwst 
 Kwn .... 
 Kwf 
 Kwtr 
 sKs 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 1 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 sKr 
 sKrn 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 sKrf 
 sKrshn . . . 
 sKl 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 sKlf 
 nsKr 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 nsKrf.. .. 
 nsKrshn . . 
 Kt 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 -2 
 
 Knt 
 
 ] 
 
 Krt.. .. .. 
 
 1 
 
 Kit 
 
 1 
 
 Kltst 
 Kwt 
 
 2 
 1 
 
 Kwnt 
 sKnt 
 sKrt 
 nsKrt .... 
 nsKrnt . . . 
 nsKlt 
 
 G 
 
 2 
 2 
 1 
 3 
 1 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 Gn 
 
 1 
 
 Gns 
 
 1 
 
 course, coarse 3 curious 
 
 careful 3 carve 
 
 creature 
 
 creation 
 
 call, equal 2 coal 3 clue, clew 
 
 conquest 2 quest 
 
 question 
 
 equivalent-ly 
 
 quarter, 2 equator 
 
 six-th 
 
 describe, scripture-al 3 secure 
 
 screen 
 
 descriptive 
 
 description 
 
 skill 2 scale 3 school 
 
 skillful 
 
 inscribe, 3 insecure 
 
 inscriptive 
 
 inscription 
 
 could 
 
 kind 2 account, county 3 count 
 
 creed, accord-ing-ly, concord 2 court 
 
 3 accurate, cart, crowd 
 equaled 2 cold 3 cloud, conclude 
 coldest 
 quite 
 
 acquaint-ance, quaint 
 second 
 
 secret 3 secured 
 unsecured 
 unscreened 
 
 unskilled 2 unsealed 3 unschooled 
 G 
 
 give-n 2 go, ago 
 
 begin-ning, organ 2 begun, again 
 3 began 
 
 begins, organs-ize
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 221 
 
 Gnst 1 organist- ized 2 against 
 
 Gf 2 gave, govern-ment 
 
 Gtr 2 together 3 gather 
 
 Gns.s/m . . 1 organization 
 
 Gr 1 degree 
 
 Grtr 2 greater 
 
 Gl 2 glory 
 
 Gls 2 glorious 
 
 Glf 2 gulf 
 
 sG 1 signify-icant 
 
 sGns 1 significance 
 
 sGf 1 significative 
 
 sGshn. ... 1 signification 
 
 Gt 1 got, God 2 get, good 
 
 Grt 2 great, girt, gird 3 guard 
 
 Git 1 guilt-y 2 gold 
 
 S 
 
 S 1 see, sea, saw 2 so, sow, sew, say 3 us, 
 
 use (n.), sue 
 
 Ss 1 cease, seize, size 
 
 Sst 1 ceased, seized, sized 
 
 Sn 1 assign 
 
 Sshn 2 cession, session 
 
 sSshn .... 2 secession 
 Ss.s7m .... 2 cessation 
 
 Str 1 Easter, oyster 2 Esther 3 aster, astir 
 
 Strn 1 eastern, cithern 2 astern 
 
 St 1 east 3 asset 
 
 Snt 2 assent, ascent, ascend 
 
 Z 
 
 Z 1 ease-y 2 was 3 those, use (v. ) 
 
 Zst 2 zest 
 
 Zn 2 zone 
 
 Ztr 1 zither 
 
 Ztrn 1 zithern 
 
 Zt. . .3 used
 
 222 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 LESSON 29. 
 
 F 
 
 F ) 1 if 2 for 3 half 
 
 Fn 1 often 
 
 Fr 1 offer 2 from 
 
 Frst 2 first 
 
 Fl 1 follow-ing, fill 2 full 
 
 Frtr 2 further 3 farther 
 
 Ft 2 after 3 fact 
 
 Fit 2 flood 
 
 V 
 
 V 1 ever 2 have 3 however, halve 
 
 Vn 1 even 2 heaven 3 oven 
 
 Vr 1 over 2 very, every 3 whoever 
 
 Vrs 2 universe 
 
 VrssAfi ... 2 conversation 
 
 VI 1 evil 3 value 
 
 Vlshn .... 3 valuation 
 
 s V 2 Savior, several 
 
 Vtr 2 voter 
 
 Vrt 2 virtue 
 
 Th 
 
 Th 2 think, oath 3 thank, thousand-th, hath, 
 
 youth 
 
 Thr 1 author, ether 2 three 3 through 
 
 Thrs 1 thrice, authorize 
 
 Thrst .... 1 authorized 2 thirst 3 athirst 
 
 Tht 1 thought 
 
 Thrt 1 authority 2 third 3 throughout 
 
 Dh 
 
 Dh 1 thee, thy, with 2 them, they 3 though, 
 
 thou 
 
 Dhs 1 thyself, these 2 this 3 thus 
 
 Dhss . . .2 themselves
 
 THE I'llOXOCJKAPinr MAXt'AL. 
 
 1 thine, within, heathen "1 than, then 
 
 1 either 2 their, there 
 
 2 theirs 
 2 therein 
 
 1 withal 
 
 2 without 3 that 
 
 2 withheld, withhold 
 
 Ch 
 
 1 each, watch 2 which 3 much 
 1 watchful 2 whichever 
 
 1 cheer-y, watcher 2 chair 
 
 2 chairman 
 
 1 cheerful 
 
 2 children 
 
 2 switch 2 such 
 2 charity 3 chart 
 1 child 
 
 J 
 1 joy 2 advantage, Jesus 3 large 
 
 1 religious 2 advantageous 
 
 2 just 3 largest 
 
 1 religion 2 general 3 imagine-ary-ation 
 
 2 generalize 
 
 1 religionist 2 generalized 
 
 1 joyful 
 
 2 generation 
 
 2 justification 
 
 3 generalization 
 3 larger, jury 
 
 3 jurist 
 
 3 jurisdiction-al 
 
 2 angel 3 evangel, largely 
 
 3 evangelize 
 
 3 evangelist, evangelized 
 3 evangelization 
 2 suo;<rest-ed
 
 224 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 Jn. ... . . 1 1 gentlemen 2 gentleman 
 
 Sh 
 
 Sh 1 she, wish 2 shall 3 issue 
 
 Shr 1 wisher 2 sure, usher 3 assure 
 
 Shrns .... 3 assurance 
 
 sSh 2 selfish 
 
 Shrtr .... 1 shorter 
 
 Shltr 2 shelter 3 shoulder 
 
 Sht 1 wished 2 shalt 3 should 
 
 Shtst 3 shouldst 
 
 Shrt 1 short 
 
 Zh 
 
 Zh 2 usual 
 
 Zhr 2 pleasure, azure 3 measure 
 
 sZhn 1 scission 
 
 nsZhn. ... 1 incision 
 
 Zhrt 3 measured 
 
 M 
 
 M 1 my, me 2 am, him, may 
 
 Ms 1 myself 2 himself 
 
 Mst 1 almost 2 most, must 
 
 Mn 1 men, mine 2 man 3 moon 
 
 Mr 1 remark-able, Mr., mere 2 more, mercy- 
 
 iful 3 humor 
 
 Mrs 1 immerse 3 humorous 
 
 Mrst 1 immersed, merest 3 humorist 
 
 Ml 1 million-th 
 
 sM 1 similar-ly-ity 2 some 
 
 sMn 3 examine 
 
 Mtr 2 matter 
 
 sMtr 3 smoother 
 
 Mt 1 might, meet-ing, immediate-ly 2 met, 
 
 mate, made 3 moot, mood 
 
 Mnt 2 amount 3 movement 
 
 sMt.. . 2 somewhat
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 225 
 
 sMnt 3 examined 
 
 Mp 1 importance-ant 2 improve-ment 3 map 
 
 Mps 1 impossible-ity 2 impose 
 
 Mpss 1 impossibilities 
 
 Mpsshn. . . 2 imposition 
 
 Mpr 1 empire 
 
 Mpl 2 humble 3 ample, amble 
 
 sMp 1 simple-y-icity 
 
 stMp 2 stump 3 stamp 
 
 sMpt 1 somebody 
 
 N 
 
 N 1 in, inn, any 2 no, know 3 own 
 
 Ns 1 influence 2 hence 
 
 Nst 1 influenced, honest 2 nest, next 
 
 Nn 1 opinion 2 known 3 union 
 
 Nshn .... 1 information 2 nation 3 notion 
 
 Nr 1 near, nor, honor 2 manner 3 owner 
 
 Nrs 2 nurse 
 
 Nrshn .... 2 narration 
 
 Nl 2 only 3 annual 
 
 Ms 2 unless 
 
 sN 3 soon 
 
 stN 2 stone-y 
 
 Ntr 1 entire, neither 2 another 
 
 Nrtr .... 1 norther 
 
 Nrtrn .... 1 northern 
 
 Nt 1 not 2 nature, under, hundred-th 3 hand 
 
 sNt 2 cent, scent, sent, send 3 sound 
 
 Ng 
 
 Ng 1 thing, long, along 2 language 
 
 Ngst 1 longest 
 
 Ngr 1 longer 2 hunger-y 3 anger-y 
 
 Ngrst .... 2 hungriest 3 angriest 
 
 Ngl 1 English 3 angle 
 
 Ngln .... 1 Englishmen 
 
 sNg 1 singular-ly-ity
 
 220 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MAXTAL. 
 
 sXijfii 3 sanguine 
 
 sNirshn . . 3 sanction 
 
 Ngt I longed 
 
 \<rnt 1 longhand 
 
 Nglnt .... 1 England 
 sNgshnt . . 3 sanctioned 
 
 R 
 
 R 1 or 2 her, are, before 3 our, hour, rue 
 
 Rs 2 hers, herself 3 ours, ourself 
 
 Rss 3 ourselves 
 
 Rf 1 arrive-al, reveal 2 revolve 
 
 Rtr 1 writer, order 3 rather 
 
 Rshn 2 oration 
 
 Rs,s7m .... 1 recission 2 recession 
 
 Rl 1 real, rely 2 rail, roll, role 3 rule 
 
 Rls 1 release, realize 
 
 Rlst 1 realist 
 
 Rlf 1 relief-ve 
 
 Rltr 2 relater-or 
 
 Rlshn .... 2 relation 
 Rls-s'/cM ... 2 realization 
 sRn .... 2 concern-ing 
 
 2 were 3 aware 
 2 where 
 
 .. 2 wherein 
 
 .. 2 whereof 
 
 yR 1 year 2 your 
 
 ?/Rs 2 yours, yourself 
 
 2/Rss 2 yourselves 
 
 sRt 2 certain-ly-ty 
 
 ?#Rt 2 wert, word 
 
 2/Rt 2 yard 
 
 L 
 
 L 1 law 2 will 
 
 Ln 2 lone, alone 
 
 Lshn 2 revelation 3 revolution
 
 TldE PHONOGRAPHIC MANL'.U.. 
 
 Ptoid . 
 Btoid . 
 Ttoid . 
 Ttoido 
 
 Lrn 2 learn 
 
 sJL 3 salvation 
 
 wLi 2 well 
 
 ir//'L. . . 1 while, awhile 
 
 Ltr 2 letter 
 
 Lt 2 wilt, world 
 
 Lrt 1 lord 
 
 W 
 
 AV 2 weigh, way, away 
 
 H\V 1 why 2 when 
 
 Wn 2 one, won 
 
 Wns 2 once, oneself 
 
 n\Vns .... 2 whence 
 
 Wtr 1 water 
 
 n irtr .... 1 whither, 2 whether 
 
 Jltr 1 wider, wither 2 weather 
 
 TFt 1 wide 2 weighed 3 would 
 
 Wnt 2 went 
 
 Y 
 
 Y 1 ye 2 yea 
 
 nY 3 hew, hue 
 
 Ys 2 yes 
 
 nYn 3 hewn 
 
 Yt 2 yet 
 
 Ynt 1 beyond 
 
 Ylt 1 yield 
 
 SMALL LOGOGRAPHS. 
 THE S CIRCLE. 
 
 s 1 is, his 2 as, has, self 
 
 ss . ,2 selves 
 
 TICKS AND CURVETS. 
 
 1 of 2 ah 
 
 2 ha 
 
 1 on 2 awe 
 
 2 O, oh, owe
 
 22-8 
 
 TllK PlloNoiiUAl HU' MANUAL. 
 
 Dtoid . . 
 Ktoid . . 
 Ktoida . 
 Ftoid . . 
 Shtoid . 
 Wtoid .. 
 
 ho, hoe 
 a, an 
 aye, eh 
 all 
 and 
 already 
 
 ANGLES. 
 
 w 
 
 1 we 
 2 you 
 
 SEMICIRCLES. 
 11 
 
 1 ay, eye 
 1 hie, high 
 1 he 
 1 other 
 1 others, otherwise 
 2 who-m 
 2 whose 
 
 DOTS. 
 
 1 the 
 2 how 
 
 Y 
 
 i 
 
 i 
 
 HI 
 
 He 
 
 u. 
 
 us 
 
 HU 
 
 HUS 
 
 + .. 
 
 H. 
 
 THE MOST FREQUENT LOGOGRAPHIC WORDS. 
 
 382. The following are the most frequent words 
 represented by logographs in about the order of 
 their occurrence in general use. Sometimes, how- 
 ever, after the first seven, namely, after "an," the 
 order may vary more or less according to the nature 
 of the subject matter. 
 
 the that on has which 
 
 and is I he all 
 
 of his with but from 
 
 to for you are your 
 
 in it be not we 
 
 a, an or as have when 
 
 was 
 will
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 22i) 
 
 SEMIGRAPHS. 
 
 383. Semigraphs are words which are either deriva- 
 tives of logographs or contain a logograph, or its 
 alternative (see sec. 378); as "advantageously, into, 
 also, although, onto, whatsoever, " etc. Such words, 
 the same as those in section 369 can usually be easily 
 written when their primitives or compounds are 
 known. A few of the most frequently occurring ones 
 are given in the Vocabulary, section 418. No further 
 attention need be paid to them at present. 
 
 a. When "ever" and "soever" end a semigraph the 
 former is never joined when the preceding part of the 
 word ends with a circle or the latter when it ends 
 with a circle on an N hook. In such cases they are 
 written disjoined; thus, Hs 2 '.V, whosever; nWns'.V, 
 whencever; nWnstsV, whencesoever. In all other 
 cases they are usually joined; thus, Hw?RV, wherever; 
 H?/jRsV, wheresoever; T J sV, whatsoever, nWsV, 
 whensoever; n>/ 2 sV, whosoever; Hwss 2 V, whosesoever.
 
 230 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 WORDS OTHER THAN LOGOGRAPHS AND SEMI- 
 GRAPHS. HOMOGRAPHS, VARIAGRAPHS, 
 VOCAGRAPHS, BREVIGRAPHS 
 AND VOCABULARY. 
 
 LESSON 30. 
 
 WORDS OTHER THAN LOGOGRAPHS AND SEMI- 
 GRAPHS. 
 
 384. All words other than logographs and semi- 
 graphs when of one consonant stem, simple or com- 
 pound, or two simple stems are usually written in the 
 position of their accented vowel. (See sec. 351.) 
 
 385. When they contain two stems either or both 
 of which are compound or have three or more, whether 
 compound or not, they are written in the second posi- 
 tion as previously stated (see sec. 36-i) the most con- 
 venient for the writer without regard to their 
 accented vowel, unless they have similar and conflict- 
 ing outlines which is comparatively seldom in which 
 case they are written in position for distinction. (See 
 also par. a following.) 
 
 a. The above two paragraphs relating to conflict- 
 ing words being placed for distinction in the position 
 of their accented vowel comprise the general rule. 
 AVhen, however, such words contain prefixes beginning 
 with a vowel and would conflict with each other or
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. '2'M 
 
 with their radicals in the same position they are usu- 
 ally written in the position of the vowel of the prefix 
 and not in that of the accented one or of the accented 
 vowel of the radical; as, for example, the words 
 "approbation, attempt, affect" and "affluent," which 
 are written in the third position to distinguish them 
 from "probation, tempt, effect" and "fluent," written 
 in the second. (See list, sec. 393, lines 4, 5 and 12.) 
 
 b. Sometimes, again, words are written out of 
 position the same as in the case of the logographs. 
 Such, for example, are "pity" and "demand," which 
 are thus written in order not to conflict with "piety" 
 and "adamant" placed in position. (See list, sec. 
 393, lines 1 and 7.) 
 
 c. In all cases mentioned in paragraphs a and b, 
 the most frequent word is usually placed in the second 
 position, whether it belongs there or not. 
 
 386. The above paragraphs, 384 to 385, c, indi- 
 cate the method of distinguishing by position words of 
 the same consonants when written alike. There are, 
 however, occasionally, too many such words for all to 
 be written alike and be distinguished by position. In 
 these cases those of the same position which would 
 conflict are written with different outlines, as "poor" 
 and "pure" (see list, sec. 397, line 1) sometimes arbi- 
 trarily, but usually according to the regular rules 
 heretofore given in Chapters I to VII inclusive. 
 
 a. The above paragraph does not refer to words of 
 the same consonants and different vowel position and 
 outline, as "appetite" and "potato" or "pledge" and 
 "apology" included in the list, section 397 (lines 1 and 
 3) whose forms are varied according to the regular 
 rules in Chapters I to VII and written, the two former 
 regularly in position and the two latter in the second 
 position according to paragraph 385. 
 
 387. There are also, occasionally, too many words 
 of the same consonants for all to be distinguished even
 
 232 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 by position or difference of outline. In such cases the 
 least frequent of those that remain in each position if 
 they would conflict with the others are vocalized. But 
 as it would generally take up too much time to do this 
 in full, ordinarily only the most suggestive vowel or 
 diphthong of each word, usually the accented one, is 
 inserted; as in "aroma" in the list, section 403, 
 line 7. 
 
 388. From all the preceding the learner will per- 
 ceive that words of the same consonants are written in 
 two ways: with the same and different outlines, and 
 that words of the same outline are distinguished in two 
 ways: by position and vocalization. Also that long 
 words are not usually necessary to be written in any 
 position but the second. The reason of which is that 
 their outlines being generally different from each other 
 do not often need to be distinguished by position. 
 
 389. Many of the above words, that is to say words 
 other than logographs and semigraphs, are on account of 
 their frequency or for some other reason presently ex- 
 plained, separated from the rest into different classes or 
 lists the same as the logographs are separated from the 
 great body of words. These are called Homographs, 
 Variagraphs, Vocagraphs and Brevigraphs. They are 
 arranged in phonetic order like the logographs for con- 
 venience when reading phonography (see sec. 380) and 
 will next be considered. 
 
 a. Before doing so, however, the learner will 
 understand that these terms are applied only to those 
 words of each kind which occur most frequently. 
 Accordingly a word may have the same form or treat- 
 ment as a homograph, etc., and yet not be one, the 
 same as in the case of the logographs. (See sec. 363.) 
 
 390. In the following lists the same rules apply in 
 similar cases for writing verbs in the past tense and 
 adverbs ending in Ly or Y, as given in sections 365 
 and 3<>7.
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 233 
 
 HOMOGRAPHS. 
 
 391. Homographs are words of the same or similar 
 consonants of frequent occurrence, which are written 
 alike and distinguished by position. They are invariably 
 written in full and can thus always be recognized by 
 their uncontracted outlines. 
 
 392. The following list should be thoroughly memo- 
 rized. (See page 25 and sec. 380.) 
 
 393. LIST OF HOMOGRAPHS. 
 
 ^ > - T \ \ 
 
 \> \ J \/ 
 
 V V \ \' 
 
 3 \ \ \- 
 
 v V o v 
 ~ 
 
 
 h 
 
 7 I ^ L h> U U 
 
 ~ 
 
 j- r 7 
 
 oil J ^ ,/ / 
 
 10 
 
 11 .
 
 234 
 
 12 V, V 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 V 
 
 13 
 
 <rS 
 
 15 
 
 
 394. 
 
 KEY TO LIST OF HOMOGRAPHS. 
 
 1. Piety, pity; opposite, apposite; peaceaMr, 
 possible, passable. 
 
 2. Epistle, apostle; competition, petition, com- 
 putation; operator, porter; operation, portion, appor- 
 tion. 
 
 3. Pertain, appertain; permit, promote; prominent, 
 preeminent, permanent; promise, premise.
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 235 
 
 4. Permission, promotion; prohibition, probation, 
 approbation; predict, protect; prediction, protection. 
 
 5. Preach, approach; proffer, prefer; obsolete, 
 absolute; baseness, absence; tempt, attempt. 
 
 6. Tract, attract; utterly, truly; administration, 
 demonstration; administrate, demonstrate. 
 
 7. Adopt, adapt; diamond, demand, adamant; 
 diminish, admonish; diminution, dimension, admoni- 
 tion. 
 
 8. Domination, condemnation, damnation; desolate, 
 dissolute; desolation, dissolution; device, advice. 
 
 9. Division, devotion; defeat, devote; daughter, 
 debtor; auditor, editor, doubter. 
 
 10. Copy, keep; except, accept; causation, acces- 
 sion, accusation. 
 
 11. Extricate, extract; coalition, collation, collusion; 
 ghostly, ghastly; exalt, exult; science, essence. 
 
 12. Effect, affect; fix, focus, affix; fluent, affluent; 
 feeling, failing; violent, valiant. 
 
 13. Voluble, available; giant, agent; melioration, 
 amelioration; immaterial, material. 
 
 14. Immoderate, moderate; imminent, eminent; 
 migration, emigration; munition, mention, ammuni- 
 tion; immature, mature. 
 
 15. Immortal, mortal; immoral, moral; impatient, 
 impassioned; anonymous, unanimous; anomalous, name- 
 less; unavoidable, inevitable. 
 
 16. Inviolable, unavailable; interior, anterior; indi- 
 cate, induct; national, notional; undefined, indefinite; 
 indicted, indebted, undoubted. 
 
 17. Origin, region; irritate, rotate; irritation, rota- 
 tion; irrational, rational; irresolute, resolute; repeti- 
 tion, reputation. 
 
 18. Illegal, legal; illogical, logical; element, ali- 
 ment; eliminate, illuminate; elimination, illumination; 
 solitary, salutary; wait, await.
 
 236 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 LESSON 31. 
 VARIAGRAPHS. 
 
 395. Variagraphs are words of the same or similar 
 consonants, of frequent occurrence, which are written 
 with different outlines for distinction and always in 
 full. They are thus of the same nature as the homo- 
 graphs, the only difference being that their forms are 
 varied. It will be observed that the principles of 
 position and variation are sometimes combined, as in 
 the case of the words "appetite" and "potato." 
 
 396. The following list should be thoroughly 
 memorized. 
 
 39 
 
 LIST OF VARIAGRAPHS. 
 
 X 
 
 V 
 
 X 
 
 V 
 
 3 v \yy \/ \j x/ \ \r7 
 
 \r\ c\ <v 
 \ vv. \ 
 
 NO
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 237 
 
 13 
 
 * V -- 
 
 ^~*\ ^~Q r> ^ ^ ~*~f ^~1 <r-N 
 
 15 1 _ L _ t/ O> c A v. 5 ^ v 
 
 16 
 
 398. KEY TO LIST OF VARIAGRAPHS. 
 
 1. Poor, pure; poorest, purest; appetite, potato; 
 patient, passionate. 
 
 2. Apparition, operation; oppression, portion; 
 prosecute, persecute; Persia, Prussia ; petrify, putrefy. 
 
 3. Oppressor, pursuer, peruser; patron, pattern; 
 pledge, apology; optic, poetic. 
 
 4. Person, parson; proportion, preparation, ap- 
 propriation; proportioned, proportionate. 
 
 5. Present, personate; prosper, perspire; predict, 
 predicate; prediction, predication. 
 
 0. Support, separate; beautify, beatify; aberra- 
 tion, abrasion; breath, birth; bright, broad; aband- 
 oned, abundant. 
 
 T. Contrition, contortion; citation, situation ; train, 
 turn; Tartar, traitor, trader. 
 
 8. Daughter, auditor; debtor, editor; defense, de- 
 fiance; denned, definite; devote, deviate. 
 
 9. Idleness, dullness; domination, diminution; 
 condemnation, dimension; damnation, admonition. 
 
 10. Devotion, deviation; execrate, excoriate; 
 eclipse, collapse; culminate, calumniate. 
 
 11. Cost, caused; corporal, corporeal; credence, 
 accordance; except, expiate.
 
 L'iiS THE PllOXOllUAl'Hir MANUAL. 
 
 12. Cudgel, cajole; extension, extenuation; col- 
 lision, coalition; God, guide. 
 
 13. Garden, guardian; grudge, gorge; garnet, 
 granite; aspersion, aspiration. 
 
 14. Favored, favorite; funeral, funereal; fierce, 
 furious; frame, form. 
 
 15. Mrs., Misses; impassioned, impassionate; mis- 
 sion, machine; ingenious, ingenuous; animal, ano- 
 maly. 
 
 16. Write, read; righteous, riotous; repression, 
 reparation; resume, reassume; ruined, renewed. 
 
 17. Labored, elaborate; learned, learn'ed, learnt; 
 let, laid or lade; latitude, altitude; insult, insulate. 
 
 i 
 
 LESSON 32. 
 VOCAGRAPHS. 
 
 399. Vocagraphs are words vocalized either in part 
 or in full to distinguish them from other and more 
 frequent words of similar form which are not vocal- 
 ized. They are always written with their full out- 
 lines. 
 
 400. A vocagraph may have only a part of a vowel 
 inserted as in the words "anew, new" or li knew" 
 which are written with the first half of the left semi- 
 circle for long u joined to the stem N; the halved 
 semicircle standing for the full vowel. The latter 
 part of the halved form is seldom shaded for the long 
 sound. 
 
 a. The stenotypic representation of "new," etc., 
 as above, is NFtoid. (See sec. 372.) 
 
 401. "Now" is written with the N stem and the 
 alternative tick for short o; being an abbreviation con- 
 sisting of the first half of the diphthong ou when made 
 with the alternative tick and the right semicircle 
 for long u as explained in section 34. Its stenotypic 
 representation is NCtoid.
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 402. In the following list of vocagraphs the first 
 eight lines contain also the unvocalized words from 
 which they are distinguished. Sometimes when the 
 number of words of the same outline is very great 
 merely the vocagraphs are given, as in line 9, etc. The 
 list should be thoroughly memorized. 
 
 403. 
 
 LIST OF VOCAGRAPHS. 
 
 2 sUL 
 
 3 V 
 
 J 7 
 
 
 X A
 
 240 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL 
 
 15 ^ ^ 
 
 17 X X ^ ^ * iT \ _ 
 
 404. KEY TO LIST OF VOCAGRAPHS. 
 
 1. Opposition, apposition; steady, staid or stayed; 
 adapt, depute. 
 
 2. Squeal, squall; sqeak, squawk; face, efface; 
 fuse, effuse; far, afar. 
 
 3. Formula, formulae; flee, fly; fluent, effluent; 
 join, adjoin. 
 
 4. German, germane; Germany, germania; mo- 
 tion, emotion; mission, emission, omission. 
 
 5. Monarch, monarchy; name, enemy; sun, snow; 
 endowed, endued. 
 
 6. Noxious, innoxious; antithesis, antitheses; nu- 
 trition, innutrition; nutritious, innutritious; honest}', 
 insight. 
 
 7. Arm, army, aroma; russet, rusty, roseate; rele- 
 vant, irrelevant. 
 
 8. Less, else; lye, oil; sulphate, sulphite. 
 
 9. Upper, pro, prow; epic, opaque; abbey, obey. 
 
 10. Baby, boquet, bestow, settee, suit, stow. 
 
 11. Taboo, attack, item, aid, ode, adieu, idea, ideal. 
 
 12. Identify, identity, depot, ache, echo, axes 
 (pi. of axis), eclat. 
 
 13. Cuckoo, croquet, ague, ogle, glow. 
 
 14. Highest, sow, ice, Isaiah, ozone, Isaac, ivy, 
 age, edge. 
 
 15. Aim, aimed, emit, omit, amass, omen, mica, 
 immigration. 
 
 1C. Inner, highness; anew, new or knew, now, 
 nigh, nay, array, arrow. 
 17. Era, eyrie, area, higher, ally, highly, highway.
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 241 
 
 LESSON 33. 
 BREVIGRAPHS. 
 
 405. The complete outlines of many words of fre- 
 quent occurrence, mostly of different consonants are 
 either of such great length or their letters are of such 
 awkward junction that it is impossible to write them 
 with the swiftness of rapid speech. The forms of such 
 words, therefore, are more or less contracted, usually 
 by omitting the awkward junction or junctions or one 
 or more of the unimportant letters or the endings after 
 writing two or three strokes. All such words when 
 thus written are called Brevigraphs. Brevigraphs, 
 accordingly, always have one or more of their letters, 
 whether stems or attachments omitted. They thus dif- 
 fer from the words in the three preceding lists which 
 are always written with their full outlines. 
 
 a. From paragraphs 362 and 405 the learner will 
 understand that when a word is contracted to one stem 
 it is, if it is a frequent one, made a logograph, but if 
 contracted to two or more stems it is made a brevi- 
 graph. 
 
 406. Brevigraphs are not vocalized. Instead, if 
 distinction is desired they are written in position ac- 
 cording to the rules given in section 385. Usually, 
 however, the outlines are different from each other as 
 well as from all other words and can, therefore, be 
 written in the second position without regard to their 
 accented vowel. Each one thus has a fixed form of its' 
 own different from every other and consequently can 
 everywhere be recognized by it. 
 
 407. A brevigraph, as will appear from the follow- 
 ing list, usually stands also for the principal deriva- 
 tives of the word it represents. The list should be 
 thoroughly memorized.
 
 342 
 
 408. 
 
 THE riloXOCKAPHIC MAXIMAL. 
 LIST OF RltKVKHtAFHS. 
 
 1 
 
 \ \ 
 
 
 N X V 
 
 \ _ \ 
 
 ^ L 
 
 
 \ 
 
 L 
 
 
 8 
 9 
 
 11 
 
 "7 -7 Z 
 
 L_ 
 
 12 1 -y 7 
 
 13 -\ *\ 
 14 
 
 15 /\ /^* /\> 
 
 r 
 
 16 
 
 A. 
 
 \ 
 
 /V 
 
 ^-^
 
 1'HE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL 243 
 
 409. KEY TO LIST OF BREVIGRAPHS. 
 
 1. Purpose, publie-ly-sh, appointment, peculiar- ly, 
 episcopal, perpetual-ate, perpendicular-ly, perf orm-ance. 
 
 2. Perhaps, probable, approximate-ly-tion, pros- 
 pect, prescribe, proscribe, apprehend, comprehend. 
 
 3. Baptize-ist, baptism, obstruction, abstraction, 
 observation, bishop, bank, substantial, subscribe-r, 
 subscription. 
 
 4. Attainable, attainment, atonement, transcript, 
 transcription, transcribe. 
 
 5. Transgress, transgression, transfer, transmis- 
 sion, stranger, strangely, strength, strengthen, digni- 
 fy-ity. 
 
 6. Destructive, destruction, declare, discrimi- 
 nate-ly-tion, danger, dangerous, democrat-ic. 
 
 7. Cabinet, capable, expect-ation, exchange, eccen- 
 tric, acknowledge, acknowledged, acknowledgment. 
 
 8. Correct-ly, character, characteristic, collect, 
 qualification, example, agriculture-al, agriculturalist. 
 
 9. Congregate, aggregate, auspicious-ly-ness, es- 
 pecial, establish-ment, astonish-ment, esquire, essen- 
 tial. 
 
 10. Husbandman, forward, froward, frantic, fa- 
 miliar-ly-ity, theistic, atheistic, challenge. 
 
 11. Magazine, machinery, mortgage, merchandize, 
 mathematic, antagonize-ist-ic-ism, interest, interested. 
 
 12. Notwithstanding, intelligent, intelligible, intel- 
 ligence, entertainment, intellect-ual, natural. 
 
 13. Independent-ly-ence, indispensable, nondescript, 
 indiscriminate-ly-tion, individual, neglect, influential, 
 never. 
 
 14. Investigation, nevertheless, knowledge, anx- 
 ious, length-y, lengthen, lengthened. 
 
 15. Represent, representative, representation, re- 
 public-sh, republican, architect-ure-al, aristocracy, ir- 
 regular-ly, regular-ly.
 
 244 THE PHOXOGRAPIIIC MAXUAL. 
 
 16. Respect-ful, respectable, resembie-ance, rever- 
 ence, revenge, orthodox-ly-y, arithmetic. 
 
 17. Archbishop, original, arrangement, legis- 
 late-ure, legislative, legislation. 
 
 DIRECTIONS FOR FORMING BREVIGRAPHS, ETC. 
 
 410. In forming brevigraphs, or other contracted 
 words, the following are some of the rules usually 
 adopted. (See also sec. 344.) 
 
 a. Omit initial K from the syllable Ex before ini- 
 tial hooks; as in "extreme, experiment, explore" or 
 "exquisite," except where the resulting word (if not a 
 logograph) would consist of only one stem as in "Exe- 
 ter, extra, expert" or "exploit." (See the Vocabula- 
 ry, sec. 418.) 
 
 b. Omit final K before Shun when it occurs after 
 the stem F or the double consonant Tr or the treble 
 one Str as in "purification, protraction, restriction." 
 Also omit it before V when it occurs after the treble 
 consonant Str; as in restrictive. Furthermore omit it 
 before Ter after the double and treble consonants Tr 
 and Str as in "contractor, protractor, constructor, re- 
 strictor." 
 
 c. Omit final P after the treble consonant Skr and 
 before V or Shn; as in "prescriptive, proscription." 
 
 d. Omit final B after the treble consonant Skr; as 
 in "superscribe." 
 
 e. Omit the V stem after upward R when the latter 
 follows the S circle; as in "observation." 
 
 f. Omit Shi after the N hook or stem; as in "pru- 
 dential, pestilential, provincial, provincialism." 
 
 g. Occasionally the F hook, particularly in words 
 of two or more stems, is allowed to stand for the final 
 syllable Ful or Fully as in "powerf ul-ly. " (See also 
 sees. 326 and 367.) 
 
 h. When the termination Tively occurs in a brevi-
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 245 
 
 graph whose primitive is written with the F hook, 
 as in ' 'restrict! vely, proscriptively, " write the VI 
 stem; thus, RsTrVl, PrsKrVl. (See par. band also sec. 
 280.) 
 
 1. If preferred, however, the upward L stem may 
 be then written disjoined or joined after the F hook; 
 thus, RsTrf'.L, PrsKrfL. 
 
 i i. Sometimes an N hook may be placed within a 
 Ter hook, as in "determination," or allowed to repre- 
 sent "not" after a halved stem, as in "whatnot." 
 
 j. Sometimes a word is expressed by intersecting 
 two of its stems, as in "nevertheless," in line 14 of the 
 preceding list. 
 
 k. Usually words of the same part of speech should 
 not have the same form. 
 
 LOGOGRAPHS, HOMOGRAPHS, ETC., 
 ARRANGED ALPHABETICALLY. 
 
 411. The following list contains all the preceding 
 five lists; namely, logographs,' homographs, varia- 
 graphs, vocagraphs and brevigraphs, arranged in 
 alphabetical order so as to be consulted by the learner 
 when writing phonography should an outline at any 
 time be forgotten. 
 
 412. LOGOGRAPHS, HOMOGRAPHS, ETC. 
 
 A 
 
 a, Ktoid 
 
 abandoned, BnDnt 
 abbey, aB 3 
 aberration, BRshn 
 able, Bl 
 aboard, Brt 
 about, Bt 3 
 above, Bf 
 
 abrasion, Brshn 
 absence, Bs 3 Ns 
 absolute, Bs 3 Lt 
 abstraction, Bs 3 Trshn 
 abundant, BntNt 
 accept, KsPt 3 
 accession, Kss/m 
 accord-ing-ly, Krt 1 
 accordance, Krt J Ns
 
 246 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 account, Knt 
 accurate, Krt 3 
 accusation, 
 ache, aK 
 
 acknowledge, KJ 1 
 acknowleged, KJt 1 
 acknowledgement, KJ 1 - 
 
 Mnt 
 
 acquaint-ance, Kwnt 
 adamant, D 3 Mnt 
 adopt, D 3 Pt 
 add, D 3 
 addition, Dshn 3 
 adduce, Ds 3 
 adieu, D 3 u 
 adjoin, a-Jn 1 
 administrate, D 1 MnsTrt 
 administration, D 1 Mns- 
 
 Trshn 
 
 admonish, D 3 MnSh 
 admonition, D 3 MnShn 
 adopt, D'Pt 
 advance, Df 3 
 advantage, J 
 advantageous, Js 
 advertise-ment, D 3 
 advice, D 3 Vs 
 afar, aF 3 j?? 
 affect, F 3 KT 
 affix, F 3 Ks 
 affluent, Fl 3 Nt 
 after, Ft 
 again, Gn 
 against, Gnst 
 age, aJ 
 agent, JNT 
 
 aggregate-d, GrG 
 ago, G 
 
 agriculture-al, GrKl 
 agriculturist, GrKlst 
 ague, G-r 
 ah, Ptoid 
 aid, aD 
 aim, aM 
 aimed, aMt 
 aliment, L 3 Mnt 
 all, Ftoid 1 
 ally, L 1 ! 
 almost, Mst 1 
 alone, Ln 
 along, Ng 1 
 already, Wtoid 1 
 altitude, LtTD 
 am, M 
 amass, Mas 3 
 amble, Mpl 3 
 amelioration, MIRshn 3 
 ammunition, M 3 Xshu 
 amount, Mnt 
 ample, Mpl 3 
 an, Ktoid 
 and, Atoid 
 anew, NFtoid 
 angel, Jl 
 anger-y, Ngr 3 
 angle, Ngl 3 
 angriest, Ngrst 3 
 animal, NM1 
 anomalous, NMLs 1 
 anomaly, NML 1 
 anonymous, Kn J Ms 
 annual, Nl 3 
 another, Ntr
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 247 
 
 antagonize-ist-ic-isrn, 
 
 Nt s r 
 
 anterior, NT 3 RR 
 antitheses, NtThsSs 
 antithesis, NtThss 
 anxious, NgShs 
 any, N 1 
 apology, PLJ 
 apostle, PsL 
 apparition, Prshn 1 
 appear, Pr 1 
 appearance, Prns 1 
 appertain, Pr 3 Tn 
 appetite, P 3 Tt 
 application, Plshn 3 
 appliance, Pins 3 
 apply, PI 3 
 apportion, P 3 Rshn 
 appointment, Pt 1 Mnt 
 apposite, Ps 3 T 
 apposition, aPs-s'Aw 1 
 apprehend, Pr 3 ND 
 approach, PrC 
 approbation, Pr 3 Bshn 
 appropriation', PrPrshn 
 appro ve-al, Prf 3 
 approximate-ly-ion PrKs 
 archbishop, RGB 
 architect-ure-al, RKT 
 are, R 
 area, Ria 
 
 aristocracy, RsTKr. 
 arithmetic, RfTh 
 arm, R 3 M 
 army, R 3 Mi 
 aroma, R 3 oM 
 arrangement, RnJt 
 
 array, Ra 
 arri ve-al, Rf 1 
 arrow, Ro 
 as, s 
 
 ascend, Snt 
 ascent, Snt 
 aspersion, SPrshn 
 aspiration, SPRshn 
 assent, Snt 
 asset, St 3 
 assign, Sn 1 
 assurance, Shrns 3 
 assure, Shr 3 
 aster, Str 3 
 astern, Strn 
 astir, Str 3 
 astonish-ment, St J X 
 at, T 3 
 
 atheistic, ThsK 
 athirst, Thrst 3 
 atone, Tn 3 
 atonement, T 3 Mnt 
 attack, aTK 
 attainable, TnB 
 attainment, TMnt 
 attempt, T 3 Mpt 
 attest, Tst 3 
 attract, Tr 3 Kt 
 attraction, Trshn 3 
 audience, Dns 1 
 audient, Dnt 1 
 auditor, Dt*R 
 aught, T 1 
 
 auspicious-ly-ness, S 1 ? 
 author, Thr 1 
 authority, Thrt 1 
 authorize, Thrs 1
 
 248 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 authorized, Thrst 1 
 
 available, VLB1 
 
 await, Wt 3 
 
 aware, wR 3 
 
 away, W 
 
 a\ve, Ttoid 
 
 awhile, H70L 1 
 
 axes (pi. of axis), Kses 3 
 
 ay, I 1 
 
 aye, Ktoida 
 
 azure, Zhr 
 
 B 
 
 baby, BBi 
 balance, Bins 
 bank, B 3 Ng 
 baptism, B 3 PsM 
 baptize-st, B 3 P 
 baseness, BsNs 
 be, B 1 
 
 beatify, BTF 
 beautify, BtF 
 because, Ks 1 
 been, Bn 
 before, R 
 began, Gn 3 
 begin-ning, Gn 1 
 begins, Gns 1 
 begun, Gn 
 behalf, Bf 3 
 behind, Bnt 1 
 belief- ve, Blf 
 belong-ed, Bl 1 
 bestow, BsTo 
 better, Btr 
 between, Twn 1 
 beyond, Ynt 1 
 
 bird, Brt 
 birth, BRTh 
 bishop, B'Sh 
 board, Brt 
 bold, Bit 
 boquet, BKa 
 brand, Brnt 3 
 breath, BrTh 
 brethren, Brn 3 
 bright, Brt 1 
 broad, BrD 
 brother, Brtr 
 brought, Brt 1 
 brute, Brt 3 
 build-ing, Bit 1 
 built, Bit 1 
 business, Bss 1 
 businesses, Bsss 1 
 but, B 
 buy, B 1 
 by, B 1 
 
 cabinet, KB 3 
 cajole, KJL 
 call, Kl 1 
 
 calumniate, K1MNT 
 can, Kn 
 canst, Knst 
 capable, KB1 
 care, Kr 
 careful, Krf 
 cart, Krt 3 
 carve, Krf 3 
 case, Ks 1 
 cased, Kst 
 cast, Kst 3
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 249 
 
 causation, 'Ksskn 1 
 cause, Ks 1 
 cease, Ss 1 
 ceased, Sst 1 
 cent, sNt 
 certain-ly-ty, sRt 
 cessation, Ssshn 
 cession, Sshn 
 chair, Cr 
 chairman, Crn 
 challenge, C1J 
 character, KrK 
 characteristic, KrKsK 
 charity, Crt 
 chart, Crt 3 
 cheer-y, Cr 1 
 cheerful, Crf 1 
 child, Clt 1 
 children, Cl 
 christian-ity, Kr 1 
 circumstantial, sTn 
 circumstance, sTns 
 circumstanced, sTnst 
 cistern, ssTrn 1 
 citation, sTshn 1 
 cithern, Strn 1 
 cloud, Kit 3 
 clue, Kl 3 
 coal, Kl 
 
 coalition, KLshn 1 
 coarse, Krs 
 cold, Kit 
 coldest, Kltst 
 collapse, KLPs 
 collation, KLshn i 
 collect, KPK 
 collision, Klshn 1 
 
 collusion, KLshn 3 
 combine, Bn 1 
 come, K 
 
 competition, 
 comprehend, PrND 
 computation, P 3 Tshn 
 concern-ing, sRn 
 conclude, Kit 3 
 concord, Krt 1 
 condemnation, DMNshn 
 condition, Dshn 
 congregate, Gr*G 
 conquest, Kwst 1 
 consider-able, sDr 
 consideration, sDrshn 
 considered-ate, sDrt 
 constituency, stTn 
 constituent, stTnt 1 
 constitute, stTt 1 
 constitution-al, stTshn 3 
 construction, sTrshn 
 constructive, sTrf 
 constructor, sTrtr 
 contortion, T^Rshn 
 contraction, Trshn 
 contractor, Trtr 1 
 contrition, Trshn 
 conversation, Vrsshn 
 copy, KP' 
 corporal, KrPrL 
 corporeal, KrPrRl 
 correct-ly, Kr ' K 
 cost, Kst 1 
 caused, KsD 1 
 could, Kt 
 count, Knt 3 
 county, Knt
 
 250 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 country, K 
 countrymen, Kn 
 course, Krs 
 court, Krt 
 creation, Krshn 
 creature, Krtr 1 
 credence, KrDns 
 creed, Krt 1 
 croquet, KrKa 
 crowd, Krt 3 
 cuckoo, K 3 Kn 
 cudgel, KJ1 
 culminate, KIMnT 
 cure, Kr 3 
 curious, Krs 3 
 
 D 
 
 damnation, D 3 MNshn 
 danger, DJr 
 dangerous, DJrs 
 dark, Dr 3 
 darken, Drn 3 
 darkens-ness, Drns 3 
 daughter, Dtr 1 
 dear, Dr 
 debtor, Dtr 
 declare, D 3 K1 
 deed, Dt 1 
 defendant, D 
 defense, DfNs 
 defiance, DFNs 
 defined, DFnt 
 definite, DfNt 
 degree, Gr 1 
 deliver-y, Dl 
 deliverance, Dins 
 demand, DMnt 
 
 democrat-ic, DM 
 demonstrate, DMnsTrt 
 demonstration, DMns- 
 
 Trshn 
 
 denominate-ion, Dn 1 
 depot, DPo 
 depute, D 3 Prt 
 deride, Drt 1 
 derision, Drshn 1 
 derive, Drf 1 
 describe, sKr 1 
 description, sKrshn 1 
 descriptive, sKrf 1 
 desolate, DsLt 
 desolation, DsLshn 
 destruction, DsTrshn 
 destructive, DsTrf 
 determine-ing, Dtr 
 determined-ly, Dtrt 
 deviate, DVT 
 deviation, DV$An 
 device, DVs 
 devotion, DVshn 
 diamond, D^nt 
 did, Dt 1 
 
 differ-ence-ent-ly, Df 
 dignify-ty, D J G 
 dimension, DMnShn 
 diminish, D 1 MnSh 
 diminution, D'MnShn 
 director, Drtr 
 discriminate-ly-ion, Ds- 
 
 KrM 
 
 dissolute, Ds 3 Lt 
 dissolution, Ds 3 Lshn 
 distinct-ly-ion, Dst 1 
 divine, Df 1
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 251 
 
 division, 
 do, D 
 
 doctor, Dr 1 
 doctrine, Drn 1 
 dollar, D 1 
 
 domination, D 1 MNshn 
 done, Dn 
 doubt, Dt 3 
 doubter, Dt 3 R 
 down, Dn 3 
 dread, Drt 
 dullness, DLXs 
 duration, Drshn 3 
 during, Dr 3 
 dwell-ing, Dw 
 dwelt, Dwt 
 
 E 
 
 each, C 1 
 ease-y, Z 1 
 east, St 1 
 Easter, Str 1 
 eastern, Strn 1 
 eccentric, KsNtr 
 echo, Ko 
 eclat, Kla 
 eclipse, KIPs 
 edge, e-J 
 edition, Dshn 1 
 editor, DtR 
 educe, Ds 1 
 efface, eFs 
 effect, FKT 
 effluent, eFIXt 
 effuse, eFs ! 
 eh, Ktoidfi 
 either, Dhr 1 
 
 elaborate,. LBrT 
 element, LMnt 
 eliminate, L^MnT 
 elimination, L'MXshn 
 else, eLs 
 
 emigration, MGrshn 
 eminent, MnNt 
 emission, eMshn 1 
 emit, gMt 1 
 emotion, eMshn 
 empire, Mpr 1 
 endowed, NDowt 3 
 endued, NDnt 3 
 enemy, eNM 
 England, Nglnt 1 
 English, Ngl 1 
 Englishmen, Ngln 1 
 entertainment, NtTMnt 
 entire, Ntr 1 
 epic, ePk 
 episcopal, Psk 
 epistle, Ps J L 
 equal, Kl 1 
 equaled, Kit 1 
 equator, Kwtr 1 
 equivalent-ly, Kwf 1 
 era, R 1 ^ 
 especial, Sp 
 esquire, S J K 
 essence, SNs 
 essential, SN 
 establish-ment, St 3 B 
 Esther, Str 
 eternal, Trn 
 eternity, Trn 
 ether, Thr 1 
 evangel, JP
 
 2.")2 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 evangelist, Jlst 3 
 evangelization, Jlsshn 3 
 evangelize, Jls 3 
 evangelized, Jlst 3 
 even, Vn 1 
 ever, V 1 
 every, Vr 
 evil, VI 1 
 exalt, GsLt 1 
 examine, sMn 3 
 examined, sMnt 3 
 example, GsMp 
 except, KsPt 
 exchange, KsCJ 
 excoriate, KsKRt 
 execrate, KsKrt 
 expect-ation, KsP 
 experience, sPrns 
 experienced, sPrnst 
 expiate, KsPT 
 explain, sPln 
 explained, sPlnt 
 explode, sPlt 
 explosion, Plshn 
 express, sPrs 
 expressed, sPrst 
 expression, sPrsshn 
 extension, KsTNshn 
 extenuation, KsTNShn 
 external, sTr 
 externality, sTr 
 extract, KsTr 3 Kt 
 extricate, KsTrKt 
 exult, 'GsLt 
 eye, T 1 
 eyrie, R'i 
 
 F 
 
 face, Fs 
 
 fact, Ft 3 
 
 failing, FZNg 
 
 familiar-ly-ity, F 1 M 
 
 far, F 3 7? 
 
 farther, Frtr 3 
 
 favored, FVrt 
 
 favorite, FVrT 
 
 feeling, F'ZNg 
 
 fierce, F7?s 
 
 fill, Fl 1 
 
 first, Frst 
 
 fix, F'Ks 
 
 flee, Fl 1 
 
 flood, Fit 
 
 fluent, FINt 
 
 fly, Fl'I 
 
 focus, FKs 
 
 follow-ing, Fl 1 
 
 for, F 
 
 form, F7?M 
 
 formula, F^ML 
 
 formulae, F7?MLe 
 
 forward, F?#Rt 
 
 frame, FrM 
 
 frantic, Frt'K 
 
 from, Fr 
 
 f reward, FrRt or Fr Wi 
 
 full-y, Fl 
 
 further, Frtr 
 
 funeral, FNrZ 
 
 funerial, FnRL or FNR1 
 
 furious, FRs 
 
 fuse, Fs 3
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 253 
 
 G 
 
 garden, GrtN 
 garnet, GRNt 
 gather, Gtr 3 
 gave, Gf 
 general, Jn 
 generalization, Jnsshn 
 generalize, Jns 
 generalized, Jnst 
 generation, Jshn 
 gentleman, Jnt 
 gentlemen, Jnt 1 
 German, JrMn 
 germane, JrMan 
 Germania, JrMNia 
 Germany, JrMN 
 get, Gt 
 
 ghastly, GsT 3 L 
 ghostly, GsTL 
 giant, J^Nt 
 gird, Grt 
 girt, Grt 
 give-n, G 1 
 glorious, Gls 
 glory-ied, Gl 
 glow, Glo 
 
 go, G 
 God, Gt 1 
 gold, Git 
 good, Gt 
 gorge, GRJ 
 got, Gt 1 
 govern-ment, Gf 
 granite, GrNt 
 great, Grt 
 greater, Grtr 
 grudge, GrJ 
 
 guard, Grt 3 
 guardian, GrDn 
 guide, GD 1 
 guilt-y, Git 1 
 gulf, Glf 
 
 H 
 
 ha, Btoid 
 had, D 3 
 half, F* 
 halve, V s 
 hand, Nt 3 
 happen, Pn 3 
 happiest, Pst 3 
 happy, P 3 
 has, s 
 hath, Th 3 
 have, V 
 he, He 1 
 heathen, Dhn 1 
 heaven, Vn 
 hence, Ns 
 her, R 
 hers, Rs 
 herself, Rs 
 hew, nY 3 
 hewn, H5Tn 3 
 hie, Hi 1 
 high, Hi 1 
 higher, ni-R 1 
 highest, ni-St 1 
 highly, HlL 1 
 highness, m-Ns 1 
 highway, Hi-W 
 him, M 
 himself, Ms 
 his, s 1
 
 254 
 
 TIIK PHONOGRAPHIC MAXfAI, 
 
 ho, Dtoid 
 hoe, Dtoid 
 honest, Nst 1 
 honesty, NsT 1 
 honor, Nr 1 
 hope, P 3 
 hopeful, Pf 3 
 hour, R 3 
 how, H 
 however, V 3 
 hue, nY 3 
 humble, Mpl 
 humor, Mr 3 
 humorist, Mrst 3 
 humorous, Mrs 3 
 hundred-th, Nt 
 hunger-y, Ngr 
 hungriest, Ngrst 
 husbandman, ZBtMn 
 
 I, i 1 
 
 ice, I-S 1 
 
 idea, i-D 1 
 
 ideal, l-D 1 !, 
 
 identify, iDntF 
 
 identity, iDntT 
 
 idle, Dl 1 
 
 idleness, Dins 1 
 
 idol, Dl 1 
 
 idolater, Dltr 1 
 
 idyl, Dl 1 
 
 if F 1 
 
 illegal, L'Gl 
 
 illogical, L'JKl 
 
 illuminate, L 3 MnT 
 
 illumination, L 3 MNshn 
 
 imagine-ary-ation, Jn 3 
 i m m ater ial , MtrL 1 
 immature, MtR 1 
 immediate-ly, Mt 1 
 immerse, Mrs 1 
 immersed, Mrst 1 
 immigration, iM^rshn 
 imminent, Mn J Nt 
 immoderate, MtRt 1 
 immoral, MrL 1 
 immortal, MrtL 1 
 impassionate, Mpshn T 3 
 impassioned, Mpshnt 3 
 impatient, Mpshnt 
 importance-ant, Mp 1 
 impose, Mps 
 imposition, Mpsshn 
 impossibilities, Mpss 1 
 impossible-ity, Mps 1 
 improve-ment, Mp 
 in, N 1 
 
 incision, nsZshn 1 
 inconsiderable, nsDr 
 inconsidered-ate, nsDrt 
 indebted, NtTt 
 indefinite, NDfNt 
 independent-lv-ence, Xt- 
 
 Pnt 
 
 indicate, Nt J Kt 
 indicted, NtTt 1 
 indiscriminate-ly-ion, Xts ' 
 
 KM 
 
 indispensable, NtsPns 
 individual, NtVt 1 
 induct, NtKt 
 inevitable, NVtBl 
 inexperience, nsPrns
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL 
 
 inexperienced, nsPrnst 
 inexpressed, nsPrst 
 inexpressible, nsPrs 
 influence, Ns 1 
 influenced, Nst 1 
 influential, NxS/d 1 
 information, Nshn 1 
 ingenious, NJNs 
 ingenuous, NJNS 
 inn, N 1 
 inner, iNr 1 
 innoxious, iNKShs 
 innutrition, iNTrshn 1 
 innutritious, iNTr'Shs 
 inscribe, nsKr 1 
 inscription, nsKrshn 1 
 inscriptive, nsKrf 1 
 insecure, nsKr 1 
 insight, NslT 1 
 instruct, nsTr 
 instruction, nsTrshn 
 instructive, nsTrf 
 instructor, nsTrtr 
 insulate, nsLT 
 insult, nsLt 
 intellect-ual, NtZ 1 
 intelligence, NtJns 
 intelligent, NtJnt 
 intelligible, NtJBl 
 interest, NtsT 
 interested, NtsTt 
 interior, NTRR 
 internal, Tr 1 
 investigation, NVss/m 
 inviolable, NV J LB1 
 irrational, Rshn 1 !^ 
 irregular-ly, R'G 
 
 irresolute, Rs'Lt 
 irrelevant, iRIVnt 
 irritate, R'Tt 
 irritation, R'Tshn 
 is, s 1 
 
 Isaac, !-Z J K 
 Isaiah, I-Z 
 issue, Sh 3 
 it, T 
 
 item, I-T'M 
 its, Ts 
 itself, Ts 3 
 ivy, I-V 1 
 
 Jesus, J 
 join, Jn 1 
 joy, J 1 
 joyful, Jf 
 
 jurisdiction-al, Jrsshn 
 jurist, Jrst 3 
 jury, Jr 3 
 just, Jst 
 justification, Js,s7m 
 
 K 
 
 keep, KP 
 kind, Knt 1 
 kingdom, K 1 
 knew, NFtoid 
 know, N 
 knowledge, NJ 1 
 know, Nn 
 
 L 
 labored, LBrt
 
 256 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 lade, LD 
 laid, LD 
 language, Ng 
 large, J 3 
 larger , Jr 3 
 largest, Jst 3 
 largely, Jl 3 
 latitude, LtTt 
 law, L 1 
 learn, Lrn 
 learned, Lrnt 
 learn'ed, LrNt 
 learnt, LrnT 
 legal, LGl 
 legislate-ure, LJ 
 legislation, LJshn 
 legislative, LJf 
 length-y, NgTh 
 lengthen, NgThn 
 lengthened, NgThnt 
 less, Ls 
 let, Lt 
 letter, Ltr 
 liberty, Br 1 
 logical, LJK1 
 lone, Ln 
 long, Ng 1 
 longed, Ngt 1 
 longer, Ngr 1 
 longest, Ngst 1 
 longhand, iNgnt 1 
 lord, Lrt 1 
 lye, L> 
 
 M 
 
 machine, MShn 
 machinery, MShR 
 
 made, Mt 
 magazine, M*G 
 man, Mn 
 manner, Nr 
 map, Mp 3 
 mathematic, MfTh 
 mate, Mt 
 material, MtrL 
 matter, Mtr 
 mature, MtR 3 
 may, M 
 me, M 1 
 measure, Zhr 3 
 measured, Zhrt 3 
 meet-ing, Mt 1 
 melioration, MIRshn 1 
 member, Br 
 men, Mn 1 
 mention, MNshn 
 merchandize, MrCts 
 mercy-iful, Mi- 
 mere, Mr 1 
 merest, Mrst 1 
 met, Mt 
 mica, M'Ka 
 might, Mt 1 
 migration, M^rshn 
 million-th, Ml 1 
 mine, Mn 1 
 Misses, Mss 1 
 mission, Mshn l 
 moderate, MtRt 
 monarch, MnRK 
 monarchy, MnRKi 
 mood, Mt 3 
 moon, Mn 3 
 moot, Mt 3
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 257 
 
 moral, MrL 
 more, Mr 
 mortal, MrtL 
 mortgage, Mi^G 
 most, Mat 
 motion, Mshn 
 movement, Mnt 3 
 Mr., Mr 1 
 Mrs., MsZ 
 much, C 3 
 munition, 
 must, Mst 
 my, M 1 
 myself, Ms 1 
 
 name, NM 
 nameless, NMLs 
 narration, JSrslni 
 nation, JS ; shn 
 national, NshnL 
 natural, Nt 2 Z 
 nature, Nt 
 nay, Nfi 
 near, Nr 1 
 neglect, NG1K 
 neither, Ntr 1 
 nest, Nst 
 never, NV 
 nevertheless, NfV 
 new, N Ft oid 
 next, Nst 
 nigh, N 1 ! 
 no, N 
 
 nondescript, NtsKPl 1 
 nor, Nr 1 
 norther, Nrtr 1 
 
 northern, Nrtrn 1 
 
 not, Nt 1 
 
 notion, Nshn 3 
 
 notional, NshnL 3 
 
 notwithstanding, NtsTnt 1 
 
 noxious, NKShs 
 
 now, NCtoid 
 
 number, Br 3 
 
 nurse, Nrs 
 
 nutrition, NTrshn 
 
 nutritious, NTrShs 
 
 O 
 
 O, Ttoido 
 oath, Th 
 obey, Ba 
 ode, oD 
 object, B 
 objection, Bshn 
 objective, Bf 
 observation, BsRshn 
 obsolete, Bs : Lt 
 obstruction, BsTrhsn 
 occupied, Pt 1 
 occupy, P 1 
 of, Ptoid 1 
 offer, Fr 1 
 often, Fn 1 
 ogle, oGl 
 oh, Ttoido 
 oil, oiLt 1 
 omen, oMn 
 omission, oMshn 1 
 omit, oMt 1 
 on, Ttoid 1 
 once, ^"ns 
 one ^Yn
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHH MANTAL. 
 
 oneself, Wns 
 only, Nl 
 opaque, PiiK 
 operation, P'Rshn 
 operator, P'Rtr 
 opinion, Nn 1 
 opportunity, Prt 3 
 opposite, Ps*T 
 opposition, Pss/m 1 
 oppression, Prshn 
 oppressor, PrsR 
 optic, Pt'K 
 or, R 1 
 
 oration, Rshn 
 order, Rtr 1 
 organ, Gn 1 
 organist-ized, Gnst 1 
 organization, GnssAfi 1 
 
 C 1 7 
 
 organize, Gns 1 
 origin, R 1 Jn 
 original, R*J 
 orthodox-ly-y, RThD 
 other, u 1 
 others, us 1 
 otherwise, us 1 
 ought, T 1 
 our, R 3 
 ours, Rs 3 
 ourself, Rs 3 
 ourselves, Rss 3 
 out, T 3 
 oven, Vn 3 
 over, Vr 1 
 owe, Ttoido 
 own, N 3 
 owner, Nr 3 
 
 oyster, Str 1 
 ozone, oZn 
 
 parson, PRsN 
 part, Prt 
 
 particular-ly-ity, Prt 1 
 party, P 3 
 passable, Ps 3 Bl 
 passionate, Pshn 3 T 
 patient, Pshnt 
 patron, PTrn 
 pattern, PtRn 
 peaceable, Ps^l 
 peculiar-ly, P 3 K 
 people-d, PI 
 per, Pr 
 
 perfect-ly-tion, Prf 1 
 perform-ed-ance, PRF 
 perhaps, PrPs 
 permanent, Pr 3 MnNt 
 permission, PrMshn 
 permit, PrMt 
 perpendicular-ly, PRPnt 
 perpetual-ate, PRPt 
 persecute, PRsKt 
 Persia, PRSh 
 person, PrsN 
 personate, PrsNT 
 perspire, PrsPR 
 pertain, PrTn 
 peruser, PRsR 
 petition, PTshn 
 petrify, PtRF 
 phonography, Fn 
 piety, P J T 
 pity, PT
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC -MANUAL. 
 
 259 
 
 plaintiff, Pint 
 play, PI 
 playful, Plf 
 pica, PI 1 
 plead, Pit 1 
 pleasure, Zhr 
 pledge, P1J 
 poetic, PTK 
 poor, Pr ! 
 poorest, Prst 3 
 porter, PRtr 
 portion, PRshn 
 position, Pss/m 
 possession, Ps.9//;/ 3 
 possible, PsP)l 
 potato, PTT 
 poverty, Pf 
 preach, Pr ] C 
 predicate, PrDKt 
 predication, PrDKshn 
 predict, Prt'Kt 
 prediction, Prt'Kshn 
 preeminent, PrMnNt 
 prefer, PrfR 
 premise, PrMs 
 preparation, PrPRshn 
 prescribe, Prs 1 !^ 
 present, PrsNt 
 pride, Prt 1 
 principle-al, Pr 
 pro, Pro 
 probable-y, PrB 
 probation, PrBshn 
 proffer, Prf'R 
 profit, Prft 1 
 prohibition, Pi^Bshn 
 prominent, Pr'MnNt 
 
 promise, Pi^Ms 
 promote, PrMt 
 promotion, Pr 3 Mshn 
 proof-ve, Prf 
 proportion, PrPshn 
 proportionate, PrPshnT 
 proportioned, PrPshn'. D 
 proscribe, PrsK 
 prosecute, PrsKt 
 prospect, Prs*Pt 
 prosper, PrsPr 
 protect, PrtKt 
 protection, PrtKshn 
 proud, Prt 3 
 providence, Dns 3 
 provident, Dnt 3 
 providential, Dn 3 
 prow, Pr 3 ow 
 Prussia, PrSh 
 public-ly-sh, PB 
 punish-ment, Pn 3 
 pure, P 3 R 
 purest, P 3 Rst 
 purpose, PPs 
 pursuer, PRSR 
 put, Pt 3 
 putrefy, PTrF 
 
 Q 
 
 quaint, Kwnt 
 qualification, KlFshn 
 quarter, Kwtr 1 
 quest, Kwst 
 question, Kwn 
 quite, Kwt 1
 
 260 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 R 
 
 rail, Rl 
 rather, Rtr 3 
 rational, Rshn 3 L 
 read, R'D 
 real, Rl 1 
 realist, Rlst 1 
 realization, Rls-s'An 1 
 realize, Rls 1 
 reassume, RSM 
 recession, Rsskn 
 recission, ~Rsshn l 
 region, RJn 
 regular-ly, RG 
 release, Rls 1 
 relate-or, Rltr 
 relation, Rlshn 
 relevant, RIVnt 
 relief -ve, Rlf 1 
 religion, Jn 1 
 religionist, Jnst 1 
 religious, Js 1 
 rely, Rl 1 
 
 remark-able-y, Mr 1 
 remember, Br 
 remembrance, Brns 
 renewed, R 3 ND 
 reparation, RPRshn 
 repetition, R 1 PTshn 
 represent, RP 
 representation, RPshn 
 representative, RPf 
 repression, RPrshn 
 republic-sh, RPB 
 republican, RPBn 
 reputation, R 3 PTshn 
 resemble-ance, RsM 
 
 resolute, RsLt 
 respect-ful, RsP 
 respectable-y, RsPBl 
 resume, RsM 
 reveal, Rf 
 revelation, Lshn 
 revenge, RVJ 
 reverence, RV 
 revolution, Lshn 3 
 revolve, Rf 3 
 righteous, R*Ts 
 riotous, R^TS 
 role, Rl 
 roll, Rl 
 roseate, RsiiT 
 rotate, RTt, 
 rotation, RTshn 
 rue, R 3 
 ruined, R 3 Nt 
 rule, Rl 3 
 russet, RsT 
 rusty, RsTi 
 
 S 
 
 said, sD 
 
 salutary, sL 3 TR 
 salvation, sL 3 
 sanction, sNgshn 3 
 sanctioned, sNgshnt 3 
 sanguine, sXgn 3 
 satisfaction, sTsshn 3 
 satisfy, sT 3 
 savior, sV 
 saw, S 1 
 say, S 
 scale, sKl 
 scent, sXt
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 2G1 
 
 school, sKl 3 
 
 science, S*Ns 
 scission, sZhn 1 
 screen, sKrn 1 
 scripture al, sKr 1 
 sea, S 1 
 
 secession, sShn 
 second, sKnt 
 secret, sKrt 1 
 secure, sKr 3 
 secured, sKrt 3 
 see, S 1 
 seize, S 1 
 seized, Sst 1 
 self, s 
 selfish, sSh 
 selves, ss 
 send, sNt 
 sent, sNt 
 separate, sPrt 3 
 separation, sPrshn 3 
 session, Sshn 
 settee, sTe 
 several, sV 
 sew, S 
 shall, Sh 
 shalt, Sht 
 she, Sh T 
 shelter, Shltr 
 short, Shrt 1 
 shorter, Shrti 
 should, Sht 3 
 shoulder, Shlti 
 shouldst, Shtst v 
 significance, sGne> J 
 signification, sGshn 1 
 significative, sGf 1 
 
 signify-icant, sG 1 
 similar-ly-ity, sM 1 
 simple-y-icity, sMp 1 
 singular-ly-ity, sNg 1 
 situation, sTShn 
 six-th, sKs 1 
 size, Ss 1 
 sized, Sst 1 
 skill, sKl 1 
 skillful, sKlf 
 smoother, sMtr 3 
 snow, sNo 
 so, S 
 
 solitary, sL'TR 
 some, sM 
 somebody, sMpt 1 
 somewhat, sMt 
 soon, sN 3 
 sound, sNt 3 
 sow, S 
 
 sow(n.), S 3 ou 
 speak, sP 1 
 special, sP 
 speech, sP 1 
 spirit, sPrt 1 
 spoke, sP 
 spoken, sPn. 
 spread, sPrt 
 squall, sKwoL 
 squawk, 
 squeak, sKw 1 
 squeal, sKwL 
 staid, staD 
 stamp, stMp 3 
 state, stT 
 station, stShn 
 stayed, staD
 
 262 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 steady, stD 
 stipend, stPnt 1 
 "stone-y, stN 
 stow, sTo 
 strange-ness, sTrn 
 strangely, sTrJl 
 stranger, sTrJr 
 strongest, sTrnst 
 strength, sTtrTh 
 strengthen, sTrThn 
 strife-ve, sTrf l 
 stump, stMp 
 stupendous-ly-ness, stPnt 
 subject, sB 
 subjection, sBshn 
 subjective, sBf 
 subordinate, sB 1 
 subordination, sBshn 1 
 suqscribe-er, sBsKr 
 subscription, sBsKrshn 
 substantial, sBsTn 
 such, sC 
 sue, S 3 
 
 suggest-ed, sJst 
 suit, saT 
 sulphate, sLFT 
 sulphite, sL^Flt 
 seen, sN 
 supply, sPl 1 
 support, sPRt 
 suppress, sPrs 1 
 suppressed, sPrst 1 
 suppression, sPrshn 1 
 sure, Shr 
 surprise, sPrs 3 
 surprised, sPrst 3 
 
 suspension, ssPn 
 system, ssT 
 
 taboo, T 3 Ba 
 Tartar, T 3 Rtr 
 telephone-y-ic-al, Tlf 
 telephoned, Tlft 
 tell, Tl 
 tempt, TMpt 
 than, Dhn 
 thank, Th 3 
 that, Dht 3 
 the, + 1 . 
 thee, Dh 1 
 their, Dhr 
 theirs, Dhrs 
 theistic, Ths'K 
 them, Dh 
 themselves, Dhss 
 then, Dhn 
 there, Dhr 
 therein, Dhrn 
 these, Dhs 1 
 they, Dh 
 thine, Dhn 1 
 thing, Ng 1 
 think, Th 
 third, Thrt 
 thirst, Thrst 
 this, Dhs 
 those, Z 3 
 thou, Dh 3 
 though, Dh 3 
 thought, Tht 1 
 thousand-th, Th 3 
 three, Thr
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MAXTAL. 
 
 263 
 
 thrice, Thrs 1 
 
 through, Thr 3 
 
 throughout, Thrt 3 
 
 thus, Dhs 3 
 
 thy, Dh 1 
 
 thyself, Dhs 1 
 
 till, Tl 
 
 time, T 1 
 
 to, T 
 
 together, Gtr 
 
 told, Tit 
 
 too, T 
 
 toward, Trt 
 
 tract, TrKt 
 
 trade, Trt 
 
 trader, TrtR 
 
 train, Trn 
 
 traitor, Trtr 
 
 transcribe, TrsKB 
 
 transcript, TrsKPt 
 
 transcription, TrsKPshn 
 
 transfer, TrsFr 
 
 transgress, TrsGs 
 
 transgression, TrsGshn 
 
 transmission, TrsMshn 
 
 true, Tr 3 
 
 truly, Tr 3 L 
 
 truth, Tr 
 
 truthful, Trf 
 
 try, Tr 1 
 
 turf, Trf 
 
 turn, TRn 
 
 twelve-th, Twf 
 
 U 
 
 unanimous, Nn 3 Ms 
 unavailable, NVLB1 
 
 unavoidable, NWB1 
 undefined, NDf 'Nt 
 under, Nt 
 undoubted, NtTt 3 
 union, Nn 3 
 universe, Vrs 
 unless, Ms 
 unsealed, nsKlt 
 unschooled, nsKlt 3 
 unscreened, nsKrnt 1 
 unskilled, nsKlt 1 
 unsuppressed, nsPrst 3 
 until, Tl 3 
 up, P 
 upon, Pn 
 upper, uPr 
 us, S 3 
 use(n.), S 3 
 use(v.), Z 3 
 used, Zt 3 
 usher, Shr 
 usual, Zh 
 utterly, TrL 
 
 V 
 
 valiant, V 3 Lnt 
 valuation, Vlshn 3 
 value, VI 3 
 veracity, VRsT 
 very, Vr 
 violent, V^Lnt 
 virtue, Vrt 
 voluble, V'LBl 
 voracity, VoRsT 
 voter, Vtr
 
 204 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 w 
 
 wait, Wt 
 was, Z 
 watch, C 1 
 watcher, Cr 1 
 watchful, Cf 1 
 water, Wtr 1 
 way, W 
 we, w 1 
 
 weather, TFtr 
 Aveigh, W 
 weighed, TFb 
 well, wit 
 went, Wnt 
 were, ivR 
 wert, wRt 
 what, T 1 
 whatever, Tf 1 
 when, nW 
 whence, nWns 
 where n?cR 
 wherein, H?/>Rn 
 whereof, H?/:Rf 
 whether, H IFtr 
 which, C 
 whichever, Cf 
 while, HM^L 1 
 whither, H TFtr 1 
 Avho, HU 
 whoever, Vr 3 
 whom, HU 
 whose, HUS 
 why, nW 1 
 wide, TFt 1 
 wider, TFtr 1 
 will, L 
 wilt, Lt 
 
 wish, Sh 1 
 wished, Sht 1 
 wisher, Shr 1 
 with, Dh 1 
 withal, Dhl 1 
 wither, TFtr 1 
 withheld, Dhlt 
 withhold, Dhlt 
 within, Dhn 1 
 won, Wn 
 word, u'Rt 
 world, Lt 
 would, TFt 3 
 write, Rt 1 
 writer, Rtr 1 
 
 yard, 
 
 yea, Y 
 year, yR 1 
 ves, Ys 
 yet, Yt 
 yield, Ylt 1 
 you, Y 
 your, yU 
 yours, 7/Rs 
 yourself, 
 yourselves, ?/Rss 
 youth, Th 3 
 
 Z 
 
 zest, Zst 
 zither, Ztr 1 
 zithern, Ztrn 1 
 zone, Zn
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 265 
 
 LESSON 34. 
 PREFATORY REMARKS ON THE VOCABULARY 
 
 413. The following vocabulary contains a number 
 of semigraphs (see sec. 383) and other words in ad- 
 dition to those in the preceding five lists, whose forms 
 might not readily occur to the learner. Occasionally, 
 also, for completeness, a word from one of these lists 
 is included. The vocabulary is arranged in alphabeti- 
 cal order for convenience of reference when writing. 
 (See sec. 411.) 
 
 414. As the past tense of those verbs mentioned 
 in section 274, and of verbs like those in the first part 
 of section 365 is usually written with the same form as 
 for the present it is not usually given. The same 
 course is pursued with the past tense of verbs whose 
 present ends in a circle or loop. (See see's. 125 and 
 272.) In other cases generally only the past tense of 
 irregular verbs is represented. Again adverbs ending 
 in Ly or Y of the same nature a> those in section 367 
 are usually omitted. 
 
 415. Where two forms for a word are presented 
 the first is usually preferred. 
 
 416. When a shorter form is iven after a longer 
 
 ~ o 
 
 one it generally indicates that it may be employed if 
 it occurs more frequently than usual. 
 
 417. The list is divided into six parts, the first part 
 beginning at A, and the others at D, I, M, Q and U, 
 respectively, at Lessons 35, 36, 37, 38 and 39. It 
 should be memorized so that any word in it may 
 usually be written at once on being heard. This 
 should bo done before proceeding to the next chapter.
 
 THE PHOXOUKAl'HJO MANUAL. 
 
 418. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 Aarhuus, R 3 S 
 abandon, BnDn 
 abandonment, BnDMnt 
 abed, Bt 
 
 abhor, B'hR or BUI 
 al)ility, Bit 1 
 abject-ly, BM 
 ablative, BltV 
 al)olish, BLSh 
 abolished, BLSht 
 abolition, BLshn 
 abolitionism, BLshnsM 
 abolitionist, BlshnSt 
 abortive, BRtV 
 abortively, BRtVl 
 Abraham, BruaM 
 Abrarn, BrM 
 abroad, Br'D or Brt 1 
 abscissa, BsS 
 absolute, Bs 3 Lt 
 absurd, BsRt 
 accommodate-d, -MDt 1 
 accommodation, -MDShn 1 
 
 accompany, 
 accomplice, -Pis 1 
 accomplish, -PPSh 
 accordance, Krt * N s 
 accountability, Knt 8 Bt 
 accountable, Knt 2 B 
 accouter, Ktr 3 
 accumulate, KMLt 
 achievement, Cf'.Mnt 
 acme, K 3 M 
 acquiesce, KwS 
 
 acquire, Kw 1 
 acquirement. Kw J Mnt 
 acquisition, K\vs.s7/// ] 
 acquisitiveness, KwsTfXs 
 acute, KT 3 
 ad. (for advertisement), 
 
 a I) 3 
 
 ade(|iiate, D 3 Kvvt 
 adhere, I) 1 !* 
 adhesive, DsV 
 adhibit, D 3 Bt 
 adhort, D 3 Rt 
 adhortatory, D 3 RTtR 
 adjourn, Jrn 
 adjournment, JrMnt 
 adjudge, J 3 J 
 adjust, Jst 
 adjustment, JsMnt 
 administer, D^lNstr 
 administrate, D^MnsTrt 
 administration, I) 1 MnsTr- 
 
 shn 
 
 administrative, D 1 MnsTrf 
 administrator, DMsH or 
 
 D'MnsTrtr 
 administratrix, DMnsKs 
 
 or DMnsTrtKs 
 admissable, DMsB 
 advancement, Ds 3 Mnt 
 advantageously, JsL 
 advantageousness, JsNs 
 adventure, DfNtr 
 adventurer, DfNtrR 
 adverb, DVrB 
 adverse, D 3 Vrs
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 207 
 
 advert, D 3 Vrt 
 advertiser, L)s 3 R 
 affectionate, FKshnT 
 affidavit, Ft 3 Vt 
 afore, YJ? 
 aforesaid, FA'sl) 
 afternoon, FtNn 
 afterward, FtWrt 
 agency, JnS or JNS 
 Aguinaldo, GwnLD 
 aha, u^Hji 
 Ahab, AB 
 ahead, AD 3 
 ahem, ahM 
 ahoy, aiW 
 Aiken, Kn 
 Akenside, KnsD 
 akimbo, -B 1 
 Alabama, LBM 
 Alabaman, LBMn 
 alarm, LrM or Lr 3 
 Alaska, LsK 
 Alaskan, LsKn 
 alchemy, LKM 
 alcohol, LKL 
 alembic, LMpK 
 alert, LRt 
 Alger, LJr 
 Alhambra, LMBr 
 alien, Ln 
 alike, aL^K 
 alimentary, L 3 MntR 
 alkali, L'KL 
 all, Ftoid 1 or L 1 
 alligator, LGtr 
 alhiight, FtoidNt 1 
 all-wise, LMVs 
 
 Almighty, L x Mt or Ftoid 
 
 Mt 1 
 
 alphabet, LFBt 
 already, Wtoid 1 , Lrt^Lr 1 
 
 or LrD 
 also, L^ 
 although, FtoidDh 3 or 
 
 L'Dh 
 
 altogether, Gtr 1 or L^Gtr 
 aluminium, LMnM 
 alway, L 1 ^ 
 always, L ! Ws 
 amanuensis, MNNss 
 amateur, MTr 
 ambassador, MpsDr 
 ambassadress, MpsDrs 
 amber, Mpr 3 
 ambidexterous, MpDKs- 
 
 Trs 
 
 ambient, Mpnt 3 
 ambiguous, MpGs 
 ambition, Mpshn 1 
 ambitious, MpShs 1 
 Amboy, Mp 3 
 ambrosia, MBrZh 
 ambrozial, MBrZAL 
 amen, Mn 
 
 amendment, MntMnt 
 America, MrK 
 American, MrKn 
 amiable, MB! 
 among, MNg 
 amongst, MNgst 
 amplification, JSIplFshn 3 
 amplify, M[>1F 3 
 amputate, MpTt 3 
 anaconda, N'D 1
 
 268 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 analogy, N1J 
 
 analysis- es, Nlss 1 
 analyze, Nls 1 
 anarchist, NrKst 
 anarchy, NrK 
 ancestor, NSstr 
 ancestry, NSsTr 
 anchor, NgKr 
 anchoret, NgKrT 
 anchorite, NgKrT 1 
 ancient, Nshnt 
 ancillary, NsLR 
 anew, NFtoid 
 angelic, J1K 
 angelical, J1K1 
 Anglo-Saxon, Ngl 3 ssN 
 anguish, NgSh 
 angular, Ngl 3 R 
 angularity, NgPRT 
 anhelation, NhLshn 
 anhydrous, NhDrs 
 anility, NLT 
 animadvert, NMDVrt 
 ankle, NgKl 
 annex, N 3 Ks. 
 annexation, N 3 Ks-sA^ 
 annexed, N 3 Kst 
 annihilate, NhLt 1 , NLt 1 
 
 or Nit 1 
 annihilation, NhLshn J , 
 
 NLshn 1 or Nlshn 1 
 anniversary, NVrsR 
 announce, Nns 3 
 announced, N 3 Nst 
 announcement, N 3 NsMnt 
 annoyance, N a Ns 
 annul, NZ 
 
 annunciate, NNSht 
 annunciation, NnssAw or 
 
 NNShshn 
 answer, NsR 
 antarctic, NtR 3 KK 
 antecedent, NtsDnt 
 antedate, NtDt 
 anther, Ntr 3 
 anthracite, NtrsT 
 anticipate, NtsPt 
 anticipation, NtsPshn 
 antidote, NtDt 3 
 antipathy, NtPTh 
 antipode, NtPd 
 antique, Nt J K 
 antiquity, NtKwT 1 
 antiseptic, NtsPtK 
 anti-slavery, NteLVr 
 anybody, NBt 1 
 anyhow, N^HO^ 
 any-one, N J Wn 
 anything, N J NG 
 anyway, N a W 
 anywhere, N 
 apace, Ps 3 
 apart, Prt 3 
 apathy, P 3 Th 
 apathetic, P 3 ThtK 
 apathetical, P 3 ThtKl 
 apparition, Prshn 1 or 
 
 aP x Rshn 
 
 appendage, Pnt 3 J 
 appertain, Pr 3 Tn 
 applicable, P1 3 K 
 appreciate, PrSht 
 appreciation, PrShn 
 appreciative, PrShtV
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 appreciatively, PrShtVl 
 appreciator, PrShtr 
 appreciatory, PrShtR 
 apprentice, PrnTs 
 approbative, Pr 3 Bf 
 approbati veness, Pr 3 Bf Ns 
 appropriate, PrPrt 
 April, PrL 
 arbiter, RBtr 
 arbitrarily, RBtRRL 
 arbitrary, RBtRR 
 arbitrate, RBtRt 
 arbitration, RBtRshn 
 arbitrator, RBtRtr 
 archangel, RKJ1 
 arctic, R 3 KK 
 ardor, Rtr 3 
 arduous, RDS 
 Ariel, RL 
 arise, aRs 1 
 
 aristocrat-ic-al, RsTKrt 
 arithmetical, RfThL 
 arithmetician, RfThshn 
 Arizona, RZN 
 Arizonan, RZNn 
 Arkansan, R 3 'ZnorR 3 Zn 
 Arkansas, R 3 'Zs or R 3 Zs 
 Arkansaw, R 3 'S or R 3 S 
 Arkansawan, R 3 'SN or 
 
 i R 3 SN 
 Arlington, RLNgt or 
 
 RINgt 
 
 arrange, RnJ 
 arterial, R 3 TR1 
 arterialization, R 3 TRlssA, 
 arterialize, R 3 TRls 
 artery, R 3 TR 
 
 artesian, R J Tshn 
 Arthur, Rtr 1 
 article, RtKl 
 articulate, RtKlt 
 artificial, RtFtfAl 
 artillerist, RtLRst or 
 
 RtLrst 
 
 artillery, RtLR or RtLr 
 artisan, Rts 3 N 
 artist, Rtst 3 or RTst 
 artistic, RTsK 
 artistical, RTsKl 
 asafetida, Si Ft 
 ascend, Snt 
 ascendant, SntNt 
 ascension, SNshn 
 ascent, Snt 
 ascertain, SRtN 
 ascetic, STK 
 asceticism, STssM 
 ashore, Shr 3 
 asleep, SLP 
 aspirate, SPRt 
 assail, SL 
 assailer, SLR 
 assay, S 
 assayed, SD 
 assay er, SR 
 assemble-y, SMpl 
 assent, Snt 
 assets, STs 
 asseverate, SVrt 
 associate, SSht or SxS^t 
 associated, SShTt or StfATt 
 association, Ssshn or 
 
 SShshn 
 assuage, SJ
 
 270 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 assuager, SJr 
 assume, S 3 M 
 assumer, S 3 Mr 
 asteroid, StrD 
 asthma, S 3 M 
 Astor, Str 3 
 Astoria, STR 
 astound, St 3 Nt 
 astragal, StrGl 
 astral, StrL 
 astringent, StrNJnt 
 astrolabe, StrLB 
 astrologer, StrLJr 
 astronomer, StrNR or 
 
 StrR 
 
 astronomical, StrNKl 
 astronomy-ic, StrN 
 atheism, ThsM 
 atheist, Thst 
 atheistic, ThsK 
 atheistical, ThsKl 
 athwart, ThwRt 
 Atlanta, Tln 3 T or TLnT 
 Atlantic, Tlnt 3 KorTLntK 
 atmosphere, TMsFr 
 attach, T 3 C 
 attain, Tn 
 attend, Tnt 3 
 attendance, Tnt 3 Ns 
 attendant, Tnt 3 Nt 
 attention, T 3 Nshn 
 attentive, Tnt 3 V 
 attentively, Tnt 3 VL 
 attenuate, T 3 XT 
 attenuation, T 3 NShn 
 attitude, T 3 iTt 
 attorney, TrN 
 
 attractor, Trtr 3 
 auditor-y, Dt J R 
 August, Gst 1 
 Aurora, RR 
 austere, S^R 
 austerity, S a Trt 
 authentic, ThntK 
 authenticity, ThntSt 
 auto, T 1 
 autobiograph-y-ic-al, T 1 - 
 
 BG 
 
 autobiographer, T'BGr 
 autobiographist, T J BGst 
 autograph-y-ic-al, T 5 G or 
 
 T'Gf 
 
 autographer, T'Gr 
 autographist, T'Gst 
 automobe, TMp or TMB 
 automobile, TM or TMB1 
 avenge, VJ 
 average, VrJ 
 avert, Vrt 3 or aVrt. (See 
 
 vert) 
 
 avocation, V 3 Kshn 
 avoid, a-Vt 1 
 avouch, a-V 3 C 
 avow, aAV 3 
 awed, oD 1 
 awes, os or oZ 1 
 awe-struck, oisTrK 
 awful, Fl 1 
 awfulness, Fl a Ns 
 awing, o- or 
 awning, N J Ng 
 axis, Kss 3 
 ayes, as or aZ 
 ays, is 1
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL 
 
 271 
 
 B 
 
 Bahama, BM 
 bamboo, B 3 Mp 
 banana, BNN 
 banish, BnSh 
 bank, B 3 Ng 
 banker, B 3 NgR 
 bankrupt, B 3 NgPt 
 bankruptcy, B 3 NgS 
 barb, BrB 
 barbarian, BrBrn 
 barbarity, BrBrt 
 Barbary, BrBR 
 barbecue, BrBK 
 barber, BrBr 
 barely, BRL 
 bargain, BrGn 
 bark, I>RK 
 barley, BRL 
 barrel, BR1 
 battle, Bt 3 L 
 bdellium, DIM 
 beadle, Bt'L 
 l>eautiful, Bt 3 Fl or B 3 Tf 
 beautify, Bt 3 F or B 3 TF 
 beauty, B 3 T 
 became, BKM 
 become, BK 
 Bedouin, BtWn 
 beehive, B ! V 
 beehouse, B*S 
 beetle, Bt'L 
 
 beforehand, RNt or BfNt 
 beginner, Gn'R 
 beginnings, gn 01 
 Behan, BN 
 behave, BV 
 
 behavior, BVR 
 behead, BD 
 beheld, BLt 
 behemoth, BMTh 
 behest, BhSt 
 behindhand, Bnt'Nt 
 behold, BLt 
 beholden', BLtN 
 beholder, BLtr 
 behoof, B 3 F 
 behoove, B 3 V 
 being B J Ng 
 benefaction, BNfFshn 
 benefactor, BNfFtr 
 benefactress, BNfKs 
 benefice, BNFs 
 beneficed, BNFst 
 beneficeless, BNFsZs 
 beneficence, BfNs or BN- 
 
 FsNs 
 beneficent-ly, BfNt or BN- 
 
 FsNt 
 beneficential, BfNxS'/il or 
 
 BNFsN^Al 
 beneficial, BfL or BNF- 
 
 Skl 
 beneficialness, BfLNs or 
 
 beneficiary, BfR or BN- 
 
 FShr 
 jeneficiate, BNFSht 
 jeneficiation, BNFShshn 
 enefit, BNFt 
 )enefitter, BNFtr 
 jenevolent-ly-ence, BNV 
 )enight, B J Nt 
 benign, BNn
 
 272 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 benignant-ly-ity, BNg 
 Benjamin, BnJ 
 Bennett, BNt 
 beryl, BR1 
 beset, BsT 
 beside, BsD 
 bespeak, BsP 
 bespoke, BsP 
 bespoken, BsPn 
 bethel, BThl 
 better, Btr or BtK 
 betterment, BtrMnt, 
 
 BtriMnt or BtRMnt 
 between, Twn 1 or Bt*Wn 
 betwixt, B^Kwst 
 bewail, BwL or BwL 
 be weep, B*WP 
 bewilder, B^Ltr or Bw 1 
 
 Ltr 
 
 bewitch, B^w-C 
 bewitcher-y, B^w-CR 
 bewitchingly, B^w-CNgl 
 bias, B 1 S 
 biased, B'St 
 Bible, BB1 
 bijou, B 3 Zh 
 Bimbley, BMB1 
 binder, BNtr 
 bindery, Bnt J R 
 biograph-y-ic-al, B J G 
 biographer, B*Gr 
 biographize, B J Grs 
 boa, B 
 
 boaconstrictor, B'sTrtr 
 boastful, BsFl 
 bodiless, 
 bodily, 
 
 body, B'D 
 
 bohea, B 1 
 
 Bohemia, B 1 ^! 
 
 bois, Bw 1 
 
 bolder, Bltr or BltR 
 
 bolt, BLt 
 
 bolter, BLtr 
 
 bombast, BMpst 
 
 bombastic, BMpsK 
 
 bombastical, BMp.s'Kl 
 
 Bombay, B^lp 
 
 bonnet, BNt 
 
 border, BRtr 
 
 bother, Btr 1 or BDhr 
 
 botheration, Btr J Shn or 
 
 BDhrshn 
 bothersome, Btr^M or 
 
 BDhrsM 
 bottle, Bt^ 
 bountiful, BnTf 
 bountifulness, BnTfNs 
 bounty, BnT 
 brachygraph-y-ic-al, Br- 
 
 Kg 
 
 brachygrapher, BrKGr 
 brachygraphist, BrKGst 
 brethren, Brn 3 or Br 3 
 bribe, Br!B 
 briber-y, Br^r 
 bridewell, Brt^L 
 brighter, Brtr 1 
 brightest, Brtst 1 
 Britain-on, BrTn 
 Britannia, BrTN 
 British, Br^Sh 
 broader, BrDr 
 broadest, BrDst
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 273 
 
 Brompton, BrMptN 
 brotherhood, BrtrD 
 brother-in-law, BrNl 
 Buena Vista, BNVsT or 
 
 BwNVsT 
 
 builder, Bltr 1 or Bit 1 R 
 burden, BrDn 
 burdensome, BrDsM 
 Burlington, BrLNgt 
 busied, B*Zt 
 busier, Bs*R 
 busiest, Bs^t 
 busily, Bs a L 
 business, Bss 1 or Bs^s 
 busy, B'Z 
 busybody, Bs^t 
 Butterick, BtrK 
 bystander, B^TtR or 
 
 Bst'Ntr 
 byway, B J W 
 
 C 
 
 Caesar, SsR 
 Cahawba, KB 1 
 Cahoone, K 3 N 
 calculate, KlKlt 
 calculi, K1K1 
 calculus, KlKls 
 calends, KINts 
 calendar er, KINtr 
 Calhoun, KIN 
 California, Klf 1 
 Calif ornian, Klf'N 
 cam, K a M 
 camber, -Br 3 
 cambist, -Bst 3 
 cambistry, -Bs 3 Tr 
 
 camblet, -Bit 3 
 Cambo, -B 3 
 Cambodia, -BD 
 camboge, -B 3 J 
 Cam boy, -B 3 
 Cambria, -Br 
 Cambrian, -Brn 
 cambric, -BrK 
 Cambridge, -BrJ 
 Cambyses, -Bss 1 
 Camden, -Dn 3 
 came, KM 
 camel, KM1 
 cameleon, KMLn 
 camellia, KML 
 camelopard, KMlPrt 
 cameo, K 3 M 
 camera, KMR 
 Cameron, KMrn 
 camis, KMs 
 camisade, KMsD 
 camisado, KMsDo 
 camlet, -Lt 3 
 camomile, KMML 
 camp, K 3 Mp 
 campaign, -Pn 
 campaigner, -PnR 
 campaniform, -PNF 
 camper, K 3 Mpr 
 Camperdown, -PrDn 
 campestral, -PsTrL 
 campestrian, -PsTrn 
 cam'phene, -Fn 3 
 camphine', -Fn 1 
 camphor, -Fr 3 
 camphorate, -Fr 3 T 
 camphoric, -Fr 3 K
 
 27 I 
 
 TIIE PHONOGRAPHIC MANTAT.. 
 
 Cumpi, -P 
 campion, -Pn 3 
 Campo, -P 3 
 campus, -P 3 
 Canada, KND 
 Canadian, KNDn 
 canaille, KXZ 
 canakin, KNKn 
 canal, KN1 
 canard, Kn 3 Rt 
 canary, KnR 
 cancel, -sL 3 
 cancellation, -sLshn 3 
 cancer, -sR 3 
 cancriform, -KrF 3 
 cancrine, -Krn 3 
 candelabra, -DlBr 
 candelabrum, -DiBrM 
 candent, -Dnt 3 
 candid, -Dt 3 
 
 candidacy, DtS or KntDS 
 candidate, Dt, DtiT or 
 
 KntDt 
 candidateship, Dt'.Sh, Dtt 
 
 TShorKntDttSh 
 candidature, DtTr, DttTtr 
 
 or KntDtr 
 candle, -Dl 3 
 candle-light, -DPLt 
 candlemas, -DPMs 
 candle-stick, -Dlst 3 K 
 candor, -Dr 3 
 candy, -D 3 
 cane, Kn 
 
 canescent, KNsNt 
 Canfield, -F'Zt 
 canicnla, KNKL 
 
 canicular, KXKLr 
 canicule, KNK1 
 canine, KNn 
 canis, KNs 
 canister, KNstr 
 canker, -Kr 3 
 cannel, -Nl 3 
 cannibal, -XB1 
 Cannock, -NK 
 cannon, -Nn 
 cannonade, -NND 
 cannoneer, -NnR 
 cannonry, -NnR 
 cannular, -NLr 
 canny, -N 3 
 canoe, K 3 X 
 canon, KnN 
 canonic, KnXK 
 canonical, KnNKl 
 Canopus, KNPs 
 canopv, KNP 
 Cantab, -TB 
 Cantabrian, -TBrn 
 Cantabrigian, -TBrJn 
 cantalever, -TLVr 
 cantaloupe, -TLP 
 cantata, -TT 
 
 cantatrice, -TtrC or TTtrC 
 canteen, -Tn 1 
 canter, .Tr 3 
 Canterbury, Kt'.BR 
 canthus, -Ths 3 
 canticle, -TK1 
 can tie, -Tl 3 
 cantlet, KntLt 
 canto, -T 
 Can 'ton, -Tn 3
 
 THK PHONOGRAPHIC! MANUAL. 
 
 Canton', -TV 
 cantoon, -Tn 3 
 Canute, K 3 Nt 
 canvas, Vs 3 
 canvass, Vs 3 
 canvasser, VsR 
 cany, KN 
 canyon, -Yn 3 
 canzone, -ZN 
 can/onet, -ZXt 
 capital-ol, KPtL 
 captain, KPt 3 
 captaincy, KP 3 tT 
 captainry, KPt 3 Nr 
 captainship, KPt 3 tSh 
 captivate, KPtVt 
 captive, KPf 3 or KPtV 
 captivity, KPft 3 or KPt- 
 
 VT 
 
 carefulness, KrfNs 
 caricature, KrKTr 
 carol, KR1 
 Carolina, KrLN 
 Carolinan, KrLNn 
 Caroline, KrLn 
 Carpenter, KrPntR 
 carriage, KRJ 
 casual, KsL or KZhl 
 casuality, KsLT or KZhlT 
 casuist, KsSt or KZhst 
 casuistic, KsStK or KZhsK 
 casuistry. KsSTr or KZhs- 
 
 Tr 
 
 cathedral, KThtrL 
 catholic-ism, KTh 3 
 cattle, KtL 3 
 caudal, KtL 1 
 
 caused, KsD 1 or Kzd 1 
 
 cauter, Ktr 1 
 
 cauterism, Ktrs 1 ^! 
 
 cauterization, Ktrsshn* 
 
 cauterize, Ktrs 1 
 
 cauterized, KtrsD 1 
 
 cautery, KtR 1 
 
 celestial, sLsL 
 
 celestial ize, sLsLs 
 
 centigrade, sNtGrt or sNt 
 
 central, sNtrZ 
 
 centralization, sXtrZss/m 
 
 century, sNTR 
 
 certificate, sRtFt 
 
 certification, sRtFshn 
 
 certify, sRtF 
 
 chairmanship, CrnSh 
 ', chamber, CMpr 
 i chancel, Cs 3 L or CNs/, 
 
 chancellor, Cs 3 LR 
 
 chancery, Cs 3 R * 
 
 change, CJ or C 
 
 changeable, CJB1 
 
 changer, CJr 
 
 chapter, CPtr(C 3 Pin 
 Bible references.) 
 
 char, C 3 R 
 
 characteristical, KrKsKl 
 
 characterization, KrKs6'/m 
 
 characterize, KrKs 
 
 characterized v KrKst 
 
 charge, CrJ or C 3 
 
 charger, CrJr 
 i chargeable, CrJBl 
 charta, KrT 
 
 chartaceous, KrTShs 
 ' chart, Crt 3
 
 276 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 charter, Crt 3 R 
 charterer, Crt 3 RR 
 charter-party, Crt 3 RP 
 chartism, Crt 3 sM 
 chartist, Crtst 3 
 chartometer, Crt 3 Mtr 
 chattel, Ct 3 L 
 Chauncy, CnS 
 Cheathet, C'Tht 
 cheerfulness, Crf'Xs 
 chemical, KMK1 
 Chicago, ShKG 
 Chihuahua, OVW or C\v- 
 
 W 
 
 chill-y, C'L 
 choler, KLr 
 choyer, C'R or C l vR 
 churn, CRn 
 Cicero, sSR 
 
 circumstantiate, sTn 3 Sht 
 circumvent, sR'Vnt 
 cissoid, SsD 
 citator, sTtr 1 
 cite, sT 1 
 citizen, sTn 1 
 citizenry, sTn u .R 
 citizenship, sTn u .Sh 
 city, sT 1 
 cittern, sTRn 
 classification, KIsFshn 
 clearly, K1RL or K1R1 
 client, Klnt 1 
 cling-y, KPXg 
 clinker, KINgKr 
 clothier, Kltr 
 Co. (for company), K 
 cognac, -Y'K , 
 
 cognate, K'GXl 
 cognomen, K'GNMn 
 cognizable, -Xsli 1 
 cognizance, -Xs ' Xs 
 cognizant, -Xs'Xt 
 cognizee, -XZ 1 
 cognizor, -XsR 1 
 cohasset, KhSt 
 coherent, KhRnt 
 cohesion, KHf'Zhn 
 cohesive, Knf's\' 
 cohort, KhRt 
 Cohoes, KhZ 
 colder, Kltr or KltR 
 collar, KLr 
 collateral, KLtrL 
 colleague, Kl'G 
 collectedness, KPKXs 
 collectible, KIKBl 
 collection, Kl'Kshn 
 collective, KPKf 
 collectively, KPKfL 
 collector, Kl'Ktr 
 collectorate, KIKtrT 
 collectorship, KIKtrSh 
 college, KIJ 
 collide, KLt 1 
 collocation, KIKshn 
 Col. (for Colonel;, Kl 1 
 colonel, KrNl 
 colony, KPN 
 Coloradan, Kin 3 
 Colorado, Kl 3 
 Coloradoan, K1 3 X' 
 Columbia, KIMp 
 columbiad, KIMpt 
 Columbian, KIMpn
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 277 
 
 Columbus, KIMps 
 column, Kl'M 
 com, K ] M 
 coma, KM 
 Comanche, KJVlnC 
 comatose, KMTs 
 comb, KM 
 combat, -Bt 1 
 combative, -B^V 
 combatively, -fit 1 VI 
 combination, -l^Nshn 
 comedian, KMDn 
 comedy, KMD 
 comely, K'.L or KL 
 comeliness, KiLXs or 
 
 KLNs 
 
 comer, K'.R or KR 
 comestible, -StBl 
 comet, K'Mt 
 cometh, KtTh or KTh 
 comfort, -Frt 
 comforter, -Frtr 
 comfrey, -Fr 
 comic, KMK 
 comity, KMT 
 comma, -M 1 
 command, -Mnt 3 
 commeasureable, -MZhrB 
 
 or -Zhr'B 
 
 oommemorable, -MMBl 
 commemorate, -MMRt 
 commemoration, -MM- 
 
 Rshn 
 commemorative, -MM- 
 
 RtV 
 commemorator, -MMRtr 
 
 commencement, -MnsMnt 
 
 or -MnsiMnt 
 commenced, -MNst 
 commences, -MNss (See 
 
 sec. and eng. 202.) 
 commend, -Mnt 
 comment, -Mnt 1 
 commerce, -Mrs 
 commercial, -MrShl 
 commingle, -M^gl 
 commingled, -M^Ngit 
 commiserate, -MsRt 
 commiseration, -MsRshn 
 commissariat, -MsRT 
 commissary, -MsR 
 commission, -Mshn 1 
 commissioner, -Msh^R 
 commissure, -MShr 
 commit, -Mt 1 
 committee, -Mt 1 or MT 
 commix, -MKs 1 
 commixed, -M 
 commixture, - 
 commodore, -MDr or 
 
 Mtr 1 
 
 common, -Mn 1 
 commoner, -MnR 1 
 commonest, -M^st 
 commonly, -MnL 1 
 commonness, -Mn a Ns 
 commonplace, -MNPls or 
 
 MnMPls 
 
 commonwealth, -MnL^Th 
 commotion, -Mshn 
 communicate, -M 3 NKt 
 communication,' -M 3 N- 
 
 Kshn
 
 278 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL 
 
 commute, -Mt 3 
 commuter, -Mtr 3 
 commutual, -Mt 3 L 
 companion, -PnN 
 company, PX (Sec Co.) 
 compare, -Pr 
 comparison, -PrsN 
 comparative, -PrtV 
 comparitively, PrtVl 
 compartment. -PrtMnt 
 compliment, PIMnt 
 complimentary, PIMntR 
 Compton, KMptN 
 comrade, -Rt 1 
 Comstock, -stK 1 
 con, Kn 1 
 concave, -Kf 
 concavity, -Kft 
 conceal, -sL 1 
 concenter, sNtr 
 concentrate, -sNtrT 
 concentration, sXtrshn 
 concentrative, sNtrTf 
 concentrativeaess, sXtr- 
 
 TfNs 
 
 concentric, -sNtrK 
 concentrical, -sXtrKl 
 concentricity, sNtrst 
 concert, sRt 
 concession, -Sshn 
 conch, KN^K 
 concomitant, -Tnt 
 concomitantly, --TtL or 
 
 TnttL 
 Conde, -D 1 
 Condon, -Dn 1 
 condor, -Dr 1 
 
 cone, Kn 
 
 Conestoga, KNsTG 
 confer, -F7? 
 couferable, -FRBl 
 conferee, -FR 
 conference,, FRns 
 conferential, -FRn 
 Confucius, -F*S7iS 
 conge, -J 1 
 conger, -Gr 1 
 Congo, -G 1 
 congress, -Grs 
 congressional, -GrshnL 
 Congreve, .Grf 1 
 congruous, -GrS 
 conic, KnK 
 conical, KnKL 
 conjunction, -JXgshn 
 con' jure, -Jr 1 
 conjure', -Jr 3 
 Conkey,' -K 1 
 Conk ling, -KlNg 
 connascence, -Xs 3 Xs 
 connascent, -Xs 3 X t 
 connate-ure, -Xt 
 connatural, -X'tZ 
 Connaught, -X't 1 
 Connecticut, -X'tKt 
 Connecticutter, -X^tKtr 
 connect, -XKt 
 connection, -X'Kshn 
 Connell, -XI 1 
 Connellsville, NlsVZ or 
 
 NlsV 
 
 Connelly, -XZ 1 
 Conner, -X'r 1 
 connex, -XKs
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 279 
 
 connive, -XT 1 
 connoisseur, -XsR 
 connubial, -NBL 
 conodont, KXDnt 
 conoid, Knl) 
 conominee, KXMX 
 Conrad, -Rt 3 
 Conroy, -R 1 
 consequence, sKns 1 
 consequent-ly, "sKnt 1 
 consequential, sKn 1 
 consertion, sRshn 
 conservable, sRBl 
 conservableness, sRBlns 
 eonservance, -sRVns 
 conservancy, -sRtV 
 conservant-ly, sRVnt 
 conservation, -sR or -sR- 
 
 Yshn 
 conservational, -sRL or 
 
 sRVshnL 
 
 conservatism, -sRVteM 
 conservative, sRVt or 
 
 sRVtV 
 
 conservatively, -sRVtVl 
 conservativeness, -sRVti- 
 
 Vns 
 
 conservator, -sRVtr 
 conservatory, -sRftR 
 conservatrix, -sRtKs 
 conserve, sRf 
 conserver, -sRfR 
 conservership, -sRfRSh 
 conservingly, sRf XgZ 
 consignment, -sN'Mnt 
 consist, ssT 1 
 consistence, ssTns 1 
 
 consistencies, ssTnss 1 
 consistency, ssTn 1 
 consistent-ly, ssTnt 1 
 consonance, -sN^'s 
 consonant, sN 1 Nt 
 consort, -sRt 1 
 conspicuous-ly-ness, sP 1 Ks 
 constable, -stBL 
 constablery, -stBLR 
 constabulary, -stB 3 LR 
 constant, -stNt 3 
 Constantinople, stNtNPl 
 
 orstXtPl 
 constitutionality, stTshn 3 - 
 
 T or stTshnLT 
 constriction, -sTrshn 1 
 constrictor, -sTrtr 1 
 construct, sTrKt 
 constructiveness, sTrf Xs 
 consuetude, sT l D or 
 
 sWiTt 
 consume, sM 3 
 consumer, sMR 3 
 consumptive, -sMptV 
 contend-t, -Tnt 
 contention, -TXshn 
 contentment, -TtMnt 
 continent, Tn'Nt 
 continental, Tn J NtZ 
 continence, Tn J Ns 
 contingent, -TnJnt 
 continual, TNZ 
 continuance, TNNs 
 continuant, TNNt 
 continuation, TXShn 
 continue, TX 
 continuity, T'.Xt
 
 280 
 
 THE PHOXOunArilU' M. \\UAL. 
 
 continuous, TXs 
 continuously, TXsZ 
 contort, -T^Rt 
 contortionist, -T l Rshn St 
 contra, -Tr 1 
 contraband, KtiBnt 3 
 con'tract, Tr'Kt 
 contract', Tr 3 Kt 
 contract'or, Trtr 3 
 contradance, Kt'. Dns 
 contradict, KtiDKt 
 contravene, KtiVn 1 
 contravention, EtfVNslin 
 controversial, VrShl 
 controversialist, VrShlst 
 controversy, VrS 
 controvert, KtiVrt 
 convey, -V 
 conundrum, KnXtrM 
 convent, -Vnt 
 convention, -VXshn 
 conventionality, -VXshn- 
 
 LT 
 
 convert, -Vrt 1 
 convolve, -V1V 
 Conway, W 
 cook, K 3 K 
 cooperate, KPrt 1 
 coral, KR1 
 v-orn, Krn 1 
 cornelian, KrNln 
 corneous, Ki^Ns 
 corner, KrnR 1 
 corner-stone, KrnR^Tn 
 cornice, Ki^Xs 
 corn-stalk, Krn 1 sTK 
 corona, KRN 
 
 coroner, Kr 3 Xr or KRXr 
 corps, Kr 
 
 correction, Kr J Ksh n 
 corrective, Ki^KTf 
 correctness, Kr ' K Xs 
 correspond, Krs'Pnt 
 corrupt, Ki -1 Pt 
 coterie, KtR 
 council, -sL 3 
 counsel, -sL 3 
 countenance, -Tn 3 X*s 
 countenanced, -Tu'Xst 
 countenances, -Tn 3 Xss 
 counter, -Tr 3 
 counteract, Kt'.Kt 3 
 counterirritant, KtiRTnt 
 counter-man, KttMn 
 countersign, KtisX 1 
 countersink, KtisX^g 1 !^ 
 countess, KntS 3 
 countryman, KMn 
 countryseat, K'sT 
 county-court, KntKt 
 county-seat, KntsT 
 courage, KrJ 
 courteous, KrTs 
 courthouse, Krt 2 S 
 covenant, KYnX't 
 Covington, KfX^gt 
 cowherd, K 3 hRt 
 cowhide, KD 3 
 create, KrT 
 creative, KrTf 
 creator, KrTr 
 credential, KrDn 
 creosote, KrsT 
 cricket, KrKT 1
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 281 
 
 cricketer, Kr'Ktr 
 criminal-ate, Ki^Mn 
 critic-ique, Kr'K or Krt 1 - 
 
 <K 
 
 critical, Kr^Kl 
 criticalness, Krt J KlNs 
 criticise, Krt'sZ 
 criticised, Krt^sZt 
 criticiser, Krt 1 sZR 
 criticism, Krt^sZM 
 cucumber, K 3 KMpr 
 cultivator, KltVtr 
 cumbent, -Bnt 
 cumber, -Br 
 Cumberland, -BrLnt 
 cumbersome, -BrsM 
 cumbrous, -Brs 
 cumin, KMn 
 Gumming, -MXg 
 cumulate, KMLt 
 cuneiform, KNRffM 
 cunning, -NNg 
 Cunningham, -NNgM 
 cute, Kt 3 
 Cuyahoga, KG 
 cylinder-ic, sLNtr 
 cylindrical, sLNtrKl 
 cymbal, sMpl 1 
 
 LESSON 35. 
 D 
 
 dahlia, D1Y or DL'.v 
 Dahomey, DM 
 Dakota, DKT 
 Dakotan, DKTn 
 Dalhousie, D1Z 
 
 dampen, D 3 Mpn 
 damper, D 3 Mpr 
 Danish, DnSh 
 dashed, D 3 Sht 
 dative, DTf 
 daughter-in-law, D 1 ]^! 
 David, DVt 
 davit, D 3 Vt 
 debenture, DB, DBXtr or 
 
 DBntE 
 
 decapitate-ion, DKPt 
 decease, DSs 
 deceased, DSst 
 December, DsMp or Ds- 
 
 MpR 
 
 decipher, D-s-Fr 
 decisive, Dss^ 
 declaim, DK1M 
 declarable, D 3 K1B1 
 declaration, D 3 Klshn 
 declarative, D 3 KlTf 
 declaratory, D 3 K1TR 
 dedicate, DtKt 
 dedication, DtKshn 
 deduce, DDs 
 deduced, DDst 
 deducible, DDsBl 
 deduct, DDKt 
 deduction, DDKshn 
 defeat, D^t 
 defend, DfNt 
 defer, DfR 
 deference, DfRns 
 deferential, DfKn 
 deficience, DFshns 
 deficiency, DFtSh
 
 282 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 deficient, DFshnt or D:-' 
 
 Fshnt 
 
 defied, D'Ft 
 defier, D'F^ 
 defile, DFZ 
 defilement, DFLMnt 
 defiler, DFLr 
 defiling, DFLNg 
 define, DFn 
 definite, 'DfXt 
 deforin-ity, DFr 
 deformation, DFrshn 
 defrav, Dfr 
 defiant, D'FXt 
 defy, D'F 
 degeneration, DJshn 
 dehiscence, DsNs 
 dehort, D'Rt 
 dehortatory, D a RtTR 
 deified, D^Ft or D'FD 
 deify, D'F 
 
 Delawaran, DbrRn or Din 
 Delaware, DlwR or Dl 
 delectable, DIKtBl 
 delegate, DIGt 
 delegation, DIGshn 
 deleterious, DLtRs 
 deliberate, DIBrt 
 delicate, DIKt 
 delicious, DLShs 
 delight, Dlt 1 
 delinquency, Dln:K or 
 
 DlntKw 
 
 delinquent-ly, DIKnt 
 delirium, D1RM 
 delirious, DIRs 
 delude, Dlt 3 
 
 delusion, Dlshn 3 
 democracy', DMS 
 democratical, DMK1 
 demonstrative, DMnsTrf 
 Deneen, DXn 
 Denmark, DMrK 
 denote, DNt 
 denounce, DXns 
 denounced, DXXst 
 denouncement, DXXsMnt 
 dental, DnTL 
 denunciation, DXns-v//// or 
 
 DXn^Ashn 
 dependency, DPtD or 
 
 DPniD 
 derange-ment, DRnJ or 
 
 DrXJ 
 
 derelict, DRIKt 
 dereliction, DRlshn 
 derivation, Drf$An 
 derivative, Drft^V 
 derivatively, Drf t J VL 
 dervish, DrfSh 
 descriptiveness, SKrf^'s 
 desert, DsRt 
 desertion, DsRshn 
 deserve, DsRf 
 deservedly, DsRftL 
 deservedness, DsRftX's 
 deserver, DsRfR 
 designate-ion, DsG 
 desire-able, DsR 
 desirous, DsRs 
 desperate, DsPrt 
 despicable-ness, DsPK 
 despondency, DsP:D or 
 
 DsPntD
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 283 
 
 destination, DstXshn 
 destiny, DstN 
 destructiveness, DsTrfNa 
 desuetude, DsTt or DsWt- 
 
 Tt 
 
 detach, DtC 
 detachment, DtCMnt 
 detail, DTL 
 detailed, DTLt 
 detain, DTn 
 detect, DtKt 
 detection, DtKshn 
 detector, DtKtr 
 detective, DtKtV 
 deter, DtR 
 deteriorate, DtRRT 
 determent, DtRMnt 
 determinahility, DtrBt 
 determinable, DtrB 
 determinableness, DtrBns 
 determinacy, DtrS 
 determinant, DtrNt 
 determinate, DtrT 
 determinately, DtrTL 
 determinateness, DtrTns 
 determination, Dtrn or 
 
 DtrSh 
 
 determinative, DtrTf 
 determinator-y, DtrTR 
 determine-ing, Dtr 
 determined-ly, Dtrt 
 determiner, Dtr'.R 
 determinism, DtrZM or 
 
 DtrtsM 
 determinist, DtrsT or Dtr 
 
 St 
 detest, DTst 
 
 detestable, DTsBl 
 detestation, DTsTshn 
 detinue, DtN 
 detonate, DtNt 
 detour, Dt 3 R 
 detract, DTrKt 
 detractor, DTrtr 
 detraction, DTrshn 
 detractive, DTrf 
 detrimental, DTrMntL 
 develop-ment, DfP 
 deviate, DVT 
 devious, DVs 
 deviously, DVfcZ 
 devoid, D'Vt 
 devolve, DV1 
 devote, DVt 
 devotee, DVT 
 devotional, DVshnL 
 devour, DfR 
 devout, D 3 Vt 
 diadem, DDM 
 diagram, DfG 
 differentia, DfSh or DfRn- 
 
 Sh 
 diflerentiable, DfShB or 
 
 DfRnShB 
 
 differential, DfSh or DfRn 
 differentiate-d, DfSht or 
 
 DfRnSht 
 differentiation, DfShshn or 
 
 DfRnShshn 
 differentiator, DfShtr or 
 
 DfRnShtr 
 
 difficult-y, D 1 Kit or Kit 
 diffidence, DFDns 
 diffident, DFDnt
 
 284 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 dignitary, D'GTR 
 dilapidale-ion, DIP 
 dilemma, DIM 
 diligent, DUnt 
 dilute, D 3 Lt 
 dilution, D 3 Lshn 
 diocese, DSs 
 diphthong, DfThXg 
 diplomat-ic, DPIMt 
 direct, DrKt 
 direction, Drshn 
 directory, DrTr 
 dirt, DRt 
 disadvantage, DsJ 
 disagree, DVGr 
 disappear, Ds*Pr ? 
 disappointment, DsPtMnt 
 disapprove-al, Ds 3 Prf 
 disarm, Ds 3 RM 
 disarmament, Ds'RMMnt 
 disaster, DsZtr 
 disasters-ous, DsZtrs 
 discourage, D-s-KrJ 
 discourse, DsKrs 
 discourteous, DsKrTs 
 disco ver-y, DsKf 
 discredit, D.s-KrDt 
 discreet, DsKrt 
 discrepant, D-s-KrPnt 
 discursive, D-sKrsV 
 disease, Dss 1 or DsZ 
 diseased, DssD or DsZt 
 disfranchise, D.sFrnCs 
 disfurnish, D-sFrnSh 
 disgorge, D.sOrJ 
 disgrace, D*Grs 
 
 dishearten, Ds-hlvtX or 
 
 DsRtN 
 
 dished, D'Sht 
 dishevel, DShVl 
 disinterested-ness. DsNts- 
 
 Tt 
 
 dismember, DsBr 
 disorganization, Ds 1 - 
 
 Gnsshn 
 
 disorganize, Ds^ns 
 disparage, DsPrJ 
 displeasure, DsZhr 
 disprove-al, DsPrf 
 disrespect, DsRsP 
 disrespectful, DsRsPf 
 dissatisfaction, D 3 sTsshn 
 dissatisfy, D 3 sT 
 dissever, DVr 
 dissimilarity, DsMLrt 
 dissimilar-ly, DsM 
 dissuade, DsD 
 dissuasion, 'Dsskn 
 dissuasive, DssV 
 distemper, DsTMpr 
 distincti ve-ly Ds^V 
 distinctiveness, Dst u .Vs 
 distinctness, Dst 1 Xs 
 distinguish, DstNg 
 distraction, Ds 3 Trshn 
 distribute, DsTrBt 
 district, DsTrKt 
 district attorney, DsTrX 
 District of Columbia, 
 
 DsKl 
 District of Columbian, 
 
 DsKln 
 district court, DsKt
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 285 
 
 disturb, DstrB 
 disuse, Ds 3 S 
 divers, DfRs 
 diverse, DVrs 
 divert, DVrt 
 divide, D'Vt 
 dividend, D'VDnt 
 divider, D a Vtr 
 divination, DWXshn 
 diviner, Df'R 
 diviniest, D^St 
 divinity, D'Vnt or I) 1 - 
 
 <Vnt 
 
 divinely, Df*L or Df'.L 
 divorce, DVrs 
 dolorous, DLRs 
 domestic, DMsK 
 dominion, DMnN 
 donate, DXT 
 Donohue, DX 
 door, DR 
 dot, Dt 1 
 dotage, DtJ 
 dote, Dt 
 
 downcast, Dn 3 Kst 
 downfall, Dn 3 FZ or D 3 F1 
 downfallen, D 3 FLn or D 3 - 
 
 Fln 
 
 downhearted, D 3 Rt 
 downright, D 3 lS T rt 
 downstairs, Dnstrs 3 
 downtrod-den, D 3 Trt 
 downward, Dn 3 Wt or D 3 - 
 
 dreadnaught, DrtXt 
 drum-head, DrMD 
 dutiful, D 3 Tf 
 
 dutifulness, I) 3 TfXs 
 duty, D 3 T 
 dyspepsia-tic, DsPP 
 dweller, DwK, 
 dwelling-house, DwS 
 dwelling-place, DwPls 
 
 E 
 
 earl-y, RL 
 earlier, RLr 
 earliest, RLst 
 earnest, R J Xst 
 earnestly, R 
 earnestness, 
 earth, RTh 
 earthly, RThL 
 Easter-day, Sti^D 
 eastward, St^Rtor St 1 - 
 
 Rt 
 
 eccentrical, KsXtrKl 
 eccentricity, KsNtrst 
 economic-y, KnM 
 editorial, DtRl 
 efficacious-ly-ness, FKuShs 
 efficience, Fshns 1 
 efficiency, F u .Sh 
 efficient-ly, Fshnt 1 
 eheu, e-nY 3 
 Eichenbaum, KnBM 
 eight, 8 
 elastic, LsK 
 elastical, ZsKl 
 elasticity, LsTst 
 elbow, LBo 
 Eldorado, LDrD 
 eleven, 11 
 elector, LKtr
 
 280 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MAXC.U. 
 
 electric, LK 
 electrical, LKK1 
 electrician, LKShn 
 electricity, LKTrst 
 electrify, LKF 
 elegance, LGns 
 Elegancy, LiG 
 elegant, LGNt 
 elegantly, LGNtZ * 
 elemental, LMntL or'LMt- 
 
 L 
 
 elementary, LMntR 
 elephant, LFnt 
 elevator, LVtr 
 Elihn, Linr or LnY 
 Ellsworth, LsKTh 
 elongate, Xg J Gt 
 elongation, Ng'Gshn 
 eloquent, LKwnt 
 elsewhere, LsR 
 embank, MpXgK 
 embankment, MpXgKMnt 
 embark, MpRK 
 embarrass, MpRs 
 embellish, MpLSh 
 ember, ]\Ipr 
 emblazon, MBlsN 
 emblem, MB1M 
 emblement, MplMnt 
 em I )odimentj MpD ' Mnt 
 embody, MpD 1 
 emboss, Mps 1 
 embossed, Mpst 1 
 emerge, Mr 1 ,! 
 emigrate, MGrt 
 empanel, MpXl 
 emperor, MprR 
 
 emphatic, MFt 
 empiric, Mpr'K 
 empirical, Mpr'Kl 
 empiricism, Mpi^ssM 
 employ-ee, MP1 
 employer, MP1R 
 empress, MPrs 
 emj)tion, Mpshn 
 empty, MpT 
 enclosure, NKlsR 
 encumber, N'.Br 
 endeavor, NtVr 
 endless, Nt-Zs 
 endlessly, XtZsZ 
 endorse, XDrs 
 endorsee, NDrS 
 endorser, XDrsR 
 energy, NrJ 
 English, Ngl 1 or Ng 1 
 Englishman, XglMn 1 or 
 
 Ng'Mn 
 Englishmen, Ngln 1 or 
 
 Xgn ] 
 
 enhance, Xns 
 enhanced, XXst 
 enhancement, NNsMnt 
 enlace, Xls or XLs 
 enlacement, XlsMnt or 
 
 XLsMnt 
 enlard, 'X T Lrt 3 
 enlarge, X'.P 
 enlighten, XlTn 
 enlightenment, X'lTMnt 
 enlink, XPX'gK 
 enlist, Xlst 1 or XLst 1 
 enlistment, Xls 1 Mnt, Xls- 
 
 T 1 Mnt or XLs 'Mnt
 
 THE PHONiHiKAPIlir MANl AL. 
 
 enliven, IS'lYn 
 enlivener, MVnR 
 enrage, NRJ 
 Knriffht, Nrt 1 , NrT or N- 
 
 Rt 
 
 enrole, NR1 
 enslave, nsLV 
 ensnare, NsNR 
 entangle, NtNgl 
 en'terance, Ntrns (See 
 
 en'trance ) 
 enterprise, NtPrs 
 entertain, NtTn 
 entertainment, NtTmnt 
 enthusiasm, NThss 3 or X- 
 
 ThZsM 
 enthusiast. XThss 3 T or N- 
 
 Th Zst 
 enthusiastic-al, NThss 3 N- 
 
 Thss 3 K or NThZsK 
 en'trance, JS'Trns (This 
 
 \vord should be spelled and 
 
 pronounced en'terance. 
 
 See en'terance above.) 
 
 entrance', NTrns 
 entwine, NTwri 1 
 entwist, NTwst 1 
 enunciate, NNSht 
 envelope, TsVP 
 episcopalian, PsKn 
 episcopalianism, PsKnsM 
 e[)itaph, PtF 
 epitome, Pt J M 
 equality, KIT 1 
 
 c(]iialize, Kls 1 
 equalized, Klst 1 
 equanimity, K \vnMT 
 
 e<iuity, KwT 
 
 equivalence, KwV 
 
 erroneous, RNs 
 
 erfoneously, RNsZ 
 
 error, RR 
 
 erysipelas, RsPLs 
 
 escheat, SOT 
 
 escheator, SCtr 
 
 eschew, S 3 C 
 
 essay, 8 
 
 essayed, SD 
 
 essay er, SR 
 
 essayist, Sst 
 
 estate, 8Tt 
 
 esteem, S^AI 
 
 esthete, 8 ir riit 
 
 esthetic, SThtiK 
 i esthetical, SThtKl 
 ; estimate, StMt 
 
 estop, St 1 !* 
 i estrange-ment, STrn 
 j Ethiop-ia, ThP 
 
 Ethiopian, ThPn 
 
 euchre, YKr 
 
 Euclid, YKlt 
 
 Euclidian, YKltN 
 
 Eugene, YJn 
 
 eulogium, YUM 
 
 eulogy, Y1J 
 
 eupepsy, Y-PPS 
 
 euphony, Y-F 3 N 
 
 Euphrates, FrTs or F-Fr 
 Ts 
 
 euphuism, y-F* 3 M 
 
 eureka, yRK or YRK 
 
 Europe, //RP 
 ! European, //RPn
 
 288 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL 
 
 eustachian, Yst Kn 
 Euterpe, y-TRP 
 Euterpean, Y-TRPn 
 euthanasia, Y-ThNZ 
 evangelic, J1 3 K 
 evangelical, J1 3 K1 
 everlasting, V J Lst 
 everlastingly, V 1 LsL 
 evermore, V 1 Mr 
 everybody, VrBt 
 everyday, VrD 
 everyone, Vrn 
 everything, VrNg 
 everywhere, Vrnw?R 
 evidence, VtNs 
 evident, VtNt 
 evolve, V1V 
 ewe, Y 3 (See weigh.) 
 ewer, Y 3 R (See weigher. ) 
 exacerbate, GssRBt 
 exact, sKt 3 
 exacter, sKtr 3 
 exaction, sKshn 3 
 exactitude, sKt 3 Tt 
 exactly, sKt 3 L 
 exactness, sKt 3 Ns 
 examinable, sMn 3 B 
 examination, sM 3 Nshn 
 examinee, sM 3 N 
 examiner, sMn 3 R 
 exasperate, GssPRT 
 exchequer, KsC 
 execute, KsKt 
 executer, KsKtr 
 execution, KsKshn 
 executioner, KsKshnR 
 executive, GsKf 
 
 executor, GsKtrorGsK 
 executrix, GsKKs 
 exempt, GsMpt 
 exemption, GsMpshn 
 exercise, KsRss 
 exercised, KsRssD 
 Exeter, KsTr 
 exhale, KsL 
 exhaust, GssT 1 
 exhibit, GsBt 1 
 exhort, GsRt 1 
 exhume, Gs 3 M 
 exist, GssT 
 exonerate, Gs^rt or Gs 
 
 NRt 1 
 exoneration, Gs 1 Nrshn or 
 
 GsNRshn 1 
 exonerative, Gs'XrtV or 
 
 GsNRt'V 
 exonerator, Gs^'rtr or 
 
 GsXRtr 1 
 exorcise, KsRss 1 
 exorcised, KsRss 1 D 
 expediency, KsP'.D 
 experiment, sPrMnt 
 expert, KsPrt 
 explicable, sPlKBl 
 explicit, sPlsT 
 exploit, KsPlt 1 
 exploitation, KsPPTshn 
 explore, sPIR 
 expressage, sPrsJ 
 exquisite, sKwsT , 
 extemporaneous-ly, KsT- 
 
 Mp 
 
 extemporary, KsTMpK 11 
 extempore, KsTMpR
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 289 
 
 extemporise, KsTMpRs 
 exterminate, sTrMXt 
 extermination, sTrMXshn 
 exterminator, sTrMXtr 
 exterminatory, sTrMXtR 
 extinct-ness, KsTXgKt 
 extinction, KsTXgshn 
 extinguish, KsTXg 
 extinguishable, KsTXgB 
 extinguisher, KsTXgR 
 extra, KsTr 
 extraction, sTrshn 3 
 extractor, sTrtr 3 
 extraordinary-ly, 
 extravagance, sTrfGns 
 extravagancy, sTrfGnS 
 extravagant-ly, sTrfGnt 
 extravagantness, sTrfGnt- 
 
 Ns 
 
 extravaganza, sTrfGnZ 
 extreme, sTrM 
 extrinsic, sTrsK 
 extrinsical, sTrsKl 
 eyed, 1-D 1 
 eyeing, I- 1 or Xg 1 
 eyes, is 1 
 eyesight, 1-sT 1 
 eye-witness, l-Wt 1 Xs or 
 
 I-T'Xs 
 
 facer, FsR 
 facetious, FsSh or 
 facetiously, FsSh or Fs- 
 
 ShsL* 
 facetiousness, Fs&Aor Fs- 
 
 facile, FsZ 
 
 "facility, FsZt or F*LT 
 factory, FKTr 
 Fahrenheit, FRnT or F 
 failure, FLR 
 falchion, Flshn, 1 
 
 or FICn 
 falter, Fltr 1 
 family, FM1 
 Farwell, 
 farewell, 
 Farmington, F^MXgt 
 farthing, FrThNg 
 farther, Frtr 3 
 Fashoda, 
 Fashoon, 
 fastidious, FsTD 
 fastness, Fs 3 Xs 
 fatal, FtZ 
 fatalism, FtLsM 
 fatalist, FtLst 
 father-in-law, Ftrn a L 
 fault, Fit 1 
 faultily, FPTL 
 faultiness, FPTNs 
 faultless, Flt J Ls 
 faultlessly, Flt J LsL 
 faulty, FI J T 
 favor, FVr 
 favorable, FVrB 
 favoritism, FVrTsM 
 February, FB 
 federal, FtrZ 
 federalism, FtrLsM 
 federalist, FtrLst 
 federate, FtrT 
 federation, Ftrshn
 
 Till: I'tlOXOORAl'IlIC MAXl'AL. 
 
 federative, FtrTf 
 feesimple, F'.sMpL 
 feller, FLr or FLK 
 female, FML 
 fencer, FnsR 
 fern, FRn or F72n 
 fern-leaf, FRnLF or 
 
 LF 
 
 ferrule, FR1 
 fettle, FtZ 
 fiasco, F 3 sK 
 fiddle, Ft'Z 
 fiddler, Ft'Zr 
 fidelity, FDlt 
 Filipino, F1PN 
 filter, Fltr 1 
 filler, Fl'R 
 finance, FnNs 
 financial, FnN 
 financier, FnNsR 
 finish, FnSh 
 finite, F'Nt 
 firm, F72M or FrM 
 firmament, F^MMnt or 
 
 FrMMnt 
 firmamental, F^?MMntL 
 
 or FrMMntL 
 firman, F7?Mn or FrMn 
 firmer, F^Mr or FrMr 
 firmest, F7?Mst or FrMst 
 firmly, F/?ML or FrML 
 firmness, F7?MNs or Fr.M- 
 
 Ns 
 
 firstborn, FrsBRn 
 first-day, FrsD 
 first-fruits, FrsFrts 
 first-hand, FrsNt 
 
 firstling, FrsLXir 
 firstly, FrsL 
 first-rate, FrsRt 
 first-thing, FrsXg 
 first-time, FrsT 
 fiscal, FsKL 
 fish-y, YSk 
 fished, F'Sht 
 fisher-y, F'Shr 
 fisherman-men, F^hrnor 
 
 F^hrMn 
 fish-glue, F'SAGl 
 tishhawk, F^'AK 
 fishhook, F 3 xS7*K 
 fishiest, F S 
 fishiness,F 1 
 fishing-line, F'X/, % Ln 
 fish-joint, F'AV/Jnt 
 fish-kettle, . 
 fish-line, F 
 fishman-men, F'Shnor F 1 - 
 
 ShMn 
 
 fish-market, F^V/MrKt 
 fish-monger, F'ShMNgr 
 fish-shop, F^^AShP 
 fish-trowel, F^hTrL 
 fishwife, F 1 ^AF or WF 
 fishwives, F^AVs or }Y- 
 
 Vs 
 fishwoman-men, F J >S/m or 
 
 F^'/AVMn 
 
 Fitzhugh, FtsnY or FtS 
 five, 5 
 
 flambeau, FIMp 
 flash-house, FLS'AS 
 flashily, F1SA1
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 U91 
 
 flash-light, FltfALt or Fl- 
 
 ShLt 
 
 Florida, F^D 
 Floridan, FPDn 
 florin, FIRn 
 Hurry, FIR 
 flush-board, FIShBrt 
 flushest, FlAst 
 Fohi, Foni or F 
 fold, FZt 
 folder, FLtr 
 folio, FL 
 
 follower, F1*R or F'LR 
 foothold, Ft 3 hLt 
 footsoldier, Ft 3 *LJr 
 footsore, Ft 3 sR 
 footstep, Ft 3 sTP 
 footstool, Ft'sTL 
 forage, FRJ 
 forager, FRJr 
 forced, FJ?st 
 forceful, FJ2sF 
 forcible, F7?sB 
 forcibleness, F7?sBns 
 ford, FRt 
 fore, FT? 
 foreign, FRn 
 foreigner, FRnR 
 forever, FV 
 foretell, 
 forewarn, 
 forfeit, F'Ft 
 forfeiture, F 
 forgave, FrGf 
 forge, F*J 
 forger, F^r 
 forgery, FUR 
 
 forget, FrGt 
 forgive, FrG 
 forgot, FrGt 
 formal, F J M1 
 formality, F J Mlt 
 formalism, F 1 MlsM 
 formalist, F 1 Mlst 
 former, 
 formerly, 
 fort, FRt 
 forth, FRTh 
 forthwith, FRThDh 
 fortune-ate-ly, F J Rt 
 forum, FRM 
 fouler, F 3 Lror F 3 LR 
 fountain, FntX 
 four, 4 
 
 fowler, F 3 Lr or F 3 LR 
 Franklin, Fr 3 Kln 
 frantical, Frt 3 Kl 
 fraud, Frt 3 
 fraudulent, Frt J Lnt 
 fraternal, FrtrL 
 fraternity, FrtrnT 
 fraternize, FrtrNs 
 freedom, Frt 1 M 
 freeheart, FrUit 
 Frelinghuysen, FrLNgZn 
 frequency, FrKn 
 frequent, FrKnt 
 freshen, FrShN, Frshn or 
 
 FrShn 
 
 fresher, FrShr 
 freshet, FrShT 
 freshly, FrShl 
 Friday, FrD 
 friendly, Frnt^L
 
 THE PHOXo<;l;.U UK' MANUAL. 
 
 friendship, FrntSh 
 frontispiece, FrntsP 
 fruition, Fr 3 Shn or 
 
 Frshn 3 
 
 Fuente, FwnT 
 Fuerte, FwRT 
 fulfill, F1F1 
 fuller, FIR 
 fulsome, FlsM 
 fulsomely, FlsML 
 fumble, FMpl 
 function, FNgshn 
 functional, FXgshnL 
 functionary, FNgshnR 
 fundamental, FntMntL 
 furnish, FrnSh 
 furnisher, FrnShR 
 furniture, FrNtr 
 furthermore, FrtrMr 
 furtive, FrTf 
 furtively, FrTVl 
 fusil, Fs 3 Z 
 fusileer, Fs 3 LR 
 fusillade, Fs 3 LD 
 futurity, Ftr 3 T 
 
 G 
 
 gag, G 3 G 
 gainsaid, GnsD 
 galaxy, G1KS or GLKS 
 gambit, G 3 Mpt 
 gamboge, GMpJ 
 gambol, GMB1 or GMpl 
 garrulity, GRlt 
 garrulous, GRls 
 gaseous, GSs 3 or Gss 3 
 razette, GsT 
 
 Gehenna, GN 
 gendarme, ZhtRM 
 genteel, JnTL 
 gentile, JnTL 
 gentility, JTlt 
 gentle, JtL or JntiL 
 gentlemanly, Jnt'.L 
 gentleness, JtLNs or Jnt- 
 
 iLNs 
 
 geography-ic-al, J X G 
 geographer, J a Gr 
 geologer, JUr 
 geological, JUKI 
 geologist, JUst 
 geologize, JUs 
 geology, J1J 
 geometer, JMtr 
 geometrician, JMtrshn 
 geometry, JMtR 
 George-ia, JrJ 
 Georgian, JrJn 
 gerrymander, JrMntR 
 gesticulate, JsTKlt 
 gesture, JsTr 
 Gethsemane, GTh*MN 
 giraffe, JRf 
 Girard, JRRD 
 girder, Grtr 
 glimpse, GPMps 
 glorification, GIFshn 
 glorified, GIFt 
 glorify, GIF 
 governor, GfR 
 greater, Grtr or GrtR 
 Great Britain, Grt 2 Brt 
 Greenwich, GrnC 
 grindstone, GrntsTn
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 293 
 
 gunsmith, GnsMTH 
 gunwale, GnL 
 
 H 
 
 habeas corpus, BsK or 
 
 BsKPa 
 habit, Bt 3 
 habitant, B 3 Tnt 
 habitual, Bt 3 L 
 hacienda, ThND 
 halfway, F 3 W 
 halt, hLt 1 
 halter, hLtr 1 
 halyard, hlYrt 
 Hamlet, hMLt 3 
 hamper, Mpr 3 
 Hampton, hMptN 
 handle, NtZ 3 
 handsome, Nt 3 sM 
 handwriting, NtRt 3 or 
 
 Nrt 3 
 
 handy, ND 3 
 hang, Ng 3 
 hanger, Ngr 3 
 hanger-on, Ngrn 3 
 hanker, Ng 3 Kr 
 hap, P 3 
 haphazard, P 3 ZRc or P 3 - 
 
 sRt 
 
 hapless, P 3 Ls 
 haply, P 3 L 
 happier, P 3 R 
 happily, P 3 L 
 happiness, P 3 N& 
 harangue, hR 3 N<.; 
 harbinger, hRBnJR 
 harbor, hRBr or RBr 
 
 hard, hRt 3 
 
 harder, hRtr 3 
 
 hardware, hRt 3 ?/'R 
 
 harlequin, hRLKn 
 
 Harold, ARlt 3 or hR 3 Lt 
 
 harm, hR 3 M 
 
 harp, hR 3 P 
 
 harpsichord, hR 3 PsKrt 
 
 hart, hRt 3 
 
 Hartford, hRtFrt 
 
 hasp, hS 3 P 
 
 hast, hSt 3 
 
 haste, hSt 
 
 hasten, hSn 
 
 hateful, ATF1 or ATf 
 
 hautboy, AoB 1 
 
 haw, HO 
 
 Hawaii, hW'orhWl 1 
 
 hawing, HO- 
 
 hawings, no 
 
 haw-haw, HO'. HO 
 
 hawthorn, hThn^or ATH- 
 
 Rn 
 
 Hay wood, h Tft 3 
 hazard, Z 3 Rt 
 hazardous, Z 3 RDs 
 head, AD 
 hear-re, hR 1 
 hearer, hR!R 
 heart, hRt 3 
 hearth, hR 3 Th 
 heather-y, hDhr 
 heaver, AV 1 ^ 
 heavier, AV7? 
 heighho, HIHO 
 heinous, ANs 
 heinously, ANsZ
 
 294 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 heinousness, ANsNs 
 held, hLt 
 heliogram, hL^fG 
 heliograph- y-ic-al, hL'G 
 heliographer, hl/Gr 
 heliographist, hl/Gst 
 hemisphere, hMsFr 
 hen, AN 
 
 henceforth, NsFRTH 
 henceforward, NsFwRt 
 Henry, Nr or hNr 
 herald, ARlt or hRLt 
 heraldic, ARltK or hR- 
 
 Lt<K 
 heraldry, hRltiR or hR- 
 
 LtR 
 
 here, hR 1 
 hereabout, bJR^Bt 
 hereafter, hR'Ft 
 hereat, hRt 1 
 hereby, hR 1 ^ 
 herein, hR a N 
 hereinafter, hR a NFt 
 hereinbefore, 
 hereinto, 
 hereof, hRf 1 or 
 hereon, hRn 1 
 hereto, hR 1 T 
 heretofore, 
 hereunto, 
 hereupon, hR^n 
 herewith, hR a Dh 
 heritage, hRtJ 
 Hesoid, hS^ 
 hesitate, ZTt 
 hesitancy, ZTnS 
 hew, nY 3 (See whey.) 
 
 hewed, nTt 3 (See white.) 
 
 hewer, nY 3 R (See weigh- 
 er.) 
 
 Hewitt, HY-T 3 
 
 hewn, nYn 3 (See whine.) 
 
 hey-day, AaD 
 
 hiatus, />aTs 
 
 Hiawatha, hW'Th 
 
 hied, Hl-D 1 
 
 hieroglyph, hRGlf 
 
 hies, His 1 
 
 high-born, m-BRn 
 
 high-bred, Hl-Brt 
 
 highland, hLnt 1 or m- 
 Lnt 1 
 
 Highlander, hLnt'R or Hl- 
 Lnt J R 
 
 hight, AT 1 
 
 highten, ATn 1 
 
 hightened, ATnt 1 
 
 highwayman, m-WMn 
 
 highwaymen, Hl-W 1 Mn 
 
 high wrought, Hi-Rt 1 
 
 Hillerman, ALr J Mn or 
 Lr^Mn 
 
 hindmost, Nt 1 Mst 
 
 Hines, ANs 1 
 
 history, St J R 
 
 historian, St a Rn 
 
 hither, Dhr 1 
 
 hitherto, Dhr'T 
 
 hither ward, Dhr J Rt 
 
 hive, AV 1 
 
 hoed, AD or HoD 
 
 hoeing, HO -or ANg 
 
 hoes, HOS or hZ 
 
 hoho, HoiHO
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 295 
 
 hold, hLt 
 holder, hLtr 
 Holland, hLnt 1 
 holster, hLstr 
 holy, hL 
 home, hM 
 homely, hML 
 homemade, hMMt 
 homeopathy, MpTh 
 Homer, Mi- 
 Homeric, MrK 
 homesick, hMsK 
 homespun, hM 2 sPn 
 homestead, hM 2 sTt 
 homeward, hM/'-Rt 
 homicide, Ms I) 
 honestly, Nst J L or Ns J Z 
 hone, AN 
 hong, 7/Ng 1 
 Honolulu, NLL 
 honorable-y, NrBl 1 
 honorary, NrR 1 
 hoodwink, AD 3 WNgK 
 hopefulness, Pf 3 Ns 
 Horace, hRs 1 
 horal, hRL or AH1 
 horary, hRR 
 horde, hRt 
 
 horologe-y, hRLJ or AR1J 
 hospitable, SPtBl 
 hospital, SPtL 
 hospitality, SPtLT 
 host, hSt 
 hostile-ly, St 1 !^ 
 hostility, St'LT 
 house, hS 3 or S 3 
 household, hS 3 Lt or S 3 Lt 
 
 householder, hS 3 Ltr or 
 
 S 3 Ltr 
 housekeeper, hS 3 KPr or 
 
 S 3 KPr 
 
 houses, hZs 3 or Zs 3 
 Howard, hRt 3 
 howbeit, AB 3 T 
 Howe, HoiZ 
 
 Howes, (pi. of Howe), Ho?7s 
 Howel, hL 3 
 howitzer, ATsR 
 hows, (pi. of how), Ho>7Z :i 
 howsoever, A 3 sVorno^sV 
 hoy, HOI 
 
 Hoyer, ky~R l or H^/R 1 
 Hubert, HYBrt or er-Brt 3 
 
 (See huge.) 
 hue, H S (See hew. ) 
 hued, nTt 3 (See hewed.) 
 huff-y, AF 
 huffish, 7<FA 
 huffishly 
 huffishness, 
 huge, nY 3 J or HY-J 3 CSee 
 
 Whedge. ) 
 hugely, nY 3 Jl or HY-J 3 L 
 
 (See Whedge.) 
 Hugh, hY 3 
 huh, HU 
 
 human, Mn 3 or nY 3 Mn 
 humanity, nY 3 Mnt 
 humane, nYMn 
 humanely, nYMnL 
 humanize, M 3 Xs or nY ; - 
 
 MXs 
 Hume, HY 3 M (Sec \vhiin.;
 
 296 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 humid, HY 3 Mt or r-Mt 3 
 
 (See huge.) 
 humidity, nY 3 '.Mt or 
 
 r-MtT 3 (See huge.) 
 humiliate, nY 3 MLt or 
 
 r-MLt 3 (See huge.) 
 humiliation, HY 3 MLShn 
 
 or F-MLShn 3 (See 
 
 huge.) 
 humility, nY 3 MLt or 
 
 r-MLT 3 (See huge.) 
 humpback, hMpBK 
 Hun, N, AN or nu-N 
 hundred-weight, NtWt 
 hung, Ng, 
 
 Hungarian, Ngrn or NgRn 
 Hungary, Ngr or NgR 
 hunt, Nt 
 hunter, Ntr 
 
 huntress, NtRs or NTrs 
 huntsman, NtsMn 
 Huron, nYRn or m/Rn 3 
 
 (See Wharren.) 
 hurl, HRL 
 hurricane, h'RKn 
 hussar, hZ 3 R 
 hustings, hStNgs 
 hustle, hSL 
 hustler, hSLR 
 hyacinth, SnTh 
 hyacinthine, SnThn 
 hying, (see hie), Hi- 1 or 
 
 ANg 1 
 
 hypothecate, FThKt 
 hypothecation, PThKshn 
 
 LESSON 36. 
 
 icicle, I-S'Kl 
 Idaho, I-D 1 
 Idahoan, 1-Dn 1 
 identical, Dt a Kl 
 idlest, Dlst 1 
 idolatry, DPTr 
 ignorant, G J Nrnt 
 illegible, L 
 illegitimate, 
 illiberal, L'BrL 
 Illinoi L J N 
 Illinoian, L ] Nn 
 Illinois, L a Ns 
 Illinoisan, L J NsN 
 imbecile, MBsL 
 imbue, Mp 3 
 imitate, MTt 1 
 imitation, MTshn 
 imitative, MTTf 
 imitator, MTtr 
 immeasurable, MZhi^Bl 
 immigrant, IVPGrnt 
 immigrate, iM 1 Grt 
 immobile, MB1 1 
 immobility, MBit 1 
 impact, Mp 3 Kt 
 impair, MpR 
 impale, MpL 
 impanel, MpNl 
 impart, Mprt 3 
 imparter, Mprtr 3 
 impartial, MPrShl 
 impassion, Mpshn 3 
 impeach, MpC 1
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 297 
 
 impede, Mpt 1 
 irnpeder, Mptr 1 
 impediment, MptMnt 
 impel, MpL 
 impend, Mpnt 
 impenetrability, MpntRBlt 
 
 or Mpnt 
 impenetrable, MpntRBl or 
 
 Mpnt 
 
 impenetrableness, MpntR- 
 Bl ns or Mpnt 
 imperative, MprtV 
 imperatively, MprtVl 
 imperatorial , Mprtr ' L 
 imperatorian, Mprtr 'N 
 imperfect-ion, MPrf 1 
 imperial, Mpi !l L 
 imperialism, Mpr J LsM 
 imperialist, Mpr'Lst 
 imperious, Mpr'S 
 imperiously, Mpr 1 S L 
 imperil, MpRl 
 impersonal, MPrsNl 
 imperturbation, MPrtr- 
 
 Bshn 
 imperturbability, MPrtr- 
 
 Bt 
 
 imperturbable, MPrtrB 
 impetus-ous, MpTs 
 imponderability, MpNtr- 
 
 Blt 
 
 imponderable, MpNtrBl 
 imponderableness, MpNtr- 
 
 Blns 
 
 i ni ponderous, Mp ' Mrs 
 imponderousness, Mp 1 - 
 
 NtrsNs 
 
 import, Mprt 1 
 importer, Mprtr 1 
 importune, MpRtN 
 impose, Mps 
 impost, Mpst 
 imposter, Mpstr 1 
 imposture, MpsTr 
 impound, Mpnt 3 
 impracticable, MPrK 
 impractical, MPr 3 
 impregnable-ate-ion, M- 
 
 PrG 
 
 improbable, MPrB 
 impugn, Mpn 3 
 impulse, MpLs 
 impunity, MpnT 3 or Mi- 
 
 Pnt 
 
 imputation, MpTshn 
 inalienable, NLnB 
 inarticulate, NrTKlt or 
 
 NRTKlt 
 inartificial, NrtFxSAl or 
 
 NRtF^Al 
 inasmuch, NsC 3 
 incandescent, N'DsNt 
 incanescent, NKNsNt 
 incantation, N'Tshn 
 incapable, NKB1 
 incentive, NsNtV 
 inception, NsPshn 
 inceptor, NsPtr 
 incident-al, NsDnt 
 incessant, NssNt 
 income, N 1 K or N J KM 
 inconsistence, NssTns 1 
 inconsistencies, NssTnss 
 inconsistency, NssTn 1
 
 298 
 
 THE PHOXOtiKAPHIC MAXTAI.. 
 
 inconsistent-ly NssTnt 1 
 indeed, NDt 1 
 indefatigable, NtFt 1 
 indenture, NtNtr 
 independency, NtPiD or 
 
 NtPniD 
 
 indescribable, NtsKBl 
 index, Nt*Ks 
 India, ND J 
 Indian, Nt'N 
 Indiana, Nt J N 
 Indianan, Nt J Nn 
 Indianapolis, N^NPls 
 Indian Territory, Nt*N- 
 
 TEt 
 
 indication, Nt J Kshn 
 indict, NtT 1 
 indictable, NtT'Bl 
 indictment, NtT 1 Mnt 
 indifference-ent-ly, NDf 
 indigent, NtJnt 1 
 indignant^ly-ty, Nt*G 
 indignation, ISVGshn 
 individuality, NtVLT or 
 
 NtMVt 
 
 indivisible, NtVsBl 
 induce, NDs 
 induction, NDKshn 
 indulge, NtZJ 
 indulged, NtZJt 
 indulgence, NtZJns 
 indulgency, NtZ'.J 
 indulgent-ly, NtZJnt 
 indulger, NtZJr 
 inefficacious-ly-ness, NF- 
 
 KaShs 
 inefficient-ly, NFshnt 1 
 
 inelastic, NlsK or XlsTK 
 inelasticity, NlsTst 
 infant, NFnt 
 
 infectious-ly-ness,IS"FK8hs 
 infer, NF^ 
 inferable, NFRB1 
 inference, NFRns 
 inferences, NFRnss 
 inferential, NFRn 
 inferior, NFRR 
 infernal, NFrXl 
 intinite-ly, XFnt 1 or 
 
 infinitude, NFn'Tt' 
 infinity, KFnt 1 or X^Fnl 
 infinitessimal, NFn'TsM 
 inform, NF 1 
 informal, NF'Ml 
 informality, NF'Mlt 
 informer, NF J Mr 
 ingle, Ngl 1 
 inhabit, NBt ! 
 inhabitant, NB 3 Tnt 
 inhale, NhL 
 inhere, NhR 1 
 inherent, NhRnt 1 
 inherently, NhRnt 1 L 
 inherit, NrT or NhRT 
 inhibit, NBt 1 
 iniquitous, NKwTs 
 iniquity, NKwT 
 initial, N^/il 
 injunction, NJNgshn 
 injure-y, NJr 
 ink-y, Ng ! K v 
 I nk e r man , Nir 1 K rMn 
 inkle, Ng J Kl
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 299 
 
 inlace, Nls or NLs 
 inlaid, Nit or NLt 
 inland, Nlnt or NLnt 
 inlander, NlntRorNLntR 
 inlay, Nl or NL 
 inlayer, Nlr or NLR 
 inlet, Nit or NLt 
 inly, NZ 1 
 
 innermost, iNi^Mst 
 inning, N J Ng 
 innovation, NVshn 1 
 innumerable, NMrBl 1 
 inordinate, Nrt*Nt 
 inquire-y, N J Kw 
 inroad, NrD or NRt 
 insatiability, nsShBt 
 insatiable, nsShB 
 insatiableness, nsShBns 
 insecurity, nsKrT 3 
 inseparable, nsPr 3 Bl 
 insignificance, N*sGns 
 insignificant, N*sG 
 insist, NssT 1 
 insistence, NssTns 1 
 insistent, NssTnt 1 
 insnare, NsNR 1 
 inspect, NsPKt 
 inspection, NsPKshn or 
 
 NsPshn 
 inspector, NsPKtr or Ns- 
 
 Ptr 
 
 inspiration, nsPrshn 1 
 inspire, nsPr 1 
 inst. (for instant), Nst 1 
 instant, NsTnt 
 instantly, NsTtL, NsTnt 
 
 or NsTntiL 
 
 instead, NsTt 
 instinct-ive-ly, NsTNg 
 institute, NsTt 1 
 institution, NsTshn 1 
 institutive, NsTTf 
 institutor, NsT'Ttr 
 instrument, nsTrMnt 
 instrumental, nsTrMntL 
 instrumentality, nsTriMnt 
 insubordinate, NsB 1 
 insubordination, NsBshn 1 
 insufferable, nsFrBl 
 insufficiency, NsFshnS 
 insufficient-ly, NsFshnt 
 insuperable, nsPrBl 
 insurance, NShrns 
 insure, NShr 
 insurrection, NsRshn 
 intangible-ness, NTnJ 
 integrity, NtGrT 
 intellectuality, NtZ 1 LT or 
 
 NtZ^Tlt 
 intend-t, NtNt 
 intention, NtNshn 
 intercede, NtsD 
 intercept-eel, NtsPt 
 intercession, NtssA?& 
 intercessor, NtSsR 
 interfere, NtF,ff 
 interference, NtFRns 
 interim, Ntr 1 M 
 intermit, NtMMt 
 intermittent, NtMMTnt 
 intermission, Nt 1 tMshn 
 inter-ocean, Ntrshn 1 
 inter-oceanic, Ntrshn 1 K 
 ; ntern-e, Ntrn 1
 
 300 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 interplead, NtPlt 
 interpleader, NtPltr 
 interpolate, NtPLt 
 interpret, NtPrt 
 interpreter, NtPrtr 
 interrogate-ory, NtGt 
 interrogation, NtGshn 
 interrogative, NtGtV 
 interrogatively, NtGtVl 
 interrogator, NtGtr 
 inter-state, NtistT 
 intertwine, NttTwn 1 
 intervene, NtVn 
 interview, NtV 3 
 intestate, NTsTt 
 intimate, Nt J Mt 
 intimation, Nt 1 Mshn 
 intimidate-ion, NT 1 Mt 
 into, NT 
 intolerable, NtLrBl or 
 
 NT1RB1 
 
 intolerance, NtLrns 
 intolerant, JS T tLrnt 
 intoleration, NtLrshn 
 intrench, NTrnC 
 intrepid, NTrPt or NtrPt 
 intrepidity, NTr'.Pt or 
 
 NtriPt 
 
 intricate, Ntr*Kt 
 intrigue, Ntr*G 
 intriguer, Ntr 1 Gr 
 intrinsic, Ntrs 1 K or 
 
 NTraK 
 intrinsical, NTrs^l or 
 
 NTrsKl 
 
 introduce, NtDs 
 introduction, KtDshn 
 
 introspection, NtsPKshn 
 
 or NtsPshn 
 introvert, NtVrt 
 intuition, NTshn 
 intuitional, NTshnL 
 intuitive, NTTf 
 intuitively, NTTV1 
 intwine, NTwn 1 
 inutile, N-Y-T 3 L 
 invasion, NVshn 
 investigate, NVsGt 
 investigator, NA'sGtr 
 investment, NVsT or 
 
 NVstiMnt 
 
 involuntary, XVlntR 
 involve, NV1 
 Iowa, l-W 1 
 lowan, l-AVn 1 
 Ipswich, PswC 
 irascible, Rs'B or RRsB 
 Iroquoi, R x Kw 
 Iroquois, R^ws 
 Irrawaddy, R J wD 
 irrecoverable, R J Kf 
 irrespective, R^Pf 
 irrespectively, R J sPVl 
 irresponsible, R^PnsB 
 Irvington, RVNgt 
 Irwin, RWn 
 island, i-Lnt 1 
 islet, i-Lt 1 
 Israel, ZRL 
 Israelite-ic-ist, ZRLt 
 issuable, Sh 3 B 
 isthmus, SMs 
 Italian, TLn 
 Italy, T J L
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 301 
 
 iterate, T'Rt 
 
 itinerancy, TNrS, TNrnS 
 
 or TNrNS 
 itinerant, TNrnt 
 luka, Y 3 K 
 Ivanhoe, V'N 
 izzard, Z J Rt 
 
 J. 
 
 jaguar, JGwR 
 jail, JL 
 jailor, JLR 
 janizary, JNsR 
 January, J 3 N 
 Japheth, JfTh 
 jasper, JsPr 
 Jefferson, JFrsN or Jf- 
 
 RsN 
 
 Jeffries, JFrs or Jf Rs 
 Jehovah, JV 
 Jehu, J 1 (See bohea and 
 
 boa.) 
 
 jeremiad, JrMt 
 Jericho, JrK 
 Jesus Christ, JK or JssK 
 jingo, J a Ng 
 jointly, JntML 
 journalism, JrNlsM or 
 
 JrsM 
 
 journalist, JrNlst 
 journalistic, JrNlsK 
 Jouthet, J 3 Tht 
 joyf illness, Jf^s 
 joyous, J a S(See religious. ) 
 joyously, J 1 SL 
 joyousness, J 1 SNs 
 judge, JJ 
 
 j udicatory-ture, JtKtr 
 
 judicial, JtShl or JtShl 
 
 judiciary, JtShr 
 
 judicious, JtShs 
 
 July, J!L 
 
 jumble, JMpl 
 
 jumper, JMpr 
 
 junction, JNgshn 
 
 June, Jn 3 
 
 jungle, JNgl 
 
 junior, JNr 
 
 junk, JNgK 
 
 jurat, Jrt 3 
 
 jurisprudence, Jrs 3 P 
 
 juror, Jr 3 R 
 
 jury box, Jr 3 BKs or Jr 3 - 
 
 Ks 
 
 juryman, Jr 3 Mn 
 jury mast, Jr 3 Mst 
 jurymen, Jrn 3 
 jury-room, Jr 3 RM or Jr- 
 
 3 M 
 
 just, Jst 
 justice, JsTs 
 justification, Jsshn or Js- 
 
 Fshn 
 
 justify, JsF 
 justly, JsL 
 juxtaposition, JKsPss/m 
 
 K 
 
 kaiser, KsR 
 Kanawha, KNW 
 Kamchatka, -Ct 3 K 
 Kan-Choo, -C 3 
 Kandhar, -Dr 3 
 Kandiyohe, -DY
 
 302 
 
 TI1K PHONOGRAPHIC MAXl'AL. 
 
 Kaukakce, -K 3 K 
 Kankaree, -KR 3 
 kangaroo, -GR 3 
 Kansakee, -sK 
 Kansan, -Zn 3 
 Kansas, -Zs 3 
 Kan-Soo, -S 3 
 Kehoe, K or K-eno 
 Kemble, -Bl 
 Kendall, -Dl 
 Kendrick, -DrK 
 Kennebeck, -XBK 
 Kennedy, -XD 
 kennel, -XI 
 Kenosha, KXSh 
 Kensett, -sT 
 Kensington, -sXgt 
 Kentuckian, -TKn 
 Kentucky, -TK 
 Kenwyn, -Wn 
 Kenyon, -Yn 
 kettle, KtL 
 keyhole, IOL 
 key-weight, K J Wt 
 kilderkin, Kltr^n 
 Kimball, -Bl 1 
 kimbo, -B 1 
 kindle, -Dl 1 
 
 kindergarden, -DrGrtX 
 kinetic, KNtK 
 king, K'Xg 
 kingly, KNgl 
 king-post, KXgPst 1 
 kingship, KX^gSh 1 
 Kingston, KXgsTn 1 
 kink, K'XgK 
 Kinross, -Rs 1 
 
 Kioway, K 1 \V 
 knew, XFtoid 
 Kong, K'Ng 
 Kun-Hegyes (Knn-Hed- 
 yesh), -ADSh . 
 
 laboratory, LBrtR 
 ladle, LtL or LD1 
 lamentable, LMntB 
 lampoon, LMpn 
 lampooned, LMpnt 
 lamprey, LMPr 
 lance, Lns 3 
 lanced, L 3 Nst 
 lanceolate, Lns 3 Lt 
 lancer, Lns 3 R 
 lancet, Lns 3 T 
 land, Lnt 3 
 landholder, Lnt 3 Ltr 
 landlord, Lnt 3 Lt 
 landsman, Lnts 3 Mn 
 landsmen, Lnts^In 
 Langdon, LX'gtX^ 
 languish, L 3 XgSh 
 lantern, LXtrn 
 Laramie, LrM or LRM 
 larboard, LrBrt 
 larceny, Lrs 3 X" 
 larch, "Lr 3 C 
 lard, Lrt 3 
 larder, Lrtr 3 
 largeness, J 3 Ns 
 largess, LrJs 
 lariat, LRT or LRt 
 lark r LrK 
 larrup, LRP
 
 THE PlION'OGRAI'llIC MAXl'Af,. 
 
 303 
 
 larvae, Lr' ! V 
 laryngeal, LrnJL 
 laryngitis, LrnJTs 
 laryngoscope, LrNgsKP 
 larynx, LrXgKs 
 lash, L 3 Sh 
 lashed, L 3 Sht 
 lastly, Ls 3 L 
 laundry, Lnt J R 
 laurel, LR1 
 lavendar, LVNtr 
 lavish, LVSh 
 lavished, LVSht 
 lavishly, LV#/d 
 lavishment, LNShMnt 
 lavishness, LV/S'ANs 
 Lawler. LLr 
 lawyer, L J R or L J //R 
 learner, LrnR 
 leash, L J Sh 
 leashed, L^ht 
 lecture, LKtr 
 leer, Lr 1 
 leeward, L^/jRt 
 leeway, L^W 
 legendary, LJtR 
 Leghorn, LGRn 
 legible, LJB1 
 legislator, LJR 
 legitimate, LJtMt 
 Lehigh, L 1 
 lene, L J N 
 lengthways, NgThws or 
 
 NgThs 
 lengthwise, NgThws 1 or 
 
 NgThs 1 
 lesion, Lshn 1 
 
 lessee, L J S 
 lesser, LsR 
 lesson, LsN 
 Lexington, LKsNgt 
 liar, L^ 
 liberal, LBrL 
 lieutenancy, LTnNS 
 lieutenant, LTnNt 
 like, L^ 
 likely, L^l 
 likewise, L } Kws or L J Ks 
 Lincoln, LNgKn or Ln 1 
 limpet, L 1 Mpt 
 limpid, L 1 Mpt 
 liner, Ln a R 
 lingo, L J Ng 
 linguist, LNgst 
 linguistic, LNgsK 
 linguistical, LNgsKl 
 listen, Ls J N 
 litho, L J Th 
 
 1 ithograph-y-ic-al, L 1 TLG 
 lithographer, L ir ThGr 
 lithographist, L^fhGst 
 little, Lt J L 
 load, Lt 
 local, LK1 
 Lockhart, LKRt 
 locomobe, LKMp 
 locomobile, LKMpl 
 logograph, L ] GG 
 London, LntN 
 longboat, Ng^t 
 longevity, LnJft 
 longitude-inal, LnJt 
 longsighted, N 
 looker-on, L 3 Krn
 
 304 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 lordly, Lrt'L 
 lore, Lr 
 Lorenzo, LrnZ 
 lottery, Lt J R 
 Louisiana, LZN 
 Louisianan, LZNn 
 lower, LR 
 lowest, Lst 
 Lucifer, LsFr 
 luckily, LKL 
 lumbago, LMpG 
 lumber, LMpr 
 lump-y LMp 
 lumped, LMpt 
 lumpiest, LMpst 
 lurch, LrC 
 lure, Lr 3 
 lured, Lrt 3 
 lurid, L 3 Rt 
 lurk, LrK 
 Lutheran, Ltr 3 N 
 luthern, Ltrn 3 
 lyre, Lr 1 
 lyric, Lr a K 
 lyrical, Lr'Kl 
 
 LESSON 37. 
 
 M 
 
 M. (for monsieur), M 1 
 Mab, Mp 3 or MB 3 
 Mable, MB1 
 Mabley, MB1 
 Macaulay, MKL 
 machinist, MShst 
 madam, Mt 3 M 
 madden, Mt 3 N 
 
 mademoiselle, M 3 MsL 
 Madison, MtsN 
 madonna, MDN 
 magisterial, MJsRl 
 magistracy, MJsS 
 magistral, MJsTrL 
 magistrate, MJ 
 Magna Charta, MiKr 
 magnanimous-ly-ity, M 3 G 
 
 (or as in eng. 302.) 
 magnate, MGNt 
 magnese, M ] GNs 
 magnesia, MGNZh 
 magnesian, MGNZhn 
 magnesite, MGNsT 
 magnesium, MGNZbM 
 magnet-ic-al, MGnt 
 magnets-ise, MGnts 
 magnetized, MGntst 
 magnetism, MGntsM 
 magnificent-ly-ce, M*G (or 
 
 as in eng. 302.) 
 magnifier, MiF 1 ^ 
 magnify, MiF 1 
 magnolia, MGN1 
 magniloquence, M'.LKwns 
 magniloquent, M'LKwnt 
 magniloquently . Mi LKwnt- 
 
 L 
 
 magnitude, MiTt 
 Magnus, MGNs 
 magnum, MGNM 
 maguey, MGw 
 mahogany, MGN 
 Mahomet, M J Mt 
 Mahoney, MN 
 mail, ML
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 305 
 
 Maine, Mn 
 Mainer, MnR 
 maintain, MnTn 
 maintenance, MnTns or 
 
 MnTnNs 
 majesty, MJ 3 
 majestic, MJs 3 K 
 majestical, MJs 3 Kl 
 majority, MJrt 
 male, ML 
 malicious, MLSh 
 malignancy, MPG'N 
 malignant-ly, Ml'G 
 malignity, Ml'GT 
 Manhattan, MnTn 3 
 manhood, MnD 
 manlike, MnLKor MntLk 
 manly, MnL or Mn'L 
 mannerly, Nr 8 Z 
 mansion, MNshn 
 manslaughter, MsLtr 3 
 manufactory, MnF 
 manufactural, MnFZ 
 manufacture, MNF 
 manufacturer, MNF7? 
 manuscript, MsKPt orM- 
 
 NsKPt 
 map, Mp 3 
 mapach, MpC 3 
 maple, MP1 
 mapped, Mpt 3 
 mappery, Mp 3 R 
 maraud, MRt 1 
 March, MrC 
 marcher, MrCr 
 marchioness, MrShNs 
 marge, MrJ 
 
 margin, MrJn 
 maritime, MrtM 
 mark, Mr 3 K 
 
 markee, Mr 3 K or Mr 3 K-e 
 marker, Mr 3 Kr 
 market, MrKtor Mr J Kt 
 marketer, MrKtr or Mr 1 - 
 
 Ktr 
 
 marque, Mr 3 K 
 marquee, Mr 3 K or Mr 3 K-G 
 married, MR 3 D 
 marsh-y, MrSh 
 marshal, Mrshl 
 mart, MRt 3 
 mart3 r r, Mrtr 3 
 martyrdom, MrtrD 3 M 
 martyrize, Mrtrs 3 
 Maryland, MRlnt 
 Mary lander, MRlnt R 
 mash, MSh 
 mashed, MSht 3 
 Massachusetts, MC 3 
 Massachusettsan, MsCn 3 
 master, Mstr 3 
 mater, Mtr 
 maternal, MtrnL 
 maternity, MtrnT 
 mathematical, MfThL 
 mathematician, MfThshn 
 mathematics, MfThs 
 matin, M 3 Tn 
 matinee, MtN 
 matron, Mtrn 
 matronage, MtrnJ 
 matronal, MtrNl 
 matron! xe, MtrNs 
 maturity, MtR 3 T
 
 306 
 
 TIIK J'HOXOUIJAPIllr MANUAL. 
 
 maxim-a, Ms 3 M 
 maximum, Ms 3 MM 
 May, M 
 mayhem, MM 
 may hew, M 3 
 Mayo, M 
 
 Mclntyre, MKNtr 
 meander, M'Xtr 
 meantime, MnT 1 
 meanwhile, MnwL 1 
 measureable-y, Zhr 3 B 
 measurer, Zhr 3 R 
 measurement, Zhr 3 Mnt 
 mechanic, M 3 K 
 mechanical, M 3 K1 
 mechanics, M 3 Ks 
 mechanism, M 3 KnsM 
 medal, MtL 
 meddle, MtL 
 median, MDn 1 
 medicine, MtsN 
 meditate, MtT 
 meditation, MtTshn 
 Mediterranean, MtTrnN 
 medium, Mt J M 
 melancholy, M1KI or Ml- 
 
 NK1 
 
 membership, Br'.Sh 
 memento, MMnT 
 memorable, MMB1 
 memoranda, MMD 
 memorandum, MMM 
 memorial MMR1 
 memorize, MMRs 
 memorized, MMRst 
 memory, MM 
 mender, MNtr 
 
 menhir, MnK 
 mention, MXshn 
 mentionable, MNshnB 
 mentioned, MX.shnt 
 Mentor, MNtr 
 mercantile, MrKntL or 
 
 MrKtL 
 merchandixe, MrCts or 
 
 MrCtZ 
 
 merchant, MrCnt 
 merchantable, MrCtBl 
 merchantman, MrCtMn 
 merchantmen, MrCt'.Mn 
 mercifulness, Mr:Fs 
 merciless, MrsLs 
 merge, MrJ 
 merger, MrJr 
 merograj)h, MrGrf 
 mesh, MSh 
 meshed, MSht 
 Mess, (for Messrs. ), Ms- 
 
 or MSh 
 
 messenger, MsJr 
 Messiah,' MS 1 
 messieurs, MsRs 1 or MSh 1 - 
 
 Rs 
 
 Messrs., MsRs or MShrs 
 metal, MtL 
 meteor, Mtr 1 
 meteoric, Mtr 1 K 
 meteorite, MtrT 1 
 meteorolite, MtrLt 1 
 meteorological, MtrJ'Kl 
 meteorologist, MtrJst 1 
 meteorology, MtrJ 1 
 methinks, MThs 1 
 method-ic, MTht
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 307 
 
 methodical, MThtKl 
 Methodism, MsM or 
 
 MThteM 
 
 Methodist, MThtst 
 methodistic, MThtsK 
 methodistical, MThtsKl 
 methought, MTht 1 
 Methuseleh, MTh.vL 
 metropolis, MtrPls 
 metropolitan, MtrPlTn 
 Mexican, MsKn 
 Mexico, MsK 
 Michigan, MSh 1 
 Michiganer, MSh J R 
 microscope-ic, 
 microscopical, M l KrsKl 
 midday, Mt 1 !) 
 middle, Mt'L 
 midnight, Mt^Nt 
 mighty, MT 1 
 mignonette, MnNT 
 migrate, M'Grt 
 mile, ML 1 
 mileage, ML'J 
 milch, MIC 
 military, MLtR 
 militia, MLSh 
 mill, ML 1 (or M 1 after a 
 
 figure. ) 
 
 miller, MLr 1 or ML'R 
 millionaire, MPR 
 Milwaukee, MLWK 
 minaret, MNRt 
 mincer, MNsR 1 
 minim, Mn*M 
 minima, M'NM 
 minimum, Mn*MM 
 
 minion, MnN 
 minister, M'Nstr 
 ministerial, M a NsRL 
 ministral, M ] NsRl 
 ministrant, M J NsRnt 
 ministration, 
 ministry, M ] NsR 
 Minnehaha, M 3 N 
 Minnesota, MNsT 
 Minnesotan, MNsTn 
 minority, M*Nrt 
 minister, M 1 Nstr 
 minstrel, MnsTrL 
 minstrelsy, MnsTrLS 
 minuet, MNT 
 minute, MnT 
 minute, (adj.), MNT 
 minutely, MNTL 
 minuteness, MNTNs 
 minuter, MNtr 
 minutest, MNTst 
 misdemeanor, MsD 
 misfortune, MsFrt'N or 
 
 MsFrt 1 
 mishap, MsP 3 
 Miss, Ms 1 
 Misses, Mss 1 
 missionary, Mshn J R 
 Mississippi, MssP 
 Mississippian, MssPn 
 Missouri, MsR 
 Missourian, MsRn i 
 mistake, MsK 
 mistaken, MsKn 
 mister, Mstr 1 (See Mr.) 
 mistook, Ms 3 K 
 mistress, MsTrs (See Mrs. )
 
 308 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 mitten, Mt'N 
 mittened, Mt*Nt 
 mixture, JV^Kstr 
 mob, Mp 1 or MB 1 
 mobber, Mp*R or MBr 1 
 Mobile, MB1 
 mobilization, MBlssAn, 
 mobilize, MBls 
 moderation, Mtrshn 1 
 modern, Mtrn 1 
 modest, Mtst 1 
 modestly, MtsL 1 
 modesty, MtsT 1 
 modicum, Mt*KM 
 modification, MtF'Kshn 
 modifier, MtF'T? 
 modify, MtF 1 
 mohair, MR 
 Mohammed, MMt 
 Mohammedan, MMDn 
 Mohammedanism, MMDs- 
 
 M 
 
 Mohamrnedism, MMtsM 
 Mohawk, M'K 
 Mohegan, M'Gn 
 Mohican, M*Kn 
 Moho, M 
 
 monasterial, MNsTRl 
 monastery, MNsTR 
 monastic, MNsTK 
 monastical, MNsTKl 
 monasticism, MNsTssM 
 Monday, MnD 
 Monheimer, MnMR 
 monitor, M'Ntr 
 monitress, M'XTrs 
 monody, MND 
 
 Monon, MnN 
 Monongahela, M'nXGl 
 monopoly, MnPL 
 monosyllabic, MX.yBK 
 monosyllable, MX.--LBI 
 Monseigneur, MyR 1 
 Monsieur, MsR 1 or MS 
 
 (SeeM.) 
 monster, MnsTr 
 monstrosity, MnsTrst 
 monstrous, MnsTrs 
 monstrously, MnsTr.sL 
 Montana, Mnt'N 
 Montanan, Mnt'Nn 
 month, MTh or MNTh 
 monthly, MThL or MN- 
 
 ThL 
 
 Montmorency, MntMiR 
 monumental, MnMntL 
 mop, Mp 1 
 mope, Mp 
 
 Moplah, MpL 1 or MP1 1 
 moppet, MpT 1 
 mopsey, MpS 1 
 Mormon, Mi^Mn 
 Mormonism, Mr J MsM 
 morn, Mrn 1 
 morning, Mrn a Xg 
 morning-star, Mrn ' X^gstr 
 morning-stars, M rn 1 - 
 
 Xgstrs 
 
 morphine, MRFn 
 mortgagee, MrGJ 1 
 mortgage r-or MrGJr 1 
 mortification, MrtFshn 
 mortify, MrtF 
 mother-in-law, MtrnL
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 309 
 
 mountain, Mnt 3 N 
 mountaineer, Mnt 3 NR 
 mountebank, MntB 3 Ng 
 move, MY 3 
 Mr. (for mister), Mr 1 
 Mrs. (for Mistress), MsS 
 mulberry, MlBr or ML- 
 
 BR 
 
 Mulholland, MLLnt 
 mullion, MLn 
 multiply, MltPl 
 multitude, MltTt 
 mump, MMp 
 mumper, MMpr 
 mundane, MnDn 
 mural, MR1, 
 murder, Mrtr 
 murderer, MrtrR 
 murderess, MrtrS 
 murderous, Mrtrs 
 murderously, MrtrsL 
 musical, MsKl 
 mustache, JVIsSh 3 
 mutual, MtL 3 
 mutuality, MtL 3 T 
 myrmidon, MrMDn 
 mystic, Ms*K 
 mystical, M.^Kl 
 mysticism, Mss*M 
 mystification, MsFshn 1 
 mystify, MsF 1 
 mythology, MThlJ 
 mythological, MThlJKl 
 
 N 
 
 nadir, Ntr 
 Nahant, N 3 Nt 
 
 nailer, NLr 
 Nancy, NnS or NNS 
 narcissus, NrSss 
 nard, Nrt 3 
 nardine, Nrt 3 N 
 narrate, NrT or NRt 3 
 narration, Nrshn or N- 
 
 Rshn 3 
 
 narrative, NrTf orNRt 3 Y 
 narratively, NrTYl or N- 
 
 Rt 3 Vl 
 
 narrator, Nrtr or NRtr 3 
 narrow, NR 
 narrowly, NR1 
 nasality, NsZt or NsLT 
 natant, NTnt 
 natatory, JS'TtR 
 nautical, Kt J Kl 
 nautilus, NT^s 
 naval, NY1 
 navigate-d, NVG 
 navigator, NVGtr 
 nay, N 
 
 Nazarine, NsRn 
 nearly, NrZ 
 neatly, NtZ, NetZ or 
 
 N-etZ 
 
 Nebraska, N 3 B or NBrsK 
 Nebraskan, N 3 Bn or 
 
 NBrsKn 
 necessary, NssR 
 necessarily, NssRl 
 necessity, NssT 
 needle, NtZ 1 
 needless, NtZs 1 
 needlessly, NtZs'Z 
 neglect, NGl or NG1K
 
 310 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 neglecter, NGltr 
 neglectful, NGlf 
 negligence, NGlns 
 negligent, NGlnt 
 Nehemia, NhM or NM 
 neigh, N 
 Nelson, NlsN 
 Neptune, NPTn 
 Nero, NR 1 
 nervously, NrVsZ 
 nettle, NtZ 
 neuralgia, NR1J 
 Nevada, NVt 3 or NVD 
 Nevadan, NVt 3 N or N VDn 
 new, NFtoid 
 New England, N 3 Nglnt 
 New Englander, N 3 Nglnt- 
 
 R 
 
 newer, NR 3 
 newest, Nst 3 
 newish, NSh 3 
 New Hampshire, NMpShr 
 New Hampshiran, NMp- 
 
 Shrn 
 
 New Hartford, NhRtFrt 
 New Haven, NVn 
 New Jersey, NJZ 
 New Jerseyan, NJZn 
 Newland, NZnt or NLnt 
 newly, NZ 3 
 New Mexican, NMsKn 
 New Mexico, NMsK 
 newness, N 3 Ns 
 New Orleans, NRlns 3 or 
 
 NR 3 Lns 
 
 news, Ns 3 or N 3 ns 
 newspaper, NsP 3 Pr 
 
 New Testament, NTsMnt 
 
 or Ntst 3 
 
 New Year, NyR 1 
 New Years, NyRs 1 
 New York, NyR 
 New York City, NyRsT 
 New Yorker, NyRR or 
 
 NyRKr 
 
 New York State, N^Rst 
 Niagara, N 3 Gr 
 Nicaragua, NKrG or X 
 
 KrGw 
 
 nicety, NsT 1 
 nicknacks, N J KnKs 
 nickname, NKNM 
 nigh, N 1 
 nigher, NR 1 
 nighest, Nst 1 
 nightly, NtZ 1 
 nihilism, NhLs^l or 
 
 NPsM 
 
 nihilist, NhLst 1 or Nlst 1 
 nine, 9 
 niter, Ntr 1 
 nitrate, NtrT 1 
 nitric, Ntr*K 
 noes, Ns 
 Noah, N 
 nobody, NBt 
 nocturne, NKTRn 
 nocturnal, NKTRnL 
 nod, ND 1 
 node, ND 
 nohow, N-Hcm 
 noiseless, NsZs 
 noiselessly, NsZsZ 
 noisiness, NZNs
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 311 
 
 noisily, NZL 
 noisy, NZ 1 
 noisome, NsM 
 Nolan, NZn or NLn 
 nomad, NMt 
 nomenclature, NMKltr 
 nonce, Nns 1 
 
 nonconformist, Nn 'FMst 
 nonconformity, Nn <FMT 
 nondescript, Nn 1 i DsKPt 
 none, Nn 
 nonentity, NnNtT 
 nonsense, NnsNs 
 nonsuit, NNsT 3 
 no-one, N 2 Wn 
 Norman, Nr 1 Mn 
 north, Nr r rh 
 North America, NrMrK 
 North Carolina, Nr l Kr 
 North Carolinan, Ni -1 Krn 
 North Dakota, NrDKt 
 North Dakotan,NrDKtN 
 northeast, NrSt 1 
 northeaster, NrStr 1 
 northeasterly, NrSti^L 
 northeastern, NrStrn 1 
 northern, Nrtrn 1 
 northerner, NrtrnR 1 
 northstar, NrThstr 3 
 northward, Nm'Rt 1 
 northwest, NrWst 
 northwester, NrWstr 
 northwesterly, NrWsRL 
 northwestern, NrWsRn 
 Norway, NrW 
 Xorwepfian, XrJn 
 Norwich, NrC 
 
 nosology, NvLJ 
 
 nostril, N-s-TrL 
 
 nostrum, N-s-Tr^I 
 
 notable, NtBl 
 
 notarial, NtRl 
 
 notary, NtR 
 
 nothing, NTh or NThNg 
 
 notification, NtFshn 
 
 notify, NtF 
 
 November, NV 
 
 novitiate, NVSht 
 
 now, NCtoid 
 
 nowadays, N 2 Das 
 
 noway, N 2 W 
 
 nows (pi. of now), Ns 3 or 
 
 numerable, NMrBl 
 nutritive, NTrTf 
 nutritiveness, NTrTfNs 
 nutshell. NtShl 
 
 O 
 
 objectionable, BshnB 
 objectively, BfiL 
 objectiveness, BfNs 
 objectivity, BfT 
 objectless, BLs 
 objector, BiR 
 oblong, BINg 
 obscure, BsKr 
 obscurity, BsKrt 
 observable, BsRBl 
 observableness, BsRBlns 
 observance, BsRVns 
 oksei'vanev, BsR'.V 
 ohservanda, BsRVnD
 
 312 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 observanclum, BsRVnDM 
 observant-ly, BsRVnt 
 Observantine, BsRVntX 
 observation, BsR 
 observational, BsRL 
 observative, BsRVt or 
 
 BsRVtV 
 
 observator, BsRVtr 
 observatory, BsRftR 
 observe, BsRf 
 observer, BsRfR 
 observership, BsRfRSh 
 observingly, BsRfNgZ 
 obsolete, Bs'Lt 
 obstructive, BsTrf 
 obstructor, BsTrtr 
 O'Connell, -XI 1 or o'Xl 1 
 O'Connor, -Xr 1 or o'Xr 1 
 occupy, P 1 , KPi 1 or 
 
 KfP 
 
 oceanic, ShXK 
 October, KtBr 
 octoroon, KTRn 
 ocular, KLr 1 
 off, F 1 
 officer, FsR 
 official, FA1 
 officiate, F'Sht 
 officious, ~FShs 
 officiously, F/ShsL 
 officiousness, FxS'AsXs 
 oft, Ft 1 
 oftener, Fn'R 
 oftenest, Fn*St 
 oftentimes, Fnt J Ms 
 ofttimes, Ft 1 Ms 
 O'Hara, ohR 3 or hR 3 
 
 Ohio, o or OKI 
 
 Ohioan, om-N 
 
 Oklahoma, KIM 
 
 Oklahoman, KIMn 
 
 old, Lt or o-Lt 
 
 older, Ltr or o-Ltr 
 
 oldest, Ltst or G-Ltst 
 
 Old Testament, LtTs^lnt 
 or Ltst 
 
 olympiad, L a Mpt or L 1 - 
 MpD 
 
 Olympian, L J Mpn 
 
 Olympus, L^Mps 
 Omaha, ^l 3 
 omnipotence, ]\IXPns 
 omnipotency, ]SIXPtT 
 omnipotent-ly, MXPt 
 omnipresence-t. MXPr 
 omniscience, MXShns 
 omnisciency, MXi Sh 
 omniscient-ly, MXShnt 
 onerary, XR J R 
 onerate, XRt 1 
 oneration, XRshn 1 
 onerous, X T Rs J 
 onerously, X'Rs'L 
 oneself, Wns 
 onion, Xn 
 onlooker, Ttoid 1 LKr (See 
 
 sec. 383.) 
 onset, TtoidsT 
 onslaught, Ttoid J 
 onto, KtoidT 
 onward, Ttoid 1 ?6<Rt 
 operate, P'Rt 
 operative, P J Rf 
 operatively, P J RfL
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 313 
 
 opine, Pn 1 
 opiniative, Nn l4 .Tf 
 opinionated, Nn'tTt 
 opinionative, Nn u .Tf 
 opinioned, Nn lc .D 
 opinionist, NnSt 1 
 Oppenheimer, PnMR 
 opportune, Pr 3 Tn 
 opportunely, Pr 3 TNl 
 opportuneness, Pr 3 TnNs 
 opportunity, Prt 3 or Pr 3 - 
 
 Tnt 
 
 oppression, Prshn 
 oral, Rl 
 orator, R*Tr 
 oratorial , R ir TrL 
 oratorical, R'Tr, 
 
 orR'TRKl 
 oratorio, R l TRo 
 oratory, R'TR 
 order, Rtr 1 
 ordinal, Rt'NZ 
 ordinance, R^Nns or R 1 - 
 
 DnXs 
 
 ordinary, Rt J Nr 
 ordnance, Rt^ns 
 Oregon, RGn 
 Oregonan, RGNn 
 Oregonian, RGnN 
 organic, Gn J K 
 organical, Gn^L 
 organism, Gn a sM 
 Orleans, RLns 
 ornamental, RnMntL 
 orrery, R J R 
 orthoepist, RThPst 
 orthoepy, RThP 
 
 orthographer, RThGr 
 orthographist, RThGst 
 orthographize, RThGs 
 orthography-ic-al, RThG 
 Osage, SJ 
 Osawatomie, SWtM 
 Oscar, SKr 
 ostensible, 
 ostler, 
 ostracise, StrSs 
 ostrich, StRC 
 Otaheite, oTT 
 other, u 1 or Dhr 3 
 others, us 1 or Dhrs 3 
 other ways, u^Was or 
 
 DJir 3 Was 
 
 otherwise, us 1 or Dhr 3 Ws 
 oust, St 3 
 ouster, Str 3 
 outdoors, T 3 DRs 
 outer, Tr 3 
 outfit, T 3 Ft 
 outstretched, T 3 sTrCt 
 overalls, Vr^s 
 overboard, Vr a Brt 
 overseer, Vr^R 
 overtake, Vr^K 
 overture, Vrtr 1 
 overwhelm, 
 owed, oD 
 owes, os or oZ 
 owest, oSt 
 owing, 6- or Ng 
 oyer, yR 
 oyes, Ys 
 oyez, Y
 
 314 
 
 THE PHOXOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 pageantry, PJtR 
 paletot, PLT 
 pallet, P 3 Lt 
 palliate, P 3 Lt 
 palliative, P 3 LtV 
 pallid, P 3 Lt 
 pallor, PLr or PLR 
 panorama, PNrM 
 pantry, PntR 
 papal, PP1 
 paragram, PrfG 
 paragrammist, PrfGst 
 paragrammatist, PrfGTst 
 paragraph-ic-al, PrG or 
 
 PrGf 
 
 paragrapher, PrGr 
 paragraphist, PrGst 
 paragraphistical, PrGsKl 
 parallax, PRIKs or PrLKs 
 parallel, P 3 R1 
 paralleled, P 3 Rlt 
 paralytic, PRltK 
 paralyze, PRls 
 paralyzed, PRlst 
 parasol, PRsL 
 parcel, PrsL 
 Paris, PRsorP'R 
 Parisian, PRsN or PRshn 
 parliament-ary, Pr 3 L 
 parliamentarian, Pr 3 Ln 
 parlor, PrLr or PrLR 
 partial, PrSM. 
 participant, PrtsPnt 
 participate, PrtsPt 
 participation, PrtsPshn 
 participator, PrtsPtr 
 
 particle, PrtKl 
 partisan, .P 3 RtsX 
 partner, PrtNr 
 partnership, PrtNrSh 
 passenger, PsJr 
 passion, Pshn 3 
 pastry, PsTr 
 pasture, PsTR 
 pasturage, PsTRJ 
 patent, PTnt or Pt 3 
 patentable, PTntB or Pt 3 - 
 
 Bl 
 
 patentee, PTnT or Pt 3 T 
 patent-office, PTntFs or 
 
 Pt 3 Fs 
 pater, Ptr 
 
 paternal, PtrL or PtrNZ 
 paternity, PtrT or PtrNT 
 pater-noster, PtrNstr 
 pathetic, PThtK 
 pathetical, PThtKl 
 patience, Pshns 
 patiently, PshntL 
 patois, PTw 
 patriot, PTrt 
 patriotic, PTrtK 
 patriotism, PTrtsM 
 patronymic, PtrNMK 
 peaceful, Ps'Fl 
 peanut, P J Nt 
 pearl-y, PrL 
 peculiarity, P 3 KLrt 
 pecuniary-ly, PKn 
 pedal, PtL 
 pedantry, PDtR 
 peddle, PtL 
 penalty, PX1T
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 315 
 
 penance, PnNs 
 pencil, PXsZ 
 pendage, PntJ 
 penman, PnMn 
 penmen, P^Mn 
 pennant, PnNt 
 pennate, PNt 
 pennon, PnN 
 Pennsylvania, PsV, P, Pn 
 
 or'PN 
 Pennsvlvanian, PsVn or 
 
 PsVnN 
 
 penurious, PnRs 
 penury, PnR 
 per, Pr 
 
 perannum, PRNM 
 percent, PRsNt 
 percentage, PRsNtJ 
 performer, PRFMr 
 perfunctor-y, PrfNgtr 
 peril, PR1 
 perilous, PRls 
 periphery, PRfR 
 perish, PRSh 
 perpendicularity, PRPnt- 
 
 Lrt 
 
 perpetuation, PRPshn 
 perpetuity, PRPiTt 
 perplex, PrPLKs 
 perplexed, PrPLKst 
 perplexedly, PrPLKsDL 
 perplexity, PrPLKst 
 persecution, PRsKshn 
 persecutor, PRsKtr 
 persevere, PrsVr 
 perseverance, PrsVrns 
 Persian, PRShn 
 
 persist, PrssT 
 persistency, PrssiT 
 persistent-ly, PrssTnt 
 personal, PrsNl 
 perspective, PrsPf 
 perspectively, PrsPVl 
 perspicuity, PrsP'.Kt 
 perspicuous-ly-ness, Prs- 
 
 PKs 
 
 persuadable, PrsDBl 
 persuade, PrsD 
 persuader, PrsDr 
 persuasibility, PrssBt 
 persuasible, PrssB 
 persuasion, Prs.s7m 
 persuasive, PrssV 
 persuasory, PrssR 
 pertain, PrTn 
 perturb, PrtrB 
 perturbation, PrtrBshn 
 pervade, PrVt 
 pervert, PrVrt 
 pestilence, PsLns 
 pestilent, PsLnt 
 pestilential, PsLn 
 petal, PtL 
 
 petrifaction, PtRFshu 
 phenomena, FnMN 
 phenomenal, FnMNl or 
 
 FnM 
 
 phenomenon, FnMNn 
 Phi la. (for Philadelphia), 
 
 F J L 
 
 Philadelphia, FltF 
 philanthropical, FlnPL 
 }>hilanthropist, FlnPst 
 philanthropy-ic, FlnP
 
 316 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 philharmonic, FlKMnK 
 Phillip, F1P 
 Philippine, FlPn 
 Philistine, FlsTn 
 Philistinism, FlsTsM 
 philoproofenitiveness, Flf J 
 
 orFlPrJNtiVs 
 philter, Fltr 1 
 phone, Fn 
 phonetic, FXtK 
 phonic, FnK 
 phono, FN 
 phonogram, FXfG 
 phonograph-y-ic-al,FnG or 
 
 FXG 
 phonographer, FnR or 
 
 FXGr 
 phonographist, FnGst or 
 
 FXGst 
 
 phonoscript, FnsK 
 phonotype-y-ic-al, FXtP 
 photo, FT 
 photogram, FTfG 
 photograph-y-ic-al, FTG 
 photographer, FTGr 
 photographist, FTGst 
 photolithogram, FtLThfG 
 
 (or FT) 
 photolithograph-y-ic-al, Ft- 
 
 LThG 
 photolithographer, FtL- 
 
 ThGr 
 photolithographist, FtL- 
 
 ThGst 
 
 phraseogram, FrsfG 
 1 >hraseo:raph-y-ic-al, FrsG 
 physical, FsKl 
 
 picturesque, PKtrsK 
 pillar, PLr or PLR 
 Pindar, PXtr 
 pioneer, PX'R 
 pitiful, PTf or Pt^l 
 platform, PltF or PltFr 
 playfulness, PlfXs 
 pleasurable, ZhrB 
 pleasurableness, ZhrBns 
 plenipotentiary, PlnP 
 plenteous, PlnTs 
 plentiful, PlnTf 
 plentifulness, PlnTfNs 
 plenty, PlnT 
 Plimpton, PIMptN 
 polar, PLr or PLR 
 polish, PLSh 
 polished, PLSht 
 politic, Plt'K 
 political, Pl^Kl 
 politician, Ph^Shn 
 pomp, P^Ip 
 Pompey, P : Mp 
 poniard, PnRt 
 poorer, Pr 3 R 
 poorhouse, Pr 3 hS or Pr 3 S 
 poorly, Pr 3 L 
 poorness, Pr 3 Xs 
 poplar, PPLr 
 popular-ly, P J P 
 popularize, P a Ps or P J P- 
 
 LRs 
 
 port, PRt 
 portage, PRtJ 
 porterage, PRtr J 
 Porto Rican, PrtRKn 
 Porto Rico, PrtRK
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL 
 
 317 
 
 Porto Ricoan, PrtRKN 
 positive, PsTf 
 positively, PsTVl 
 positiveness, PsTfNs 
 postmeridian, PsMRt 
 postmortem, PsMtM 
 postponement, PsPMnt 
 postscript, PsKPt 
 potage, Pt J J 
 potash, Pt'Sh 
 potential-ly-cy, PTn 
 potter, Ptr 1 
 pottery, Pt'R 
 powder, Ptr 3 
 Powderly, Ptr 3 L 
 power, P 3 R 
 powerful, P 3 Rf 
 powerfulness, P 3 R'.Fs 
 Powhattan, PTn 
 practicable, Pr 3 KBl or 
 
 Prt 3 Bl 
 practical, Pr 3 Kl or Prt 3 - 
 
 Kl 
 
 practice, Pr 3 K or Prts 3 
 practiced, Pr 3 Kt or Prtst 3 
 practicer, Pr 3 Kr or 
 
 Prts 3 R 
 practitioner, Prshn 3 R or 
 
 Prt 3 Shr 
 precede, Pr^D 
 precedent, Pr^Dnt 
 precession, Prashn* 
 precise, Prss 1 
 precisely, Prss 1 !; 
 precision, Prsshn 1 
 predecessor, PrDssR 
 predestinarian, PrDsNrn 
 
 predistinate, PrDstNt 
 predestination, PrDst- 
 
 Nshn 
 
 predestine, PrDsTn 
 preface, PrFs 
 prefix, PrfKs 
 prejudice, PrJt 
 prejudicial, PrJtShl 
 preliminarily, PrLML 
 preliminary, PrLM 
 prepare, PrPR 
 prependage, PrPnJ or 
 
 PriPntJ 
 
 preposition, PrPsshn 
 prerogative, Pr J RG 
 presbyter, PrsBtr 
 Presbyterial, PrsBtRl 
 Presbyterian, PrsBt 
 Presbyterianism, Prs 
 
 BtsM 
 
 presbytery, PrsBtR 
 prescription, Pr^Krshn 
 prescriptive, Pr 1 sKrf 
 prescript! vely, Pr^KrVl 
 preservable-y, PrsRBl 
 preservation, PrsR 
 preservative, PrsVt or 
 
 PrsRVtV 
 
 preservatory, PrsRftR 
 preserve, PrsRf 
 preserver, PrsRfR 
 presidency, Prs'.D 
 president, PrsDnt 
 previously PrVsZ 
 princes, Prnss 1 
 princess, Prn^s 
 privilege, Prf J J
 
 118 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC M.VXUAL. 
 
 privileged, Prf J Jt 
 probate, PrBT 
 procedure, PrsDR 
 proceed, PrsD 
 process, Prss 
 procession, PrssAyi 
 product, Pr 3 DKt 
 production, Pr 3 Dshu 
 productive, Pr 3 Df 
 profession, PrFshn 
 professional, PrFshnL 
 professor, Prf or PrFsR 
 proficience, P^Fshns 
 proficiency, Pi^F'.Sh 
 proficient-ly , Pr ' Fshnt 
 profitable, Prf t J B 
 proti tableness, Pf r t * Bns 
 profound, PrFnt 
 profundity, PrFntT 
 prohibit, Pr'BT 
 prohibitive, Pi^Bf 
 project, PrJKt 
 prolong, Pr J Ng 
 prolonged, Pi^Ngt 
 prompt, Pr*Mpt 
 promulgate, PrMlGt 
 pronoun, PrXn 
 pronounce, PrNns 
 pronounced, PrNNst 
 pronunciation, 
 
 or PrXn*S7<shn 
 proper-ly-ty, PrP 
 prophesier, PrfP J SR 
 prophecy, Prf*S 
 prophet, Prft 1 
 prophetess, Prft 1 S 
 prophetic, 
 
 prophetical, 
 propose, PrPs 
 proposed, PrPst 
 proprietary, PrPrTR 
 proprietor, PrPrtr 
 propriety, PrPrT 
 prorogue, PrRG 
 proscription, PrsKrshn 
 prescriptive, PrsKrf 
 proscriptively, PrsKrVl 
 prosecution, Prs 3 Kshn 
 prosecutor, Prs 3 Ktr 
 prospective, Prs^f 
 prospecti vely, Prs'PVl 
 prospectus, Prs l PTs 
 prosperity, PrsPrt 
 prosperous, PrsPrs 
 prosperously, PrsPrsL 
 protective, PrtKtV 
 protector, PrtKtr 
 protest, Prtst 
 protestant, PrtsTnt 
 protestantism, PrtsTtsM 
 protestation, PrtsTshn 
 protested, PrtstiD 
 protester, PrtstR 
 prothonotary, PrThntR 
 protract, PrTrKt 
 protracter-or, PrTrtr 
 protraction, PrTrshn 
 protractive, PrTrf 
 protrude, Pr'Trt 
 protruder, Pr 3 Trti 
 protrusion, Pr 3 Trshn 
 provide, Pr a Vt 
 provider, Pr J Vtr 
 province, PrfXs
 
 provincial, PrfX 
 provincialism, PrfXsM or 
 
 PrfXShlsM 
 prudential, PrDn 
 prunella-o, PrXZ 
 pruner, Prn 3 R 
 Prussian, PrShn 
 publican, PBn 
 })ublication, PBshn 
 publicist, PBssT 
 publicity, PBLst 
 publisher, PBShr 
 Puebla-o, PwBL or PwBl 
 puerile, P 3 R1 
 puerility, P 3 RIT 
 punctuation, PnsrTshn 
 pupil, P 3 P1 
 purely, P 3 RL 
 purification, P 3 RFshn 
 purport, PPRt 
 purposed, PPst 
 pursuance, PRSNs 
 pursuant, PRSXt 
 pursue, PRS 
 pursued, PRSt 
 pursuer, PRSR 
 pursuit, PRSt 
 pursuivant, PRsVnt 
 purveyor, PrVT? 
 Putnam, Pt'NM or 
 
 PTNM 
 
 putrefaction, PTrFshn 
 putrefied, PTrFt or PTrf D 
 pyramid-ic, PrMt or 
 
 PRMt 
 pyramidal, PrMt L or 
 
 PEMtL 
 
 pyramidical, PrMtKl or 
 PRMtKl 
 
 LESSON 38. 
 
 Q 
 
 quadrangle, KwtRNgl 
 quadrangular, KvvtRNglR 
 quadrant, KwtRnt 
 quadrat, KwtRt; 
 quadrator, Kvvt 1 Rtr 
 quadrature, KwtRtr 
 quadrennial, KwtRNZ 
 quadrilateral, KwtRltrL 
 quadrille, KwtRl 
 quadrillion, KwtRln 
 quadroon, KwtRn 
 quadruman, KwtR^n or 
 
 KtrMn 
 quadrumana, KwtRMX or 
 
 KtrMN 
 quadruped, KwtRPt or 
 
 KtrPt 
 
 quadruple, KwtRPl 
 quaere, KwR 
 quagga, KwG 
 quahog, Kw : G orKw^G 
 qualifiedly, KlFtL 
 qualify, K\F 
 qualitative, KITTf 
 quality, KIT 
 quantitative, KwntTTf 
 quantitive, KwntTf 
 quantity, KwntT 
 quantum, Kwn^M 
 quarantine, K \\RntN 
 quarrel, K\vRl
 
 J20 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL 
 
 quart, KwRt 
 quartered, Kwtrt 1 
 quartermaster, Kwtr * Mstr 
 (quartern, Kwtrn 1 
 quartet, KwRTt 
 quarto, K\vRT 
 quench, KwnC 
 question, Kwn or Kn 
 questionable, KwnB or 
 
 KnB 
 
 questioner, KwnR or KnR 
 quick-step, Kw'KsTP 
 quiet, KwT 
 quinine, KwnN 
 quinteroon, KwntRn 
 quitclaim, Kwt 1 KlM 
 quondam, KwntM 
 quorum, KwRM or KwM 
 quotient, Kwshnt 
 
 R 
 
 racehorse, RsRs or RshRs 
 rafter, RFtr 
 rail, Rl 
 railer-y, R1R 
 
 railroad, R1RD or Rl'.Rt 
 railway, RIAV 
 rampage, RMpJ 
 rampant, RMpnt 
 rampart, RMprt 
 rancid, RnsD 
 Randall, RnDL 
 random, RntM 
 ranger, RnJR or RnJr 
 ransack, RnsK 
 ransom, RnsM 
 rapid, RPt 
 
 Rappahannock, RPXK 
 rarer, RRR 
 rasher, RShr 
 ratify, Rt 3 F 
 ratification, Rt 3 Fshn 
 rattle, Rt 3 L 
 rattler, Rt 3 Lr 
 read (red), Rt 
 read, R'D 
 reader, R'Dr 
 realm, RIM 
 Reaumur, RMr or R 
 recessional, RssA?>Z 
 recherche, RShrSh 
 recognize, R'Xs 
 recognition, R'Xshn 
 recognizance, R'XsNs or 
 
 RfNsNs 
 
 recollect, RK1K or R 1 
 recollection, RKlKshn or 
 
 Rshn 1 
 red, Rt 
 
 re-elect, RIKt or RLKT 
 re-establish-ment, R 3 StB 
 refer, RR or Rf R 
 referable, RRB1 or Rf RBI 
 referee, RR-6 or RfR-e 
 reference, RRns or RfRns 
 references, RRnss or Rf- 
 
 Rnss 
 referendum, RRnM or Rf- 
 
 RntM 
 
 referential, RRn or RfRn 
 reflection, RFlshn 
 reform, RF 
 reformation, RFshn 
 reformative, RFTf
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 321 
 
 reformatory, RFTR 
 reformer, RFMr 
 refraction, RFrshn 
 regard, R 3 Grt 
 regeneration, RJshn 
 regenerative, RJf 
 regimental, RJMntL 
 regret, RGrt 
 rehear, RhR 
 reheard, RhRt 
 rehearsal, RRsL or RhRsL 
 rehearse, RRs or RhRs 
 rehearsed, RRst or RhRst 
 Rehmn, RhM or RM 
 relative, RltV 
 relatively, RltVl 
 relict, R'lKt 
 
 religious, Js 1 (See joyous.) 
 religiously, Js a L 
 religiousness, Js a Ns 
 relinguish, RlNgSh 
 remainder, RMntR 
 reminder, R'MntR 
 remonstrate, RMnsTrt 
 remonstrance, RMnsTrns 
 remonstrator, RMnsTrtr 
 renew, R 3 NFtoid 
 renewable, R 3 NB1 
 renewal, R 3 NZ 
 renewed, R 3 NtFtoid 
 renewedly, R 3 NDL 
 renewer, R 3 NR 
 renounce, RNns 
 renounced, RNNst 
 renouncement, RNNsMnt 
 renown, RNn 
 Renshaw, RnSh 
 
 renunciation, RNnss/m or 
 
 RNntfAshn 
 replenish, RPln 
 reporter, RPRtr 
 repu blicanis m , RPBsM 
 repugnance-t-ly, RPG 
 repute, R 3 Pt 
 require, R*Kw 
 requite, R*Kwt 
 requiter, R*Kwtr 
 resentment, RsNtMnt 
 reservance, RsRVns 
 reservation, RsR 
 reservative, RsRV T t or Rs- 
 
 RVtV 
 
 resevatory, RsRftR 
 reserve, RsRf 
 reservedly, RsRftL 
 reser vedness, RsRf ti Ns 
 reservee, RsRV 
 reserver-or, RsRfR 
 reservist, RsRVst 
 reservoir, RsRVT? or Rs- 
 
 resignation-, RsG 
 respective, RsPf 
 respectively, RsPVl 
 responsible-y, RsPnsB 
 restful, RsF or RsTFl 
 restiveness, RsTfNs 
 restoration, RsTRshn 
 restorative, RsTRTf 
 restrict, RsTrKt 
 restriction, RsTrshn 
 restrictive, RsTrf 
 restrictively, RsTrVl 
 restrictor, RsTrtr
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 resurrect, RsRKt 
 resurrection, RsRshn 
 resurrectionist, RsRshn St, 
 resurrectionize, RsRshns 
 retire, RTR 
 retract, RTrKt 
 retractor, RTrtr 
 retraction, RTrshn 
 retractive, RTrf 
 retrospect, RTrsP 
 retrospection, RTrsPshn 
 retrospective, RTrsPf 
 return, RTRn 
 Rev. (for reverend), RV 
 
 (See reverend.) 
 revengeful, RVJf 
 revenue, RV 
 reverend-t, RfRnt (See 
 
 Rev.) 
 
 reverential, RfRn 
 revert, RVrt 
 revivification, RVVFshn 
 revivify, RVVF 
 revolutionary, Lshn 3 R 
 revolve, Rf or RV1 
 revolver, Rf or RVlVr 
 reward, RwRt 
 re weigh, RW 
 re weighed, R TFt 
 reweight, RWt 
 Reynolds, RNlts or RN- 
 
 Zts 
 
 Rhenish, RnSh 
 rhetoric, RtrK 
 rhetorical, RtrKl 
 rhetorician, Rtrn or Rtr- 
 
 Shn 
 
 Rhode Island, RtLnt 
 
 Rhode Islander, RtLntR 
 
 Richard, RCrt 
 
 richer, R^Cr 
 
 riddle, Rt'L 
 
 ritual, Rt*L 
 
 road, Rt 
 
 Roderick, RtrK 
 
 Roger, RJr 
 
 roller, R1R 
 
 Roman, RMn 
 
 Roman Catholic-icism, R- 
 
 KTh 
 
 Roman Empire, RMMpr 
 Romanism, RMsM 
 romantic, RMntK 
 rotary, RTR 
 rotund, RTnt 
 rotundity, RTntT 
 roughness, RfNs 
 router, Rtr 3 
 R. R. (for railroad), RR or 
 
 R'R 
 
 rudimentary, R 3 DMntR 
 ruin, R 3 N 
 ruler, R1 3 R 
 runaway, RnW 
 runic, Rn 3 K 
 runner, RnR 
 rural, RR1 
 R.W. (for railway), RW 
 
 or RtW 
 
 .S 
 
 saddle, sDl 3 
 safflower, sFPR 
 saffron, sFrn 3
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 32?, 
 
 Sahara, S 3 R 
 sahib, S 3 B 
 Sambo, sMp 3 
 sample, sMpl 
 sanctification, sNgFshn 3 
 sanctify, sXgF 3 
 sanctity, sNgT 3 T 
 sanctum, sNgT 3 M 
 sanctum sanctorum, sNg- 
 
 T'MsNgtrM 
 sandwich, sNtC 
 San Francisco, sNss 1 !^ 
 Sanhedrim, sNDrM or sN- 
 
 hDrM 
 
 Sanskrit, sNsKrt or sNsKt 
 sash, sSh 3 
 sasher-y, sShr 
 Satan, sTn 3 
 Satanic, sTn 3 K 
 satchel, sCl 3 
 satin, sTn 3 
 satinet, sTn 3 T 
 satire, sTR 
 satiric, sTRK 
 satirical, sTRKl 
 satirist, sTRst 
 satisfactorily, sTs 3 RL 
 satisfactory, sTs 3 R 
 satisfier, sTs 3 F/i 
 satrap, sTrP 
 saturate, sTRt 
 Saturday, sTRD or sTrD 
 Saturn, sTRn 
 said, sD 
 sawer, S*R 
 sawyer, S 1 yR or S^R 
 saying, SNg 
 
 scarf, sKRf or sKrf 3 
 scenery, sN ] R 
 Schiller, ShLR 
 schism, SsM 
 Schlegel, ShlGl 
 scholar, sKLr or sKIR 
 schorl, ShrL 
 
 Schwab, Sh!B or Sh'wB 
 Schwartz, Sh 3 Rts, Shw- 
 
 Rts or ShwRts 
 Schweinfurth ShnFRt or 
 
 ShwnFRt 
 Schweinitz, Sh^ts or 
 
 ShwNts 
 
 Schwerin, ShRn or ShwRn 
 scientific, S^t 
 scientifical, S J NtZ 
 scoffer, sKf!R 
 score, sKR 
 scorn, sKRn 
 scorner, sKRnR 
 scornful, sKRnF 
 scoundrel, sKtRl 
 season, SsN 
 secede, SsD 
 secessionist, sSshnSt 
 secretary, sKrtR 
 security, sKrT 3 
 sedan, sDn 3 
 sedate, sDt 
 
 sedentary, sDtR or sDntR 
 seize, Ss 1 
 seized, Ss J D 
 seldom, sLtM 
 self, s or sLF 
 self-assertive, sSRtV 
 self-sacrifice, ssKrFs
 
 Till-; PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 self-same, ssM 
 
 self-satisfied, ssT 3 
 
 self -seeker, ssKr 1 
 
 self -slaughter, ssLtr 1 
 
 self-sufficient, ssFshnt 
 
 selves, ss or sLVs 
 
 senate, sNt 
 
 senator, sNtr 
 
 send, sNt or sND 
 
 senior, sNR or sNyR (See 
 
 ST.) 
 sensationalism, sNs,s/mZs- 
 
 M 
 
 senselessly, sNsZsZ 
 sensible-y-ity, sNsB 
 sensitiveness, sNsTfNs 
 sent, sNt 1 
 sentence, sNtNs 
 sentenced, sNtNst 
 sententious, sNtNShs 
 sentiment, sNtMnt 
 sentimental, sNtMntL 
 sentimentality, sNtMntLT 
 sentinel, sNtNl 
 sentry, sNtR 
 separable, sPr 3 Bl 
 separate, sPrt 3 
 separately, sPrt 3 L 
 separateness, sPrt 3 $Ns 
 separation, sPrshn 3 
 separatism, sPrts 3 M 
 separatist, sPrtst 3 
 separator, sPrtr 3 
 separatory, sPrtr 3 R 
 separatrix, sPrtr 3 Ks 
 September, sPtMpr 
 servant, sRVnt 
 
 serve, sRf 
 
 server, sRfR 
 
 servient, sRVnt 
 
 servitor, sRVtr 
 
 servitorship, sRVtrSh 
 
 servitude, sRVTt 
 
 serviture, sR 3 Vtr 
 
 sessional, Sshni L or SshnZ 
 
 setoff, sTf 1 
 
 settee sTe 1 
 
 settle, sTl 
 
 settler, sTIR 
 
 seven, 7 
 
 sever, sVr 
 
 severance, sVrns, 
 
 severe, ,s 
 
 severely, 
 
 severer, sV7?R 
 
 severest, sV^st 
 
 sew, S 
 
 sewed, sD 
 
 sewn, sN 
 
 sewage, S 3 J 
 
 sewer, S 3 R 
 
 sewerage, S 3 RJ 
 
 Shaker, ShKr 
 
 Shakespeare, ShKsPR or 
 
 ShsP 
 Shakespearean, ShKsPRn 
 
 or ShsPn 
 shale-y, Shi 
 shaloon, ShLn 
 shallop, ShLP 
 shallot, Sh J Lt 
 shallow, Sh 3 L 
 shamble, #AMpl or ShMpL 
 shampoo, Sh 3 Mp
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 325 
 
 shapely, ShPl or ShPL 
 share, Shr 
 Sharzwood, Shrs Wi 
 shaver, ShVr or ShVT? 
 shawl, Shi 1 
 shear, Shr 1 
 sheath, Sh J Th 
 sheathe, Sh a Dh 
 sheather, Sh J Dhr 
 Sheehy, Sh 1 
 Sheldon, ShlDn 
 Shelley, ShL 
 Shelbyville, ShlBVl 
 shelf, ShlF 
 shell, Shi 
 Shelton, ShltN 
 shelve, ShlV 
 Shency, ShnS 
 shepherd, ShPrt 
 sherry, ShR 
 shield, Shit 1 
 shillalah, ShLL 
 shilling, ShlNg 
 shilly, Sh x L 
 shimmer-y, xSAMr or Sh- 
 
 MR 
 
 shire, Shr 1 
 shoal, Shi 
 shore, Shr 
 shorn, Shrn 
 shorthand, ShrtU^t 
 shortsighted, Shr^sTt 
 short-time, Shrt 1 M 
 Shoshone, ShShN or Sh- 
 
 Shoyer, SA*i/R, Sh'R or 
 
 shrew, Shr 3 
 shrewd, Shrt 3 
 shrewdly, Shrt 3 L 
 shrill-y, ShrL 
 shriller, ShrLR 
 Shruble, ShrBl 
 shuttle, ShtL or ShTl 
 Sicily, sSL 
 sidle, sDl 1 
 sierra, SR or sR 
 siesta, SsT 
 sigh, S 1 
 sighed, sD 1 
 sight, sT 1 
 significancy, 
 Sihor, S*R 
 simile, sML 1 
 similitude, s 
 simmer, sMr 1 
 simper, sMpr 1 
 simpleness, sMp 1 Ns 
 simpler, sMpR 1 
 simplest, sMpst 1 
 simpleton, sMpn 1 
 simplification, sMpFshn 1 
 simplified, sMpFt 1 
 simplify, sMpF 1 
 single, sXgl 1 
 singsong, sNg a sNg 
 sinless, sNls 1 or s 
 sinlessly, 
 sinlessness, sNls 1 Ns or 
 
 s^ifLs 
 sinner, sNr 1 
 Sioux, S 3 
 sir, sR 
 sire, sR 1
 
 326 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL 
 
 Sisco, ssK 1 
 Sismondi, ssMnD 
 Sissman, ssMn 1 
 sister, ssTr 1 
 sister-in-law, ssT^Nl 
 site, sT 1 
 situate, sT'T 
 sixpence, sKsPns 
 sizzle, SsL 
 skillfulness, sKlf x Ns 
 slack-water, sLKwtr or 
 
 sLKWtr 
 slash, sLSh 
 slashed, sLSht 
 slavish, 
 slavishly, s 
 slavishness, 
 small, sML 
 
 smaller, sMLr or sMLR 
 smash, sMSh 
 smashed, sMSht 
 sociability, sShBt 
 sociable, sShB 
 sociableness, sShBns 
 social, sShl 
 sociality, sShlT 
 socialism, sShlsM 
 socialist-zed, sShlst 
 socialistic, sShlsK 
 socials-ize, sShls 
 society, SsT 
 Socinian, sSuN 
 Socinus, sSNs 
 soever, SV 
 Soho, S 
 sojourn, sJrn 
 
 soldier, sLJr, sLtr (see 
 
 sec. 70) or sJr 
 solsticial, sLsTShl 
 somber, sMpr 1 
 somehow, sM-now 
 something, sMNg 
 sometime, sMtM 
 somewhere, sMn?/;R 
 sonant, sXXt 
 son-in-law, sNnL 
 songstress, sNgstrs 1 or 
 
 sNgsT'Rs 
 sooner, sNr 3 
 soonest, sNst 3 
 Sorosjs, sRss 
 sorrel, sRl 1 
 sorrily, sR 1 !* 
 sorrow-y, sR 1 
 sorrowful, sRf 1 
 South Carolina, sTh 3 Kr 
 South Carolinan, sTh 3 Krn 
 South Dakota, sThDKt 
 South Dakotan, sThDKtN 
 southeast, sSt 1 
 southeaster, sStr 1 
 southeastern, sStrn 1 
 southerly, sDhrL or sDhL 
 southern, sDhrn or sDhn 
 southerner, sDhrR or 
 
 sDhnR 
 southward, s?rRt 3 or sTh 3 - 
 
 %'Rt 
 
 southwest, sWst 3 
 south wester, sWstr 3 
 southwestern, sWs 3 Rn 
 sow, S 
 sowed, sD
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 327 
 
 sown, sN 
 specialist, s 
 speciality, sP-S 
 specialization, sPShlshn 
 specialize, sPA7/ls, 
 specialty, sPT or sP/6VtlT 
 specification, sPsFshn 
 sphere, sFT? 
 sphericity, sFRsT 
 sport, sPRt 
 square-d, sKw 
 squarely, sKwL 
 squatter, sKwtr 1 
 Sr. (for senior), sR 1 
 stal)ility, stBLT 
 stable, stBL 
 Stacy, stS 
 staid, staD or sTD (See 
 
 stayed. ) 
 
 staidness,staDNs or stDNs 
 stand, stNt 3 
 standard, stNtrD 3 or stNt- 
 
 Rt 3 
 
 staple stPL 
 star-ry, stR 3 
 starred, stRt 3 
 start, stRt 3 
 Staten, stTn 
 statesman, stTsMn 
 statesmen, stTs 1 Mn 
 station, stShn 
 stationary-ery-er, stShR 
 stationed, stShnt 
 statist, stTst 3 
 statistic, stTsK 
 statistical, stTsKl 
 
 statistician, stTsTshn or 
 
 statuary, stT 3 R 
 statue, stT 3 
 statuesque, stT 3 sK 
 statuette, stT 3 T 
 stature, stTr 3 or stT 3 K 
 status, stTs 
 statute, stTt 3 
 statutory, stTt 3 R 
 stay, sT 
 stayed, stiiD or sTD(See 
 
 staid. ) 
 stead-y, stD 
 steadiness, stDNs 
 steamboat, stMpt 
 stear, stR 1 
 stearate, stR'T 
 stearic, stR^ 
 stearin, stRn 1 
 steatite, stT'T 
 steed, stD 1 
 steeple, stP'L 
 steno, stN 
 
 stenograph-y-ic-al, stNG 
 stenographer, stNR or 
 
 st^Gr 
 
 stenographist, stNGst 
 stenotype-y, stNtP 
 stentor, stNtr 
 stentorian, stNtrn 
 stereotype, stRt 1 ? 
 stereotyper, stRt a Pr 
 sterile, stRL 
 sterling, stRLNg 
 stern, stRn 
 stew, sT 3
 
 328 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 steward, sT 3 Rt 
 
 stewardess, sT 3 RtS 
 
 stewardship, sT 3 RtSh 
 
 Stewart, sT 3 Rt 
 
 stewed, stD 3 
 
 stewish, sT 3 Sh 
 
 stied, stD 1 
 
 stipple, 6tP*L 
 
 stipulate, stPLt 
 
 stipulation, stPLshn 
 
 St Loui, stL or sNt L 3 
 
 St Louis, stLs or sNt Ls 3 
 
 stone, stN 
 
 stoned, stNt 
 
 stood, stD 3 
 
 store-y, stR 
 
 storm, stRM 
 
 stout, stT 3 
 
 stouter, stTr 3 
 
 stoutest, stTst 3 
 
 stove, stV 
 
 stow, sT 
 
 stowage, sTJ 
 
 stowed, stD 
 
 Stowell, sTL 
 
 stower, sTR 
 
 strain, sTrn 
 
 strangle, sTrNgl 
 
 strangled, sTrNglt 
 
 strangler, sTrNglR 
 
 stratagem, sTrtJM 
 
 strategist, sTrtJst 
 
 strategy, sTrtJ 
 
 stratification, sTrTfKshn 
 
 stratify, sTrTF 
 
 Streeter, sTrtr 1 
 
 stringency, sTriJ 
 
 strong, sTrNg 
 stronger, sTrNgr 
 strongest, sTrNgst 
 stronghold, sTrXglt or 
 
 sTrXghLt 
 strongly, sTrNgl 
 structure, sTrtr 
 stub-by, stB 
 stubble, stBL 
 stubborn, stBrn or stBRn 
 stubbornly, stBrnL or 
 
 stBRnL 
 stubbornness, stBrns or 
 
 stBRns 
 
 student, stDnt 3 
 study, stD 
 stutter, stTr 
 sty, sT^See stied.) 
 Stygian, stJn 1 
 suasible, sWsB 
 suasion, sWshn 
 suasive, sWsV 
 suasoiy, sWsR 
 suave, sWV 
 suavely, sWVl 
 suavity, sWVT 
 subaltern, sBLtrn 
 subjectively, sBVl 
 subjectiveness, sBfNs 
 subjectivity, sBfT 
 subject-matter, sBMtr 
 subpoena, sPN 
 subserve, sBsRf 
 subservience, sBsRVns 
 subserviency, sBsRtV 
 subservient-ly, slisKVnt
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 329 
 
 substantial, sBsTn 
 substantiate, sBsTSht 
 substantiation, sBsTSh or 
 
 sBsTShn 
 substitute, sBsTt 
 substitution, sBsTshn 
 subtracter, sBTrtr 
 subtraction, sBTrshn 
 success, sKss 
 successful, sKssF 
 succession, sKssshn 
 successive, sKssV 
 successively, sKssVL 
 sue, S 
 sued, sD 3 
 Suez, Ss 3 
 suffer, sFr 
 sufferance, sFrns 
 sufficience, sFshns 
 sufficiency, sFiSh 
 sufficient-ly, sFshnt 1 
 suffragan, sFrGn 
 suffrage, sFrJ 
 sugar, ShGr 
 suggester, sJstr 
 suggestion, sJn 
 suggestive, sJf 
 suicide, SsD 
 suit, sT 3 
 suitable-y, st 3 Bl 
 suite, sWt* 
 summer, sMr 
 snn, sN 
 Sunday, sND 
 sunder, sXtr 
 sundown, sNDn 3 
 suntish, sNFA'/> 
 
 sunflower, 
 
 sunless, sNls or sNZs 
 
 sunlight, sNlt 1 , sNLt 1 or 
 
 sNZt 1 
 
 sunlike, sNUK 
 sunlit, sNlt 1 , sNLt 1 or 
 
 sNZt 1 
 
 sunned, sNt 
 sunnier, sNR 
 sunniest, sNst 
 sunrise, sNRs 
 sunset, sNsT 
 sunshine, sJsShn 
 sunstroke, sNsTrK or 
 
 sNstr 
 
 superable, sPrBl 
 superficial, sPrF 
 superficies, sPrF/SAs 
 superintend-ent, sPrNTnt 
 superintendence, sPrNTnt- 
 
 Na 
 superintendency, sPrNT- 
 
 iDor sPrNTniD 
 superior, sPRR 
 superscribe, sPrsK 
 superscription, sPrsKshn 
 supplant, sPlnt 3 
 supplanter, sPlnt 3 R 
 supple, sPl 
 supplicate, sPlKt 
 supreme, sPrM 
 surely, ShrL 
 surmountable, sRMntB 
 surpass, sRPs 
 surrender, sRNtr 
 surround, sRnt 3 
 surveyor,
 
 330 
 
 THE PHONOGUAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 susceptible, SsPt or SsPt- 
 
 Bl 
 
 suspect, ssPKt 
 suspend, ssPnt 
 suspicion, ssPshn 
 suspire, ssPr 1 
 sustain, ssTn 
 sutler, sTLR 
 suttle, sTl 
 swage, sJ or swj 
 swale, 
 swallow, 
 swamp-y, sWMp 
 swash, sir-Sh 1 
 swashed, sVF-Sht 1 
 swath, sw-Th 1 
 swathe, sw-Dh 
 sweat, sWt 
 sweater, sWtr 
 sweaty, sw-T 
 s weati ness, sw-TNs 
 Swede, s TFt 1 
 Sweden, sTFi'N 
 Swedenborg, sTFt'NB 
 Swedish, sw-D'Sh or slFt 1 - 
 
 '.Sh 
 
 sweep, sWP 
 sweet, sWt 1 
 sweetheart, sWt'Rt 
 sweetish, sw-T 1 Sh or s Wt l - 
 
 iSh 
 
 sweetly, sWt*L 
 swell, mtjLi 
 swelter, s^Ltr 
 swift, sWFt, swFt 1 or 
 
 sFt 1 
 
 swifter, sWFtr, sw-Ftr 1 or 
 
 sFtr 1 
 swiftest, sWFtst, sw-Ftst 1 
 
 or sFtst 1 
 swiftly, sWFtL, sw-Ft'L 
 
 or sFt'L 
 swiftness, s WFtNs, sw-Ft 1 - 
 
 Ns or sFt'Ns 
 swindle, sWnt 1 
 swindler, sWnt'R or 
 
 sWt'Lr 
 
 swish, sSh 1 orsir-Sh 1 
 switch, sC 1 or sw-C 1 
 switchman, sC'Mn 
 switchmen, sCn 1 
 Switzerland, sWtsRLnt 
 swollen, sv/'Ln 
 symbol, sMpL 
 sympathetic, sMpTht 
 sympathetical, sMpThtKl 
 sympathy, sMpTh 
 symptom, sAIpt'M 
 synonym, sNnM 
 synonymous, sXnMs 
 
 tabernacle, TBr 
 tachygraph-y-ic-al, TKG 
 tachygrapher, TKGr 
 tachygraphist, TKGst 
 taffeta-y, TfT 
 Tahiti/ TT 
 talkativeness, T^KtiVs 
 Tallahassee, TLS or T1S 
 tallyho, TL 
 tano-ence, TnJns
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 331 
 
 tangent, TnJnt 
 tangential, TnJn or TnJ- 
 
 Shl 
 
 tangible-ness, TnJ 
 tangle, TNgl 
 tannin, TnN 
 tantamount, TTMnt or 
 
 TtMnt 
 
 tariff, TRf or Trf 3 
 tarnish, TrnSh 
 tart, T 3 Rt 
 Tartar, T s Rtr 
 tartarous-us, T 3 RTRs 
 Tartary, T 3 RTR 
 tasteful, TsFl 
 technic, TK 
 technical, TK1 
 technicality, TKlt 
 technics, TKs 
 technology, TKN1J 
 telegram, TlfG 
 telegram mic, TlfGK 
 telegraph-y-ic-al, TIG 
 telegrapher, TIGr 
 telegraphist, TIGst 
 telephoner, TlfR 
 telephonist, Tll'St or Tlst 
 temper, TMpr 
 tempered, TMprt 
 temperament, TMprMnt 
 temperance, TMprns 
 temperate, TMprT 
 temperature, TMprtr 
 tempest, TMpst 
 templar, TMP1R 
 temple, TMpl 
 temporal, TMprL 
 
 temptation, TMpTshn 
 tempter, TMptr 
 tenable, TNB1 
 tenant, TnNt 
 
 tendency, TntS or TntNS 
 tendon, TntN 
 tendonous, TntNs 
 tenement, TNMnt 
 tenemental, TNMntL 
 tenet, TNt 
 
 Tennessee, TnS or TNS 
 Tennesseean, TnSn or TN- 
 
 Sn 
 
 tenon, TnN 
 tensile, TNsL 
 tentation, TntShn 
 tentative, TntTf 
 tentatively, TntTVl 
 term, TrlVI 
 terminal, TrMNl , 
 terminate, TrMNt 
 termination, TrMNshn 
 terminator, TrMNtr 
 terminatory, TrMNtR 
 terminer, TrMNr 
 territory, TRt 
 territorial, TRtRl 
 terse, TRs 
 terser, TRsR 
 tersest, TRssT 
 tersely, TRsL 
 testament, TsMnt 
 testamentary, TsMntK 
 testification, TsFshn 
 testify, TsF 
 testimonial, TsMKl 
 i testimony, TsM or TMN
 
 332 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MAXL'AL. 
 
 tete, Tt 
 
 teteatete, TtiTt 
 Texan, TssN or TKsX 
 Texas, Tss or TKss 
 text, TKst 
 Thahash, ThSh 
 texture, TKstr, orTKsTr 
 Thanet, ThNT 
 thankful, Th 3 Fl . 
 thankless, Th s Ls 
 thanksgiving, Ths 3 G 
 Thawler, ThLr or ThLR 
 thea, Th 1 
 theater-ic, Thtr 1 
 theatrical, Thtr'Kl 
 theism, ThsOI 
 theist, Thst 1 
 theistic, Ths 1 !^ 
 theistical, Ths^l 
 thence,^Dhns 
 thenceforth, DhnsFTh 
 thenceforward, DhnsFwRt 
 theology, ThlJ 
 theologian, ThlJn 
 theological, ThlJKl 
 theorem, Th a RM 
 theoretical, Th^tKl 
 theory, Th 1 !* 
 thereabout, DhrBt 
 thereafter, DhrFt 
 thereat, Dhrt 
 therefore, DhrF 
 therefrom, DhrFr 
 therein, DhrN 
 thereinto, DhrNT 
 thereof, DhrPtoid 
 thereon, Dhrn 
 
 thereout, Dhrt 3 
 
 thereto, DhrT 
 
 theretofore, DhrtFT? 
 
 thereunto, DhrnT 
 
 thereupon, DhrPn 
 
 therewith, DhrDh 
 
 thes (pi. of the), Rtsoid 1 
 or Dhs 1 
 
 these (pro.), Dhs 1 or Rts- 
 oid 1 (Upward ' 'the"tick 
 and S circle by way of 
 license. ) 
 
 thicket, ThKt 
 
 thill, Thl 1 
 
 thiller, Thl J R 
 
 thinker, ThiR or ThR 
 
 thistle, ThsZ 
 
 thither, Dhtr 1 
 
 thitherto, Dhr 1 ! 
 
 thole, Thl 
 
 Thor, Thr 1 
 
 thorn, Thrn 1 
 
 thorner, Thr 1 ^^ 
 
 thorniest, Thi^Xst 
 
 thornless, Thrn^Ls 
 
 thorny, Thr^ 
 
 thorough, ThR 
 
 thoroughly, ThRl 
 
 those, Z 3 or Dhs 3 
 
 threshold, ThrShltor Thr- 
 ShLt 
 
 throttle, ThrtL 
 
 throughout, Thrt 3 or 
 Thr 3 T 
 
 thumbed, ThMt 
 
 thumped, ThMpt 
 
 Thursday, ThrsD
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 thwack, ThwK 
 thwacked, ThwKt 
 thwaite, Thwt 
 thwart, ThwRt 
 thwarter, ThwRtr 
 thwite, Thwt 1 
 thwittle, Thwt 1 !, 
 tidal, Tt 1 !, . 
 tide, Tt 1 
 
 tide-waiter, Tt'Wtr 
 tide-way, Tt l W 
 tiffet, T ;i Ft 
 timber, T x Mpr 
 timbre^ TMBrL 
 timely, T^.LjT 1 Lor T J M- 
 
 L 
 
 timid, TMt 
 title,. Tt'L 
 to-day, TD 
 to-do, TD 
 tomahawk, TMK 
 to-morrow, TMR 
 ton, Tn 
 tonic, TnK 
 tonical, TnKL 
 to-night, TNt 
 tonnage, TnJ 
 torment, TrMnt 
 tormenter-or, TrMNtr 
 torture, TRtr 
 total, TtL 
 township, Tn 3 Sh 
 townsman-men, Ts 3 Mn 
 traction, Trshn 
 trammel, TrMl 
 tranquil, Tr'Ng 
 tranquil! ty, Tr s NgKlt 
 
 tranquilize, Tr 3 Ngs 
 transact, Trs 3 Kt 
 transaction, Trs 3 Kshn or 
 
 transactor, Trs 3 Ktr 
 transatlantic, TrsTlntK or 
 
 TrsTLntK 
 
 transcend-ence. TrsNt 
 transcendency, TrsNtS 
 transcendent-ly-ness, Trs- 
 
 Nnt 
 
 transcendental, TrfN 
 transcendentalism, Trf Nt 
 transcendentalist, TrfNst 
 transcendentality, TrfNT 
 transept, TrNsPt 
 transfer, TrsFr 
 transform, TrsF 
 transformation, TrsFshn 
 transformer, TrsFMr 
 transfuse, TrsFs 
 tranship, TrnShP 
 transient, TrsNt or Trn- 
 
 Shnt 
 
 transit, Trs 3 T 
 transition, Trnsskn 1 
 transitive, TrsTf 
 transitory, TrsTr 
 translate, TrsLt 
 translucent, TrsLsNt 
 transmit, TrsMt 
 transmute, Trs 3 Mt 
 transom, TrNsM 
 transpire, TrsPr 
 transplant, TrsPlnt 
 transport, TrsPRt 
 transportation, TrsPshn
 
 334 
 
 TUE PHONOGRAPHIC MAM Al.. 
 
 transporter, TrsPtr 
 transpose, Trs 3 Ps 
 transposition, Trs 3 Ps.sAw 
 transship, TrsShP 
 transubstantiate-ion. TrsB 
 transubstantiated, TrsBt 
 transverse, TrsVrs 
 treater, Trtr 1 
 tremble, TrMpl 
 tremendous, TrMnDs 
 tremor, TrMr 
 trespass, TrsPs 
 trial, Tr'L 
 trimmer, Tr J Mr 
 trisect, Tr J sKt 
 trisection, Ti^sKshn 
 trivet, TrVt or TrfT 
 trotter, Trtr 1 
 trombone, TrMpn 
 truly, Tr 3 L 
 trumped, TrMpt 
 trumpet, TrMpT 
 trumpeted, TrMpTt 
 trumpeter, TrMptr 
 trustful, TrsFl 
 trustworthy, TrswRDh 
 truthfulness, TrfNs 
 tuckahoe, TK 
 Tuesday, TsD 
 tuition, Tshn 3 or TShn 
 tuitionary, Tshn 3 R or 
 
 TShR 
 
 tumble, TMpl 
 tumbler, TMplR 
 tutor, Ttr 3 
 two, 2 
 twofold, 2 FZt 
 
 twoedged, 2 e-Jt 
 twohanded, 2 NDt 3 
 twopenny, 2 PN 
 twoply, 2 PI 1 
 tympan, TMpn 
 tympanum, TMpnM 
 Tyrrell, TR1 
 
 LESSON 39. 
 
 U 
 
 ubiquity, BKwT 
 ugh, ui 
 
 ult (for ultimo), Lt 
 ulterior, LtRR 
 ulteriorly, LtRRL 
 ultimate-ly, LTMt 
 ultimatum, LTMtM 
 ultimo, LTM 
 ululate, LLt 
 ululation, LLshn 
 Ulysses, Lss 1 or YLss 
 umbel, Mpl 
 umber, Mpr 
 umpire, Mpr 
 unalterable, NLtr a Bl 
 unanimity, NnMT 3 
 uncial, N-5A1 
 uncivil, nsVl 1 
 uncivilized, nsVlst 1 
 uncommon, N l5 Mn 
 uncommonly, N'MnL 1 
 unconstitutional, NsTshn 3 
 unconstitutionality, Ns- 
 
 Tshn 3 T 
 
 unction, Ngshn 
 unctuous, NgTs
 
 THE PHONVUiRAlMIK 1 MANU'AL. 
 
 underhand, NtNt 
 Underbill, NthL 
 undermine, NtMn 
 undermined, NtMnt 
 undersign, NtsN 
 undersigned, NtsNt 
 understand, Nt 3 sTnt 
 understood, Nt s sTt (See 
 
 interested.) 
 undertake, Nt^TK 
 undertook, NtT 3 K 
 underwrite, NtRt 
 underwriter, NtRtr 
 underwritten, NtRtN 
 unearthly, NrThL or 
 
 NRThL 
 uneasy, NZ 1 
 unenlightened, NNlTnt 
 unequal, N M K1 
 unerring, NRNg 
 unexampled, N 3 GsMp 
 unexempt, NGsMpt 
 unexpectetl-ly, NKsP 
 unhoped, NPt 3 
 unhorse, NhRs 
 unhurt, NhRt 
 unicorn, NKrn 
 uniform-ed-ly, Yn 3 F 
 uniformity, Yn 3 Ft 
 unify, Y 3 NF 
 unimportant, N 1 Mp 
 unimproved, NMp 
 uninfluenced, N'Nst 
 uninfluential, N^JNShl 
 uninteresting, NNtsT 
 unionist, N 3 JS'st 
 unique, N 1 K 
 
 unison, N 3 sN 
 unit, Nt 3 or Y-Nt 3 
 Unitarian, NT 3 Rn 
 unite, Y^t 
 unity, NT 3 
 United States, Nss 
 universal, VrsL 
 university, VrsT 
 unlace, Nls 
 unlaced, Nlst 
 unlanched, NINCt 3 
 unlatch, NIC 3 
 unlawful, N1F1 1 
 unlearn, NLrn 
 unlettered, NltrD 
 unlike, N1 J K 
 unlikely. NPKl 
 unlimber, NIMpR 
 unlimited, NIMTt 
 unload, N1D 
 unlock, Nl'K 
 unloose, Nls 3 
 unloosed, Nlst 3 
 unloosen, Nls 3 N 
 unlovely, N1V1 
 unluckier, NIKr 
 unluckiest, NIKst 
 unluckily, N1KI 
 unlucky, NIK 
 unmeasured, NZhrt 3 
 unquestionable, NKvvnB 
 unransomed, NRnstMt 
 unread, NRt 
 unready, NRD 
 unreal, NR1 1 
 unreality, NR1 1 ? 
 unreasonable, NRsNBl
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 X 
 
 urireave, NRf 1 
 unrecognized, NR'Nst 
 unrecompensed, NR'Pnst 
 unreconciled, NR'sLt 
 unrecorded, NRKrt 
 unrecumbent, NR'Bnt 
 unredeemed, NRDMt 
 unredressed, NRDrst 
 unregeneration, NRJshn 
 unregarded, Nr 3 Gt 
 unregretted, NrGt 
 unreined, NRnt 
 unrepentant, NRPntNt 
 unrepresented, NRP 
 unrest, NRst 
 unrestrained, NRsTrnfc 
 unrighteous, NRTs 1 
 unripened, NR*Pnt 
 unrivaled, NR^lt 
 unroof, NRf s 
 unsaddle, nsDl 3 
 unsatchel, nsCl 3 
 unsatisfactory, NsTsR 
 unscriptural, nsKr x L 
 unscrupulous, nsKrPls 
 unseasoned, NSsNt 
 unselfish, nsSh 
 unsequester, nsKwstr 
 unsettle, nsTl 
 unsociability, nsShBt 
 unsociable, nsShB 
 unsociableness, nsShBns 
 unsocial, nsShl 
 unsquare, nsKw 
 unsubstantial, NsBsTn 
 unsummoned, nsMnt 
 unsupplied, nsPlt 1 
 
 unto, 
 
 untold, NTH 
 untoward, NTrt 
 untwine, NTwn 
 untwist, NTwst 
 unusual, NZh 
 unwilling, 
 unwritten, 
 unyielding, NYt- 1 or 
 
 upbraid, PBrt 
 
 uppermost, uPrMst 
 
 upright, PRt 
 
 uproot, P 3 Rt 
 
 upstairs, Pstrs 
 
 upward, Pw?Rt 
 
 Uranus, yRNs 
 
 Uriah, yR 1 
 
 usage, Z 3 J 
 
 usable, Z 3 B1 
 
 useful, S 3 F1 
 
 useless, S 3 Ls 
 
 uselessly, S 3 LsL 
 
 usurer, ZhRR 
 
 usurious, ZhRs 
 
 usurp, ZRP 
 
 usurper, ZRPr 
 
 usury, ZhR 
 
 Utah, Y-T 3 
 
 Utahan, r-Tn 3 
 
 Utan, Y-Tn 3 
 
 Ute, Yt 3 
 
 utensil, Y-TNsZ 
 
 Utica, Y-T 3 K 
 
 utile, Y-TL 
 
 utilitarian, Y-TLtrn 
 
 utilitarianism, Y-TLtrnsM
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 utility, Y-TLT 
 utilize, Y-TLs 
 utilized, Y-TLst 
 utmost, TMst 
 Utopia, Y-TP 
 Utopian, Y-TPn 
 utter, Tr 
 utterance, Trns 
 uttermost, TrMst 
 uva, Y-V 3 
 uvate, Y-Vt 3 
 uzcma, Y-Z 3 M 
 
 vacancy, V;K 
 vacant, VKNt 
 vacantly, VKNtZ 
 vacation, VKshn 
 vacillancy, Vs;L 
 vacillant, VsLnt 
 vacillate, VsLt 
 vacillation, VsLshn 
 Vanhoesan, VnSn 
 Vanhorn, VnRn 
 Vanhouten, VnTn 
 vanish, VnSh 
 vanquish, VNgSh 
 variety, VRT 
 varnish, VrnSh 
 vaseline, VsLn 
 Vashti, VShT 
 vassal, Vs 3 Z 
 vassalage, Vs 3 LJ 
 Vassar, VsR 
 vaulter, Vltr 1 
 vegetable-ate, VJt 
 vegetation, VJshn 
 
 vegetative, VJtV 
 vehement, VMnt 
 vehicle, VKl 
 velocity, VLst 
 vengeance, VJns 
 venire, Vn*R 
 ventilate, VntLt 
 venture, VNtr 
 veracity, VRst 
 verd, Vrt 
 verdant, VrtNt 
 verdict, VrtKt 
 verdure, Vrtr 
 verge, Vr J 
 
 verisimilitude, VrsMLTt 
 Vermont, VrMnt 
 Vermonter, VrMntR 
 versatile, VrsTL 
 versus, Vrss 
 vert, Vrt 
 vertant, VrtNt 
 vessel, VsZ 
 vestry, VsTr 
 vesture, Vstr 
 veteran, Vtrn 
 veterinarian, VtrnRn 
 veterinary, VtrnR 
 vexatious, VKsShs 
 via, V 1 
 
 viceversa, V^Vr or VVr 
 vicious, V6ViS 
 viciously, VShsL 
 viciousness, V -6VisXs 
 victor, VKtr 
 victory, VRTR 
 victual, Vt*Z 
 victualer, Vt T Lr
 
 338 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MAX CAT.. 
 
 vigil, VJ1 
 vineyard, Vn'Rt 
 Virginia, V J J 
 Virginian, V 1 Jn 
 visavis, Vs*V 
 vivavoce, ViV or VVS 
 vision, Vshn 1 
 visionary, Vshi^R 
 visit, Vs'T 
 visitant, Vs ir Tnt 
 visitation, Vs^shn 
 visitor, Vs'TR 
 visor, VsR 
 visual, VZA1 or VZhl 
 visualize, VZAls or VZbls 
 vital, Vt'Z 
 vitativeness, VTTfNs 
 vitiation, V/S/tshn 
 vitiosity, VShst or V//sT 
 vivi fl cation, VVFshn 
 vivify, VVF 
 Vladimir, VltMr 
 vocation, VKshn 
 void, Vt 1 
 Volapuk, V1PK 
 volatile, VLtL 
 voracity, VoRst 
 votary, VtR 
 vouch, V 3 C 
 vow, V 3 
 voyage, V J J 
 voyager, V^r 
 voyageur, V 3 Jr or Vw 1 - 
 
 Zhr 
 
 Vreeland, Vi^Lnt 
 vulture, Vltr 
 
 \\" 
 
 waddle, TJVL 
 waft, W 3 Ft 
 
 vvafter, W 3 Ftr or w-Ftr 3 
 wage, w-J 
 
 wager, w-JR or w-Jr 
 Wahabee, AVB 
 Wahoo, W 3 
 wainscot, WsKt 
 Wakefield, A\^KFlt 
 wakeful, WKf 
 wakef ulness, WKfNs 
 wander, W'Ntr 
 wanderer, ^\' ' XtrR 
 ward, 
 warder, 
 warehouse, ?rRS 
 warren, ^Rn 1 
 wary, %'R 
 wash, TT-Sh 1 
 washed, TF-Sht 1 
 washer, Tr-Shr 1 
 Washington, Sh J Ngt 
 Washingtonian, Sh'NgtNn 
 washout, ir-Sh 1 '! 
 wast, St or Wst 1 
 wasteful, WsF or WsTF 
 watchfulness, Cf^s 
 watchman, C 1 Mn 
 watchmen, Cn 1 
 watery, Wt a R 
 wattle, Wt 3 L 
 Wauwatosa, WWtS 
 wave, "NVV 
 waved, AWt 
 waver, WVr
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 we, w 1 or W 
 NVwmler, WLr or WLR 
 wedge, w-J 
 Wednesday, WnsD 
 weed, TFt 1 
 weedy, w-D 1 
 Weehawken, WKn 
 weigher, WR 
 weight, Wt 
 weighed, Wt 
 weighty, w-T 
 welcome, 7/jLK 
 Weller, LR 
 westerly, WsRL 
 western, AYsRn 
 West Virginia, WsVJ 
 West Virginian, WsVJn 
 westward, WsRt 
 wharf, iitvlli * 
 wharfage, n?^R 1 FJ 
 wharf ager, HwR'FJr 
 Avharf-boat, m/'R'FBt or 
 
 wharfinger, 
 
 Wharton, H^RTn (See 
 
 Yharton. ) 
 whatnot, Tnt 1 
 whatsoever, T^V 
 wheat, nWt 1 
 Whedge, nw-J 
 whence ver, nWns'.V (See 
 
 sec. 383, a.) 
 whencesoever, nWnsi sV 
 
 (See whencever. ) 
 whenever, nWV 
 whensoever, nWsV 
 
 whereabout, Hw>RBt 
 
 whereas, H?^Rs 
 
 whereat, H?/jRt 
 
 whereby, 
 
 wherefore, 
 
 wherein, 
 
 whereinto, 
 
 whereof, H?t'Rf 
 
 whereon, H?/jRn 
 
 wheresoever, 
 
 whereto, m/jRT 
 
 whereunto, 
 
 whereupon, H?/'RPn 
 
 wherever, HwRV 
 
 whereout, Hii/'Rt 3 
 
 wherewith, ii^RDh 
 
 wherewithal, H</.'RDhL 
 
 wherry, 
 
 whey, 
 
 whichsoever, CsV 
 
 Whidge, Hw-J 1 
 
 whiff, 
 whiff ed-et, HA\ Tl Ft 
 whiffety, nW^T 
 whilst, H TFLst 1 
 whilom, m/'I/M 
 whim, HW 1 ^! (See Hume.) 
 whimsical, nW^MsKl 
 whine, nWn 1 (See hewn.) 
 Whipple, nW 1 ?! 
 whirlwind, Hw?RLnt 
 whisker, nWsKr 
 white, nWt 1 
 whiten, nW^N 
 Whitehouse, HWtS 
 whitewash, HWt 1 -iF-Sh 
 whitey, Hw 1 -! 1
 
 340 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 whithersoever, n Wtr 1 s V 
 whitish, HW-TShor nWt 1 - 
 
 iSh 
 
 whom, HU or M 3 
 whomsoever, Hu 2 sV or 
 
 MsV 3 
 whose ver, Hus 2 iV (See 
 
 whencever. ) 
 whosesoever, Huss 2 V or 
 
 Hus 2 < sV (See whenceso- 
 
 ever. ) 
 
 whoso, HU 2 S 
 whosoever, Hu 2 sV 
 widow, w-D 1 
 widowhood, w-D*D 
 width, w-DTh 
 Wilmington, wLMXgt 
 Winchell, WnCL 
 Winchester, WnCstr 
 winder, W x Xtr 
 windrow, Wnt*R 
 Wington, WNgtN 
 winner, Wn*R 
 winter, W*Xtr 
 wintry, Wnt*R 
 Wisconsan, WsKsN or 
 
 WsK 
 Wisconsin, WsKsN or 
 
 W r sK 
 Wisconsiner, WsKsNr or 
 
 WsKr 
 
 wisdom, Ws*M 
 wistful, Ws'F 
 wit, Wt 1 
 witch, w-C 1 
 
 witchery, w-OR or TF-Cr 1 
 withdraw, Dh J Dr 
 
 withdrew, Dh 3 Dr 
 withe-y, w-Th 1 
 withholden, DhlDn 
 without, Dht, or w-T 3 
 withstand, Dh^Tnt 
 witness, Wt^'s or T'Ns 
 witticism, w-TssOI 
 wittier, w-^R 
 wittiest, w-Tst 1 
 wittily, w-T J L 
 wittiness, w-T^Xs 
 witty, w-T 1 
 woman, AVMn 
 women, W J Mn 
 wonder, WXtr 
 wonderful, WXtrF 
 wonderous, WXtrs 
 won't, Wnt 
 wood, Wt 3 
 wooden, Tft 3 X 
 woodiness, w-D 3 Xs 
 woody, w-D 3 
 woo, W 3 
 wooed, TFt 3 
 
 Woo-Hoo, W 3 or W 3 HU 
 work, %'R 3 
 worker, wR 3 R 
 work-house, %'R 3 S 
 working-class, wR 3 'Kls 
 working-man, ?#R 3 'Mn 
 working-men, ioR 1? Mn 
 working-woman, u'R 3 'W- 
 
 Mn 
 working- women, //-R l ' W- 
 
 Mn 
 
 workman, ^'Rri 3 
 workmanlike, </jRn 3 K
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 341 
 
 workmanly, ?/_'Rn 3 L 
 workmanship, ?/jRn 3 Sh 
 workmen, wRa i 
 work-woman, ?rR 3 WMn 
 work-women, ?/ < R 1 WMn 
 work-shop, ?/-R 3 ShP 
 world, Lt or wRLt 
 worldling, LtLNg or 
 
 worldly, LtL or ?rRLtL 
 worrel, WRi or u<RL 
 worship, ?rRSh 
 worshipper, ?rRShr 
 Worthington, wRDh'.Ngt 
 write, Rt 1 
 writer, Rtr 1 
 written, Rt*N 
 Wyatt, w-T 1 
 Wynal, AVnL 
 Wynly, WnL 
 Wyoming, W a M or WM- 
 
 Ng 
 A\ yominger, W 1 Mr or AV- 
 
 MNgr 
 
 X 
 
 Xagua, AGw 3 
 Xalapa, hR 3 P 
 Xanthippe, ZntP 
 X;ivier, ZVr 
 Xenia, Z 1 N 
 Xenophon, ZnFn 
 Xerxes, ZRKss 
 Ximines, hMNs 
 xilophone, ZLFn 
 Xylander, ZLNtr 
 xyst, Zst 1 
 
 xyster, Zstr 1 
 Xystus, Zs^ 
 
 yacht, Yt 1 
 yachter, Ytr 1 
 yachtman, Yt 1 Mn 
 yachtsman, YtsMn or 
 
 Y-Ts 1 Mn 
 yager. YGr 
 yah, Y 3 
 yahoo, Y 3 
 Yak, Y 3 K 
 Yale, Yl 
 yam, Y 3 M 
 Yank-ee, YNgK 
 yanolite, YNZt 
 yaourt, 7/Rt 3 
 yap, Y-P 3 
 yarage, ?/RJ 
 yardstick, yRtsTK or 
 
 2/Rtst 
 Yarmouth, yRMTh or 
 
 yR 3 Th 
 yarn, 7/Rn 3 
 Yarnell, 
 yarrish, y 
 
 yarrow, yii 3 or Y 3 R 
 yataghan, Y-TGn 
 Yates, Yts 
 Yattaw, Y-T 3 
 yaupon, Y-Pn 1 
 yaw, Y 1 
 yawl, Yl 1 
 yawn, Yn 1 
 yawp, Y-P 1 
 Yazoo, Y-Z 3
 
 342 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 ycleped, KIPt 
 
 yearn, yRn 
 
 yeast, Yst 1 
 
 yeasty, Ys'T 
 
 Yeauler, YLr or YLR 
 
 Yeddo, Y-D 
 
 Yeia, Y*Y 
 
 yelk, Y1K 
 
 yell, Yl 
 
 yelled, Ylt 
 
 yellow, YL 
 
 yelp, YIP or F-LP 
 
 yelper, YIPr or F-LPr 
 
 Yelverton, YlVrtN 
 
 yend, Ynt 
 
 yenite, YNT 
 
 yeoman, YMn 
 
 yeomanry, YMnR 
 
 yeomen, Y 1 Mn 
 
 yerk, 7/EK 
 
 Yesso, Y-S 
 
 yester, Ystr 
 
 yesterday, StRD 
 
 yestereve, YstrV 
 
 yesterevening, YstrVnNg 
 
 yestern, YstrN 
 
 yesternight, YstrNt 
 
 yew, Y 3 
 
 ye wen, Y 3 N 
 
 Yharton, HyRTn (Pro. 
 
 Hyarton. See Whar- 
 
 ton). 
 
 yielder, Yltr 1 
 yieldingly, Ylt 'Ngl 
 yieldance, Yl^Ns 
 yodel, TiL or Y-DL 
 Yoder, Ptr 1 
 
 yojan, YJn 
 
 yoke, YK 
 
 yokel, YK1 
 
 Yokohama, YKM 
 
 yolk, Y1K or YK 
 
 yon, Yn 1 
 
 yonder, Y*Ntr 
 
 yore, yR 
 
 York, yRK 
 
 Yorktown, yRKTn 
 
 Yosel, YsZ 
 
 Yoselin, YsZnor Y-ZLn 
 
 Yosely,YsZ or Y-ZL 
 
 Yosemite, Y-SMT 
 
 you, Y or Y 3 
 
 Youatt, Y-T 3 
 
 young, YNg or Y-Ng 
 
 younger, YNgr or Y-Ngr 
 
 youngest, YNgst ?r 
 
 Y-Ngst 
 youngster, YNgstr or 
 
 Y-Ngstr 
 younker, YNgKr or Y-Ng- 
 
 Kr 
 
 yowl, Yl 3 
 yowler, Y1 3 R 
 Ypsilanti, PsLnT 
 yttria, Tr 1 
 yttrium, Tr a M 
 Yucatan, YKTn 
 yucca. YK 
 yuf ts,' Y-Fts 
 yulan, YLn 
 yule, Yl 3 
 yunx, YNgKs
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 Zachariah, ZKR 
 Zachary, ZKr 
 Zambezi, ZMpZ 
 /am boo, Z 3 Mp 
 Zanzibar, ZnZBr 
 Zend, Znt 
 zenith, ZNTh 
 zephyr, ZFr 
 Zeus, Zs 3 
 zigzag, ZGsG 
 Zion, Z'N 
 zizania, ZZN 
 zodiac, ZtK or ZDK 
 
 zoilean, Z^n 
 zoisite, Z 1 sT 
 zoological, ZLJK1 
 zoophagous, ZFGs 
 zoophyte, ZFt 
 zoozoo, Z 3 Z 
 Zoroaster, ZRstr 
 zouave, Z 3 V or zW 3 V 
 zoundz, Znts 3 
 zoutch, Z 3 C 
 zuche, Z 3 C 
 zygomatic, ZGMt 
 zymotic, ZMtK 
 zythum, ZThM
 
 344 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL, 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 
 PHEASEOGEAPHY. 
 
 LESSON 40. 
 
 419. When two or more words are joined without 
 lifting the pen the combination is called a phrase. 
 This is the speediest method of writing from the fact 
 that the words follow one another without -an interval 
 the same as when spoken. Thus the time which would 
 otherwise be taken in lifting up and putting down the 
 pen is saved. Phrases are usually formed of words 
 of one syllable, and, accordingly, are well adapted to 
 writing English, which is largely composed of such 
 words. The first word of a phrase, if it is a stem 
 word, is generally written in its proper position and 
 the remaining word or words follow without regard to 
 position. When, however, the first word is a first place 
 horizontal stem, it is, if necessary, slightly raised or 
 lowered in that position in order to give the proper 
 position to the second word. (See also sec. 354.) For 
 the same reason the small logographs (see sees. 377, 
 378 and 381) are usually written initially in any posi- 
 tion. There should not be so many words in a phrase 
 as to cause the combination to run too far above or be- 
 low the line of writing say more than the length of 
 two and one-third single length perpendicular stems. 
 Phrases, even in the swiftest writing, should not aver- 
 age over three words, monosyllabic or otherwise, to a 
 phrase, though sometimes four, or perhaps five Avords 
 aro joined, but mostly only two. Phrases should not
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 345 
 
 be inconvenient to join, or be liable to conflict with 
 words, and should usually be natural; that is they 
 should consist, of words that are naturally thrown to- 
 gether into phrases in speech. 
 
 420. They are written in two ways, first by join- 
 ing the words together, as in NDhsKs, in this case; is 1 , 
 1 as; which is on the same principle as joining words 
 in script longhand, and second by writing them with 
 one stem or character, simple or compound; thus, Ct, 
 which it; Crft, which are of it; st, as to. Phrases 
 written in the second manner are called Phraseographs, 
 while those made in the first, whether the separate 
 characters consist each of one word or are phraseo- 
 graphs, are termed Joined Phrases. Again, phraseo- 
 graphs which contain stems are called Stem Phraseo- 
 graphs and those without stems Small Phraseographs. 
 (See also sec. 377.) 
 
 a. Besides the two methods above given in which 
 all the words of a phrase are either joined or written 
 in one stroke there are others in which some of the 
 words as well as syllables are indicated by omission or 
 position, etc. These are designated by the general 
 term Constructed Phrases and will be considered here- 
 after in their proper order. 
 
 b. The indication of phrases by the different 
 methods explained above is termed Phraseography. 
 
 TICKS, CURVETS, SEMICIRCLES, ETC. 
 
 421. A small logograph when joined initially 
 usually accommodates itself to the position of the 
 following word, unless this is another small logograph 
 standing alone, in which case the method is usually 
 reversed, the latter accommodating itself to the posi- 
 tion of the former. As a general rule second place 
 tick logographs, except "a" or "an" and the simi- 
 larly positioned alternative ticks for "how," are not 
 joined.
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC ilAXUAL. 
 
 422. In all cases following a tick is written initi- 
 ally usually only when it is inconvenient to write it 
 finally. Furthermore, a tick is not usually prefixed 
 to an initial right Sr or Ssr circle on a straight stem, 
 unless it is in a line with the latter. Lastly when a 
 logograph has two or more forms the most convenient 
 one is generally used. 
 
 423. Sometimes a light tick or curvet logograph 
 is shaded the former throughout and the latter in the 
 middle to indicate the addition of "the*' although 
 the word the logograph represents may have no 
 aspirated or long vowel sound. When this is done it 
 is l>y way of license for the sake of speed. 
 
 424. In stenotypy when two or more ticks, cur- 
 vets and semicircles are joined to one another no stem 
 being attached the figure denoting the first or third 
 position is placed after the first character; thus, Ptoid 1 
 Ktoid; Ktoid 1 Ptoid; Ktoid 3 Rtoid. (See also the first 
 two sentences of par. 421.) 
 
 425. "The," the most frequent word in the Eng- 
 lish language (see sec. 382), is joined initially, finally, 
 or medially by Ctoid or Ktoid; thus, CtoidK 1 , the 
 kingdom; CtoidR 1 , the ear; CtoidK, the air; CtoidK 3 , 
 the hour; CtoidMn, the man; CtoidMn 3 , the moon; 
 Ctoid W, the way; CtoidS 1 , the sea; CtoidSh, the show: 
 CtoiclL 1 , the law; CtoidPr, the principle-al; CtoidTr 1 , 
 the tree; CtoidCr, the chair; CtoidDlns 1 , the idleness; 
 CtoidJl 3 , the evangel; CtoidThr, the three; CtoidShr, 
 the sure; CtoiclNr 1 , the near; CtoidFl, the full, Ctoid- 
 ThlJ, the theology; Ctoid Yi 3 , the yule; CtoidsK 1 , the 
 sky; CtoidsR 1 , the seer; CtoidsJr, the sojer; CtoidsShl, 
 the social; CtoidsPl 1 , the supply; RtoidB, the bay; 
 RtoidD 3 , the due; RtoidC 1 , the watch; RtoidX 1 , the 
 inn, RtoidXn, the known; RtoidNn 3 , the noon-union; 
 RtoidKr, the crow; RtoidyR 1 , the year; RtoidKI, th(- 
 clay; RtoidPl 3 , the apple, Rtoid/rR 1 , the Avar; Rtoi<l- 
 Mr, the more; RtoidFr 1 , the free; Rtonl//-L, the Avell;
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 347 
 
 RtoidShlMr, the Shelmar; RtoidsP 1 , the spy; Rtoids- 
 D 1 , the side; RtoidsJ 1 , the siege; RtoidsPrt 1 , the 
 spirit; RtoidsTr 1 , the straw; RtoidsFr 1 , the cipher; 
 RtoidsThr, the Sthray, RtoidsKl 3 , the school; Rtoids?r- 
 Rn, the sworn; FCtoid, for the; MnCtoid, man the; 
 NsCtoid, knows the; MRtoid, may the; NnRtoid, none 
 the; Ms 3 Rtoid, mass the; FCtoidW, for the way; 
 nWRtoidNssT, when the necessity. Neither tick is ever 
 written alone, the dot for "the" then being employed 
 instead. (See, however, see's. 468, 494: and 498.) 
 
 426. "He" is joined initially, finally or medi- 
 ally by Jtoid or Rtoid; thus, JtoidMt 1 , he might; 
 JtoidM, he may; JtoidMst 3 , he massed; Jtoid TFt 3 , he 
 would; JtoidS 1 , he saw; JtoidS, he so; JtoidSh, he 
 shall; JtoidSht 3 , he should; JtoidL, he will; JtoidRts 1 , 
 he writes; JtoidRs, he rows; JtoidRn 3 , he ran; Rtoid- 
 Tht 1 , he thought; RtoidDhn, he then; RtoidDht 3 , he 
 that; RtoidNs, he knows; RtoidNs 3 , he owns; RtoidC 1 , 
 he each; RtoidC 3 , he much; RtoidD 3 , he had; Rtoids- 
 Tt, he stood; RtoidsD, he said; RtoidsPst, he supposed; 
 Dh 3 Jtoid, though he; SRtoid, so he; F JtoidM, for he 
 may; nWRtoidNFtoid, when he knew. Occasionally 
 v.-hen a better or more legible junction can be obtained 
 than with the ticks the logograph may be joined medi- 
 ally; thus, F^ne-D, if he had; F-ne-Ns, for he 
 knows. The logograph is seldom joined finally. 
 
 a. It will be observed that the above ticks and 
 those for downward and upward H are the same. 
 They are stenotyped as above because they represent 
 a word in accordance with section 372. When, how- 
 ever, they represent downward, or upward H they are 
 stenotyped h and h in accordance with section 27. 
 
 1. It will be observed that the upward H and "the" 
 ticks are the same. This, however, in the above cases 
 as well as in others hereafter causes no difficulty 
 since the words are such as do not conflict. (See also 
 the last sentence of sec. 362.)
 
 348 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 b. If desired "he" may be represented finally and 
 medially by Ctoid instead of Jtoid. In which case it 
 will not conflict with the downward tick for "the". 
 (See also rem. 1.) 
 
 c. 'When a phrase containing a medial semicircle 
 logograph is indicated in stenotypy, the semicircle is 
 always connected by a hyphen to both the preceding 
 and the following stem, as in the phrase "for he 
 knows" in paragraph 426. If, however, a circle 
 precedes or follows it, the hyphen is omitted. The 
 logograph is thus indicated the same as in the Elemen- 
 tary Style when it occurs as a vowel. The same course 
 is pursued with the small W and Y angles w r hen they 
 occur in phrases. (See see's. 438, 439 and 440.) 
 
 -4-27. The phrase "of the" is represented alone or 
 initially by Btoid; thus, Btoid 1 , of the; BtoidKs 1 of 
 the cause; BtoidKs, of the case; BtoidKs 3 of the 
 cues; BtoidT 1 , of the time; BtoidD, of the day; 
 BtoidF 3 , of the few; BtoidL 1 of the law; BtoidyR 1 , 
 of the year; BtoidR, of the air; BtoidR 3 , of the 
 hour. 
 
 428. "How" is joined initially in the second posi- 
 tion by DtoidorRtoid (see see's. 372, 27 and 421) ac- 
 cording to convenience; thus, DtoidR, how are; 
 DtoidM, how may; Rtoid^D, how do; Rtoid 2 Xof, 
 how long. It is also joined medially by these char- 
 acters and Jtoid; as in FDtoidC, for how much; Tl- 
 RtoidNg, tell how long; FJtoidMN, for how many; 
 FJtoidNg, for how long. These ticks are never used 
 finally or alone. 
 
 429. "On" is joined initially by the logograph or 
 by Ktoid when the logograph will not join well; thus, 
 TtoidM 1 , on my; TtoidMs 3 , on alms; TtoidWn, on 
 one; TtoidZ 3 , on those; TtoidDhr, on their; Ttoid- 
 Kl 1 , on call; TtoidDht 3 , on that; TtoidDh 1 , on thy; 
 TtoidDh, on them; KtoidT, on it; KtoidX, on no; 
 KtoidV 3 , on view; KtoidSh, on show. The logo-
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 349 
 
 graph may also occasionally be joined finally or med- 
 ially; thus, KTtoid, come on; GTtoid, goon; KTtoid- 
 KTtoid, come on, come on; GTtoidGTtoid, go on, 
 go on. 
 
 430. The phrase "on the" is indicated alone or 
 initially by Dtoid, or by Gtoid when the former will 
 not join conveniently; thus, DtoidK 1 , on the key; 
 DtoidKs, on the case; DtoidRf 3 , on the roof; Dtoid- 
 S 1 , on the sea; DtoidRTh, on the earth; DtoidLnt 3 , 
 on the land; DtoidPr, on the principle-al; DtoidTr, 
 on the tray; DtoidTr 3 , on the true; DtoidsTrt 1 , on 
 the street; DtoidKIM, on the claim; DtoidwR 1 , on 
 the war, DtoidNr 1 , on the near; GtoidT 1 , on the 
 time; GtoidD, on the day; GtoidDshn 3 , on the 
 addition. 
 
 431. "A" or "an" is joined finally or medially by 
 the logograph or by Ptoid, the preference when con- 
 venient being usually given to the latter. It is also 
 joined by Ttoid after Th or Dh and upward L without 
 appendages; thus, PKtoid, paya-an; BKtoid, but a-an; 
 MKtoid, may a-an ; FPtoid, for a-an; N 1 Ptoid, in a-an; 
 DPtoid, do a-an; ThTtoid, think a-an, Dh 3 Ttoid, 
 though a-an; LTtoid, lay a-an; PKtoidMn, pay a man; 
 nWPtoidGrt, when a great; N 1 PtofdMMnt, in a 
 moment; ThTtoidMn, think a man. Ktoid should 
 always be made horizontally and Ttoid perpendicu- 
 larly, otherwise in rapid writing they may sometimes 
 conflict respectively with Rtoid and Ctoid for ' 'the. ' ' 
 Where doubt would occur they should be omitted. 
 "A" or "an" is also joined initially by the logograph 
 or Ttoid, the latter being employed when the former 
 will not join conveniently; thus, KtoidRf 1 , a reef; 
 KtoidR, a ray; KtoidR 3 , an hour; Ktoid Mn 1 , a 
 mine; KtoidMn, a man; KtoidMn 3 , a moon; KtoidSh, 
 a show; KtoidL 1 , a law; KtoidPl 3 , an apple; Ktoid- 
 Bw 3 , a bois; KtoidsKr 1 , a seeker; Ktoid&KrB 1 , n 
 scribe; KtoidsT, a straw; KtoidsMr, a summer;
 
 .>.")0 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 KtoidsThr, a Sthray, KtoidsNr 1 , a signer : Ktoid- 
 sXgr 1 , a singer; KtoidsW, a sway; KtoidsSK, a Cicero; 
 KtoidsShB, a sociable; TtoidK 1 , a key; TtoidKs, a 
 case; TtoidK 3 , a cow; TtoidW 1 , a wee; TtoidW, a 
 way; TtoidS 1 , a sea; Ttoid /<Mr, a Shoraer; Ttoid- 
 Dl 1 , an idle; TtoiclClt 1 , a child; TtoidFlt 1 , a flight; 
 TtoidFwnTs, a Fuentes; TtoidThlPss, a thlipsis; 
 TtoidThwK, a thwack; TtoidYl, a Yale; TtoidYl 3 , a 
 yule; TtoidsPl^a supply; TtoidsDl 3 , a saddle; Ttoids- 
 Cl 3 , a satchel; TtoidsVl 1 , a civil; TtoidsThl, a Sethel; 
 TtoidsYl, a Syoi. 
 
 a. Ttoid is employed initially only as in the ex- 
 amples just given. In all other cases Ktoid is written. 
 
 b. If preferred Ktoid only may be employed in- 
 itially for "a" or "an'' Ttoid being abolished. 
 
 432. "I" is joined finally or medially by the ticks 
 for "a" or "an" above, namely, Ktoid, Ptoid and 
 Ttoid and in the same manner: thus, MKtoid, may I; 
 BKtoid, but I; F'Ptoid, if I; ThTtoid, think I; Dh 3 - 
 Ttoid, though I; LTtoid, lo, I; nWKtoidN, when I 
 know; BKtoidM, but I may; F J Ptoid^R, if I were; 
 ThTtoidM, think I may. "Ktoid and Ttoid should 
 always be made horizontally and perpendicularly, 
 otherwise they may occasionally conflict with Rtoid 
 and Jtoid for "he." Where doubt might occur they 
 should be omitted. "I" is also joined initially by the 
 logograph, Ptoid, Ttoid or Ktoid; thus, i-Knt 1 , I can 
 not; i-K, I come; PtoidMt 1 , I might; PtoidM, I am- 
 may; Ptoid W, I weigh; PtoidSh 1 , I wish; PtoidSh, 
 I shall; PtoidSht 3 , I should; PtoidC 3 , I much; Ptoid- 
 RsV, I receive; Ptoid V 3 , I view; PtoidTh 3 , I thank; 
 Ptoid Yt, I yet; PtoidsTt 1 , I sighted; PtoidsD, I said; 
 PtoidsPst, I supposed; Ptoid*-Pr 3 Xg, I sprang; Ptoid- 
 sTrK, I struck; PtoidsK 1 ^!, I scheme; TtoidS 1 . 1 
 see; TtoidZ, I was; KtoidP, I pay; KtoidT 1 , I tie; 
 KtoidD, I do; KtoidD 3 , I had; KtoidDt 1 , I did; 
 KtoidN, I know, KtoidN 3 , I own. Occasionally when
 
 THE PHO.VOGUAPIIJC MAXt'AL. 351 
 
 a better or more legible junction can be obtained than 
 with the ticks the logograph may be joined medially; 
 thus, H \Y-i-G, when I go; nW-i-sh, when I shall. 
 The logograph is seldom joined finally. 
 
 a. Ttoid is usually joined initially only to the S 
 stem without prependages. 
 
 b. If preferred the logograph may be used before 
 N, S and Sh instead of Ktoid, Ttoid and Ptoid; thus, 
 i-N, I know; i-N 3 , I own; i-S 1 , I see; i-Z, I was; i-Sh 1 , 
 I wish; i-Sh, I shall. 
 
 433. "And," the second most frequent word in the 
 English language (see also sec. 425), is joined initially 
 by the logograph, or Shtoid; thus /SAtoidN 1 , and in; 
 .S'AtoklN, and know; xS'AtoidN 3 , and own; /S'AtoidF 1 , 
 and if; xS'AtoidF, and for; /SAtoid'V*, and however; 
 (SAtoidS 1 , and see; tfMoidS, and so; /S7/toidSh, and 
 shall; AS'AtoidP, and up; xS'AtoidC 1 , and each; /67/toid- 
 C, and which; S7<toidC 3 , and much; /67/toid^/R, and 
 your; xS'AtoidsF, and as for; ShtoidM 1 , and me; Shtoid- 
 M, and him; ShtoidL, and will; ShtoidK, and come. 
 Neither character is ever joined finally or medially. 
 (See also see's. 492 and 498.) 
 
 a. If desired "and" may also be joined medially 
 and finally by Ktoid, Ttoid and Ptoid the same as "a" 
 or "an." 
 
 b. If the upward alternative tick for "a" is em- 
 ployed to represent "and" (see sec. 371) it should be 
 joined only in the second position to avoid conflict 
 with the upward tick for ' 'the. " 
 
 434. The phrase ''and the" is indicated alone or 
 initially by Zhtoid; thus, Zhtoid and the; ZhtoidT 1 , 
 and the time; ZhtoidKss 1 , and the causes; ZhtoidKss, 
 and the cases; ZhtoidMs 3 , and the moose. 
 
 435. "All " is joined initially by the logograph or 
 by upward L, the latter in the first position and 
 usually to stems only; thus, FtoidB, all be; FtoidP, 
 all day; FtoidC, all which; FtoidSh, all shall; Ftoid-
 
 352 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 Sht, all should; FtoidX 1 , all annoy; FtoidX, all 
 know; FtoidXs 3 , all news; FtoidXgs 1 , all things; 
 FtoidDh 1 , all thy; FtoidDh, all they; FtoidDh 3 , all 
 thou; FtoidY 1 , all ye; FtoidYnt 1 , all beyond; Ftoid- 
 L 1 , all law; FtoidwL 1 , all well; LUitrs, all writers; 
 L 1 ^!, all my-inay; L^Mn, all men; L^VVs, all ways; 
 L t S, all see-say. 
 
 436. The phrase "all the" is indicated alone or 
 initially, by Vtoid,; thus, Vtoid 1 , all the; VtoidT 1 , 
 all the time; VtoidD, all the day; VtoidDs 3 , all the 
 dues; VtoidXs 1 , all the influence; VtoidXn, all the 
 known; VtoidXs 3 , all the news. 
 
 437. The phrase "already the" may be represent- 
 ed by shading the logograph; thus, TFtoid 1 , already 
 the. Both the logograph and phraseograph are usually 
 written alone. 
 
 438. "We" is joined initially, finally or medially 
 by the logograph or the alternative form w (see see's. 
 60, a and 62); thus w-T 1 , we ought; w-P, we pay; 
 w-V, we have; w-Th 3 , we thank; TF-W, we weigh; 
 TF-Rt 1 , we write; w-S, we say; PF-Sh 1 , we wish; ir-M, 
 we may; ir-X, we know; TF-X 3 , we own; D-w, do we; 
 FMv, if we; nW-vr, when we; Dh-w-Th, though we 
 think; nW-ir-K, when we come. 
 
 439. "You" is joined initially, finally or medially 
 by the logograph or the alternate form Y (see see's. 
 60, a and 62); thus, Y-T, you ought; Y-V, you have; 
 Y-Th 3 , you thank; Y-Yt, you yet; Y-Sh 1 , you wish; Y- 
 "NV, you w r eigh; Y-S, you say; Y-N, you know; Y-X 3 , 
 you own; F-Mt 1 , you might; F-M, you may; F-Rt 1 , 
 you write; F-K, you come; F-R, you are; r-L, you will : 
 X-Y, know you; R-Y, are you; M-F, may you; S-F, so 
 you; L-F, will you; F^Y-Th, if you think; L-Y-Xt, will 
 you not;R-Y-Xt, are you noti F^r-M, if you may. 
 
 a; AVhen "you" occurs medially before X the sec- 
 ond tick of F may, by w r ay of licence, be written Ctoid;
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 353 
 
 thus, DRtoidCtoidN, do you know; Dt^RtoidCtoidNt, 
 did you not. 
 
 440. "AVho" or "whom" is joined initially, finally 
 or medially by the logograph or the alternative form 
 u the initial shading for the aspirate being omitted 
 (see also sec. 373); thus, nu-Tnt 1 , who-m ought not; 
 Hu-D, who do; nu-D 3 , who had; nu-Kn, who can; 
 nu-NCtoid, who now; Hu-Ns 3 , who owns; -w-Mt 1 , who 
 might; u-M, who may; 'w-Mst 3 , who massed; ^-Rt 1 , 
 who write; u-Rt, who wrote; u-R 3 , who-m our; Ftoid 1 - 
 u, all who; N-HU, know who-m; MN-nu, many who; 
 B-w, but who-m; sM-w, some who; F-Hu-Dhs, for who- 
 m this; F-nusDhs, far who is this; H TFR-nu-Kn, 
 where who can; Dh-iZ-Kn, they who can; Dh-w-S, they 
 who say; S-iZ-Kn, so who-m can; B-wsDhr, but who is 
 their-re. Sometimes medially between a downward 
 straight stem or right curve and a left curve the right 
 half circle may be changed into a hook on the convex 
 side of the latter; thus, B-iZ-Ns, but who knows; 
 DU-w-V, did who have; Ow-Ths, which who thinks. 
 The logograph is not often joined finally. 
 
 441. "Whose" may be joined in the same manner 
 as "who-m," when convenient; thus, HusT 1 , whose 
 time; HusT, whose it; HussT, whose is it; T 3 -ws, at 
 whose; NMiusNM, in whose name; T-wsRKwst, at 
 whose request, us is not usually employed initially 
 since it would then bo liable to conflict Avith tho right 
 N curl. (See sec. 298.) 
 
 442. "Other" is joined initially, finally or medi- 
 ally by the logograph or the alternative form u\ thus, 
 u-Ngs 1 , other things; u-Ngs, other languages; u-Ns 3 , 
 other news; u-Kss 1 , other causes; u-Kss, other cases; 
 u-Ts 1 , other times; u-Ds, other days; u-Ds 3 , other 
 dues; u-Ss 1 , other seas; u-Shs 3 , other shoes; -w-Mn 1 , 
 other men ; i^-Mn, other man ; w-Mn 3 , other moon ; ><-Ls l , 
 other laws; 'w-W'Ks, other walks; N^u any other; 
 N-u, no other; M 1 -^, my other; Dh'-u, with other;
 
 3.">4 THK PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 C 1 -?;, each other; Vr-w, every other; NMi-Wn, any 
 other one; N 8 -u-Wn, no other one; Vr-u-Wn, every 
 other one. 
 
 443. "Others" or "otherwise" may, when con- 
 venient, be joined finally; thus, MX-us, many others- 
 otherwise; sM-NS, some others-otherwise. 
 
 44:4. Each of the preceding small logographs 
 (see's. 425 to 443) should be joined only when it will 
 form an angle with the preceding or following wont. 
 When it will not do this the logograph should be 
 Avritten alone in its proper position as given in the 
 list in section 381. None of the tick, curvet or half 
 circle logographs except the "and" tick, if the latter 
 should be used as a logograph (see sec. 371), is ever 
 joined to a vowel word of two or more syllables. 
 
 a. A tick will, if necessary, join at the same 
 angle to any letter to which its full length stem will 
 join. If at any time words which are represented by 
 the same character should be in danger of conflicting 
 with each other, one of them should be written alone 
 with the logograph. This, however, will seldom if 
 ever occur. 
 
 LESSON 41. 
 CIRCLES AND LOOPS. 
 
 THE S CIRCLE. 
 
 445. The S circle may be used: 
 
 a. Either initially, finally or both to represent 
 either of the logographs "as, has, is" or "his;" in 
 which case it usually accommodates itself to the posi- 
 tion of the word to which it is attached; thus, sDh 1 , 
 as-is thy; sB 3 as-has-is-his to be; sTr 3 , as-is true, syR, 
 as-is your; s?rR, as were; sFrnt, his friend; sPtoid 1 , 
 has-is of; sKtoid 1 , is-his a; sKtoid, as-has a; sCtoid, ' 
 is-his the; sCtoid, as-has the; sw 1 (left circle), as we;
 
 'I'll!-: PHONOGRAPHIC MAXl'AL. 
 
 si' (right circle), as yon; SHU, as-has-is who; sPtoid'M, 
 as 1 am-may; slttoidD 3 , as I had; s-i-G, as I go; Ts, it 
 is-has; Psss, poses his, Jsts, just as; Ptsoid 1 , of as-his; 
 mis, who as-hus-is-his; Atsoid, and as-has-is-his; ws 1 
 (left circle), we as; rs (right circle), you as; sJtsoid, 
 as no. has-is; sGts, as-is good as; sGrts, as-is great as. 
 It may also be employed medially to represent the 
 above words; thus, TsBn, it has been, TsNt, it is not; 
 -V/itsoidXt, and is not; sJtsoid^n, as he has been; 
 srsAl, as you seem. ''His" should be used after verbs 
 with caution, since it is liable to conflict in some in- 
 stances with another form of the verb; as "keep his*' 
 with "keeps, put his" with "puts." Where doubt 
 would arise the circle S should be written either separ- 
 ately or initially on the following word. 
 
 b. Finally to represent "us"; as in the phrases 
 Fs, for us; Pns, upon us; Bfs, above us; Fts, after us; 
 Gnsts, against us; Ttsoid 1 , on us, /S'Atsoid, and us; 
 Ptsoid 1 , of us. li Us" like "his" (see par. a) will 
 sometimes conflict with another form of the verb, as 
 ''take us" with "takes, let us" with "lets." In such 
 cases the stem S should be written. 
 
 c. After the possessive case to represent "self" 
 and is then written disjoined under or after the middle 
 of the preceding stem; thus, Mnsts, man's self; Wnsis, 
 one's self; JrJsis, George's self; JnsMs, John's self; 
 JMis, Jame's self. (For the manner of writing "self" 
 as a prelix or affix, see see's. 304 to 306 and 341.) 
 
 d. Finally to represent "theirs" in combination 
 with the Ter hook and lengthening principle. (See 
 see's. 457, c and 478, e.) 
 
 e. Finally to represent "ours" and "self" in 
 combination with an R or X hook. (See see's. 463, 
 464 and 468, f, g. 
 
 f. Finally to represent "one's" or "ones" in com- 
 bination with the oS hook. (See sec. 466.)
 
 THE PHOXOGKAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 g. Finally to represent "its*' in combination with 
 the halving principle. (See sec. 477.) 
 
 446. The S circle may also usually be attached 
 initially, finally or both to any other phrases or 
 phraseographs that may be hereafter mentioned to in- 
 dicate either of the words in paragraph a of the above 
 section. 
 
 1. In stenotypy when a tick logograph is followed 
 by a circle logograpfy the latter is written before the 
 termination Oid; thus, Ptsoid 1 , of his. When it is 
 followed by a circle that begins a stem word, the circle 
 is written after the Oid; thus, CtoidsM, the same. 
 
 THE Ss CIRCLE. 
 
 447. The Ss, or double size, circle may be used: 
 
 a. Alone to indicate the addition of "as, has, is, 
 his" or ' 'us" to the logograph represented by the small 
 circle; thus, ss 1 , his as, his has, his is, is as, is his; 
 ss, as has, as his, as is, has as, has his, has us. 
 
 b. Initially on a simple stem or on an R hooked 
 straight one and initially or finally on a tick logo- 
 graph and sometimes on a half circle one to indicate 
 the addition of any of the phrases in the above para- 
 graph, the double circle usually accommodating itself 
 to the position of the following word; thus, ssC 3 , 
 has-is as much; ssBn, as has been; ssGt, is as good; 
 ssF 1 , is as if; ssN 3 , as-has-is-his own; ssXg 1 , has-is as 
 long; ssBr 3 , as-has-is-his number; ssGrt, has-is as 
 great; ssPtoid 1 ^!, is as I am-may; ssRtoidTh, is as I 
 think; ssKtoid, is as a-an, his is a-an, etc.; ssJtoid 1 , 
 is as he; ssCtoid 1 , is as the, etc., Jtssoid 1 , he is as-his, 
 etc. ; HUSS, who is as-his, etc. 
 
 c. Initially or finally to indicate the addition of 
 an S circle logograph, namely, "as, has, is" or "his," 
 to a stem beginning or ending with the small circle; 
 the double circle, when initial, accommodating itself to 
 
 O 
 
 the position of the following word; thus, ssC, as-has-is
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 357 
 
 such; ssP 1 , as-has-is-his speech; ssD, as-has-is said; ss- 
 Trf 1 , as-has-is-his strife; ssDrshn, as-has-is-his considera- 
 tion; ssM, as-has-is some; ssN 3 , as-is soon; Tss, it is as- 
 his; Dhss, this as-has-is his; Pss, pays as-his; Rss, raise 
 as-his; Xss, knows as-has-is-his; ssXs, as soon as; ssNss, 
 us soon as hi.s-is. It may also be employed medially 
 as above; thus, TssD, it is said; TssGts, it is as good 
 'as; PtssoidC 3 , of his as much; HessC 3 or JtssoidC 3 , he 
 is as much. 
 
 (1. Finally to indicate the addition of "us" to a 
 stem ending with the small circle; thus, Pss, pays us; 
 Rss, raise us; Xss, knows us. 
 
 e. After the possessive case to represent ' 'selves, " 
 and is then written disjoined under or near the middle 
 of the preceding word; thus, Mns^ss, men's selves; 
 Bs u .ss, boys' selves. (For "selves" as an affix see 
 sec. 341.) 
 
 f. Finally to represent "selves" in combination 
 with an R or X hook. (See see's. 465 and 468, h. ) 
 
 448. The Ss circle may also usually be attached 
 initially or finally to any other phrases or phraseo- 
 graphs that may be hereafter mentioned to indicate 
 either of the phraseographs in paragraph a of the 
 above section. 
 
 THE ST LOOP. 
 
 449. The St loop made downward as a left loop in 
 the direction of Ch may be used alone in the first and 
 second positions to indicate the addition of "to" or 
 ''too" to the S circle logographs; thus, st 1 , is-his to- 
 too; st, as-has to-too. The S circle may be added on 
 the inside of the upper end, the latter forming one 
 side of it; thus, sts, is to his-us, his too is; sts, as to 
 his-us, has to as. These forms are used for steno- 
 graphic convenience instead of the S circle or circles 
 and stem T. 
 
 450. The St loopas above may be attached initially
 
 358 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 to a horizontal or downward tick, left curve or straight 
 stem without an initial hook, the tick or stem usually 
 accommodating itself to the position of the loop, but 
 starting from its upper end and continuing clear of it; 
 thus, st'rKtoid, is to a-an ; st-Ktoid, astoa-an; st'-Ctoid, 
 is to the; st-Ctoid, as to the; st 1 -Dh, is to them; st 2 -Dh, 
 as to them; st'-T, is to it; st 2 -T, as to it; st-C 1 , is to 
 each; st-C, is to which; st 2 -C, as to which; st J -K, is to 
 come; st^P, is to pay; st'-N, is to know; sts'-N, is to 
 his own; sts 2 -N, as to his own; sts^sN, is to his son; 
 sts s -sN, as to his son. 
 
 a. The detached form of the St loop is seldom em- 
 ployed medially or finally in connection with stemsonly. 
 
 451. The St loop may be used finally in the ordi- 
 nary manner: 
 
 a. On the stems Dh and Dht to represent the 
 words "wast" and "hast," or St in "hadst;" thus, 
 Dhst 1 , thou wast; Dhst 3 , thou hast; Dhtst 3 , thou 
 hadst. 
 
 b. In the combination Tlst to represent St in the 
 word "least;" thus, Tlst 3 , at least. 
 
 THE STR LOOP. 
 
 452. The Str loop made downward as a left loop 
 in the direction of Ch may be used alone to indicate 
 the addition of ''their" to the St loopasin section 415, 
 the S circle being added in the same manner as to the 
 latter to indicate the possessive; thus, str 1 , is to their; 
 strs 1 , is to theirs; str, as to their; strs, as to theirs. 
 These forms are used instead of the S circle or circles 
 arid the stem T with the Ter hook. 
 
 453. The Str loop may be joined initially to the 
 same stems as the St loop in section 450 and in the 
 same manner. 
 
 a. The detached form of the Str loop is seldom 
 employed medially or finally in connection with .stems 
 only.
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 454. The Str loop may bo attached finally to a sin- 
 gle or double length stein to represent the word 
 "store," the S circle being added for the plural; thus; 
 7/Tstr 3 , hat store; B 3 Kstr, book store; Ntrstr, another 
 store; DrGstr, drug store; Fl/?str, flower store; Shstr 3 , 
 shoe store; Mstr 1 , my store; Rstr 3 , our store; yRstr, 
 your store; Tstrs 1 , tea stores; GrsRstrs, grocery 
 stores. 
 
 LESSON 42. 
 
 HOOKS, ETC. 
 
 5 
 
 455. "Are" or "our" is represented by the R hook 
 and "all" or "will" by the L hook on most simple 
 stem logographs which represent pronouns, preposi- 
 tions or conjunctions and on the logograph for the 
 adjective "such;" thus, Br, but are-our; Br 1 , by our; 
 Or, which are-our; sCr, such are; Dhr, they are; Nr 1 , 
 in our; Bl 1 , by all; Bl, but will; Tl 3 , at all; sTl, as it 
 will; Cl 1 , each will; Cl, which will;sCl 3 , as much will; 
 sCl, such will; Fl 1 , if all; Fl, for all; Dhl 1 , with all; 
 Dhl, they will; Nl 1 , in all; Shi 1 , she will. (See also 
 sec. 468, a.) These hooks are not usually employed 
 as above on nouns or verbs. 
 
 1. When "all" and "will" can both be written on 
 the same stem by the L hook, "will" is given the 
 preference, and "all" is written with the logograph, 
 except on the logographs "for" and "at" when "all" 
 is given the preference. 
 
 a. ' 'Were" is represented by the R hook on the 
 logographs "it, which" and "such" written in the 
 third position; thus, Tr 3 , it were; sTr 3 , as it were; 
 Or 3 , which were; sCr 3 , such were. 
 
 456. The small W hook sometimes represents 
 kt \vo, v or "with" on upward R and "we" on upward L, 
 while the small Y hook on upward R sometimes re- 
 presents "ye" or "you;" thus, ?/.'R, Ave are; s>rR, as
 
 360 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 we are; w?R 3 , with our; w?L, we will; yR 1 , ye are; yR, 
 you are; syR, as you are. 
 
 457. "Their, there" or "they are" is added to a 
 straight stem by the Ter hook; as in the phrases Btr 1 , 
 by their-there; Btr, but their-there-they are; Btr 3 , to 
 be their-there; Ttr, to their; Ttr 1 , tie their-there; Pr 1 - 
 Ctr, preach their-there. (See also sec. 478.) 
 
 a. When "there" occurs in a compound word in a 
 phrase, it is usually written with the logograph and 
 not with the Ter hook; thus, D 3 DhrF, had therefore, 
 and not Dtr 3 F. (See also sec. 478, c.) 
 
 b. The Ter hook as above is not usually written 
 finally after nouns and is never employed to add the 
 word "other." (See also sec. 478, d.) 
 
 c. "Theirs" may be added by the Ter hook and 
 circleS combined; thus, Btrs 1 , by theirs; R^trs, reap 
 theirs. 
 
 458. The Shun hook may be employed to indicate 
 the word "ocean;" thus, TlntKshn (or TLntKshn), 
 Atlantic ocean; PsFKshn, Pacific ocean; RKKshn, 
 Arctic ocean, NtRKKshn, Antartic ocean; Nt 1 Xshn, 
 Indian ocean, 
 
 459. The S circle and Shun curl may be used to 
 represent the word "session;" thus, DhsssAn, this ses- 
 sion; NssAw, next session; NtrssA?i 1 , entire session; 
 NtrssAw, another session; W 1 NtrsA l winter session; 
 
 spring session; sMrssAw, summer session; 
 , autumn session; KsTrsshn, extra session. 
 
 460. The N final hook may be used to represent: 
 
 a. "Own, one" and "in" in such phrases as Rn 3 , 
 our own; yRn 3 , your own; Dhrn, their own; sMn, 
 some one; Ntrn, another one; u-Rn 1 , we are in. 
 "Own" may also be added to the Ter hook by a small 
 N hook made within it; thus, Btrn 1 , by their own; 
 P^Ctrn, preach their own. 
 
 b. "Than" (after adjectives and adverbs in the 
 comparative degree); thus, KwKrn 1 , quicker than;
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 361 
 
 Frtrn, further than; Fltrn 1 , fleeter than. "Than" 
 may also be added by a small N hook written on the 
 inside of theTer hook; thus, Btrn, better than; Rtrn, 
 rather than. (See also sec. 467.) 
 
 c. "Been" on the stem V when the latter is the 
 logograph representing "have;" thus, Vn have been. 
 
 d. "Not" in combination with the halving princi- 
 ple. (See sec. 474.) 
 
 461. The initial N curl (see sec. 298) may be em- 
 ployed before the circle S to represent "in;" thus, ns- 
 Drshn, in consideration; nsM, in some; nsMnt 1 , in 
 his mind; nsTlMnt, in settlement. 
 
 462. The F hook may be used for "have" and 
 "of," and sometimes for "to have"; as Cf, which 
 have-of; Cf 1 , each of; Cf 3 , much of ; Df, day of ; sCf, 
 such have-of; Tlf, it will have; Plf 1 , plea of; Brf 3 , 
 number of; sTf, stay of; stTf, state of; L 3 Kf, lack 
 of' W J Kf, week of; VRTf, variety of; Tf 1 , ought to 
 have; Trf 1 , try to have; sDf, said of, said to have; 
 ssDf , is said of, is said to have. 
 
 a. The F hook for "of" is seldom employed and 
 then usually only medially and not finally; thus, VR- 
 TfKss, variety of causes; DfKshn, day of action; Cfs 1 , 
 each of us. 
 
 463. "Ours" may be added to a stem by the S cir- 
 cle and R hook combined; thus, Brs 1 , by ours; Nrs 1 , 
 incurs; Trs 3 , at ours. (See sec. 468, f.) 
 
 464. "Self" may be added to an R or N hooked 
 stem by the small S or Ns circle; thus, Brs 1 , by our- 
 self; Trs, to ourself; Rns 3 , our own self; Brns 1 , by 
 our own self. (See sec. 468, g.) 
 
 465. "Selves" may be added to an R or N'hooked 
 stem by the large Ss or Nss circle; thus, Brss 1 , by 
 ourselves; Trss, to ourselves; Rnss 3 , our own selves; 
 Brnss 1 , by our own selves. (See sec. 468, h.) 
 
 4<i<!. "One's" or "ones" may be added by the Ns 
 circle on single or double length straight stems or the
 
 362 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MAXCAL. 
 
 N hook and S circle on curved ones. Cns 1 , each one's; 
 Frns, from one's; Vns, have one's; Ftrns 3 , farther 
 one's-oues. 
 
 467. "Than" may be added after a circle on a 
 right curve by the stem N; thus, MsX, himself than; 
 MssX, Moses than; WsX, ways than; Ss 1 X, seas than, 
 see us than: ShsN, shows than; L^X, laws than, loss 
 than; Lss 1 X, losses than; LsX, less than; Ls 3 X, allow 
 us than; L'SsX, lessees than; LsXthrn, less than their 
 own. (See also sec. 460, b.) 
 
 HOOKS AND CIRCLES ATTACHED TO THE TICK AND 
 CURVET LOGOGRAPHS. 
 
 468. The small hooks, and small and lanre circles 
 combined with them may sometimes be attached to the 
 tick and curvet logographs "of, all, I" (Ttoid), "on, he" 
 and "the"; the attachments proportioned to the size 
 of these characters (see also see's. 89, b and 114, a) 
 to represent the following words: 
 
 a. "Are" or u our" by the R hook; thus, Prtoid 1 , 
 of our; Trtoid 1 , (or Krtoid, alternate), on our. 
 
 b. "All" or "will" by the L hook; thus, Pltoid 1 , 
 of all: Bltoid 1 , of all the; Tltoid 1 (or Kltoid, alter- 
 nate), on all; Dltoid 1 (or Gltoid, alternate), 6n all the; 
 Fltoid 1 all will; Vltoid 1 , all will the. 
 
 c. "Have, of" or "other" by the F hook; thus, 
 Tftoid 1 , I have; Jftoid 1 , he have; Trftoid 1 , on our 
 other. 
 
 d. "Own" or "other" by the X hook; thus, Prn- 
 toid 1 , of our own; Trntoid 1 , on our own; Tntoid 1 , on 
 other; Dntoid 1 , on the other; Cntoid 1 , the other. 
 
 e. "As, his, us" or "others" by the small circle, 
 but only finally; thus, Pltsoid 1 , of all as-has-is- 
 his; Tltsoid 1 (or Kltsoid, alternate), on all as-has-is* 
 his; Tftsoid 1 . I have as-his; Tntsoid 1 , on others; 
 Dntsoid 1 , on the others; Cntsoid 1 , the others.
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 363 
 
 f. "Ours" by the R hook and small circle com- 
 bined; thus, Prtsoid 1 , of ours; Trtsoid 1 , on ours. 
 
 g. "Self" by the small circle; thus, Prtsoid 1 , of 
 ourself; Prntsoid 1 , of our own self; Trtsoid 1 , on our- 
 self; Trntsoid 1 , on our own self. 
 
 h. "Selves" by the large circle; thus, Prtssoid 1 , 
 of ourselves; Prntssoid 1 , of our own selves; Trtssoid, 
 on ourselves; Trntssoid 1 , on our own selves. 
 
 469. The above phraseographs (par's, a to h) are 
 not always used. Occasionally the words are written 
 separately or joined phrases employed. The list above 
 is complete, no other phraseographs than those given 
 being used. 
 
 LESSON 43. 
 
 HALVING. 
 
 470. "It, had" or "would'' may be added to a 
 stem logograph without appendages by halving it. 
 "It" may also be added in the same manner to a stem 
 logograph or phraseograph with a final hook and "had"' 
 furthermore to one with an F hook; thus, Bt, but it 
 had-would; Tt 1 , ought it, what it-had-would; Knt, 
 can it; Btrt, better it; Bft, above it, but have it-had, 
 but of it; Cft, which have it-had; Cft 3 , much of it. 
 
 471. "Of it" may be indicated by halving the stem 
 V in the first position; thus, Vt 1 , of it. 
 
 472. "It" may be added to a final stem without 
 appendages by halving it; as in MKt, make it; FCt, 
 fetch it: K 3 Rt, carry it; S 3 Mt, assume it; R 3 Vt, re- 
 view it; Rt^'gt, writing it. 
 
 473. "To" may be added to a word of two or 
 more stems by halving its final stem; as in LKlt, 
 likely to; RMnt, remain to. "To" may also be added 
 to the word "able" by halving it; thus, Bit, able to. 
 
 474. "Not, had not" or "would not" may bo 
 added by the N hook and halving principle combined; 
 thus, Bnt 1 , be-by not; Bnt, but not, but had-would
 
 364 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 not; Dnt 1 , did not; Dnt, do not; Dnt 3 , had not; 
 Dnts 3 , had not his: Cnt, which had-wouldnot; nTTnt, 
 when not, when had- would not; TFnt 3 , would not; 
 Mnt, may not. 
 
 a. "She not, she had- would not, shall not" and 
 ''should not" may also be written as above; thus, 
 Shnt 1 , she not, she bad-would not; Shnt, shall not; 
 Shnt 3 , should not; particularly when occurring alone. 
 Usually, however, they are written with the stems in 
 all cases for convenience; thus, Sl^Xt, Sht'Xt, ShXt, 
 Sht 3 Xt. The same course is pursued with "she will 
 not," which is usually written Sh^Xt. 
 
 b. When "it" occurs after the verb and before 
 "not" as in "had it not, do it not," the phrase is not 
 written as in paragraph 474, but instead the stem 
 representing the verb is halved and "not"' added by 
 the logograph, except after the past tense indicated by 
 halving, when "it not" is represented by Tnt; thus; 
 Dt'Xt, had it not; DtXt, do it not; MtXt, may it not, 
 ShtXt, shall it not; ?/'RtXt, were it not; Bt 1 Xt 1 , be it 
 not; KtTnt, could it not; Sht 3 Tnt, should it not; 
 ?0Rt 3 Tnt, ward it not; Trt 1 Tnt, tried it not. 
 
 475. Z halved is used, alone or initially, or after 
 an S circle logograph only, to represent ' ' is-his-as-has 
 it;" thus, Zt 1 , is it; Zt'Nt, is it not; sZt 1 , is as it, 
 his has it; Zt 3 , as-has it; Zt 3 Xt, has it not; sZt 3 , as is- 
 has it; sZt^Ip, is as it may be. (a.) This form is not 
 generally used finally or medially except after an S 
 circle logograph only, as just stated. Instead, in such 
 cases, the circle S and stem T are usually employed; 
 thus, Jtsoid^ or Hes 1 ^ he is-has it; Rtsoid 1 ^ and 
 is-as-has it; BsT, but is-has it; BsTnt. but is-has it not; 
 TsT, it is it; T 1 sT, what is-has it; BsTtr, but is-has it 
 their re; BsTrn, but is-has it their own; BssT, but is 
 as it; DhssT, this is it; DhssTMp, this is as it may be. 
 
 b. Zt as above is not used to indicate the addition 
 of "had" or "would," nor is the N hook added to it,
 
 THE PHOXOUKAPIIir MANl/AL. 
 
 as in Znt, to indicate "not," as in "as had- would not." 
 
 In such cases the S or Ss circle and the stems for 
 "had" or "had not" and "would" or "would not" 
 are employed; thus, sD 3 , is-his-as-has had; sDnt 3 , as- 
 his had not; ssD 3 , as his had, his has had; ssDnt 3 , as 
 his had not; s IFi 3 , as-his would; slFnt 3 , as-his would 
 not; ssTFt 3 , as his would; ss TFnt 3 as his would not. 
 c. Again, Znt as above is not employed for "is- 
 has not," etc; but instead the S or Ss circle and the 
 halved N stem are written; thus, sNt 1 , is-as-has not; 
 ssXt 1 , is-has-his not, his is not, his has not. Znt, 
 however, may sometimes be employed for the col- 
 loquials "isn't" and "has n't." (See sec. 476 b.) 
 
 476. The colloquial phrases "did n't, don't, had 
 n't, would n't, should n't," etc., are usually written 
 the same as "did not, do not," etc., in paragraph 474. 
 If, however, particular distinction is desired, they 
 may be vocalized; thus, Dint 1 , did n't; Dont, don't; 
 HaDnt 3 , had n't; ITu/nt, would n't; Shu/nt 3 , should 
 n't, etc. 
 
 a. The remarks above also apply to the colloquial 
 " Shan't,'' except that it is written with the stems Sh- 
 Nt as explained in section 474, a; thus, ShaNt. 
 
 b. The colloquial phrases "is n't" and "has n't" 
 are also usually written the same as the formal ones 
 in section 475, c; namely, with the S circle and halved 
 N stem. But when particular distinction is desired, 
 they may be represented by Z halved with the N hook; 
 thus, iZnt 1 , is n't; naZnt 3 , has n't. If preferred, 
 however, the vocalization may be omitted. (See also, 
 par. 476.) 
 
 477. "Its " may be added by the halving principle 
 and circle S combined; thus, Tts 1 , what its; Tts, to 
 its; Tts 3 , at its; Cts, which its; Bfts, above its; Pnts, 
 upon its; Vts 1 , of its; Nts 1 , in its; KPts, keep its; 
 S 3 Mts, assume its; MNgts, among its. 
 
 a. The word ' ' itself " is never added by the above
 
 3GO TIIK PHOMM iUAPllir MANTA1.. 
 
 principle, but is either joined with the logograph or 
 if not, it is written disjoined in its proper position, 
 usually the former; thus, B J Ts, by itself. 
 
 LENGTHENING. 
 
 478. "Their, there" or "they are" is added to a 
 full sized curve stem by doubling its length; as in the 
 phrases Ftr, for their-there-they are; Vtr, have their- 
 there; Mtr, may their-there; Dhrtr, they are their - 
 there; HtcRVtr, wherever their-there-they are; Thtr 1 , 
 thaw their-there; Tr 1 Mtr, trim their-there; M^Ftr, 
 modify their. (See also sec. 457.) If an X hook 
 follows, it is read after the termination; thus, Ftrn, for 
 their own; Vtrn, have their own, have their been, 
 Mtrn, may their own; Dhrtrn, they are their own, 
 n//'KVtrn, wherever their own; Thtrn 1 , thaw their 
 own; IVMtrn, trim their own; Ait 1 Ftrn,, modify their 
 own. (See also sec. 460. a. ) 
 
 a. The above words and phrases may be added to 
 a double length curve by making it triple the length 
 of a single one, the extra length being indicated in 
 stenotypy by an additional tr; thus, Frtrtr, further 
 their-there; Frtrtrn, further their own; Shltrtr, shelter 
 their-there; Shltrtrn, shelter their own; Mrtrtr, mur- 
 der their-there; Mtrtrn, murder their own; Mrtrtr- 
 RPTshns, murder their reputations; sXtrtrXrJs, cen- 
 ter their energies: XtrtrsRVs, enter their service; 
 TXtrtrsVss, tender their services; sRXtrtrPsts, sur- 
 render their posts; RXtrtrKnts, render their accounts. 
 
 b. The above expedient is not applied to double 
 length phraseographs, such phrases as "if they are their- 
 there," etc., being written with the double length stem 
 and the logograph for "their" or "there;" thus, Ftr 1 - 
 Dhr, if they are their-there; Fti^Dhrn, if they are 
 their own, etc. 
 
 c. When "there" occurs in a compound word in a 
 phrase it is usually written with the logograph and
 
 THE PHONOGRAPH ft' MANUAL. Ut'u 
 
 not indicated by lengthening; thus, PtoidMDhrF, 1 am 
 therefore, and not PtoidMtrF. (See also sec. 457, a.) 
 
 d. Lengthening as above is not usually written 
 finally after nouns and is never employed to add the 
 word "other/ 3 (See also sec. 457, b.) 
 
 e. "Theirs" may be added by the lengthening 
 principle and circle S combined; thus, Frtrs, from 
 theirs; Dhtrs 1 , with theirs; MNgtrs, among theirs. 
 
 IRREGULAR PHRASES. 
 
 479. There is a class of very frequent phrases 
 which are difficult to form regularly and are therefore 
 written irregularly. These are called Irregular 
 Phrases. Thus, Mp, may be; Tt 3 Ms, at times, Tlt 3 - 
 Ms, at all times; T 3 Nrt, at any rate; Dhrnt 1 , on either 
 band; B 3 , to be; sB 3 , as-has-is-his to be; NrPl, in re- 
 ply-to-the; NrsP, in respect-to-the; NrsPns, inresponse- 
 to-the; Ni^Gt, in regard-to-the ; NrF, in referring-to- 
 the; NrFs, in ref erence-to-the ; irRRns (or wRfRns) 
 with ref erence-to-the ; ?/'RGrt, with regard-to-the; u<- 
 RR (//'RfR), we refer; wRGrt we regard; Nrt 1 , in or- 
 der-to; ]S Tl Ngls, anything else; NThNgls, nothing else; 
 VrNgls, everything else. 
 
 WORDS IN PHRASES DISTINGUISHED BY VOCALIZATION OR 
 VARIATION OF OUTLINE. 
 
 480. In phrase writing words can be distinguished 
 by position only when they commence phrases. When 
 they occur medially or finally, therefore, (whether in. 
 or out of position) and would be liable to conflict with 
 other words of similar form, they may be vocalized, 
 or if contracted, written with their full outlines; thus, 
 T'uD, to aid; TMe, to me; yRs^M, years time; 
 DhsTM, this time; IS^CtoidKntR, in the country. 
 
 1. It is not usually a good practice to vocalize 
 words medially in a phrase, except in the case of voca- 
 graphs (see sec. 3DD) which must be so written in any
 
 368 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 event, since this takes more time than to write them 
 separately in their proper positions. Thus the words 
 "to me," above, are more quickly written T M 1 . 
 
 a. When "time" is written alone and in full it 
 should usually be vocalized; thus, T^lM, to distinguish 
 it from "autumn" (TM 1 ) which is generally written 
 separately. (See sec. 459.) 
 
 481. Again, occasionally, where a word as ordina- 
 rily written will not make a good joining in a phrase its 
 form may be either varied or written in full; thus, MN- 
 PRt, my own part; DhsPRt, this part; NDm^sTt, in that 
 state; NgsFRNg, long suffering. 
 
 "WHAT" DISTINGUISHED. 
 
 482. "What" in phrases is usually joined only 
 initially, except after first place small or horizontal 
 stem logographs (see sec. 419); thus, T l -Y, what you; 
 T'-w^hat we; T'Dhs, what this; T*T, what at-ought; 
 Tl'B, what will be; sT 1 , is what; PtoidT 1 , of what; 
 KtoidT 1 , on what; NT 1 , in what; KsT 1 , because 
 what. 
 
 a. "What" is written as above to distinguish it 
 from "it," which, being a more frequent word, is 
 joined finally or medially as well as initially. "What" 
 is thus written the same as any other logograph that 
 occasionally requires distinction from another and 
 more frequent one of similar form in another position; 
 as, for example, "each" and "at" from "which" and 
 "to." 
 
 b. If it should ever be desired to particularly dis- 
 tinguish "what, "the small HW character may be in- 
 serted disjoined; thus, nwT 1 . (See sec. 360.) This, 
 however, will seldom or never be necessary. 
 
 OUGHT. 
 
 483. "Ought" may usually be joined everywhere 
 in phrases when convenient, except when it precedes
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 3CU 
 
 "what" (see sec. 482); thus, FtoidT 1 , all ought; BT, 
 but ought; TT, it ought; DhsTfBn, this ought to 
 have been; DhTnt, they ought not; CTnt, which ought 
 not; T'-r, ought you; T^hs, ought this; Tnt'Dh, 
 ought not they; Tft'Dht, ought to have it that; T ir T, 
 ought at-to; f ' T 1 , ought what. 
 
 OR. 
 
 484. When "or" is written medially before a 
 number the logograph is usually joined to it but not to 
 the preceding number or word; thus 2 R*4, two or 
 four; 5 R J 7, five or seven; Dh R 1 !, they or one; 
 Ftoid R 1 11, all or eleven. 
 
 LESSON 44. 
 
 OMISSIONS. 
 
 485. T may sometimes be omitted for the sake of 
 speed in words ordinarily written with the St loop by 
 changing the latter to the circle S; thus, MsLkl, most 
 likely; MsB, must be; TrsDht, trust that. 
 
 486. The N hook may be omitted, if preferred; 
 thus, P-Y, upon you. 
 
 487. Occasionally in a phrase, one or more conso- 
 nants or a breath letter may be omitted; thus, BsLt- 
 NssR, absolutely necessary; GrtsTnt, great extent; 
 Mn 3 F(or nY 3 MnF), human life; TrnF, eternal life", 
 sPKF, spelling reform; Mn 3 StR, human history; 
 stTS, state house. 
 
 488. The word "well" is always represented by 
 the iogograph except when it is inconvenient to form 
 the W hook which is medially or finally after a stem 
 with appendages on the T, Ch, S and Sh stems with- 
 out them in which cases it is represented by the stem 
 L only, the W hook being omitted; thus, sL, as well; 
 sLs, as well as; ssL, is as-as is well; ssLNn, is as-as is 
 well known; TsL, it is well; TssL, it is as well; MsL,
 
 370 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 may as well; JssL, just as well; KnL, can well; DL, 
 do well; sCL, such well; SL, so well; ShL, shall well. 
 
 489. A or An, And, By, etc. Such words as "a" 
 or "an, and, by, of, of the, or, the, to, to the," and 
 occasionally a syllable, may be omitted medially or 
 finally from the main words of the phrase in which 
 they occur; as in the phrases sCn, such a one; FNs- 
 Tnt, for an instant, GnGn, again and again; sD^D, 
 side by side ; MtrMp, matter of importance ; FsK, for 
 the sake-of ; WnBst, one of the best; MrLs, more or 
 less; CtoidTrR, on the contrary; Krt 1 , according to- 
 to the; FsTns, for instance. 
 
 JUXTAPOSITIONS. 
 
 490. When "you, of the" and "to" or "too" 
 (preposition and adverb) occur medially in a phrase 
 they may be indicated by juxtaposition, or writing the 
 words between which they occur very close together, 
 each in its proper position. This expedient is used 
 only between stem words; thus, DtMS, did you say; 
 DiS^M, do you say you saw him; KntstT, can you 
 state; Kn:K, can you come; nWiKn, when you can; 
 Dhn:KnK, then you can come; sRFsiRTh, surface of 
 the earth; LsMM 1 , loss to me; KMiT, came to it; 
 KM'.Ts, came to its; KMiTs 3 , came to itself; KMiV, 
 came to have; C 3 '.D, much to do; Z:Dt, was to do it; 
 Gn'iD, began today; ThsiC 3 , thinks too much. It is 
 never employed between words which do not contain 
 stems, or between these and stem words. In such 
 cases write the words "you, of the, to" or "too"; 
 thus, Ftoid 1 - r Dtoid, all you hoe; Ftoid-Y-V, all you 
 have; Ftoid 1 Btoid 1 I, all of the eye ; KLr Btoid 1 I, 
 color of the eye; ShP Btoid e, shape of the o; PrOIt 
 TRtoid MnT, prompt to the minute; Mns 1 TPtoid 
 Nt, means to an end; sPn T Ttoid 1 , spoken to on; R 1 
 T-r, or to you; KM Ts SsTns, came to his assistance; 
 Ftoid 1 TRtoid, all to thee; Ftoid 1 Tt, all to it; Ftoid 1
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 371 
 
 Tts, all to its; Ftoid 1 TTs, all to itself; Ftoid 1 TD, 
 all to do, or all to-day; Ftoid 1 TD T; all to do it. 
 
 a. Juxtaposition as explained in the preceding 
 paragraph is used only between stem words, since if it 
 were employed in connection with words without 
 stems the latter would be liable to be mistaken for the 
 vocalization of the stems near which they were placed, 
 or when no stems were employed, for two or more 
 small characters without the words "you, of the," etc., 
 between them. 
 
 b. The learner is instructed that when writing at 
 ordinary speed he need not indicate "of the" by juxta- 
 position unless he prefers to do so. Again, it is 
 usually better to write "of the " when the words be- 
 tween which they occur would make sense without 
 them; as in the sentence "many of the ships" which 
 could also be read "many ships." Still there will be 
 no danger of incorrect reading if the words between 
 which "of the" occur are always written very close 
 together. 
 
 c. As to "you" and the preposition and adverb 
 "to" and "too," it is better for the learner to get 
 accustomed to indicating them by juxtaposition from 
 the start, particularly "to." The usual manner of 
 writing the noun or adjective ' 'two" (the number) is 
 with the figure 2 as will be more fully explained in 
 the next chapter. 
 
 d. When "you, to" or "too" commences a sentence, 
 or a phrase in the middle of one, the letters are usually 
 written; thus, Y-D, you do; F-M, you may; TRtoid, 
 to the; except before B in the phrase "to be," which 
 is usually written with B in the third position; thus, 
 B 3 , to be. 
 
 e. When "of the" occur between stem words and 
 a number, they may be indicated by juxtaposition, but 
 must be written when they occur between small 
 characters and a number, or between two numbers;
 
 372 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 thus, Dhr 1 '^, either of the two; *2:Mst, t\vo of the 
 most; Ftoid 1 Btoid 1 5, all of the five; 2 Btoicl 4, 
 two of the four. 
 
 491. From "to". < 'From" and "to" may be in- 
 dicated by writing the main words of the phrase close 
 together; as in the phrases DtD, from day to day; 
 T^T 1 , from time to time; R 3 '.R 3 , from hour to hour. 
 
 492. Ing. In connected writing the final syllable 
 Ing may be indicated either with the stem Ng or with 
 the dot according to the rules given in sections 317 
 to 321, or by writing a following tick, half circle or 
 circle word or the beginning of any following stem 
 word or figure in the place which would otherwise 
 be occupied by the Ing dot, as explained in the case of 
 compound words (see sec. 321); thus, P'Ktoid, paying 
 a-an; sK^'Ktoid, seeking a-an; G^/SAtoid, giving and; 
 ssT lV Ptoid, consisting of; ssT 1 'PtoidCtoid, consisting 
 of the; D'Ftoid, doing all; D'u, doing other; D'Dhr. 
 doing their-re; G r r, giving you; Dtoid's hoeing his; 
 G 17 s, giving self; G'T, going to; K'R, coming or; 
 Pt 3 'Bt, putting about; Wn a 'MN, winning many; 
 Trs'sRFs, tracing surface; G'7, going seven. This ex- 
 pedient should not be employed if it will take the 
 writing too far below the line. In such cases write 
 the stem Xg or the Ing dot and place the following 
 word in its proper position. (See, however, sec. 41'-'!. ) 
 
 493. In the case of verbs from which, as explained 
 in section 320, the Ng stem and Ing dot may usually 
 be omitted the context determining the meaning the 
 indication- of the final syllable Ing by juxtaposition 
 may also usually be omitted and the first part of the 
 outline of the word written alone; thus, Dh//-R TRn W, 
 they were turning away; JtoidZ MV F?/*Rt, he was 
 moving forward. Generally, however, when a word 
 follows, it is speedier to write the latter in juxtaposi- 
 tion than to write it in its proper position, because 
 the hand does not have to travel so far. But when it
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 373 
 
 would take the writing too far below the line it should ' 
 be written alone as just stated. (See also the latter 
 part of the last paragraph.) 
 
 494. Ing the. When the word "the" follows the 
 final syllable Ing and juxtaposition is employed, "the" 
 is written with the downward tick; thus, sVCtoid, 
 saving the; Mn 1? Ctoid, meaning the; in which case a 
 word following the tick may sometimes be joined to 
 it; thus, Tr^CtoidsM, trying the same. If, however, 
 juxtaposition is not employed, "the" is written with 
 the dot in its proper position, if the preceding word 
 is not written with the stem Ng (see see's. 317 to 320) 
 whether the dot for Ing is written or not; thus, Pst- 
 + 1 or Pst + 1 , posting the. (See sec. 493.) If the 
 word preceding "the" is one written with the stem 
 Ng, as for example, the word "meaning" just given, 
 the final tick "the" instead of the dot is usually 
 written; thus, M^NgCtoid, meaning the. 
 
 a. When the phrases ''the other-s" follow Ing they 
 are written as usual; thus, G l5 Cntoid, giving the other; 
 sK 1 'Cntsoid, seeking the others. 
 
 495. When a word containing the final syllable Ing 
 ends a sentence the stem Ng or the dot is usually 
 written if it is a noun or adjective and omitted if it 
 is a verb (see sec. 493); thus, s-DrRtoid Sl^PNG, con- 
 sider the shipping; S'Rtoid Frst- 1 , see the frosting; but 
 Dh?/-R Trs, they were tracing; JtoidZ Rst, he was 
 resting. 
 
 496. Cm, Cn, Km or Kn. In connected writing 
 the initial Cm, Cn, Km or Kn syllables, as in section 
 293, may be indicated either with the Con dot as there 
 explained or by writing the remainder of the word so 
 that a preceding tick, half circle or circle word or the 
 end of a preceding stem word or figure shall stand in 
 the place of the Con dot; on the same principle as in- 
 dicating these syllables medially in words (see sec. 
 293); thus, Ftoid'Plt 1 , all complied; i'NKts, i con-
 
 374 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 nects; s'Plt 1 , is complete; s'sT 1 , his conceit; s s 'Plt, 
 as-has complied; s'Nst, as-has commenced; ss'sDt, as is 
 conceded; Cntoid'Mt 1 , the other committee; B^Trst, 
 by contrast; Dhs'Tns, this contains; Dh'Krt, they con- 
 quered; Jgt'Plnt, just complained; TRtoid'DKt, to the 
 conduct; BsRf's'TrKt, observing his contract; s'Pn, 
 his compaign; Dhs'Vs, this canvass; Z'Brs, was cum- 
 brous; s a 'sL, his counsel; T'MDt, to accommodate; 
 Dhs 1 R 3 M'B, with his arm akimbo; 2'Mts 1 , two com- 
 mittees; Ds'sRt, does concert. (See "tracting sur- 
 face," the last phrase but one of par. 492, in which 
 the initial circle of the second word is placed under 
 the end of the previous stem, whereas in "does con- 
 cert" it is written after and slightly above it. (See also 
 "disconcert," eng. 293, line 8.) This expedient should 
 not be employed if it will take the writing too far be- 
 low the line. In such cases write the word in its 
 proper position with. the Con dot prefixed. (See, how- 
 ever, sec. 497.) 
 
 497. In the case of those frequent words whose re- 
 maining outlines are sufficiently suggestive and from 
 which the Con dot is consequently omitted as explained 
 in section 293, d, the indication of the initial Cm, etc., 
 syllables by juxtaposition may also be omitted and the 
 remainders of the outlines written alone; thus, -f- 1 Vrs- 
 shn, the conversation; s 1 sRn, his concern; C 3 FDus, 
 much confidence. It is, however, usually more speedy 
 to write them in juxtaposition for the reason given in 
 section 493, in the case of the syllable Ing. 
 
 498. When a small logograph occurs before a word 
 beginning with Cm, etc. , it accommodates itself to the 
 position of the latter (see also sec. 421), in the case of 
 "the" the downward tick being employed; thus, 
 Ktoid'Tst 1 , a contest; Ktoid'DsNt, a candescent; 
 Ktoid'TNshn, a contention; Ktoid'Tshn 3 , a contusion; 
 Ktoid'Mt 1 , a committee; Ktoid'sXt, a consent; Ktoid 1 - 
 Kft, a concavity; Ktoid'sL 1 (s over the center of
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.. liT.") 
 
 Ktoid) a consul; Ktoid'sRfR, a conserver; Ktoid'- 
 sLshn 3 , a cancellation; /SV/toid'Trf l , and contrive; 
 .s'/>toid'V, and convey; ^Atoid'Fshn, 3 , and confusion; 
 >'/?toid'Ft 3 , and confute; ^'Atoid'Jr 1 (Jr under the 
 center of *S7ttoid) and conjure; xSAtoid'Tnt, and is con- 
 tent; -S'/ctoid'sKnt 1 , and consequent-ly; /SAtoid'sXt, and 
 consent; AS'Atoid'Kr, and concur; /S'Atoid'Kr 3 , and 
 canker; xSVitoid'sL 1 , and conceal; iVAtoid'sRf, and con- 
 serve; /kS'Atoid'ssLt, and consult; /tf/ftoid'sL 3 , and cancel- 
 council-counsel; u'sL 3 (s above the u), other counsel; 
 s'sL 3 , as-has-is-his counsel; Ftoid'sLt 3 , all counselled; 
 Ptoid'Mnt 3 , of command; Ctoid'V 1 , the convoy: 
 Ctoid'TMpt, the contempt; Ctoid'Fshn 3 , the confu- 
 sion; Ctoid' JrUi, the conjurer; Ctoid'sRf tR (s opposite 
 the center of Ctoid) the conservator; Ctoid'Mt 1 , the 
 committee; Ctokl'sNt, the consent; Ctoid'Mnt 3 , the 
 command; Ctoid'sMR 3 , the consumer; Ctoid'sL 3 , 
 (s opposite the center of Ctoid) the council-counsel. 
 
 1. If the dot for "the" is written the Con dot 
 should always be inserted, since juxtaposition can not 
 be legibly employed with a dot; thus -(- 1 -Mt 1 , the 
 committee. This rule of course does not apply to 
 those words whose remaining outlines are sufficiently 
 suggestive without the Con dot and which are written 
 separately, as in the phrase "the conversation," in 
 section 497. 
 
 499. In such phrases as "as, has, is" and "his" 
 followed by Cm, etc., the S circle may if necessary be 
 shaded to distinguish it from those containing ' 'self" 
 followed by the same syllables; thus, z'Trl, as-has-is- 
 his control; s'Trl, self : control. This, however, will 
 seldom be necessary and then usually only with "his." 
 
 500. When a vowel containing initial Cm, etc., be- 
 gins a sentence the Con dot is inserted unless the re- 
 mainder of the word, as stated in section 293, d, is 
 sufficiently suggestive, otherwise a double meaning
 
 376 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MAN'UAL. 
 
 may result; thus, -Tst CtoidKs, contest the case; but 
 sTrKtCtoid, construct the. 
 
 501. The Con dot is also inserted when the word 
 in which it occurs follows "of the" indicated by juxta- 
 position (sec sec. 490) unless, as stated in section 293, 
 d, the remainder of the outline is sufficiently suggest- 
 ive; thus, DtKshn'-Plt 1 , detection of the complot; 
 but ?/?LTh'sRn, wealth of the concern. 
 
 502. It is also inserted when the word to which it 
 belongs is written in juxtaposition to a preceding word 
 containing the final syllable Ing unless, as explained 
 in section 293, d, the remaining outline is suffi- 
 ciently suggestive; thus, P'-TrKt, paying contract; 
 but Gr'FDnt, growing confident. 
 
 503. Can and Come. The words "can" and 
 "come" may be represented medially by juxtaposition 
 in the same manner as Cm, etc. ; thus, r'K, you can 
 come; i'St 1 , I can see it; H\V'r, when can you; 
 w l5 G, we can go; L-r'BK, will you come back. 
 
 LESSON 45. 
 
 THE FOURTH POSITION. 
 
 504. When a word is written below and touching 
 (or in the case of a horizontal straight character see 
 sec. 4 nearly touching) the line of writing, or with 
 its first perpendicular or inclined stem , whether initial 
 or not (see see's. 352 to 358), below and touching it, 
 it is in what is called the fourth position and indicates 
 that the word "and" precedes it; thus, +, 4 , and the; 
 H 4 , and how; a 4 , and a; Hu 4 , and who; w 4 , and we; 
 y 4 , and you; s 4 , and as-has-is-his ; st 4 , and is-his-as-has 
 to-too; str 4 , and is-as to their; /SY<toid 4 , and and; 
 Ttoid 4 , and on; He 4 , and he; i 4 , and I; Ptoid 4 , and of; 
 Ftoid 4 , and all; Vtoid 4 , and all the; Ftsoid 4 , and all as- 
 has-is-his; 6 4 anu, and Oahu; G 4 , and go; K 4 M, and 
 game; R 4 Plt, and replied ?/-R 4 Dh, and worthy; sL 4 Tr,
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 377 
 
 and sultry; JtoidM 4 , and home; KtoidMn 4 , and a man; 
 JtoidM 4 , and he may; sM 4 , and some, and is my; 
 s 4 Rtr, and is rather; Ktoid 4 D, and I do; Ktoid 4 R, and 
 a ray; Ktoid 4 RPt, and a rapid; Gt 4 RTRn, and good 
 return; Ls 4 L, and lastly; MR T 4 Ms Jn 4 C 1 Rt 
 Ps 4 Tt KtoidLtr, Mary and Thomas and John each 
 wrote and posted a letter; JMs s 4 Mtr L 4 R z#Rtr, 
 James and his mother and Laura were there; w?L 4 M 
 Pit KIR 4 sNg 3 , and William played and Clara sang; 
 B o 4 R1RD, B. & O. Railroad; i i i 4 R1RD, I. I. & 
 I. Railroad; swR 4 M'Psts stR 4 Ms'P, and swarming 
 pests and storms come up; RtoidVLn Ztr 4 , the violin 
 and zither. 
 
 1. From the above it will be perceived that words 
 containing only horizontal stems and which belong to 
 the third position, are, when written in the fourth, 
 raised half a T length (see sec. 352) since the fourth 
 position for them lies between the second and third. 
 
 a. When a double length upward letter is written 
 in the fourth position it is begun at the same point as 
 its single length (see sec. 353); thus, Ltr 4 , and letter; 
 R 4 R, and roar; s 4 Ltr, and his letter; Ktoid 4 ?#LtrNs, 
 and a wilderness; Ttoid 4 KLtrn, and a caldron; Grt 4 - 
 sLtr, and great slaughter; Ktoid 4 GrtsLtr, and a great 
 slaughter. 
 
 b. Stem words which might conflict from having 
 the same form -and representing the same part of 
 speech should not be written in the fourth position if 
 there would be danger of such conflict, unless the 
 least frequent word is vocalized. Experience will 
 soon teach the learner when to omit such words from 
 the fourth position or to vocalize them. (See also sec. 
 410, k.) Frequently the fact that a word is written 
 in the fourth position gives a clue to its meaning, 
 which would not be the case otherwise. 
 
 c. Words consisting of two or more stems, either 
 or both of which are compound, or those of three or
 
 378 THE PHOX<x;::.',PHir MANUAL. 
 
 more, can usuall}' be written in any position without 
 danger of conflict. (See par. 385.) 
 
 505. A figure may be written in the fourth posi- 
 tion; thus, Dh -i 4 , they and four; 5 7 4 , five and 
 seven. 
 
 506. If desired the words "he, a" and "an" may 
 be indicated initially by the fourth position in addition 
 to the word "and;" thus, s 4 , he as-has-is; Z 4 , he was; 
 D 4 , he had; sNt 4 , he sent; Tlt 4 M IFt 4 , he told mt- 
 he would; R 4 Plt Dnt 4 X, he replied he did n't know; 
 sD 4 Tht 4 Mt 4 , he said he thought he might ;P>t 4 P 4 C 
 PI 4 KtoidPl 4 M, he bought a peach, an apple and a 
 plum. 
 
 507. If preferred the fourth position need not be 
 employed for "and," or any of the other words above, 
 but instead the logographs, ticks and curvets may be 
 joined initially. In which case this position would 
 become the third for horizontal and small character 
 words and the third position half a T length below the 
 line (see sec. 352) would be abolished. (See also sec. 
 433, a.) 
 
 THE ZERO POSITION. 
 
 508. When a word is written on the upper line (see 
 sec. 352) or with- its first perpendicular or inclined 
 stem, whether initial or not, resting on it, it is in 
 what is called the Zero position and indicates that 
 either of the words "of" or "I" precedes it the con- 
 text determining which; thus, -f-, of the; a, of a-an; 
 a, of a; Ftoid , of all; r, of you; s, of as-his-us; 
 M, of my or I am; KtoidD , of a dollar; TtoidKDM, 
 of an academy; KtoidDt , of a debt; Ktoid XTt, of a 
 noted; KtoidBtFl, of a beautiful; GrtJ of great ad- 
 vantage; KtoidKltD , of a cold day; Th SKtoid 
 XssT Gn'T, I think I see the necessity of beginning 
 it; RtoidXs 1 Ktoid DL XsPPr, Hie influence of a 
 daily newspaper: Xt'13Dn, I know it can be done;
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 379 
 
 KtoidMn KrJ, a man of courage; .RtoidwRt Ntr, 
 the word of another; NtrD, of another day; Ktoid- 
 LVr LtrTr, a lover of literature. 
 
 a. When a double length downward letter is writ- 
 ten in the zero position it is begun at the same point 
 as its single length (see sec. 353); thus, Ftr, of future; 
 DT, of duty; KtoidYtr , of a yachter; KtoidKrFtr , 
 of a crofter ; GtShltr , of good shelter; TtoidGrtShltr , 
 of a good shelter. 
 
 b. Stem words of the same form and part of 
 speech should not be written in the zero position, if 
 there would be danger of conflict, unless the least 
 frequent word is vocalized; the same as in the case 
 of the fourth position. (See sec. 504, b. ) 
 
 c. Words like those explained in section 504,0 can 
 usually be written in any position without danger of 
 conflict. 
 
 509. A figure may be written in the zero position; 
 thus, S 4, so of four; 5 7, five of seven. 
 
 510. If preferred the zero position need not be 
 employed for "of" and "I," but instead the logo- 
 graphs and ticks in sections 381 and 432 may be joined 
 initially. (See also sec. 507.) 
 
 CAUTION IN REGARD TO WRITING IN THE THIRD, ZERO 
 AND FIRST POSITIONS. 
 
 511. When writing in the third or zero position 
 the words should not be written so far below or above 
 the line as to occupy the zero position of the line be- 
 low or the third position of the one above. Likewise 
 when writing in the first position the words should 
 not be placed so high above the line as to be in the 
 zero position. (See also sec. 359.) All that is needed 
 for distinction in each case is merely a half T 
 length elevation or drop of perpendicular or inclined 
 stem words and the same or about a quarter length 
 of all other words.
 
 380 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 a. When writing on unruled paper the above 
 method is followed in regard to where the line of 
 writing would be if traced. 
 
 THE OR SPACE AND POSITION. 
 
 512. "Or" is indicated medially in a phrase by 
 a space about as long as a double length K, the word 
 or number following the "or"' being written in the 
 first position and that preceding it in its proper or the 
 second position, the space being designated in steno- 
 typy by two single opposite quotation points; thus, 
 Y ' ' i 1 , you or I; K < ' G 1 , come or go; F 3 < ' 
 M*X, few or many; JMs l ' Jn 1 , James or John; 
 Jn 1 ' ' tPMs, John or James; i 1 ' ' Nn 1 , I or 
 none; Y l ' M 1 , of you or me-him; Dh ' ' 15 1 , 
 they or fifteen; 4 ' ' Mr 1 , four or more; 7 ' ' 8 1 , 
 seven or eight; Dh ' ' SMMst, they or two of the 
 most. 
 
 a. Small logographs or horizontal stems, or both, 
 accommodate themselves in the or position to the fol- 
 lowing downward stem the same as when in the zero 
 position (see examples in sec. 508); thus, Ktoid?/-Rt 
 1 ' KtoidFrs 1 , a word or a phrase; sMX ' ' sC^K, 
 his money or his check; sSsR 4 ' sKT 1 , as Cicero or 
 as Cato; JtoidSRts ' ' sKrDt 1 , he asserts or is 
 credited; sVLn ' ' sZtr 1 , his violin or his zither. 
 
 b. The observations in paragraphs b and c, section 
 504, in reference to the fourth position apply also to 
 the or space and position. 
 
 c. When "or" occurs initially it is represented by 
 the logograph the same as "to" and "too" (see sec. 
 400, d) which are also indicated by the opposite 
 method to "or", namely, by a narrow instead of a 
 wide space. 
 
 513. If preferred the or space and position need 
 not be employed, but instead the logograph may be 
 written.
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 381 
 
 THE TO SPACE BETWEEN FIGURES. 
 
 514. "To" is represented between figures by a 
 space about as long as a double length K, the num- 
 ber after it being written in the second position. If 
 the number before it is preceded by the word "from" 
 it is placed in the first position, but if not, in the 
 second; thus, 2 1 ' ' 4, from two to four ; 14 1 ' ' 15, 
 from fourteen to fifteen; 5 ' ' 8, five to eight; 
 21 ' ' 22, twenty-one to twenty-two. 
 
 a. When "or" occurs between two groups of the 
 last examples it is expressed with the logograph; 
 thus, 2 < ' 4 R 1 4 < ' 8, two to four or four to 
 eight. 
 
 THE BY SPACE BETWEEN FIGURES. 
 
 515. "By" is represented between figures by a 
 space about as long as a double length K, the num- 
 ber following it being written in the third position 
 and the one preceding it in the second ; thus, 2 ' ' 4 3 , 
 two by four; 15 ' ' 18 3 , fifteen by eighteen. 
 
 a. "By" may be written with the logograph, if 
 preferred; thus, 2 B 1 4; 15 B 1 18. 
 
 CAUTION IN REGARD TO PHRASEOGRAPHY. 
 
 516. The learner should not employ phraseography 
 to excess since it then renders the writing somewhat 
 involved and hence difficult to read. Accordingly it 
 should be used only enough to ensure speed. Its full 
 limit is not necessary in ordinary or private writing, 
 but only in the swiftest reporting. As a general rule 
 only the most frequent and simple phrases of two and 
 three words each (usually the former) should be 
 employed. (See sec. 419.) If the learner will take 
 care of these, the long phrases will take care of them- 
 selves no matter how swif t the writing may be. Prac- 
 tice will soon teach the proper forms. Furthermore,
 
 >M TUB PHOXOORAPHIC MAXfAf.. 
 
 joining "the"' (see sec. 425) medially when convenient, 
 very greatly enchances speed, lint it should not be 
 thus joined if the legibility of the following -word 
 would suffer by reason of being written out of its 
 proper position or modifying its form. Words like 
 those in section 385, however, can usually be so joined. 
 
 LESSON 46. 
 
 SPECIAL, PHRASES, LOGOGRAPHS AND BREVIGRAPHS. 
 
 517. The preceding portions of this chapter are 
 devoted to what are called General Phrases, that is 
 phrases which may be employed in general writing. 
 There are, however, many others, such as Business, 
 Law, Medicine, Military, Political, Scientific, Theo- 
 logical, etc., special or technical in their nature, which 
 are known as Special or Technical phrases or, simply, 
 Techniphrases and may be indicated by the phono- 
 grapher when engaged in such writing. The same is 
 true of Logographs (see sec. 379) and Brevigraphs, 
 which are then called Special Logographs or Bre- 
 vigraphs or, simply, Technigraphs. Thus, for ex- 
 ample, in business the frequently occurring names of 
 firms, railroad companies, or other corporations, etc., 
 or of certain articles of merchandise, can be abbre- 
 viated by the writer to suit his own convenience. The 
 learner should, however, understand that in special 
 writing phrases and contractions can be used which 
 would not, as a rule (see sec. 519), be admissible in 
 general writing, because there special phrases and 
 terms occur so seldom that they must be written either 
 in full or according to the ordinary rules of abbrevi- 
 ation, otherwise they will be apt to be illegible. On 
 the other hand in special w y riting the phrases and words 
 peculiar to the business or subject recur continually, 
 and thus the special forms invented to represent them 
 soon become familiarized and consequently easily read
 
 THE PUON'OGR \P11U 1 MANUAL. 383 
 
 by the writer though they may be mostly illegible to 
 another phonographer not engaged in the same line of 
 writing. 
 
 518. It will therefore be seen that while a person 
 may be a good general phonographer he may not be a 
 good special one, and vice versa. Also that a special 
 writer who may be familiar with the phrases and 
 terms in one business or profession may not be so with 
 those in another. Accordingly in order to succeed in 
 any particular kind of writing, special attention should 
 be given to it. Books have been published containing 
 full lists of the phrases and words pertaining to each 
 kind business, legal, political, etc., which the learner 
 should obtain if he desires to follow either of them 
 specially. Most of the outlines in each can easily be 
 adapted to any system of phonography; and where they 
 can not other outlines may be invented instead. 
 
 519. Sometimes, even in general writing, a phrase 
 or word of inconvenient length of outline, or a proper 
 name, occurs very frequently. In such a case the 
 writer may, after writing it the first time, or perhaps 
 oftener, in full vocalizing it if it is a proper nanivi 
 invent an abbreviation for it, usually a suggestive one, 
 or omit the vocalization. 
 
 INTERSECTED PHRASES. 
 
 520. Official titles, the names of firms, corporations, 
 public bodies and any phrases that can not be briefly 
 or satisfactorily written otherwise, may be indicated 
 by intersecting; that is by crossing a prominent stem 
 by a following one or writing it across a preceding 
 stem, after the principle explained in section 410, j. 
 When this can not be done because of two straight 
 strokes lying in the same direction, the second stroke 
 should be placed close to or under the preceding one 
 with its beginning opposite the middle of the latter. 
 Thus. ,'ii*TLR, Gen. Taylor; JntShrAIn, Gen. Sher-
 
 384 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 man; KlfDKsX, Col. Dixon; MtJns, Maj. Jones; 
 KfRXlts, Ca[)t. Reynolds; KtKKsTn, Capt. Caxton, 
 D 3 fsMpsX, Admiral Sampson; D 3 iD, Admiral Dewey; 
 PrfTMsX, Prof. Thompson; K 2 fPn, capital punish- 
 ment. 
 
 a. The words "Society, Association, Committee 
 and Department" are represented respectively by the 
 strokes S, Sh, Mt and D, while "Party" is written 
 with the logograph P; thus, TMpfS, Temperance 
 Society; FXtKfS, Phonetic Society; Blt'fSh, Build- 
 ing Association; Ki^fSh, Christian Association; Tr- 
 ZhrfD, Treasury Department; mR^fD, War Depart- 
 ment; stT'.D, State Department; S 3 fMt, House Com- 
 mittee; FnXs'.Mt, Finance Committee; KIMsiMt, 
 Claims Committee; RfP, Republican Party; DIP or 
 DMfP, Democratic Party; LBrLfP, Liberal Party; 
 LBrtP, Labor Party; Pr a BshniP, Prohibition Party 
 
 b. The abbreviation "Co.," for "Company," is 
 always written with K, while the word * 'Company" is 
 always written in full. (See Vocabulary.) Further- 
 more the former is seldom intersected, but is usually 
 joined or disjoined according to convenience. Thus, 
 RRK, R. R. Co.; R1RDK, Railroad Co.; RYTK, R. 
 AY. Co. ; R1WK, Railway Co. ; sPrsK, Express Co. ; 
 BKsK, Box Co.; BrKK or BrK'.K, Brick Co.; stXtr- 
 D 3 LK or stXtrD 3 LiK, Standard Oil Co.; sMTh K>, 
 Smith & Co.; sPrs'PN, Express Company; stXtrD 3 - 
 L'PX, Standard Oil Company; XVPX, Xews Com- 
 pany; Brn 3 P 4 X, Brown & Company. 
 
 1. The word "Company" (PX) above, as in Ex- 
 press Company, is written is juxtaposition according 
 to section 496 for the sake of speed. (See sec. 497.) 
 But it may, if preferred, be written separately in its 
 proper position, namely, the second, since its outline 
 is sufficiently suggestive without the aid of juxtapo- 
 sition. 
 
 c. The syllable Con, in the word "connection" and
 
 THIS PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. .'IH5 
 
 its derivatives, may be indicated by intersecting the 
 previous stem with the K stem simple or compound; 
 thus, N^Kshn, in connection; M^fKshn, my con- 
 nection; DhsfKshn, this connection; Rn^Kshn, or in 
 connection; DhfKt, they connect. 
 
 LESSON 47. 
 STEM PHRASEOGRAPHS. 
 
 521. The following list of stem phraseographs (see 
 sec. 420) is formed mostly from single length stem 
 logographs without appendages. (See sec. 381.) Usu- 
 ally no circle logographs or possessives are added 
 or included since these can easily be attached or form- 
 ed from the others when necessary. Examples of 
 other phraseographs not contained in the list will be 
 
 , found under their respective headings in the preceding 
 portions of this chapter. 
 
 522. The list is arranged in phonetic order for 
 convenience of reference when reading phonography. 
 It is divided into two parts, the first part beginning 
 at P and the second at Ch, at Lesson 48, and should 
 be thoroughly memorized. 
 
 523. LIST OF STEM PHRASEOGRAPHS. 
 
 Pf 
 
 Ptr 
 
 Ptrn 
 
 Prtr 
 
 Pltr 
 
 Pltrn 
 
 sPtr 
 
 sPtrn . . . . 
 sPss/m. . . 
 sPltr. . 
 
 3 hope to have 
 
 1 occupy their-re 2 up there 3 hope their- 
 
 re-they are 
 1 occupy their own 3 hope their own 
 
 1 appear there 
 
 2 play their-re 3 apply their-re 
 
 2 play their own 3 apply their own 
 1 speak their-re 2 spoke their-re 
 
 1 speak their own 2 spoke their own 
 
 2 special session 
 1 supply their
 
 380 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 sPltrn .... 1 supply their own 
 
 nsPrshn . . 1 in suppression 2 in expression 3 in sep- 
 aration 
 
 Pt 1 occupy it 3 hope it 
 
 Pnt 2 upon it 
 
 sPlt 1 supply it 
 
 sPlnt .... 2 explain it 
 
 nsPrt .... 3 in separate 
 
 B 
 
 B 3 to be 
 
 Bf 1 be of 2 but have-of 
 
 Btr 1 be-by their-re 2 but their-re-they are 3 to 
 
 be their-re 
 Btrn 1 be-by their own 2 but their own, better 
 
 than 3 to be their own 
 
 Br 1 by our 2 but are-our 
 
 Brn 1 by our own 
 
 Brf 3 number of 
 
 Brtr 2 but are there 2 remember their-re-they 
 
 are 
 Brtrn .... 2 but are their own 
 
 Bl 1 by all 2 but will 
 
 Blf 1 by all of 2 but will have 
 
 Bltr 1 belong-ed there, by all their-re-they are 
 
 2 but will their-re 
 Bltrn ... 1 by all their own 2 but will their own 
 
 Bt 1 be-by-buy it 2 but it-had-would 
 
 Bnt 1 be-by not 2 but not, but had- would not 
 
 Bf t 1 be of it 2 above it, but have it-had, but 
 
 of it 
 
 Btrt 2 better it 
 
 Brnt 2 but are not 
 
 Brft 3 number of it 
 
 Bit 2 able to, but will it 
 
 Bint 2 but will not 
 
 Blf t 2 believe it, but will have it
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL 
 
 387 
 
 Tn 1 ought-what one 3 at one 
 
 Tns 1 at once 
 
 Tf 1 ought of-to have, what of-to have 2 to 
 
 have 3 out of 
 
 Ttr 1 ought I heir-re, what their-re-they are 2 to- 
 
 it their-re 3 at-out their-re 
 
 Ttrn 1 ought-what their own 2 to-it their own 
 
 3 at-out their own 
 
 Tr 1 what are-our 2 to our 3 at our, it were 
 
 Trn 1 what our own 2 to our own 3 at our own 
 
 Trf 1 try to have 3 it were of-to have 
 
 Trtr 1 try their-re, what are their-re 3 it were 
 
 their-re 
 
 Trtrn. ... 1 try their own, what are their own 2 it 
 were their own 
 
 Tl 1 what will 2 to all, it will 3 at all 
 
 Tlst 3 at least 
 
 Tin 3 at length 
 
 Tlf 1 what will have 2 to all of, it will have 
 
 3 at all of 
 
 Tltr 1 what all their-re-they are, what will their- 
 re 2 to all their-re-they are, till their- 
 re-they are, tell their-re 3 until their- 
 re-they are, at all their-re 
 
 Tltrn .... 1 what all their own 2 to all their own, till- 
 tell their own 3 until-at all their 
 own 
 
 sTtr 3 satisf y-ied their-re 
 
 sTtrn .... 3 satisf y-ied their own 
 
 sir 3 as it were 
 
 stTf 2 state of 
 
 stTtr 2 state their 
 
 nsTr 2 in constructing 
 
 nsTrtr.. . . j 2 instruct their-re, in constructing their-re 
 
 nsTrtrn . . 2 instruct their own, in constructing their 
 own
 
 888 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 nsTrshn . . 2 in construction 
 
 Tt 1 ought it, what it-had-would 2 to it, it 
 
 had-would 3 at it 
 Tnt 1 ought-what not, what had-would not 2 to 
 
 not, it not,, it had-would not, at hand 
 Tft 1 ought to have it-had, what have it-had, 
 
 what of it 2 to have it-had 3 out 
 
 of it (See sec. 527.) 
 
 Trt 1 try it 
 
 Trnt 1 try not 3 it were not 
 
 Trf t 1 try to have it 3 it were to have it 
 
 Tit .... 1 what will it 2 till-tell it 3 until it 
 
 Tint; 1 what will not 2 it will not 
 
 Tlft 1 what will have it 2 it will have it 
 
 stTt 2 state it 
 
 D 
 
 Df 3 had to have (Alone or initially.) 
 
 Dtr 2 do their-re 3 add-had-advertise their-re 
 
 Dtrn 2 do their own 3 add-had-advertise their 
 
 own 
 
 Drtr 1 doctor their 3 during their 
 
 Drtrn. ... 1 doctor their own 3 during their own 
 
 Dltr 1 idle their-re 2 deliver-ed their-re 
 
 Dltrn .... 1 idle their own 2 deliver-ed their own 
 
 Dwtr .... 2 dwell-ed there 
 
 sDf 2 said of -to have 
 
 sDtr 2 said their-re-they are 
 
 sDrtr .... 2 consider there ' 
 
 sDrtrn ... 2 consider their own 
 
 ssDrshn . . 2 his consideration 
 
 nsDrshn . . 2 in consideration 
 
 Dt 2 do it 3 add it, had it-had 
 
 Dnt 1 did not 2 do not 3 had not 
 
 Df t 3 had to have it (Alone or initially. ) 
 
 Drt 3 during it 
 
 Dlt . .2 deliver it
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 389 
 
 sDt j 
 
 2 
 
 said it 
 
 sDft 
 sDrt 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 said of-to haye it 3 has had to have it 
 consider it 
 
 Ktr 
 
 2 
 
 K 
 
 come their-re 
 
 Ktrn 
 Krtr 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 come their own 
 cure their-re < 
 
 Krtrn .... 
 
 3 
 
 cure their own 
 
 Kltr 
 
 1 
 
 call their-re 2 cool their-re 3 clew 
 
 
 
 their-re 
 
 Kltrn .... 
 
 1 
 
 call their own 2 coal their own 3 clew 
 
 
 
 their own 
 
 Kwtrss/m* 
 sKrtr 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 quarter sessions 
 describe-d their 3 secure their-re 
 
 sKrtrn . . . 
 
 1 
 
 describe their own 2 secure their own 
 
 sKltr .... 
 
 2 
 
 scale their 3 school their 
 
 sKltrn . . . 
 
 2 
 
 scale their own 3 school their own 
 
 nsKr 
 nsKrn. . . . 
 nsKrf.. .. 
 nsKrtr . . . 
 
 1 
 1 
 1 
 1 
 
 in scripture, in describing 3 in securing 
 in screening 
 in descriptive 
 inscribe their 
 
 nsKrshn . . 
 Knt. 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 in description 
 can not 2 can it 
 
 Krt 
 
 1 
 
 according to-to the 3 cure it 
 
 Kit 
 
 1 
 
 o 
 
 call it 2 coal it 3 clew it 
 
 sKrt 
 
 3 
 
 secure it 
 
 sKrnt .... 
 
 1 
 
 screen it 
 
 sKlt .... 
 
 2 
 
 scale it 
 
 nsKrt .... 
 
 1 
 
 in secret 
 
 nsKrts*7m. 
 
 1 
 
 in secret session 
 
 Gtr 
 
 
 G 
 
 giv-tr-n their-re 2 go their-re 
 
 Gtrn 
 Grtrn .... 
 sGtr 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 1 
 
 give-n their own 2 go their own 
 greater than 
 siffnifv their-re
 
 390 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 sGtrn .... 1 signify their own 
 
 Gf t 2 gave it 
 
 Gtrt 3 gather it 
 
 sGts 1 has got his-us 2 is-as good as 
 
 ssGts .... 2 is as good as 
 
 sGrts . . . . 2 is-as great as 
 
 ssGrts .... 2 is as great as 
 
 S 
 Str 1 see-saw their-re 2 so-say their-re-they are, 
 
 sow-sew their-re 3 us their-re, sue 
 
 their-re 
 Strn 1 see-saw their own 2' so-say-sow-sew their 
 
 own 3 us-sue their own 
 St 1 see-saw it 2 so-so w-sew it, Sat, say it, so 
 
 had- would 3 use it 
 Snt 1 assign it 2 so had-would not 
 
 Z 
 
 Ztr 1 is their-re 2 was their-re 3 as their-re- 
 they are, has their-re, use their, 
 those their-re-they are 
 
 Ztrn 1 is their own-one 2 was their own-one 
 
 3 as-has their own, use their own, 
 those their own 
 
 Zt 1 is it (See sec. 475, a.) 3 as-has it (see 
 
 sec. 475, a), use it 
 
 F 
 
 Fn 1 if one 
 
 Frn 2 from one 
 
 Yi'sshn ... 2 first session 
 
 Fl 1 if all 2 f or all 
 
 Ftr 1 if their-re-they are 2 for their-re-they are 
 
 3 half their-re 
 Ftrn 1 if their own 2 for their own 3 half their 
 
 own 
 Frtr 1 offer their-re 2 from their-re
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL 
 
 391 
 
 Thrn. 
 Thtr . 
 
 Thtrn 
 
 Frtrn .... 1 offer their own 2 from their own, further 
 
 than 3 farther than 
 Fltr 1 if all their- re, follow-fill their-re 2 for all 
 
 their-re 
 Fltrn .... 1 if all their own, follow-fill their own 3 for 
 
 all their own 
 
 Frtrtr .... 2 further their-re-they are 
 Frtrtrn. . . 2 further their own 
 
 Ft 1 if it 2 for it 
 
 Fnt 1 if not 2 for not 
 
 Frt 1 offer it 2 from it 
 
 Fit 1 if all it, follow-fill it 2 for all it 
 
 V 
 
 Vn 2 have one, have been. (See sec. 460, c. ) 
 
 Vrn 2 every one 
 
 Vtr 1 of their-re, ever their-re-they are 2 have 
 
 their-re 3 however their-re-tbey are, 
 
 halve their 
 Vtrn 1 of-ever their own 2 have their own, have 
 
 there been 3 however their own, 
 
 halve their own 
 
 Vrtr 1 over their-re 3 whoever their-re-they are 
 
 Vrtrn .... 1 over their own 3 whoever their own 
 
 Vltr 1 of all their-re 3 value their-re 
 
 Vltrn .... 1 of all their own 3 value their own 
 
 Vt 1 of it 2 have it-had 3 however-halve it 
 
 Vnt 2 have not, have been it 
 
 Vrt 1 over it 3 whoever it 
 
 Vlt 1 of all it 3 value it 
 
 Vlts . 1 of all its 
 
 Th 
 
 3 through one 
 
 2 think their-re-they are 3 thank-hath their- 
 re 
 2 think their own 3 thank-hath their own
 
 392 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MAXCAL. 
 
 Thrtr . 
 Thrtrn 
 Tht... 
 
 Thnt. . 
 Thrt. . 
 
 Cn 
 Cf. 
 
 Ctr. 
 
 Dhst 
 
 1 
 
 Dhsshn. . . 
 
 2 
 
 Dhr. 
 
 2 
 
 Dhrn 
 
 1 
 
 Dhl 
 
 1 
 
 Dhtr 
 
 1 
 
 Dhtrn.. .. 
 
 1 
 
 Dhrtr. . . . 
 
 1 
 
 Dhrtrn. . . 
 
 1 
 
 Dhltr .... 
 
 1 
 
 Dhitrn. .. 
 
 1 
 
 Dht 
 
 1 
 
 Dhtst 
 
 3 
 
 Dhnt 
 
 1 
 
 Dhrt. .. .. 
 
 2 
 
 Dhrnt 
 
 1 
 
 Dhlt 
 
 3 
 
 Dhlnt.. . 
 
 2 
 
 3 through their-re 
 3 through their own 
 2 think it 3 thank it 
 
 2 think not 
 
 3 through it 
 
 Dh 
 
 thou wast 3 thou hast 
 2 this session 
 2 they are 
 either one 2 their own, they are in 
 
 3 other one-than 
 with all 2 they will 
 
 thee their-re-with their 2 them their-re 
 3 though their-re- they are 
 
 C v 
 
 thee-with their own 2 them their own 
 3 though their own 
 
 either their-re-they are 2 they are their- 
 re 
 
 either their own 2 they are their own 
 
 with all their-re 
 
 with all their own 
 
 with it 2 they had-would 
 
 thou hadst 
 
 3 though it 
 
 within it 2 than-then it, they not, they 
 
 had-would not 
 2 there it-had-woul J 
 
 on either hand 2 they are not, there had- 
 would not 
 thou wilt 
 2 they will not 3 thou wilt not 
 
 LESSON 48. 
 
 Ch 
 
 1 each one 2 which one 
 1 each of 2 which have-of 3 much cf 
 1 watch their-ro 2 which their-re
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 393 
 
 Ctrn 
 
 1 
 
 Cr 
 
 2 
 
 Crn 
 
 2 
 
 Crf . . 
 
 9, 
 
 Crtr. 
 
 1 
 
 Crtrn.. 
 
 1 
 
 Cl. 
 
 1 
 
 Clf 
 
 1 
 
 Cltr 
 
 9, 
 
 sCn 
 
 2 
 
 sCf. 
 
 2 
 
 sCtr 
 
 1 
 
 sCtrn. .. 
 
 1 
 
 sCr 
 
 2 
 
 sCrf ... . 
 
 2 
 
 sCrtr 
 
 2 
 
 sCrtrn. . . . 
 
 2 
 
 sCl 
 
 1 
 
 sClf 
 
 1 
 
 sCltr 
 
 2 
 
 Ct 
 
 1 
 
 Cnt...... 
 
 1 
 
 Cf t 
 
 9 
 
 Crts 
 
 2 
 
 Crnt 
 
 2 
 
 Oft 
 
 2 
 
 Clt 
 
 9 
 
 watch their own 2 which their own 
 
 which are-our 3 which were 
 
 which are in, which our own 3 which 
 
 were in 
 which are of-to have 3 which were of-to 
 
 have 
 cheer their-re 2 which are their-re 
 
 3 which were their-re 
 cheer their own 2 which are their own 
 
 3 which were their own 
 each will 2 which will 3 much will 
 each will have 2 which will have 3 much 
 
 will have 
 which will there 
 such a one 
 such have-of 
 
 switch their-re 2 such their-re-they are 
 switch their own 2 such their own 
 such are 3 such were 
 such are of-to have 3 such were of-to 
 
 have 
 
 such are their-re 3 such were their-re 
 such are their own 3 such were their own 
 as each will 2 such will 3 as much will 
 as each will have 2 such will have 3 as 
 
 much will have 
 such will there 
 each had-would, watch it 2 which it-had- 
 
 would 
 each had-would not 2 which had-would 
 
 not 
 
 which have it-had 3 much of it 
 which are its 3 which were its 
 which are not 3 which were not 
 Avhich tiro of it-to have it 3 which were 
 
 of it-to have it 
 which will it 3 much will it
 
 394 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 Clnt 
 
 Gift.. 
 
 sCt.. 
 sCnt. 
 sCft. 
 sCrts 
 sCrnt 
 sCrft 
 
 sClt. . 
 sClnt 
 sClft. 
 
 1 each will not 2 which will not 2 much 
 
 will not 
 1 each will have it-had 2 which will have 
 
 it-had 
 
 1 switch it 2 such it 
 
 2 such had- would not 
 2 such have it 
 
 2 such are its 3 such were its 
 
 2 such are not 3 such were not 
 
 2 such are of it-to have it 3 such were of 
 
 it-to have it 
 2 such will it 
 2 such will not 
 2 such will have it 
 
 Jrn | 3 larger than 
 
 Shi. 
 Shtr 
 
 Shtrn . . 
 Shrtr . . 
 Shrtrn . 
 
 Shltrtr . 
 Shltrtrn 
 Sht.... 
 Shnt. 
 
 Shrt. .. 
 Shlnt . . 
 
 Sh 
 
 1 she will 
 
 1 wish theii-re 2 shall their-re 3 issue 
 their-re 
 
 1 wish their own 2 shall their own 
 
 3 issue their own 
 
 2 sure their-re-they are, usher their-re 
 
 3 assure their-re 
 
 1 shorter than 2 sure-usher their own 
 
 3 assure their own 
 
 2 shelter their-re 3 shoulder their-re 
 
 2 shelter-their own 3 shoulder their own 
 
 1 she had-would, wish it 2 shall it 3 issue it 
 (For "she not, she had-would not, shall 
 not" and "should not," see sec. 
 474, a.) 
 
 3 assure it 
 
 (For "she will not" see sec. 474, a.)
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 395 
 
 Zhtr . . 
 Zhtrn . 
 Zhrtr . 
 Zhrtrn 
 Zhrt . . 
 nsZh . , 
 
 Mrn. 
 sMn . 
 Mtr.. 
 
 Mtrn . . . 
 
 Mrtr. . . . 
 Mrtrn . . 
 sMtr. . . . 
 sMtrn . . , 
 
 Mt 
 
 Mnt 
 
 sMnt. . . 
 
 Mp 
 
 Mpn. . . . 
 Mptr . . . 
 
 Mptrn . . 
 
 Mpltr . . . 
 stMptr . . 
 st Mptrn , 
 Mptrtr . . 
 Mptrtrn, 
 Mpt. .. 
 Mpnt .. 
 stMpt. . , 
 
 Zh 
 2 usually their-re-they are 
 
 2 usually their own 
 
 3 measure their 
 
 3 measure their own 
 3 measure it 
 2 in his usual 
 
 M 
 
 2 more than 
 
 2 some one 
 
 1 my dear, me their-re 2 am-him-may their- 
 
 their-re 
 1 me their own 2 am-him-may their 
 
 own 
 1 remark their-re 3 humor their-re 
 
 1 remark their own 3 humor their own 
 
 2 some their-re 
 
 2 some their own 3 smoother than 
 2 may it 
 
 2 may-am not 
 
 3 examine it 
 2 may be 
 
 2 may be one 
 
 2 may be their-re-they are, improve their 
 3 map their-re 
 
 2 may be their own, improve their own 
 
 3 map their own 
 
 3 humble their-re 
 
 2 stump their-re 3 stamp their-re 
 
 2 stump their own 3 stamp their own 
 
 2 may be they are their-re 
 
 2 may be they are their own 
 
 2 may be it, improve it 3 map it 
 
 2 may be not 
 
 2 stump it 3 stamp it
 
 396 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 Ns 2 no, sir 
 
 Xss/m ... 2 next session 
 
 Nr 1 in our 
 
 Nrn 1 in our own 
 
 Nl 1 in all 
 
 ssX 2 as-is soon 
 
 ssNs 2 as soon as, is as soon as 
 
 Ntr 1 in their-re 2 know their-re-they are 3 own 
 
 their-re 
 
 Xtrn .... 1 in their own, neither one 2 know their 
 own, another one 3 own their own 
 
 Xtrs/m. . . 1 entire session 2 another session 
 
 Xrtr 1 near-nor-honor their-re 
 
 Xrtrn .... 1 near-nor-honor their own 
 
 Xltr 1 in all their-re 2 only their-re 
 
 Xltrn .... 1 in all their own 2 only their own 
 
 sXtr 3 soon their-re-they are 
 
 sXltr .... 3 sooner or later 
 
 Xtrtr 1 neither their-re-they are 2 another their- 
 re 
 
 Xtrtrn ... 1 neither their own 2 another their own 
 
 Nt 1 in it 2 know it 3 own it 
 
 Nrt 1 honor it, in order-to 
 
 Ng 
 
 Ngr 1 along our 
 
 Xgrn .... 1 along our own, longer than 
 
 Xgl 1 along all 
 
 Xgls 1 thing else 
 
 Xgtr .... 1 along their-re, long there 
 
 Xgtrn ... 1 along their own, long their own 
 
 Xgrtr. ... 1 longer their-re 3 anger their-re 
 
 Xgrtrn ... 1 longer their own 3 anger their own 
 
 Xgltr .... 1 along all their 3 angle their-re 
 
 Xgltrn. . . 1 along all their own 3 angle their own 
 
 Xgrtrtr . . 1 longer they are their-re
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 397 
 
 R 
 
 Rn 1 or in 2 are in 3 our own 
 
 Rf 1 or have-of-to have 2 are of -to have 3 hour 
 
 of 
 
 Rtr lor their-re-they are 2 her-are-their-re, be- 
 fore their-re-they are 3 rue their 
 
 Rtrn .... 1 or their own, writer-order than 2 her-are- 
 before their own 3 rue their own, 
 rather than 
 
 Rltr 2 roll their-re 3 rule their-re 
 
 Rltrn .... 2 roil their own 3 rule their own 
 
 1 with or 2 with her, we are 3 with our 
 %'Rn 1 were in, we are in, with her own 3 with 
 
 our own 
 
 2 were of -to have, we are of -to have 3 aware 
 
 of 
 
 2 were their-re, we are their-re 
 2 where their-re-they are 
 u'Rtrn ... 2 were their own, we are their own 
 H?/?Rtrn . . 2 where their own 
 1 ye are 2 you are 
 
 ?/Rn 1 ye are in 2 you are in 3 your own 
 
 1 ye are- of -to have, year of 2 you are of- 
 to have 
 
 1 ye are their-re 2 you are their-re 
 yRtrn .... 1 ye are their own 2 you are their own 
 
 Rt 1 or it-had-would 2 before it 3 rue it 
 
 Rnt 1 or not 2 are not 
 
 Rf t 1 or have-of it 2 are of it 
 
 Rtrt 1 order it 3 rather it 
 
 2 were it 
 
 2 where it-had-would 
 
 2 were not, we are not 
 
 2 where not, where had-would not 
 
 2 were to have it, we are to have it 3 aware 
 
 of it 
 2 where to have it
 
 398 
 
 yRnt . . 
 z/Rnts. . 
 yRf t . . . 
 
 TilK PHONOGRAPHIC MAM'AL. 
 
 Ltr ... 
 Ltrn . . 
 mrLtr . . 
 HJi'Ltrn 
 
 Lt 
 
 Lnt. . . . 
 Lrnt . . 
 HwLt . 
 
 H //'Lnt . 
 
 1 ye are not 2 you are not 3 your hand 
 3 your hands 
 
 1 ye are to have it 2 you are to have it. 
 
 L 
 
 2 we will 
 
 1 all-their-re-they are 2 will their-re 
 
 1 all their own 2 will their own 
 
 1 while their-re-they are 
 
 1 while their own 
 
 1 all it-had-wouid 2 will it 
 
 1 all had-would not 2 will not 
 
 2 learn it 
 
 1 while it 
 
 2 we will not 
 1 while not 
 
 
 
 W 
 
 nWn .... 
 
 1 
 
 why one 2 when one 
 
 Wtr 
 
 -2 
 
 Aveigh their-re 
 
 nWtr .... 
 
 I 
 
 why their-re-they are 2 when their-re- 
 
 
 
 they are 
 
 Wtrn . . . 
 
 2 
 
 weigh their own 
 
 nWtrn . . 
 
 1 
 
 why their own 2 when their own 
 
 Wtrn .... 
 
 1 
 
 wider than 
 
 Wtrtr .... 
 
 1 
 
 water their 
 
 Wtrtrn. . . 
 
 1 
 
 water their own 
 
 Wtrtr .. .. 
 
 1 
 
 wither their 2 weather their-re 
 
 H Wtrtr . . 
 
 1 
 
 whither their-re-they are 2 whether their- 
 
 
 
 re they are 
 
 Wtrtrn . . . 
 
 1 
 
 wither their own 2 weather their own 
 
 H Wtrtrn . 
 
 1 
 
 whither their own 2 whether their own 
 
 Wt 
 
 2 
 
 weigh it, we had-would 
 
 Wnt 
 
 a 
 
 we had-would not 
 
 nWt .... 
 
 i 
 
 why it-had would 2 when it-had-would 
 
 nWnt . . . 
 
 i 
 
 why not, why had-would not 2 when not, 
 
 
 
 when had-would not 
 
 Wnt . 
 
 3 
 
 would not
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 399 
 
 Yss. 
 Yl . 
 Ytr. 
 
 Ytrn . 
 
 HYtr . 
 nYtrn 
 
 Yt . . . 
 nYt . . 
 Ynt . 
 
 Ylnt 
 
 2 yes, sir 
 1 ye will 
 
 1 ye their-re 2 yea their-re-they are 3 you 
 
 their-re 
 . 1 ye their own 2 yea their own 3 you 
 
 their own 
 
 3 hew their-re 
 
 3 hew their own 
 
 1 ye had-would 3 you had-would 
 3 hew it 
 
 1 ye not, ye had-would not 3 you had- 
 would not 
 1 ye will not 
 
 SMALL PHRASEOGRAPHS. 
 
 524. The following list of small phraseographs 
 has already been given in sections 427, 430, 436, 437, 
 447 to 450, 452, 453 and 468, but is presented here for 
 convenience of reference. It should be thoroughly 
 memorized. 
 
 525. 
 
 ss. 
 
 St.. 
 
 str .. 
 strs . . 
 
 Prtoid . . . 
 Prtsoid. . . 
 Prtssoid . . 
 Prntoid . 
 
 LIST OF SMALL PHRASEOGRAPHS. 
 CIRCLES AND LOOPS. 
 
 1 is as-his, his is-as-has 2 as is-his-has, has 
 
 as-his-us 
 
 1 is-his to-too 2 as to, has to-too 
 1 is to his-us, his too is 2 as to his-us, has 
 
 to as 
 
 1 is to their 2 as to their 
 1 is to theirs 2 as to theirs 
 
 TICKS AND CURVETS. 
 
 1 of our 
 
 1 of ours-ourself 
 1 of ourselves 
 1 of our own
 
 400 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 Prntsoid. . 
 Prntssoid . 
 
 Pltoid 
 
 Pltsoid .. 
 
 Btoid 
 
 Bltoid. . . . 
 Tntoid . . . 
 Tntsoid . .' 
 Tftoid . . . 
 Tftsoid .. 
 Trtoid . . . 
 Trtsoid . . . 
 Trtssoid . . 
 Trntoid . . 
 Trntsoid . . 
 Trntssoid . 
 Trftoid. . . 
 Tltoid. . . . 
 Tltsoid . . . 
 Tlntoid. . . 
 
 Dtoid 
 
 Dltoid . . . 
 Dlntoid . . 
 Dntoid . . . 
 Dntsoid . . 
 
 Fltoid 
 
 Vtoid.... 
 Vltoid . . . 
 Cntoid . . . 
 Cntsoid . . 
 
 Jftoid 
 
 TTtx)id . , 
 
 1 of our own self 
 
 1 of our own selves 
 
 1 of all 
 
 1 of all is-his-as-has 
 
 1 of the 
 
 1 of all the 
 
 1 on other 
 
 1 on others 
 
 1 I have 
 
 1 I have as-his 
 
 1 on our 
 
 1 on ours-ourself 
 
 1 on ourselves 
 
 1 on our own 
 
 1 on our own self 
 
 1 on our own selves 
 
 1 on our other 
 
 1 on all (Kltoid, alternate) 
 
 1 on all as-has-is-his (Kltsoid, alternate) 
 
 1 on all other 
 
 1 on the 
 
 1 on all the (Gltoid, alternate) ' 
 
 1 on all the other 
 
 1 on the other 
 
 1 on the others 
 
 1 all will 
 
 1 all the 
 
 1 all will the, all the will 
 
 1 the other 
 
 1 the others, the other is-his-as-has 
 
 1 he have-of 
 
 1 already the
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANt'AL. 
 
 401 
 
 LESSOX 49. 
 JOINED AND CONSTRUCTED PHRASES. 
 
 526. The following list of joined and constructed 
 phrases (see sec. 420, a) consists mostly of forms which 
 might not readily occur to the learner. It is divided 
 into two parts; one part beginning at A and the other 
 at O, at Lesson 50, and should be memorised 
 thoroughly before proceeding to the next chapter. 
 
 527. LIST OF JOINED AND CONSTRUCTED PHRASES. 
 
 A 
 
 about which there, Bt 3 Ctr 
 absolutely necessary, Bs- 
 
 LtXssR 
 acknowledge receipt, KJ'- 
 
 RsT 
 act of Congress, KtGrs 
 
 " " Parliament, KtPrl 3 
 acts of Congress, KtsGrs 
 
 " ' ; Parliament, KtsPrl 3 
 again and again. (inGn 
 all bo, FtoidB 
 
 " her, L'E 
 
 " " own, L'Rn 
 
 night, FtoidXt 1 or'L 1 - 
 Xt 
 
 u over, FtoidVr 1 
 
 " " the world, Ftoid- 
 Vr 1 Lt 
 
 " right, L'Rt 
 
 " sorts, FtoidsRts 1 , or 
 L'sRts 
 
 " such, FtoidsC 
 
 " the world, VtoidLt 1 
 
 " ways, L 1 Ws 
 
 " who, Ftoid'-nu 
 
 all your, FtoidyR 1 or L 1 - 
 
 yR 
 u your own, FtoidyRn 1 
 
 or L^Rn 
 
 along side of, XgsDf J 
 although there may be, 
 
 FtoidDhtrMp 
 always was, LWsZ 
 American citizen, Mr 2 K- 
 
 sTn 
 
 " city, Mr 2 KsT 
 " people, Mr 2 KP1 
 " state, Mr*KsTt 
 among it, MNgt 
 " its, MXgts 
 " their, MXgtr 
 " " own, MXgtrn 
 
 " theirs, MXgtrs 
 &c. , s 4 or >S'//tsoid 
 and so forth, SHF or x9/<- 
 
 toid SfF 
 : ' the contrary, C'toid 4 - 
 
 TrR or ZhtoidTrR 
 another word, Xtr//-Rt 
 any other, X 1 -!! 
 " " one, X'-u-Wn
 
 402 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 :iny time, XT 1 
 anything else, X l Xgls 
 " " than, X 1 - 
 
 XglsDhn 
 are our, RR 
 
 " " own, RRn 
 
 " we, R-w 
 
 " " not, R-w-Nt 
 
 " you, R-Y 
 
 " " not, R-v-Nt 
 as far as possible, sF 3 sPs 
 " c < " you are, sF 3 syR 
 " it had, Zt 3 D 
 " " " not, Zt 3 Dnt 
 " " ought, Zt 3 T 
 " " " not, Zt 3 Tnt 
 " " was, Zt 3 Z 
 " " not, Zt 3 ZXt 
 " " would, Zt 3 lPt 
 " " " not, Zt 3 IFnt 
 " soon as possible, ssXs-- 
 
 Ps 
 
 " " " they, ssNs 2 Dh 
 " there is nothing, Ztrs 3 - 
 
 XTh 
 
 " to a-an, st-Ktoid 
 " " the, s^Ctoid 
 " we, sw 1 or sw (Alter- 
 nate. ) 
 
 " well as the, sLsRtoid 
 " who, SHU 
 " you, SF 
 " " seem, sFsM 
 at all events, Tlf 3 Xts 
 " " of which, Tlf 3 C 
 " " times, Tit 3 Ms 
 any, THX 
 
 at anv rate, T :j Xrt 
 
 " " time, T 3 fXT 
 
 " first, T 3 Frst 
 
 " last, T 3 Lst 
 
 " length, Tin 3 or T 3 X<j- 
 
 Th 
 
 " night, T 3 Xt 
 " " time, T 3 XtT 
 " no, T 3 X 
 " " time, T 3 XT 
 " one " Tn 3 T 
 " or about, T 3 RBt 
 " some time, T 3 sMt 
 " that " T 3 fM 
 " the first, T 3 RtoidFrst 
 " " same time, T 3 sMtM 
 " " time, T 3 RtoidT 
 " times, Tt 3 M> 
 " what, T 3 T 1 
 " " time, T 3 T J T 
 " " " Avere you 
 
 there, T 3 T'Ttr 
 attorney at law, TrXTL 
 Attorney General, TrXJn 
 autumn session, T 1 MwAj 
 
 B 
 
 before another, RXtr 
 " or after, RRFt 
 " you, R-Y 
 best of you, B.sv/R 
 between it and that, Twnt 1 - 
 
 Dht 
 
 Board of Trade, BrtTrt 
 but we, B-w or B-ir (Al- 
 ternate. ) 
 " your, Ei/li
 
 THK PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 by any, B'fN 
 
 " " means, B'fNMns 
 ." means of, B'MnsPtoid 
 
 "day, B'D 
 
 " " time, B'DtM 
 
 " night, B*Nt 
 
 " " time, B'NtT 
 
 " no means, B 1 NMns 
 
 " return mail, Brt t ML 
 
 " your, B'y/R 
 
 C 
 
 call attention, Kl'TNshn 
 " your attention, Kl 1 - 
 
 2/RTNshn 
 came to the conclusion, 
 
 KMKlshn 
 
 can not account, Kn^Knt 
 Catholic church, KCC 
 cause of action, Ks 1 Kshn 
 causes" " Kss^shn 
 certain extent, sRteTnt 
 Chamber of Commerce, 
 
 CMprMrs 
 circumstances of the case. 
 
 sTssKs 
 circumstantial evidence, 
 
 sTnVt 
 civilized world, sVls^Lt 
 
 or sVlsV'RLt 
 C.O. D. (for collect on de- 
 livery), K-ofD 
 collect on delivery, KIK- 
 
 Dl 
 come to the conclusion, 
 
 KKlslm 
 
 comes to the conclusion, 
 
 KsKlshn 
 common law, Mn 5 L 
 
 " Pleas, MPls 1 or 
 
 " spelling, -MnsP 
 Constitution of the U. S., 
 
 stTshn 3 Ns 
 Court of Chancery, Krt 2 - 
 
 CsR 
 " " Common Pleas, 
 
 Krt 8 MPls 
 " " General Sessions, 
 
 " " justice, KrtMsTs 
 " " Quarter Sessions, 
 
 Krt 2 Kwtrs.s-/^,s- 
 " " Sessions, Krt- 
 
 ashns 
 " " Special Sessions, 
 
 Cross-examine, Krss'Mn 
 " examination. Krsshn* 
 or Krss^INshn 
 
 D 
 
 danger of, DJrf 
 day time, DtM 
 
 " of the week, DfWK 
 dear sir, DrsR 
 defendant's counsel, DsK 
 depend upon you,DPntP-F 
 did you know, Dt n .N or 
 DL'RtoidCtoidX 
 
 " " notDtMNtorDt 1 - 
 RtoidCtoidNt
 
 HM 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL 
 
 direct examination. I)iWi/< 
 
 or DrsMXshn 
 do their duty, DtrDT 
 " you know, D'N or D- 
 
 RtoidCtoidN 
 
 " " mean to say, D- 
 
 iMnSorD-y-MnS 
 
 " not, DiXt or D- 
 
 RtoidCtoidXt 
 " " remember, D'.Br 
 
 or D-r-Br 
 does not, DsNt 
 dry woods store, Dr'fGtst 
 
 or Dr'GtssT 
 stores, DrHGt- 
 sts or Dr'GtssTs 
 
 E 
 
 each other, C l -u 
 
 " others, C^-us- 
 east and west, St*Wst 
 eastern cities, Str^Ts 
 
 " states, Str^Tts 
 English language, Ngl 1 Xg 
 enlarge their, NJtr* 
 etc , Ts 
 
 et cetera, TsTR 
 eternal life, TrnF 
 ever since, V'sNs 
 everlasting life, 
 
 or V'-LsLF 
 evening train, Vn 
 every other, Vr-u 
 
 " " one, Vr-?/-AVn 
 everything else, VrXgls 
 " " than,' Vr- 
 
 NglsDhn 
 
 extra session, Ksl'rs.v//// 
 
 face of the deep, FsDP 
 
 " to face, FsFs 
 fellow citizens, FIsTns 
 for a long time, FXgT 
 " an instant, FsTnt 
 " ever, FV 
 
 " " and ever, FVV 
 " his sake, FssK 
 " how long a time, F- 
 
 DtoidNgT 
 " instance, FsTns 
 " my part, FMPrt 
 " " own part, FMNPrt 
 ( ' several, FsV 
 " some time, F*Mt 
 " the first time, FFrsT 
 
 or FFsT 
 " " most part, FMs- 
 
 Prt 
 
 " " purpose of, FPPs 
 " " sake of, FsK 
 " they are their-rc, Ftr- 
 
 Dhr 
 " " " their own. Ftr- 
 
 Dhrn 
 from first to last, Frst- 
 
 tLst 3 
 from other, Fr-M 
 
 " your own knowl- 
 edge, FryRnXJ 
 
 G 
 
 gentlemanof the jury. JtJr 
 ! gentlemen" " " JtMr
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 405 
 
 gentlemen of the conven- 
 tion, JntVn 
 give-n it, G 1 T 
 ' " " their-re, G 1 Ttr 
 " their attention, Gtr 1 - 
 TXshn 
 
 good deal, Gt 2 DL 
 grand jury, Grt*Jr 
 great deal, Grt 3 DL 
 " extent, GrtsTnt 
 " number -of, GrtBrf 
 " while, Grt/m'L 
 greater and greater, Grt- 
 
 Grtr 
 
 " or less,GrtLs 
 " " " degree, Grt- 
 LsGr 
 
 II 
 
 tufd had, D 3 D 
 " it not, D 3 Xt (See 
 
 474, b.) 
 
 " there been, Dtr 3 Bn 
 " " not been, Dtr 3 
 NtBn 
 
 half an hour, F 3 PtoidR 
 
 hand in hand, Xt 3 Xt 
 
 has it a, Zt 3 Ptoid 
 " " had, Zt 3 l) 
 " " riot, Zt 3 Xt 
 " " " been, Zt 3 XtBn 
 " " that, Zt 3 Dht 
 " " the, Zt :i Rtoid 
 " " there, Zt 3 Dhr 
 " u to be, Zt :3 B 
 u there not, Ztr 3 Xt 
 
 he supposed, RtsoidPst 
 
 Hon. gentleman, XrJnt 
 " gentlemen, X T rJnt 1 
 " member, XrBr 
 " senator, XrsXtr 
 House of Commons,S 3 Mns 
 " " Congress, S 3 Grs 
 " " God, S 3 Gt 
 " " Lords, S 3 Lts 
 " " Parliament, S 3 - 
 
 PrL 
 
 " " Representitives, 
 S 3 RPS 
 
 Houses of Congress, Ss 3 Gs 
 how are you, DtoidR-Y 
 ' ' could you, DtoidKt-r 
 " long, RtoidXg 
 " many of them, Dtoid- 
 
 MXDh 
 human life, Mn 3 F 
 
 I 
 
 I did, Dt 
 
 " " not, KtoidDnt 1 
 
 " have been, TftoidBn or 
 
 Vn 
 " " not, TftoidXt 1 or 
 
 Vnt 
 
 if it be not, Ft 1 But 
 " " is " Fts^t 
 " possible, F!Ps 
 ' ' they are their-re, Ftr J - 
 
 Dhr 
 " " " thei r own, Ftr 1 - 
 
 Dhrn 
 
 " you know, F-r-X 
 ifs and ands, Fs 1 Rtsoid 4
 
 400 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 n 
 
 accordance-with, 
 
 or N'KrtNs 
 all cases, Nl J Kss 
 
 " other cases, 
 Kss 
 
 " respects, 
 u-R'sPs 
 
 " parts, NIPrts 1 
 
 " respects, 
 any, N'N 
 
 " case, N 
 conclusion, N^Klshn 
 connection-with-with 
 
 the, N'fKshn 
 consequence-of, 
 effect, NFKT 
 eitner, NDhr 1 
 
 " case 
 fact, NFt 1 
 full, NF1 
 hand, N*Nt 
 like manner, Nl J KNr 
 my opinion, N a MNn 
 or about, NR^t 
 order that, NrtDht 1 
 other, N 
 
 M- 
 
 cases, N^u-Kss 
 
 N-u-Ws 
 
 " words, N-u- 
 our own house, 
 
 u store, Nrstr 1 
 point of fact, NPn^Ft 
 reading, NrD a Ng 
 receipt, NrsT 
 reference-to-to the, Nr- 
 
 Fs 
 regard-to-to the, Nr 1 Gt 
 
 in relation-to-to the, NR1- 
 
 shn 1 
 
 " reply-to-to the, NrPl 
 " respect-to-to the, NrsP 
 " response-to-to the, Nrs- 
 
 Pns 
 
 " return, NrTRn 
 " settlement, nsTlMnt 
 " so far as, NSFs 
 " such, NsC 
 
 *' " a manner, NsCXr 
 " that city, NDht J sT 
 " " state, NDht^Tt 
 " the course, N^CtoidKrs 
 " " first, NFrst 
 " " u instance, NFrs- 
 
 NsTns 
 
 " " " part, NFrsPrt 
 " " " party, NFrsP 
 " " " place, NFrP or 
 
 NFP1 
 " " habit-of, NBt 2 or 
 
 N^toidBt 
 " " last place, NCtoid 
 
 L'Pl 
 
 " " meantime, NMnT 
 11 " meanwhile, NM- 
 
 " " midst of life, NCt- 
 
 oidMsL^F 
 
 " " next place, NNP1 
 " " one " NWPL 
 " " providence of God, 
 
 NDs 3 Gt 
 
 " k ' second, N^Knt 
 ' " " place, NsKt- 
 
 Pl
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 407 
 
 in the sight of God, X- 
 sT'Gt 
 
 " " street, nsTrt 1 
 " " third, NThrt 2 
 " " " place, XThrt 2 - 
 
 Pl or NThPls 
 " " United States, X 1 - 
 
 Xss 
 " " word of God, X- 
 
 v/'Rt'Gt 
 " " world, NCtoidLt 1 
 
 or XLt 1 
 " their own right, Xtrn- 
 
 Rt 1 
 
 " " place, XtrPls 
 " words, XtrwRts 1 
 " this city, XDhssT 
 " " connection, XDhsf 
 
 Kshn 
 
 " " court, XDhsKt 
 " " state, XDhssTt 
 " your opinion, XyRXn 
 " " reply, X//RRP1 
 " writing, Xrt'Xg 
 inasmuch as, XsCs 3 
 Indian ocean, XtXShn 
 into their, XTtr 
 
 " " own, XTtrn 
 is it a, Zt^toid 
 " " not, Zt'Xt 
 " u " better, Zt J XtBtr 
 " " the, Zt^toid 
 " " their-re, Zt^hr 
 u a own , Zt J Dhrn 
 " " to be, Zt 1 !* 
 " there anybody, Ztr'NBt 
 " " anyone, Zti^XWn 
 
 is there anything, Ztr'X- 
 
 Xg 
 
 " to a-an, st J -Ktoid 
 " " the, st^Ctoid 
 it had not been, Tnt 3 Bn 
 " is impossible, TsMps 
 " " many, TsMX 
 " u most important, Ts- 
 
 " my opinion, TsMXn 
 
 " said, TssD 
 
 " sure, TsShr 
 
 " surely, TsShrL 
 
 '" well known, TsLXn 
 
 ought not, T Tnt 1 
 
 seems impossible, TsMs- 
 
 Mps 
 " to me,'TsMsM 
 
 was, TZ 
 " not, TZXt 
 
 will be, TIB 
 
 " have it, TlfT or 
 
 Tlft 
 " not be, TlntB 
 
 would have,Tt V 
 
 " " been.Tt Vn 
 " " had, Tt Vt 
 " " it, Tt Vt 
 " not be, TntB 
 
 joint stock, Jt a sK 
 " " co., Jt^KK 
 " " company, Jt 1 - 
 sK'PX 
 
 just as fast, JssFst 
 "as, JssFsis
 
 408 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC 
 
 just as fast as possible, 
 JssP"ssPs 
 
 " " good, JssGt 
 
 " " long, JssNG 
 
 " " much, JssC 
 
 " u soon, JsssN 
 
 " " well, JssL 
 
 " been, JsBn 
 
 " now, JsNCtoid 
 
 " received, JsRsVt 
 justice of the peace, JsPs 
 justices " " " JssPs 
 
 K 
 
 kingdom of Christ, K 1 - 
 
 Krst 
 
 kingdom o^ heaven, KVn 1 
 " " the world, 
 KLt 1 
 
 know about, NBt 
 " as well, NsL 
 " " much, N 2 sC 
 
 ladies and gentlemen, LDs- 
 
 Jnt 
 last night, Ls 3 Nt or Lst 3 - 
 
 Nt 
 " will and testament, 
 
 Ls 3 LTsMnt 
 latter part-of, Ltr 3 Prt 
 legislative session, LJs-sAw 
 less than, LsN (see sec. 
 
 467) 
 
 let us have, Lts 2 V 
 " " "it, Lts'Vt 
 
 liber tv of the press, Br 1 - 
 
 Prs 
 
 life estate, L ] FsTt 
 long side of, XgsDf l 
 
 " suffering, NgsFRXjj 
 
 " time, NgT 1 
 
 " " ago, NgT^G 
 
 " " before, Xg'PR 
 
 " " since, NgT J sNa 
 
 " while, N 
 
 u " ago, 
 
 many circumstances, MX- 
 
 sTnss 
 
 " instances, ]\!XNsTnss 
 matter of fact, MtrFt 
 " " importance, Mtr- 
 Mp 
 
 may as well, MsL 
 * ' it please the Court.Mt- 
 PlsKrt (See sec. 
 189.) 
 " " please your Honor, 
 
 MtPlsXr 
 member of Congress, Br- 
 
 Grs 
 11 of Parliament, Br 
 
 PrL 
 " of society, BrfS 
 
 or Brf-fS 
 
 " of the bar, BrBr 
 " " " board, Br- 
 
 Brt 
 
 " of the church, 
 BrCrC
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 409 
 
 member of the House, BrS 
 it a a Legislature, 
 
 BrLJ 
 
 ' ' of the Senate, BrsNt 
 members of Congress, Brs- 
 
 Grs 
 
 " of the Senate, 
 BrssNt 
 Methodist church, MThts- 
 
 CC 
 
 " Episcopal 
 church, MThtsPsCC 
 might not, Mt'Nt 
 more and more, MrMr 
 
 " or less, MrLs 
 morning train, Mrn J Ngtrn 
 most important, MsMp 
 " likely, MsLKl 
 " luckily, MsLKL 
 Mr. Chairman, MrCrn 
 " President, MrPrs 
 " " and Gentle- 
 
 men of the Conven- 
 tion, MrPrsJntVn 
 " Speaker, MrsP 
 much more, C 3 Mr 
 must not, MsXt 
 my brethren, MBrn 3 
 " brother, MBrtr 
 ' ' dear brethren, MtrBrn 3 
 " " brother, MtrBrtr 
 " " friend, MtrFrnt 
 " " sir, MtrsR 
 " other, M 1 -^ 
 " " friend, M-u-Frnt 1 
 " own, M J N 
 " " opinion, M J NNn 
 
 my text, M^Kst 
 
 N 
 
 night time, NtT 1 
 no doubt, NfDt or NDt 
 " fact, N 1 Ft 
 11 other, N-u 
 " " one, N 8 -u-Wn 
 " time, N 2 T 
 north and south, NrsTh 1 
 northeastern cities, NrStr ] - 
 
 sTs 
 
 ' ' states, Nr- 
 Str 'sTts 
 northern cities, NrtrsTs 1 
 
 " states, NrtrsTts 1 
 northwestern cities, Nr- 
 WsRsTs 
 
 ' ' states, Nr- 
 
 WsRsTts 
 
 not at that time, NtT 3 fM 
 " only, Nt J M 
 nothing else, NThNgls 
 " " than NTh- 
 NglsDhn 
 
 " less, NThLs 
 " " than, NTh- 
 LsN 
 notwithstanding it, NfTT 
 
 " u had- 
 
 would, NfTt 
 notwithstanding the, 
 
 NfTRtoid 
 notwithstanding the fact, 
 
 NfTRtoidFt 
 notwithstanding their, 
 NfTtr
 
 410 
 
 THE PHOXO ;i:APllIC .MANUAL 
 
 LESSON 50. 
 
 O 
 
 objected to, BT 
 objection sustained, BssTnt 
 of course it is, PtoidKrsTs 
 " great advantage, Ptoid 
 
 GrtJ 
 
 " her, PtoidR 
 " your, Ptoid^R 
 offered in evidence, Frt^N- 
 
 Vt 
 
 on a-an, Ttoid'Ktoid 
 " account, Ttoid'Knt 
 " board, TtokPBrt 
 " his own, TtsoidN 1 
 " " " account, Tts- 
 oidN 1 Knt 
 " it, KtoidT 
 " more than one occasion, 
 
 TtoidMrnWnKshn 
 " my part, Ttoid^Prt 
 " one hand, TtoidWnXt 
 " " occasion, TtoidWn- 
 
 Kshn 
 
 " or about, TtoidiRBt 
 " " before, Ttoid'RR 
 " the contrary, DtoidTrR 
 " " first, DtoidFrst 
 " " " instant, Dtoid- 
 
 FrsNsTnt 
 " "one hand,Dtoid\Vnt 
 
 or DtoidWnNt 
 " u other hand, Dntoid 1 - 
 
 Nt 
 
 " " part-of, DtoidPrt 
 " " i>resent, DtoidPrsNt 
 
 on their own, TtoidDhrn 
 " their part, TtoidDhrPrt 
 " this action, TtoidDhs 3 - 
 
 Kshn 
 " " motion, TtoidDhs- 
 
 Mshn 
 " " occasion, Ttoid- 
 
 DhsKshn 
 " " part, TtoidDhsPrt 
 
 or TtoidDhPrt 
 " " subject, Ttoid- 
 
 DhssB 
 
 " those, TtoidZ 3 
 " what, KtoidT 1 
 u whom, Ktoid 1 Hu 
 " your part, KtoidyRPrt 
 once again, WsGn 
 " have, WnsV. (See 
 
 whencever. ) 
 
 " in a while, WsXii'/-L 
 " more, AYsMr 
 u or twice, WnsTs 
 one of the best, WnBst 
 : " " " most, WnMst 
 one's sell, W ns:s 
 
 9 
 
 other cases, u-Kss 
 
 " causes, u-Kss 1 
 
 " day, u-D 
 
 " hand, u-Xt 3 
 
 " than u-l)hn 
 
 " times, u-Ts 1 
 
 " ways, u-\Vs 
 
 " words, u-? 
 oiiffht it not, 
 
 " not it-to, Tn^T 
 " " to be, Tnt 1 B 
 ought to, T'T
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 411 
 
 ought to be, T a B 
 
 " " " donejT'BDn 
 " "have been, Tf'Bn 
 " " " had, Tf'D 
 n itjTf'Dt 
 " we, T'-w or T'-TF 
 (Alternate.) 
 our own time, Rn 3 T 
 
 " text, Rt 3 Kst 
 out of doors, Tf 3 DRs 
 " "it, Df 3 TorTft s 
 " " the way, Tf 3 W 
 over and over, "WVr 
 " " " again, Vr 1 - 
 
 VrGn 
 " the world, Vi^Lt 
 
 part of their, Prt 2 Vtr 
 party measure, P 3 Zhr 
 " of the first part, P 3 - 
 
 FrsPrt 
 " u " second part, 
 
 P 3 sKtPrt 
 peculiar circumstances, 
 
 P 3 KsTnss 
 peculiar circumstances of 
 
 the case, P 3 KsTssKs 
 perhaps your Honor, Pr- 
 
 PsNr 
 
 personal estate, PrsNlsTt 
 petit jury, PtJr 
 phonetic spelling, FNtKsP 
 place of business, PlsBss 
 
 or PlsBsNs 
 
 plaintiff's counsel, PltsK 
 point of view, 
 
 Postmaster General, PsMs- 
 
 Jn 
 
 postage stamp, PsJsMp 
 postal card, PsLKrt 
 Presbyterian church, PrsfC 
 present circumstances, Prs- 
 NtsTnss 
 
 " state, PrsNtsTt 
 President of the U. S. , 
 
 PrsNss or PrsDntXss 
 President's message, Prs M 
 
 or PrsMsJ 
 
 prima facie case,PrFAS7^Ks 
 
 Prime Minister, PrMXstr 
 
 Protestant church, PrtsCC 
 
 " faith, PrtsFTh 
 
 u religion, PrtsJn 
 
 Q 
 
 Quarter Sessions Court, 
 
 Kwtrs-s'A/w 1 Kt 
 quite certain, Kwt^sRt 
 " sure they are, Kwt 1 - 
 
 Shrtr 
 quo warranto, Kw?/?Rnt 
 
 R 
 
 rather be, Rtr 3 B 
 " give, Rtr 3 G 
 " have, Rtr 3 V 
 real estate, R^sTt 
 registered letter, RJsLtr 
 recross-examination.RKrs- 
 
 shn or RKrsMNshn 
 redirect examination, RI)r- 
 sftkn or RDrsMNshn 
 Reformed church, RFCC
 
 412 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 render themselves, RXtr- 
 
 Dhss 
 
 Rev. Dr., RVDr 
 " Mr., RVMr 
 revised statutes, RVssTts 
 Roman Catholic church, 
 
 RKCC 
 
 saw him there, S'Mtr 
 " you " S'jDhr or 
 
 S'-r-Dhr 
 
 season of the year, SsXyR 
 Secretary of Agriculture, 
 
 sKrtGr 
 " of State, sKrt- 
 
 sTt 
 " of the Interior, 
 
 sKrtNtr 
 " of the Navy, 
 
 sKrtX 
 " of the Treasr 
 
 ury, sKrtTr 
 " ofWar.sKrt?^R 
 seems to be, sMsB 
 
 " " have, sMsV 
 Senate of the IT. S. , sXtNss 
 senator of the U. S. , sXtr- 
 
 NBS 
 
 see him there, S*Mtr 
 " you " S'iDhr or 
 
 S'-r-Dhr 
 set forth, sTfRTh 
 shall be, ShB 
 " " able, ShBBl 
 have, ShV 
 " have been, ShVn 
 
 shall not, ShXt (See sec. 
 
 474, a.) 
 
 " " be, ShXtB 
 " " " able, ShXtB- 
 
 Bl 
 
 " " have, ShXtV 
 " " " been,ShXt- 
 
 Vn 
 
 she had been, Sh^Bn 
 " " not, Sh^Xt (See 
 sec. 474, a. ) 
 " " " been, Sht^t- 
 
 Bn 
 " will " ShPXt (See 
 
 sec. 474, a.) 
 " would be, ShVB 
 
 sec. 474, a.) 
 " " not be,Sht'XtB 
 should be, Sht 3 B 
 
 " " able, Sht 3 BBl 
 " have, Sht 3 V 
 " " been, Sht 3 Vn 
 " not,Sht 3 Xt(Sees;ec. 
 
 474, a.) 
 
 " " be,Sht 3 XtB 
 " " u able,Sht 3 - 
 
 XtBBl 
 
 " " have,Sht 3 XtV 
 " " " been,Sht 3 - 
 XtVn 
 
 side by side, sD^D 
 so as possible, SsPs 
 " " to be, SsB 
 " far, SF 
 " "as, SFs 
 i " " from, SFFr
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.. 
 
 413 
 
 so long affo, SNg*G 
 " much, S C 3 or SMC 
 " well-will, SL 
 " " known, SLNn 
 some other session, sM- 
 
 usxhn 
 
 something like, sMNglK 
 sometime ago, sMtMG 
 southeastern cities, sStr 1 - 
 
 sTs 
 
 " states, sStr 1 - 
 
 sTts 
 southern cities, sDhrsTs 
 
 or sDhsTs 
 
 " states, sDhrsTts 
 or sDhsTts 
 southwestern cities, 
 
 sW 3 sRsTs 
 1 ' states, 
 
 sW 3 sRsTts 
 special court, sPKrt 
 " jury, sPJr 
 " rates, sPRts 
 " term, sPTrM 
 spring session, sPrNgs.s/m 
 State House, stTS 
 
 " of facts, stTfKts 
 step by step, stPsTP or 
 
 stPsP 
 
 Sunday school, sNDsKl 
 Superior Court, sPRKrt 
 Supreme Court, sPrKrt 
 " of the 
 
 State, sPrKrtsTt 
 Supreme Court of the 
 U. S., sPrKrtXss 
 
 Supreme Court of this 
 
 state, sPrKrtDhssTt 
 supreme power, sPrPR 
 surely their-re, ShrLtr 
 " " own, ShrLtrn 
 
 T 
 
 take care of, TKKrf 
 " action, TK Kshn 3 
 " occassion, TKKshn 
 " pleasure, TKZhr 
 " your own, TK?/Rn 
 
 takes action, TKs Kshn 3 
 " occasion, TKsKshn 
 
 telegraphic dispatch, TIG- 
 sC or TlsC 
 
 tell how long, TIRtoidNg 
 
 testimony of the defend- 
 ant, TsMD 
 u of the plaintiff, 
 TsMPlnt 
 
 that are, Dht 3 R 
 " have, Tht 3 V 
 " " been, Dht'Vn 
 " is all, Dhts 3 Ftoid 
 " " " the,Dhts 3 Vtoid 
 " "it, Dhts 3 T 
 " "to say, Dhts 3 S 
 " that, Dht 3 Dht 
 " they, Dht 3 Dh 
 " " are, Dht 3 Dhr 
 " was, Dht 3 Z 
 " would, Dht 3 IFt 
 " " not, Dht 3 TTnt 
 
 the first, RtoidFrst 
 " " day, RtoidFrsD 
 " " one, RtoidFrsWn
 
 414 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL 
 
 the first part, RtoidFrsPit 
 " " time, RtoidFrsT 
 " other day, CntoidD 
 ' " night, CntoidNt 1 
 " " one, CntoidWn 
 " " part, CntoidP 3 Rt 
 " " party, CntoidP 3 
 " " shall, CntoidSh 
 " " should, Cntoid- 
 
 Sht 3 
 
 < " thing, CntoidNg 1 
 " " time, CntoidT 1 
 ". " way, CntoidW 
 
 their words, DhrRts 
 
 there always mustbe,Dhr- 
 
 LWsMsB 
 
 ( i must always be, Dhr- 
 MsLWsB 
 
 these numbers, Dhs 1 Brs 
 
 they are rather, DhrRtr 
 ."' have, DhV 
 " have been, DhVn 
 " would have, DhtV 
 " " " been, 
 
 DhtVn 
 " would have had, Dht 
 
 Vt 
 " would have it, DhtVt 
 
 this action, Dhs Kshn 3 
 " matter, DhsMtr 
 " meaning, DhsMnNg 
 " morn, DhsMn 
 " morning, DhsMn 
 " number, DhsBr 
 " occasion, DhsKshn 
 
 those are, Z 3 R 
 
 " " not, Z 3 Rnt 
 
 those circumstances, Z 3 - 
 
 sTnss 
 " numbers, Z'Brs 
 
 to a certain extent, TsRt- 
 sTnt 
 
 " all intents, TlnNnts 
 
 " be sure, B 3 Shr 
 
 " " there, Btr 3 
 
 "' " able to, B 3 Blt 
 
 " become, B 3 K 
 
 " itself, TTs 
 
 " night, TNtorNt 1 in jux- 
 taposition. 
 
 " the, TRtoid 
 
 " " end, TRtoidNt 
 
 " " world, TLt or 
 TRtoidLt 
 
 " you, T-r 
 
 true bill, Tr 3 Bl 
 
 truly yours, TrLyRs (Tr- 
 yRs, subscript.) 
 
 trust funds, TrsFnts 
 
 U 
 
 under the circumstances, 
 
 NtsTnss 
 
 ' ' the necessity, 
 NtNssT 
 
 until one, Tl 3 Wn 
 
 U. S. of America, NssMK 
 " Senate, NssNt 
 u senator, NssNtr 
 " Territory, NssTRt 
 
 upon the face, PnFs 
 " " subject, PnsB 
 " " " of,PnsBf 
 " you, P-F
 
 THK PHONOGRAPHIC MANCAL. 
 
 V 
 
 variety of causes, VRTfKss 
 verdict for the defendant, 
 
 VrtKtD 
 ' ' for the plaintiff, 
 
 VrtKtPlnt 
 
 " of the jury, Vrt- 
 KtJr 
 
 very likely, VrLKl 
 respectfully, VrRsP 
 
 (VtR, subscript.) 
 u respectfully vours, 
 
 subscript. ) 
 " seldom, VrsLtM 
 " truly, VrTrL (VT, 
 
 subscript.) 
 
 " truly yours, VrTrL- 
 yRs( VT//Rs, subscript. ) 
 vice-president, VsPs 
 
 W 
 
 was it, ZT 
 " " not, ZTnt 
 " " their-re, ZTtr 
 " " " own, ZTtrn 
 " " therefore, ZTDhr- 
 
 F 
 
 was its, ZTs 
 " not, ZNt 
 " said, ZsD 
 " that, ZDht 
 " there anybody, ZtrN- 
 
 Bt 
 
 " " anyone, ZtrX- 
 Wn 
 
 was there anything, Ztr- 
 
 NNg 
 " " anything said, 
 
 ZtrNNgsD 
 " " nobody, Ztr N- 
 
 Bt 
 " " no one, Ztr N 2 - 
 
 Wn 
 
 ways and means, WsMns 
 " of the world, AVsLt 
 we are in receipt, -?t'RnRsT 
 41 " rather, toRRtr 
 " " ready, wERD 
 " as, ws 1 
 " believe, w-Blf 
 " do, w-D 
 " " not, w-Dnt 
 " have been, w-Vn 
 " laugh, vL 3 F 
 u like, w'L J K 
 " live, trW 
 " love, ?/'LV 
 11 may be, ir-Mp 
 " " not be, ir-Mnt 2 B 
 " might " 
 u refer, ?/jRR or 
 " regard, ?/jR 3 Grt 
 " regret, 
 " remain, 
 " remember, w-Bi- 
 " were, w-?rR 
 " " there, w^rRlr 
 " yet, w-Yt 
 were there not, ?/;RtrXt 
 " they there, wRDhtr 
 " we, ?rR-w 
 " yet, w
 
 41(1 
 
 TIIK PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 were you, //'R-v 
 
 " " not, ?/-R-Y-Xt 
 " " there, 
 
 or ?/'RDhr 
 western cities, WsRsTs 
 
 " states, WsRsTts 
 what are ye, Tr 1 Y 
 " " you, Tr 1 -!- 
 " at, T'T 
 
 " connection, T^fKshn 
 " did you, T 1 Dt'-Y 
 "do " T 1 D-Y 
 " has-is it, T^T 
 " of that, Tf J Dht 
 " sorU>f, 
 " time, 
 " " were you there, 
 
 T'Ttr 
 
 " took place, T^Pls 
 " were, T l wR 
 " ye, TY 
 " yet, T!Yt 
 " you, T^r 
 when they are their - re, 
 
 nWtrDhr 
 
 " " are their own, 
 nWtrDhrn 
 whence have, nWnsV (See 
 
 once have) 
 whenever their-re-they are, 
 
 nWVtr 
 
 " there is any- 
 thing, nWVtrsXNg 
 where are they, H?/jRRDh 
 " "we H?6'RR-w 
 
 do you live, 
 
 or 
 
 where do you reside, Ji/"Ii- 
 
 sD or H//-RRsD 
 " there has been, 
 
 HyRtrsBn 
 
 " we, H//-R-W 
 
 " werethev, 
 
 Dh 
 
 you, H^- 
 " will, H?/-RL 
 " " you, H?/.'RL-r 
 " you, H//-R-Y 
 wherever their-re-they are, 
 
 " there is any- 
 thing, H?/-RVtrsXXg 
 whether or not, H ITtrRnt 
 " you are, H ITtn/R 
 or H trtr-r-R 
 which are likely, CrLKl 
 " " " to have. 
 
 CrLKlf 
 
 " would have, CtV 
 " " '" been, 
 
 CtVn 
 " would have had, 
 
 CtVt 
 
 " would have it, CtVt 
 while the, H^-L^toid 
 " they are their -re, 
 HwLtr 1 Dhr 
 " " are their own, 
 
 HwLtr^hrn 
 " we, H^/'L'-w 
 " you are, H/rL^R 
 who have, HU-V 
 " of, HU Ptoid 1 or 
 HuPtoid
 
 THE PHOXfKlUAJ'llIC MANUAL. 
 
 417 
 
 will the, LRtoid 
 " we, L-w 
 " you, L-r 
 " " look, L-r-LK 
 i< " not, L-Y-Nt 
 winter session, 
 with all that, DbPDht 
 " or without, 
 
 or icR^Dht 
 " other, Dh 1 ^ 
 " reference-to-to the, 
 
 u'RRns or mRfRns 
 " regard-to-to the, wR 3 - 
 
 Grt 
 
 " regret, ?/?RGrt 
 " relation-to-tothejDh 1 - 
 
 Rlshn 
 " respect- to-to the, 
 
 " them, Dh J Dh 
 
 " this, Dh'Dhs 
 
 u which their-re-they 
 
 are, Dh^tr 
 witness stand, Wt a NssTnt 
 
 or T 1 NssTnt 
 word of God, wRtGt 
 words of his text,?/'RtssTst 
 " " my text, ?oRts- 
 
 MtKst 
 " " our text, ?6'Rts- 
 
 RtKst 
 
 " " the text, mRtsTst 
 " " your text, wRts- 
 yRtKst 
 
 world without end, LtDht 
 '.Nt (the center of Nt 
 under the end of Dht. ) 
 
 would be, 
 
 " have, Trt 3 V 
 " " had, TR 3 Vt 
 " " it, irt 3 Vt 
 " " been, TTWn 
 '< " to be, Trt 3 - 
 VB 
 
 would their-re, TFt 3 Dhr 
 " we, Wi 3 -w 
 " ye, TOY 
 " yet, TFt 3 Yt 
 " you, Trt 3 r 
 
 writing it, Rt a Ngt 
 
 ye shall, Y'Sh 
 
 " " not, 
 yea, more, YMr 
 years ago, yRs'G 
 4 ' and years, yRs } 
 " " " ago,yEs- 
 
 2/RsG 
 
 " before, 7/RsR 
 ' ' of age, yRs J 
 " old, yRsLt 
 yes, sir, Yss, Yss 3 orYssR 
 yesterday afternoon, StR- 
 
 DftNn 
 
 " eve, StRDV 
 " evening, StRDVn 
 you are, yR or F-R 
 " '' not,yRnt or Y-Rnt 
 " as, YS 
 " believe, Y-Blf 
 " have, Y-V 
 " " been, Y-Vn 
 " " had-it, Y-Vt
 
 418 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANTA1.. 
 
 you have their, Y-Vtr 
 " knew, Y-NFtoid 
 " know, y-N 
 " must satisfy, Y-MssT 
 " remember, F-Br 
 " will, r-L 
 your favor, yRF 
 " Honor, yRNr 
 " last letter, yRLsLtr 
 u opinion, yRXn 
 " reference, yRRRns 
 
 or yRRfRns 
 " references, yRRRnss 
 
 or j/RRfRnss 
 " statement. 
 " very, yRVr 
 " " esteemed, 
 VrsMt 
 
 your very esteemed favor, 
 
 7/RVrsMtfF 
 yours &c. , yRss or //Rs- 
 
 " and so forth, yRsTh 
 
 " etc., yRsTs 
 
 " et cetera, yRsTsT or 
 
 yRsTsTR 
 
 " faithfully, yRsFTh 
 " respectfully, yRsKsl 1 
 " truly, yRsTrL (//Hs- 
 
 T, subscript.) 
 " verv respectfully, 
 yRsVrRsP (yRs- 
 VfR, subscript.) 
 " very truly, yRsVr- 
 TrL (yRsVT, sub- 
 script. )
 
 THE PHONOUKAPHIC MANUAL. 419 
 
 CHAPTER XI. 
 
 VARIOUS EXPEDIENTS. 
 
 LESSON 51. 
 
 FIGURES, ETC. 
 
 528. Most of the Arabic figures, that is to say the 
 nine digits and cipher, cannot be written as swiftly as 
 rapid speech. Many attempts have been made by 
 shorthand writers to invent briefer forms than the 
 Arabic ones and still retain the legibility of the latter, 
 but all such endeavors have been and are useless since 
 such forms do not exist in nature. The Arabic figures, 
 therefore, are at once the briefest and most legible 
 that can be devised. Again other attempts have been 
 made to utilize the shorthand letters themselves as 
 figures, but this has been found objectionable from the 
 fact that they resemble the other writing about them 
 and are thus difficult to distinguish and so can not be 
 readily referred to when necessary. Moreover they 
 are easily mistaken for each other, besides having two 
 meanings attached to the same form, and as the greatest 
 exactitude is needed when dealing with figures these 
 are most important considerations. Although, there- 
 fore, the shorthand forms are briefer than the Arabic 
 ones, none of the above objections apply to the latter, 
 which are accordingly far preferable. Besides the 
 preceding, still other attempts have been made to utilize 
 the shorthand names of the digits, that is to employ 
 the words "one, two, three," etc., everywhere for
 
 420 THE pHoxoiiKAi'inr MANUAL. 
 
 figures; but an objection given above applies here also, 
 namely, that two meanings sometimes attach to the 
 same form. Thus although we can and do write the 
 names of the digits when alone, as "one, three, six," 
 etc., no confusion results because the name of the 
 digit and that of the number are the same. But if we 
 employ the digits together as "one three" (13) or 
 "three one" (31) for "thirteen" or "thirty-one," con- 
 flict ensues because the names of the digits and number 
 are different. The shorthand names of the digits, 
 therefore, can not safely be employed as figures which 
 must have but one meaning and this is given them 
 only by the Arabic forms. 
 
 529. The foregoing observations are made in order 
 that the learner may not waste his time in endeavoring 
 to invent the impossible. If better figures could be 
 invented than the Arabic ones they would be used in 
 place of the latter; which had it been possible would 
 have been done long since. The conclusion thus is 
 irresistible that the Arabic figures are the best that can 
 be obtained. Finally, even if it were possible to invent 
 briefer forms as above for the nine digits and cipher 
 it would still be impossible to write with them such 
 numbers as one million, etc., swiftly enough for report- 
 ing purposes since six or more ciphers would have to 
 be used. Thus, in that respect, no practical advantage 
 would be gained. The learner is, accordingly, most 
 earnestly advised to pay no attention to so called sub- 
 stitutes for the Arabic characters to be employed in 
 shorthand, but to confine his efforts to representing 
 numbers without them. There are various ways in 
 which this can be done by employing the shorthand, 
 the Arabic figures and certain arbitraries; the best 
 methods of doing which, in order to obtain the greatest 
 rapidity, will next be considered. Before proceeding, 
 however, it is proper to remark that wherever the 
 Arabic figures cannot be written as swifty as rapid
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 421 
 
 speech and yet are necessary to be made, the learner 
 must write them as swiftly as possible and depend on 
 the speed of the shorthand to keep up with the flow of 
 words. 
 
 530. In order to render the subject clearer so that 
 the learner will know just what is possible in the way 
 of writing numbers speedily with the Arabic characters 
 when the latter are employed exclusively he is informed 
 that 
 
 a. The digits, except 1, 6 and 7, can not not be 
 written as swiftly as rapid speech with the Arabic 
 numerals. 
 
 b. The cipher can not be so written. 
 
 c. Any number of two figures which contains a 
 cipher, or any number or group of three or four figures 
 with two ciphers can not be so written. 
 
 d. Any number of two or more figures which does 
 not contain a cipher or any number or group of three 
 or four figures containing but one cipher can usually 
 be so written. 
 
 531. From the preceding it will be understood that 
 numbers are most quickly written by never employing 
 a cipher in a number of two figures or more than one 
 in any number or group of three or four figures. 
 
 532. The above being premised the following 
 method of representing numbers has been adopted in 
 this system. 
 
 THE NUMBERS ONI., THREE, SIX AND TWELVE OCCURRING 
 
 ALONE. 
 
 533. As the Arabic numerals "one" and "six" are 
 liable to conflict with the shorthand characters when 
 standing alone that is disconnected from other figures 
 they are then usually represented by the logographs. 
 Also "three"" and "twelve" aro then usually written 
 with the logographs for the sake of speed.
 
 422 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 NUMBERS BEFORE THE WORDS HUNDREDS, THOUSANDS, 
 ETC., AND MONEY. 
 
 534. When a number occurs before either the sin- 
 gular or plural of the words "hundred, thousand," 
 etc., "dollars, cents, pounds (money), '-shillings'' or 
 "pence" it is written with the Arabic characters 
 except "one, three, six" and "twelve"' as explained in 
 the last section. In such cases: 
 
 535. "Hundreds"' and "thousands" are represented 
 by the logographs; thus, WnXt, loo; 2 N't. L"><>: L>:>Nt. 
 2,500; ThrTh, 3,000; 125Th 3 , 125,000; 4-XtTh, 
 4( Hi, 000; sKs'XtTh, 600,000; TwfNtTh, 1,200,000; 
 16NtTh, 1,600,000. 
 
 536. If the writer following a speaker very closely 
 writes a denominational logograph and finds that other 
 figures follow he can, instead of erasing the logograph, 
 write them after it in the second position. This, how- 
 ever, will occur but comparatively seldom and when it 
 does will be more liable to happen after "thousands" 
 than "hundreds." These logographs are mostly em- 
 ployed to indicate round numbers, as 400, 4-000, or 
 those of four figures which contain two ciphers as 
 4005,4500. (See sees. 530 and 531.) They should, 
 accordingly, be written as nearly as possible only in 
 such cases. The learner, therefore, should write 405 
 or 425; and 405,642 or 425,648 rather than 4Nt5 or 
 4Nt25; and 405Th 3 642 or 425Th 3 <J48. When a logo- 
 graph is once written, however, it should not be erased. 
 
 537. Again if a numerical logograph should happen 
 to be written instead of a figure it also should not be 
 
 o 
 
 erased. For example, if 105 or 125 and 105,042 or 
 125,648 should be made in any one of the following 
 ways it should be allowed to remain; thus, WnNtr> o 
 WnNt25; and WnXt5Th 3 642 or WnXt25Th 3 (U<v or 
 Wn<>5 or Wn25; and Wn05Th 3 642 or Wn25Th V,4 s; 
 or \Vn05, 642 or Wn25,648; or Wn05,sKs 1 42. In othei
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 4U3 
 
 words a numerical logograph should generally be 
 allowed to stand, when once written, whether employed 
 as a word or symbol. Nevertheless the learner should 
 usually endeavor to write the logographs only when 
 their numbers occur alone and the Arabic numerals 
 in connection with each other as in the preceding 
 and following examples. 
 
 538. "Millions" are also expressed by the logo- 
 graph, while higher denominations are usually written 
 in full; thus, Wn Ml 1 ; 2M1 1 ; ThrNtMl; 4BLn; 5Tr- 
 Ln: sKs'KwtRln, etc. ; Wn MP424Th 3 , 1,424,000; 
 i'BLn ThrNtMl SNtTh sKs'Nt, 2,300,500,600: 2B- 
 Ln ThrM4 SOTh 3 sKs 1 , 2,003,056,006; 907M1'524 
 Th 3 205, 907,524,205. 
 
 a. The last number, it will be perceived, is more 
 quickly written without than with the denominational 
 logographs. Accordingly, when possible, and no con- 
 fusion would result, the logographs should be omitted. 
 (See sec. 530, d and also sec. 536.) 
 
 539. "Dollars" are represented by a dot by the 
 side of the center of the number, logograph or word 
 to which it belongs, "cents" by a horizontal straight 
 stroke or dash about as long as a half length K in a 
 like position and "mills" by M in the first position. 
 After "six, hundreds" and "millions" the dot or dash 
 is placed under the center of the logograph. After 
 "one, three, twelve, thousands, billions," etc. .it is 
 written alongside of the logograph or word; this be- 
 cause the first three are horizontal forms and the oth- 
 ers are not; thus, 2-, $2.00; Wn-, $1.00;. Thr-, $3.00; 
 sKs 1 , $6.00; Twf-, $12.00; Wn-,. 01; sKsVOG; 5-, 
 .05; 25-,. 25; Thr M 1 , 3 mills; 3-5-, $3.05; 4-25-, 
 $4.25; 7- 8- 2M l ,7d.8c. 2m. or $7.08^; sKs 1 5- sKs 1 - 
 M, <!d. 5c. 6m. or $6.05f; WnNt, $100.00; WnTh-, 
 $1,000.00; WnNtTh-, $100,000*. 00; ThrNtTh sKs 1 , 
 $.'300,006.00; TwfNtTh-, $1,200,000.00; 4MP, '*(, 
 000,000. 00; oBLn-, $5, 000,000, 000. 00; sKsBLn3-75-,
 
 424 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 $6,000,000,003.75; WnNt, 100 cents; 2Th 3 -, 2000 
 cents; ThrMl, 3,000,000 cents; 8BLn-, 8,000,000,000 
 cents; TtoidWn- Rt, a one cent rate; KtoidThr- Mtr, 
 a three dollar matter; Ktoid 5- GltPs, a five dollar 
 gold piece. 
 
 a. The observations in section 537 in regard to 
 logographs, apply also to paragraph 539. Thus, for 
 example, if $3.05 should happen to be written Thr-5-, 
 the logograph should not be erased. 
 
 540. "Pound" or "pounds" (money) are written 
 in full with Pnt or Pnts in the third position. "Shill- 
 ings" are indicated by Sh in the first positon, and 
 "pence" by P in the second. Any of the characters 
 may be joined after a logograph or word if convenient; 
 thus, 2Pnts 3 , 2; WnPnt, 1; ThrPnts, 3; 4Sh\ 4 
 shillings; ThrSh, 3 shillings, sKsSh, 6 shillings; Tvvf- 
 Sh, 12 shillings; 2P, 2 pence; WnP, 1 penny; TwfP, 
 12 pence; sKsPnts WnSh sKsP, 6. Is. 6d.;TwfPnta 
 4Sh! ThrP,12 4s. 3d. ; 7Pnts 3 2Sh l 4P, 7 2s. 4d. ; 
 2M1 1 Pnts 3 , 2, 000, 000 ; WnBLnPnts, 1,000, 000, 000. 
 
 541. When writing numbers as above the comma 
 may be employed as a separatrix point as nsnal; thus, 
 48,548-, $48,548.00; 64,689-75- $64,689.75. Gen- 
 erally, however, it is speedier to indicate the separation 
 by a small space equal to that taken up when the com- 
 ma is employed; thus, 48 548; 907 524 205; 64 689- 
 75-, $64,689.75. 
 
 a. One advantage of the above method of repre- 
 senting money is that the written language is the same 
 as the spoken. Another is that when lower denomi- 
 nations follow higher ones the dot or denominational 
 logographs may be considered as dividing marks after 
 the ordinary manner. Still another advantage is that 
 the denominations can be written separately with as 
 much distinctness as when expressed together. 
 
 b. If any time the digits 1 and 6 should be sep- 
 rated from other figures, they may be extra distin-
 
 THE PHOXOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 425 
 
 gtiished if desired by drawing through the stem of 
 each a horizontal straight stroke about as long as a 
 double length K. 
 
 LESSON 52 
 
 NUMBERS BEFORE OTHER WORDS THAN HUNDREDS, 
 THOUSANDS, ETC., AND MONEY. 
 
 542. When a number occurs before any other 
 words than those in section 534, it is still written as 
 above explained except that "one, three, six" and 
 'twelve" are in a few instances, which will appear 
 hereafter, made with the Arabic characters; thus, 
 4PrsXs, four persons; 5Pnts 3 , five (or 5) pounds 
 (weight); TPXs, 7 pennies; WnsNTR, one century; 
 ThrMn 1 three men; sKs^IThs, six months; TwfPlss, 
 twelve places. 
 
 THE NUMBERS TEN, TWENTY, THIRTY, ETC. 
 
 543. When a number over "nine" and under "one 
 hundred," of one cipher (see sec. 530, c) as 10, 20, 30, 
 40, etc., occurs alone it is written with the Arabic 
 digit with a straight stroke added to the figure in the 
 direction of R or Ch so that the former will end twice 
 the length of the figure above the line of writing and the 
 latter half this distance below it; the characters in con- 
 sequence all being of the same length; thus, 
 
 
 a. It will be observed that the added strokes above 
 take the place of the ordinary ciphers. They are, 
 accordingly, alternative forms and are termed Alter- 
 native or Straight Ciphers, the others being Round or 
 Elliptical ones. 
 
 b. In stenotypy the alternative figures are the same 
 as above except that the straight cipher is represented
 
 426 THE PHONOGRAPHIC 1 MANUAL. 
 
 by the light grave accent; thus, T, 2\ 3\ 4\ 5\ 6\ 7\ 
 8 V , 9\ 
 
 544. Besides being written alone the above char- 
 acters are employed in connection with other figures, 
 that is in numbers over one hundred, or in any connec- 
 tion; thus, H\ 110; 12\ 120; 24\ 240; 12T (or 1-J 
 Ntl x ), 1210; 153 X (or 15Nt3 v ), 1530; 4876 X (or 48TV 
 76'), 48,760; T01 (or Tl or'rNtl), 1001; T25 (or I 1 
 Kt25), 1025; T^ (or l x Nt5 x ), 1050; 3-T-, $3.10; 5.7 V -, 
 $5.70; 8'-, .80; 9\ $90.00; 4' Pnts 3 ,40:3 x //Rs 1 , 
 30 years. 
 
 a. When a numerical denomination occurs alone 
 after an alternative figure as above, it may, if desired, 
 be joined to an upward cipher; thus, IVNt, 1000: i r - 
 Th, 20,000; 3^-Ml, 30,000,000; 5VBLn, 50,000,000, 
 000. 
 
 545. If preferred the numbers 10, 20, 30 and 60, 
 when alone or before other words than those in section 
 534, may, the same as 1, 3, 6 and 12 in section 542 be 
 written in shorthand instead of with the alternative 
 figures given in section 543; thus, Tn, TwT, ThrT, 
 sKsT. 
 
 CARDINAL AND ORDINAL NUMBERS. 
 
 546. The plural of cardinal numbers is written by 
 adding the S circle to the latter part of the digit or 
 to the logograph or to the last figure of the number 
 or to the straight cipher. 
 
 a. In the case of the figure ''six" the plural is 
 added by the small imperfect circle described in sec- 
 tion 111; thus, Yshns-s. 
 
 1. If preferred, the plural of cardinal numbers may 
 be written with the stem Z placed alongside the figure 
 in the first position, instead of as in paragraph r4<>, 
 except in the case of the alternatives with straight 
 ciphers whose plurals are always written with the S 
 circle.
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 427 
 
 547. The S circle may also be added to the logo- 
 oraphs or words denoting the denominations; thus, 
 WnNts, ThrThs 3 , 4M1S 1 , 5BLns. 
 
 548. The ordinal numbers "first, second, third, 
 sixth" and "twelfth" are usually written in shorthand 
 except when they occur after the name of a month 
 and before the number of a year at the heading of let- 
 ters (or in Bible references, etc., to be explained pres- 
 ently) in which cases they are made with the Arabic 
 figures in the same manner as are the cardinal num- 
 bers, namely, without the letters St, D or Th attached; 
 thus, RtoidFrst sKnt ' ' Thrt 1 D ' ' CtoidsKs 1 ' ' 
 Twf ' AV'K, the first, second or third day or the sixth 
 or twelfth week; Jtoid^K TtoidMrC Frst ' ' Prl 1 
 sKs 1 , he will come on March 1st or April 6th; ShKG 
 JN 1 00; Chicago, January 1st, 1900; sTLs FB 6 00; 
 St. Louis, February 6th 1900. 
 
 549. All the ordinal numbers are everywhere writ- 
 ten with Arabic figures in the same manner as are the 
 cardinal ones; thus, + 1 4 MTh FtCtoid 5 yR 1 ,the 
 fourth month after the fifth year; -j- 1 29 Xst 1 , the 
 29th instant; + 1 l v W'K, the 10th week. 
 
 550. The terminals St, D and Th may be added to 
 the Arabic figures when standing for ordinal numbers, 
 if desired, in which case they are written alongside 
 the figures in the first position, St with the S stem 
 halved after 1, D with the stem D after 2 and 3, and 
 Th with the stem Th after all other figures; thus, 
 ISt 1 , 2D 1 , 3D 1 , 4Th% 21st 1 , 22D>, 23D 1 , 25Th ] 
 
 a. After straight ciphers the Th may be joined to 
 the upward forms and disjoined near the end in the 
 case of the others or they may be joined, if preferred. 
 
 551. The plural of ordinal numbers when written 
 with Arabic figures is expressed by. attach ing the S 
 circle to the terminals St, D and Th as given in the 
 preceding section. 
 
 552. Usually, however, the ordinal plurals "firsts,
 
 428 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 seconds, thirds, sixths'' and "twelfths" are written 
 with the S circle attached to the logographs for the 
 singular as given in section 548; thus, Frsts, sKnts, 
 Thrts, sKsThs, TwfThs. 
 
 553. If there would be danger (which will be sel- 
 dom) of an ordinal number being mistaken for a car- 
 dinal one, the former should have the termination St, D 
 or Th (or the plurals) added. 
 
 PECIMAI, FRACTIONS AND MIXED NUMBERS. 
 
 554. When decimals are written the denominations 
 are placed under the last figure of the numbers to 
 which they belong; "tenths" being indicated by the 
 alternative figure given in section 543 and all other 
 denominations by the logographs or outlines for the 
 ordinary ones, the under-placing being represented in 
 stenotypy by an inverted double semicolon. When 
 "ten-hundredths, ten-thousandths, ten-millionths, ten- 
 billionths," etc., occur the alternative symbol for 
 "ten" is usually prefixed to the other denominations; 
 thus, liiT, one tenth (.1); 2<r, two tenths (.2); Hi 
 Nt, one hundredth (.01;; 3i'Nts, three hundredths 
 (.03); 14<<Nts (Nts under the 4), fourteen hundredths 
 (.14); IS'.tNts, fifteen hundredths dollars ($0.15 or 
 $0 T Vo); 1'iTh, one thousandth (.001); 4^Ths, four 
 thousandths (.004); 5ttl'-Nts, five ten-hundredths 
 (.005); 12'.iThs (Ths under the 2), twelve thousandths 
 (.012); 5ia x -Ths, five ten-thousandths (,0005); 6iiNt 
 Ths, six hundred thousandths (.00006; Tt'Mls, seven 
 millionths (,000007); H'lVMl, one ten millionth (.00 
 00001; SttBLns, eight billionths (.000000008); 2iiT- 
 BLns, two ten-bill ionths (.0000000002). 
 
 555. When a mixed number is expressed in deci- 
 mals the decimal is written after and a little above the 
 integer; thus, l'.2'.il\ one and two tenths (1.2); 2il'.i 
 1\ two and one tenth (2.1); l''.6iil\ ten and six tenths 
 (10.6); 21'.8<<NtThs, twenty-one and eight hundred
 
 THK PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 429 
 
 thousandths (21.00008); liliiMl 1 , one and one mil- 
 lionth (1.000001); 32t5t'.BLns, thirty-two and five 
 billionths (32.000000005); 3il416iil v -Ths, three and 
 fourteen hundred and sixteen ten-thousandths (3.1416); 
 3: 14 159 265PlsiiNtMls (Nt under the five), three and 
 fourteen million, one hundred and fifty-nine thou- 
 sand, two hundred and sixty-five plus hundred rail- 
 lionths (3. 14159265 -f); 5<WnBLn ThrMl 56Th 3 6i'.l v - 
 BLns, five and one billion, three million, fifty-six 
 thousand and six ten-billionths (5.1003056006). 
 
 LESSON 53. 
 
 COMMON FRACTIONS AND MIXED NUMBERS. 
 
 556. AVhen common fractions occur alone they are 
 written in the ordinary way, except that the dividing 
 line is omitted; thus, J; 2 V, \\. 
 
 557. The same course is followed with mixed 
 numbers except those containing "twelfths" and 
 "eighths;" thus, 1J; 3 a 5 9 6{*. 
 
 558. "When mixed numbers occur in which the 
 fractions of the unit consist of "twelfths" or "eighths" 
 the integer is written as usual but the fractions are 
 indicated by a horizontal straight stroke with one or 
 two hooks attached and placed above or below the 
 last figure of the integer the stroke being about as 
 long as a single or half length K, according as the in- 
 teger consists of one or more figures; thus, 
 
 11 15 17 111 11 15 11 12 
 
 J-IS} J-Tfj J-TTj Ml J-Tj L 7, *-~5 
 
 If "T t 3 *T T^l^T 3 
 11, 11, 11, II If, If, II 
 cL _L cL A, J- ^ -Lj 
 
 U T V, 111!, 211, 112* 
 U llT 21 112 
 
 c- -,
 
 430 THE I IIDNOIIKAIMIIC MANL'AL. 
 
 :i. It will be observed that the ternary characters 
 are placed above the integers, and the binary ones 
 below them. Also that fractions of the same denomi- 
 nation begin or end with hooks on the same side of 
 the stem while those in each series whose numerators 
 are "five"' and ; 'seven" are alike or end alike. Fin- 
 ally that the quickest spoken fractions, namely, those 
 with "one" for the numerator have the speediest forms, 
 possessing but one hook two of the latter also rep- 
 resenting "five-twelfths" and "five-eighths." 
 
 559. If in mixed numbers, "one twenty-fourth" 
 or "one sixteenth" (the half of the "twelfth" or 
 "eighth") is mentioned the former is represented by 
 two and the latter by one dot placed under the fig- 
 ure or arbitrary; thus, 1, 1J 2 and / 4 ; 2, 2,\ and . 2 \ ; 
 J. , 1| and T*,; ^, 4| and T V 
 
 560. If the "twenty-fourth" or "sixteenth" is 
 mentioned in connection with integers only, or with 
 other fractions Avithout integers the dots are still 
 written beneath the figures the same as just explained; 
 thus, 1, 1^; 2, 2 ? y, 15, Ufa ,',, ^ and fa 1, l f ' 6 ; 
 3, 3^; 18. 18 T y, i, |and T y 
 
 561. The plural of fractions is written in the same 
 manner as that of whole numbers. (See see's. 546 and 
 551.) 
 
 FEET AND INCHES, ARC, TEMPERATURE, TIME, ETC. 
 
 562. "Feet" and "inches" are distinguished by 
 writing the denominations in shorthand, the fractions 
 and mixed numbers being expressed as in sections 
 556 to 561 preceding, thus, WnFt WnNC, 1 ft. 1 in. ; 
 2Ft' 4NCS 1 , 2 ft. 4 in.; ThrFt J^NCs 1 , 3 ft.5| in.; 
 
 ^Ft 1 6 NCs 1 , 4. ft. 6| and -fr in.; 8 NCs 1 , 8 T V in. ; 
 
 INC 1 | and T V in.- 
 
 563. "Degrees, minutes" and "seconds of arc" are 
 written with the ordinary signs after and near the top
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 431 
 
 of the number as usual; thus, 2 3' 4", two degrees, 
 three minutes and four seconds. 
 
 564. "Degrees of temperature" are indicated by 
 the same sign as degrees of arc, the words "Fahren- 
 heit, Centigrade, Reaumur," etc., if used, being ex- 
 pressed by logographs or initials just after the com- 
 bination; thus, 7, 7 degrees; 8F 3 , 8 degrees Fahren- 
 heit; 14sNt, 14 degrees Centigrade; 21R, 21 degrees 
 Reaumur. 
 
 565. "Hours, minutes" and "seconds" are written, 
 the first by two dots one above the other after the 
 number to which they belong and the second and third 
 by the same signs and in the same manner as those for 
 minutes and seconds of arc; thus, 3: 14' 28", 3 hr. 14 
 min. 28 sec. 
 
 5(>(). Such expressions as "one-fifteen, two-twen- 
 ty," etc., designating money, time, extent or other 
 measure may be indicated by separating the words and 
 figures, or figures, denoting the units and parts by a 
 horizontal straight stroke about as long as a double 
 length K, the words being written in their proper 
 position and the stroke and figures on the line; thus, 
 
 Wn 15, one-fifteen; sKs 1 3\ six-thirty; 2 
 
 25, two-twenty-five. 
 
 LESSON 54. 
 
 BIBLE REFERENCES. 
 
 567. In reporting sermons, etc., Bible references, 
 if ordinal numbers are used, are indicated by placing 
 the figure for the book above the line of writing, that 
 for the chapter on it, and that for the verse through it 
 (or, if unruled paper is used, where the line would be 
 if drawn) or in the first, second and third positions, 
 respectively. By this means the book, chapter and 
 verse may be written in any order with the figures 
 only and without danger of ambiguity. If the num-
 
 432 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 ber of the book occurs before its name the word 
 "book," if uttered, is written, otherwise not; thus, 
 KrThns 1 2 ...5..., Corinthians I, ii. , 5, Corinthians, 
 
 first book, second chapter, fifth verse; 1 B 3 K KrThns 
 2 ...5..., first book of Corinthians, second chapter, 
 
 fifth verse; ...5... 2 1 B 3 K KrThns, fifth verse of the 
 
 second chapter of the first book of Corinthians; 1 Kr- 
 Thns 2 ...5..., I Corinthians, ii., 5, first Corinthians, 
 
 second chapter, fifth verse; ...5... 2 1 KrThns, fifth 
 verse of the second chapter of first Corinthians; JMs 
 4 ...14..., James iv, 14, James, fourth chapter, four- 
 teenth verse; M^Kst sFrRtoid, ...14... 4 JMs, my 
 text is from the fourteenth verse of the fourth 
 chapter of James. 
 
 568. If cardinal numbers are used they are placed 
 the same as the ordinal ones, but the words "book, 
 chapter" and "verse" must be written in shorthand; 
 
 thus, KrThns B 3 K 1 C 3 P 2 Vrs...5..., Corinthians, 
 book one, chapter two, verse five; Vrs..-5... C 3 P 2 
 B 3 K 1 KrThns, verse five, chapter two, book one of 
 Corinthians. If preferred, however, the numbers 
 may all be written on the line. 
 
 569 Should ordinal and cardinal numbers be used 
 together both are written as usual and will always be 
 easily distinguishable from each other from the fact 
 that the words "book, chapter" and "verse" are uttered 
 after the former and before the latter; thus, KrThns 1 
 C 3 P 2 Vrs..-5..., Corinthians, first book, chapter two, 
 
 verse five; KrThns B 3 K 1 2 ...5..., Corinthians, book 
 one, second chapter, fifth verse; ...5... 2 B 3 K 1 Kr- 
 Thns, fifth verse, second chapter, book one of Cor- 
 inthians. 
 
 570. If in any instance the word "epistle" is
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 433 
 
 uttered instead of the word "book" it is always writ- 
 ten. Also if the word "and'' occurs it is expressed 
 with the logograph; thus, 1 B 3 K KrThns 2 xSVitoid 
 ...5..., first book of Corinthians, second chapter and 
 fifth verse. 
 
 NUMERICAL, AND OTHER DENOMINATIONS. 
 
 571. Whenever a numerical, money or other de- 
 nomination occurs without a number preceding it, it is 
 written in shorthand, except when the word "cents" or 
 "dollars," singular or plural, follows the singular or 
 plural of the words "hundreds, thousands," etc., when 
 it is expressed with the dash or dot, as usual; thus, 
 Nts Pl, hundreds of people ;Ktoid sNt ' ' 2 % a cent 
 or two; KtoidL) 1 , a dollar; MnTs ' ' sKnts 1 , minutes 
 or seconds; KtoidNt, a hundred cents; KtoidTh 3 -, 
 a thousand cents; KtoidNt, a hundred dollars; Ktoid- 
 Th 3 , a thousand dollars; KtoidNt Kwn, a hundred 
 cent question; KtoidTh 3 - hRs 1 , a thousand dollar 
 horse.
 
 434 THE IMloXo.iUAPrilC MANUAL. 
 
 CHAPTER XII. 
 
 SIGNIFICANT MARKS, ETC. REPORTING TRIALS, 
 HEARINGS, ETC. 
 
 LESSON 55. 
 SIGNIFICANT MARKS, ETC. 
 
 572. In reporting a speech, etc., if a word is 
 omitted from not having been heard, a character like 
 RtoidsCC, the down stroke being somewhat longer 
 than a double length Ch, is written, instead of the 
 word, to denote its omission. If several words are 
 thus omitted the same mark, which is called the Omis- 
 sion Mark, is made in the middle of a space left pro- 
 portionate to the number of words omitted. Should 
 the omission extend to the end of the sentence, a period 
 is also written just before the beginning of the next 
 sentence. 
 
 573. When there is a doubt whether a word or 
 phrase has been distinctly heard or accurately under- 
 stood a waved line should be drawn under it. 
 
 574. If a quotation is made which is known to the 
 reporter, or if not, is easily obtained, he may omit all 
 except the commencing and concluding words, indi- 
 cating the omission by a phonographic dash about 
 twice as long as usual. (See sec. 138.) 
 
 575. Wfren two or more words are repeated they 
 may, after being written once, or perhaps oftener, be 
 indicated by a horizontal straight stroke a little longer 
 than a double length K, as in the sentence, "They
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 435 
 
 called last week, - - yesterday to-day." 
 
 (See also sec. 519.) 
 
 576. Indications of approval or disapproval, etc., 
 coming from the audience or from any other source, 
 or running explanations or comments, etc. , made by 
 the reporter should be described or given in shorthand 
 with the proper words enclosed in parentheses (see 
 sec. 139), for which there will usually be ample time 
 while the speaker is interrupted; thus, Crs 1 , cheers; 
 Pis 1 , applause; L 3 Ftr, laughter; JtoidSs 1 , hisses; 
 N, no; NN, no, no; sNsskn PRR, sensation, uproar; 
 Crs 1 Pis, cheers, applause; GTtoidGTtoid, go on, go 
 on; Crs 1 Pis JtoidSs ^Ftr, cheers, applause, hisses, 
 laughter; ABB KsTMnt -Fshn 3 , hubbub, excitement, 
 confusion ; nWsLNg JtoidSs 1 MKCrs 1 Grns 4 , whist- 
 ling, hisses, mock-cheers and groans; Vs 1 , a voice; Cr, 
 chair; Mn Nr 1 PltF, man near platform. 
 
 577. If but one adjective is employed it is usually 
 written before the noun; thus, Grt Pis, great applause; 
 TrMnDs Cr x Ng, tremendous cheering. 
 
 578. If two or more adjectives are used the first is 
 generally written before and the others after the noun 
 in the shorthand notes; thus, Lt 3 Pls TND, loud ap- 
 plause, continued; Lt 3 L 3 Ftr hLRs Ng 1 , "loud 
 laughter, hilarious, long;" the reason for which is 
 that the reporter can not know the second or third 
 characteristics until the applause, etc. , has lasted for 
 some time. In transcribing, however, the adjectives 
 are usually placed before the noun; thus, (loud and 
 continued applause,) (loud, long and hilarious laugh- 
 ter.) Again, in transcribing, a description may be 
 extended or made more definite than in the notes. 
 Thus the words "man near platform" in section 576 
 above, may be written: (At this moment a very tall 
 man near the platform waved his hat and shouted, 
 "Hurrah for the navy!") 
 
 579. The location of various matters in the report
 
 43<) THE PHONOGRAPHIC' MANUAL. 
 
 of a speech, etc., may be indicated by the following- 
 reference marks or signs: 
 
 a A simple vertical line drawn in the margin at 
 the left of the space written upon, calls attention for 
 some reason not necessary to be specified, or which 
 the writer has no time to specify, to the part opposite. 
 (See also Prologue, page 24.) 
 
 b. The logograph for "important" written before 
 this line near the middle indicates an important sen- 
 tence or paragraph. 
 
 c. The several headings may be designated by the 
 capital script letters A, B, C 1 , etc. , placed before the 
 
 . line. 
 
 d. The different sections, paragraphs, etc., may 
 be distinguished by figures and small script letters or 
 by the mark for the break (see sees. 145 to 147) in 
 the same position. 
 
 e. In addition to the above other marks may be 
 made before the line if they are found necessary. 
 
 f. Two or .more different marks may be written 
 before the line. Thus, if it has before it the figure 2 
 and under the latter the logograph for "important, " 
 the combination reads "Section (or remark) 2, impor- 
 tant." If quotation marks (see sec. 140) are also 
 struck underneath the other two signs the word "quo- 
 tation" is included in the reading; and so on for any 
 other marks or signs that may be added. 
 
 g. If for any reason after a complete report is 
 taken it is found that only a condensed one will be 
 needed, the various parts to be condensed may be 
 indicated by some suitable mark or sign placed before 
 the line, and those to be excerpted by a different one 
 similarly placed. If the part to be marked is already 
 distinguished by other marks the sign for conden- 
 sation or excerption may be placed before them its 
 line being omitted. 
 
 1. It is not necessary that the line should always
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 437 
 
 be drawn except in the first instance explained above. 
 (See par. a). In all other instances it may be omitted 
 iind the marks or signs written alone if the part to 
 which reference is made is not too long. 
 
 TRANSCRIPTION OF A SPEECH, ETC. 
 
 580. In transcribing a speech or remarks delivered 
 extemporaneously, if any ordinary grammatical errors 
 have been made they should be corrected. The cor- 
 rections, however, should be confined only to such 
 errors and not extend beyond them. Likewise, if 
 there are any patent mis-statements which the speaker 
 clearly did not intend to make, these also should be 
 corrected. In all other respects the wording should 
 remain unchanged. (See also sec. 588.) 
 
 LESSON 56. 
 REPORTING TRIALS, HEARINGS, ETC. 
 
 581. Different works have been published explain- 
 ing all the details of reporting trials, hearings, etc; 
 one or more of which the learner should procure if he 
 desires to investigate this subject thoroughly. Only 
 the writing of the examination and testimony will be 
 considered here. 
 
 OM^. There are several methods of writing the 
 examination and testimony employed by reporters. 
 The method which the author regards as usually the 
 best is to separate the questions and answers into para- 
 graphs by commencing the former at the left of the 
 space written upon and the latter on the next line 
 below to the right of the commencing point of the 
 questions, at the regular distance; namely, twice as 
 long as the space period (see sec. 136), the interrogation 
 point and period at the end both being omitted; thus, 
 Where do you live 
 
 In Chicago
 
 438 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 Do you remember what persons were present at the 
 time this agreement was written and if anything was 
 said in regard to it 
 
 There were several persons present but 
 I do not recollect how many or what 
 was said 
 
 583. Both questions and answers, when long 
 enough, extend to the. right side of the space written 
 upon. If either consists of two or more lines each 
 succeeding line begins immediately under the commenc- 
 ing point of its predecessor. If two or more sentences 
 are contained in a questioner answer, they are separated 
 by periods the space being used. (See sec. 136.) 
 In which case, if a sentence should happen to end at or 
 near the right side of the space written upon, the 
 next sentence, if it is part of a question, begins as 
 usual on the line below the distance of a period to the 
 right of a point under the commencing one of the first 
 sentence. If the sentence is part of an answer it begins 
 at the same distance to the right of a point under the 
 commencing one of the first sentence of the latter. 
 If the writer prefers, however, and there is sufficient 
 time, he may write the periods when they occur in the 
 middle of a question or answer instead of leaving the 
 spaces. The remaining marks of punctuation are usu- 
 ally omitted intermedially from questions and answers. 
 The parentheses, however, are employed to enclose any 
 explanatory remarks interjected or added by the re- 
 porter. 
 
 584. By writing the examination and testimony as 
 in section 582, the answers appear in separate columns 
 and can thus always be easily referred to. This mode 
 should not be employed on the full width of a page of 
 the size of foolscap, etc., but only on half of it, other- 
 wise it will take up too much paper when the questions 
 and answers are short. Pages of the size of foolscap,
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 430 
 
 etc., should, therefore, be ruled with three vertical 
 lines from top to bottom, one line at the middle, an- 
 other half an inch to the right of it, and another the 
 same distance to the right of the left edge. If desired, 
 however, books may be used ruled in the same manner. 
 Both the paper and books may be obtained at or through 
 most bookstores or stationers. 
 
 585. When an ordinary sized note book is employed 
 this method can not be written with two columns 
 owing to the narrowness of the book. Therefore only 
 one column is used, the writing extending clear across 
 the page, the vertical line at the left being half an inch 
 from the edge as usual. 
 
 586. The half inch margin is ruled off as above, 
 both when single and double columns are used, so that 
 any reference marks (see sec. 579) may be placed in 
 it either during the writing of the notes or afterwards. 
 The name of the person opening the direct examination 
 is also written in it either wholly or in part as there 
 may be room. In it are also indicated the beginning 
 of the cross examination, etc., or of any remarks made 
 by the presiding officer. Finally, the marginal line is 
 used as a starting place for the questions which are 
 commenced close to the right of it. Some writers, 
 however, do not use the marginal line in narrow note 
 books but simply commence the questions at or about 
 where the line would be if drawn. It is here recom- 
 mended, however, that the marginal line be used since 
 the reference marks, etc., are much more easily dis- 
 tinguished if separated by it from the body of the notes 
 than if the line is omitted. 
 
 5*7. Sometimes when the questions and answers 
 are very short the latter may, in order to save paper, 
 bo written on the same line with the former, but sep- 
 arated by about a double length space period. This 
 is termed "running in tlio answers." A question, 
 however, should never commence after #uch an answer
 
 440 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 on the same line, but should begin at the usual place 
 on the line following. If the answer should turn out 
 to be a long one, its continuation should commence on 
 the following line at the usual place the same as when 
 regularly written. 
 
 TRANSCRIBING TRIALS, HEARINGS, ETC. 
 
 588. There are several methods of transcribing 
 the examination and testimony in all of which the 
 proper punctuation marks are inserted both medially 
 and at the end of the questions and answers. Only 
 two those which the author considers as usually the 
 best will be given here. In the first method the 
 questions and^ answers are written in script or type- 
 written in the manner explained in section 582 in the 
 case of the short hand notes, the questions beginning 
 at the left edge of the space written upon and the an- 
 swers indented the length of a shorthand space para- 
 graph to the right of it. When printed, however, the 
 indentation of the answers is, at the farthest, only about 
 three-eighths of an inch; thus, 
 
 Where do you live? 
 
 In Chicago. 
 
 Do you remember what persons were present at the 
 time this agreement was written, and if anything was 
 said in regard to it ? 
 
 There were several persons present, but I do not 
 recollect how many, or what was said. 
 1. The answers should never be "run in v in the 
 transcript as explained in section 587 for the short- 
 hand notes. 
 
 589. In the second method the capital letters Q. and 
 A., the initials of the words question and answer, are 
 placed before the questions and answers themselves. 
 The beginning of each is then indented at the left of 
 the page the same as are the beginnings of the para- 
 graphs in ordinary script and print; thus,
 
 THE PIION'OGRAPHIC MANUAL. 441 
 
 Q. What is your business ? 
 
 A. Dry goods and notions. 
 
 Q. Were you ever engaged in any other business 
 and if so what and where was it ? 
 
 A. I followed the shoe business for a while a littje 
 farther up the street, but finally sold out and went 
 into my present line dry goods and notions. 
 
 500. Of the two methods above the first takes up 
 a little more paper than the second but is preferred for 
 the following reasons. In the first place it saves the 
 time and expense of writing and printing the initials 
 Q. and A., which are considerable, and are also sur- 
 plusages, since the interrogation point and period are 
 written after the questions and answers in any event. 
 In the next place it is a counterpart of the shorthand 
 notes so that the questions and answers can be referred 
 one to the other with the greatest ease, and enables 
 any particular answer to be found much more quickly 
 than does the second method. Thus, on the whole, 
 there is a very great gain. Finally, the questions 
 and answers are as certainly distinguished as in the 
 second method, since in the shorthand notes from 
 which the transcript is taken and on which it depends, 
 they are distinguished in the same manner. The 
 learner, however, can adopt either method he chooses. 
 
 REPORTING EXERCISES. 
 
 591. In the following reporting exercises the en- 
 graved portions are reading and the printed ones writ- 
 ing exercises the latter being a key to the 
 former the same as exemplified in the preceding 
 pages. 
 
 592. The learner should study the first engraved 
 exercise until it becomes sofamilar as to be read with- 
 out hesitation. He should then write it from mem-
 
 44lj THK r-HOXUGHAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 ory, using the key, until the notes can be made accu- 
 rately, always keeping the characters as nearly as pos- 
 sible of the same size as those in the engraving, as 
 explained in the Prologue, page 26. Only a few re- 
 petions in each case will be necessary. He should 
 then take it from dictation, that is from another's 
 reading, until he can write it neatly at about 125 
 words a minute, which is the average rate of speech, 
 and read the notes without hesitation. After master- 
 ing the first exercise in this manner he should pursue 
 the same course with each subsequent one.
 
 REPORTING STYLE READING EXERCISES. 
 
 THE RIGHT OF FREE DISCUSSION. 
 
 \ 
 
 i 
 
 <\ 
 
 y 
 
 \ 
 
 ( 
 
 A 
 
 JL . 
 
 
 , 
 
 'X 
 
 j h 
 
 L 
 
 C 3 
 
 C C 

 
 144 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 WEALTH AND ITS MEASUREMENT. 
 
 I. / < .- 
 
 L 
 
 L X 
 
 ! 
 
 v 
 
 *"\ ^ fA C 
 
 * " t -J 7^- 
 
 - J t- 
 
 /-p l^ /rr 
 
 / ^L 
 
 \ > 
 
 V o U J 
 
 V 
 
 1 
 
 \ 
 
 /-T. 
 
 ^, 
 
 l C 
 
 N 
 
 -1- 
 
 3 ^ 
 
 i <T J^ 
 
 L" N ^ 
 
 .X 
 
 N J
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 445 
 
 N ^ * V
 
 440 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 Y 
 
 rt: 
 
 t 
 
 T^ 
 
 rU- 
 
 IZLL 
 
 i 
 
 v 
 
 Vk 
 
 ^ .i-v 
 
 x/i i ^r ^ n 
 
 <v 
 
 lv 
 
 { \ 
 
 / /v^ "^ \ ^~ r 
 
 V 
 
 - 
 
 A,
 
 THE PUOXOCJEAI'IiH' MANUAL. 
 
 447 
 
 ^ 
 
 / 
 
 LETTERS. 
 
 
 \r 
 
 \ 
 
 A.
 
 448 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 
 MAN'S MASTERY OVER NATURE. 
 
 \ 
 
 r 
 
 . r* 
 
 \ 
 
 \ 
 
 v^/<r $ 
 
 V7 
 
 \ 
 
 
 - > 
 
 - . 
 
 ,A
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC) MANUAL. 
 
 4411 
 
 OPPORTUNITY AND THE TRUE REFORMER. 
 
 \ 
 \ 
 
 V / 
 \/ 
 
 *ss ov~ 
 
 V 
 
 I 
 
 r 
 
 ( V l % 1 ( /. _ 
 
 * Y l ^ / 
 
 \ 
 
 L. 
 
 z ^\ 
 
 ^-i 
 
 I 
 
 J 
 
 1 ) 
 
 ~"
 
 THE rilONOCKAPHU: MANUAL. 
 
 V 
 
 k - ' 
 
 ^ _ 
 
 V. ^ 
 
 THE SUN'S ENERGY. 
 V 
 
 ^ t" 
 
 L V /( 
 
 V7 
 
 v
 
 Till-: PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 451 
 
 r 
 
 / 3 \r 
 
 ./ L " \ 
 
 /L" 
 
 .A. 
 
 -f 
 
 NT" 
 
 I L I 1 
 
 V 
 
 x 
 
 < 
 
 V- 
 
 . ^ , 
 
 i 
 
 V- 
 
 -1 
 
 A 
 
 S 
 
 ! I
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANTAL 
 
 t~ 1 
 
 
 -V 
 
 \ 
 
 X 
 
 \ 
 
 X. V 
 
 A 
 
 VT 
 
 V
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 453 
 
 "X 
 
 
 J ~ 
 
 V ^|V 
 
 y\> 
 
 ^v 
 
 x 
 
 I \t n 
 
 !\ 
 
 v 
 \ 
 
 THE GREAT NORTHWESTERN SNOWFALL.
 
 454 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 v 
 
 n 
 
 v 
 
 \ 
 
 \ 
 
 N 
 
 X 
 
 X 
 
 >*/' "-* / L. 
 
 I X U 
 
 A 
 
 L I /t 
 
 > 
 
 L 
 
 M 
 
 \7 
 
 L.
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 455 
 
 > \x /\_ to 
 
 :// V^ >> o 
 
 TRUTH. 
 
 % 
 
 XZ^ ^ 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 V 
 
 J> 
 
 MEN ALWAYS FIT FOR FREEDOM. 
 
 r_ 

 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 V 
 
 / x- 1 )' 
 
 , p f ^ t 
 
 7-^ ^> t- 
 
 1 
 
 r J- \- 
 
 N X 
 
 FIDELITY TO THE CONSTITUTION. 
 
 -M 
 
 \ 
 
 H 
 
 EARLY RISING. 
 V 
 
 L 
 
 I
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL 
 
 457 
 
 H t 
 
 NO 
 
 \ 
 
 r 
 
 t 
 
 \ 
 
 t 
 
 ^=\ 
 
 SELF-CULTURE. 
 
 / A.
 
 458 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 JJ_t v^_ 
 
 /" ) 
 
 N/ \i 
 
 "\ 
 
 v 
 
 . > ) 
 
 \ / tf X^
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 459 
 
 SELF-RESPECT. 
 
 A 
 
 r 
 
 v 
 
 V. 
 
 A. 
 
 LL 
 
 V 
 
 . A, 
 
 A 
 
 / 3_ 
 
 r 
 
 /t 
 
 \ 
 
 r^ 
 
 THE KNOCKING AT THE GATE IN MACBETH. 
 
 / X \ 
 
 _r^V 
 
 S 
 
 \ 
 
 U^ X 
 
 I (. "- "U /| I ^- . ' V
 
 Kid 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 X/k 
 
 V 
 
 \ 
 
 /TV -* 
 
 V 
 
 u 
 
 
 l/H/T 
 
 V Q 
 
 . V 
 
 
 , 
 
 -i I 
 
 
 -y
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 \ 
 
 N, ^ .u 
 
 ^ V* 
 
 r 
 
 L 
 
 \ 
 
 V/ 
 
 "V 
 
 ^ 
 
 V *""- 
 
 ~ / 
 
 Jy- . ^ v S / A^ 
 
 \
 
 462 
 
 TliK PIIOXOUKAPHIC JIAXUAL. 
 
 \ 
 
 PHONOGRAPHERS AND PHONETIC SPELLING. 
 
 \ 
 
 
 vy 
 
 \ 
 
 THE PHOXOSCRIPT AND PHONOTYPIC ALPHABETS. 
 
 /v 
 
 C 
 
 c -t 
 
 V
 
 REPORTING STYLE WRITING EXERCISES. 
 
 (KEY TO READING EXERCISES.) 
 
 THE RIGHT OF FREE DISCUSSION. 
 
 Important as I deem it to discuss on all proper 
 occasions the policy of the measures at present pur- 
 sued, it is still more important to maintain the right 
 of such discussion in its full and just extent. Senti- 
 ments lately sprung up and now growing fashionable 
 make it necessary to be explicit on this point. The 
 more I perceive a disposition to check the freedom of 
 inquiry by extravagant and unconstitutional pretenses 
 the firmer shall be the tone in which I shall assert and 
 the freer the manner in which I shall exercise it. 
 
 It is the ancient and undoubted prerogative of this 
 people to canvass public measures and the merits of 
 public men. It is a home-bred right, a fire-side priv- 
 ilege. It hath ever been enjoyed in every house, cot- 
 tage and cabin in the nation. It is not to be drawn 
 into controversy. It is as undoubted as the right of 
 breathing the air or walking on the earth. Belonging 
 to private life as a right, it belongs to public life as a 
 duty and it is the last duty which those whose repre- 
 sentative I am shall find me to abandon. Aiming at 
 all times to be courteous and temperate in its use ex- 
 cept when the right itself shall be questioned, I shall 
 then carry it to its extent. I shall place myself on 
 the extreme boundary of my right, and bid defiance to 
 any arm that would move me from my ground. 
 
 This high, constitutional privilege I shall defend 
 and exercise within this house, and without this house, 
 and in all places; in time of peace and in all times.
 
 4G4 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 Living, I shall assert it, and should I leave no other 
 inheritance to my children, by the blessing of God, I 
 will leave them the inheritance of free principles and 
 the example of a manly, independent and constitutional 
 defense of them. Daniel AVebster. 
 
 WEALTH AND ITS MEASUREMENT. 
 
 Wealth comprises ail things having value, such as 
 houses, lands, cattle, furniture, goods, money, etc., in 
 short, all objects possessing inherent power to com- 
 mand other objects in exchange. Value, which is the 
 chief quality and requisite of wealth, and the universal 
 name for power in exchange, is the ratio existing be- 
 tween different commodities with reference to such 
 exchange. If a bushel of wheat will bring in exchange 
 two bushels of corn, the value of wheat, expressed in 
 corn, is as two to one, that is, wheat is worth twice as 
 much as corn; and the value of .corn expressed in 
 wheat is as one to two, or one half to one, that is, 
 corn is worth one half as much as wheat. 
 
 A chief requisite to the rating of wealth is that its 
 value should be susceptible of measurement not mere- 
 ly that kind of measurement which compares one article 
 or commodity with another, but a measurement which 
 may be generally stated in figures, and to which all val- 
 uable things shall alike be subject. For, while it would 
 be possible to make an equitable exchange of two com- 
 modities, as in the case of wheat and corn above given, 
 such a basis would not be generally effective in the 
 extended relations required by commerce. What is 
 requisite to know, is not merely the value of wheat in 
 corn, but the value of wheat or of corn, in any one of 
 a thousand different commodities; and this can be done 
 only by the use of an arbitrary measurement or stand- 
 ard which shall apply equally to all values, just as 
 the bushel measure applies equally to the quantity or
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.. 40.") 
 
 bulk of wheat, or of corn, or of any other measurable 
 commodity which it may contain. 
 
 Let us adopt such an arbitrary measure of value 
 and call it Dollar; and then let us suppose that a 
 bushel of wheat is equal in value, or is measured as 
 to its value, by the unit of this standard. It will then 
 occur that a bushel of wheat will be worth a dollar 
 and a dollar will be worth two bushels of corn. Now 
 make the dollar the measurer in both cases and we 
 have one bushel of wheat or two bushels of corn equal 
 in value to one dollar. Suppose, further, that a 
 bushel of wheat is exchangeable for three bushels of 
 potatoes. This fixes the value of potatoes, as ex- 
 pressed in wheat, at one third (that is, a bushel of 
 potatoes is worth a third of a bushel of wheat) and 
 the value of wheat, as expressed in potatoes, at three. 
 We have now another measure of value, or another 
 article sustaining a known relation to wheat, and con- 
 sequently to corn, and we are enabled on this basis to 
 promote a general exchange in the three articles with- 
 out the intervention of an arbitrary measure, and yet 
 the advantage of an extrinsic standard is positive, 
 even in these limited relations; for if we make the 
 dollar the measurer again, we have not only one 
 bushel of wheat, or two bushels of corn, but also three 
 bushels of potatoes equal in value to one dollar. 
 
 The advantage of the dollar measurement, as above 
 shown, lies in the facility it gives for adjusting the 
 value of unity of any commodity. And the value of 
 unity being fixed, the value of any number of units 
 of one commodity in any number of units of another 
 is readily computed. 
 
 To meet the best conditions of exchange, the meas- 
 urer of value should be itself a representative of the 
 value it measures and capable of going from hand to 
 hand in exchange for the thing measured. Though 
 not in itself the thing ultimately desired in exchange,
 
 K!l) THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 it must be capable of commanding that thing when- 
 ever it is wanted. It should, therefore, be something 
 which all holders of commodities will unhesitatingly 
 accept. To fill these requisites, it should be: 
 
 1. Imperishable, or as nearly so as possible, that 
 it may continue in use without sensible loss or depre- 
 ciation. 
 
 2. Portable, containing great value in small bulk. 
 
 3. Divisible to the farthest practicable extent, that 
 the smallest values may be suitably represented. 
 
 4. Uniform in quality and such that it may be 
 easily tested. 
 
 5. Untarnishable and pleasant to handle, that it 
 may be appreciated and desired to be held in posses- 
 sion. 
 
 6. Malleable, that it may be wrought into conve- 
 nient shapes and easily impressed. 
 
 7. Rare and difficult to obtain, that its relation to 
 other commodities may not be suddenly changed by 
 overproduction. 
 
 8. Sufficiently plentiful, that the quality accessible 
 may be readily adjusted to the healthy demands of 
 trade. 
 
 All these qualities inhere in gold and silver metal and 
 for this reason they have gradually become to be the 
 material out of which money is made. It will be said 
 that gold and silver, being useful commodities and 
 having an intrinsic value as such, are liable to fluctu- 
 ation, the same as other commodities, and on this ac- 
 count will become unreliable as a standard of measure- 
 ment. This would be true were it not that their uni- 
 versal recognition as the measure of value gives 
 them an exceptional position among commodities, and 
 arrests the natural tendency to respond at once to the 
 influences which affect other commodities through the 
 law of supply and demand. And, again, the increase 
 or diminution of gold and silver, even under extra-
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL 467 
 
 ordinary circumstances, daring any reasonably limited 
 period, is so gradual, as to create no apprehension of 
 sudden disturbances from readjustments. 
 
 The difficulty, however, of maintaining as equal 
 measures of value, two metals having distinct commer- 
 cial values and liable to constant variation relatively to 
 each other, is one that cannot be overlooked. It is a 
 recognized law of commerce as well as of finance that 
 commodities always seek the best market. Hence, 
 when the relative value between gold and silver as 
 money is such that either is worth more in the open 
 market, it will seek the more profitable field and cease 
 to circulate in the less profitable. To meet this diffi- 
 culty it is found necessary to recognize one metal as 
 the real standard, and by proper restrictions in coin- 
 age and legal tender attributes to keep the other in 
 fixed relations, thereto. Packard and Bryant. 
 
 LETTERS. 
 
 Mr. J. W. Smith, 
 
 San Francisco, Cal. 
 
 Dear Sir: In compliance with yours of the 2d inst. 
 we this day ship your order per American Express. 
 Please notify us by telegraph if the goods do not ar- 
 rive within a reasonable time. 
 
 Hoping that you will favor us again when in need 
 of anything in our line, we are, 
 
 Very respectfully, &c., 
 
 Mess. Hatfield & Jackson, 
 Cincinnati, O. 
 
 Gentlemen: AVe are in receipt of your favor of the 
 29th ult. containing draft for One hundred and fifty 
 and jVu Dollars (*15<'iVo ) and have placed the same to 
 your credit. 
 
 AVith thanks for the remittance and soliciting a con-
 
 468 THE PHOXOCiUAPHIC MAXUAL. 
 
 tinuance of your orders, which shall always have our 
 prompt attention, we remain, 
 
 Very truly, etc., 
 
 Mess. Wilson & Taylor, 
 Waco, Texas. 
 
 Gentlemen: Your favor of the 8th instant request- 
 ing quotations is at hand. In reply w r e will say that 
 we will furnish you the articles mentioned in the cata- 
 logue herewith and marked in red ink at 30 percent 
 discount from the list price. These rates are consid- 
 erably lower than the regular ones and we make them 
 in order to introduce our goods in your district. 
 Those checked in black ink are net, while the remain- 
 der are liable to fluctuate according to the market. 
 
 We hope that 3-011 will find these quotations satis- 
 factory and that we may receive an order from you at 
 an early date. 
 
 Yours very truly, 
 
 MAN'S MASTERY OVER NATURE. 
 
 The mastery of man over nature! This is an in- 
 spiring truth which we must not suffer from its famili- 
 arity to lose its force. By the might of his intellect, 
 man has not merely made the elephant his drudge, the 
 lion his diversion, the whale his magazine, but even 
 the subtlest and most terrible of the elements is the 
 submissive instrument of his will. He turns aside, or 
 garners up, the lightning; the rivers toil in his work- 
 shop; the tides of ocean bear his burdens; the hurricane 
 rages for his use and profit. 
 
 Fire and water struggle together that he may be 
 whisked over hill and valley with the celerity of the 
 sunbeam. The stillness of the forest midnight is 
 broken bv the snort of the iron horse as he drair-i the
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 469 
 
 long train from lakes to ocean with a slave's docility, 
 a giant's strength. Up the long hill he labors; by the 
 <leep glen he skims, the tops of the tall trees swaying 
 below his path; his sharp, quick breathing bespeaks 
 his impetuous progress; a stream of fire reflects his 
 course; on dashes the tireless steed, and the morrow's 
 sun shall find him standing in some far mart of com- 
 merce and the partakers of his wizard journey scattered 
 to their vocations of trade or pleasure, unthinking of 
 their night's adventure. What had old Romance 
 wherewith to match the every-day realities of the 
 nineteenth century! Horace Greeley. 
 
 OPPORTUNITY AND THE TRUE REFORMER. 
 
 To the rightly constituted mind, to the truly devel- 
 oped man, there always is, there always must be, 
 opportunity opportunity to be and to learn, nobly to 
 do and to endure; and what matter whether with pomp 
 and eclat, with sound of trumpets and shout of ap- 
 plauding thousands, or in silence and seclusion, be- 
 neath the calm, discerning gaze of heaven? No station 
 can be humble on which that gaze is approvingly bent; 
 no work can be ignoble which is performed uprightly 
 and not impelled by sordid and selfish aims. 
 
 Not from among the children of monarchs, ushered 
 into being with boom of cannon and shouts of revelling 
 millions, but from amid the sons of obscurity and toil, 
 cradeled in peril and ignominy, from the bulrushes 
 and the manger, come forth the benefactors and sa- 
 viors of mankind. So when all the babble and glare of 
 our age shall have passed into fitting oblivion, when 
 those who have enjoyed rare opportunities and swayed 
 vast empires and been borne through life on the 
 shoulders of shouting multitudes, shall have been laid 
 at last to rest in golden coffins, to molder forgotten, 
 the stately marble their only monuments, it will be
 
 470 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 found that some humble youth who hewed out his op- 
 portunities, has uttered the thought which shall render 
 the age memorable by extending the means of enlight- 
 enment and blessing to our race. 
 
 The great struggle for human progress and eleva- 
 tion proceeds noiselessly, often unnoted, often checked 
 and apparently baffled amid the clamorous and debas- 
 ing strifes of greedy selfishness and low ambition. In 
 that struggle maintained by the wise and good of all 
 ages bear ye the part of men. Heed the lofty sum- 
 mons and with souls serene and constant prepare to 
 tread boldly in the path of highest duty. So shall life 
 be to you truly exalted and heroic; so shall death bo ;i 
 transition neither sought nor dreaded; so shall your 
 memory, though cherished at first but by a few 
 humble, loving hearts, linger long and gratefully in 
 human remembrance, a watchword to the faithful and 
 an incitement to generous endeavor; freshened by the 
 proud tears of admiring affection and fragrant with the 
 odors of heaven. Horace Greeley. 
 
 THE SUN'S ENERGY. 
 
 Let us consider this energy in its familiar form of 
 the heat by which we live. How great is it? How 
 hot is iU 
 
 Before examining the degree of the sun's heat, let 
 us look a little into its amount. The sunheat falling 
 on one square mile corresponds to over 750 tons of 
 w r ater raised every minute from the freezing to the 
 boiling point. But there are 49 million square miles 
 in the cross-section of the earth exposed to the sun 
 and therefore in each minute its heat falling on tho 
 
 ~ 
 
 earth would raise to the boiling point 37 billion tons 
 of Avater. 
 
 We may express this in other ways: as by the 
 quantity of ice it would melt. And as the whole sur-
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 471 
 
 face of the earth, including the night side, is four 
 times the cross-section exposed to the sun, we find, by 
 taking 520, (KM) minutes to a year, that the sun's rays 
 would melt in a year, a coating of ice over the whole 
 earth more than 160 feet thick. 
 
 The amount of heat, therefore, which the sun sends 
 the earth in order to warm its oceans and make green 
 its continents is almost incomprehensible. But how 
 little this is to what passes vis by! The earth as it 
 moves on in its annual path continually comes into new 
 regions, where it finds the same amount of heat pour- 
 ing forth and which still continues to fall into the 
 empty space it has just quitted where it goes on in 
 what seems utter waste. If then, the whole annual 
 orbit were set close with globes like ours, each would 
 receive the same enormous amount the earth does now. 
 But this is not all; for not only along the orbit, but 
 above and below it does the sun set forth its heat, the 
 final amount being expressible in the number of worlds 
 'like ours that it could warm in the same manner, 
 which is two billion two hundred millions. 
 
 These numbers are, perhaps, too great to convey a 
 clear idea to the mind, but let us, before leaving them, 
 try to give an illustration of their significance in con- 
 nection with this stupendous outflow of the solar heat. 
 
 Let us suppose that we could gather up from the 
 earth all the ice and snow on its surface, including the 
 accumulations on its Arctic and Antarctic poles, and 
 build with it a tower fifteen miles in diameter and high 
 enough to exhaust our store. Imagine that it could 
 be preserved untouched by the sun's rays while we 
 built on w r ith the accumulations of successive winters 
 until it stretched 240,000 miles into space, forming an 
 ice bridge to the moon, and that we then concentrated 
 on it the sun's whole radiation such as it emits con- 
 tinually. In one second the whole would be gone 
 melted, boiled, dissipated in vapor.
 
 472 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 Again, the state of Pennsylvania is underlaid by 
 one of the richest coal fields of the world, capable of 
 supplying the consumption of the whole country at 
 its present rate for more than a thousand years to 
 come. If the source of the solar heat were withdrawn 
 and we could carry this coal to the solar furnace 
 and shoot it in fast enough to keep up the present 
 heat and radiation, the whole would be used up in 
 rather less than the one-thousandth of a second! Fur- 
 thermore, if the sun itself had originally been one 
 solid block of coal it would have burnt out completely 
 in less time than that in which man has occupied the 
 earth. Yet during historic times there has been no 
 noticeable diminution of the sun's heat, for the olive 
 and the vine grow to-day just as they did three 
 thousand years ago. 
 
 Having considered the amount of the sun's heat, let 
 us next examine the degree of its temperature. That 
 is, How hot is it 2 We can make the comparison be- 
 tween the heat from some artificially heated object and 
 that given out from an equal area of the sun's face, 
 so that we choose for comparison the hottest thine: we 
 can find on a scale large enough for the experiment. 
 
 Perhaps the highest temperature we can get on a 
 large scale in the arts is that of molten steel in the 
 Bessemer converter. The converter is an enormous 
 iron pot, lined with fire-brick and capable of holding 
 fifteen or twenty tons of melted metal. It is swung 
 on trunnions so that it can be raised by machinery to 
 a vertical position or lowered to pour its contents into 
 a caldron. First the empty converter is inclined and 
 seven tons and a half of fluid iron streams down into 
 its mouth from an adjacent furnace. It is then lifted 
 into an erect position and an air-blast from a blowing- 
 engine is forced in at the bottom through the liquid 
 iron which has combined with it nearly half a ton of 
 silicon and carbon -materials which with the oxygen
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 473 
 
 of the blast, create a heat which leaves that of the 
 already melted iron far behind. After some time the 
 converter is tipped forward and three-quarters of a 
 ton more of melted iron is added to that already in it. 
 What the temperature of this last is, may be judged 
 from the fact that although ordinary melted iron is 
 dazzlingly bright, the molten metal in the converter is 
 so much brighter still that the entering stream is, as it 
 were, dark brown by comparison, presenting a contrast 
 something like that of chocolate emptied into a white 
 cup. Looking now, from the front down into the in- 
 clined vessel, we see the almost blindingly bright inte- 
 rior dripping with the drainage of the metal down its 
 side while the circular mouth, which is twenty-four 
 inches in diameter, presents the effect of a disk of 
 molten metal of that size. The contents are now no 
 longer iron, but liquid steel, ready for pouring into 
 the caldron, which is done immediately; the stream of 
 falling metal, which continues nearly a minute, pre- 
 senting with its scintillations and intense brilliancy, 
 the appearance of a cataract of sunlight. 
 
 The pour is preceded by a shower of sparks of the 
 molten steel projected fully a hundred feet straight 
 from the open mouth of the converter. In the line of 
 this an apparatus was stationed in an open window, at 
 a place whence its view could be directed down into the 
 converter on one side and up at the sun on the other. 
 This apparatus consisted of a long photometer box 
 with a - "porte-lumiere" at one end. The mirror of this 
 reflected the sun's rays through the box and then on to 
 the pouring steel, tracing their way to it by a beam of 
 light visible through the dusty air. In the path of 
 this beam was placed the measuring apparatus, both 
 for heat and light, arranged in such a manner that the 
 effect (except for the absorption of its beams by the 
 atmosphere on the way) was independent of the size 
 or distance of the sun and depended on its absolute
 
 474 THE PHOM>',:::APHIC MANUAL. 
 
 initial radiation, being equivalent to aking a sample 
 piece of the sun's face of equal size with the fluid 
 metal, bringing them opposite each other and seeing 
 which was the hotter and brighter. The comparison, 
 however, was not impartial so far as the sun was con- 
 cerned, since its rays were to a certain extent absorbed, 
 as was said, by the atmosphere on the way. while those 
 of the furnace were not. Nevertheless, under these 
 circumstances the heat from any single square foot of 
 the sun's surface was found to be at least eighty-seven 
 times that . from a square foot of the molten steel, 
 while the light from the sun was proved to be, foot for 
 foot, over five thousand times that from the steel, 
 though the latter separately considered, seemed to be 
 of equal brilliancy. 
 
 We must not conclude from this that the teinp';r<nnr,- 
 of the sun was five thousand times that of the steel, 
 but we may be certain that it was a great deal the 
 higher of the two. It is probable from all experi- 
 ments made up to this date, that the solar temperature 
 is not less than 3,000 nor more than 30, 000 degrees of 
 the centigrade thermometer. S. P. Langley. 
 
 THE GREAT NORTHWESTERN SNOWFALL. 
 
 The soil of the wheat belt region receives no tonic 
 and stimulant of vegetation equal in power to the peri- 
 odic snowfalls of the winter season. The artificial 
 fertilizers of the farms and from the nitrate markets 
 are of far less value than the snows which cover the 
 ground and mantle the sources of vegetable growth. 
 
 Even a good and prolonged rain is less serviceable 
 than a fall of snow in fertilizing the soil. The atmos- 
 phere contains iu dust particles, in the floating remains 
 of pulverulent organic substances, in gases exhaled 
 from the earth or formed in the invisible laboratories
 
 THE PHOXOGKAP11IC MANUAL. 475 
 
 of nature fructifying elements which are brought 
 
 *e 
 
 down in showers of rain and aid vegetable 
 growths. 
 
 But the rain is much less effectual than the snow 
 in bringing the fertilizers in the atmosphere to the 
 ground. Through the descending columns of a sum- 
 mer shower the spaces not covered by watery spray 
 permit the escape of a vast proportion of the matter 
 floating in the air. Especially the volatile gases, 
 probably the most valuable part of the fertilizing 
 elements in the air, escape between the falling rain 
 drops and reascend to the upper atmospheric heights. 
 
 The snowfall descends like a blanket. It brings to 
 the earth all foreign elements in the air the dust, the 
 gases, the insect life, the floating drift of smoky par- 
 ticles from all the centers of industrial activity and 
 nothing escapes the comprehensive visitation. When 
 all this enormous wealth of fertilization is brought to 
 the earth under the snow, it remains there, sinking 
 into the crevices and pores of the soil, to form res- 
 ervoirs of fertility for the spring and summer to 
 follow. 
 
 This constitutes the value of the snowfall in the 
 belts where wheat and other grain products of the 
 temperate zone are cultivated. It covers the earth and 
 mantles its treasures of fecundity. It is a promise 
 of the appearance of the harvest at the appointed 
 time. The winter snows are an assurance against the 
 most deleterious effects of the summer drouths. They 
 are the prophecy of the harvest and foretell the abund- 
 ance of its fulfilment. The Chicago Chronicle. 
 
 TRUTH. 
 
 Force of thought may be put forth to weave a web 
 of sophistry, to make the Avorse appear the better 
 cause. But energy of thought so employed is sui-
 
 iTtj . THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 cidal. The intellect becomes not only degraded but 
 diseased and loses the capacity of distinguishing truth 
 from falsehood, good from evil, right from wrong. 
 Woe to that mind which wants the love of truth ! For 
 want of this genius has been a scourge to the world; 
 its breath a poisonous exhalation; its brightness a de- 
 coy into the paths of pestilence and death. Truth is 
 the light of the Infinite mind and the image of God in 
 his creatures. Nothing endures but truth. The dreams, 
 fictions, theories which men would substitute for it, 
 soon die. Without its guidance, effort is vain and 
 hope baseless. Accordingly, the love of truth, a de- 
 liberate purpose to seek it and hold it fast, may be 
 considered as the very foundation of human culture 
 and dignity. Precious as thought is., the love of truth 
 is still more precious; for without it thought wanders 
 and wastes itself and precipitates men into misery. 
 Channing. 
 
 MEN ALWAYS FIT FOR FREEDOM. 
 
 There is only one cure for the evils which newly ac- 
 quired freedom produces and that cure is freedom! 
 When a prisoner leaves his cell, he can not bear the 
 light of day; he is unable to discriminate colors or 
 recognize faces; but the remedy is not to remand him 
 into his dungeon, but to accustom him to the rays of 
 the sun. The blaze of truth and liberty may at first 
 dazzle and bewilder nations which have become half 
 blind in the house of bondage; but let them gaze on 
 and they will soon be able to bear it. In a few years 
 men learn to reason; the extreme violence of opinion 
 subsides; hostile theories correct each other; the scat- 
 tered elements of truth cease to conflict and begin to 
 coalesce; and, at length, a system of justice and order 
 is educed out of the chaos. Many politicians of our 
 time are in the habit of laying it down as a self-evident
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL 177 
 
 proposition, that no people ought to be free till they 
 are lit to use their freedom. The maxim is worthy of 
 the person in the story, who resolved not to go into 
 the water till he had learned to swim. If men are to 
 wait for liberty till they become wise and good in 
 slavery, they may, indeed, wait forever. Macaulay. 
 
 FIDELITY TO THE CONSTITUTION. 
 
 If an honest, and I may truly affirm, a laborious zeal 
 for the public service has given me any weight in your 
 esteem, let me exhort and conjure you never to suffer 
 an invasion of your political constitution, however 
 minute the instance may appear, to pass by without 
 a determined, persevering resistance. One precedent 
 creates another. They soon accumulate and constitute 
 law. What yesterday was fact, to-day is doctrine. 
 Examples are supposed to justify the most dangerous 
 measures; and where they do not suit exactly, the de- 
 fect is supplied by analogy. Be assured, that the laws 
 which protect us in our civil rights grow out of the 
 constitution, and that they must fall or flourish with 
 it. Junius. 
 
 EARLY RISING. 
 
 Early rising is considered by some to be a vulgar 
 practice. Those who say so have perused the bio- 
 graphies of great men with little attention. It is in- 
 disputable that few ever lived to a great age, and 
 fewer still ever became distinguished who were not in 
 the habit of early rising. You rise late and of course 
 get about your business at a late hour and everything 
 goes wrong all day. Franklin sayc that ' 'He who rises 
 late must run all day and not overtake his business at 
 night." Dean Swift avers that he never knew a man 
 come to greatness and eminence who lay in bed in the
 
 US THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL 
 
 morning. We believe that with other degenerations 
 of our days, history will prove that late rising is a 
 very prominent one. There seems to be no\v a ten- 
 dency among certain persons to turn day into night 
 to breakfast late, dine late and go to bed late and con- 
 sequently to rise late. To a certain extent people 
 must do as others do; nevertheless, every one is more 
 or less able to act with something like independence of 
 principle; the young those who have everything to 
 learn can at least act upon a plan rising at an early 
 hour. 
 
 In order to rise early we would recommend an early 
 'hour for retiring. There are many other reasons for 
 this; neither your eyes nor health are so likely to be 
 injured. Let it be a rule with you, and if possible 
 adhered to, that you will be at home and have your light 
 extinguished by a quarter to ten o'clock in the evening. 
 You may then rise at six and have eight hours sleep, 
 which is about what nature requires. It may be most 
 confidently affirmed that he who from his youth is in 
 the habit of rising early, will be much more likely to 
 live to old age, more likely to be a distinguished and 
 useful man and more likely to pass a life that is pleas- 
 ant. Chamber's Miscellany. 
 
 SELF-CULTURE. 
 
 "Every person has two educations: one which he receives 
 from others, and one, more important, which he gives to him- 
 self." Gibbon. 
 
 It is astonishing how much may be accomplished in 
 self-culture by the energetic and persevering who are 
 careful to avail themselves of opportunities, and use 
 up the fragments of spare time which the idle permit 
 to run to waste. Thus Ferguson learned astronomy 
 from the heavens while tending sheep on the highland 
 hills; Stone learned mathematics while working us a
 
 Till" PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 479 
 
 journey-man gardener; Drew studied the highest philos- 
 ophy in the intervals of cobbling shoes and Hugh Mil- 
 ler taught himself geology while working as a day 
 laborer in a quarry, liy bringing their minds to bear 
 upon knowledge in its various aspects, and carefully 
 using up the very odds and ends of their time, men 
 such as these reached the highest culture, and acquired 
 honorable distinction among their fellow men. 
 
 Sir Joshua Reynolds was an earnest believer in the 
 power of industry and held that all men might achieve 
 excellence if they would but exercise the power of assid- 
 uous and patient working. He held that drudgery was 
 on the road to genius and that there were hardly any 
 limits to the proficiency of an artist except the limits 
 of his own painstaking. He would not believe in con- 
 tinual inspiration but mostly in study and labor. ' 'Ex- 
 cellence,'' he said, "is seldom granted to a man but as 
 the reward of labor. Whether you have great or 
 moderate abilities industry will improve them." Sir 
 Fowell Buxton, who labored in a different field, was an 
 equal believer in the power of study and placed his 
 greatest confidence in extraordinary application. And 
 it is unquestionably true that the men of the highest 
 genius have invariably been found to be among the 
 most plodding, hard-working and intent men their 
 chief characteristic apparently consisting simply in 
 their power of laboring more intensely and efficiently 
 than others. -Samuel Smiles. 
 
 SELF-RESPECT. 
 
 Self-discipline and self-control are the beginnings of 
 practical wisdom and these must have their root in 
 self-respect. Hope springs from it hope, which is 
 the companion of power and the mother of success. 
 Every one may say "To respect myself, to develop 
 myself this is my true duty in life. An integral and
 
 480 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL 
 
 responsible part of the great system of society, I owe 
 to society and to its Author not to degrade nor destroy 
 my body, mind nor instincts. On the contrary, I am 
 bound to the best of my power to give those parts of 
 my nature the highest degree of perfection possible. 
 And as I respect my own nature so am I equally bound 
 to respect others, as they on their part are bound to 
 respect me. " 
 
 Self-respect is the noblest garment with which a 
 man may clothe himself the most elevating feeling 
 with which the mind can be inspired. This sentiment 
 carried into daily life will be found at the root of all 
 the virtues. "The just honoring of ourselves," said 
 Milton, "may be thought the fountain head from 
 whence every worthy enterprise issues forth. " Every 
 one may be sustained by the proper indulgence of 
 this feeling and be lifted and lighted up by it. 
 Samuel Smiles. 
 
 THE KNOCKING AT THE GATE IN MACBETH. 
 
 From my boyish days I had always felt a great per- 
 plexity on one point in Macbeth. It was this: the 
 knocking at the gate, which succeeds to the murder of 
 Duncan, produced to my feelings an effect for which 
 I never could account. The effect was, that it reflected 
 back upon the murder a peculiar awfulnessand a depth 
 of solemnity; yet, however obstinately I endeavored 
 with my understanding to comprehend this, for many 
 years I never could see why it should produce such an 
 effect. 
 
 Here I pause for one moment to exnort the reader 
 never to pay any attention to his understanding, when 
 it places itself in opposition to any other faculty of 
 his mind. The mere understanding, however useful 
 and indispensible, is the meanest faculty we have and 
 the most to be distrusted; and yet the great majority
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 481 
 
 of people trust to nothing else; which may do for or- 
 dinary life, but not for philosophy. 
 
 But to return from this digression, my understand- 
 ing could furnish no reason why the knocking at the 
 gate should produce any effect direct or reflected. In 
 fact, my understanding said positively that it could 
 'not produce any effect. But I knew better; I felt that 
 it did; and I waited and clung to the problem until 
 further knowledge should enable me to solve the inci- 
 dent which the genius of Shakespeare has invented 
 and I at length did so to my own satisfaction, and my 
 solution is this: 
 
 In Macbeth, with his enormous and teeming faculty 
 of creation, Shakespeare has introduced two murderers 
 Macbeth and his wife. Furthermore, we have the 
 unoffending nature of the victim, 'the gracious Dun- 
 can'- and with this 'the deep damnation of his taking 
 off;' and immediately afterward comes the expedient 
 under consideration to which I now solicit the 
 reader's attention. 
 
 At no moment is the sense of the complete suspen- 
 sion and pause in ordinary human concerns so full and 
 affecting as at that moment when suspension ceases 
 and the goings-on of the ordinary human life are sud- 
 denly resumed. All action in any direction is best 
 expounded, measured and made apprehensible by reac- 
 tion. Now apply this to the case of Macbeth. Here 
 another world has stepped in and we are made sensible 
 that the world of ordinary life is suddenly arrested 
 laid asleep tranced racked into a dread armistice 
 withdrawn into a deep syncope and suspension. 
 Hence it is that when the deed is done, when the work 
 of darkness is perfect, then the knocking at the gale 
 is heard; and it makes known audibly that the reaction 
 has commenced; the pulses of life are beginning to 
 beat again; and the re-establishment of the goings-on
 
 482 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 of the ordinary world first makes us profoundly sen- 
 sible of the awful parenthesis that had suspended 
 them. 
 
 O, mighty poet! Thy works are not as those of 
 other men, simply and merely great works of art; but 
 are also like the phenomena of nature, like the sun 
 and the sea, the stars and the flowers like frost and 
 snow, rain and dew, hail-storm and thunder, which 
 are to he studied in the perfect faith that in them 
 there can be no too much or too little, nothing useless 
 or inert but that, the further we press in our discov- 
 eries, the more we shall see proofs of design and self- 
 supporting arrangement where the careless eye had 
 seen nothing but accident and confusion. De Quincey. 
 
 PHONETIC SPELLING AND THE COMMON 
 SPELLING. 
 
 If we draw a comparison between phonetic spelling 
 and the common spelling, we find that the two points in 
 which they agree are in the endeavor to express the 
 sounds of our language by certain signs. But here 
 the parallelism ceases, for in regard to nearly every- 
 thing else there is a total inequality between them. 
 For while phonetic spelling investigates the elementary 
 sounds of the language and gives a distinct sign for 
 each sound the other employs the few characters used 
 by our ancestors. Hence much confusion is produced 
 by using the same sign for several different sounds. 
 As a result years are required to learn what utterance 
 is called for in a particular letter. 
 
 They who have toiled through years of labor in sim- 
 ply learning to spell may well complain of their tribu- 
 lations. Phonographers, however, perceive that the 
 time is near when the intricacies of the common spell- 
 ing shall be abandoned for the simplicity of the pho- 
 netic one. Phonography and its sister arts phonoscript
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 48'.} 
 
 and phonotypy are thus destined to take the place of 
 the former. We shall then see words always written 
 in accordance with their pronunciation so that no one 
 need consult- a dictionary to ascertain how a word is 
 spelled. If phonographers are firm in pressing the 
 claims of phonography, phonoscript and phonotypy upon 
 the consideration of the public these arts will soon be- 
 come universal the more so as they are not experi- 
 ments but practical methods which must be adopted just 
 as soon as they become known. Adapted from James 
 C. Booth. 
 
 PHONOGRAPHERS AND PHONETIC SPELLING. 
 
 Every phonographer should be able to write and read 
 phonoscript and- phonotypy with the same facility as 
 the ordinary script and print. To do this all that is 
 necessary is to master the phonoscript and phonotypic 
 alphabets ( which can be done by any phonographer in 
 from a few minutes to half an hour) and follow the 
 rules for phonetic spelling presented in the preceding 
 pages of this book. He will then possess an accom- 
 plishment which, while it cost him but little effort, will 
 ever after be invaluable. 
 
 [The following- paragraph contains all the sounds of the Eng- 
 lish language and is from the example in phonetic spelling in 
 "A System of Phonoscript and Phonotypv," page 91. (See page 
 
 28.)] 
 
 THE PHONOSCRIPT AND PHONOTYPIC 
 ALPHABETS. 
 
 By the phonoscript and phonotypic alphabets any 
 person, old or young, may be taught to write and read 
 in three months ay, often in forty hours instruction 
 tasks which are seldom accomplished in three years of
 
 484 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANTAT.. 
 
 great toil by the old alphabets. Every person, there- 
 fore, who is interested in the acquisition and diffusion 
 of knowledge, should not fail to employ these alphabets 
 at once. 
 
 DIRECTIONS FOR ATTAINING SPEED. 
 
 593. When the learner has mastered the preceding 
 reporting exercises, as directed in section 592, he should 
 rewrite them from dictation until they can lie taken at 
 an average of about 150 words a minute. He should 
 then take extracts from a newspaper or book. Should 
 he now meet with a strange word or one for which he 
 does not remember the contraction he should not stop 
 to deliberate but simply write it in full and look up the 
 proper form, if necessary, afterwards. When he can 
 write about 150 words a minute from new matter and 
 read his notes correctly he will be prepared to begin 
 general reporting. 
 
 594. The learner will at first find it somewhat diffi- 
 cult to read phonography because he has been giving 
 his attention more to writing than reading. If, how- 
 ever, he frequently reviews what he writes this diffi- 
 culty will soon disappear. Finally the learner is ad- 
 vised that speed will gradually increase with expe- 
 rience. Great manual dexterity is, of course, the result 
 of great practice and can be attained only by writing 
 from dictation or speech. (See also sec. 516. ) To 
 gain speed it is better to write one article fifty times 
 than fifty articles once each. The same remark applies 
 to reading. Furthermore, both the writing and reading 
 should mostly be from matter pertaining to the line of 
 business or pursuit in which the learner intends to de- 
 vote his efforts. When he has arrived at the full 
 limit of his speed he will be able to write, when neces- 
 sary, at an average of about 200 words a minute, and 
 in spurts anywhere above that rate to 275 and over.
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 485 
 
 595. In conclusion, the learner is reminded (see 
 sec. 518) that only experience in any kind of report- 
 ing will render him proficient in it, no matter what his 
 speed may be in other respects. Thus, for example, 
 he might be able to write two or three hundred words 
 a minute from dictation and yet break down com- 
 pletely in actual examination and testimony or a speech 
 or debate running at less than half that speed. No- 
 thing but experience in such proceedings, therefore, will 
 ever make him skilled in them. The same remark 
 applies to every other branch of reporting. Neverthe- 
 less the learner will reach the goal much sooner if he 
 has proper preparation beforehand, as directed above, 
 than if he enters on actual reporting without it. 
 
 STENOTYPIC CONNECTED MATTER. 
 
 5 Dti. Phonographic connected matter, with or with- 
 out vowels, may be indicated in stenotypy, in which 
 case the following rules are adopted: 
 
 a. Small logographs and their alternates are spelled 
 oat, their positions being unmarked unless they are 
 Avritten in the zero or fourth position. 
 
 b. When a vowel or word has two or more signs 
 the regular form is in roman and the alternates, ex- 
 cept I and i (Ptoid and Ttoid), in italic; thus, a (Ktoid); 
 ft (Rtoid); the (Ctoid); the (Rtoid); He (left semicircle); 
 he ( Jtoidi; lie (Rtoid); i (right semicircle); I (Ptoid); 
 i (Ttoid); / (Ktoid); on (Ttoid), on (tf/itoid); all (Ftoid); 
 //// (L). 
 
 c. The Ptoid sign for "a" is represented by a and 
 the Ttoid one by a. 
 
 d. The dot sign for "the" is spelled in small caps: 
 THE. 
 
 e. The words u new, anew, knew" and "now" are 
 spelled out. 
 
 f. Figures are written and denominations abbre-
 
 486 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 
 
 viated as usual; thus, 40d., 20c., lOOp., 10s., 
 5 4' 15". 
 
 g. Stem logographs, and also semigraphs and 
 brevigraphs, are un vocalized. 
 
 h. In all other respects the stenotypy is the same 
 as when unconnected. 
 
 597. In the Vocalized Style of phonographic (and 
 thus of stenotypic) connected matter, all words are 
 vocalized except logographs, semigraphs and brevi- 
 graphs. Also usually no phrases are employed. ' Ac- 
 cordingly the Ing and Con dots and Ing stem are usu- 
 ally inserted. 
 
 598. In the Unvocalized or Keporting Style all 
 words are unvocalized except vocagraphs and words 
 needing special distinction; phrasing being employed 
 and the Ing and Con dots and Ing stem being usually 
 omitted. 
 
 599. In all cases punctuation marks are the same 
 as in regular print except when they might interfere 
 with the stenotypy. Emphasis is denoted by a 
 straight line under the letter or word to be empha- 
 sized. 
 
 600. The following is an example of the Unvocal- 
 ized or Reporting Style of stenotypy and represents 
 the first paragraph on page 463. 
 
 THE EIGHT OF FREE DISCUSSION. 
 
 601. Mp 1 as-z-D'Mt'DsKs on-all PrP Kshns the- 
 PLS'.Zhrs 3 T 3 PrsNt PRSt Ts stL'MrMp'MnTn-the 
 Rt 1 sC DsKshn Nts 1 Fl Jst 4 KsTnt, sNtMnts LtL 
 sPrXg P now 4 Gr'FshnB MKt NssR B 3 sPlsT o/i-Dhs- 
 Pnt. the-Mr Pr'sV-a DsPss/mi CK-the Frt'M NK\\ " 
 B 1 sTrfGnt NsTshn 4 PrTnss, Me-F^Mr ShB-the Tn 
 NC Sh SRt ^-Fr 4 R-the Nr NC Sh KsRss T.
 
 INDEX. 
 
 SECTION. 
 
 Accent 1 42 
 
 Affixes 314-344 
 
 Alphabet, Phonographic. ..page 17 
 Angles at which the letters are 
 
 made page 26 
 
 Appendages 226 
 
 Attachments 224 
 
 Bible References 567-570 
 
 Breathings, page 
 
 11, 26-29, 39, 49, 66 71, 197, 198, 361 
 Brevigraphs, 389, 405-407, 411, 518, 519 
 Directions for form- 
 ing 410 
 
 Lists of 408,409, 412 
 
 By space between figures 515 
 
 Capitals 134, 137, 144 
 
 Ch and upward R 17 
 
 Circle, Ns or Nss 201, 204 
 
 S ...82 92, 111, 127, 172, 184-198 
 
 " Ss initial 103108,194, 195 
 
 final or medial 109-1 17,277,a 
 Colloquial phrases, "did n't," etc 476 
 Compound words beginning with 
 
 S 105 
 
 Consonants and Vowels, Nature 
 
 of.... 55 
 
 R and L double. . .159, 160 
 
 " single 161 
 
 Rough 2 
 
 S double 90 
 
 S treble, etc 188-193 
 
 Smooth 1 
 
 W and Y dou- 
 ble 159, 172-177 
 
 Z double 82, 90, a, 93 
 
 Curl, N 298, 299 
 
 " Shun 217,219,246 
 
 Curvet, Lene 27, a, 39, 76, 81 
 
 Decimals 554, 555 
 
 Degrees 563, 564 
 
 Derivatives 104, 106, 107, 344, 369 
 
 Diphthongs, Rough 37 
 
 Smooth 34 
 
 Distinction (see Emphasis) .... 144, a 
 
 Dot, Long Vowel 39 
 
 pots, Breath 26, 39, 49 
 
 E 
 
 SECTION. 
 
 Emphasis (see Distinction) 144, b 
 
 Exercises, Lessons and. ... page 23 
 
 " " Directions 
 for learning. . .page 25 
 " Lessons and, Elemen- 
 
 tary style reading. .p 133 
 " Lessons and, Elemen- 
 tary style writing., p 171 
 
 Reporting 591 
 
 " style read- 
 ing p. 443 
 
 style writ- 
 ing page 463 
 
 F 
 
 Feet and inches 562 
 
 Figures, etc 528-532 
 
 Foreign consonants 25 
 
 " vowels, 56 
 
 Fourth position, 504 
 
 H 
 
 Half lengths not written or join- 
 ed in certain cases, 267-269 
 
 Halved curved letters without 
 
 angles, Junctions of. . . 265 
 
 Mp 251 
 
 Ng 252 
 
 " T or D not joined to VV, 
 
 Fr, T or Y 273 
 
 Halved, W and Y . 253 
 
 Halving, Final syllable Ed. . . .270-274 
 " Present and past tenses 
 usually written with 
 the same form in cer- 
 tain cases 274 
 
 " principle 244 280 
 
 " S halved after a hook 
 
 on a halved curve 277 
 
 " St and Nst loops 
 
 added 275, 276 
 
 " T or D added indis- 
 criminately by 244 247 
 
 Homographs, 389, 391, 411 
 
 Lists of 393,394, 412 
 
 Hook F 206-208 
 
 Large W 172-177 
 
 " N, 199-205 
 
 " Shun 214 216 
 
 " Ss and St prefixed to R 
 
 hook on straight stems. . 194 
 
 487
 
 488 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 SECTION. 
 
 Hook Ss prefixed to L hook on 
 
 final upward R 195 
 
 " Ter 209-213 
 
 Hooks Downward R and L final. 
 
 etc 221 
 
 " generally written medi- 
 ally when possible 228 
 " H ticks joined to initial 
 
 hook stems 196, 197 
 
 Imperfect initial, etc 183 
 
 on tick logographs 4rt8, 469 
 
 RandL 151-170 
 
 " " hooks on M. .161, 170 
 " " " " " Mp and 
 
 Ng 157, 158, 169", 170 
 
 S prefixed to initial... 184. 187 
 
 Small Wand Y 178-183 
 
 Hours 565 
 
 Ington 323 
 
 Initials of proper names 134, 135 
 
 Italics 137, 144 
 
 Itself 477, a 
 
 L. Downward and up- 
 ward 12. 15, 16, 229, 235-239 
 
 " Final or medial, halved 260-262 
 
 " Lone or initial, halved .. 257 -259, 262 
 
 " Upward, after final hooks 240 
 
 Legibility of print, script, and 
 
 phonography page 30 
 
 Lengthened W and Y 285 
 
 Lengthening, Present and past 
 tenses usu ally 
 written with 
 the same forms . 287 
 
 principle 282-292 
 
 Words ending in 
 
 Ntr or Ndr 286 
 
 Lesson, 1, 29; 2, 30; 3. 32; 4, 34; 5, 
 39; 6, 48; 7,58; 8,60; 9,64; 10,67; 
 11,68; 12,79; 13, 87; 14. 91; 15, 93; 
 16, 9*; 17, 98; 18, 100; 19, 102; 20, 
 106:21, 107; 22, 112; 23, 116; 24, 
 121; 25, 124; 26, 125; 27, 1:29; 28, 
 207; 29, 222; 30, 230; 31, 236; 32, 
 238; 33, 241; 31, 265; 35, 281; 36, 
 296; 37, 304; 38, 319; 39. 334; 40, 
 344; 41,354; 42, 359; 4:{, 363; 44, 
 369; 45, 376; 46, 3*2; 47, 385; 48, 
 3U2: 49, 401; 50, 410; 51, 419; 52, 
 425; 53, 429; 54, 431; 55, 434; 56, 437 
 
 Lessons and exercises page 23 
 
 " " " Directions 
 
 for learning. . . page 25 
 " and exercises, Element- 
 ary style reading p 133 
 
 " and exercises, Element- 
 ary style writing 171 
 
 Logographs 362-380, 41 1 
 
 " General 379 
 
 Lists of 381, 412 
 
 Special 517-519 
 
 Long and short outlines 292 
 
 SECTION. 
 
 Loop, Final or medial 
 
 St 125-129, 275. 279 
 
 " Final or medial Sir. ..130-133 
 
 " Initial St 122-124.194 
 
 " NstorNstr..203,204,276, 278, 279 
 ' St written alone 355 
 
 Ly, Termination in certain art- 
 verbs .... 367, 390 
 
 M 
 
 Materials for writing page 24 
 
 Method of holding the pen or 
 pencil page 25 
 
 Mp halved 251 
 
 " Double length 2*3 
 
 " not followed by R or L 171 
 
 Minutes 563, 565 
 
 N 
 
 Negatives 345 
 
 Nghalved 252 
 
 " Double length 283, a 
 
 " Single " 53 
 
 Numbers before other words than 
 hundreds, etc., and 
 
 money 542 
 
 " before the words hun- 
 dreds, etc., and 
 
 money 534-541 
 
 " Cardinal and ordi- 
 nal 546-553 
 
 " Common fractions and 
 
 mixed 556-561 
 
 " Decimal fractions and 
 
 mixed 554 
 
 " One, three, six and 
 twelve occurring 
 
 alone 533 
 
 " Ten, twenty, thirty, 
 
 etc 543-545 
 
 Numerical and other denomina- 
 tions 571 
 
 O 
 Omissions, 60, b, 293, d, 320, 
 
 344,a. 348. 350.485-489, 497 
 of medial T. K or 
 
 G, Nand W 348 
 
 " of vowels and diph- 
 thongs 350 
 
 Or space and position 512 
 
 Ought 483 
 
 Outlines, Best 108, 292 
 
 Phonetic Spelling. p 27, 97, pp 482. 483 
 
 Phraseography % . . 419-527 
 
 can and come 5U3 
 Caution in re- 
 gard to 511, 516 
 
 ' Colloquials, "did 
 
 n't," etc 476 
 
 " Cm, Cn, Km or 
 
 Kn 496-502 
 
 " defined 420. b
 
 INDEX. 
 
 489 
 
 SECTION. 
 Phraseography Fourth position. 504 
 
 From to 491 
 
 Halving 470-477 
 
 Hooks and cir- 
 cles attached to 
 tick 1 o g o - 
 graphs. ...468. 469 
 " Hooks, etc ... .45.1-469 
 
 ' Ing 492-495 
 
 " Intersect ed 
 
 phrases 520 
 " Irregular phra- 
 ses 479 
 
 " Joined and con- 
 structed phra- 
 ses 526 
 
 " Joined and con- 
 structed phra- 
 ses. List of 527 
 
 " Juxtaposi- 
 tion 490-503 
 
 " Lengthening 478 
 
 " Of the 490 
 
 Omissions . .485-489 
 Or space and 
 
 position, 484 
 
 Ought 483 
 
 " Phraseo- 
 
 graph8 521, 522 
 
 " Phraseographs 
 
 List of 523 
 
 8 circle 445, 446 
 
 Special phrases, 
 log ogr aphs 
 and brevi- 
 
 graphs 517-519 
 
 Ss circle 447,448 
 
 " St loop 449-451 
 
 8tr " 452-454 
 
 Techniphrases 
 and techni- 
 
 graphs 517-519 
 
 "Than" after 
 circles on 
 right curves. . . 467 
 Ticks, semicir- 
 cles, etc.... 421-444 
 
 " To or too 490 
 
 " Well 488 
 
 "What" distin- 
 guished 482 
 
 Words distin- 
 guished by vo- 
 calization or 
 variation ..480, 481 
 " Zero posi- 
 tion 508, 509 
 
 Phraseographs, Small 524 
 
 " List of.... 525 
 
 Stem 521, 522 
 
 " List of 683 
 
 Phrases, General 517 
 
 " Intersected 520 
 
 " Joined and constructed 526 
 
 List of 527 
 
 Special 517-619 
 
 SECTION. 
 
 Plurals 814, 368, 546-553 
 
 PoBition ...4,7,44,284,351-359, 384-3S8 
 " Caution in regard to 
 
 writing in 359. 51 1 
 
 Possessive 368 
 
 Prefixes 293-3H 
 
 Prependages 226 
 
 Punctuation and other 
 
 marks 136-150 
 
 R 
 
 R, Downward and up- 
 ward 12, 17, 229-234 
 
 " Final or medial, halved... .260-262 
 " Lone or inital, halved, 257-259, 262 
 
 " Upward, after final hooks 233 
 
 " " joined to a follow- 
 ing M 22 
 
 Reporting trials, hearings, 
 etc 581-587 
 
 S 
 
 S halved and written upward 254 
 
 ' When to use the stem 118-120 
 
 Seconds 563, 565 
 
 Self or selves, 304-306, 341, 464, 
 
 465 468, g,h 
 
 Semigraphs 383 
 
 Sh, Downward and up- 
 ward 18, 229, 240-243 
 
 Sh, Downward and upward, 
 
 halved 263-264 
 
 Significant marks, etc 572-579 
 
 Size of the phonographic let- 
 ters page 26, 31, 136 
 
 Sound of o in odd 54, a 
 
 Speed, Directions for attain- 
 ing 693-595 
 
 Spirit! page 1 1 
 
 Stems joined without angles 21 
 
 " standing alone or joined.. 4 
 
 " written on the line 4 
 
 Stenoscript and steuotypy. .p. 23, 97 
 Stenotypic connected mat- 
 ter , 596-601 
 
 Straight and curved stems joined 
 
 at right angles 20 
 
 Superiors 46, 149, 357 
 
 T, Stem used after two vowels. . . 249 
 Table of punctuation and other 
 
 marks .- 137 
 
 Techniphrases and techni- 
 
 graphs 517 519 
 
 Tenses, Present and past usually 
 written with same form in cer- 
 tain cases 274. 287, 365, 390 
 
 Ticks, Breath 27, 28, 76-81, 196-198 
 
 " in phrases 421-444 
 
 Tive or lively, Words ending in.. 280 
 
 Tl and Dl, Words ending in 281 
 
 To space between figures 514 
 
 Transcribing trials, hearings, 
 etc 588-590
 
 4JMI 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 SECTION. 
 
 Transcription of a speech, etc., 580 
 Type, Heavy face page 23, 144, a 
 
 Variaerraphs, 389, 395, 39, 41 1 
 
 Lists of 397,398, 412 
 
 Various expedients 478-571 
 
 Vocabulary .. 418 
 
 " Prefatory remarks 
 
 on the 413-417 
 
 Vocagraphs 389, 399-402, 41 1 
 
 403,404, 412 
 
 Vocalization 45 
 
 ' of stems having S 
 
 circle 98-102 
 
 " of the large cir- 
 cle, 103, .1 109 
 
 " of the R and L 
 
 hooked stems 164-167 
 
 Vowel, protean 166 
 
 scale 351 
 
 Vowels, alternati ve forms 32 
 
 " and consonants, Nature 
 
 of 5i 
 
 Vowels, Joined 41 
 
 " Rough 36 
 
 " Smooth 30 
 
 " Written in position 355 
 
 " " on the line ... 44, 355 
 
 SECTION. 
 
 W halved 253 
 
 ' lengthened 285 
 
 " Nature of 29 
 
 " Semivowel or semiconsonant, 57 
 Small alternative form 
 
 for 60-62, 360 
 
 ' used f or K 11-14 
 
 " "Well" 488 
 
 ' "What" distinguished 482 
 
 Y and upward L 15 
 
 " halved ... 253 
 
 " lengi hened 25 
 
 " Nature of 29 
 
 Semivowel or semioonsonant, 5" 
 " Small alternative form 
 
 for 60-62, 360 
 
 " used for L 11-14 
 
 " before u employed only after 
 labials and back linguals 63 
 
 Z. When louse the stem 121 
 
 " Initial circle employed In Z 
 
 double consonants 82, 90, a, 93 
 
 Zero position 508, 50V
 
 "Phonetic spelling when it comes will coine like the deluge." Anonymous. 
 
 A SYSTEM: OK 
 
 PHONOSCRIPT AND PHONOTYPY. 
 
 BY CHARLES MORRELL,. 
 
 Contains (in addition to the explanatory text in common print) tne 
 pbonoscript and phonotypic alphabets and 14 pages of phonoscript and 
 phonotypic examples, by means of which any one can, in a few hours, learn 
 to write and read phonetically with the same facility as in the ordinary 
 orthography. 
 
 The spelling is the same as in phonography. Every phonographer and 
 spelling reformer, therefore, should be acquainted with this work. Fourth 
 edition, 108 pages. Paper. Price, .25; postpaid. .28. 
 
 who are already acquainted with the above pamphlet may, 
 if they prefer, write all communications to the Ve on any subject in phono- 
 script including the address on the envelope. If, however, the address of 
 the sender is very peculiar it should be in the ordinary spelling. 
 
 "To satisfy myself how easy the system is to write I have, as you see, 
 written this letter in 'it. What impresses me most favorably is that it is so 
 practical." A. B. Lennox, a superior stenographer. 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL 
 
 BY CHARLES IVLORRELL. 
 
 Comprises both the Elementary and Reporting Styles with many im- 
 provements. Also solves the Aspirate Problem. Adapted to the use of 
 schools and to self-instruction. 490 pages including an extensive vocabu- 
 lary and numerous engraved exercises with key. Elegantly bound in cloth 
 wuh gilt side-title. Price, $2.00; postpaid, &J.10. 
 
 Liberal discount to teachers and schools. Circulars free. 
 
 Address, THE /WORRELL VE, 
 
 CHICAGO, ILL.